Programme Specification
BS BSc (Hons) Accounting and Financial Management (2017 entry)
Academic Year: 2017/18
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at 天堂视频 (available soon)
- What makes 天堂视频 programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | 天堂视频 |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | School of Business and Economics |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | The programme is accredited by professional accounting bodies. Exemptions from some professional accounting examinations are available from: The Association of Chartered Certified Accountants (ACCA); The Chartered Institute of Management Accountants (CIMA), The Association of International Accountants (AIA) and The Institute of Chartered Accountants in England and Wales (ICAEW). In order to qualify for the professional institutes’ examination exemptions offered to graduates from this degree, candiates must achieve minimum module marks stipulated by these bodies which, in some cases, exceed the minimum marks required for progression and degree award. Up to date information may be obtained from the relevant professional bodies. |
Final award | BSc / BSc + DIS/ BSc + DInts |
Programme title | Accounting and Financial Management |
Programme code | BSUB10 |
Length of programme | The duration of the programmes is six semesters, plus one academic year, and has four streams. Candidates following the Placement Stream are required to spend the third academic year undertaking professional training leading to the Diploma in Professional Studies. In accordance with Senate Regulation XI. Candidates following the Study Abroad Stream or the Language Related Placement Stream are required to spend the third academic year at an approved academic institution. Candidates following the Split Stream are required to spend six months of the third academic year undertaking professional training, and the other half of the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution. The Study Abroad, the Language Related Placement and the Split Stream lead to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI. The third academic year (Part I) occurs between Part B and Part C. |
UCAS code | NN34 |
Admissions criteria | http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/undergraduate/courses/departments/business-economics/accountingandfinancialmanagement/
|
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
The Accounting, Finance and Management degree programme aims to produce high quality graduates with the knowledge, skills and understanding for an effective and valued career in the accounting and financial management professions or more general management situations.
Within this general aim the programme specifically seeks to encourage students
- To develop knowledge, concepts and skills in the major academic disciplines of business and management as a sound basis for practice, study and training in the graduate's chosen profession.
- To develop a deep understanding in the areas of accounting and financial management by pursuing them over an extended period and in considerable depth.
- To develop the concepts, analytical approaches, evaluative thinking and numeracy skills necessary for management problem solving, including through individual experience on placement.
- To develop a positive attitude to change, a desire for excellence, a visionary and positive approach to future developments and an openness to new ideas.
Consequently the programme seeks
- To provide a relevant, practical and constantly updated programme through close links with industry, professional firms and accounting bodies, through vocational experience in a professional placement and through accreditation by the major professional accounting bodies.
- To provide students with the opportunity to see ways in which theory can be applied in practice, both through taught content and through individual experience on professional placement.
- To allow students to examine critically and in depth the evolving nature and role of accounting and financial management theory and practice.
- To provide a range of optional subjects in accounting, financial management and other management disciplines to complement the core of the programme and to allow students to explore and develop their own interests and strengths.
- To develop teaching and learning in response to advances in scholarship and the needs of the business community.
- To enhance the employability of our graduates.
The School of Business and Economics at 天堂视频 is distinctive amongst 'traditional' university business schools in incorporating a third year spent on professional placement. This is an integral element of the programme and something which we believe is of particular benefit in achieving these aims. It offers students on our Accounting and Financial Management degree additional and valuable opportunities to develop their knowledge, understanding and skills.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
- Accounting Subject Benchmark Statement
- General Business and Management Benchmark Statement (B+M)
- The Framework for Higher Education Qualifications
- Requirements of the professional accounting bodies
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
The programme provides opportunities for students to develop and demonstrate knowledge and understanding, qualities, skills and other attributes in the areas shown below. These intended learning outcomes are set in the context of the QAA subject benchmark statement for Accounting and those relating directly to this benchmark are marked (A) below.
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding of:
- Foundational disciplines of management, including economics, business mathematics and statistics;
- Business organisations in their technological, economic, fiscal, legal and political contexts;
- The behaviour of people in organisations;
- The processes of management and decision making;
- Accounting and financial management in its major contexts, including the legal and social environments, the business entity and capital markets (A) and the integral nature of the accounting function in the successful management of organisations;
- Current technical language, developments, methods, practices and issues in accounting and financial management;
- Selected alternative techniques and practices in accounting and financial management (A);
- Methods of recording and summarising economic events and preparation of financial statements (A);
- Analytical tools for the effective financial management of business operations (A);
- Contemporary theories of accounting and financial management and their related research evidence (A);
- The development, management and exploitation of information systems and their impact on organisations;
- A range of contemporary issues in management.
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- Analyse, model and solve structured and unstructured problems (A);
- Evaluate and assess alternatives in complex scenarios;
- Gather relevant data and evidence from various sources, integrate them appropriately and reference sources adequately (A);
- Critically evaluate arguments and evidence (A);
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- Record and summarise transactions and other economic events (A);
- Prepare financial statements (A);
- Use appropriate analytical tools for accounting and financial management tasks (A);
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
i) Organise themselves personally and independently to be a valued contributor through time management, self-direction, self-motivation, tenacity and proactiveness (B&M);
ii) Learn (A) and work independently;
iii) Work well in a team, using appropriate skills, including leadership, team building and project management (B&M);
iv) Interpret numerical information, reason numerically and apply appropriate mathematical and statistical techniques (B&M);
v) Use communication and information technology appropriately in acquiring, analysing and communicating information (A);
vi) Communicate quantitative and qualitative information, analysis, argument and conclusions using a variety of styles, in effective ways (A);
vii) Make oral and written presentations appropriate to the audience (A).
4. Programme structure
4.1 Part A - Introductory Modules
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTER 1 and 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSA007 Skills for Study, Placement and Employment | 20 |
SEMESTER 1 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSA005 Organisational Behaviour | 10 |
BSA013 Principles of Financial Accounting | 10 |
BSA020 Microeconomics for Financial Studies | 10 |
BSA025 Introduction to Law | 10 |
BSA080 Quantitative Methods for Business A or BSA085 Quantitative Methods for Business B |
10 |
SEMESTER 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSA014 Financial Accounting and Analysis | 10 |
BSA019 Accounting and Finance in Context | 10 |
BSA022 Macroeconomics for Financial Studies | 10 |
BSA053 Organisations in the International Context | 10 |
BSA110 Business Modelling A or BSA115 Business Modelling B |
10 |
4.2 Part B - Degree Modules
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTER 1 and 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSB005 Management Accounting | 20 |
SEMESTER 1 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSB010 Business Information Management | 10 |
BSB015 Company Law | 10 |
BSB025 Financial Management | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSB007 Financial Reporting | 10 |
BSB012 Information Systems Development | 10 |
BSB027 Financial Markets and Derivatives Fundamentals | 10 |
SEMESTER 1 OPTIONS (Select TWO) | |
BSB030 Marketing | 10 |
BSB040 Human Resource Management | 10 |
BSB046 Organisation Studies | 10 |
BSB050 International Business | 10 |
BSB100 Operations Management | 10 |
BSB120 Decision Making Analysis | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 OPTIONS (Select TWO) | |
BSB024 International Economics | 10 |
BSB052 International Management | 10 |
BSB150 Business Ethics and Corporate Social Responsibility | 10 |
BSB087 Vocational Psychology | 10 |
BSB105 Brand Management | 10 |
BSB110 Data Analysis for Management | 10 |
BSB135 Consumer Behaviour | 10 |
4.3 Part I
Candidates pursue one of the following streams:
i) Placement Stream
Candidates will undertake an appropriate business placement.
ii) Study Abroad Stream
Candidates will study at one of the School of Business and Economics approved academic institutions.
iii) Split Stream
Candidates will undertake an appropriate business placement for half the year and will study at one of the School of Business and Economics approved academic institutions for the other half of the academic year.
(iv) Language Related Placement
Candidates will undertake a year abroad in employment, for example as an English language assistant in a school or other educational establishment, approved by the School of Business and Economics.
4.4 Part C - Degree Modules
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTER 1 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSC005 Financial Reporting: Theory and Practice | 10 |
BSC008 Strategic Management Accounting: structures, processes and roles | 10 |
BSC015 Financial Management and Corporate Policy | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSC009 Strategic Management Accounting and Performance | 10 |
SEMESTER 1 OPTIONAL MODULES, with a total credit weighting of 30 from the approved list of options* | |
GROUP 1* | |
BSC020 Corporate Reconstruction and Turnaround | 10 |
BSC030 Corporate Governance | 10 |
GROUP 2 | |
BSC051 International Corporate Governance and Firms. | 10 |
BSC062 Analytics for Management | 10 |
BSC063 Decision and Efficiency Analysis | 10 |
BSC070 Technology in Business and Society | 10 |
BSC071 Managing Big Data | 10 |
BSC097 Knowledge Management | 10 |
BSC100 Advanced Interpersonal Skills | 10 |
BSC105 International Human Resource Management | 10 |
BSC110 Marketing Strategy and Planning | 10 |
BSC115 International Marketing | 10 |
BSC130 Business Programming | 10 |
BSC132 Small Business Issues | 10 |
BSC165 Business Forecasting | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 OPTIONAL MODULES, with a total credit weighting of 50 from the approved list of options* | |
GROUP 1* | |
BSC016 Financial Risk Management | 10 |
BSC018 Behavioural Finance | 10 |
BSC021 Issues in Financial Reporting | 10 |
BSC025 Auditing | 10 |
BSC042 Corporate and Wholesale Banking | 10 |
GROUP 2 | |
BSC053 International Negotiations | 10 |
BSC059 Business and Entrepreneurialism in Postconflict Spaces | 10 |
BSC064 Business Optimisation | 10 |
BSC067 Simulation for Decision Support | 10 |
BSC068 Consulting for Decision Making | 10 |
BSC072 Strategic Information Management | 10 |
BSC080 Analysing Careers | 10 |
BSC085 The Changing Work Organisation | 10 |
BSC117 Services Marketing | 10 |
BSC124 Marketing Communications | 10 |
BSC134 Business Planning for New Ventures | 10 |
BSC136 Enterprise Resource Planning | 10 |
BSC140 Lean Operations | 10 |
BSC144 Project Management | 10 |
BSC175 Retail Location | 10 |
*Over Semester 1 and Semester 2 at least 20 credits must be chosen from Group 1. Various Semester 2 modules in the final year have a pre-requisite module in Semester 1 of the final year. Students must carefully check their preferred modules' pre-requisites before making selections as all pre-requisites will be rigorously enforced. |
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
In order to progress from Part A to Part B and from Part B to C and to be eligible for the award of an Honours degree, candidates must not only satisfy the minimum credit requirements set out in Regulation XX but also:
- To progress from Part B to the period of professional training or study at an approved institution abroad, candidates must accumulate at least 100 credits in Part B as well as achieving at least 30% in all modules taken in Part B.
Provision will be made in accordance with regulation XX for candidates who have the right of re-assessment in Part A or Part B of the programme to undergo re-assessment in the University’s special assessment period.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
Candidates’ final degree classification will be determined on the basis of their performance in degree level Module Assessments in Parts B and C, in accordance with the scheme set out in regulation XX. The average percentage marks for each Part will be combined in the ratio Part B 25: Part C 75, to determine the final overall percentage mark for the Programme (the Programme Mark).
Programme Specification
BS BSc (Hons) Accounting and Financial Management (2016 entry)
Academic Year: 2017/18
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at 天堂视频 (available soon)
- What makes 天堂视频 programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | 天堂视频 |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | School of Business and Economics |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | The programme is accredited by professional accounting bodies. Exemptions from some professional accounting examinations are available from: The Association of Chartered Certified Accountants (ACCA); The Chartered Institute of Management Accountants (CIMA), The Association of International Accountants (AIA) and The Institute of Chartered Accountants in England and Wales (ICAEW). In order to qualify for the professional institutes’ examination exemptions offered to graduates from this degree, candiates must achieve minimum module marks stipulated by these bodies which, in some cases, exceed the minimum marks required for progression and degree award. Up to date information may be obtained from the relevant professional bodies. |
Final award | BSc / BSc + DIS/ BSc + DInts |
Programme title | Accounting and Financial Management |
Programme code | BSUB10 |
Length of programme | The duration of the programmes is six semesters, plus one academic year, and has four streams. Candidates following the Placement Stream are required to spend the third academic year undertaking professional training leading to the Diploma in Professional Studies. In accordance with Senate Regulation XI. Candidates following the Study Abroad Stream or the Language Related Placement Stream are required to spend the third academic year at an approved academic institution. Candidates following the Split Stream are required to spend six months of the third academic year undertaking professional training, and the other half of the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution. The Study Abroad, the Language Related Placement and the Split Stream lead to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI. The third academic year (Part I) occurs between Part B and Part C. |
UCAS code | NN34 |
Admissions criteria | http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/undergraduate/courses/departments/business-economics/accountingandfinancialmanagement/
|
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
The Accounting, Finance and Management degree programme aims to produce high quality graduates with the knowledge, skills and understanding for an effective and valued career in the accounting and financial management professions or more general management situations.
Within this general aim the programme specifically seeks to encourage students
- To develop knowledge, concepts and skills in the major academic disciplines of business and management as a sound basis for practice, study and training in the graduate's chosen profession.
- To develop a deep understanding in the areas of accounting and financial management by pursuing them over an extended period and in considerable depth.
- To develop the concepts, analytical approaches, evaluative thinking and numeracy skills necessary for management problem solving, including through individual experience on placement.
- To develop a positive attitude to change, a desire for excellence, a visionary and positive approach to future developments and an openness to new ideas.
Consequently the programme seeks
- To provide a relevant, practical and constantly updated programme through close links with industry, professional firms and accounting bodies, through vocational experience in a professional placement and through accreditation by the major professional accounting bodies.
- To provide students with the opportunity to see ways in which theory can be applied in practice, both through taught content and through individual experience on professional placement.
- To allow students to examine critically and in depth the evolving nature and role of accounting and financial management theory and practice.
- To provide a range of optional subjects in accounting, financial management and other management disciplines to complement the core of the programme and to allow students to explore and develop their own interests and strengths.
- To develop teaching and learning in response to advances in scholarship and the needs of the business community.
- To enhance the employability of our graduates.
The School of Business and Economics at 天堂视频 is distinctive amongst 'traditional' university business schools in incorporating a third year spent on professional placement. This is an integral element of the programme and something which we believe is of particular benefit in achieving these aims. It offers students on our Accounting and Financial Management degree additional and valuable opportunities to develop their knowledge, understanding and skills.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
- Accounting Subject Benchmark Statement
- General Business and Management Benchmark Statement (B+M)
- The Framework for Higher Education Qualifications
- Requirements of the professional accounting bodies
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
The programme provides opportunities for students to develop and demonstrate knowledge and understanding, qualities, skills and other attributes in the areas shown below. These intended learning outcomes are set in the context of the QAA subject benchmark statement for Accounting and those relating directly to this benchmark are marked (A) below.
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding of:
- Foundational disciplines of management, including economics, business mathematics and statistics;
- Business organisations in their technological, economic, fiscal, legal and political contexts;
- The behaviour of people in organisations;
- The processes of management and decision making;
- Accounting and financial management in its major contexts, including the legal and social environments, the business entity and capital markets (A) and the integral nature of the accounting function in the successful management of organisations;
- Current technical language, developments, methods, practices and issues in accounting and financial management;
- Selected alternative techniques and practices in accounting and financial management (A);
- Methods of recording and summarising economic events and preparation of financial statements (A);
- Analytical tools for the effective financial management of business operations (A);
- Contemporary theories of accounting and financial management and their related research evidence (A);
- The development, management and exploitation of information systems and their impact on organisations;
- A range of contemporary issues in management.
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- Analyse, model and solve structured and unstructured problems (A);
- Evaluate and assess alternatives in complex scenarios;
- Gather relevant data and evidence from various sources, integrate them appropriately and reference sources adequately (A);
- Critically evaluate arguments and evidence (A);
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- Record and summarise transactions and other economic events (A);
- Prepare financial statements (A);
- Use appropriate analytical tools for accounting and financial management tasks (A);
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
i) Organise themselves personally and independently to be a valued contributor through time management, self-direction, self-motivation, tenacity and proactiveness (B&M);
ii) Learn (A) and work independently;
iii) Work well in a team, using appropriate skills, including leadership, team building and project management (B&M);
iv) Interpret numerical information, reason numerically and apply appropriate mathematical and statistical techniques (B&M);
v) Use communication and information technology appropriately in acquiring, analysing and communicating information (A);
vi) Communicate quantitative and qualitative information, analysis, argument and conclusions using a variety of styles, in effective ways (A);
vii) Make oral and written presentations appropriate to the audience (A).
4. Programme structure
4.1 Part A - Introductory Modules
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTER 1 and 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSA007 Skills for Study, Placement and Employment | 20 |
SEMESTER 1 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSA005 Organisational Behaviour | 10 |
BSA013 Principles of Financial Accounting | 10 |
BSA020 Microeconomics for Financial Studies | 10 |
BSA025 Introduction to Law | 10 |
BSA080 Quantitative Methods for Business A or BSA085 Quantitiative Methods for Business B |
10 |
SEMESTER 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSA014 Financial Accounting and Analysis | 10 |
BSA019 Accounting in Context | 10 |
BSA022 Macroeconomics for Financial Studies | 10 |
BSA053 Organisations in the International Context | 10 |
BSA110 Business Modelling A or BSA115 Business Modelling B |
10 |
4.2 Part B - Degree Modules
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTER 1 and 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSB005 Management Accounting | 20 |
SEMESTER 1 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSB010 Business Information Management | 10 |
BSB015 Company Law | 10 |
BSB025 Financial Management | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSB007 Financial Reporting | 10 |
BSB012 Information Systems Development | 10 |
BSB027 Financial Markets and Derivatives Fundamentals | 10 |
SEMESTER 1 OPTIONS (Select TWO) | |
BSB030 Marketing | 10 |
BSB040 Human Resource Management | 10 |
BSB050 International Business | 10 |
BSB100 Operations Management | 10 |
BSB120 Decision Making Analysis | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 OPTIONS (Select TWO) | |
BSB024 International Economics | 10 |
BSB046 Organisation Studies | 10 |
BSB052 International Management | 10 |
BSB087 Vocational Psychology | 10 |
BSB105 Brand Management | 10 |
BSB110 Data Analysis and Management | 10 |
BSB135 Consumer Behaviour | 10 |
BSB150 Business Ethics and Corporate Social Responsibility | 10 |
4.3 Part I
Candidates pursue one of the following streams:
i) Placement Stream
Candidates will undertake an appropriate business placement.
ii) Study Abroad Stream
Candidates will study at one of the School of Business and Economics approved academic institutions.
iii) Split Stream
Candidates will undertake an appropriate business placement for half the year and will study at one of the School of Business and Economics approved academic institutions for the other half of the academic year.
(iv) Language Related Placement
Candidates will undertake a year abroad in employment, for example as an English language assistant in a school or other educational establishment, approved by the School of Business and Economics.
4.4 Part C - Degree Modules
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTER 1 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSC005 Financial Reporting: Theory and Practice | 10 |
BSC008 Strategic Management Accounting: structures, processes and roles | 10 |
BSC015 Financial Management and Corporate Policy | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSC009 Strategic Management Accounting and Performance | 10 |
SEMESTER 1 OPTIONAL MODULES, with a total credit weighting of 30 from the approved list of options* | |
GROUP 1* | |
BSC020 Corporate Reconstruction and Turnaround | 10 |
BSC030 Corporate Governance | 10 |
GROUP 2 | |
BSC051 International Corporate Governance and Firms. | 10 |
BSC062 Analytics for Management | 10 |
BSC063 Decision and Efficiency Analysis | 10 |
BSC070 Technology in Business and Society | 10 |
BSC071 Managing Big Data | 10 |
BSC097 Knowledge Management | 10 |
BSC100 Advanced Interpersonal Skills | 10 |
BSC105 International Human Resource Management | 10 |
BSC110 Marketing Strategy and Planning | 10 |
BSC115 International Marketing | 10 |
BSC130 Business Programming | 10 |
BSC132 Small Business Issues | 10 |
BSC165 Business Forecasting | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 OPTIONAL MODULES, with a total credit weighting of 50 from the approved list of options* | |
GROUP 1* | |
BSC016 Financial Risk Management | 10 |
BSC018 Behavioural Finance | 10 |
BSC021 Issues in Financial Reporting | 10 |
BSC025 Auditing | 10 |
BSC042 Corporate and Wholesale Banking | 10 |
GROUP 2 | |
BSC053 International Negotiations | 10 |
BSC059 Business and Entrepreneurialism in Postconflict Spaces | 10 |
BSC064 Business Optimisation | 10 |
BSC067 Simulation for Decision Support | 10 |
BSC068 Consulting for Decision Making | 10 |
BSC072 Strategic Information Management | 10 |
BSC080 Analysing Careers | 10 |
BSC085 The Changing Work Organisation | 10 |
BSC117 Services Marketing | 10 |
BSC124 Marketing Communications | 10 |
BSC134 Business Planning for New Ventures | 10 |
BSC136 Enterprise Resource Planning | 10 |
BSC140 Lean Operations | 10 |
BSC144 Project Management | 10 |
BSC175 Retail Location | 10 |
*Over Semester 1 and Semester 2 at least 20 credits must be chosen from Group 1. Various Semester 2 modules in the final year have a pre-requisite module in Semester 1 of the final year. Students must carefully check their preferred modules' pre-requisites before making selections as all pre-requisites will be rigorously enforced. |
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
In order to progress from Part A to Part B and from Part B to C and to be eligible for the award of an Honours degree, candidates must not only satisfy the minimum credit requirements set out in Regulation XX but also:
- To progress from Part B to the period of professional training or study at an approved institution abroad, candidates must accumulate at least 100 credits in Part B as well as achieving at least 30% in all modules taken in Part B.
Provision will be made in accordance with regulation XX for candidates who have the right of re-assessment in Part A or Part B of the programme to undergo re-assessment in the University’s special assessment period.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
Candidates’ final degree classification will be determined on the basis of their performance in degree level Module Assessments in Parts B and C, in accordance with the scheme set out in regulation XX. The average percentage marks for each Part will be combined in the ratio Part B 25: Part C 75, to determine the final overall percentage mark for the Programme (the Programme Mark).
Programme Specification
BS BSc (Hons) Accounting and Financial Management (2015 entry)
Academic Year: 2017/18
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at 天堂视频 (available soon)
- What makes 天堂视频 programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | 天堂视频 |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | School of Business and Economics |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | The programme is accredited by professional accounting bodies. Exemptions from some professional accounting examinations are available from: The Association of Chartered Certified Accountants (ACCA); The Chartered Institute of Management Accountants (CIMA), The Chartered Institute of Public Finance and Accountancy (CIPFA), The Institute of Chartered Accountants in England and Wales (ICAEW) and the Institute of Chartered Accountants of Scotland (ICAS). In order to qualify for the professional institutes’ examination exemptions offered to graduates from this degree, candiates must achieve minimum module marks stipulated by these bodies which, in some cases, exceed the minimum marks required for progression and degree award. Up to date information may be obtained from the relevant professional bodies. |
Final award | BSc / BSc + DIS/ BSc + DInts |
Programme title | Accounting and Financial Management |
Programme code | BSUB10 |
Length of programme | The duration of the programmes is six semesters, plus one academic year, and has four streams. Candidates following the Placement Stream are required to spend the third academic year undertaking professional training leading to the Diploma in Professional Studies. In accordance with Senate Regulation XI. Candidates following the Study Abroad Stream or the Language Related Placement Stream are required to spend the third academic year at an approved academic institution. Candidates following the Split Stream are required to spend six months of the third academic year undertaking professional training, and the other half of the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution. The Study Abroad, the Language Related Placement and the Split Stream lead to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI. The third academic year (Part I) occurs between Part B and Part C. |
UCAS code | NN34 |
Admissions criteria | http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/undergraduate/courses/departments/business-economics/accountingandfinancialmanagement/
|
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
The Accounting, Finance and Management degree programme aims to produce high quality graduates with the knowledge, skills and understanding for an effective and valued career in the accounting and financial management professions or more general management situations.
Within this general aim the programme specifically seeks to encourage students
- To develop knowledge, concepts and skills in the major academic disciplines of business and management as a sound basis for practice, study and training in the graduate's chosen profession.
- To develop a deep understanding in the areas of accounting and financial management by pursuing them over an extended period and in considerable depth.
- To develop the concepts, analytical approaches, evaluative thinking and numeracy skills necessary for management problem solving, including through individual experience on placement.
- To develop a positive attitude to change, a desire for excellence, a visionary and positive approach to future developments and an openness to new ideas.
Consequently the programme seeks
- To provide a relevant, practical and constantly updated programme through close links with industry, professional firms and accounting bodies, through vocational experience in a professional placement and through accreditation by the major professional accounting bodies.
- To provide students with the opportunity to see ways in which theory can be applied in practice, both through taught content and through individual experience on professional placement.
- To allow students to examine critically and in depth the evolving nature and role of accounting and financial management theory and practice.
- To provide a range of optional subjects in accounting, financial management and other management disciplines to complement the core of the programme and to allow students to explore and develop their own interests and strengths.
- To develop teaching and learning in response to advances in scholarship and the needs of the business community.
- To enhance the employability of our graduates.
The School of Business and Economics at 天堂视频 is distinctive amongst 'traditional' university business schools in incorporating a third year spent on professional placement. This is an integral element of the programme and something which we believe is of particular benefit in achieving these aims. It offers students on our Accounting and Financial Management degree additional and valuable opportunities to develop their knowledge, understanding and skills.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
- Accounting Subject Benchmark Statement
- General Business and Management Benchmark Statement (B+M)
- The Framework for Higher Education Qualifications
- Requirements of the professional accounting bodies
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
The programme provides opportunities for students to develop and demonstrate knowledge and understanding, qualities, skills and other attributes in the areas shown below. These intended learning outcomes are set in the context of the QAA subject benchmark statement for Accounting and those relating directly to this benchmark are marked (A) below.
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding of:
- Foundational disciplines of management, including economics, business mathematics and statistics;
- Business organisations in their technological, economic, fiscal, legal and political contexts;
- The behaviour of people in organisations;
- The processes of management and decision making;
- Accounting and financial management in its major contexts, including the legal and social environments, the business entity and capital markets (A) and the integral nature of the accounting function in the successful management of organisations;
- Current technical language, developments, methods, practices and issues in accounting and financial management;
- Selected alternative techniques and practices in accounting and financial management (A);
- Methods of recording and summarising economic events and preparation of financial statements (A);
- Analytical tools for the effective financial management of business operations (A);
- Contemporary theories of accounting and financial management and their related research evidence (A);
- The development, management and exploitation of information systems and their impact on organisations;
- A range of contemporary issues in management.
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- Analyse, model and solve structured and unstructured problems (A);
- Evaluate and assess alternatives in complex scenarios;
- Gather relevant data and evidence from various sources, integrate them appropriately and reference sources adequately (A);
- Critically evaluate arguments and evidence (A);
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- Record and summarise transactions and other economic events (A);
- Prepare financial statements (A);
- Use appropriate analytical tools for accounting and financial management tasks (A);
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
i) Organise themselves personally and independently to be a valued contributor through time management, self-direction, self-motivation, tenacity and proactiveness (B&M);
ii) Learn (A) and work independently;
iii) Work well in a team, using appropriate skills, including leadership, team building and project management (B&M);
iv) Interpret numerical information, reason numerically and apply appropriate mathematical and statistical techniques (B&M);
v) Use communication and information technology appropriately in acquiring, analysing and communicating information (A);
vi) Communicate quantitative and qualitative information, analysis, argument and conclusions using a variety of styles, in effective ways (A);
vii) Make oral and written presentations appropriate to the audience (A).
4. Programme structure
4.1 Part A - Introductory Modules
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTER 1 and 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSA007 Skills for Study, Placement and Employment | 20 |
SEMESTER 1 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSA005 Organisational Behaviour | 10 |
BSA013 Principles of Financial Accounting | 10 |
BSA020 Microeconomics for Financial Studies | 10 |
BSA025 Introduction to Law | 10 |
BSA080 Quantitative Methods for Business A | 10 |
or BSA085 Quantitative Methods for Business B | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSA014 Financial Accounting and Analysis | 10 |
BSA019 Accounting in Context | 10 |
BSA022 Macroeconomics for Financial Studies | 10 |
BSA053 Organisations in the International Context | 10 |
BSA110 Business Modelling A | 10 |
or BSA115 Business Modelling B | 10 |
4.2 Part B - Degree Modules
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTER 1 and 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSB005 Management Accounting | 20 |
SEMESTER 1 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSB010 Business Information Management | 10 |
BSB015 Company Law | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSB007 Financial Reporting | 10 |
BSB012 Information Systems Development | 10 |
BSB025 Financial Management | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 OPTIONS (Select THREE) | |
BSB030 Marketing | 10 |
BSB040 Human Resource Management | 10 |
BSB050 International Business | 10 |
BSB100 Operations Management | 10 |
BSB120 Decision Making Analysis | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 OPTIONS (Select TWO) | |
BSB024 International Economics | 10 |
BSB046 Organisation Studies | 10 |
BSB052 International Management | 10 |
BSB087 Vocational Psychology | 10 |
BSB105 Brand Management | 10 |
BSB110 Data Analysis for Management | 10 |
BSB135 Consumer Behaviour | 10 |
BSB150 Business Ethics and Corporate Social Responsibility | 10 |
4.3 Part I
Candidates pursue one of the following streams:
i) Placement Stream
Candidates will undertake an appropriate business placement.
ii) Study Abroad Stream
Candidates will study at one of the School of Business and Economics approved academic institutions.
iii) Split Stream
Candidates will undertake an appropriate business placement for half the year and will study at one of the School of Business and Economics approved academic institutions for the other half of the academic year.
(iv) Language Related Placement
Candidates will undertake a year abroad in employment, for example as an English language assistant in a school or other educational establishment, approved by the School of Business and Economics.
4.4 Part C - Degree Modules
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTER 1 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSC005 Financial Reporting: Theory and Practice | 10 |
BSC008 Strategic Management Accounting: structures, processes and roles | 10 |
BSC015 Financial Management and Corporate Policy | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSC009 Strategic Management Accounting and Performance | 10 |
SEMESTER 1 OPTIONAL MODULES, with a total credit weighting of 30 from the approved list of options* | |
GROUP 1* | |
BSC020 Corporate Reconstruction and Turnaround | 10 |
BSC030 Corporate Governance | 10 |
GROUP 2 | |
BSC051 International Corporate Governance and Firms. | 10 |
BSC062 Analytics for Management | 10 |
BSC063 Decision and Efficiency Analysis | 10 |
BSC070 Technology in Business and Society | 10 |
BSC097 Knowledge Management | 10 |
BSC100 Advanced Interpersonal Skills | 10 |
BSC105 International Human Resource Management | 10 |
BSC110 Marketing Strategy and Planning | 10 |
BSC115 International Marketing | 10 |
BSC130 Business Programming | 10 |
BSC132 Small Business Issues | 10 |
BSC165 Business Forecasting | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 OPTIONAL MODULES, with a total credit weighting of 50 from the approved list of options* | |
GROUP 1* | |
BSC016 Financial Risk Management | 10 |
BSC018 Behavioural Finance | 10 |
BSC021 Issues in Financial Reporting | 10 |
BSC025 Auditing | 10 |
BSC042 Corporate and Wholesale Banking | 10 |
GROUP 2 | |
BSC053 International Negotiations | 10 |
BSC059 Business and Entrepreneurialism in Postconflict Spaces | 10 |
BSC064 Business Optimisation | 10 |
BSC067 Simulation for Decision Support | 10 |
BSC068 Consulting for Decision Making | 10 |
BSC071 Managing Big Data | 10 |
BSC072 Strategic Information Management | 10 |
BSC080 Analysing Careers | 10 |
BSC085 The Changing Work Organisation | 10 |
BSC117 Services Marketing | 10 |
BSC124 Marketing Communications | 10 |
BSC134 Business Planning for New Ventures | 10 |
BSC136 Enterprise Resource Planning | 10 |
BSC140 Lean Operations | 10 |
BSC144 Project Management | 10 |
BSC175 Retail Location | 10 |
*Over Semester 1 and Semester 2 at least 20 credits must be chosen from Group 1. Various Semester 2 modules in the final year have a pre-requisite module in Semester 1 of the final year. Students must carefully check their preferred modules' pre-requisites before making selections as all pre-requisites will be rigorously enforced. |
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
In order to progress from Part A to Part B and from Part B to C and to be eligible for the award of an Honours degree, candidates must not only satisfy the minimum credit requirements set out in Regulation XX but also:
- To progress from Part B to the period of professional training or study at an approved institution abroad, candidates must accumulate at least 100 credits in Part B as well as achieving at least 30% in all modules taken in Part B.
Provision will be made in accordance with regulation XX for candidates who have the right of re-assessment in Part A or Part B of the programme to undergo re-assessment in the University’s special assessment period.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
Candidates’ final degree classification will be determined on the basis of their performance in degree level Module Assessments in Parts B and C, in accordance with the scheme set out in regulation XX. The average percentage marks for each Part will be combined in the ratio Part B 25: Part C 75, to determine the final overall percentage mark for the Programme (the Programme Mark).
Programme Specification
BS BSc (Hons) Accounting and Financial Management (2014 entry)
Academic Year: 2017/18
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at 天堂视频 (available soon)
- What makes 天堂视频 programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | 天堂视频 |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | School of Business and Economics |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | The programme is accredited by professional accounting bodies. Exemptions from some professional accounting examinations are available from: The Association of Chartered Certified Accountants (ACCA); The Chartered Institute of Management Accountants (CIMA), The Chartered Institute of Public Finance and Accountancy (CIPFA), The Institute of Chartered Accountants in England and Wales (ICAEW) and the Institute of Chartered Accountants of Scotland (ICAS). In order to qualify for the professional institutes’ examination exemptions offered to graduates from this degree, candiates must achieve minimum module marks stipulated by these bodies which, in some cases, exceed the minimum marks required for progression and degree award. Up to date information may be obtained from the relevant professional bodies. |
Final award | BSc / BSc + DIS/ BSc + DInts |
Programme title | Accounting and Financial Management |
Programme code | BSUB10 |
Length of programme | The duration of the programmes is six semesters, plus one academic year, and has four streams. Candidates following the Placement Stream are required to spend the third academic year undertaking professional training leading to the Diploma in Professional Studies. In accordance with Senate Regulation XI. Candidates following the Study Abroad Stream or the Language Related Placement Stream are required to spend the third academic year at an approved academic institution. Candidates following the Split Stream are required to spend six months of the third academic year undertaking professional training, and the other half of the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution. The Study Abroad, the Language Related Placement and the Split Stream lead to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI. The third academic year (Part I) occurs between Part B and Part C. |
UCAS code | NN34 |
Admissions criteria | http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/undergraduate/courses/departments/business-economics/accountingandfinancialmanagement/
|
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
The Accounting, Finance and Management degree programme aims to produce high quality graduates with the knowledge, skills and understanding for an effective and valued career in the accounting and financial management professions or more general management situations.
Within this general aim the programme specifically seeks to encourage students
- To develop knowledge, concepts and skills in the major academic disciplines of business and management as a sound basis for practice, study and training in the graduate's chosen profession.
- To develop a deep understanding in the areas of accounting and financial management by pursuing them over an extended period and in considerable depth.
- To develop the concepts, analytical approaches, evaluative thinking and numeracy skills necessary for management problem solving, including through individual experience on placement.
- To develop a positive attitude to change, a desire for excellence, a visionary and positive approach to future developments and an openness to new ideas.
Consequently the programme seeks
- To provide a relevant, practical and constantly updated programme through close links with industry, professional firms and accounting bodies, through vocational experience in a professional placement and through accreditation by the major professional accounting bodies.
- To provide students with the opportunity to see ways in which theory can be applied in practice, both through taught content and through individual experience on professional placement.
- To allow students to examine critically and in depth the evolving nature and role of accounting and financial management theory and practice.
- To provide a range of optional subjects in accounting, financial management and other management disciplines to complement the core of the programme and to allow students to explore and develop their own interests and strengths.
- To develop teaching and learning in response to advances in scholarship and the needs of the business community.
- To enhance the employability of our graduates.
The School of Business and Economics at 天堂视频 is distinctive amongst 'traditional' university business schools in incorporating a third year spent on professional placement. This is an integral element of the programme and something which we believe is of particular benefit in achieving these aims. It offers students on our Accounting and Financial Management degree additional and valuable opportunities to develop their knowledge, understanding and skills.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
- Accounting Subject Benchmark Statement
- General Business and Management Benchmark Statement (B+M)
- The Framework for Higher Education Qualifications
- Requirements of the professional accounting bodies
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
The programme provides opportunities for students to develop and demonstrate knowledge and understanding, qualities, skills and other attributes in the areas shown below. These intended learning outcomes are set in the context of the QAA subject benchmark statement for Accounting and those relating directly to this benchmark are marked (A) below.
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding of:
- Foundational disciplines of management, including economics, business mathematics and statistics;
- Business organisations in their technological, economic, fiscal, legal and political contexts;
- The behaviour of people in organisations;
- The processes of management and decision making;
- Accounting and financial management in its major contexts, including the legal and social environments, the business entity and capital markets (A) and the integral nature of the accounting function in the successful management of organisations;
- Current technical language, developments, methods, practices and issues in accounting and financial management;
- Selected alternative techniques and practices in accounting and financial management (A);
- Methods of recording and summarising economic events and preparation of financial statements (A);
- Analytical tools for the effective financial management of business operations (A);
- Contemporary theories of accounting and financial management and their related research evidence (A);
- The development, management and exploitation of information systems and their impact on organisations;
- A range of contemporary issues in management.
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- Analyse, model and solve structured and unstructured problems (A);
- Evaluate and assess alternatives in complex scenarios;
- Gather relevant data and evidence from various sources, integrate them appropriately and reference sources adequately (A);
- Critically evaluate arguments and evidence (A);
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- Record and summarise transactions and other economic events (A);
- Prepare financial statements (A);
- Use appropriate analytical tools for accounting and financial management tasks (A);
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
i) Organise themselves personally and independently to be a valued contributor through time management, self-direction, self-motivation, tenacity and proactiveness (B&M);
ii) Learn (A) and work independently;
iii) Work well in a team, using appropriate skills, including leadership, team building and project management (B&M);
iv) Interpret numerical information, reason numerically and apply appropriate mathematical and statistical techniques (B&M);
v) Use communication and information technology appropriately in acquiring, analysing and communicating information (A);
vi) Communicate quantitative and qualitative information, analysis, argument and conclusions using a variety of styles, in effective ways (A);
vii) Make oral and written presentations appropriate to the audience (A).
4. Programme structure
4.1 Part A - Introductory Modules
Semester 1
i) COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 60)
Code |
Title |
Modular Weight |
BSA005 |
Organisational Behaviour |
10 |
BSA007 |
Skills for Study, Placement and Employment (weight 20) continued in Semester 2 |
10 |
BSA017 |
Financial Accounting |
20 |
BSA020 |
Microeconomics for Financial Studies |
10 |
BSA080 |
Quantitative Methods for Business A |
10 |
|
Or |
|
BSA085 |
Quantitative Methods for Business B |
10 |
Semester 2
i) COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 60)
Code |
Title |
Modular Weight |
BSA007 |
Skills for Study, Placement and Employment (weight 20) continued from Semester 1 |
10 |
BSA019 |
Accounting in Context |
10 |
BSA022 |
Macroeconomics for Financial Studies |
10 |
BSA025 |
Introduction to Law |
10 |
BSA110 |
Business Modelling A |
10 |
|
Or |
|
BSA115 |
Business Modelling B |
10 |
BSA053 |
Organisations in the International Context |
10 |
4.2 Part B - Degree Modules
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTER 1 and 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSB005 Management Accounting | 20 |
SEMESTER 1 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSB010 Business Information Management | 10 |
BSB015 Company Law | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSB007 Financial Reporting | 10 |
BSB012 Information Systems Development | 10 |
BSB025 Financial Management | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 OPTIONS (Select THREE) | |
BSB030 Marketing | 10 |
BSB040 Human Resource Management | 10 |
BSB050 International Business | 10 |
BSB100 Operations Management | 10 |
BSB120 Decision Making Analysis | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 OPTIONS (Select TWO) | |
BSB024 International Economics | 10 |
BSB046 Organisation Studies | 10 |
BSB052 International Management | 10 |
BSB086 International Employment Relations | 10 |
BSB087 Vocational Psychology | 10 |
BSB105 Brand Management | 10 |
BSB110 Data Analysis for Management | 10 |
BSB135 Consumer Behaviour | 10 |
4.3 Part I
Candidates pursue one of the following streams:
i) Placement Stream
Candidates will undertake an appropriate business placement.
ii) Study Abroad Stream
Candidates will study at one of the School of Business and Economics approved academic institutions.
iii) Split Stream
Candidates will undertake an appropriate business placement for half the year and will study at one of the School of Business and Economics approved academic institutions for the other half of the academic year.
(iv) Language Related Placement
Candidates will undertake a year abroad in employment, for example as an English language assistant in a school or other educational establishment, approved by the School of Business and Economics.
4.4 Part C - Degree Modules
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTER 1 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSC005 Financial Reporting: Theory and Practice | 10 |
BSC008 Strategic Management Accounting: structures, processes and roles | 10 |
BSC015 Financial Management and Corporate Policy | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSC009 Strategic Management Accounting and Performance | 10 |
SEMESTER 1 OPTIONAL MODULES, with a total credit weighting of 30 from the approved list of options* | |
GROUP 1* | |
BSC030 Corporate Governance | 10 |
GROUP 2 | |
BSC051 International Corporate Governance and Firms. | 10 |
BSC063 Decision and Efficience Analysis | 10 |
BSC070 Technology in Business and Society | 10 |
BSC097 Knowledge Management | 10 |
BSC100 Advanced Interpersonal Skills | 10 |
BSC105 International Human Resource Management | 10 |
BSC110 Marketing Strategy and Planning | 10 |
BSC115 Intenrational Marketing | 10 |
BSC130 Business Programming | 10 |
BSC132 Small Business Issues | 10 |
BSC165 Business Forecasting | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 OPTIONAL MODULES, with a total credit weighting of 50 from the approved list of options* | |
GROUP 1* | |
BSC016 Financial Risk Management | 10 |
BSC018 Behavioural Finance | 10 |
BSC021 Issues in Financial Reporting | 10 |
BSC025 Auditing | 10 |
BSC042 Corporate and Wholesale Banking | 10 |
GROUP 2 | |
BSC053 International Negotiations | 10 |
BSC059 Business and Entrepreneurialism in Postconflict Spaces | 10 |
BSC064 Business Optimisation | 10 |
BSC067 Simulation for Decision Support | 10 |
BSC068 Consulting for Decision Making | 10 |
BSC071 Managing Big Data | 10 |
BSC072 Strategic Information Management | 10 |
BSC080 Analysing Careers | 10 |
BSC085 The Changing Work Organisation | 10 |
BSC117 Services Marketing | 10 |
BSC124 Marketing Communications | 10 |
BSC134 Business Planning for New Ventures | 10 |
BSC136 Enterprise Resource Planning | 10 |
BSC144 Project Management | 10 |
BSC175 Retail Location | 10 |
*Over Semester 1 and Semester 2 at least 20 credits must be chosen from Group 1. Various Semester 2 modules in the final year have a pre-requisite module in Semester 1 of the final year. Students must carefully check their preferred modules' pre-requisites before making selections as all pre-requisites will be rigorously enforced. |
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
In order to progress from Part A to Part B and from Part B to C and to be eligible for the award of an Honours degree, candidates must not only satisfy the minimum credit requirements set out in Regulation XX but also:
- To progress from Part B to the period of professional training or study at an approved institution abroad, candidates must accumulate at least 100 credits in Part B as well as achieving at least 30% in all modules taken in Part B.
Provision will be made in accordance with regulation XX for candidates who have the right of re-assessment in Part A or Part B of the programme to undergo re-assessment in the University’s special assessment period.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
Candidates’ final degree classification will be determined on the basis of their performance in degree level Module Assessments in Parts B and C, in accordance with the scheme set out in regulation XX. The average percentage marks for each Part will be combined in the ratio Part B 25: Part C 75, to determine the final overall percentage mark for the Programme (the Programme Mark).
Programme Specification
BS BSc (Hons) Accounting and Financial Management (2013 entry)
Academic Year: 2017/18
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at 天堂视频 (available soon)
- What makes 天堂视频 programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | 天堂视频 |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | School of Business and Economics |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | The programme is accredited by professional accounting bodies. Exemptions from some professional accounting examinations are available from: The Association of Chartered Certified Accountants (ACCA); The Chartered Institute of Management Accountants (CIMA), The Chartered Institute of Public Finance and Accountancy (CIPFA), The Institute of Chartered Accountants in England and Wales (ICAEW) and the Institute of Chartered Accountants of Scotland (ICAS). In order to qualify for the professional institutes’ examination exemptions offered to graduates from this degree, candiates must achieve minimum module marks stipulated by these bodies which, in some cases, exceed the minimum marks required for progression and degree award. Up to date information may be obtained from the relevant professional bodies. |
Final award | BSc / BSc + DIS/ BSc + DInts |
Programme title | Accounting and Financial Management |
Programme code | BSUB10 |
Length of programme | The duration of the programmes is six semesters, plus one academic year, and has four streams. Candidates following the Placement Stream are required to spend the third academic year undertaking professional training leading to the Diploma in Professional Studies. In accordance with Senate Regulation XI. Candidates following the Study Abroad Stream or the Language Related Placement Stream are required to spend the third academic year at an approved academic institution. Candidates following the Split Stream are required to spend six months of the third academic year undertaking professional training, and the other half of the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution. The Study Abroad, the Language Related Placement and the Split Stream lead to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI. The third academic year (Part I) occurs between Part B and Part C. |
UCAS code | NN34 |
Admissions criteria | http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/undergraduate/courses/departments/business-economics/accountingandfinancialmanagement/
|
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
The Accounting, Finance and Management degree programme aims to produce high quality graduates with the knowledge, skills and understanding for an effective and valued career in the accounting and financial management professions or more general management situations.
Within this general aim the programme specifically seeks to encourage students
- To develop knowledge, concepts and skills in the major academic disciplines of business and management as a sound basis for practice, study and training in the graduate's chosen profession.
- To develop a deep understanding in the areas of accounting and financial management by pursuing them over an extended period and in considerable depth.
- To develop the concepts, analytical approaches, evaluative thinking and numeracy skills necessary for management problem solving, including through individual experience on placement.
- To develop a positive attitude to change, a desire for excellence, a visionary and positive approach to future developments and an openness to new ideas.
Consequently the programme seeks
- To provide a relevant, practical and constantly updated programme through close links with industry, professional firms and accounting bodies, through vocational experience in a professional placement and through accreditation by the major professional accounting bodies.
- To provide students with the opportunity to see ways in which theory can be applied in practice, both through taught content and through individual experience on professional placement.
- To allow students to examine critically and in depth the evolving nature and role of accounting and financial management theory and practice.
- To provide a range of optional subjects in accounting, financial management and other management disciplines to complement the core of the programme and to allow students to explore and develop their own interests and strengths.
- To develop teaching and learning in response to advances in scholarship and the needs of the business community.
- To enhance the employability of our graduates.
The School of Business and Economics at 天堂视频 is distinctive amongst 'traditional' university business schools in incorporating a third year spent on professional placement. This is an integral element of the programme and something which we believe is of particular benefit in achieving these aims. It offers students on our Accounting and Financial Management degree additional and valuable opportunities to develop their knowledge, understanding and skills.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
- Accounting Subject Benchmark Statement
- General Business and Management Benchmark Statement (B+M)
- The Framework for Higher Education Qualifications
- Requirements of the professional accounting bodies
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
The programme provides opportunities for students to develop and demonstrate knowledge and understanding, qualities, skills and other attributes in the areas shown below. These intended learning outcomes are set in the context of the QAA subject benchmark statement for Accounting and those relating directly to this benchmark are marked (A) below.
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding of:
- Foundational disciplines of management, including economics, business mathematics and statistics;
- Business organisations in their technological, economic, fiscal, legal and political contexts;
- The behaviour of people in organisations;
- The processes of management and decision making;
- Accounting and financial management in its major contexts, including the legal and social environments, the business entity and capital markets (A) and the integral nature of the accounting function in the successful management of organisations;
- Current technical language, developments, methods, practices and issues in accounting and financial management;
- Selected alternative techniques and practices in accounting and financial management (A);
- Methods of recording and summarising economic events and preparation of financial statements (A);
- Analytical tools for the effective financial management of business operations (A);
- Contemporary theories of accounting and financial management and their related research evidence (A);
- The development, management and exploitation of information systems and their impact on organisations;
- A range of contemporary issues in management.
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- Analyse, model and solve structured and unstructured problems (A);
- Evaluate and assess alternatives in complex scenarios;
- Gather relevant data and evidence from various sources, integrate them appropriately and reference sources adequately (A);
- Critically evaluate arguments and evidence (A);
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- Record and summarise transactions and other economic events (A);
- Prepare financial statements (A);
- Use appropriate analytical tools for accounting and financial management tasks (A);
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
i) Organise themselves personally and independently to be a valued contributor through time management, self-direction, self-motivation, tenacity and proactiveness (B&M);
ii) Learn (A) and work independently;
iii) Work well in a team, using appropriate skills, including leadership, team building and project management (B&M);
iv) Interpret numerical information, reason numerically and apply appropriate mathematical and statistical techniques (B&M);
v) Use communication and information technology appropriately in acquiring, analysing and communicating information (A);
vi) Communicate quantitative and qualitative information, analysis, argument and conclusions using a variety of styles, in effective ways (A);
vii) Make oral and written presentations appropriate to the audience (A).
4. Programme structure
4.1 Part A - Introductory Modules
Semester 1
i) COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 60)
Code |
Title |
Modular Weight |
BSA005 |
Organisational Behaviour |
10 |
BSA007 |
Skills for Study, Placement and Employment (weight 20) continued in Semester 2 |
10 |
BSA017 |
Financial Accounting |
20 |
BSA020 |
Microeconomics for Financial Studies |
10 |
BSA080 |
Quantitative Methods for Business A |
10 |
|
Or |
|
BSA085 |
Quantitative Methods for Business B |
10 |
Semester 2
i) COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 60)
Code |
Title |
Modular Weight |
BSA007 |
Skills for Study, Placement and Employment (weight 20) continued from Semester 1 |
10 |
BSA019 |
Accounting in Context |
10 |
BSA022 |
Macroeconomics for Financial Studies |
10 |
BSA025 |
Introduction to Law |
10 |
BSA110 |
Business Modelling A |
10 |
|
Or |
|
BSA115 |
Business Modelling B |
10 |
BSA053 |
Organisations in the International Context |
10 |
4.2 Part B - Degree Modules
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTER 1 and 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSB005 Management Accounting | 20 |
SEMESTER 1 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSB010 Business Information Management | 10 |
BSB015 Company Law | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSB007 Financial Reporting | 10 |
BSB012 Information Systems Development | 10 |
BSB025 Financial Management | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 OPTIONS (Select THREE) | |
BSB030 Marketing | 10 |
BSB040 Human Resource Management | 10 |
BSB050 International Business | 10 |
BSB100 Operations Management | 10 |
BSB120 Decision Making Analysis | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 OPTIONS (Select TWO) | |
BSB024 International Economics | 10 |
BSB046 Organisation Studies | 10 |
BSB052 International Management | 10 |
BSB087 Vocational Psychology | 10 |
BSB105 Brand Management | 10 |
BSB110 Data Analysis for Management | 10 |
BSB135 Consumer Behaviour | 10 |
4.3 Part I
Candidates pursue one of the following streams:
i) Placement Stream
Candidates will undertake an appropriate business placement.
ii) Study Abroad Stream
Candidates will study at one of the School of Business and Economics approved academic institutions.
iii) Split Stream
Candidates will undertake an appropriate business placement for half the year and will study at one of the School of Business and Economics approved academic institutions for the other half of the academic year.
(iv) Language Related Placement
Candidates will undertake a year abroad in employment, for example as an English language assistant in a school or other educational establishment, approved by the School of Business and Economics.
4.4 Part C - Degree Modules
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTER 1 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSC005 Financial Reporting: Theory and Practice | 10 |
BSC008 Strategic Management Accounting: structures, processes and roles | 10 |
BSC015 Financial Management and Corporate Policy | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSC009 Strategic Management Accounting and Performance | 10 |
SEMESTER 1 OPTIONAL MODULES, with a total credit weighting of 30 from the approved list of options* | |
GROUP 1* | |
BSC020 Corporate Reconstruction and Turnaround | 10 |
BSC030 Corporate Governance | 10 |
GROUP 2 | |
BSC051 International Corporate Governance and Firms. | 10 |
BSC063 Decision and Efficiency Analysis | 10 |
BSC070 Technology in Business and Society | 10 |
BSC097 Knowledge Management | 10 |
BSC100 Advanced Interpersonal Skills | 10 |
BSC105 International Human Resource Management | 10 |
BSC110 Marketing Strategy and Planning | 10 |
BSC115 International Marketing | 10 |
BSC130 Business Programming | 10 |
BSC132 Small Business Issues | 10 |
BSC165 Business Forecasting | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 OPTIONAL MODULES, with a total credit weighting of 50 from the approved list of options* | |
GROUP 1* | |
BSC016 Financial Risk Management | 10 |
BSC018 Behavioural Finance | 10 |
BSC021 Issues in Financial Reporting | 10 |
BSC025 Auditing | 10 |
BSC042 Corporate and Wholesale Banking | 10 |
GROUP 2 | |
BSC053 International Negotiations | 10 |
BSC067 Simulation for Decision Support | 10 |
BSC068 Consulting for Decision Making | 10 |
BSC071 Managing Big Data | 10 |
BSC072 Strategic Information Management | 10 |
BSC080 Analysing Careers | 10 |
BSC117 Services Marketing | 10 |
BSC124 Marketing Communications | 10 |
BSC134 Business Planning for New Ventures | 10 |
BSC136 Enterprise Resource Planning | 10 |
BSC140 Lean Operations | 10 |
BSC144 Project Management | 10 |
BSC175 Retail Location | 10 |
*Over Semester 1 and Semester 2 at least 20 credits must be chosen from Group 1. Various Semester 2 modules in the final year have a pre-requisite module in Semester 1 of the final year. Students must carefully check their preferred modules' pre-requisites before making selections as all pre-requisites will be rigorously enforced. |
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
In order to progress from Part A to Part B and from Part B to C and to be eligible for the award of an Honours degree, candidates must not only satisfy the minimum credit requirements set out in Regulation XX but also:
- To progress from Part B to the period of professional training or study at an approved institution abroad, candidates must accumulate at least 100 credits in Part B as well as achieving at least 30% in all modules taken in Part B.
Provision will be made in accordance with regulation XX for candidates who have the right of re-assessment in Part A or Part B of the programme to undergo re-assessment in the University’s special assessment period.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
Candidates’ final degree classification will be determined on the basis of their performance in degree level Module Assessments in Parts B and C, in accordance with the scheme set out in regulation XX. The average percentage marks for each Part will be combined in the ratio Part B 25: Part C 75, to determine the final overall percentage mark for the Programme (the Programme Mark).
Programme Specification
BS BSc (Hons) Banking, Finance and Management (2017 entry)
Academic Year: 2017/18
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at 天堂视频 (available soon)
- What makes 天堂视频 programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | 天堂视频 |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | School of Business and Economics |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | The programme is accredited by: The Chartered Institute of Management Accountants (CIMA), The Institute of Financial Services (IFS) and the Association of Corporate Treasurers (ACT). In order to qualify for the professional institutes’ examination exemptions offered to graduates from this degree, candidates must achieve minimum module marks stipulated by these bodies which, in some cases, exceed the minimum marks required for progression and degree award. Up to date information may be obtained from the relevant professional bodies. |
Final award | BSc/ BSC DPS /BSc DInts |
Programme title | Banking, Finance and Management |
Programme code | BSUB20 |
Length of programme | The duration of the programmes is six semesters, plus one academic year, and has four streams. Candidates following the Placement Stream are required to spend the third academic year undertaking professional training leading to the Diploma in Professional Studies, in accordance with Senate Regulation XI. Candidates following the Study Abroad Stream or the Language Related Placement Stream are required to spend the third academic year at an approved academic institution. Candidates following the Split Stream are required to spend six months of the third academic year undertaking professional training, and the other half of the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution. The Study Abroad, the Language Related Placement and the Split Stream lead to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI. The third academic year (Part I) occurs between Part B and Part C. |
UCAS code | N301 |
Admissions criteria | http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/undergraduate/courses/departments/business-economics/bankingfinanceandmanagement/ |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
The Banking, Finance and Management degree programme aims to produce high quality graduates with the knowledge, skills and understanding in the areas of management, banking and economics for an effective and valued career in the financial services or a related management function.
Within this general aim the programme specifically seeks to encourage students
- To develop knowledge, concepts and skills in the major academic disciplines of business and management as a sound basis for practice, study and training in the graduate’s chosen profession.
- To develop the concepts, analytical approaches, evaluative thinking and numeracy skills necessary for management problem solving, including through individual experience on placement.
- To develop a deep understanding in areas of accounting, banking law and practice, economics and monetary and financial systems by pursuing them over an extended period and in depth.
- To develop a full range of professional skills and personal qualities beneficial for managing in finance and banking related areas.
- To develop a critical awareness of the dynamics of the relevant UK and international environments affecting banking and finance.
- To develop a positive attitude to change, a desire for excellence, a visionary and positive approach to future developments and an openness to new ideas.
Consequently the programme seeks
- To provide a relevant, practical and constantly updated programme through close links with banks, leading financial institutions and professional bodies and through vocational experience in a professional placement.
- To provide students with the opportunity to see ways in which theory can be applied in practice, both through taught content and through individual experience on professional placement.
- To provide the opportunity for students to examine critically and in depth key issues faced by modern day bankers and financial managers.
- To provide a range of optional subjects that, in addition to core subjects, will enable graduates either to obtain substantial exemptions from professional examinations or to pursue more general management careers.
- To develop teaching and learning in response to advances in scholarship and the needs of the business community.
- To enhance the employability of our graduates.
The School of Business and Economics at 天堂视频 is distinctive amongst 'traditional' university business schools in incorporating a third year spent on professional placement. This is an integral element of the programme and something which we believe is of particular benefit in achieving these aims. It offers students on our Banking, Finance and Management degree additional and valuable opportunities to develop their knowledge, understanding and skills.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
- Accounting Subject Benchmark Statement (A)
- General Business and Management Benchmark Statement (B&M)
- The Framework for Higher Education Qualifications
- Requirements of the relevant professional bodies.
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
The programme provides opportunities for students to develop and demonstrate knowledge and understanding, qualities, skills and other attributes in the areas shown below. These intended learning outcomes are set in the context of the QAA subject benchmark statements for Accounting and General Business and Management. Those relating directly to the benchmarks are marked (A) and/or (B&M) below.
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding of:
- the foundation disciplines of business and management including economics, mathematics and statistics sufficient to enable a clear understanding of the central aspects of the main business and management functions (B&M);
- the economic, technological, financial, legal, cultural and political context within which banks and other businesses operate (B&M amended);
- the nature of organisations and the behaviour of people within them, both individually and working in groups (B&M);
- integration of concepts and from the various business disciplines to comprehend business situations and develop appropriate analysis and solutions (B&M);
- banking and financial management in its major contexts, including the legal and social environments and the business entity and capital markets (A amended);
- current technical language, developments, methods, practices and issues in banking and financial management;
- selected techniques and practices in banking and financial management;
- methods of recording and summarising economic events and preparation of financial statements (A);
- analytical tools for the effective financial management of business operations (A);
- the sources, uses and management of finance, the use of accounting and other information systems for managerial applications (B&M);
- the management and development of people within organisations (B&M);
- the development, management and exploitation of information systems and their impact on organisations (B&M);
- the development and operation of markets for resources, goods and services including customer expectations, market orientation and the marketing mix (B&M);
- the key communication and information technologies used in business and management (B&M);
- The development of appropriate policies and strategies for (banks) at the corporate level within a changing national and international environment (B&M).
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- use critical thinking, analysis and synthesis to evaluate and apply concepts and insights from business disciplines, including comprehension of complex scenarios (B&M) (A);
- formulate and solve problems, both structured and unstructured,
- advise on decisions using appropriate qualitative and quantitative skills, including the ability to identify and evaluate a range of alternative solutions (B&M);
- gather relevant data and evidence from various sources, integrate them appropriately and reference sources adequately and critically evaluate arguments and evidence (A);
- relate theory to practice in Banking, Finance and Management (B&M)
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- Communicate effectively in a business context, using a range of styles and media appropriate for management (B&M);
- make effective use of information and communication technologies (ICT) in a business context including word processing, storage and manipulation of data, generation of presentations, use of the internet and e-mail using appropriate software (B&M)
- conduct research using a range of sources of business-related materials including books, journals, trade and financial press, official statistics and the internet (B&M)
- use effective team-working skills, including leadership, team-building and project management (B&M)
- use credit appraisal skills and knowledge of funding options to review a wide range of business proposals from the financier's perspective
- apply numeracy and economic modelling techniques to finance problems and phenomena (B&M amended)
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- Organise themselves personally and independently to be a valued contributor through time management, self-direction, self-motivation, tenacity and proactiveness (B&M);
- Analyse and assess their own personality, needs and abilities and be proactive in managing their personal development (B&M);
- Deploy appropriate interpersonal skills to achieve the best from others, including effective communication, listening, influencing and conflict resolution (B&M);
- Display a positive attitude to change, with a desire for excellence and a visionary and positive approach to future developments;
- Accept and analyse new ideas and assess alternatives when presented with a range of possible interpretations and/or solutions;
- Learn and work independently (B&M);
- Interpret numerical information, reason numerically and apply appropriate mathematical and statistical techniques (B&M);
- Communicate clearly and persuasively, both orally and in writing (B&M);
- Use information and communication technologies effectively and efficiently (ICT);
- Work well in a team, using appropriate skills, including leadership, team-building and project management (B&M).
4. Programme structure
4.1 Part A - Introductory Modules
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTER 1 and 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSA007 Skills for Study, Placement and Employment | 20 |
SEMESTER 1 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSA005 Organisational Behaviour | 10 |
BSA013 Principles of Financial Accounting | 10 |
BSA020 Microeconomics for Financial Studies | 10 |
BSA035 Introduction to Banking | 10 |
BSA080 Quantitative Methods for Business A | 10 |
or BSA085 Quantitative Methods for Business B | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSA014 Financial Accounting and Analysis | 10 |
BSA022 Macroeconomics for Financial Studies | 10 |
BSA036 Banking Law and Practice | 10 |
BSA053 Organisations in the International Context | 10 |
BSA110 Business Modelling A | 10 |
or BSA115 Business Modelling B | 10 |
4.2 Part B - Degree Modules
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTER 1 and 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
ECB015 Economics of the Financial System | 20 |
SEMESTER 1 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSB010 Business Information Management | 10 |
BSB025 Financial Management | 10 |
BSB120 Management Science Methods | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSB027 Financial Markets and Derivatives Fundamentals | 10 |
BSB067 Business Lending | 10 |
BSB070 Accounting for Management Decisions | 10 |
SEMESTER 1 OPTIONAL MODULES (CHOOSE TWO) | |
BSB030 Marketing | 10 |
BSB040 Human Resource Management | 10 |
BSB046 Organisation Studies | 10 |
BSB050 International Business | 10 |
BSB100 Operations Management | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 OPTIONAL MODULES (CHOOSE TWO) | |
BSB007 Financial Reporting | 10 |
BSB012 Information Systems Development | 10 |
BSB024 International Economics | 10 |
BSB052 International Management | 10 |
BSB087 Vocational Psychology | 10 |
BSB105 Brand Management | 10 |
BSB110 Data Analysis for Management | 10 |
BSB135 Consumer Behaviour | 10 |
BSB150 Business Ethics and Corporate Social Responsibility | 10 |
4.3 Part I
Candidates pursue one of the following streams:
i) Placement Stream
Candidates will undertake an appropriate business placement.
ii) Study Abroad Stream
Candidates will study at one of the School of Business and Economics approved academic institutions.
iii) Split Stream
Candidates will undertake an appropriate business placement for half the year and will study at one of the School of Business and Economics approved academic institutions for the other half of the academic year.
(iv) Language Related Placement
Candidates will undertake a year abroad in employment, for example as an English language assistant in a school or other educational establishment, approved by the School of Business and Economics.
4.4 Part C - Degree Modules
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTER 1 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSC015 Financial Management and Corporate Policy | 10 |
BSC044 Principles of Strategic Management | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSC042 Corporate and Wholesale Banking | 10 |
BSC045 Strategy in Banking | 10 |
SEMESTER 1 OPTIONAL MODULES (CHOOSE FOUR) | |
BSC020 Corporate Reconstruction and Turnaround | 10 |
BSC030 Corporate Governance | 10 |
BSC051 International Corporate Governance and Firms. | 10 |
BSC062 Analytics for Management | 10 |
BSC063 Decision and Efficiency Analysis | |
BSC070 Technology in Business and Society | 10 |
BSC071 Managing Big Data | 10 |
BSC097 Knowledge Management | 10 |
BSC100 Advanced Interpersonal Skills | 10 |
BSC105 International Human Resource Management | 10 |
BSC110 Marketing Strategy and Planning | 10 |
BSC115 International Marketing | 10 |
BSC130 Business Programming | 10 |
BSC132 Small Business Issues | 10 |
BSC165 Business Forecasting | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 OPTIONAL MODULES (CHOOSE FOUR) | |
BSC016 Financial Risk Management | 10 |
BSC018 Behavioural Finance | 10 |
BSC025 Auditing | 10 |
BSC053 International Negotiations | 10 |
BSC059 Business and Entrepreneurialism in Postconflict Spaces | 10 |
BSC064 Business Optimisation | 10 |
BSC067 Simulation for Decision Support | 10 |
BSC068 Consulting for Decision Making | 10 |
BSC072 Strategic Information Management | 10 |
BSC080 Analysing Careers | 10 |
BSC085 The Changing Work Organisation | 10 |
BSC117 Services Marketing | 10 |
BSC124 Marketing Communications | 10 |
BSC134 Business Planning for New Ventures | 10 |
BSC136 Enterprise Resource Planning | 10 |
BSC140 Lean Operations | 10 |
BSC144 Project Management | 10 |
BSC175 Retail Location | 10 |
Various semester 2 modules in the final year have a pre-requisite module in semester 1 of the final year. Students must carefully check their preferred modules' pre-requisites before making selections as all pre-requisites will be rigorously enforced. |
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
In order to progress from Part A to Part B and from Part B to C and to be eligible for the award of an Honours degree, candidates must not only satisfy the minimum credit requirements set out in Regulation XX but also:
- to progress from Part B to the period of professional training or study at an approved institution abroad, candidates must accumulate at least 100 credits in Part B as well as achieving at least 30% in all modules taken in Part B.
Provision will be made in accordance with regulation XX for candidates who have the right of re-assessment in Part A or Part B of the programme to undergo re-assessment in the University’s special assessment period.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
Candidates’ final degree classification will be determined on the basis of their performance in degree level Module Assessments in Parts B and C, in accordance with the scheme set out in regulation XX. The average percentage marks for each Part will be combined in the ratio Part B 25: Part C 75, to determine the final overall percentage mark for the Programme (the Programme Mark).
Programme Specification
BS BSc (Hons) Banking, Finance and Management (2016 entry)
Academic Year: 2017/18
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at 天堂视频 (available soon)
- What makes 天堂视频 programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | 天堂视频 |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | School of Business and Economics |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | The programme is accredited by: The Chartered Institute of Management Accountants (CIMA), The Institute of Financial Services (IFS) and the Association of Corporate Treasurers (ACT). In order to qualify for the professional institutes’ examination exemptions offered to graduates from this degree, candidates must achieve minimum module marks stipulated by these bodies which, in some cases, exceed the minimum marks required for progression and degree award. Up to date information may be obtained from the relevant professional bodies. |
Final award | BSc/ BSC DPS /BSc DInts |
Programme title | Banking, Finance and Management |
Programme code | BSUB20 |
Length of programme | The duration of the programmes is six semesters, plus one academic year, and has four streams. Candidates following the Placement Stream are required to spend the third academic year undertaking professional training leading to the Diploma in Professional Studies, in accordance with Senate Regulation XI. Candidates following the Study Abroad Stream or the Language Related Placement Stream are required to spend the third academic year at an approved academic institution. Candidates following the Split Stream are required to spend six months of the third academic year undertaking professional training, and the other half of the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution. The Study Abroad, the Language Related Placement and the Split Stream lead to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI. The third academic year (Part I) occurs between Part B and Part C. |
UCAS code | N301 |
Admissions criteria | http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/undergraduate/courses/departments/business-economics/bankingfinanceandmanagement/ |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
The Banking, Finance and Management degree programme aims to produce high quality graduates with the knowledge, skills and understanding in the areas of management, banking and economics for an effective and valued career in the financial services or a related management function.
Within this general aim the programme specifically seeks to encourage students
- To develop knowledge, concepts and skills in the major academic disciplines of business and management as a sound basis for practice, study and training in the graduate’s chosen profession.
- To develop the concepts, analytical approaches, evaluative thinking and numeracy skills necessary for management problem solving, including through individual experience on placement.
- To develop a deep understanding in areas of accounting, banking law and practice, economics and monetary and financial systems by pursuing them over an extended period and in depth.
- To develop a full range of professional skills and personal qualities beneficial for managing in finance and banking related areas.
- To develop a critical awareness of the dynamics of the relevant UK and international environments affecting banking and finance.
- To develop a positive attitude to change, a desire for excellence, a visionary and positive approach to future developments and an openness to new ideas.
Consequently the programme seeks
- To provide a relevant, practical and constantly updated programme through close links with banks, leading financial institutions and professional bodies and through vocational experience in a professional placement.
- To provide students with the opportunity to see ways in which theory can be applied in practice, both through taught content and through individual experience on professional placement.
- To provide the opportunity for students to examine critically and in depth key issues faced by modern day bankers and financial managers.
- To provide a range of optional subjects that, in addition to core subjects, will enable graduates either to obtain substantial exemptions from professional examinations or to pursue more general management careers.
- To develop teaching and learning in response to advances in scholarship and the needs of the business community.
- To enhance the employability of our graduates.
The School of Business and Economics at 天堂视频 is distinctive amongst 'traditional' university business schools in incorporating a third year spent on professional placement. This is an integral element of the programme and something which we believe is of particular benefit in achieving these aims. It offers students on our Banking, Finance and Management degree additional and valuable opportunities to develop their knowledge, understanding and skills.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
- Accounting Subject Benchmark Statement (A)
- General Business and Management Benchmark Statement (B&M)
- The Framework for Higher Education Qualifications
- Requirements of the relevant professional bodies.
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
The programme provides opportunities for students to develop and demonstrate knowledge and understanding, qualities, skills and other attributes in the areas shown below. These intended learning outcomes are set in the context of the QAA subject benchmark statements for Accounting and General Business and Management. Those relating directly to the benchmarks are marked (A) and/or (B&M) below.
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding of:
- the foundation disciplines of business and management including economics, mathematics and statistics sufficient to enable a clear understanding of the central aspects of the main business and management functions (B&M);
- the economic, technological, financial, legal, cultural and political context within which banks and other businesses operate (B&M amended);
- the nature of organisations and the behaviour of people within them, both individually and working in groups (B&M);
- integration of concepts and from the various business disciplines to comprehend business situations and develop appropriate analysis and solutions (B&M);
- banking and financial management in its major contexts, including the legal and social environments and the business entity and capital markets (A amended);
- current technical language, developments, methods, practices and issues in banking and financial management;
- selected techniques and practices in banking and financial management;
- methods of recording and summarising economic events and preparation of financial statements (A);
- analytical tools for the effective financial management of business operations (A);
- the sources, uses and management of finance, the use of accounting and other information systems for managerial applications (B&M);
- the management and development of people within organisations (B&M);
- the development, management and exploitation of information systems and their impact on organisations (B&M);
- the development and operation of markets for resources, goods and services including customer expectations, market orientation and the marketing mix (B&M);
- the key communication and information technologies used in business and management (B&M);
- The development of appropriate policies and strategies for (banks) at the corporate level within a changing national and international environment (B&M).
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- use critical thinking, analysis and synthesis to evaluate and apply concepts and insights from business disciplines, including comprehension of complex scenarios (B&M) (A);
- formulate and solve problems, both structured and unstructured,
- advise on decisions using appropriate qualitative and quantitative skills, including the ability to identify and evaluate a range of alternative solutions (B&M);
- gather relevant data and evidence from various sources, integrate them appropriately and reference sources adequately and critically evaluate arguments and evidence (A);
- relate theory to practice in Banking, Finance and Management (B&M)
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- Communicate effectively in a business context, using a range of styles and media appropriate for management (B&M);
- make effective use of information and communication technologies (ICT) in a business context including word processing, storage and manipulation of data, generation of presentations, use of the internet and e-mail using appropriate software (B&M)
- conduct research using a range of sources of business-related materials including books, journals, trade and financial press, official statistics and the internet (B&M)
- use effective team-working skills, including leadership, team-building and project management (B&M)
- use credit appraisal skills and knowledge of funding options to review a wide range of business proposals from the financier's perspective
- apply numeracy and economic modelling techniques to finance problems and phenomena (B&M amended)
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- Organise themselves personally and independently to be a valued contributor through time management, self-direction, self-motivation, tenacity and proactiveness (B&M);
- Analyse and assess their own personality, needs and abilities and be proactive in managing their personal development (B&M);
- Deploy appropriate interpersonal skills to achieve the best from others, including effective communication, listening, influencing and conflict resolution (B&M);
- Display a positive attitude to change, with a desire for excellence and a visionary and positive approach to future developments;
- Accept and analyse new ideas and assess alternatives when presented with a range of possible interpretations and/or solutions;
- Learn and work independently (B&M);
- Interpret numerical information, reason numerically and apply appropriate mathematical and statistical techniques (B&M);
- Communicate clearly and persuasively, both orally and in writing (B&M);
- Use information and communication technologies effectively and efficiently (ICT);
- Work well in a team, using appropriate skills, including leadership, team-building and project management (B&M).
4. Programme structure
4.1 Part A - Introductory Modules
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTER 1 and 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSA007 Skills for Study, Placement and Employment | 20 |
SEMESTER 1 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSA005 Organisational Behaviour | 10 |
BSA013 Principles of Financial Accounting | 10 |
BSA020 Microeconomics for Financial Studies | 10 |
BSA035 Introduction to Banking | 10 |
BSA080 Quantitative Methods for Business A | 10 |
or BSA085 Quantitative Methods for Business B | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSA014 Financial Accounting and Analysis | 10 |
BSA022 Macroeconomics for Financial Studies | 10 |
BSA036 Banking Law and Practice | 10 |
BSA053 Organisations in the International Context | 10 |
BSA110 Business Modelling A | 10 |
or BSA115 Business Modelling B | 10 |
4.2 Part B - Degree Modules
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTER 1 and 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
ECB015 Economics of the Financial System | 20 |
SEMESTER 1 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSB010 Business Information Management | 10 |
BSB025 Financial Management | 10 |
BSB120 Management Science Methods | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSB027 Financial Markets and Derivatives Fundamentals | 10 |
BSB067 Business Lending | 10 |
BSB070 Accounting for Management Decisions | 10 |
SEMESTER 1 OPTIONAL MODULES (CHOOSE TWO) | |
BSB030 Marketing | 10 |
BSB040 Human Resource Management | 10 |
BSB046 Organisation Studies | 10 |
BSB050 International Business | 10 |
BSB100 Operations Management | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 OPTIONAL MODULES (CHOOSE TWO) | |
BSB007 Financial Reporting | 10 |
BSB012 Information Systems Development | 10 |
BSB024 International Economics | 10 |
BSB052 International Management | 10 |
BSB087 Vocational Psychology | 10 |
BSB105 Brand Management | 10 |
BSB110 Data Analysis for Management | 10 |
BSB135 Consumer Behaviour | 10 |
BSB150 Business Ethics and Corporate Social Responsibility | 10 |
4.3 Part I
Candidates pursue one of the following streams:
i) Placement Stream
Candidates will undertake an appropriate business placement.
ii) Study Abroad Stream
Candidates will study at one of the School of Business and Economics approved academic institutions.
iii) Split Stream
Candidates will undertake an appropriate business placement for half the year and will study at one of the School of Business and Economics approved academic institutions for the other half of the academic year.
(iv) Language Related Placement
Candidates will undertake a year abroad in employment, for example as an English language assistant in a school or other educational establishment, approved by the School of Business and Economics.
4.4 Part C - Degree Modules
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTER 1 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSC015 Financial Management and Corporate Policy | 10 |
BSC044 Principles of Strategic Management | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSC042 Corporate and Wholesale Banking | 10 |
BSC045 Strategy in Banking | 10 |
SEMESTER 1 OPTIONAL MODULES (CHOOSE FOUR) | |
BSC020 Corporate Reconstruction and Turnaround | 10 |
BSC030 Corporate Governance | 10 |
BSC051 International Corporate Governance and Firms. | 10 |
BSC062 Analytics for Management | 10 |
BSC063 Decision and Efficiency Analysis | |
BSC070 Technology in Business and Society | 10 |
BSC071 Managing Big Data | 10 |
BSC097 Knowledge Management | 10 |
BSC100 Advanced Interpersonal Skills | 10 |
BSC105 International Human Resource Management | 10 |
BSC110 Marketing Strategy and Planning | 10 |
BSC115 International Marketing | 10 |
BSC130 Business Programming | 10 |
BSC132 Small Business Issues | 10 |
BSC165 Business Forecasting | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 OPTIONAL MODULES (CHOOSE FOUR) | |
BSC016 Financial Risk Management | 10 |
BSC018 Behavioural Finance | 10 |
BSC025 Auditing | 10 |
BSC053 International Negotiations | 10 |
BSC059 Business and Entrepreneurialism in Postconflict Spaces | 10 |
BSC064 Business Optimisation | 10 |
BSC067 Simulation for Decision Support | 10 |
BSC068 Consulting for Decision Making | 10 |
BSC072 Strategic Information Management | 10 |
BSC080 Analysing Careers | 10 |
BSC085 The Changing Work Organisation | 10 |
BSC117 Services Marketing | 10 |
BSC124 Marketing Communications | 10 |
BSC134 Business Planning for New Ventures | 10 |
BSC136 Enterprise Resource Planning | 10 |
BSC140 Lean Operations | 10 |
BSC144 Project Management | 10 |
BSC175 Retail Location | 10 |
Various semester 2 modules in the final year have a pre-requisite module in semester 1 of the final year. Students must carefully check their preferred modules' pre-requisites before making selections as all pre-requisites will be rigorously enforced. |
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
In order to progress from Part A to Part B and from Part B to C and to be eligible for the award of an Honours degree, candidates must not only satisfy the minimum credit requirements set out in Regulation XX but also:
- to progress from Part B to the period of professional training or study at an approved institution abroad, candidates must accumulate at least 100 credits in Part B as well as achieving at least 30% in all modules taken in Part B.
Provision will be made in accordance with regulation XX for candidates who have the right of re-assessment in Part A or Part B of the programme to undergo re-assessment in the University’s special assessment period.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
Candidates’ final degree classification will be determined on the basis of their performance in degree level Module Assessments in Parts B and C, in accordance with the scheme set out in regulation XX. The average percentage marks for each Part will be combined in the ratio Part B 25: Part C 75, to determine the final overall percentage mark for the Programme (the Programme Mark).
Programme Specification
BS BSc (Hons) Banking, Finance and Management (2015 entry)
Academic Year: 2017/18
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at 天堂视频 (available soon)
- What makes 天堂视频 programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | 天堂视频 |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | School of Business and Economics |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | The programme is accredited by: The Chartered Institute of Management Accountants (CIMA), The Institute of Financial Services (IFS) and the Association of Corporate Treasurers (ACT). In order to qualify for the professional institutes’ examination exemptions offered to graduates from this degree, candidates must achieve minimum module marks stipulated by these bodies which, in some cases, exceed the minimum marks required for progression and degree award. Up to date information may be obtained from the relevant professional bodies. |
Final award | BSc/ BSC DPS /BSc DInts |
Programme title | Banking, Finance and Management |
Programme code | BSUB20 |
Length of programme | The duration of the programmes is six semesters, plus one academic year, and has four streams. Candidates following the Placement Stream are required to spend the third academic year undertaking professional training leading to the Diploma in Professional Studies, in accordance with Senate Regulation XI. Candidates following the Study Abroad Stream or the Language Related Placement Stream are required to spend the third academic year at an approved academic institution. Candidates following the Split Stream are required to spend six months of the third academic year undertaking professional training, and the other half of the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution. The Study Abroad, the Language Related Placement and the Split Stream lead to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI. The third academic year (Part I) occurs between Part B and Part C. |
UCAS code | N301 |
Admissions criteria | http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/undergraduate/courses/departments/business-economics/bankingfinanceandmanagement/ |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
The Banking, Finance and Management degree programme aims to produce high quality graduates with the knowledge, skills and understanding in the areas of management, banking and economics for an effective and valued career in the financial services or a related management function.
Within this general aim the programme specifically seeks to encourage students
- To develop knowledge, concepts and skills in the major academic disciplines of business and management as a sound basis for practice, study and training in the graduate’s chosen profession.
- To develop the concepts, analytical approaches, evaluative thinking and numeracy skills necessary for management problem solving, including through individual experience on placement.
- To develop a deep understanding in areas of accounting, banking law and practice, economics and monetary and financial systems by pursuing them over an extended period and in depth.
- To develop a full range of professional skills and personal qualities beneficial for managing in finance and banking related areas.
- To develop a critical awareness of the dynamics of the relevant UK and international environments affecting banking and finance.
- To develop a positive attitude to change, a desire for excellence, a visionary and positive approach to future developments and an openness to new ideas.
Consequently the programme seeks
- To provide a relevant, practical and constantly updated programme through close links with banks, leading financial institutions and professional bodies and through vocational experience in a professional placement.
- To provide students with the opportunity to see ways in which theory can be applied in practice, both through taught content and through individual experience on professional placement.
- To provide the opportunity for students to examine critically and in depth key issues faced by modern day bankers and financial managers.
- To provide a range of optional subjects that, in addition to core subjects, will enable graduates either to obtain substantial exemptions from professional examinations or to pursue more general management careers.
- To develop teaching and learning in response to advances in scholarship and the needs of the business community.
- To enhance the employability of our graduates.
The School of Business and Economics at 天堂视频 is distinctive amongst 'traditional' university business schools in incorporating a third year spent on professional placement. This is an integral element of the programme and something which we believe is of particular benefit in achieving these aims. It offers students on our Banking, Finance and Management degree additional and valuable opportunities to develop their knowledge, understanding and skills.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
- Accounting Subject Benchmark Statement (A)
- General Business and Management Benchmark Statement (B&M)
- The Framework for Higher Education Qualifications
- Requirements of the relevant professional bodies.
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
The programme provides opportunities for students to develop and demonstrate knowledge and understanding, qualities, skills and other attributes in the areas shown below. These intended learning outcomes are set in the context of the QAA subject benchmark statements for Accounting and General Business and Management. Those relating directly to the benchmarks are marked (A) and/or (B&M) below.
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding of:
- the foundation disciplines of business and management including economics, mathematics and statistics sufficient to enable a clear understanding of the central aspects of the main business and management functions (B&M);
- the economic, technological, financial, legal, cultural and political context within which banks and other businesses operate (B&M amended);
- the nature of organisations and the behaviour of people within them, both individually and working in groups (B&M);
- integration of concepts and from the various business disciplines to comprehend business situations and develop appropriate analysis and solutions (B&M);
- banking and financial management in its major contexts, including the legal and social environments and the business entity and capital markets (A amended);
- current technical language, developments, methods, practices and issues in banking and financial management;
- selected techniques and practices in banking and financial management;
- methods of recording and summarising economic events and preparation of financial statements (A);
- analytical tools for the effective financial management of business operations (A);
- the sources, uses and management of finance, the use of accounting and other information systems for managerial applications (B&M);
- the management and development of people within organisations (B&M);
- the development, management and exploitation of information systems and their impact on organisations (B&M);
- the development and operation of markets for resources, goods and services including customer expectations, market orientation and the marketing mix (B&M);
- the key communication and information technologies used in business and management (B&M);
- The development of appropriate policies and strategies for (banks) at the corporate level within a changing national and international environment (B&M).
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- use critical thinking, analysis and synthesis to evaluate and apply concepts and insights from business disciplines, including comprehension of complex scenarios (B&M) (A);
- formulate and solve problems, both structured and unstructured,
- advise on decisions using appropriate qualitative and quantitative skills, including the ability to identify and evaluate a range of alternative solutions (B&M);
- gather relevant data and evidence from various sources, integrate them appropriately and reference sources adequately and critically evaluate arguments and evidence (A);
- relate theory to practice in Banking, Finance and Management (B&M)
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- Communicate effectively in a business context, using a range of styles and media appropriate for management (B&M);
- make effective use of information and communication technologies (ICT) in a business context including word processing, storage and manipulation of data, generation of presentations, use of the internet and e-mail using appropriate software (B&M)
- conduct research using a range of sources of business-related materials including books, journals, trade and financial press, official statistics and the internet (B&M)
- use effective team-working skills, including leadership, team-building and project management (B&M)
- use credit appraisal skills and knowledge of funding options to review a wide range of business proposals from the financier's perspective
- apply numeracy and economic modelling techniques to finance problems and phenomena (B&M amended)
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- Organise themselves personally and independently to be a valued contributor through time management, self-direction, self-motivation, tenacity and proactiveness (B&M);
- Analyse and assess their own personality, needs and abilities and be proactive in managing their personal development (B&M);
- Deploy appropriate interpersonal skills to achieve the best from others, including effective communication, listening, influencing and conflict resolution (B&M);
- Display a positive attitude to change, with a desire for excellence and a visionary and positive approach to future developments;
- Accept and analyse new ideas and assess alternatives when presented with a range of possible interpretations and/or solutions;
- Learn and work independently (B&M);
- Interpret numerical information, reason numerically and apply appropriate mathematical and statistical techniques (B&M);
- Communicate clearly and persuasively, both orally and in writing (B&M);
- Use information and communication technologies effectively and efficiently (ICT);
- Work well in a team, using appropriate skills, including leadership, team-building and project management (B&M).
4. Programme structure
4.1 Part A - Introductory Modules
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTER 1 and 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSA007 Skills for Study, Placement and Employment | 20 |
SEMESTER 1 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSA005 Organisational Behaviour | 10 |
BSA013 Principles of Financial Accounting | 10 |
BSA020 Microeconomics for Financial Studies | 10 |
BSA035 Introduction to Banking | 10 |
BSA080 Quantitative Methods for Business A | 10 |
or BSB085 Quantitative Methods for Business B | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSA014 Financial Accounting and Analysis | 10 |
BSA022 Macroeconomics for Financial Studies | 10 |
BSA036 Banking Law and Practice | 10 |
BSA053 Organisations in the International Context | 10 |
BSA110 Business Modelling A | 10 |
or BSA115 Business Modelling B | 10 |
4.2 Part B - Degree Modules
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTER 1 and 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
ECB015 Economics of the Financial System | 20 |
SEMESTER 1 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSB010 Business Information Management | 10 |
BSB030 Marketing | 10 |
BSB040 Human Resource Management | 10 |
BSB120 Management Science Methods | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSB025 Financial Management | 10 |
BSB067 Business Lending | 10 |
BSB070 Accounting for Management Decisions | 10 |
SEMESTER 1 OPTIONAL MODULES (CHOOSE ONE) | |
BSB050 International Business | 10 |
BSB100 Operations Management | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 OPTIONAL MODULES (CHOOSE TWO) | |
BSB007 Financial Reporting | 10 |
BSB012 Information Systems Development | 10 |
BSB024 International Economics | 10 |
BSB046 Organisation Studies | 10 |
BSB052 International Management | 10 |
BSB087 Vocational Psychology | 10 |
BSB105 Brand Management | 10 |
BSB110 Data Analysis for Management | 10 |
BSB135 Consumer Behaviour | 10 |
BSB150 Business Ethics and Corporate Social Responsibility | 10 |
4.3 Part I
Candidates pursue one of the following streams:
i) Placement Stream
Candidates will undertake an appropriate business placement.
ii) Study Abroad Stream
Candidates will study at one of the School of Business and Economics approved academic institutions.
iii) Split Stream
Candidates will undertake an appropriate business placement for half the year and will study at one of the School of Business and Economics approved academic institutions for the other half of the academic year.
(iv) Language Related Placement
Candidates will undertake a year abroad in employment, for example as an English language assistant in a school or other educational establishment, approved by the School of Business and Economics.
4.4 Part C - Degree Modules
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTER 1 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSC015 Financial Management and Corporate Policy | 10 |
BSC044 Principles of Strategic Management | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSC042 Corporate and Wholesale Banking | 10 |
BSC045 Strategy in Banking | 10 |
SEMESTER 1 OPTIONAL MODULES (CHOOSE FOUR) | |
BSC020 Corporate Reconstruction and Turnaround | 10 |
BSC030 Corporate Governance | 10 |
BSC051 International Corporate Governance and Firms. | 10 |
BSC062 Analytics for Management | 10 |
BSC063 Decision and Efficiency Analysis | 10 |
BSC070 Technology in Business and Society | 10 |
BSC097 Knowledge Management | 10 |
BSC100 Advanced Interpersonal Skills | 10 |
BSC105 International Human Resource Management | 10 |
BSC110 Marketing Strategy and Planning | 10 |
BSC115 International Marketing | 10 |
BSC130 Business Programming | 10 |
BSC132 Small Business Issues | 10 |
BSC165 Business Forecasting | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 OPTIONAL MODULES (CHOOSE FOUR) | |
BSC016 Financial Risk Management | 10 |
BSC018 Behavioural Finance | 10 |
BSC025 Auditing | 10 |
BSC053 International Negotiations | 10 |
BSC059 Business and Entrepreneurialism in Postconflict Spaces | 10 |
BSC064 Business Optimisation | 10 |
BSC067 Simulation for Decision Support | 10 |
BSC068 Consulting for Decision Making | 10 |
BSC071 Managing Big Data | 10 |
BSC072 Strategic Information Management | 10 |
BSC080 Analysing Careers | 10 |
BSC085 The Changing Work Organisation | 10 |
BSC117 Services Marketing | 10 |
BSC124 Marketing Communications | 10 |
BSC134 Business Planning for New Ventures | 10 |
BSC136 Enterprise Resource Planning | 10 |
BSC140 Lean Operations | 10 |
BSC144 Project Management | 10 |
BSC175 Retail Location | 10 |
Various semester 2 modules in the final year have a pre-requisite module in semester 1 of the final year. Students must carefully check their preferred modules' pre-requisites before making selections as all pre-requisites will be rigorously enforced. |
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
In order to progress from Part A to Part B and from Part B to C and to be eligible for the award of an Honours degree, candidates must not only satisfy the minimum credit requirements set out in Regulation XX but also:
- to progress from Part B to the period of professional training or study at an approved institution abroad, candidates must accumulate at least 100 credits in Part B as well as achieving at least 30% in all modules taken in Part B.
Provision will be made in accordance with regulation XX for candidates who have the right of re-assessment in Part A or Part B of the programme to undergo re-assessment in the University’s special assessment period.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
Candidates’ final degree classification will be determined on the basis of their performance in degree level Module Assessments in Parts B and C, in accordance with the scheme set out in regulation XX. The average percentage marks for each Part will be combined in the ratio Part B 25: Part C 75, to determine the final overall percentage mark for the Programme (the Programme Mark).
Programme Specification
BS BSc (Hons) Banking, Finance and Management (2014 entry)
Academic Year: 2017/18
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at 天堂视频 (available soon)
- What makes 天堂视频 programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | 天堂视频 |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | School of Business and Economics |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | The programme is accredited by: The Chartered Institute of Management Accountants (CIMA), The Institute of Financial Services (IFS) and the Association of Corporate Treasurers (ACT). In order to qualify for the professional institutes’ examination exemptions offered to graduates from this degree, candidates must achieve minimum module marks stipulated by these bodies which, in some cases, exceed the minimum marks required for progression and degree award. Up to date information may be obtained from the relevant professional bodies. |
Final award | BSc/ BSC DPS /BSc DInts |
Programme title | Banking, Finance and Management |
Programme code | BSUB20 |
Length of programme | The duration of the programmes is six semesters, plus one academic year, and has four streams. Candidates following the Placement Stream are required to spend the third academic year undertaking professional training leading to the Diploma in Professional Studies, in accordance with Senate Regulation XI. Candidates following the Study Abroad Stream or the Language Related Placement Stream are required to spend the third academic year at an approved academic institution. Candidates following the Split Stream are required to spend six months of the third academic year undertaking professional training, and the other half of the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution. The Study Abroad, the Language Related Placement and the Split Stream lead to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI. The third academic year (Part I) occurs between Part B and Part C. |
UCAS code | N301 |
Admissions criteria | http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/undergraduate/courses/departments/business-economics/bankingfinanceandmanagement/ |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
The Banking, Finance and Management degree programme aims to produce high quality graduates with the knowledge, skills and understanding in the areas of management, banking and economics for an effective and valued career in the financial services or a related management function.
Within this general aim the programme specifically seeks to encourage students
- To develop knowledge, concepts and skills in the major academic disciplines of business and management as a sound basis for practice, study and training in the graduate’s chosen profession.
- To develop the concepts, analytical approaches, evaluative thinking and numeracy skills necessary for management problem solving, including through individual experience on placement.
- To develop a deep understanding in areas of accounting, banking law and practice, economics and monetary and financial systems by pursuing them over an extended period and in depth.
- To develop a full range of professional skills and personal qualities beneficial for managing in finance and banking related areas.
- To develop a critical awareness of the dynamics of the relevant UK and international environments affecting banking and finance.
- To develop a positive attitude to change, a desire for excellence, a visionary and positive approach to future developments and an openness to new ideas.
Consequently the programme seeks
- To provide a relevant, practical and constantly updated programme through close links with banks, leading financial institutions and professional bodies and through vocational experience in a professional placement.
- To provide students with the opportunity to see ways in which theory can be applied in practice, both through taught content and through individual experience on professional placement.
- To provide the opportunity for students to examine critically and in depth key issues faced by modern day bankers and financial managers.
- To provide a range of optional subjects that, in addition to core subjects, will enable graduates either to obtain substantial exemptions from professional examinations or to pursue more general management careers.
- To develop teaching and learning in response to advances in scholarship and the needs of the business community.
- To enhance the employability of our graduates.
The School of Business and Economics at 天堂视频 is distinctive amongst 'traditional' university business schools in incorporating a third year spent on professional placement. This is an integral element of the programme and something which we believe is of particular benefit in achieving these aims. It offers students on our Banking, Finance and Management degree additional and valuable opportunities to develop their knowledge, understanding and skills.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
- Accounting Subject Benchmark Statement (A)
- General Business and Management Benchmark Statement (B&M)
- The Framework for Higher Education Qualifications
- Requirements of the relevant professional bodies.
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
The programme provides opportunities for students to develop and demonstrate knowledge and understanding, qualities, skills and other attributes in the areas shown below. These intended learning outcomes are set in the context of the QAA subject benchmark statements for Accounting and General Business and Management. Those relating directly to the benchmarks are marked (A) and/or (B&M) below.
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding of:
- the foundation disciplines of business and management including economics, mathematics and statistics sufficient to enable a clear understanding of the central aspects of the main business and management functions (B&M);
- the economic, technological, financial, legal, cultural and political context within which banks and other businesses operate (B&M amended);
- the nature of organisations and the behaviour of people within them, both individually and working in groups (B&M);
- integration of concepts and from the various business disciplines to comprehend business situations and develop appropriate analysis and solutions (B&M);
- banking and financial management in its major contexts, including the legal and social environments and the business entity and capital markets (A amended);
- current technical language, developments, methods, practices and issues in banking and financial management;
- selected techniques and practices in banking and financial management;
- methods of recording and summarising economic events and preparation of financial statements (A);
- analytical tools for the effective financial management of business operations (A);
- the sources, uses and management of finance, the use of accounting and other information systems for managerial applications (B&M);
- the management and development of people within organisations (B&M);
- the development, management and exploitation of information systems and their impact on organisations (B&M);
- the development and operation of markets for resources, goods and services including customer expectations, market orientation and the marketing mix (B&M);
- the key communication and information technologies used in business and management (B&M);
- The development of appropriate policies and strategies for (banks) at the corporate level within a changing national and international environment (B&M).
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- use critical thinking, analysis and synthesis to evaluate and apply concepts and insights from business disciplines, including comprehension of complex scenarios (B&M) (A);
- formulate and solve problems, both structured and unstructured,
- advise on decisions using appropriate qualitative and quantitative skills, including the ability to identify and evaluate a range of alternative solutions (B&M);
- gather relevant data and evidence from various sources, integrate them appropriately and reference sources adequately and critically evaluate arguments and evidence (A);
- relate theory to practice in Banking, Finance and Management (B&M)
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- Communicate effectively in a business context, using a range of styles and media appropriate for management (B&M);
- make effective use of information and communication technologies (ICT) in a business context including word processing, storage and manipulation of data, generation of presentations, use of the internet and e-mail using appropriate software (B&M)
- conduct research using a range of sources of business-related materials including books, journals, trade and financial press, official statistics and the internet (B&M)
- use effective team-working skills, including leadership, team-building and project management (B&M)
- use credit appraisal skills and knowledge of funding options to review a wide range of business proposals from the financier's perspective
- apply numeracy and economic modelling techniques to finance problems and phenomena (B&M amended)
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- Organise themselves personally and independently to be a valued contributor through time management, self-direction, self-motivation, tenacity and proactiveness (B&M);
- Analyse and assess their own personality, needs and abilities and be proactive in managing their personal development (B&M);
- Deploy appropriate interpersonal skills to achieve the best from others, including effective communication, listening, influencing and conflict resolution (B&M);
- Display a positive attitude to change, with a desire for excellence and a visionary and positive approach to future developments;
- Accept and analyse new ideas and assess alternatives when presented with a range of possible interpretations and/or solutions;
- Learn and work independently (B&M);
- Interpret numerical information, reason numerically and apply appropriate mathematical and statistical techniques (B&M);
- Communicate clearly and persuasively, both orally and in writing (B&M);
- Use information and communication technologies effectively and efficiently (ICT);
- Work well in a team, using appropriate skills, including leadership, team-building and project management (B&M).
4. Programme structure
4.1 Part A - Introductory Modules
Semester 1
i) COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 60)
Code |
Title |
Modular Weight |
BSA005 |
Organisational Behaviour |
10 |
BSA007 |
Skills for Study, Placement and Employment (weight 20) continued in Semester 2 |
10 |
BSA017 |
Financial Accounting |
20 |
BSA035 |
Introduction to Banking |
10 |
BSA080 |
Quantitative Methods for Business A |
10 |
|
Or |
|
BSA085 |
Quantitative Methods for Business B |
10 |
Semester 2
i) COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 60)
Code |
Title |
Modular Weight |
BSA007 |
Skills for Study, Placement and Employment (weight 20) continued from Semester 1 |
10 |
BSA022 |
Macroeconomics for Financial Studies |
10 |
BSA036 |
Banking Law and Practice |
10 |
BSA060 |
Microeconomics for Busines |
10 |
BSA110 |
Business Modelling A |
20 |
|
Or |
|
BSA115 |
Business Modelling B |
20 |
4.2 Part B - Degree Modules
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTER 1 and 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
ECB015 Economics of the Financial System | 20 |
SEMESTER 1 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSB010 Business Information Management | 10 |
BSB030 Marketing | 10 |
BSB040 Human Resource Management | 10 |
BSB120 Decision Making Analysis | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSB025 Financial Management | 10 |
BSB067 Business Lending | 10 |
BSB070 Accounting for Management Decisions | 10 |
SEMESTER 1 OPTIONAL MODULES (CHOOSE ONE) | |
BSB050 International Business | 10 |
BSB100 Operations Management | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 OPTIONAL MODULES (CHOOSE TWO) | |
BSB007 Financial Reporting | 10 |
BSB012 Information Systems Development | 10 |
BSB024 International Economics | 10 |
BSB046 Organisation Studies | 10 |
BSB052 International Management | 10 |
BSB086 International Employment Relations | 10 |
BSB087 Vocational Psychology | 10 |
BSB105 Brand Management | 10 |
BSB110 Data Analysis for Management | 10 |
BSB135 Consumer Behaviour | 10 |
4.3 Part I
Candidates pursue one of the following streams:
i) Placement Stream
Candidates will undertake an appropriate business placement.
ii) Study Abroad Stream
Candidates will study at one of the School of Business and Economics approved academic institutions.
iii) Split Stream
Candidates will undertake an appropriate business placement for half the year and will study at one of the School of Business and Economics approved academic institutions for the other half of the academic year.
(iv) Language Related Placement
Candidates will undertake a year abroad in employment, for example as an English language assistant in a school or other educational establishment, approved by the School of Business and Economics.
4.4 Part C - Degree Modules
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTER 1 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSC015 Financial Management and Corporate Policy | 10 |
BSC044 Principles of Strategic Management | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSC042 Corporate and Wholesale Banking | 10 |
BSC045 Strategy in Banking | 10 |
SEMESTER 1 OPTIONAL MODULES (CHOOSE FOUR) | |
BSC030 Corporate Governance | 10 |
BSC051 International Corporate Governance and Firms. | 10 |
BSC063 Decision and Efficiency Analysis | 10 |
BSC070 Technology in Business and Society | 10 |
BSC097 Knowledge Management | 10 |
BSC100 Advanced Interpersonal Skills | 10 |
BSC105 International Human Resource Management | 10 |
BSC110 Marketing Strategy and Planning | 10 |
BSC115 International Marketing | 10 |
BSC130 Business Programming | 10 |
BSC132 Small Business Issues | 10 |
BSC165 Business Forecasting | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 OPTIONAL MODULES (CHOOSE FOUR) | |
BSC016 Financial Risk Management | 10 |
BSC018 Behavioural Finance | 10 |
BSC025 Auditing | 10 |
BSC053 International Negotiations | 10 |
BSC059 Business and Entrepreneurialism in Postconflict Spaces | 10 |
BSC064 Business Optimisation | 10 |
BSC067 Simulation for Decision Support | 10 |
BSC068 Consulting for Decision Making | 10 |
BSC071 Managing Big Data | 10 |
BSC072 Strategic Information Management | 10 |
BSC080 Analysing Careers | 10 |
BSC085 The Changing Work Organisation | 10 |
BSC117 Services Marketing | 10 |
BSC124 Marketing Communications | 10 |
BSC134 Business Planning for New Ventures | 10 |
BSC136 Enterprise Resource Planning | 10 |
BSC144 Project Management | 10 |
BSC150 Business Ethics | 10 |
BSC175 Retail Location | 10 |
Various semester 2 modules in the final year have a pre-requisite module in semester 1 of the final year. Students must carefully check their preferred modules' pre-requisites before making selections as all pre-requisites will be rigorously enforced. |
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
In order to progress from Part A to Part B and from Part B to C and to be eligible for the award of an Honours degree, candidates must not only satisfy the minimum credit requirements set out in Regulation XX but also:
- to progress from Part B to the period of professional training or study at an approved institution abroad, candidates must accumulate at least 100 credits in Part B as well as achieving at least 30% in all modules taken in Part B.
Provision will be made in accordance with regulation XX for candidates who have the right of re-assessment in Part A or Part B of the programme to undergo re-assessment in the University’s special assessment period.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
Candidates’ final degree classification will be determined on the basis of their performance in degree level Module Assessments in Parts B and C, in accordance with the scheme set out in regulation XX. The average percentage marks for each Part will be combined in the ratio Part B 25: Part C 75, to determine the final overall percentage mark for the Programme (the Programme Mark).
Programme Specification
BS BSc (Hons) Banking, Finance and Management (2013 entry)
Academic Year: 2017/18
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at 天堂视频 (available soon)
- What makes 天堂视频 programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | 天堂视频 |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | School of Business and Economics |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | The programme is accredited by: The Chartered Institute of Management Accountants (CIMA), The Institute of Financial Services (IFS) and the Association of Corporate Treasurers (ACT). In order to qualify for the professional institutes’ examination exemptions offered to graduates from this degree, candidates must achieve minimum module marks stipulated by these bodies which, in some cases, exceed the minimum marks required for progression and degree award. Up to date information may be obtained from the relevant professional bodies. |
Final award | BSc/ BSC DPS /BSc DInts |
Programme title | Banking, Finance and Management |
Programme code | BSUB20 |
Length of programme | The duration of the programmes is six semesters, plus one academic year, and has four streams. Candidates following the Placement Stream are required to spend the third academic year undertaking professional training leading to the Diploma in Professional Studies, in accordance with Senate Regulation XI. Candidates following the Study Abroad Stream or the Language Related Placement Stream are required to spend the third academic year at an approved academic institution. Candidates following the Split Stream are required to spend six months of the third academic year undertaking professional training, and the other half of the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution. The Study Abroad, the Language Related Placement and the Split Stream lead to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI. The third academic year (Part I) occurs between Part B and Part C. |
UCAS code | N301 |
Admissions criteria | http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/undergraduate/courses/departments/business-economics/bankingfinanceandmanagement/ |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
The Banking, Finance and Management degree programme aims to produce high quality graduates with the knowledge, skills and understanding in the areas of management, banking and economics for an effective and valued career in the financial services or a related management function.
Within this general aim the programme specifically seeks to encourage students
- To develop knowledge, concepts and skills in the major academic disciplines of business and management as a sound basis for practice, study and training in the graduate’s chosen profession.
- To develop the concepts, analytical approaches, evaluative thinking and numeracy skills necessary for management problem solving, including through individual experience on placement.
- To develop a deep understanding in areas of accounting, banking law and practice, economics and monetary and financial systems by pursuing them over an extended period and in depth.
- To develop a full range of professional skills and personal qualities beneficial for managing in finance and banking related areas.
- To develop a critical awareness of the dynamics of the relevant UK and international environments affecting banking and finance.
- To develop a positive attitude to change, a desire for excellence, a visionary and positive approach to future developments and an openness to new ideas.
Consequently the programme seeks
- To provide a relevant, practical and constantly updated programme through close links with banks, leading financial institutions and professional bodies and through vocational experience in a professional placement.
- To provide students with the opportunity to see ways in which theory can be applied in practice, both through taught content and through individual experience on professional placement.
- To provide the opportunity for students to examine critically and in depth key issues faced by modern day bankers and financial managers.
- To provide a range of optional subjects that, in addition to core subjects, will enable graduates either to obtain substantial exemptions from professional examinations or to pursue more general management careers.
- To develop teaching and learning in response to advances in scholarship and the needs of the business community.
- To enhance the employability of our graduates.
The School of Business and Economics at 天堂视频 is distinctive amongst 'traditional' university business schools in incorporating a third year spent on professional placement. This is an integral element of the programme and something which we believe is of particular benefit in achieving these aims. It offers students on our Banking, Finance and Management degree additional and valuable opportunities to develop their knowledge, understanding and skills.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
- Accounting Subject Benchmark Statement (A)
- General Business and Management Benchmark Statement (B&M)
- The Framework for Higher Education Qualifications
- Requirements of the relevant professional bodies.
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
The programme provides opportunities for students to develop and demonstrate knowledge and understanding, qualities, skills and other attributes in the areas shown below. These intended learning outcomes are set in the context of the QAA subject benchmark statements for Accounting and General Business and Management. Those relating directly to the benchmarks are marked (A) and/or (B&M) below.
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding of:
- the foundation disciplines of business and management including economics, mathematics and statistics sufficient to enable a clear understanding of the central aspects of the main business and management functions (B&M);
- the economic, technological, financial, legal, cultural and political context within which banks and other businesses operate (B&M amended);
- the nature of organisations and the behaviour of people within them, both individually and working in groups (B&M);
- integration of concepts and from the various business disciplines to comprehend business situations and develop appropriate analysis and solutions (B&M);
- banking and financial management in its major contexts, including the legal and social environments and the business entity and capital markets (A amended);
- current technical language, developments, methods, practices and issues in banking and financial management;
- selected techniques and practices in banking and financial management;
- methods of recording and summarising economic events and preparation of financial statements (A);
- analytical tools for the effective financial management of business operations (A);
- the sources, uses and management of finance, the use of accounting and other information systems for managerial applications (B&M);
- the management and development of people within organisations (B&M);
- the development, management and exploitation of information systems and their impact on organisations (B&M);
- the development and operation of markets for resources, goods and services including customer expectations, market orientation and the marketing mix (B&M);
- the key communication and information technologies used in business and management (B&M);
- The development of appropriate policies and strategies for (banks) at the corporate level within a changing national and international environment (B&M).
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- use critical thinking, analysis and synthesis to evaluate and apply concepts and insights from business disciplines, including comprehension of complex scenarios (B&M) (A);
- formulate and solve problems, both structured and unstructured,
- advise on decisions using appropriate qualitative and quantitative skills, including the ability to identify and evaluate a range of alternative solutions (B&M);
- gather relevant data and evidence from various sources, integrate them appropriately and reference sources adequately and critically evaluate arguments and evidence (A);
- relate theory to practice in Banking, Finance and Management (B&M)
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- Communicate effectively in a business context, using a range of styles and media appropriate for management (B&M);
- make effective use of information and communication technologies (ICT) in a business context including word processing, storage and manipulation of data, generation of presentations, use of the internet and e-mail using appropriate software (B&M)
- conduct research using a range of sources of business-related materials including books, journals, trade and financial press, official statistics and the internet (B&M)
- use effective team-working skills, including leadership, team-building and project management (B&M)
- use credit appraisal skills and knowledge of funding options to review a wide range of business proposals from the financier's perspective
- apply numeracy and economic modelling techniques to finance problems and phenomena (B&M amended)
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- Organise themselves personally and independently to be a valued contributor through time management, self-direction, self-motivation, tenacity and proactiveness (B&M);
- Analyse and assess their own personality, needs and abilities and be proactive in managing their personal development (B&M);
- Deploy appropriate interpersonal skills to achieve the best from others, including effective communication, listening, influencing and conflict resolution (B&M);
- Display a positive attitude to change, with a desire for excellence and a visionary and positive approach to future developments;
- Accept and analyse new ideas and assess alternatives when presented with a range of possible interpretations and/or solutions;
- Learn and work independently (B&M);
- Interpret numerical information, reason numerically and apply appropriate mathematical and statistical techniques (B&M);
- Communicate clearly and persuasively, both orally and in writing (B&M);
- Use information and communication technologies effectively and efficiently (ICT);
- Work well in a team, using appropriate skills, including leadership, team-building and project management (B&M).
4. Programme structure
4.1 Part A - Introductory Modules
Semester 1
i) COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 60)
Code |
Title |
Modular Weight |
BSA005 |
Organisational Behaviour |
10 |
BSA007 |
Skills for Study, Placement and Employment (weight 20) continued in Semester 2 |
10 |
BSA017 |
Financial Accounting |
20 |
BSA035 |
Introduction to Banking |
10 |
BSA080 |
Quantitative Methods for Business A |
10 |
|
Or |
|
BSA085 |
Quantitative Methods for Business B |
10 |
|
|
|
Semester 2
i) COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 60)
Code |
Title |
Modular Weight |
BSA007 |
Skills for Study, Placement and Employment (weight 20) continued from Semester 1 |
10 |
BSA022 |
Macroeconomics for Financial Studies |
10 |
BSA036 |
Banking Law and Practice |
10 |
BSA053 |
Organisations in the International Context |
10 |
BSA060 |
Microeconomics for Busines |
10 |
BSA110 |
Business Modelling A |
10 |
|
Or |
|
BSA115 |
Business Modelling B |
10 |
4.2 Part B - Degree Modules
Semester 1
i) COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 50)
Code |
Title |
Modular Weight |
BSB010 |
Business Information Management |
10 |
BSB030 |
Marketing |
10 |
BSB040 |
Human Resource Management |
10 |
BSB120 |
Decision Making Analysis |
10 |
ECB015 |
Economics of the Financial System (weight 20) continued in Semester 2 |
10 |
ii) OPTIONAL MODULES (total modular weight 10)
One module from the Business catalogue of Part B optional modules for this programme, or any available ECB module subject to School approval.
Semester 2
i) COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 40)
Code |
Title |
Modular Weight |
BSB025 |
Financial Management |
10 |
BSB067 |
Business Lending |
10 |
BSB070 |
Accounting for Management Decisions |
10 |
ECB015 |
Economics of the Financial System (weight 20) continued from Semester 1 |
10 |
ii) OPTIONAL MODULES (total modular weight 20)
Two modules from the Business catalogue of Part B optional modules for this programme, or any available ECB module subject to School approval.
4.3 Part I
Candidates pursue one of the following streams:
i) Placement Stream
Candidates will undertake an appropriate business placement.
ii) Study Abroad Stream
Candidates will study at one of the School of Business and Economics approved academic institutions.
iii) Split Stream
Candidates will undertake an appropriate business placement for half the year and will study at one of the School of Business and Economics approved academic institutions for the other half of the academic year.
(iv) Language Related Placement
Candidates will undertake a year abroad in employment, for example as an English language assistant in a school or other educational establishment, approved by the School of Business and Economics.
4.4 Part C - Degree Modules
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTER 1 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSC015 Financial Management and Corporate Policy | 10 |
BSC044 Principles of Strategic Management | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSC042 Corporate and Wholesale OBanking | 10 |
BSC045 Strategy in Banking | 10 |
SEMESTER 1 OPTIONAL MODULES (CHOOSE FOUR) | |
BSC020 Corporate Reconstruction and Turnaround | 10 |
BSC030 Corporate Governance | 10 |
BSC051 International Corporate Governance and Firms. | 10 |
BSC062 Analytics for Management | 10 |
BSC063 Decision and Efficiency Analysis | 10 |
BSC070 Technology in Business and Society | 10 |
BSC097 Knowledge Management | 10 |
BSC100 Advanced Interpersonal Skills | 10 |
BSC105 International Human Resource Management | 10 |
BSC110 Marketing Strategy and Planning | 10 |
BSC115 International Marketing | 10 |
BSC130 Business Programming | 10 |
BSC132 Small Business Issues | 10 |
BSC165 Business Forecasting | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 OPTIONAL MODULES (CHOOSE FOUR) | |
BSC016 Financial Risk Management | 10 |
BSC018 Behavioural Finance | 10 |
BSC025 Auditing | 10 |
BSC053 International Negotiations | 10 |
BSC067 Simulation for Decision Support | 10 |
BSC068 Consulting for Decision Making | 10 |
BSC071 Managing Big Data | 10 |
BSC072 Strategic Information Management | 10 |
BSC080 Analysing Careers | 10 |
BSC117 Services Marketing | 10 |
BSC124 Marketing Communications | 10 |
BSC134 Business Planning for New Ventures | 10 |
BSC136 Enterprise Resource Planning | 10 |
BSC140 Lean Operations | 10 |
BSC144 Project Management | 10 |
BSC175 Retail Location | 10 |
Various semester 2 modules in the final year have a pre-requisite module in semester 1 of the final year. Students must carefully check their preferred modules' pre-requisites before making selections as all pre-requisites will be rigorously enforced. |
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
In order to progress from Part A to Part B and from Part B to C and to be eligible for the award of an Honours degree, candidates must not only satisfy the minimum credit requirements set out in Regulation XX but also:
- to progress from Part B to the period of professional training or study at an approved institution abroad, candidates must accumulate at least 100 credits in Part B as well as achieving at least 30% in all modules taken in Part B.
Provision will be made in accordance with regulation XX for candidates who have the right of re-assessment in Part A or Part B of the programme to undergo re-assessment in the University’s special assessment period.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
Candidates’ final degree classification will be determined on the basis of their performance in degree level Module Assessments in Parts B and C, in accordance with the scheme set out in regulation XX. The average percentage marks for each Part will be combined in the ratio Part B 25: Part C 75, to determine the final overall percentage mark for the Programme (the Programme Mark).
Programme Specification
BS BSc (Hons) Information Management and Business (2017 entry)
Academic Year: 2017/18
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at 天堂视频 (available soon)
- What makes 天堂视频 programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | 天堂视频 |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | School of Business and Economics |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | |
Final award | BSc/ BSc+DPS |
Programme title | Information Management and Business |
Programme code | BSUB25 |
Length of programme | The programme is available on a full-time basis. The duration of the programme is 6 semesters, or 8 semesters if students undertake a placement leading to the award of a Diploma in Professional Studies (DPS) which takes place between Part B and Part C. |
UCAS code | PN11 (three years) or PNC1 (four years) |
Admissions criteria | See
|
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
The Information Management and Business degree programme aims to produce high quality graduates with the knowledge, skills and understanding for an effective and valued career in a wide range of management situations, especially those requiring sophisticated management of knowledge and information.
Within this general aim the programme specifically seeks to encourage students:
- To develop knowledge, concepts and skills in the major academic disciplines of business and management as a sound basis for practice, study and training in the graduate’s chosen profession or management specialism.
- To develop a deep understanding of the importance of information management and its role in effective decision making in organisations.
- To develop the concepts, analytical approaches, evaluative thinking and numeracy skills necessary for management problem solving, including through individual experience and optionally on placement.
- To develop a positive attitude to change, a desire for excellence, a visionary and positive approach to future developments and an openness to new ideas.
Consequently the programme seeks:
- To provide a relevant, practical and constantly updated programme through close links with a wide variety of business organisations.
- To demonstrate the importance of information management and information literacy to a wide variety of business organisations.
- To provide students with a flexible learning environment allowing students to explore and develop their own interests and strengths as they progress through the programme.
- To develop teaching and learning in response to advances in scholarship and the needs of a wide variety of business organisations.
- To enhance the employability of our graduates.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
- QAA: Framework for Higher Education Qualifications
- QAA Subject Benchmark Statement for Librarianship and Information Management (2007) (LIM) ()
- QAA Subject Benchmark Statement for General Business and Management (2007) (GBM) ()
- QAA booklet - Academic Credit in Higher Education in England (2006)
- 天堂视频, Learning and Teaching Strategy
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
On successful completion of this programme students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding of:
K1. the cultural, ethical, political and social issues surrounding the use of information at an organisational level and within society and the external environment (LIM, GBM)
K2. information systems - the development, management and exploitation of information systems and their impact upon organisations (GBM)
K3. the changing needs of users of existing and potential information services in a global technology rich environment (LIM)
K4. the principles of strategic management, marketing and planning and development of people within organisations (GBM)
K5. professional, legal, moral and ethical considerations in the computing and information industries including issues such as data protection, the valuation of intellectual property, freedom of information etc. (LIM and GBM)
K6. a variety of sources of information through a range of physical and virtual channels, media and formats (LIM)
K7. pervasive issues such as sustainability, globalisation, corporate social responsibility, diversity, business innovation, creativity, enterprise development, knowledge management and risk management (GBM)
K8. human information behaviour and information seeking processes and information retrieval systems (LIM)
K9. appropriate frameworks, standards and systems for the description, classification and indexing of information and knowledge containers and content (LIM)
K10. organisations, the external environment in which they operate and how they are managed (GBM)
K11. the internal aspects, functions and processes of organisations and their purpose, structures, governance, operations and management (GBM)
K12. different types of organisations that produce, disseminate and store information and their place in the information chain (LIM)
K13. policies and procedures that apply to the creation, capture, storage, dissemination, retrieval and destruction of information to ensure compliance with regulatory frameworks (LIM)
K14. the design, development and delivery of information products, systems and services to match customer requirements (LIM)
K15. processes, procedures and practices for effective management of organisations (GBM)
K16. the concepts, principles and techniques underpinning key aspects of planning, managing and leading services, including financial management, human resource management, project management, marketing, service quality, customer relationship management and change management (GBM)
K17. the principles and capacities of information and communication technologies and their application in professional practice.
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme students should be able to:
C1. demonstrate a range of cognitive and intellectual skills together with techniques specific to business and management such as critical thinking, analysis and synthesis, including the ability to relate and marshal facts, ideas and theories in a well-structured argument (LIM)
C2. self reflect critically, demonstrating self awareness, openness and sensitivity to diversity in terms of people, cultures, business and management issues; acquire the skills of learning to learn and developing a continuing appetite for learning; reflective, adaptive and collaborative learning (LIM)
C3. apply subject knowledge and understanding critically and effectively to real world situations (LIM)
C4. plan effective strategies for searching and handling information, in both printed and electronic formats
C5. apply qualitative and quantitative research methods and their application in practice. (LIM)
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme students should be able to:
P1. demonstrate effective use of information and communication technologies and their application in the management of information (LIM)
P2. specify, design and construct information services and computer-based systems according to users’ needs including identifying, formulating and solving business problems (LIM and GBM)
P3. carry out effective problem solving and decision making using appropriate quantitative and qualitative skills (LIM and GBM)
P4. apply the concepts, principles and techniques of strategic management in real world situations (LIM)
P5. use a range of electronic information resources and systems including databases, search engines and portals (LIM)
P6. conduct research into business and information management issues (GBM)
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of this programme students should be able to:
T1. make effective use of communication and information technology, for example create and manipulate documents and databases using appropriate software (LIM and GBM)
T2. use numeracy and quantitative skills including data analysis, interpretation and extrapolation and present information in numerical and statistical form using appropriate software (LIM and GBM)
T3. apply critical thinking, analysis and synthesis, evaluation and manage and reflect on their own learning (LIM and GBM)
T4. show interpersonal skills of effective listening, negotiating, persuasion and presentation and communicate effectively orally and in writing using a range of media for different purposes and audiences (LIM and GBM)
T5. demonstrate effective self-management in terms of time, planning and behaviour (LIM and GBM)
T6. achieve effective performance, within a team environment, including leadership, team building, influencing and project management skills in various contexts (LIM and GBM)
T7. appreciate the need for continuing professional development and manage their own lifelong learning (LIM and GBM)
T8. demonstrate skills of critical thinking, analysis and synthesis, including the ability to relate data, facts, ideas and theories into a well-structured argument (LIM and GBM)
4. Programme structure
4.1 Part A Introductory Modules
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTER 1 and 2 COMPULSORY MODULE | |
BSA007 Skills for Study, Placement and Employment | 20 |
SEMESTER 1 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSA005 Organisational Behaviour | 10 |
BSA070 Financial Framework | 10 |
BSA080 Quantitative Methods for Business A | 10 |
or BSA085 Quantitative Methods for Business B | 10 |
ISA410 Information in Society | 10 |
BSA055 Principles of Marketing | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSA057 The Marketing Mix | 10 |
BSA060 Microeconomics for Business | 10 |
BSA110 Business Modelling A | 10 |
or BSA115 Business Modelling B | 10 |
ISA411 Intelligent Organisations | 10 |
ISA413 Agile Data Management | 10 |
4.2 Part B - Degree Modules
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTER 1 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSB010 Business Information Management | 10 |
BSB040 Human Resource Management | 10 |
BSB120 Management Science Methods | 10 |
ISB411 Knowledge, Data and Information Systems | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSB012 Information Systems Development | 10 |
BSB070 Accounting for Management Decisions | 10 |
BSB105 Brand Management | 10 |
ISB412 Digital Resilience | 10 |
SEMESTER 1 OPTIONAL MODULES (CHOOSE TWO) | |
BSB023 Macroeconomics for Business | 10 |
BSB025 Financial Management | 10 |
BSB035 Sales Management | 10 |
BSB046 Organisation Studies | 10 |
BSB050 International Business | 10 |
BSB100 Operations Management | 10 |
University Wide Languages Programme | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 OPTIONAL MODULES (CHOOSE TWO) | |
BSB027 Financial Markets and Derivatives Fundamentals | 10 |
BSB052 International Management | 10 |
BSB087 Vocational Psychology | 10 |
BSB110 Data Analysis for Management | 10 |
BSB135 Consumer Behaviour | 10 |
BSB150 Business Ethics and Corporate Social Responsibility | 10 |
BSB590 The Contemporary Business Environment | 10 |
University Wide Languages Programme | 10 |
4.3 Part I - Placement (8 semester programme only)
Candidates on degree programmes which include professional training will be registered for module BSI001 Placement. They will undertake a placement of minimum 48 weeks during the year between Part B and Part C which will lead to the qualification of Diploma in Professional Studies (DPS) on successful completion of the required assessments for BSI001 and of the degree programme requirements.
4.4 Part C - Degree Modules
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTER 1 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSC070 Technology in Business and Society | 10 |
BSC071 Managing Big Data | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSC055 Strategic Management | 20 |
BSC072 Strategic Information Management | 10 |
SEMESTER 1 OPTIONAL MODULES |
|
GROUP 1* | |
ISC002 Information Management Project (weight 30) continued in Semester 2 | 10/20 |
ISC027 Information and Knowledge Management | 10 |
ISC200 Information Architecture | 10 |
ISC336 Social Informatics | 10 |
BSC130 Business Programming | 10 |
GROUP 2 | |
BSC015 Financial Management and Corporate Policy | 10 |
BSC020 Corporate Reconstruction and Turnaround | 10 |
BSC030 Corporate Governance | 10 |
BSC051 International Corporate Governance and Firms | 10 |
BSC062 Analytics for Management | 10 |
BSC063 Decision and Efficiency Analysis | 10 |
BSC100 Advanced Interpersonal Skills | 10 |
BSC105 International Human Resource Management | 10 |
BSC110 Marketing Strategy and Planning | 10 |
BSC115 International Marketing | 10 |
BSC132 Small Business Issues | 10 |
BSC165 Business Forecasting | 10 |
University Wide Languages Programme | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 OPTIONAL MODULES |
|
GROUP 1* | |
ISC002 Information Management Project (weight 30) continued in Semester 2 | 20/10 |
ISC334 Intelligent Project Management | 10 |
BSC136 Enterprise Resource Planning | 10 |
GROUP 2 | |
BSC016 Financial Risk Management | 10 |
BSC018 Behavioural Finance | 10 |
BSC042 Corporate and Wholesale Banking | 10 |
BSC059 Business and Entrepreneurialism in Postconflict Spaces | 10 |
BSC064 Business Optimisation | 10 |
BSC067 Simulation for Decision Support | 10 |
BSC068 Consulting for Decision Making | 10 |
BSC080 Analysing Careers | 10 |
BSC085 The Changing Work Organisation | 10 |
BSC117 Services Marketing | 10 |
BSC124 Marketing Communications | 10 |
BSC134 Business Planning for New Ventures | 10 |
BSC140 Lean Operations | 10 |
BSC175 Retail Location | 10 |
BSC575 Leadership and Interpersonal Skills | 10 |
University Wide Languages Programme | 10 |
*Over Semester 1 and Semester 2 at least 10 credits must be chosen from Group 1*. Various semester 2 modules in the final year have pre-requisite modules. Students must carefully check their preferred modules' pre-requisites before making selections as all pre-requisites will be rigorously enforced. |
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
In order to progress from Part A to Part B and from Part B to C and to be eligible for the award of an Honours degree, candidates must not only satisfy the minimum credit requirements set out in Regulation XX but also:
- to progress from Part B to the period of professional training or study at an approved institution abroad, candidates must accumulate at least 100 credits in Part B as well as achieving at least 30% in all modules taken in Part B.
Provision will be made in accordance with Regulation XX for candidates who have the right of re-assessment in Part A or Part B of the programme to undergo re-assessment in the University’s special assessment period.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
Candidates' final degree classification will be determined on the basis of their performance in degree level Module Assessments in Parts B and C, in accordance with the scheme set out in regulation XX. The average percentage marks for each Part will be combined in the ratio Part B 25: Part C 75, to determine the final overall percentage mark for the Programme (the Programme Mark).
Programme Specification
BS BSc (Hons) Information Management and Business (2016 entry)
Academic Year: 2017/18
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at 天堂视频 (available soon)
- What makes 天堂视频 programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | 天堂视频 |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | School of Business and Economics |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | |
Final award | BSc/ BSc+DPS |
Programme title | Information Management and Business |
Programme code | BSUB25 |
Length of programme | The programme is available on a full-time basis. The duration of the programme is 6 semesters, or 8 semesters if students undertake a placement leading to the award of a Diploma in Professional Studies (DPS) which takes place between Part B and Part C. |
UCAS code | PN11 (three years) or PNC1 (four years) |
Admissions criteria | See
|
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
The Information Management and Business degree programme aims to produce high quality graduates with the knowledge, skills and understanding for an effective and valued career in a wide range of management situations, especially those requiring sophisticated management of knowledge and information.
Within this general aim the programme specifically seeks to encourage students:
- To develop knowledge, concepts and skills in the major academic disciplines of business and management as a sound basis for practice, study and training in the graduate’s chosen profession or management specialism.
- To develop a deep understanding of the importance of information management and its role in effective decision making in organisations.
- To develop the concepts, analytical approaches, evaluative thinking and numeracy skills necessary for management problem solving, including through individual experience and optionally on placement.
- To develop a positive attitude to change, a desire for excellence, a visionary and positive approach to future developments and an openness to new ideas.
Consequently the programme seeks:
- To provide a relevant, practical and constantly updated programme through close links with a wide variety of business organisations.
- To demonstrate the importance of information management and information literacy to a wide variety of business organisations.
- To provide students with a flexible learning environment allowing students to explore and develop their own interests and strengths as they progress through the programme.
- To develop teaching and learning in response to advances in scholarship and the needs of a wide variety of business organisations.
- To enhance the employability of our graduates.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
- QAA: Framework for Higher Education Qualifications
- QAA Subject Benchmark Statement for Librarianship and Information Management (2007) (LIM) ()
- QAA Subject Benchmark Statement for General Business and Management (2007) (GBM) ()
- QAA booklet - Academic Credit in Higher Education in England (2006)
- 天堂视频, Learning and Teaching Strategy
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
On successful completion of this programme students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding of:
K1. the cultural, ethical, political and social issues surrounding the use of information at an organisational level and within society and the external environment (LIM, GBM)
K2. information systems - the development, management and exploitation of information systems and their impact upon organisations (GBM)
K3. the changing needs of users of existing and potential information services in a global technology rich environment (LIM)
K4. the principles of strategic management, marketing and planning and development of people within organisations (GBM)
K5. professional, legal, moral and ethical considerations in the computing and information industries including issues such as data protection, the valuation of intellectual property, freedom of information etc. (LIM and GBM)
K6. a variety of sources of information through a range of physical and virtual channels, media and formats (LIM)
K7. pervasive issues such as sustainability, globalisation, corporate social responsibility, diversity, business innovation, creativity, enterprise development, knowledge management and risk management (GBM)
K8. human information behaviour and information seeking processes and information retrieval systems (LIM)
K9. appropriate frameworks, standards and systems for the description, classification and indexing of information and knowledge containers and content (LIM)
K10. organisations, the external environment in which they operate and how they are managed (GBM)
K11. the internal aspects, functions and processes of organisations and their purpose, structures, governance, operations and management (GBM)
K12. different types of organisations that produce, disseminate and store information and their place in the information chain (LIM)
K13. policies and procedures that apply to the creation, capture, storage, dissemination, retrieval and destruction of information to ensure compliance with regulatory frameworks (LIM)
K14. the design, development and delivery of information products, systems and services to match customer requirements (LIM)
K15. processes, procedures and practices for effective management of organisations (GBM)
K16. the concepts, principles and techniques underpinning key aspects of planning, managing and leading services, including financial management, human resource management, project management, marketing, service quality, customer relationship management and change management (GBM)
K17. the principles and capacities of information and communication technologies and their application in professional practice.
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme students should be able to:
C1. demonstrate a range of cognitive and intellectual skills together with techniques specific to business and management such as critical thinking, analysis and synthesis, including the ability to relate and marshal facts, ideas and theories in a well-structured argument (LIM)
C2. self reflect critically, demonstrating self awareness, openness and sensitivity to diversity in terms of people, cultures, business and management issues; acquire the skills of learning to learn and developing a continuing appetite for learning; reflective, adaptive and collaborative learning (LIM)
C3. apply subject knowledge and understanding critically and effectively to real world situations (LIM)
C4. plan effective strategies for searching and handling information, in both printed and electronic formats
C5. apply qualitative and quantitative research methods and their application in practice. (LIM)
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme students should be able to:
P1. demonstrate effective use of information and communication technologies and their application in the management of information (LIM)
P2. specify, design and construct information services and computer-based systems according to users’ needs including identifying, formulating and solving business problems (LIM and GBM)
P3. carry out effective problem solving and decision making using appropriate quantitative and qualitative skills (LIM and GBM)
P4. apply the concepts, principles and techniques of strategic management in real world situations (LIM)
P5. use a range of electronic information resources and systems including databases, search engines and portals (LIM)
P6. conduct research into business and information management issues (GBM)
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of this programme students should be able to:
T1. make effective use of communication and information technology, for example create and manipulate documents and databases using appropriate software (LIM and GBM)
T2. use numeracy and quantitative skills including data analysis, interpretation and extrapolation and present information in numerical and statistical form using appropriate software (LIM and GBM)
T3. apply critical thinking, analysis and synthesis, evaluation and manage and reflect on their own learning (LIM and GBM)
T4. show interpersonal skills of effective listening, negotiating, persuasion and presentation and communicate effectively orally and in writing using a range of media for different purposes and audiences (LIM and GBM)
T5. demonstrate effective self-management in terms of time, planning and behaviour (LIM and GBM)
T6. achieve effective performance, within a team environment, including leadership, team building, influencing and project management skills in various contexts (LIM and GBM)
T7. appreciate the need for continuing professional development and manage their own lifelong learning (LIM and GBM)
T8. demonstrate skills of critical thinking, analysis and synthesis, including the ability to relate data, facts, ideas and theories into a well-structured argument (LIM and GBM)
4. Programme structure
4.1 Part A Introductory Modules
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTER 1 and 2 COMPULSORY MODULE | |
BSA007 Skills for Study, Placement and Employment | 20 |
SEMESTER 1 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSA005 Organisational Behaviour | 10 |
BSA070 Financial Framework | 10 |
BSA570 Quantitative Methods for Business | 10 |
ISA410 Information in Society | 10 |
BSA055 Principles of Marketing | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSA057 The Marketing Mix | 10 |
BSA060 Microeconomics for Business | 10 |
BSA572 Statistics & Modelling for Management | 10 |
ISA411 Intelligent Organisations | 10 |
ISA413 Agile Data Management | 10 |
4.2 Part B - Degree Modules
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTER 1 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSB010 Business Information Management | 10 |
BSB040 Human Resource Management | 10 |
BSB120 Management Science Methods | 10 |
ISB411 Knowledge, Data and Information Systems | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSB012 Information Systems Development | 10 |
BSB070 Accounting for Management Decisions | 10 |
BSB105 Brand Management | 10 |
ISB412 Digital Resilience | 10 |
SEMESTER 1 OPTIONAL MODULES (CHOOSE TWO) | |
BSB023 Macroeconomics for Business | 10 |
BSB025 Financial Management | 10 |
BSB035 Sales Management | 10 |
BSB046 Organisation Studies | 10 |
BSB050 International Business | 10 |
BSB100 Operations Management | 10 |
University Wide Languages Programme | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 OPTIONAL MODULES (CHOOSE TWO) | |
BSB027 Financial Markets and Derivatives Fundamentals | 10 |
BSB052 International Management | 10 |
BSB087 Vocational Psychology | 10 |
BSB110 Data Analysis for Management | 10 |
BSB135 Consumer Behaviour | 10 |
BSB150 Business Ethics and Corporate Social Responsibility | 10 |
BSB590 The Contemporary Business Environment | 10 |
University Wide Languages Programme | 10 |
4.3 Part I - Placement (8 semester programme only)
Candidates on degree programmes which include professional training will be registered for module BSI001 Placement. They will undertake a placement of minimum 48 weeks during the year between Part B and Part C which will lead to the qualification of Diploma in Professional Studies (DPS) on successful completion of the required assessments for BSI001 and of the degree programme requirements.
4.4 Part C - Degree Modules
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTER 1 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSC070 Technology in Business and Society | 10 |
BSC071 Managing Big Data | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSC055 Strategic Management | 20 |
BSC072 Strategic Information Management | 10 |
SEMESTER 1 OPTIONAL MODULES |
|
GROUP 1* | |
ISC002 Information Management Project (weight 30) continued in Semester 2 | 10/20 |
ISC027 Information and Knowledge Management | 10 |
ISC200 Information Architecture | 10 |
ISC336 Social Informatics | 10 |
BSC130 Business Programming | 10 |
GROUP 2 | |
BSC015 Financial Management and Corporate Policy | 10 |
BSC020 Corporate Reconstruction and Turnaround | 10 |
BSC030 Corporate Governance | 10 |
BSC051 International Corporate Governance and Firms | 10 |
BSC062 Analytics for Management | 10 |
BSC063 Decision and Efficiency Analysis | 10 |
BSC100 Advanced Interpersonal Skills | 10 |
BSC105 International Human Resource Management | 10 |
BSC110 Marketing Strategy and Planning | 10 |
BSC115 International Marketing | 10 |
BSC132 Small Business Issues | 10 |
BSC165 Business Forecasting | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 OPTIONAL MODULES |
|
GROUP 1* | |
ISC002 Information Management Project (weight 30) continued in Semester 2 | 20/10 |
ISC334 Intelligent Project Management | 10 |
BSC136 Enterprise Resource Planning | 10 |
GROUP 2 | |
BSC016 Financial Risk Management | 10 |
BSC018 Behavioural Finance | 10 |
BSC042 Corporate and Wholesale Banking | 10 |
BSC059 Business and Entrepreneurialism in Postconflict Spaces | 10 |
BSC064 Business Optimisation | 10 |
BSC067 Simulation for Decision Support | 10 |
BSC068 Consulting for Decision Making | 10 |
BSC080 Analysing Careers | 10 |
BSC085 The Changing Work Organisation | 10 |
BSC117 Services Marketing | 10 |
BSC124 Marketing Communications | 10 |
BSC134 Business Planning for New Ventures | 10 |
BSC140 Lean Operations | 10 |
BSC175 Retail Location | 10 |
BSC575 Leadership and Interpersonal Skills | 10 |
University Wide Languages Programme | 10 |
*Over Semester 1 and Semester 2 at least 10 credits must be chosen from Group 1*. Various semester 2 modules in the final year have pre-requisite modules. Students must carefully check their preferred modules' pre-requisites before making selections as all pre-requisites will be rigorously enforced. |
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
In order to progress from Part A to Part B and from Part B to C and to be eligible for the award of an Honours degree, candidates must not only satisfy the minimum credit requirements set out in Regulation XX but also:
- to progress from Part B to the period of professional training or study at an approved institution abroad, candidates must accumulate at least 100 credits in Part B as well as achieving at least 30% in all modules taken in Part B.
Provision will be made in accordance with Regulation XX for candidates who have the right of re-assessment in Part A or Part B of the programme to undergo re-assessment in the University’s special assessment period.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
Candidates' final degree classification will be determined on the basis of their performance in degree level Module Assessments in Parts B and C, in accordance with the scheme set out in regulation XX. The average percentage marks for each Part will be combined in the ratio Part B 25: Part C 75, to determine the final overall percentage mark for the Programme (the Programme Mark).
Programme Specification
BS BSc (Hons) Information Management and Business (2015 entry)
Academic Year: 2017/18
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at 天堂视频 (available soon)
- What makes 天堂视频 programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | 天堂视频 |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | School of Business and Economics |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | |
Final award | BSc/ BSc+DPS |
Programme title | Information Management and Business |
Programme code | BSUB25 |
Length of programme | The programme is available on a full-time basis. The duration of the programme is 6 semesters, or 8 semesters if students undertake a placement leading to the award of a Diploma in Professional Studies (DPS) which takes place between Part B and Part C. |
UCAS code | PN11 (three years) or PNC1 (four years) |
Admissions criteria | See
|
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
The Information Management and Business degree programme aims to produce high quality graduates with the knowledge, skills and understanding for an effective and valued career in a wide range of management situations, especially those requiring sophisticated management of knowledge and information.
Within this general aim the programme specifically seeks to encourage students:
- To develop knowledge, concepts and skills in the major academic disciplines of business and management as a sound basis for practice, study and training in the graduate’s chosen profession or management specialism.
- To develop a deep understanding of the importance of information management and its role in effective decision making in organisations.
- To develop the concepts, analytical approaches, evaluative thinking and numeracy skills necessary for management problem solving, including through individual experience and optionally on placement.
- To develop a positive attitude to change, a desire for excellence, a visionary and positive approach to future developments and an openness to new ideas.
Consequently the programme seeks:
- To provide a relevant, practical and constantly updated programme through close links with a wide variety of business organisations.
- To demonstrate the importance of information management and information literacy to a wide variety of business organisations.
- To provide students with a flexible learning environment allowing students to explore and develop their own interests and strengths as they progress through the programme.
- To develop teaching and learning in response to advances in scholarship and the needs of a wide variety of business organisations.
- To enhance the employability of our graduates.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
- QAA: Framework for Higher Education Qualifications
- QAA Subject Benchmark Statement for Librarianship and Information Management (2007) (LIM) ()
- QAA Subject Benchmark Statement for General Business and Management (2007) (GBM) ()
- QAA booklet - Academic Credit in Higher Education in England (2006)
- 天堂视频, Learning and Teaching Strategy
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
On successful completion of this programme students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding of:
K1. the cultural, ethical, political and social issues surrounding the use of information at an organisational level and within society and the external environment (LIM, GBM)
K2. information systems - the development, management and exploitation of information systems and their impact upon organisations (GBM)
K3. the changing needs of users of existing and potential information services in a global technology rich environment (LIM)
K4. the principles of strategic management, marketing and planning and development of people within organisations (GBM)
K5. professional, legal, moral and ethical considerations in the computing and information industries including issues such as data protection, the valuation of intellectual property, freedom of information etc. (LIM and GBM)
K6. a variety of sources of information through a range of physical and virtual channels, media and formats (LIM)
K7. pervasive issues such as sustainability, globalisation, corporate social responsibility, diversity, business innovation, creativity, enterprise development, knowledge management and risk management (GBM)
K8. human information behaviour and information seeking processes and information retrieval systems (LIM)
K9. appropriate frameworks, standards and systems for the description, classification and indexing of information and knowledge containers and content (LIM)
K10. organisations, the external environment in which they operate and how they are managed (GBM)
K11. the internal aspects, functions and processes of organisations and their purpose, structures, governance, operations and management (GBM)
K12. different types of organisations that produce, disseminate and store information and their place in the information chain (LIM)
K13. policies and procedures that apply to the creation, capture, storage, dissemination, retrieval and destruction of information to ensure compliance with regulatory frameworks (LIM)
K14. the design, development and delivery of information products, systems and services to match customer requirements (LIM)
K15. processes, procedures and practices for effective management of organisations (GBM)
K16. the concepts, principles and techniques underpinning key aspects of planning, managing and leading services, including financial management, human resource management, project management, marketing, service quality, customer relationship management and change management (GBM)
K17. the principles and capacities of information and communication technologies and their application in professional practice.
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme students should be able to:
C1. demonstrate a range of cognitive and intellectual skills together with techniques specific to business and management such as critical thinking, analysis and synthesis, including the ability to relate and marshal facts, ideas and theories in a well-structured argument (LIM)
C2. self reflect critically, demonstrating self awareness, openness and sensitivity to diversity in terms of people, cultures, business and management issues; acquire the skills of learning to learn and developing a continuing appetite for learning; reflective, adaptive and collaborative learning (LIM)
C3. apply subject knowledge and understanding critically and effectively to real world situations (LIM)
C4. plan effective strategies for searching and handling information, in both printed and electronic formats
C5. apply qualitative and quantitative research methods and their application in practice. (LIM)
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme students should be able to:
P1. demonstrate effective use of information and communication technologies and their application in the management of information (LIM)
P2. specify, design and construct information services and computer-based systems according to users’ needs including identifying, formulating and solving business problems (LIM and GBM)
P3. carry out effective problem solving and decision making using appropriate quantitative and qualitative skills (LIM and GBM)
P4. apply the concepts, principles and techniques of strategic management in real world situations (LIM)
P5. use a range of electronic information resources and systems including databases, search engines and portals (LIM)
P6. conduct research into business and information management issues (GBM)
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of this programme students should be able to:
T1. make effective use of communication and information technology, for example create and manipulate documents and databases using appropriate software (LIM and GBM)
T2. use numeracy and quantitative skills including data analysis, interpretation and extrapolation and present information in numerical and statistical form using appropriate software (LIM and GBM)
T3. apply critical thinking, analysis and synthesis, evaluation and manage and reflect on their own learning (LIM and GBM)
T4. show interpersonal skills of effective listening, negotiating, persuasion and presentation and communicate effectively orally and in writing using a range of media for different purposes and audiences (LIM and GBM)
T5. demonstrate effective self-management in terms of time, planning and behaviour (LIM and GBM)
T6. achieve effective performance, within a team environment, including leadership, team building, influencing and project management skills in various contexts (LIM and GBM)
T7. appreciate the need for continuing professional development and manage their own lifelong learning (LIM and GBM)
T8. demonstrate skills of critical thinking, analysis and synthesis, including the ability to relate data, facts, ideas and theories into a well-structured argument (LIM and GBM)
4. Programme structure
4.1 Part A Introductory Modules
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTER 1 and 2 COMPULSORY MODULE | |
BSA007 Skills for Study, Placement and Employment | 20 |
SEMESTER 1 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSA005 Organisational Behaviour | 10 |
BSA525 Introduction to Accounting | 10 |
BSA570 Quantitative Methods for Business | 10 |
ISA410 Knowledge, Data and Information in Society | 10 |
COA102 Web Design | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSA526 Accounting for Managers | 10 |
BSA572 Statistics & Modelling for Management | 10 |
ISA411 Knowledge, Data and Information in Organisations | 10 |
ISA413 Information & Knowledge Organisation and Retrieval | 10 |
4.2 Part B - Degree Modules
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTER 1 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSB010 Business Information Management | 10 |
BSB560 Principles of Marketing | 10 |
ISB410 People Centred Information Services | 10 |
ISB411 Knowledge, Data and Information Systems | 20 |
SEMESTER 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSB562 The Marketing Mix | 10 |
BSB572 Management Science Methods | 10 |
ISB412 Digital Resilience | 20 |
ISB413 Research Methods | 10 |
SEMESTER 1 OPTIONAL MODULES (CHOOSE ONE) | |
BSB050 International Business | 10 |
BSB100 Operations Management | 10 |
ISB301 Systems Thinking | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 OPTIONAL MODULES (CHOOSE ONE) | |
BSB012 Information Systems Development | 10 |
BSB025 Financial Management | 10 |
BSB046 Organisation Studies | 10 |
BSB052 International Management | 10 |
BSB087 Vocational Psychology | 10 |
BSB110 Data Analysis for Management | 10 |
BSB150 Business Ethics and Corporate Social Responsibility | 10 |
BSB590 The Contemporary Business Environment | 10 |
4.3 Part I - Placement (8 semester programme only)
Candidates on degree programmes which include professional training will be registered for module BSI001 Placement. They will undertake a placement of minimum 48 weeks during the year between Part B and Part C which will lead to the qualification of Diploma in Professional Studies (DPS) on successful completion of the required assessments for BSI001 and of the degree programme requirements.
4.4 Part C - Degree Modules
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTER 1 COMPULSORY MODULE | |
BSC570 Strategic Management | 20 |
SEMESTER 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSC072 Strategic Information Management | 10 |
BSC575 Leadership & Interpersonal Skills | 10 |
SEMESTER 1 OPTIONAL MODULES |
|
GROUP 1 | |
BSC070 Technology in Business and Society | 10 |
BSC130 Business Programming | 10 |
ISC002 Information Management Project (weight 30) continued in Semester 2 | 10/20 |
ISC027 Information and Knowledge Management | 10 |
ISC200 Information Architecture | 10 |
ISC336 Social Informatics | 10 |
GROUP 2 | |
BSC015 Financial Management and Corporate Policy | 10 |
BSC030 Corporate Governance | 10 |
BSC051 International Corporate Governance and Firms | 10 |
BSC063 Decision and Efficiency Analysis | 10 |
BSC105 International Human Resource Management | 10 |
BSC110 Marketing Strategy and Planning | 10 |
BSC115 International Marketing | 10 |
BSC522 Entrepreneurship and Innovation | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 OPTIONAL MODULES |
|
GROUP 1 | |
ISC002 Information Management Project (weight 30) continued in Semester 2 | 20/10 |
ISC334 Intelligent Project Management | 10 |
BSC071 Managing Big Data | 10 |
BSC136 Enterprise Resource Planning | 10 |
GROUP 2 | |
BSC016 Financial Risk Management | 10 |
BSC018 Behavioural Finance | 10 |
BSC059 Business and Entrepreneurialism in Postconflict Spaces | 10 |
BSC064 Business Optimisation | 10 |
BSC067 Simulation for Decision Making | 10 |
BSC068 Consulting for Decision Making | 10 |
BSC080 Analyising Careers | 10 |
BSC085 The Changing Work Organisation | 10 |
BSC117 Services Marketing | 10 |
BSC124 Marketing Communications | 10 |
BSC524 Entrepreneurship and Small Business Planning | 10 |
*Over Semester 1 and Semester 2 at least 40 credits must be chosen from Group 1*. Various semester 2 modules in the final year have pre-requisite modules. Students must carefully check their preferred modules' pre-requisites before making selections as all pre-requisites will be rigorously enforced. |
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
In order to progress from Part A to Part B and from Part B to C and to be eligible for the award of an Honours degree, candidates must not only satisfy the minimum credit requirements set out in Regulation XX but also:
- to progress from Part B to the period of professional training or study at an approved institution abroad, candidates must accumulate at least 100 credits in Part B as well as achieving at least 30% in all modules taken in Part B.
Provision will be made in accordance with Regulation XX for candidates who have the right of re-assessment in Part A or Part B of the programme to undergo re-assessment in the University’s special assessment period.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
Candidates' final degree classification will be determined on the basis of their performance in degree level Module Assessments in Parts B and C, in accordance with the scheme set out in regulation XX. The average percentage marks for each Part will be combined in the ratio Part B 25: Part C 75, to determine the final overall percentage mark for the Programme (the Programme Mark).
Programme Specification
BS BSc (Hons) Information Management and Business (2014 entry)
Academic Year: 2017/18
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at 天堂视频 (available soon)
- What makes 天堂视频 programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | 天堂视频 |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | School of Business and Economics |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | |
Final award | BSc/ BSc+DPS |
Programme title | Information Management and Business |
Programme code | BSUB25 |
Length of programme | The programme is available on a full-time basis. The duration of the programme is 6 semesters, or 8 semesters if students undertake a placement leading to the award of a Diploma in Professional Studies (DPS) which takes place between Part B and Part C. |
UCAS code | PN11 (three years) or PNC1 (four years) |
Admissions criteria | See
|
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
The Information Management and Business degree programme aims to produce high quality graduates with the knowledge, skills and understanding for an effective and valued career in a wide range of management situations, especially those requiring sophisticated management of knowledge and information.
Within this general aim the programme specifically seeks to encourage students:
- To develop knowledge, concepts and skills in the major academic disciplines of business and management as a sound basis for practice, study and training in the graduate’s chosen profession or management specialism.
- To develop a deep understanding of the importance of information management and its role in effective decision making in organisations.
- To develop the concepts, analytical approaches, evaluative thinking and numeracy skills necessary for management problem solving, including through individual experience and optionally on placement.
- To develop a positive attitude to change, a desire for excellence, a visionary and positive approach to future developments and an openness to new ideas.
Consequently the programme seeks:
- To provide a relevant, practical and constantly updated programme through close links with a wide variety of business organisations.
- To demonstrate the importance of information management and information literacy to a wide variety of business organisations.
- To provide students with a flexible learning environment allowing students to explore and develop their own interests and strengths as they progress through the programme.
- To develop teaching and learning in response to advances in scholarship and the needs of a wide variety of business organisations.
- To enhance the employability of our graduates.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
- QAA: Framework for Higher Education Qualifications
- QAA Subject Benchmark Statement for Librarianship and Information Management (2007) (LIM) ()
- QAA Subject Benchmark Statement for General Business and Management (2007) (GBM) ()
- QAA booklet - Academic Credit in Higher Education in England (2006)
- 天堂视频, Learning and Teaching Strategy
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
On successful completion of this programme students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding of:
K1. the cultural, ethical, political and social issues surrounding the use of information at an organisational level and within society and the external environment (LIM, GBM)
K2. information systems - the development, management and exploitation of information systems and their impact upon organisations (GBM)
K3. the changing needs of users of existing and potential information services in a global technology rich environment (LIM)
K4. the principles of strategic management, marketing and planning and development of people within organisations (GBM)
K5. professional, legal, moral and ethical considerations in the computing and information industries including issues such as data protection, the valuation of intellectual property, freedom of information etc. (LIM and GBM)
K6. a variety of sources of information through a range of physical and virtual channels, media and formats (LIM)
K7. pervasive issues such as sustainability, globalisation, corporate social responsibility, diversity, business innovation, creativity, enterprise development, knowledge management and risk management (GBM)
K8. human information behaviour and information seeking processes and information retrieval systems (LIM)
K9. appropriate frameworks, standards and systems for the description, classification and indexing of information and knowledge containers and content (LIM)
K10. organisations, the external environment in which they operate and how they are managed (GBM)
K11. the internal aspects, functions and processes of organisations and their purpose, structures, governance, operations and management (GBM)
K12. different types of organisations that produce, disseminate and store information and their place in the information chain (LIM)
K13. policies and procedures that apply to the creation, capture, storage, dissemination, retrieval and destruction of information to ensure compliance with regulatory frameworks (LIM)
K14. the design, development and delivery of information products, systems and services to match customer requirements (LIM)
K15. processes, procedures and practices for effective management of organisations (GBM)
K16. the concepts, principles and techniques underpinning key aspects of planning, managing and leading services, including financial management, human resource management, project management, marketing, service quality, customer relationship management and change management (GBM)
K17. the principles and capacities of information and communication technologies and their application in professional practice.
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme students should be able to:
C1. demonstrate a range of cognitive and intellectual skills together with techniques specific to business and management such as critical thinking, analysis and synthesis, including the ability to relate and marshal facts, ideas and theories in a well-structured argument (LIM)
C2. self reflect critically, demonstrating self awareness, openness and sensitivity to diversity in terms of people, cultures, business and management issues; acquire the skills of learning to learn and developing a continuing appetite for learning; reflective, adaptive and collaborative learning (LIM)
C3. apply subject knowledge and understanding critically and effectively to real world situations (LIM)
C4. plan effective strategies for searching and handling information, in both printed and electronic formats
C5. apply qualitative and quantitative research methods and their application in practice. (LIM)
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme students should be able to:
P1. demonstrate effective use of information and communication technologies and their application in the management of information (LIM)
P2. specify, design and construct information services and computer-based systems according to users’ needs including identifying, formulating and solving business problems (LIM and GBM)
P3. carry out effective problem solving and decision making using appropriate quantitative and qualitative skills (LIM and GBM)
P4. apply the concepts, principles and techniques of strategic management in real world situations (LIM)
P5. use a range of electronic information resources and systems including databases, search engines and portals (LIM)
P6. conduct research into business and information management issues (GBM)
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of this programme students should be able to:
T1. make effective use of communication and information technology, for example create and manipulate documents and databases using appropriate software (LIM and GBM)
T2. use numeracy and quantitative skills including data analysis, interpretation and extrapolation and present information in numerical and statistical form using appropriate software (LIM and GBM)
T3. apply critical thinking, analysis and synthesis, evaluation and manage and reflect on their own learning (LIM and GBM)
T4. show interpersonal skills of effective listening, negotiating, persuasion and presentation and communicate effectively orally and in writing using a range of media for different purposes and audiences (LIM and GBM)
T5. demonstrate effective self-management in terms of time, planning and behaviour (LIM and GBM)
T6. achieve effective performance, within a team environment, including leadership, team building, influencing and project management skills in various contexts (LIM and GBM)
T7. appreciate the need for continuing professional development and manage their own lifelong learning (LIM and GBM)
T8. demonstrate skills of critical thinking, analysis and synthesis, including the ability to relate data, facts, ideas and theories into a well-structured argument (LIM and GBM)
4. Programme structure
4.1 Part A Introductory Modules
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTER 1 and 2 COMPULSORY MODULE | |
BSA007 Skills for Study, Placement and Employment | 20 |
SEMESTER 1 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSA005 Organisational Behaviour | 10 |
BSA525 Introduction to Accounting | 10 |
BSA570 Quantitative Methods for Business | 10 |
ISA410 Knowledge, Data and Information in Society | 10 |
COA102 Web Design | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSA526 Accounting for Managers | 10 |
BSA572 Statistics & Modelling for Management | 10 |
ISA411 Knowledge, Data and Information in Organisations | 10 |
ISA413 Information & Knowledge Organisation and Retrieval | 10 |
4.2 Part B - Degree Modules
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTER 1 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSB010 Business Information Management | 10 |
BSB560 Principles of Marketing | 10 |
ISB410 People Centred Information Services | 10 |
ISB411 Knowledge, Data and Information Systems | 20 |
SEMESTER 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSB562 The Marketing Mix | 10 |
BSB572 Management Science Methods | 10 |
ISB412 Records Management in Organisations | 20 |
ISB413 Research Methods | 10 |
SEMESTER 1 OPTIONAL MODULES (CHOOSE ONE) | |
BSB050 International Business | 10 |
BSB580 Operations Management | 10 |
ISB301 Informatics and Systems | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 OPTIONAL MODULES (CHOOSE ONE) | |
BSB012 Information Systems Development | 10 |
BSB052 International Management | 10 |
BSB550 Company Finance | 10 |
BSB590 The Contemporary Business Environment | 10 |
4.3 Part I - Placement (8 semester programme only)
Candidates on degree programmes which include professional training will be registered for module BSI001 Placement. They will undertake a placement of minimum 48 weeks during the year between Part B and Part C which will lead to the qualification of Diploma in Professional Studies (DPS) on successful completion of the required assessments for BSI001 and of the degree programme requirements.
4.4 Part C - Degree Modules
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTER 1 COMPULSORY MODULE | |
BSC570 Strategic Management | 20 |
SEMESTER 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSC072 Strategic Information Management | 10 |
BSC575 Leadership & Interpersonal Skills | 10 |
SEMESTER 1 OPTIONAL MODULES |
|
GROUP 1* | |
BSC070 Technology in Business and Society | 10 |
BSC130 Business Programming | 10 |
ISC002 Information Management Project (weight 30) continued in Semester 2 | 10/20 |
ISC027 Information and Knowledge Management | 10 |
ISC200 Information Architecture | 10 |
ISC336 Social Informatics | 10 |
GROUP 2 | |
BSC015 Financial Management and Corporate Policy | 10 |
BSC030 Corporate Governance | 10 |
BSC051 International Corporate Governance and Firms | 10 |
BSC063 Decision and Efficiency Analysis | 10 |
BSC105 International Human Resource Management | 10 |
BSC110 Marketing Strategy and Planning | 10 |
BSC115 International Marketing | 10 |
BSC522 Entrepreneurship and Innovation | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 OPTIONAL MODULES |
|
GROUP 1* | |
ISC002 Information Management Project (weight 30) continued in Semester 2 | 20/10 |
ISC025 Information and Knowledge Management in the NHS | 10 |
BSC071 Managing Big Data | 10 |
BSC136 Enterprise Resource Planning | 10 |
GROUP 2 | |
BSC016 Financial Risk Management | 10 |
BSC018 Behavioural Finance | 10 |
BSC059 Business and Entrepreneurialism in Postconflict Spaces | 10 |
BSC064 Business Optimisation | 10 |
BSC067 Simulation for Decision Support | 10 |
BSC068 Consulting for Decision Making | 10 |
BSC080 Analysing Careers | 10 |
BSC085 The Changing Work Organisation | 10 |
BSC117 Services Marketing | 10 |
BSC124 Marketing Communications | 10 |
BSC524 Entrepreneurship and Small Business Planning | 10 |
*Over Semester 1 and Semester 2 at least 40 credits must be chosen from Group 1*. Various semester 2 modules in the final year have pre-requisite modules. Students must carefully check their preferred modules' pre-requisites before making selections as all pre-requisites will be rigorously enforced. |
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
In order to progress from Part A to Part B and from Part B to C and to be eligible for the award of an Honours degree, candidates must not only satisfy the minimum credit requirements set out in Regulation XX but also:
- to progress from Part B to the period of professional training or study at an approved institution abroad, candidates must accumulate at least 100 credits in Part B as well as achieving at least 30% in all modules taken in Part B.
Provision will be made in accordance with Regulation XX for candidates who have the right of re-assessment in Part A or Part B of the programme to undergo re-assessment in the University’s special assessment period.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
Candidates' final degree classification will be determined on the basis of their performance in degree level Module Assessments in Parts B and C, in accordance with the scheme set out in regulation XX. The average percentage marks for each Part will be combined in the ratio Part B 25: Part C 75, to determine the final overall percentage mark for the Programme (the Programme Mark).
Programme Specification
BS BSc (Hons) Information Management and Business Studies (2013 entry)
Academic Year: 2017/18
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at 天堂视频 (available soon)
- What makes 天堂视频 programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | 天堂视频 |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | School of Business and Economics |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | |
Final award | BSc/ BSc+DPS |
Programme title | Information Management and Business Studies |
Programme code | BSUB25 |
Length of programme | The programme is available on a full-time basis. The duration of the programme is 6 semesters, or 8 semesters if students undertake a placement leading to the award of a Diploma in Professional Studies (DPS) which takes place between Part B and Part C. |
UCAS code | PN11 (three years) or PNC1 (four years) |
Admissions criteria | See
|
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
The Information Management and Business degree programme aims to produce high quality graduates with the knowledge, skills and understanding for an effective and valued career in a wide range of management situations, especially those requiring sophisticated management of knowledge and information.
Within this general aim the programme specifically seeks to encourage students:
- To develop knowledge, concepts and skills in the major academic disciplines of business and management as a sound basis for practice, study and training in the graduate’s chosen profession or management specialism.
- To develop a deep understanding of the importance of information management and its role in effective decision making in organisations.
- To develop the concepts, analytical approaches, evaluative thinking and numeracy skills necessary for management problem solving, including through individual experience and optionally on placement.
- To develop a positive attitude to change, a desire for excellence, a visionary and positive approach to future developments and an openness to new ideas.
Consequently the programme seeks:
- To provide a relevant, practical and constantly updated programme through close links with a wide variety of business organisations.
- To demonstrate the importance of information management and information literacy to a wide variety of business organisations.
- To provide students with a flexible learning environment allowing students to explore and develop their own interests and strengths as they progress through the programme.
- To develop teaching and learning in response to advances in scholarship and the needs of a wide variety of business organisations.
- To enhance the employability of our graduates.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
- QAA: Framework for Higher Education Qualifications
- QAA Subject Benchmark Statement for Librarianship and Information Management (2007) (LIM) ()
- QAA Subject Benchmark Statement for General Business and Management (2007) (GBM) ()
- QAA booklet - Academic Credit in Higher Education in England (2006)
- 天堂视频, Learning and Teaching Strategy
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
On successful completion of this programme students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding of:
K1. the cultural, ethical, political and social issues surrounding the use of information at an organisational level and within society and the external environment (LIM, GBM)
K2. information systems - the development, management and exploitation of information systems and their impact upon organisations (GBM)
K3. the changing needs of users of existing and potential information services in a global technology rich environment (LIM)
K4. the principles of strategic management, marketing and planning and development of people within organisations (GBM)
K5. professional, legal, moral and ethical considerations in the computing and information industries including issues such as data protection, the valuation of intellectual property, freedom of information etc. (LIM and GBM)
K6. a variety of sources of information through a range of physical and virtual channels, media and formats (LIM)
K7. pervasive issues such as sustainability, globalisation, corporate social responsibility, diversity, business innovation, creativity, enterprise development, knowledge management and risk management (GBM)
K8. human information behaviour and information seeking processes and information retrieval systems (LIM)
K9. appropriate frameworks, standards and systems for the description, classification and indexing of information and knowledge containers and content (LIM)
K10. organisations, the external environment in which they operate and how they are managed (GBM)
K11. the internal aspects, functions and processes of organisations and their purpose, structures, governance, operations and management (GBM)
K12. different types of organisations that produce, disseminate and store information and their place in the information chain (LIM)
K13. policies and procedures that apply to the creation, capture, storage, dissemination, retrieval and destruction of information to ensure compliance with regulatory frameworks (LIM)
K14. the design, development and delivery of information products, systems and services to match customer requirements (LIM)
K15. processes, procedures and practices for effective management of organisations (GBM)
K16. the concepts, principles and techniques underpinning key aspects of planning, managing and leading services, including financial management, human resource management, project management, marketing, service quality, customer relationship management and change management (GBM)
K17. the principles and capacities of information and communication technologies and their application in professional practice.
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme students should be able to:
C1. demonstrate a range of cognitive and intellectual skills together with techniques specific to business and management such as critical thinking, analysis and synthesis, including the ability to relate and marshal facts, ideas and theories in a well-structured argument (LIM)
C2. self reflect critically, demonstrating self awareness, openness and sensitivity to diversity in terms of people, cultures, business and management issues; acquire the skills of learning to learn and developing a continuing appetite for learning; reflective, adaptive and collaborative learning (LIM)
C3. apply subject knowledge and understanding critically and effectively to real world situations (LIM)
C4. plan effective strategies for searching and handling information, in both printed and electronic formats
C5. apply qualitative and quantitative research methods and their application in practice. (LIM)
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme students should be able to:
P1. demonstrate effective use of information and communication technologies and their application in the management of information (LIM)
P2. specify, design and construct information services and computer-based systems according to users’ needs including identifying, formulating and solving business problems (LIM and GBM)
P3. carry out effective problem solving and decision making using appropriate quantitative and qualitative skills (LIM and GBM)
P4. apply the concepts, principles and techniques of strategic management in real world situations (LIM)
P5. use a range of electronic information resources and systems including databases, search engines and portals (LIM)
P6. conduct research into business and information management issues (GBM)
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of this programme students should be able to:
T1. make effective use of communication and information technology, for example create and manipulate documents and databases using appropriate software (LIM and GBM)
T2. use numeracy and quantitative skills including data analysis, interpretation and extrapolation and present information in numerical and statistical form using appropriate software (LIM and GBM)
T3. apply critical thinking, analysis and synthesis, evaluation and manage and reflect on their own learning (LIM and GBM)
T4. show interpersonal skills of effective listening, negotiating, persuasion and presentation and communicate effectively orally and in writing using a range of media for different purposes and audiences (LIM and GBM)
T5. demonstrate effective self-management in terms of time, planning and behaviour (LIM and GBM)
T6. achieve effective performance, within a team environment, including leadership, team building, influencing and project management skills in various contexts (LIM and GBM)
T7. appreciate the need for continuing professional development and manage their own lifelong learning (LIM and GBM)
T8. demonstrate skills of critical thinking, analysis and synthesis, including the ability to relate data, facts, ideas and theories into a well-structured argument (LIM and GBM)
4. Programme structure
4.1 Part A Introductory Modules
Semester 1
i) COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 60)
Code |
Module title |
Modular Weight |
ISA410 |
Knowledge, Data and Information in Society |
10 |
ISA412 |
Web Design |
10 |
BSA505 |
Organisational Behaviour |
10 |
BSA525 |
Introduction to Accounting |
10 |
BSA570 |
Quantitative Methods for Business |
10 |
BSA007 |
Skills for Study, Placement and Employment (weight 20) continued in Semester 2 |
10 |
Semester 2
i) COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 60)
Code |
Module title |
Modular Weight |
ISA411 |
Knowledge, Data and Information in Organisations |
10 |
ISA413 |
Information & Knowledge Organisation & Retrieval |
10 |
BSA506 |
Management of Human Resources |
10 |
BSA572 |
Statistics and Modelling for Managers |
10 |
BSA526 |
Accounting for Managers |
10 |
BSA007 |
Skills for Study, Placement and Employment (weight 20) continued from Semester 1 |
10 |
4.2 Part B - Degree Modules
Semester 1
i) COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 50)
Code |
Module title |
Modular Weight |
ISB411 |
Knowledge, Data and Information Systems |
20 |
ISB410 |
People Centred Information Systems |
10 |
BSB010 |
Business Information Management |
10 |
BSB560 |
Principles of Marketing |
10 |
ii) OPTIONAL MODULES (total modular weight 10)
One of the following modules from the Business catalogue of Part B optional modules for this programme:
ISB301, BSB050, BSB580
Semester 2
i) COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 50)
Code |
Module title |
Modular Weight |
ISB412 |
Records Management in Organisations |
20 |
ISB413 |
Research Methods |
10 |
BSB572 |
Management Science Methods |
10 |
BSB562 |
The Marketing Mix |
10 |
ii) OPTIONAL MODULES (total modular weight 10)
One of the following modules from the Business catalogue of Part B optional modules for this programme:
BSB012, BSB052, BSB550, BSB590
Candidates may replace the modules required for Part B Semester Two with an approved course of study taught in English at a foreign University. Candidates will undertake assessed work equivalent to 60 credits, as required by the School of Business and Economics. Students who select this option must ensure that they have taken a total of 60 credits in Semester One.
4.3 Part I - Placement (8 semester programme only)
Candidates on degree programmes which include professional training will be registered for module BSI001 Placement. They will undertake a placement of minimum 48 weeks during the year between Part B and Part C which will lead to the qualification of Diploma in Professional Studies (DPS) on successful completion of the required assessments for BSI001 and of the degree programme requirements.
4.4 Part C - Degree Modules
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTER 1 COMPULSORY MODULE | |
BSC570 Strategic Management | 20 |
SEMESTER 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSC072 Strategic Information Management | 10 |
BSC575 Leadership & Interpersonal Skills | 10 |
SEMESTER 1 OPTIONAL MODULES |
|
GROUP 1* | |
BSC070 Technology in Business and Society | 10 |
BSC071 Managing Big Data | 10 |
BSC130 Business Programming | 10 |
ISC002 Information Management Project (weight 30) continued in Semester 2 | 10/20 |
ISC027 Information and Knowledge Management | 10 |
ISC200 Information Architecture | 10 |
ISC336 Social Informatics | 10 |
GROUP 2 | |
BSC015 Financial Management and Corporate Policy | 10 |
BSC030 Corporate Governance | 10 |
BSC051 International Corporate Governance and Firms | 10 |
BSC063 Decision and Efficience Analysis | 10 |
BSC105 International Human Resource Management | 10 |
BSC110 Marketing Strategy and Planning | 10 |
BSC115 International Marketing | 10 |
BSC165 Business Forecasting | 10 |
BSC522 Entrepreneurship and Innovation | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 OPTIONAL MODULES |
|
GROUP 1* | |
ISC002 Information Management Project (weight 30) continued in Semester 2 | 20/10 |
ISC025 Information and Knowledge Management in the NHS | 10 |
ISC330 Culture and Change Management | 10 |
ISC334 Intelligent Project Management | 10 |
BSC136 Enterprise Resource Planning | 10 |
GROUP 2 (CHOOSE TWO) | |
BSC016 Financial Risk Management | 10 |
BSC018 Behavioural Finance | 10 |
BSC067 Simulation for Decision Support | 10 |
BSC068 Consulting for Decision Making | 10 |
BSC080 Analysing Careers | 10 |
BSC117 Services Marketing | 10 |
BSC124 Marketing Communications | 10 |
BSC140 Lean Operations | 10 |
BSC524 Entrepreneurship and Small Business Planning | 10 |
*Over Semester 1 and Semester 2 at least 40 credits must be chosen from Group 1*. Various semester 2 modules in the final year have pre-requisite modules. Students must carefully check their preferred modules' pre-requisites before making selections as all pre-requisites will be rigorously enforced. |
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
In order to progress from Part A to Part B and from Part B to C and to be eligible for the award of an Honours degree, candidates must not only satisfy the minimum credit requirements set out in Regulation XX but also:
- to progress from Part B to the period of professional training or study at an approved institution abroad, candidates must accumulate at least 100 credits in Part B as well as achieving at least 30% in all modules taken in Part B.
Provision will be made in accordance with Regulation XX for candidates who have the right of re-assessment in Part A or Part B of the programme to undergo re-assessment in the University’s special assessment period.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
Candidates' final degree classification will be determined on the basis of their performance in degree level Module Assessments in Parts B and C. The percentage mark for each Part will be combined in the ratio Part B 40: Part C 60 to determine the final percentage mark.
Programme Specification
BS BSc (Hons) International Business (2017 entry)
Academic Year: 2017/18
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at 天堂视频 (available soon)
- What makes 天堂视频 programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | 天堂视频 |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | School of Business and Economics |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | |
Final award | BSc /BSc DPS/BSc DIntS |
Programme title | International Business |
Programme code | BSUB30 |
Length of programme | The duration of the programme is six semesters, plus one academic year, and has four streams. Candidates following the Placement Stream are required to spend the third academic year undertaking professional training leading to the Diploma in Professional Studies in accordance with Senate Regulation XI. Candidates following the Study Abroad stream or the Language Related Placement Stream are required to spend the third academic year at an approved academic institution. Candidates following the Split Stream are required to spend six months of the third academic year undertaking professional training, and the other half of the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution. The Study Abroad, the Language Related Placement and the Split Stream lead to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI. The third academic year (Part I) occurs between Part B and Part C. |
UCAS code | N110 |
Admissions criteria | http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/undergraduate/courses/departments/business-economics/internationalbusiness/ |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
The International Business degree programme aims to produce high quality graduates with the knowledge, skills and understanding for an effective and valued career in a wide range of management situations including those requiring international understanding and cultural competence.
Within this general aim the programme specifically seeks to encourage students
- To develop knowledge, concepts and skills in the major academic disciplines of business and management as a sound basis for practice, study and training in the graduate’s chosen profession or management specialism.
- To develop a global outlook to face effectively the managerial and organisational challenges of a globalized economy.
- To develop the concepts, analytical approaches, evaluative thinking and numeracy skills necessary for management problem solving, including through individual experience on placement.
- To develop a deep understanding in areas of particular interest by pursuing them over an extended period and in considerable depth.
- To develop a positive attitude to change, a desire for excellence, a visionary and positive approach to future developments and an openness to new ideas.
Consequently the programme seeks
- To provide a relevant, practical and constantly updated programme through close links with many large organisations and through vocational experience in a professional placement.
- To offer international perspectives on business and management through teaching and learning and through close links with international partner universities.
- To provide students with a flexible learning environment allowing students to explore and develop their own interests and strengths as they progress through the programme.
- To develop teaching and learning in response to advances in scholarship and the needs of the international business community.
- To enhance the employability of our graduates.
The School of Business and Economics at 天堂视频University is distinctive amongst 'traditional' university business schools in incorporating a third year spent on professional placement. This is an integral element of the programme and something which we believe is of particular benefit in achieving these aims and offers graduates of our degrees additional and valuable opportunities to develop their knowledge, understanding and skills.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
- The benchmark statement for General Business and Management (B&M)
- The Framework for Higher Education Qualifications
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
The programme provides opportunities for students to develop and demonstrate knowledge and understanding, qualities, skills and other attributes in the areas shown below. These intended learning outcomes are set in the context of the QAA subject benchmark statement for Business and Management and those relating directly to this benchmark are marked (B&M) below.
On successful completion of this programme students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding in the following areas
- the foundation disciplines of business and management including economics, mathematics and statistics sufficient to enable a clear understanding of the central aspects of the main business and management functions (B&M);
- the economic, technological, financial, legal, cultural and political context within which business operates (B&M);
- integration of concepts from the various business disciplines to comprehend business situations and develop appropriate analysis and solutions (B&M);
- the process of management and differing international styles of management (B&M);
- concepts, analytical approaches, evaluative thinking and numeracy skills relevant to solving problems in both national and international business contexts;
- the nature of organisations and the behaviour of people within them, both individually and working in groups (B&M);
- pervasive issues which impact on international firms and international business, including: globalisation, diversity and cultural issues (B&M);
- the development and operation of markets for resources, goods and services including customer expectations, market orientation and the marketing mix (B&M);
- the sources, uses and management of finance, the use of accounting and other information systems for managerial applications (B&M);
- the management and development of people within organisations (B&M);
- the management of operations in both the manufacturing and service industries (B&M);
- the development, management and exploitation of information systems and their impact upon organisations (B&M);
- the key communication and information technologies used in business and management (B&M);
- the development of appropriate policies and strategies at the corporate level within a changing national and international environment (B&M).
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme students should be able to
- Use critical thinking, analysis and synthesis to evaluate and apply concepts and insights from business disciplines, including comprehension of complex scenarios (B&M);
- Formulate and solve both structured and unstructured business problems;
- Advise on business decisions using appropriate qualitative and quantitative skills, including the ability to identify and evaluate a range of alternative solutions (B&M);
- Relate theory to practice in business and management (B&M).
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme students should be able to
- use effective communication, both oral and written, in a range of styles and media appropriate for management in different cultures (B&M);
- make effective use of information and communication technologies (ICT) in a business context including word processing, storage and manipulation of data, generation of presentations, use of the internet and e-mail using appropriate software (B&M);
- conduct research using a range of sources of business-related materials including books, journals, trade and financial press, official statistics and the internet (B&M);
- create, evaluate and assess a range of options in a business situation, applying ideas and knowledge from a variety of sources (B&M);
- use effective team-working skills, including leadership, team-building and project management (B&M).
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of this programme students should be able to
- understand and be sensitive to different cultures, including the ability to work effectively in other cultures (B&M);
- Organise themselves personally and independently to be a valued contributor through time management, self-direction, self-motivation, tenacity and proactiveness (B&M);
- Analyse and assess their own personality, needs and abilities and be proactive in managing their personal development (B&M);
- Deploy appropriate interpersonal skills to achieve the best from others, including effective communication, listening, influencing and conflict resolution (B&M);
- Display a positive attitude to change, with a desire for excellence and a visionary and positive approach to future developments;
- Accept and analyse new ideas and assess alternatives when presented with a range of possible interpretations and/or solutions;
- Learn and work independently (B&M);
- Interpret numerical information, reason numerically and apply appropriate mathematical and statistical techniques (B&M);
- Communicate clearly and persuasively, both orally and in writing (B&M);
- Use information and communication technologies effectively and efficiently (ICT);
- Work well in a team, using appropriate skills, including leadership, team-building and project management (B&M).
4. Programme structure
4.1 Part A - Introductory Modules
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTER 1 and 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSA007 Skills for Study, Placement and Employment | 20 |
SEMESTER 1 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSA005 Organisational Behaviour | 10 |
BSA055 Principles of Marketing | 10 |
BSA070 Financial Framework | 10 |
BSA080 Quantitative Methods for Buisness A or BSA085 Quantitative Methods for Business B |
10 |
SEMESTER 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSA053 Organisations in the International Context | 10 |
BSA057 The Marketing Mix | 10 |
BSA060 Microeconomics for Business | 10 |
BSA110 Business Modelling A or BSA115 Business Modelling B |
10 |
SEMESTER 1 OPTIONAL MODULES (CHOOSE ONE) | |
BSA035 Introduction to Banking | 10 |
BSA050 Introduction to Management | 10 |
BSA075 Introduction to Retail Management | 10 |
University Wide Languages Programme | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 OPTIONAL MODULES (CHOOSE ONE) | |
BSA026 Principles of Law | 10 |
BSA036 Banking Law and Practice | 10 |
BSA052 Sociology of Work | 10 |
BSA077 Retailing Environment | 10 |
University Wide Languages Programme | 10 |
4.2 Part B - Degree Modules
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTER 1 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSB010 Business Information Management | 10 |
BSB023 Macroeconomics for Business | 10 |
BSB040 Human Resource Management | 10 |
BSB050 International Business | 10 |
BSB137 Data Analysis for Marketing Decisions | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSB024 International Economics | 10 |
BSB052 International Management | 10 |
BSB070 Accounting for Management Decisions | 10 |
BSB105 Brand Management | 10 |
BSB150 Business Ethics and Corporate Social Responsibility | 10 |
SEMESTER 1 OPTIONAL MODULES (CHOOSE ONE) | |
BSB015 Company Law | 10 |
BSB025 Financial Management | 10 |
BSB035 Sales Management | 10 |
BSB046 Organisation Studies | 10 |
BSB100 Operations Management | 10 |
University Wide Languages Programme | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 OPTIONAL MODULES (CHOOSE ONE) | |
BSB012 Information Systems Development | 10 |
BSB027 Financial Markets and Derivatives Fundamentals | 10 |
BSB046 Organisation Studies | 10 |
BSB067 Business Lending | 10 |
BSB087 Vocational Psychology | 10 |
BSB132 Retail Buying | 10 |
BSB135 Consumer Behaviour | 10 |
University Wide Languages Programme | 10 |
Candidates may replace the modules required for Part B Semester Two with an approved course of study taught in English at a foreign University. Candidates will undertake assessed work equivalent to 60 credits, as required by the School of Business and Economics. Students who select this option must ensure that they have taken a total of 60 credits in Semester One.
4.3 Part I
Candidates pursue one of the following streams:
i) Placement Stream
Candidates will undertake an appropriate business placement.
ii) Study Abroad Stream
Candidates will study at one of the School of Business and Economics approved academic institutions.
iii) Split Stream
Candidates will undertake an appropriate business placement for half the year and will study at one of the School of Business and Economics approved academic institutions for the other half of the academic year.
(iv) Language Related Placement
Candidates will undertake a year abroad in employment, for example as an English language assistant in a school or other educational establishment, approved by the School of Business and Economics.
4.4 Part C - Degree Modules
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTER 1 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSC051 International Corporate Governance and Firms. | 10 |
BSC105 International Human Resource Management | 10 |
BSC115 International Marketing | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSC053 International Negotiations | 10 |
BSC055 Strategic Management | 20 |
SEMESTER 1 OPTIONAL MODULES (CHOOSE THREE) | |
BSC015 Financial Management and Corporate Policy | 10 |
BSC020 Corporate Reconstruction and Turnaround | 10 |
BSC030 Corporate Governance | 10 |
BSC062 Analytics for Management | 10 |
BSC070 Technology in Business and Society | 10 |
BSC071 Managing Big Data | 10 |
BSC097 Knowledge Management | 10 |
BSC100 Advanced Interpersonal Skills | 10 |
BSC110 Marketing Strategy and Planning | 10 |
BSC130 Business Programming | 10 |
BSC132 Small Business Issues | 10 |
BSC165 Business Forecasting | 10 |
University Wide Languages Programme | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 OPTIONAL MODULES (CHOOSE THREE) | |
BSC016 Financial Risk Management | 10 |
BSC018 Behavioural Finance | 10 |
BSC042 Corporate and Wholesale Banking | 10 |
BSC059 Business and Entrepreneurialism in Postconflict Spaces | 10 |
BSC068 Consulting for Decision Making | 10 |
BSC072 Strategic Information Management | 10 |
BSC080 Analysing Careers | 10 |
BSC085 The Changing Work Organisation | 10 |
BSC117 Services Marketing | 10 |
BSC124 Marketing Communications | 10 |
BSC134 Business Planning for New Ventures | 10 |
BSC136 Enterprise Resource Planning | 10 |
BSC140 Lean Operations | 10 |
BSC144 Project Management | 10 |
BSC175 Retail Location | 10 |
University Wide Languages Programme | 10 |
Various semester 2 modules in the final year have a pre-requisite module in semester 1 of the final year. Students must carefully check their preferred modules' pre-requisites before making selections as all pre-requisites will be rigorously enforced. |
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
In order to progress from Part A to Part B and from Part B to C and to be eligible for the award of an Honours degree, candidates must not only satisfy the minimum credit requirements set out in Regulation XX but also:
To progress from Part B to the period of professional training or study at an approved institution abroad, candidates must accumulate at least 100 credits in Part B as well as achieving at least 30% in all modules taken in Part B.
Provision will be made in accordance with regulation XX for candidates who have the right of re-assessment in Part A or Part B of the programme to undergo re-assessment in the University’s special assessment period.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
Candidates’ final degree classification will be determined on the basis of their performance in degree level Module Assessments in Parts B and C, in accordance with the scheme set out in regulation XX. The average percentage marks for each Part will be combined in the ratio Part B 25: Part C 75, to determine the final overall percentage mark for the Programme (the Programme Mark).
Programme Specification
BS BSc (Hons) International Business (2016 entry)
Academic Year: 2017/18
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at 天堂视频 (available soon)
- What makes 天堂视频 programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | 天堂视频 |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | School of Business and Economics |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | |
Final award | BSc /BSc DPS/BSc DIntS |
Programme title | International Business |
Programme code | BSUB30 |
Length of programme | The duration of the programme is six semesters, plus one academic year, and has four streams. Candidates following the Placement Stream are required to spend the third academic year undertaking professional training leading to the Diploma in Professional Studies in accordance with Senate Regulation XI. Candidates following the Study Abroad stream or the Language Related Placement Stream are required to spend the third academic year at an approved academic institution. Candidates following the Split Stream are required to spend six months of the third academic year undertaking professional training, and the other half of the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution. The Study Abroad, the Language Related Placement and the Split Stream lead to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI. The third academic year (Part I) occurs between Part B and Part C. |
UCAS code | N110 |
Admissions criteria | http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/undergraduate/courses/departments/business-economics/internationalbusiness/ |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
The International Business degree programme aims to produce high quality graduates with the knowledge, skills and understanding for an effective and valued career in a wide range of management situations including those requiring international understanding and cultural competence.
Within this general aim the programme specifically seeks to encourage students
- To develop knowledge, concepts and skills in the major academic disciplines of business and management as a sound basis for practice, study and training in the graduate’s chosen profession or management specialism.
- To develop a global outlook to face effectively the managerial and organisational challenges of a globalized economy.
- To develop the concepts, analytical approaches, evaluative thinking and numeracy skills necessary for management problem solving, including through individual experience on placement.
- To develop a deep understanding in areas of particular interest by pursuing them over an extended period and in considerable depth.
- To develop a positive attitude to change, a desire for excellence, a visionary and positive approach to future developments and an openness to new ideas.
Consequently the programme seeks
- To provide a relevant, practical and constantly updated programme through close links with many large organisations and through vocational experience in a professional placement.
- To offer international perspectives on business and management through teaching and learning and through close links with international partner universities.
- To provide students with a flexible learning environment allowing students to explore and develop their own interests and strengths as they progress through the programme.
- To develop teaching and learning in response to advances in scholarship and the needs of the international business community.
- To enhance the employability of our graduates.
The School of Business and Economics at 天堂视频University is distinctive amongst 'traditional' university business schools in incorporating a third year spent on professional placement. This is an integral element of the programme and something which we believe is of particular benefit in achieving these aims and offers graduates of our degrees additional and valuable opportunities to develop their knowledge, understanding and skills.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
- The benchmark statement for General Business and Management (B&M)
- The Framework for Higher Education Qualifications
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
The programme provides opportunities for students to develop and demonstrate knowledge and understanding, qualities, skills and other attributes in the areas shown below. These intended learning outcomes are set in the context of the QAA subject benchmark statement for Business and Management and those relating directly to this benchmark are marked (B&M) below.
On successful completion of this programme students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding in the following areas
- the foundation disciplines of business and management including economics, mathematics and statistics sufficient to enable a clear understanding of the central aspects of the main business and management functions (B&M);
- the economic, technological, financial, legal, cultural and political context within which business operates (B&M);
- integration of concepts from the various business disciplines to comprehend business situations and develop appropriate analysis and solutions (B&M);
- the process of management and differing international styles of management (B&M);
- concepts, analytical approaches, evaluative thinking and numeracy skills relevant to solving problems in both national and international business contexts;
- the nature of organisations and the behaviour of people within them, both individually and working in groups (B&M);
- pervasive issues which impact on international firms and international business, including: globalisation, diversity and cultural issues (B&M);
- the development and operation of markets for resources, goods and services including customer expectations, market orientation and the marketing mix (B&M);
- the sources, uses and management of finance, the use of accounting and other information systems for managerial applications (B&M);
- the management and development of people within organisations (B&M);
- the management of operations in both the manufacturing and service industries (B&M);
- the development, management and exploitation of information systems and their impact upon organisations (B&M);
- the key communication and information technologies used in business and management (B&M);
- the development of appropriate policies and strategies at the corporate level within a changing national and international environment (B&M).
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme students should be able to
- Use critical thinking, analysis and synthesis to evaluate and apply concepts and insights from business disciplines, including comprehension of complex scenarios (B&M);
- Formulate and solve both structured and unstructured business problems;
- Advise on business decisions using appropriate qualitative and quantitative skills, including the ability to identify and evaluate a range of alternative solutions (B&M);
- Relate theory to practice in business and management (B&M).
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme students should be able to
- use effective communication, both oral and written, in a range of styles and media appropriate for management in different cultures (B&M);
- make effective use of information and communication technologies (ICT) in a business context including word processing, storage and manipulation of data, generation of presentations, use of the internet and e-mail using appropriate software (B&M);
- conduct research using a range of sources of business-related materials including books, journals, trade and financial press, official statistics and the internet (B&M);
- create, evaluate and assess a range of options in a business situation, applying ideas and knowledge from a variety of sources (B&M);
- use effective team-working skills, including leadership, team-building and project management (B&M).
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of this programme students should be able to
- understand and be sensitive to different cultures, including the ability to work effectively in other cultures (B&M);
- Organise themselves personally and independently to be a valued contributor through time management, self-direction, self-motivation, tenacity and proactiveness (B&M);
- Analyse and assess their own personality, needs and abilities and be proactive in managing their personal development (B&M);
- Deploy appropriate interpersonal skills to achieve the best from others, including effective communication, listening, influencing and conflict resolution (B&M);
- Display a positive attitude to change, with a desire for excellence and a visionary and positive approach to future developments;
- Accept and analyse new ideas and assess alternatives when presented with a range of possible interpretations and/or solutions;
- Learn and work independently (B&M);
- Interpret numerical information, reason numerically and apply appropriate mathematical and statistical techniques (B&M);
- Communicate clearly and persuasively, both orally and in writing (B&M);
- Use information and communication technologies effectively and efficiently (ICT);
- Work well in a team, using appropriate skills, including leadership, team-building and project management (B&M).
4. Programme structure
4.1 Part A - Introductory Modules
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTER 1 and 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSA007 Skills for Study, Placement and Employment | 20 |
SEMESTER 1 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSA005 Organisational Behaviour | 10 |
BSA055 Principles of Marketing | 10 |
BSA070 Financial Framework | 10 |
BSA080 Quantitative Methods for Business A or BSA085 Quantitative Methods for Business B |
10 |
SEMESTER 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSA053 Organisations in the International Context | 10 |
BSA057 The Marketing Mix | 10 |
BSA060 Microeconomics for Business | 10 |
BSA110 Business Modelling A or BSA115 Business Modelling B |
10 |
SEMESTER 1 OPTIONAL MODULES (CHOOSE ONE) | |
BSA035 Introduction to Banking | 10 |
BSA050 Introduction to Management | 10 |
BSA075 Introduction to Retail Management | 10 |
University Wide Languages Programme | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 OPTIONAL MODULES (CHOOSE ONE) | |
BSA026 Principles of Law | 10 |
BSA036 Banking Law and Practice | 10 |
BSA052 Sociology of Work | 10 |
BSA077 Retailing Environment | 10 |
University Wide Languages Programme | 10 |
4.2 Part B - Degree Modules
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTER 1 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSB010 Business Information Management | 10 |
BSB023 Macroeconomics for Business | 10 |
BSB040 Human Resource Management | 10 |
BSB050 International Business | 10 |
BSB137 Data Analysis for Marketing Decisions | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSB024 International Economics | 10 |
BSB052 International Management | 10 |
BSB070 Accounting for Management Decisions | 10 |
BSB105 Brand Management | 10 |
BSB150 Business Ethics and Corporate Social Responsibility | 10 |
SEMESTER 1 OPTIONAL MODULES (CHOOSE ONE) | |
BSB015 Company Law | 10 |
BSB025 Financial Management | 10 |
BSB035 Sales Management | 10 |
BSB046 Organisation Studies | 10 |
BSB100 Operations Management | 10 |
University Wide Languages Programme | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 OPTIONAL MODULES (CHOOSE ONE) | |
BSB012 Information Systems Development | 10 |
BSB027 Financial Markets and Derivatives Fundamentals | 10 |
BSB067 Business Lending | 10 |
BSB087 Vocational Psychology | 10 |
BSB132 Retail Buying | 10 |
BSB135 Consumer Behaviour | 10 |
University Wide Languages Programme | 10 |
Candidates may replace the modules required for Part B Semester Two with an approved course of study taught in English at a foreign University. Candidates will undertake assessed work equivalent to 60 credits, as required by the School of Business and Economics. Students who select this option must ensure that they have taken a total of 60 credits in Semester One.
4.3 Part I
Candidates pursue one of the following streams:
i) Placement Stream
Candidates will undertake an appropriate business placement.
ii) Study Abroad Stream
Candidates will study at one of the School of Business and Economics approved academic institutions.
iii) Split Stream
Candidates will undertake an appropriate business placement for half the year and will study at one of the School of Business and Economics approved academic institutions for the other half of the academic year.
(iv) Language Related Placement
Candidates will undertake a year abroad in employment, for example as an English language assistant in a school or other educational establishment, approved by the School of Business and Economics.
4.4 Part C - Degree Modules
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTER 1 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSC051 International Corporate Governance and Firms. | 10 |
BSC105 International Human Resource Management | 10 |
BSC115 International Marketing | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSC053 International Negotiations | 10 |
BSC055 Strategic Management | 10 |
SEMESTER 1 OPTIONAL MODULES (CHOOSE THREE) | |
BSC015 Financial Management and Corporate Policy | 10 |
BSC020 Corporate Reconstruction and Turnaround | 10 |
BSC030 Corporate Governance | 10 |
BSC062 Analytics for Management | 10 |
BSC070 Technology in Business and Society | 10 |
BSC071 Managing Big Data | 10 |
BSC097 Knowledge Management | 10 |
BSC100 Advanced Interpersonal Skills | 10 |
BSC110 Marketing Strategy and Planning | 10 |
BSC130 Business Programming | 10 |
BSC132 Small Business Issues | 10 |
BSC165 Business Forecasting | 10 |
University Wide Languages Programme | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 OPTIONAL MODULES (CHOOSE THREE) | |
BSC016 Financial Risk Management | 10 |
BSC018 Behavioural Finance | 10 |
BSC042 Corporate and Wholesale Banking | 10 |
BSC059 Business and Entrepreneurialism in Postconflict Space | 10 |
BSC068 Consulting for Decision Making | 10 |
BSC072 Strategic Information Management | 10 |
BSC080 Analysing Careers | 10 |
BSC085 The Changing Work Organisation | 10 |
BSC117 Services Marketing | 10 |
BSC124 Marketing Communications | 10 |
BSC134 Business Planning for New Ventures | 10 |
BSC136 Enterprise Resource Planning | 10 |
BSC140 Lean Operations | 10 |
BSC144 Project Management | 10 |
BSC175 Retail Location | 10 |
University Wide Languages Programme | 10 |
Various semester 2 modules in the final year have a pre-requisite module in semester 1 of the final year. Students must carefully check their preferred modules' pre-requisites before making selections as all pre-requisites will be rigorously enforced. |
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
In order to progress from Part A to Part B and from Part B to C and to be eligible for the award of an Honours degree, candidates must not only satisfy the minimum credit requirements set out in Regulation XX but also:
To progress from Part B to the period of professional training or study at an approved institution abroad, candidates must accumulate at least 100 credits in Part B as well as achieving at least 30% in all modules taken in Part B.
Provision will be made in accordance with regulation XX for candidates who have the right of re-assessment in Part A or Part B of the programme to undergo re-assessment in the University’s special assessment period.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
Candidates’ final degree classification will be determined on the basis of their performance in degree level Module Assessments in Parts B and C, in accordance with the scheme set out in regulation XX. The average percentage marks for each Part will be combined in the ratio Part B 25: Part C 75, to determine the final overall percentage mark for the Programme (the Programme Mark).
Programme Specification
BS BSc (Hons) International Business (2015 entry)
Academic Year: 2017/18
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at 天堂视频 (available soon)
- What makes 天堂视频 programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | 天堂视频 |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | School of Business and Economics |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | |
Final award | BSc /BSc DPS/BSc DIntS |
Programme title | International Business |
Programme code | BSUB30 |
Length of programme | The duration of the programme is six semesters, plus one academic year, and has four streams. Candidates following the Placement Stream are required to spend the third academic year undertaking professional training leading to the Diploma in Professional Studies in accordance with Senate Regulation XI. Candidates following the Study Abroad stream or the Language Related Placement Stream are required to spend the third academic year at an approved academic institution. Candidates following the Split Stream are required to spend six months of the third academic year undertaking professional training, and the other half of the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution. The Study Abroad, the Language Related Placement and the Split Stream lead to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI. The third academic year (Part I) occurs between Part B and Part C. |
UCAS code | N110 |
Admissions criteria | http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/undergraduate/courses/departments/business-economics/internationalbusiness/ |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
The International Business degree programme aims to produce high quality graduates with the knowledge, skills and understanding for an effective and valued career in a wide range of management situations including those requiring international understanding and cultural competence.
Within this general aim the programme specifically seeks to encourage students
- To develop knowledge, concepts and skills in the major academic disciplines of business and management as a sound basis for practice, study and training in the graduate’s chosen profession or management specialism.
- To develop a global outlook to face effectively the managerial and organisational challenges of a globalized economy.
- To develop the concepts, analytical approaches, evaluative thinking and numeracy skills necessary for management problem solving, including through individual experience on placement.
- To develop a deep understanding in areas of particular interest by pursuing them over an extended period and in considerable depth.
- To develop a positive attitude to change, a desire for excellence, a visionary and positive approach to future developments and an openness to new ideas.
Consequently the programme seeks
- To provide a relevant, practical and constantly updated programme through close links with many large organisations and through vocational experience in a professional placement.
- To offer international perspectives on business and management through teaching and learning and through close links with international partner universities.
- To provide students with a flexible learning environment allowing students to explore and develop their own interests and strengths as they progress through the programme.
- To develop teaching and learning in response to advances in scholarship and the needs of the international business community.
- To enhance the employability of our graduates.
The School of Business and Economics at 天堂视频University is distinctive amongst 'traditional' university business schools in incorporating a third year spent on professional placement. This is an integral element of the programme and something which we believe is of particular benefit in achieving these aims and offers graduates of our degrees additional and valuable opportunities to develop their knowledge, understanding and skills.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
- The benchmark statement for General Business and Management (B&M)
- The Framework for Higher Education Qualifications
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
The programme provides opportunities for students to develop and demonstrate knowledge and understanding, qualities, skills and other attributes in the areas shown below. These intended learning outcomes are set in the context of the QAA subject benchmark statement for Business and Management and those relating directly to this benchmark are marked (B&M) below.
On successful completion of this programme students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding in the following areas
- the foundation disciplines of business and management including economics, mathematics and statistics sufficient to enable a clear understanding of the central aspects of the main business and management functions (B&M);
- the economic, technological, financial, legal, cultural and political context within which business operates (B&M);
- integration of concepts from the various business disciplines to comprehend business situations and develop appropriate analysis and solutions (B&M);
- the process of management and differing international styles of management (B&M);
- concepts, analytical approaches, evaluative thinking and numeracy skills relevant to solving problems in both national and international business contexts;
- the nature of organisations and the behaviour of people within them, both individually and working in groups (B&M);
- pervasive issues which impact on international firms and international business, including: globalisation, diversity and cultural issues (B&M);
- the development and operation of markets for resources, goods and services including customer expectations, market orientation and the marketing mix (B&M);
- the sources, uses and management of finance, the use of accounting and other information systems for managerial applications (B&M);
- the management and development of people within organisations (B&M);
- the management of operations in both the manufacturing and service industries (B&M);
- the development, management and exploitation of information systems and their impact upon organisations (B&M);
- the key communication and information technologies used in business and management (B&M);
- the development of appropriate policies and strategies at the corporate level within a changing national and international environment (B&M).
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme students should be able to
- Use critical thinking, analysis and synthesis to evaluate and apply concepts and insights from business disciplines, including comprehension of complex scenarios (B&M);
- Formulate and solve both structured and unstructured business problems;
- Advise on business decisions using appropriate qualitative and quantitative skills, including the ability to identify and evaluate a range of alternative solutions (B&M);
- Relate theory to practice in business and management (B&M).
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme students should be able to
- use effective communication, both oral and written, in a range of styles and media appropriate for management in different cultures (B&M);
- make effective use of information and communication technologies (ICT) in a business context including word processing, storage and manipulation of data, generation of presentations, use of the internet and e-mail using appropriate software (B&M);
- conduct research using a range of sources of business-related materials including books, journals, trade and financial press, official statistics and the internet (B&M);
- create, evaluate and assess a range of options in a business situation, applying ideas and knowledge from a variety of sources (B&M);
- use effective team-working skills, including leadership, team-building and project management (B&M).
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of this programme students should be able to
- understand and be sensitive to different cultures, including the ability to work effectively in other cultures (B&M);
- Organise themselves personally and independently to be a valued contributor through time management, self-direction, self-motivation, tenacity and proactiveness (B&M);
- Analyse and assess their own personality, needs and abilities and be proactive in managing their personal development (B&M);
- Deploy appropriate interpersonal skills to achieve the best from others, including effective communication, listening, influencing and conflict resolution (B&M);
- Display a positive attitude to change, with a desire for excellence and a visionary and positive approach to future developments;
- Accept and analyse new ideas and assess alternatives when presented with a range of possible interpretations and/or solutions;
- Learn and work independently (B&M);
- Interpret numerical information, reason numerically and apply appropriate mathematical and statistical techniques (B&M);
- Communicate clearly and persuasively, both orally and in writing (B&M);
- Use information and communication technologies effectively and efficiently (ICT);
- Work well in a team, using appropriate skills, including leadership, team-building and project management (B&M).
4. Programme structure
4.1 Part A - Introductory Modules
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTER 1 and 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSA007 Skills for Study, Placement and Employment | 20 |
SEMESTER 1 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSA005 Organisational Behaviour | 10 |
BSA055 Principles of Marketing | 10 |
BSA070 Financial Framework | 10 |
BSA080 Quantitative Methods for Business Aor BSA085 Quantitative Methods for Business B |
10 |
SEMESTER 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSA053 Organisations in the International Context | 10 |
BSA057 The Marketing Mix | 10 |
BSA060 Microeconomics for Business | 10 |
BSA110 Business Modelling Aor BSA115 Business Modelling B |
10 |
SEMESTER 1 OPTIONAL MODULES (CHOOSE ONE) | |
BSA035 Introduction to Banking | 10 |
BSA050 Introduction to Management | 10 |
BSA075 Introduction to Retail Management | 10 |
University Wide Languages Programme | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 OPTIONAL MODULES (CHOOSE ONE) | |
BSA026 Principles of Law | 10 |
BSA036 Banking Law and Practice | 10 |
BSA052 Sociology of Work | 10 |
BSA077 Retailing Environment | 10 |
University Wide Languages Programme | 10 |
4.2 Part B - Degree Modules
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTER 1 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSB010 Business Information Management | 10 |
BSB023 Macroeconomics for Business | 10 |
BSB040 Human Resource Management | 10 |
BSB050 International Business | 10 |
BSB137 Data Analysis for Marketing Decisions | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSB024 International Economics | 10 |
BSB052 International Management | 10 |
BSB070 Accounting for Management Decisions | 10 |
BSB105 Brand Management | 10 |
BSB150 Business Ethics and Corporate Social Responsibility | 10 |
SEMESTER 1 OPTIONAL MODULES (CHOOSE ONE) | |
BSB015 Company Law | 10 |
BSB035 Sales Management | 10 |
BSB100 Operations Management | 10 |
University Wide Languages Programme | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 OPTIONAL MODULES (CHOOSE ONE) | |
BSB012 Information Systems Development | 10 |
BSB025 Financial Management | 10 |
BSB046 Organisation Studies | 10 |
BSB067 Business Lending | 10 |
BSB087 Vocational Psychology | 10 |
BSB132 Retail Buying | 10 |
BSB135 Consumer Behaviour | 10 |
University Wide Languages Programme | 10 |
Candidates may replace the modules required for Part B Semester Two with an approved course of study taught in English at a foreign University. Candidates will undertake assessed work equivalent to 60 credits, as required by the School of Business and Economics. Students who select this option must ensure that they have taken a total of 60 credits in Semester One.
4.3 Part I
Candidates pursue one of the following streams:
i) Placement Stream
Candidates will undertake an appropriate business placement.
ii) Study Abroad Stream
Candidates will study at one of the School of Business and Economics approved academic institutions.
iii) Split Stream
Candidates will undertake an appropriate business placement for half the year and will study at one of the School of Business and Economics approved academic institutions for the other half of the academic year.
(iv) Language Related Placement
Candidates will undertake a year abroad in employment, for example as an English language assistant in a school or other educational establishment, approved by the School of Business and Economics.
4.4 Part C - Degree Modules
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTER 1 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSC051 International Corporate Governance and Firms. | 10 |
BSC105 International Human Resource Management | 10 |
BSC115 International Marketing | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSC053 International Negotiations | 10 |
BSC055 Strategic Management | 20 |
SEMESTER 1 OPTIONAL MODULES (CHOOSE THREE) | |
BSC015 Financial Management and Corporate Policy | 10 |
BSC020 Corporate Reconstruction and Turnaround | 10 |
BSC030 Corporate Governance | 10 |
BSC062 Analytics for Management | 10 |
BSC070 Technology in Business and Society | 10 |
BSC097 Knowledge Management | 10 |
BSC100 Advanced Interpersonal Skills | 10 |
BSC110 Marketing Strategy and Planning | 10 |
BSC130 Business Programming | 10 |
BSC132 Small Business Issues | 10 |
BSC165 Business Forecasting | 10 |
University Wide Languages Programme | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 OPTIONAL MODULES (CHOOSE THREE) | |
BSC016 Financial Risk Management | 10 |
BSC018 Behavioural Finance | 10 |
BSC042 Corporate and Wholesale Banking | 10 |
BSC059 Business and Entrepreneurialism in Postconflict Spaces | 10 |
BSC068 Consulting for Decision Making | 10 |
BSC071 Managing Big Data | 10 |
BSC072 Strategic Information Management | 10 |
BSC080 Analysing Careers | 10 |
BSC085 The Changing Work Organisation | 10 |
BSC117 Services Marketing | 10 |
BSC124 Marketing Communications | 10 |
BSC134 Business Planning for New Ventures | 10 |
BSC136 Enterprise Resource Planning | 10 |
BSC140 Lean Operations | 10 |
BSC144 Project Management | 10 |
BSC175 Retail Location | 10 |
University Wide Languages Programme | 10 |
Various semester 2 modules in the final year have a pre-requisite module in semester 1 of the final year. Students must carefully check their preferred modules' pre-requisites before making selections as all pre-requisites will be rigorously enforced. |
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
In order to progress from Part A to Part B and from Part B to C and to be eligible for the award of an Honours degree, candidates must not only satisfy the minimum credit requirements set out in Regulation XX but also:
To progress from Part B to the period of professional training or study at an approved institution abroad, candidates must accumulate at least 100 credits in Part B as well as achieving at least 30% in all modules taken in Part B.
Provision will be made in accordance with regulation XX for candidates who have the right of re-assessment in Part A or Part B of the programme to undergo re-assessment in the University’s special assessment period.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
Candidates’ final degree classification will be determined on the basis of their performance in degree level Module Assessments in Parts B and C, in accordance with the scheme set out in regulation XX. The average percentage marks for each Part will be combined in the ratio Part B 25: Part C 75, to determine the final overall percentage mark for the Programme (the Programme Mark).
Programme Specification
BS BSc (Hons) International Business (2014 entry)
Academic Year: 2017/18
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at 天堂视频 (available soon)
- What makes 天堂视频 programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | 天堂视频 |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | School of Business and Economics |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | |
Final award | BSc /BSc DPS/BSc DIntS |
Programme title | International Business |
Programme code | BSUB30 |
Length of programme | The duration of the programme is six semesters, plus one academic year, and has four streams. Candidates following the Placement Stream are required to spend the third academic year undertaking professional training leading to the Diploma in Professional Studies in accordance with Senate Regulation XI. Candidates following the Study Abroad stream or the Language Related Placement Stream are required to spend the third academic year at an approved academic institution. Candidates following the Split Stream are required to spend six months of the third academic year undertaking professional training, and the other half of the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution. The Study Abroad, the Language Related Placement and the Split Stream lead to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI. The third academic year (Part I) occurs between Part B and Part C. |
UCAS code | N110 |
Admissions criteria | http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/undergraduate/courses/departments/business-economics/internationalbusiness/ |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
The International Business degree programme aims to produce high quality graduates with the knowledge, skills and understanding for an effective and valued career in a wide range of management situations including those requiring international understanding and cultural competence.
Within this general aim the programme specifically seeks to encourage students
- To develop knowledge, concepts and skills in the major academic disciplines of business and management as a sound basis for practice, study and training in the graduate’s chosen profession or management specialism.
- To develop a global outlook to face effectively the managerial and organisational challenges of a globalized economy.
- To develop the concepts, analytical approaches, evaluative thinking and numeracy skills necessary for management problem solving, including through individual experience on placement.
- To develop a deep understanding in areas of particular interest by pursuing them over an extended period and in considerable depth.
- To develop a positive attitude to change, a desire for excellence, a visionary and positive approach to future developments and an openness to new ideas.
Consequently the programme seeks
- To provide a relevant, practical and constantly updated programme through close links with many large organisations and through vocational experience in a professional placement.
- To offer international perspectives on business and management through teaching and learning and through close links with international partner universities.
- To provide students with a flexible learning environment allowing students to explore and develop their own interests and strengths as they progress through the programme.
- To develop teaching and learning in response to advances in scholarship and the needs of the international business community.
- To enhance the employability of our graduates.
The School of Business and Economics at 天堂视频University is distinctive amongst 'traditional' university business schools in incorporating a third year spent on professional placement. This is an integral element of the programme and something which we believe is of particular benefit in achieving these aims and offers graduates of our degrees additional and valuable opportunities to develop their knowledge, understanding and skills.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
- The benchmark statement for General Business and Management (B&M)
- The Framework for Higher Education Qualifications
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
The programme provides opportunities for students to develop and demonstrate knowledge and understanding, qualities, skills and other attributes in the areas shown below. These intended learning outcomes are set in the context of the QAA subject benchmark statement for Business and Management and those relating directly to this benchmark are marked (B&M) below.
On successful completion of this programme students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding in the following areas
- the foundation disciplines of business and management including economics, mathematics and statistics sufficient to enable a clear understanding of the central aspects of the main business and management functions (B&M);
- the economic, technological, financial, legal, cultural and political context within which business operates (B&M);
- integration of concepts from the various business disciplines to comprehend business situations and develop appropriate analysis and solutions (B&M);
- the process of management and differing international styles of management (B&M);
- concepts, analytical approaches, evaluative thinking and numeracy skills relevant to solving problems in both national and international business contexts;
- the nature of organisations and the behaviour of people within them, both individually and working in groups (B&M);
- pervasive issues which impact on international firms and international business, including: globalisation, diversity and cultural issues (B&M);
- the development and operation of markets for resources, goods and services including customer expectations, market orientation and the marketing mix (B&M);
- the sources, uses and management of finance, the use of accounting and other information systems for managerial applications (B&M);
- the management and development of people within organisations (B&M);
- the management of operations in both the manufacturing and service industries (B&M);
- the development, management and exploitation of information systems and their impact upon organisations (B&M);
- the key communication and information technologies used in business and management (B&M);
- the development of appropriate policies and strategies at the corporate level within a changing national and international environment (B&M).
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme students should be able to
- Use critical thinking, analysis and synthesis to evaluate and apply concepts and insights from business disciplines, including comprehension of complex scenarios (B&M);
- Formulate and solve both structured and unstructured business problems;
- Advise on business decisions using appropriate qualitative and quantitative skills, including the ability to identify and evaluate a range of alternative solutions (B&M);
- Relate theory to practice in business and management (B&M).
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme students should be able to
- use effective communication, both oral and written, in a range of styles and media appropriate for management in different cultures (B&M);
- make effective use of information and communication technologies (ICT) in a business context including word processing, storage and manipulation of data, generation of presentations, use of the internet and e-mail using appropriate software (B&M);
- conduct research using a range of sources of business-related materials including books, journals, trade and financial press, official statistics and the internet (B&M);
- create, evaluate and assess a range of options in a business situation, applying ideas and knowledge from a variety of sources (B&M);
- use effective team-working skills, including leadership, team-building and project management (B&M).
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of this programme students should be able to
- understand and be sensitive to different cultures, including the ability to work effectively in other cultures (B&M);
- Organise themselves personally and independently to be a valued contributor through time management, self-direction, self-motivation, tenacity and proactiveness (B&M);
- Analyse and assess their own personality, needs and abilities and be proactive in managing their personal development (B&M);
- Deploy appropriate interpersonal skills to achieve the best from others, including effective communication, listening, influencing and conflict resolution (B&M);
- Display a positive attitude to change, with a desire for excellence and a visionary and positive approach to future developments;
- Accept and analyse new ideas and assess alternatives when presented with a range of possible interpretations and/or solutions;
- Learn and work independently (B&M);
- Interpret numerical information, reason numerically and apply appropriate mathematical and statistical techniques (B&M);
- Communicate clearly and persuasively, both orally and in writing (B&M);
- Use information and communication technologies effectively and efficiently (ICT);
- Work well in a team, using appropriate skills, including leadership, team-building and project management (B&M).
4. Programme structure
4.1 Part A - Introductory Modules
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTER 1 and 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSA007 Skills for Study, Placement and Employment | 20 |
SEMESTER 1 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSA005 Organisational Behaviour | 10 |
BSA055 Principles of Marketing | 10 |
BSA070 Financial Framework | 10 |
BSA080 Quantitative Methods for Business Aor BSA085 Quantitative Methods for Business B |
10 |
SEMESTER 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSA053 Organisations in the International Context | 10 |
BSA057 The Marketing Mix | 10 |
BSA060 Microeconomics for Business | 10 |
BSA110 Business Modelling Aor BSA115 Business Modelling B |
10 |
SEMESTER 1 OPTIONAL MODULES (CHOOSE ONE) | |
BSA035 Introduction to Banking | 10 |
BSA050 Introduction to Management | 10 |
BSA075 Introduction to Retail Management | 10 |
University Wide Languages Programme | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 OPTIONAL MODULES (CHOOSE ONE) | |
BSA026 Principles of Law | 10 |
BSA036 Banking Law and Practice | 10 |
BSA052 Sociology of Work | 10 |
BSA077 Retailing Environment | 10 |
University Wide Languages Programme | 10 |
4.2 Part B - Degree Modules
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTER 1 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSB010 Business Information Management | 10 |
BSB023 Macroeconomics for Business | 10 |
BSB040 Human Resource Management | 10 |
BSB050 International Business | 10 |
BSB137 Data Analysis for Marketing Decisions | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSB024 International Economics | 10 |
BSB052 International Management | 10 |
BSB070 Accounting for Management Decisions | 10 |
BSB086 International Employment Relations | 10 |
BSB105 Brand Management | 10 |
SEMESTER 1 OPTIONAL MODULES (CHOOSE ONE) | |
BSB015 Company Law | 10 |
BSB035 Sales Management | 10 |
BSB100 Operations Management | 10 |
University Wide Languages Programme | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 OPTIONAL MODULES (CHOOSE ONE) | |
BSB012 Information Systems Development | 10 |
BSB025 Financial Management | 10 |
BSB046 Organisation Studies | 10 |
BSB067 Business Lending | 10 |
BSB087 Vocational Psychology | 10 |
BSB132 Retail Buying | 10 |
BSB135 Consumer Behaviour | 10 |
University Wide Languages Programme | 10 |
Candidates may replace the modules required for Part B Semester Two with an approved course of study taught in English at a foreign University. Candidates will undertake assessed work equivalent to 60 credits, as required by the School of Business and Economics. Students who select this option must ensure that they have taken a total of 60 credits in Semester One.
4.3 Part I
Candidates pursue one of the following streams:
i) Placement Stream
Candidates will undertake an appropriate business placement.
ii) Study Abroad Stream
Candidates will study at one of the School of Business and Economics approved academic institutions.
iii) Split Stream
Candidates will undertake an appropriate business placement for half the year and will study at one of the School of Business and Economics approved academic institutions for the other half of the academic year.
(iv) Language Related Placement
Candidates will undertake a year abroad in employment, for example as an English language assistant in a school or other educational establishment, approved by the School of Business and Economics.
4.4 Part C - Degree Modules
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTER 1 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSC051 International Corporate Governance and Firms. | 10 |
BSC105 International Human Resource Management | 10 |
BSC115 International Marketing | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSC053 International Negotiations | 10 |
BSC055 Strategic Management | 20 |
SEMESTER 1 OPTIONAL MODULES (CHOOSE THREE) | |
BSC015 Financial Management and Corporate Policy | 10 |
BSC030 Corporate Governance | 10 |
BSC070 Technology in Business and Society | 10 |
BSC097 Knowledge Management | 10 |
BSC100 Advanced Interpersonal Skills | 10 |
BSC110 Marketing Strategy and Planning | 10 |
BSC130 Business Programming | 10 |
BSC132 Small Business Issues | 10 |
BSC165 Business Forecasting | 10 |
University Wide Languages Programme | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 OPTIONAL MODULES (CHOOSE THREE) | |
BSC016 Financial Risk Management | 10 |
BSC018 Behavioural Finance | 10 |
BSC042 Corporate and Wholesale Banking | 10 |
BSC059 Business and Entrepreneurialism in Postconflict Spaces | 10 |
BSC068 Consulting for Decision Making | 10 |
BSC071 Managing Big Data | 10 |
BSC072 Strategic Information Management | 10 |
BSC080 Analysing Careers | 10 |
BSC085 The Changing Work Organisation | 10 |
BSC117 Services Marketing | 10 |
BSC124 Marketing Communications | 10 |
BSC134 Business Planning for New Ventures | 10 |
BSC136 Enterprise Resource Planning | 10 |
BSC144 Project Management | 10 |
BSC175 Retail Location | 10 |
University Wide Languages Programme | 10 |
Various semester 2 modules in the final year have a pre-requisite module in semester 1 of the final year. Students must carefully check their preferred modules' pre-requisites before making selections as all pre-requisites will be rigorously enforced. |
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
In order to progress from Part A to Part B and from Part B to C and to be eligible for the award of an Honours degree, candidates must not only satisfy the minimum credit requirements set out in Regulation XX but also:
To progress from Part B to the period of professional training or study at an approved institution abroad, candidates must accumulate at least 100 credits in Part B as well as achieving at least 30% in all modules taken in Part B.
Provision will be made in accordance with regulation XX for candidates who have the right of re-assessment in Part A or Part B of the programme to undergo re-assessment in the University’s special assessment period.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
Candidates’ final degree classification will be determined on the basis of their performance in degree level Module Assessments in Parts B and C, in accordance with the scheme set out in regulation XX. The average percentage marks for each Part will be combined in the ratio Part B 25: Part C 75, to determine the final overall percentage mark for the Programme (the Programme Mark).
Programme Specification
BS BSc (Hons) International Business (2013 entry)
Academic Year: 2017/18
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at 天堂视频 (available soon)
- What makes 天堂视频 programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | 天堂视频 |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | School of Business and Economics |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | |
Final award | BSc /BSc DPS/BSc DIntS |
Programme title | International Business |
Programme code | BSUB30 |
Length of programme | The duration of the programme is six semesters, plus one academic year, and has four streams. Candidates following the Placement Stream are required to spend the third academic year undertaking professional training leading to the Diploma in Professional Studies in accordance with Senate Regulation XI. Candidates following the Study Abroad stream or the Language Related Placement Stream are required to spend the third academic year at an approved academic institution. Candidates following the Split Stream are required to spend six months of the third academic year undertaking professional training, and the other half of the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution. The Study Abroad, the Language Related Placement and the Split Stream lead to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI. The third academic year (Part I) occurs between Part B and Part C. |
UCAS code | N110 |
Admissions criteria | http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/undergraduate/courses/departments/business-economics/internationalbusiness/ |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
The International Business degree programme aims to produce high quality graduates with the knowledge, skills and understanding for an effective and valued career in a wide range of management situations including those requiring international understanding and cultural competence.
Within this general aim the programme specifically seeks to encourage students
- To develop knowledge, concepts and skills in the major academic disciplines of business and management as a sound basis for practice, study and training in the graduate’s chosen profession or management specialism.
- To develop a global outlook to face effectively the managerial and organisational challenges of a globalized economy.
- To develop the concepts, analytical approaches, evaluative thinking and numeracy skills necessary for management problem solving, including through individual experience on placement.
- To develop a deep understanding in areas of particular interest by pursuing them over an extended period and in considerable depth.
- To develop a positive attitude to change, a desire for excellence, a visionary and positive approach to future developments and an openness to new ideas.
Consequently the programme seeks
- To provide a relevant, practical and constantly updated programme through close links with many large organisations and through vocational experience in a professional placement.
- To offer international perspectives on business and management through teaching and learning and through close links with international partner universities.
- To provide students with a flexible learning environment allowing students to explore and develop their own interests and strengths as they progress through the programme.
- To develop teaching and learning in response to advances in scholarship and the needs of the international business community.
- To enhance the employability of our graduates.
The School of Business and Economics at 天堂视频University is distinctive amongst 'traditional' university business schools in incorporating a third year spent on professional placement. This is an integral element of the programme and something which we believe is of particular benefit in achieving these aims and offers graduates of our degrees additional and valuable opportunities to develop their knowledge, understanding and skills.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
- The benchmark statement for General Business and Management (B&M)
- The Framework for Higher Education Qualifications
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
The programme provides opportunities for students to develop and demonstrate knowledge and understanding, qualities, skills and other attributes in the areas shown below. These intended learning outcomes are set in the context of the QAA subject benchmark statement for Business and Management and those relating directly to this benchmark are marked (B&M) below.
On successful completion of this programme students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding in the following areas
- the foundation disciplines of business and management including economics, mathematics and statistics sufficient to enable a clear understanding of the central aspects of the main business and management functions (B&M);
- the economic, technological, financial, legal, cultural and political context within which business operates (B&M);
- integration of concepts from the various business disciplines to comprehend business situations and develop appropriate analysis and solutions (B&M);
- the process of management and differing international styles of management (B&M);
- concepts, analytical approaches, evaluative thinking and numeracy skills relevant to solving problems in both national and international business contexts;
- the nature of organisations and the behaviour of people within them, both individually and working in groups (B&M);
- pervasive issues which impact on international firms and international business, including: globalisation, diversity and cultural issues (B&M);
- the development and operation of markets for resources, goods and services including customer expectations, market orientation and the marketing mix (B&M);
- the sources, uses and management of finance, the use of accounting and other information systems for managerial applications (B&M);
- the management and development of people within organisations (B&M);
- the management of operations in both the manufacturing and service industries (B&M);
- the development, management and exploitation of information systems and their impact upon organisations (B&M);
- the key communication and information technologies used in business and management (B&M);
- the development of appropriate policies and strategies at the corporate level within a changing national and international environment (B&M).
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme students should be able to
- Use critical thinking, analysis and synthesis to evaluate and apply concepts and insights from business disciplines, including comprehension of complex scenarios (B&M);
- Formulate and solve both structured and unstructured business problems;
- Advise on business decisions using appropriate qualitative and quantitative skills, including the ability to identify and evaluate a range of alternative solutions (B&M);
- Relate theory to practice in business and management (B&M).
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme students should be able to
- use effective communication, both oral and written, in a range of styles and media appropriate for management in different cultures (B&M);
- make effective use of information and communication technologies (ICT) in a business context including word processing, storage and manipulation of data, generation of presentations, use of the internet and e-mail using appropriate software (B&M);
- conduct research using a range of sources of business-related materials including books, journals, trade and financial press, official statistics and the internet (B&M);
- create, evaluate and assess a range of options in a business situation, applying ideas and knowledge from a variety of sources (B&M);
- use effective team-working skills, including leadership, team-building and project management (B&M).
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of this programme students should be able to
- understand and be sensitive to different cultures, including the ability to work effectively in other cultures (B&M);
- Organise themselves personally and independently to be a valued contributor through time management, self-direction, self-motivation, tenacity and proactiveness (B&M);
- Analyse and assess their own personality, needs and abilities and be proactive in managing their personal development (B&M);
- Deploy appropriate interpersonal skills to achieve the best from others, including effective communication, listening, influencing and conflict resolution (B&M);
- Display a positive attitude to change, with a desire for excellence and a visionary and positive approach to future developments;
- Accept and analyse new ideas and assess alternatives when presented with a range of possible interpretations and/or solutions;
- Learn and work independently (B&M);
- Interpret numerical information, reason numerically and apply appropriate mathematical and statistical techniques (B&M);
- Communicate clearly and persuasively, both orally and in writing (B&M);
- Use information and communication technologies effectively and efficiently (ICT);
- Work well in a team, using appropriate skills, including leadership, team-building and project management (B&M).
4. Programme structure
4.1 Part A - Introductory Modules
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTER 1 and 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSA007 Skills for Study, Placement and Employment | 20 |
SEMESTER 1 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSA005 Organisational Behaviour | 10 |
BSA055 Principles of Marketing | 10 |
BSA070 Financial Framework | 10 |
BSA080 Quantitative Methods for Business A | 10 |
or BSA085 Quantitative Methods for Business B | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSA053 Organisations in the International Context | 10 |
BSA057 The Marketing Mix | 10 |
BSA060 Microeconomics for Business | 10 |
BSA110 Business Modelling A | 10 |
or BSA115 Business Modelling B | 10 |
SEMESTER 1 OPTIONAL MODULES (CHOOSE ONE) | |
BSA035 Introduction to Banking | 10 |
BSA050 Introduction to Management | 10 |
BSA075 Introduction to Retail Management | 10 |
University Wide Languages Programme | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 OPTIONAL MODULES (CHOOSE ONE) | |
BSA026 Principles of Law | 10 |
BSA036 Banking Law and Practice | 10 |
BSA052 Sociology of Work | 10 |
BSA077 Retailing Environment | 10 |
University Wide Languages Programme | 10 |
4.2 Part B - Degree Modules
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTER 1 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSB010 Business Information Management | 10 |
BSB023 Macroeconomics for Business | 10 |
BSB040 Human Resource Management | 10 |
BSB050 International Business | 10 |
BSB137 Data Analysis for Marketing Decisions | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSB024 International Economics | 10 |
BSB052 International Management | 10 |
BSB070 Accounting for Management Decisions | 10 |
BSB086 International Employment Relations | 10 |
BSB105 Brand Management | 10 |
SEMESTER 1 OPTIONAL MODULES (CHOOSE ONE) | |
BSB015 Company Law | 10 |
BSB035 Sales Management | 10 |
BSB100 Operations Management | 10 |
University Wide Languages Programme | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 OPTIONAL MODULES (CHOOSE ONE) | |
BSB012 Information Systems Development | 10 |
BSB025 Financial Management | 10 |
BSB046 Organisation Studies | 10 |
BSB067 Business Lending | 10 |
BSB087 Vocational Psychology | 10 |
BSB132 Retail Buying | 10 |
BSB135 Consumer Behaviour | 10 |
University Wide Languages Programme | 10 |
Candidates may replace the modules required for Part B Semester Two with an approved course of study taught in English at a foreign University. Candidates will undertake assessed work equivalent to 60 credits, as required by the School of Business and Economics. Students who select this option must ensure that they have taken a total of 60 credits in Semester One.
4.3 Part I
Candidates pursue one of the following streams:
i) Placement Stream
Candidates will undertake an appropriate business placement.
ii) Study Abroad Stream
Candidates will study at one of the School of Business and Economics approved academic institutions.
iii) Split Stream
Candidates will undertake an appropriate business placement for half the year and will study at one of the School of Business and Economics approved academic institutions for the other half of the academic year.
(iv) Language Related Placement
Candidates will undertake a year abroad in employment, for example as an English language assistant in a school or other educational establishment, approved by the School of Business and Economics.
4.4 Part C - Degree Modules
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTER 1 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSC051 International Corporate Governance and Firms. | 10 |
BSC105 International Human Resource Management | 10 |
BSC115 International Marketing | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSC053 International Negotiations | 10 |
BSC055 Strategic Management | 20 |
SEMESTER 1 OPTIONAL MODULES (CHOOSE THREE) | |
BSC015 Financial Management and Corporate Policy | 10 |
BSC020 Corporate Reconstruction and Turnaround | 10 |
BSC030 Corporate Governance | 10 |
BSC070 Technology in Business and Society | 10 |
BSC097 Knowledge Management | 10 |
BSC100 Advanced Interpersonal Skills | 10 |
BSC110 Marketing Strategy and Planning | 10 |
BSC130 Business Programming | 10 |
BSC132 Small Business Issues | 10 |
BSC165 Business Forecasting | 10 |
EUL111 French Language 11 | 10 |
EUL211 German Language 11 | 10 |
EUL311 Spanish Language 11 | 10 |
EUC100 French Dissertation (weight 20) continued in Sem 2 | 10 |
EUC200 German Dissertation (weight 20) continued in Sem 2 | 10 |
EUC300 Spanish Dissertation (weight 20) continued in Sem 2 | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 OPTIONAL MODULES (CHOOSE THREE) | |
BSC016 Financial Risk Management | 10 |
BSC018 Behavioural Finance | 10 |
BSC042 Corporate and Wholesale OBanking | 10 |
BSC068 Consulting for Decision Making | 10 |
BSC071 Managing Big Data | 10 |
BSC072 Strategic Information Management | 10 |
BSC080 Analysing Careers | 10 |
BSC117 Services Marketing | 10 |
BSC124 Marketing Communications | 10 |
BSC134 Business Planning for New Ventures | 10 |
BSC136 Enterprise Resource Planning | 10 |
BSC140 Lean Operations | 10 |
BSC144 Project Management | 10 |
BSC175 Retail Location | 10 |
EUL112 French Language 11 | 10 |
EUL212 German Language 11 | 10 |
EUL312 Spanish Language 11 | 10 |
EUC100 French Dissertation (weight 20) continued from Sem 1 | 10 |
EUC200 German Dissertation (weight 20) continued from Sem 1 | 10 |
EUC300 Spanish Dissertation (weight 20) continued from Sem 1 | 10 |
Various semester 2 modules in the final year have a pre-requisite module in semester 1 of the final year. Students must carefully check their preferred modules' pre-requisites before making selections as all pre-requisites will be rigorously enforced. |
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
In order to progress from Part A to Part B and from Part B to C and to be eligible for the award of an Honours degree, candidates must not only satisfy the minimum credit requirements set out in Regulation XX but also:
To progress from Part B to the period of professional training or study at an approved institution abroad, candidates must accumulate at least 100 credits in Part B as well as achieving at least 30% in all modules taken in Part B.
Provision will be made in accordance with regulation XX for candidates who have the right of re-assessment in Part A or Part B of the programme to undergo re-assessment in the University’s special assessment period.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
Candidates’ final degree classification will be determined on the basis of their performance in degree level Module Assessments in Parts B and C, in accordance with the scheme set out in regulation XX. The average percentage marks for each Part will be combined in the ratio Part B 25: Part C 75, to determine the final overall percentage mark for the Programme (the Programme Mark).
Programme Specification
BS BSc (Hons) International Business (2012 entry)
Academic Year: 2017/18
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at 天堂视频 (available soon)
- What makes 天堂视频 programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | 天堂视频 |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | School of Business and Economics |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | |
Final award | BSc /BSc DPS/BSc DIntS |
Programme title | International Business |
Programme code | BSUB30 |
Length of programme | The duration of the programme is six semesters, plus one academic year, and has four streams. Candidates following the Placement Stream are required to spend the third academic year undertaking professional training leading to the Diploma in Professional Studies in accordance with Senate Regulation XI. Candidates following the Study Abroad stream or the Language Related Placement Stream are required to spend the third academic year at an approved academic institution. Candidates following the Split Stream are required to spend six months of the third academic year undertaking professional training, and the other half of the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution. The Study Abroad, the Language Related Placement and the Split Stream lead to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI. The third academic year (Part I) occurs between Part B and Part C. |
UCAS code | N110 |
Admissions criteria | http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/undergraduate/courses/departments/business-economics/internationalbusiness/ |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
The International Business degree programme aims to produce high quality graduates with the knowledge, skills and understanding for an effective and valued career in a wide range of management situations including those requiring international understanding and cultural competence.
Within this general aim the programme specifically seeks to encourage students
- To develop knowledge, concepts and skills in the major academic disciplines of business and management as a sound basis for practice, study and training in the graduate’s chosen profession or management specialism.
- To develop a global outlook to face effectively the managerial and organisational challenges of a globalized economy.
- To develop the concepts, analytical approaches, evaluative thinking and numeracy skills necessary for management problem solving, including through individual experience on placement.
- To develop a deep understanding in areas of particular interest by pursuing them over an extended period and in considerable depth.
- To develop a positive attitude to change, a desire for excellence, a visionary and positive approach to future developments and an openness to new ideas.
Consequently the programme seeks
- To provide a relevant, practical and constantly updated programme through close links with many large organisations and through vocational experience in a professional placement.
- To offer international perspectives on business and management through teaching and learning and through close links with international partner universities.
- To provide students with a flexible learning environment allowing students to explore and develop their own interests and strengths as they progress through the programme.
- To develop teaching and learning in response to advances in scholarship and the needs of the international business community.
- To enhance the employability of our graduates.
The School of Business and Economics at 天堂视频University is distinctive amongst 'traditional' university business schools in incorporating a third year spent on professional placement. This is an integral element of the programme and something which we believe is of particular benefit in achieving these aims and offers graduates of our degrees additional and valuable opportunities to develop their knowledge, understanding and skills.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
- The benchmark statement for General Business and Management (B&M)
- The Framework for Higher Education Qualifications
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
The programme provides opportunities for students to develop and demonstrate knowledge and understanding, qualities, skills and other attributes in the areas shown below. These intended learning outcomes are set in the context of the QAA subject benchmark statement for Business and Management and those relating directly to this benchmark are marked (B&M) below.
On successful completion of this programme students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding in the following areas
- the foundation disciplines of business and management including economics, mathematics and statistics sufficient to enable a clear understanding of the central aspects of the main business and management functions (B&M);
- the economic, technological, financial, legal, cultural and political context within which business operates (B&M);
- integration of concepts and from the various business disciplines to comprehend business situations and develop appropriate analysis and solutions (B&M);
- the process of management and differing international styles of management (B&M);
- concepts, analytical approaches, evaluative thinking and numeracy skills relevant to solving problems in both national and international business contexts;
- the nature of organisations and the behaviour of people within them, both individually and working in groups (B&M);
- pervasive issues which impact on international firms and international business, including: globalisation, diversity and cultural issues (B&M);
- the development and operation of markets for resources, goods and services including customer expectations, market orientation and the marketing mix (B&M);
- the sources, uses and management of finance, the use of accounting and other information systems for managerial applications (B&M);
- the management and development of people within organisations (B&M);
- the management of operations in both the manufacturing and service industries (B&M);
- the development, management and exploitation of information systems and their impact upon organisations (B&M);
- the key communication and information technologies used in business and management (B&M);
- the development of appropriate policies and strategies at the corporate level within a changing national and international environment (B&M).
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme students should be able to
- Use critical thinking, analysis and synthesis to evaluate and apply concepts and insights from business disciplines, including comprehension of complex scenarios (B&M);
- Formulate and solve both structured and unstructured business problems;
- Advise on business decisions using appropriate qualitative and quantitative skills, including the ability to identify and evaluate a range of alternative solutions (B&M);
- Relate theory to practice in business and management (B&M).
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme students should be able to
- use effective communication, both oral and written, in a range of styles and media appropriate for management in different cultures (B&M);
- make effective use of information and communication technologies (ICT) in a business context including word processing, storage and manipulation of data, generation of presentations, use of the internet and e-mail using appropriate software (B&M);
- conduct research using a range of sources of business-related materials including books, journals, trade and financial press, official statistics and the internet (B&M);
- create, evaluate and assess a range of options in a business situation, applying ideas and knowledge from a variety of sources (B&M);
- use effective team-working skills, including leadership, team-building and project management (B&M).
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of this programme students should be able to
- understand and be sensitive to different cultures, including the ability to work effectively in other cultures (B&M);
- Organise themselves personally and independently to be a valued contributor through time management, self-direction, self-motivation, tenacity and proactiveness (B&M);
- Analyse and assess their own personality, needs and abilities and be proactive in managing their personal development (B&M);
- Deploy appropriate interpersonal skills to achieve the best from others, including effective communication, listening, influencing and conflict resolution (B&M);
- Display a positive attitude to change, with a desire for excellence and a visionary and positive approach to future developments;
- Accept and analyse new ideas and assess alternatives when presented with a range of possible interpretations and/or solutions;
- Learn and work independently (B&M);
- Interpret numerical information, reason numerically and apply appropriate mathematical and statistical techniques (B&M);
- Communicate clearly and persuasively, both orally and in writing (B&M);
- Use information and communication technologies effectively and efficiently (ICT);
- Work well in a team, using appropriate skills, including leadership, team-building and project management (B&M).
4. Programme structure
4.1 Part A - Introductory Modules
Semester 1
i) COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 50)
Code |
Title |
Modular Weight |
BSA005 |
Organisational Behaviour |
10 |
BSA007 |
Skills for Study, Placement and Employment (weight 20) continued in Semester 2 |
10 |
BSA055 |
Principles of Marketing |
10 |
BSA070 |
Financial Framework |
10 |
BSA080 |
Quantitative Methods for Business A |
10 |
|
Or |
|
BSA085 |
Quantitative Methods for Business B |
10 |
ii) OPTIONAL MODULES (total modular weight 10)
One module from the Business catalogue of Part A optional modules for this programme, or any University-Wide Language module (level 3 and above)
Semester 2
i) COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 50)
Code |
Title |
Modular Weight |
BSA007 |
Skills for Study, Placement and Employment (weight 20) continued from Semester 1 |
10 |
BSA057 |
The Marketing Mix |
10 |
BSA060 |
Microeconomics for Business |
10 |
BSA110 |
Business Modelling A |
20 |
|
Or |
|
BSA115 |
Business Modelling B |
20 |
ii) OPTIONAL MODULES (total modular weight 10)
One module from the Business catalogue of Part A optional modules for this programme, or any University-Wide Language module (level 4 and above) .
4.2 Part B - Degree Modules
Semester 1
i) COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 50)
Code |
Title |
Modular Weight |
BSB010 |
Business Information Management |
10 |
BSB023 |
Macroeconomics for Business |
10 |
BSB040 |
Human Resource Management |
10 |
BSB050 |
International Business |
10 |
BSB137 |
Data Analysis for Marketing Decisions |
10 |
ii) OPTIONAL MODULES (total modular weight 10)
One module from the Business catalogue of Part B optional modules for this programme, or any University-Wide Language module (level 5 and above) subject to School approval.
Semester 2
EITHER
Code |
Title |
Modular Weight |
BSB200 |
International Semester |
60 |
OR
i) COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 50)
Code |
Title |
Modular Weight |
BSB024 |
International Economics |
10 |
BSB052 |
International Management |
10 |
BSB070 |
Accounting for Management Decisions |
10 |
BSB086 |
International Employment Relations |
10 |
BSB105 |
Brand Management |
10 |
ii) OPTIONAL MODULES (total modular weight 10)
One module from the Business catalogue of Part B optional modules for this programme, or any University-Wide Language module (level 6 and above).
Candidates may replace the modules required for Part B Semester Two with an approved course of study taught in English at a foreign University. Candidates will undertake assessed work equivalent to 60 credits, as required by the School of Business and Economics. Students who select this option must ensure that they have taken a total of 60 credits in Semester One.
4.3 Part I
Candidates pursue one of the following streams:
i) Placement Stream
Candidates will undertake an appropriate business placement.
ii) Study Abroad Stream
Candidates will study at one of the School of Business and Economics approved academic institutions.
iii) Split Stream
Candidates will undertake an appropriate business placement for half the year and will study at one of the School of Business and Economics approved academic institutions for the other half of the academic year.
(iv) Language Related Placement
Candidates will undertake a year abroad in employment, for example as an English language assistant in a school or other educational establishment, approved by the School of Business and Economics.
4.4 Part C - Degree Modules
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTER 1 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSC051 International Corporate Governance and Firms. | 10 |
BSC105 International Human Resource Management | 10 |
BSC115 International Marketing | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSC053 International Negotiations | 10 |
BSC055 Strategic Management | 20 |
SEMESTER 1 OPTIONAL MODULES (CHOOSE THREE) | |
BSC015 Financial Management and Corporate Policy | 10 |
BSC020 Corporate Reconstruction and Turnaround | 10 |
BSC030 Corporate Governance | 10 |
BSC056 Exploring Political Risks in the Asia-Pacific and Emerging Markets | 10 |
BSC058 The Business and Politics of Intelligence and Espionage | 10 |
BSC062 Analytics for Management | 10 |
BSC070 Technology in Business and Society | 10 |
BSC097 Knowledge Management | 10 |
BSC100 Advanced Interpersonal Skills | 10 |
BSC110 Marketing Strategy and Planning | 10 |
BSC130 Business Programming | 10 |
BSC132 Small Business Issues | 10 |
BSC165 Business Forecasting | 10 |
EUL111 French Language 11 | 10 |
EUL211 German Language 11 | 10 |
EUL311 Spanish Language 11 | 10 |
EUC100 French Dissertation (weight 20) continued in Sem 2 | 10 |
EUC200 German Dissertation (weight 20) continued in Sem 2 | 10 |
EUC300 Spanish Dissertation (weight 20) continued in Sem 2 | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 OPTIONAL MODULES (CHOOSE THREE) | |
BSC016 Financial Risk Management | 10 |
BSC018 Behavioural Finance | 10 |
BSC042 Corporate and Wholesale OBanking | 10 |
BSC057 The Business of Crisis and the Crisis of Business | 10 |
BSC059 Business and Entrepreneurialism in Postconflict Spaces | 10 |
BSC064 Business Optimisation | 10 |
BSC067 Business Dynamics and Simulation | 10 |
BSC068 Consulting Practice and Decision Making | 10 |
BSC072 Strategic Information Management | 10 |
BSC080 Analysing Careers | 10 |
BSC085 The Changing Work Organisation | 10 |
BSC117 Services Marketing | 10 |
BSC124 Marketing Communications | 10 |
BSC134 Business Planning for New Ventures | 10 |
BSC136 Enterprise Resource Planning | 10 |
BSC140 Lean Operations | 10 |
BSC144 Project Management | 10 |
BSC150 Business Ethics | 10 |
BSC175 Retail Location | 10 |
EUL112 French Language 11 | 10 |
EUL212 German Language 11 | 10 |
EUL312 Spanish Language 11 | 10 |
EUC100 French Dissertation (weight 20) continued from Sem 1 | 10 |
EUC200 German Dissertation (weight 20) continued from Sem 1 | 10 |
EUC300 Spanish Dissertation (weight 20) continued from Sem 1 | 10 |
Various semester 2 modules in the final year have a pre-requisite module in semester 1 of the final year. Students must carefully check their preferred modules' pre-requisites before making selections as all pre-requisites will be rigorously enforced. |
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
In order to progress from Part A to Part B and from Part B to C and to be eligible for the award of an Honours degree, candidates must not only satisfy the minimum credit requirements set out in Regulation XX but also;
To progress from Part B to the period of professional training or study at an approved institution abroad, candidates must accumulate at least 100 credits in Part B as well as achieving at least 30% in all modules taken in Part B.
Provision will be made in accordance with regulation XX for candidates who have the right of re-assessment in Part A or Part B of the programme to undergo re-assessment in the University’s special assessment period.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
Candidates’ final degree classification will be determined on the basis of their performance in degree level Module Assessments in Parts B and C, in accordance with the scheme set out in regulation XX. The average percentage marks for each Part will be combined in the ratio Part B 25: Part C 75, to determine the final overall percentage mark for the Programme (the Programme Mark).
Programme Specification
BS BSc (Hons) Management Sciences (2017 entry)
Academic Year: 2017/18
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at 天堂视频 (available soon)
- What makes 天堂视频 programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | 天堂视频 |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | School of Business and Economics |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | |
Final award | BSc (Hons) + DPS/DIntS |
Programme title | Management Sciences |
Programme code | BSUB40 |
Length of programme | The duration of the programme is six semesters, plus one academic year, and has four streams. Candidates following the Placement Stream are required to spend the third academic year undertaking professional training leading to the Diploma in Professional Studies in accordance with Senate Regulation XI. Candidates following the Study Abroad stream or the Language Related Placement Stream are required to spend the third academic year at an approved academic institution. Candidates following the Split Stream are required to spend six months of the third academic year undertaking professional training, and the other half of the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution. The Study Abroad, the Language Related Placement and the Split Stream lead to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI. The third academic year (Part I) occurs between Part B and Part C. |
UCAS code | N201 |
Admissions criteria | http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/undergraduate/courses/departments/business-economics/managementsciences/ |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
The Management Sciences degree programme aims to produce high quality graduates with the knowledge, skills and understanding for an effective and valued career in a wide range of management situations including those requiring quantitative approaches, analytical techniques and significant IT skills.
Within this general aim the programme specifically seeks to encourage students
- To develop knowledge, concepts and skills in the major academic disciplines of business and management as a sound basis for practice, study and training in the graduate’s chosen profession or management specialism.
- To develop a comprehensive understanding of the concepts, analytical approaches, evaluative thinking and numeracy skills necessary for management problem solving, including through individual experience on placement.
- To develop skills in the choice, application, interpretation and implementation of industry standard and bespoke software packages required to meet the needs of the modern data-driven business environment.
- To develop a deep understanding in areas of particular interest by pursuing them over an extended period and in considerable depth.
- To develop a positive attitude to change, a desire for excellence, a visionary and positive approach to future developments and an openness to new ideas.
Consequently the programme seeks
- To provide a relevant, practical and constantly updated programme through close links with many large organisations and through vocational experience in a professional placement.
- To provide students with a dynamic learning environment showing the importance and relevance of numeracy and computing skills in meeting the needs of successful modern organisations.
- To provide students with a flexible learning environment allowing students to explore and develop their own interests and strengths as they progress through the programme.
- To develop teaching and learning in response to advances in scholarship and the needs of the business community.
- To enhance the employability of our graduates.
The School of Business and Economics at 天堂视频 is distinctive amongst 'traditional' university business schools in incorporating a third year spent on professional placement. This is an integral element of the programme and something which we believe is of particular benefit in achieving these aims and offers graduates of our degrees additional and valuable opportunities to develop their knowledge, understanding and skills.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
- The benchmark statement for General Business and Management (B&M)
- The Framework for Higher Education Qualifications
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
The programme provides opportunities for students to develop and demonstrate knowledge and understanding, qualities, skills and other attributes in the areas shown below. These intended learning outcomes are set in the context of the QAA subject benchmark statement for Business and Management and those relating directly to this benchmark are marked (B&M) below.
On successful completion of this programme students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding in the following areas
- Foundational disciplines of business and management including economics, business mathematics and statistics sufficient to enable a clear understanding of the central aspects of the main business and management functions (B&M);
- Key areas of the technological, economic, fiscal, legal, and political contexts in which business operates (B&M, altered);
- The behaviour of people in organisations;
- The processes of management and decision making;
- Familiarity with a range of business data, research sources and appropriate methodologies (B&M, altered);
- The development and operation of markets for resources, goods and services including customer expectations, market orientation and the marketing mix (B&M, altered);
- The sources, uses and management of finance, the use of accounting and other information systems for managerial applications (B&M);
- The management and development of people within organisations (B&M);
- the management of operations in both the manufacturing and service industries (B&M, altered);
- The development, management and exploitation of information systems and their impact upon organisations (B&M);
- The key communication and information technologies used in business and management (B&M, altered);
- The development of appropriate policies and strategies at the corporate level within a changing national and international environment (B&M, altered);
- Modelling and analytical techniques in management including their strengths and weaknesses and appropriateness;
- Appropriate packages for modelling and decision making in management;
- A range of contemporary issues impacting on various areas of management.
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme students should be able to
- Use critical thinking, analysis and synthesis to evaluate and apply concepts and insights from business disciplines, including comprehension of complex scenarios (B&M);
- Formulate and solve both structured and unstructured business problems;
- Advise on business decisions using appropriate qualitative and quantitative skills, including the ability to identify and evaluate a range of alternative solutions (B&M);
- Relate theory to practice in business and management(B&M).
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme students should be able to
- Communicate effectively in a business context, using a range of styles and media appropriate for management (B&M);
- Make effective use of a wide range of information and communication technologies (ICT) in a business context including the selection of appropriate software for various tasks (B&M);
- Conduct research using a range of sources of business-related materials including books, journals, trade and financial press, official statistics and the Internet (B&M);
- Create, evaluate and assess a range of options in a business situation, applying ideas and knowledge from a variety of sources (B&M);
- Apply highly developed numerical skills and sophisticated quantitative skills including data analysis, interpretation and extrapolation to business problems (B&M);
- Create, exploit and apply quantitative models to business problems and phenomena (B&M);
- Perform effectively within a team environment, displaying effective team-working skills including leaderships, team-building and project management skills(B&M)
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of the programme students should be able to
- Organise themselves personally and independently to be a valued contributor through time management, self-direction, self-motivation, tenacity and proactiveness (B&M);
- Analyse and assess their own personality, needs and abilities and be proactive in managing their personal development (B&M);
- Deploy appropriate interpersonal skills to achieve the best from others, including effective communication, listening, influencing and conflict resolution (B&M);
- Display a positive attitude to change, with a desire for excellence and a visionary and positive approach to future developments;
- Accept and analyse new ideas and assess alternatives when presented with a range of possible interpretations and/or solutions;
- Learn and work independently (B&M);
- Interpret numerical information, reason numerically and apply appropriate mathematical and statistical techniques (B&M);
- Communicate clearly and persuasively, both orally and in writing (B&M);
- Use information and communication technologies effectively and efficiently (ICT);
- Work well in a team, using appropriate skills, including leadership, team-building and project management (B&M).
4. Programme structure
4.1 Part A - Introductory Modules
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTER 1 and 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSA007 Skills for Study, Placement and Employment | 20 |
SEMESTER 1 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSA005 Organisational Behaviour | 10 |
BSA055 Principles of Marketing | 10 |
BSA070 Financail Framework | 10 |
BSA080 Quantitative Methods for Business A or BSA085 Quantitative Methods for Business B |
10 |
SEMESTER 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSA053 Organisations in the International Context | 10 |
BSA057 The Marketing Mix | 10 |
BSA060 Microeconomics for Business | 10 |
BSA110 Business Modelling A or BSA115 Business Modelling B |
10 |
SEMESTER 1 OPTIONAL MODULES (CHOOSE ONE) | |
BSA035 Introduction to Banking | 10 |
BSA050 Introduction to Management | 10 |
BSA075 Introduction to Retail Management | 10 |
University Wide Languages Programme | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 OPTIONAL MODULES (CHOOSE ONE) | |
BSA026 Principles of Law | 10 |
BSA036 Banking Law and Practice | 10 |
BSA052 Sociology of Work | 10 |
BSA077 Retailing Environment | 10 |
University Wide Languages Programme | 10 |
4.2 Part B - Degree Modules
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTER 1 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSB010 Business Information Management | 10 |
BSB040 Human Resource Management | 10 |
BSB100 Operations Management | 10 |
BSB120 Management Science Methods | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSB012 Information Systems Development | 10 |
BSB070 Accounting for Management Decisions | 10 |
BSB105 Brand Management | 10 |
BSB110 Data Analysis for Management | 10 |
SEMESTER 1 OPTIONAL MODULES (SELECT TWO) | |
BSB015 Company Law | 10 |
BSB023 Macroeconomics for Business | 10 |
BSB025 Financial Management | 10 |
BSB035 Sales Management | 10 |
BSB046 Organisation Studies | 10 |
BSB050 International Business | 10 |
University Wide Languages Programme | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 OPTIONAL MODULES (SELECT TWO) | |
BSB024 International Economics | 10 |
BSB027 Financial Markets and Derivatives Fundamentals | 10 |
BSB052 International Management | 10 |
BSB067 Business Lending | 10 |
BSB087 Vocational Psychology | 10 |
BSB132 Retail Buying | 10 |
BSB135 Consumer Behaviour | 10 |
BSB150 Business Ethics and Corporate Social Responsibility | 10 |
University Wide Languages Programme | 10 |
Candidates may replace the modules required for Part B Semester Two with an approved course of study taught in English at a foreign University. Candidates will undertake assessed work equivalent to 60 credits, as required by the School of Business and Economics. Students who select this option must ensure that they have taken a total of 60 credits in Semester One.
4.3 Part I
Candidates pursue one of the following streams:
i) Placement Stream
Candidates will undertake an appropriate business placement.
ii) Study Abroad Stream
Candidates will study at one of the School of Business and Economics approved academic institutions.
iii) Split Stream
Candidates will undertake an appropriate business placement for half the year and will study at one of the School of Business and Economicsapproved academic institutions for the other half of the academic year.
(iv) Language Related Placement
Candidates will undertake a year abroad in employment, for example as an English language assistant in a school or other educational establishment, approved by the School of Business and Economics.
4.4 Part C - Degree Modules
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTER 1 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSC070 Technology in Business and Society | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSC055 Strategic Management | 20 |
SEMESTER 1 OPTIONAL MODULES, with a total credit weighting of 50 from the approved list of options* | |
GROUP 1* | |
BSC062 Analytics for Management | 10 |
BSC063 Decision and Efficiency Analysis | 10 |
BSC165 Business Forecasting | 10 |
GROUP 2 | |
BSC015 Financial Management and Corporate Policy | 10 |
BSC020 Corporate Reconstruction and Turnaround | 10 |
BSC030 Corporate Governance | 10 |
BSC051 International Corporate Governance and Firms | 10 |
BSC071 Managing Big Data | 10 |
BSC097 Knowledge Management | 10 |
BSC100 Advanced Interpersonal Skills | 10 |
BSC105 International Human Resource Management | 10 |
BSC110 Marketing Strategy and Planning | 10 |
BSC115 International Marketing | 10 |
BSC130 Business Programming | 10 |
BSC132 Small Business Issues | 10 |
University Wide Languages Programme | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 OPTIONAL MODULES, with a total credit weighting of 40 from the approved list of options* | |
GROUP 1* | |
BSC064 Business Optimisation | 10 |
BSC067 Simulation for Decision Support | 10 |
BSC068 Consulting for Decision Making | 10 |
GROUP 2 | |
BSC016 Financial Risk Management | 10 |
BSC018 Behavioural Finance | 10 |
BSC042 Corporate and Wholesale Banking | 10 |
BSC053 International Negotiations | 10 |
BSC059 Business and Entrepreneurialism in Postconflict Spaces | 10 |
BSC072 Strategic Information Management | 10 |
BSC080 Analysing Careers | 10 |
BSC085 The Changing Work Organisation | 10 |
BSC117 Services Marketing | 10 |
BSC124 Marketing Communications | 10 |
BSC134 Business Planning for New Ventures | 10 |
BSC136 Enterprise Resource Planning | 10 |
BSC140 Lean Operations | 10 |
BSC144 Project Management | 10 |
BSC175 Retail Location | 10 |
University Wide Languages Programme | 10 |
*Over Semester 1 and Semester 2 at least 20 credits must be chosen from Group 1*. Various semester 2 modules in the final year have a pre-requisite module in semester 1 of the final year. Students must carefully check their preferred modules' pre-requisites before making selections as all pre-requisites will be rigorously enforced. |
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
In order to progress from Part A to Part B and from Part B to C and to be eligible for the award of an Honours degree, candidates must not only satisfy the minimum credit requirements set out in Regulation XX but also:
- To progress from Part B to the period of professional training or study at an approved institution abroad, candidates must accumulate at least 100 credits in Part B as well as achieving at least 30% in all modules taken in Part B.
Provision will be made in accordance with regulation XX for candidates who have the right of re-assessment in Part A or Part B of the programme to undergo re-assessment in the University’s special assessment period.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
Candidates’ final degree classification will be determined on the basis of their performance in degree level Module Assessments in Parts B and C, in accordance with the scheme set out in regulation XX. The average percentage marks for each Part will be combined in the ratio Part B 25: Part C 75, to determine the final overall percentage mark for the Programme (the Programme Mark).
Programme Specification
BS BSc (Hons) Management Sciences (2016 entry)
Academic Year: 2017/18
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at 天堂视频 (available soon)
- What makes 天堂视频 programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | 天堂视频 |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | School of Business and Economics |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | |
Final award | BSc (Hons) + DPS/DIntS |
Programme title | Management Sciences |
Programme code | BSUB40 |
Length of programme | The duration of the programme is six semesters, plus one academic year, and has four streams. Candidates following the Placement Stream are required to spend the third academic year undertaking professional training leading to the Diploma in Professional Studies in accordance with Senate Regulation XI. Candidates following the Study Abroad stream or the Language Related Placement Stream are required to spend the third academic year at an approved academic institution. Candidates following the Split Stream are required to spend six months of the third academic year undertaking professional training, and the other half of the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution. The Study Abroad, the Language Related Placement and the Split Stream lead to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI. The third academic year (Part I) occurs between Part B and Part C. |
UCAS code | N201 |
Admissions criteria | http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/undergraduate/courses/departments/business-economics/managementsciences/ |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
The Management Sciences degree programme aims to produce high quality graduates with the knowledge, skills and understanding for an effective and valued career in a wide range of management situations including those requiring quantitative approaches, analytical techniques and significant IT skills.
Within this general aim the programme specifically seeks to encourage students
- To develop knowledge, concepts and skills in the major academic disciplines of business and management as a sound basis for practice, study and training in the graduate’s chosen profession or management specialism.
- To develop a comprehensive understanding of the concepts, analytical approaches, evaluative thinking and numeracy skills necessary for management problem solving, including through individual experience on placement.
- To develop skills in the choice, application, interpretation and implementation of industry standard and bespoke software packages required to meet the needs of the modern data-driven business environment.
- To develop a deep understanding in areas of particular interest by pursuing them over an extended period and in considerable depth.
- To develop a positive attitude to change, a desire for excellence, a visionary and positive approach to future developments and an openness to new ideas.
Consequently the programme seeks
- To provide a relevant, practical and constantly updated programme through close links with many large organisations and through vocational experience in a professional placement.
- To provide students with a dynamic learning environment showing the importance and relevance of numeracy and computing skills in meeting the needs of successful modern organisations.
- To provide students with a flexible learning environment allowing students to explore and develop their own interests and strengths as they progress through the programme.
- To develop teaching and learning in response to advances in scholarship and the needs of the business community.
- To enhance the employability of our graduates.
The School of Business and Economics at 天堂视频 is distinctive amongst 'traditional' university business schools in incorporating a third year spent on professional placement. This is an integral element of the programme and something which we believe is of particular benefit in achieving these aims and offers graduates of our degrees additional and valuable opportunities to develop their knowledge, understanding and skills.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
- The benchmark statement for General Business and Management (B&M)
- The Framework for Higher Education Qualifications
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
The programme provides opportunities for students to develop and demonstrate knowledge and understanding, qualities, skills and other attributes in the areas shown below. These intended learning outcomes are set in the context of the QAA subject benchmark statement for Business and Management and those relating directly to this benchmark are marked (B&M) below.
On successful completion of this programme students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding in the following areas
- Foundational disciplines of business and management including economics, business mathematics and statistics sufficient to enable a clear understanding of the central aspects of the main business and management functions (B&M);
- Key areas of the technological, economic, fiscal, legal, and political contexts in which business operates (B&M, altered);
- The behaviour of people in organisations;
- The processes of management and decision making;
- Familiarity with a range of business data, research sources and appropriate methodologies (B&M, altered);
- The development and operation of markets for resources, goods and services including customer expectations, market orientation and the marketing mix (B&M, altered);
- The sources, uses and management of finance, the use of accounting and other information systems for managerial applications (B&M);
- The management and development of people within organisations (B&M);
- the management of operations in both the manufacturing and service industries (B&M, altered);
- The development, management and exploitation of information systems and their impact upon organisations (B&M);
- The key communication and information technologies used in business and management (B&M, altered);
- The development of appropriate policies and strategies at the corporate level within a changing national and international environment (B&M, altered);
- Modelling and analytical techniques in management including their strengths and weaknesses and appropriateness;
- Appropriate packages for modelling and decision making in management;
- A range of contemporary issues impacting on various areas of management.
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme students should be able to
- Use critical thinking, analysis and synthesis to evaluate and apply concepts and insights from business disciplines, including comprehension of complex scenarios (B&M);
- Formulate and solve both structured and unstructured business problems;
- Advise on business decisions using appropriate qualitative and quantitative skills, including the ability to identify and evaluate a range of alternative solutions (B&M);
- Relate theory to practice in business and management(B&M).
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme students should be able to
- Communicate effectively in a business context, using a range of styles and media appropriate for management (B&M);
- Make effective use of a wide range of information and communication technologies (ICT) in a business context including the selection of appropriate software for various tasks (B&M);
- Conduct research using a range of sources of business-related materials including books, journals, trade and financial press, official statistics and the Internet (B&M);
- Create, evaluate and assess a range of options in a business situation, applying ideas and knowledge from a variety of sources (B&M);
- Apply highly developed numerical skills and sophisticated quantitative skills including data analysis, interpretation and extrapolation to business problems (B&M);
- Create, exploit and apply quantitative models to business problems and phenomena (B&M);
- Perform effectively within a team environment, displaying effective team-working skills including leaderships, team-building and project management skills(B&M)
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of the programme students should be able to
- Organise themselves personally and independently to be a valued contributor through time management, self-direction, self-motivation, tenacity and proactiveness (B&M);
- Analyse and assess their own personality, needs and abilities and be proactive in managing their personal development (B&M);
- Deploy appropriate interpersonal skills to achieve the best from others, including effective communication, listening, influencing and conflict resolution (B&M);
- Display a positive attitude to change, with a desire for excellence and a visionary and positive approach to future developments;
- Accept and analyse new ideas and assess alternatives when presented with a range of possible interpretations and/or solutions;
- Learn and work independently (B&M);
- Interpret numerical information, reason numerically and apply appropriate mathematical and statistical techniques (B&M);
- Communicate clearly and persuasively, both orally and in writing (B&M);
- Use information and communication technologies effectively and efficiently (ICT);
- Work well in a team, using appropriate skills, including leadership, team-building and project management (B&M).
4. Programme structure
4.1 Part A - Introductory Modules
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTER 1 and 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSA007 Skills for Study, Placement and Employment | 20 |
SEMESTER 1 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSA005 Organisational Behaviour | 10 |
BSA055 Principles of Marketing | 10 |
BSA070 Financial Framework | 10 |
BSA080 Quantitative Methods for Business A or BSA085 Quantitative Methods for Business B |
10 |
SEMESTER 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSA053 Organisations in the International Context | 10 |
BSA057 The Marketing Mix | 10 |
BSA060 Microeconomics for Business | 10 |
BSA110 Business Modelling A or BSA115 Business Modelling B |
10 |
SEMESTER 1 OPTIONAL MODULES (CHOOSE ONE) | |
BSA035 Introduction to Banking | 10 |
BSA050 Introduction to Management | 10 |
BSA075 Introduction to Retail Management | 10 |
University Wide Languages Programme | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 OPTIONAL MODULES (CHOOSE ONE) | |
BSA026 Principles of Law | 10 |
BSA036 Banking Law and Practice | 10 |
BSA052 Sociology of Work | 10 |
BSA077 Retailing Environment | 10 |
University Wide Languages Programme | 10 |
4.2 Part B - Degree Modules
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTER 1 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSB010 Business Information Management | 10 |
BSB040 Human Resource Management | 10 |
BSB100 Operations Management | 10 |
BSB120 Management Science Methods | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSB012 Information Systems Development | 10 |
BSB070 Accounting for Management Decisions | 10 |
BSB105 Brand Management | 10 |
BSB100 Data Analysis for Management | 10 |
SEMESTER 1 OPTIONAL MODULES (SELECT TWO) | |
BSB015 Company Law | 10 |
BSB023 Macroeconomics for Business | 10 |
BSB025 Financial Management | 10 |
BSB035 Sales Management | 10 |
BSB046 Organisation Studies | 10 |
BSB050 International Business | 10 |
University Wide Languages Programme | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 OPTIONAL MODULES (SELECT TWO) | |
BSB024 International Economics | 10 |
BSB027 Financial Markets and Derivatives | 10 |
BSB052 International Management | 10 |
BSB067 Business Lending | 10 |
BSB087 Vocational Psychology | 10 |
BSB132 Retail Buying | 10 |
BSB135 Consumer Behaviour | 10 |
BSB150 Business Ethics and Corporate Social Responsibility | 10 |
University Wide Languages Programme | 10 |
Candidates may replace the modules required for Part B Semester Two with an approved course of study taught in English at a foreign University. Candidates will undertake assessed work equivalent to 60 credits, as required by the School of Business and Economics. Students who select this option must ensure that they have taken a total of 60 credits in Semester One.
4.3 Part I
Candidates pursue one of the following streams:
i) Placement Stream
Candidates will undertake an appropriate business placement.
ii) Study Abroad Stream
Candidates will study at one of the School of Business and Economics approved academic institutions.
iii) Split Stream
Candidates will undertake an appropriate business placement for half the year and will study at one of the School of Business and Economicsapproved academic institutions for the other half of the academic year.
(iv) Language Related Placement
Candidates will undertake a year abroad in employment, for example as an English language assistant in a school or other educational establishment, approved by the School of Business and Economics.
4.4 Part C - Degree Modules
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTER 1 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSC070 Technology in Business and Society | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSC055 Strategic Management | 20 |
SEMESTER 1 OPTIONAL MODULES, with a total credit weighting of 50 from the approved list of options* | |
GROUP 1* | |
BSC062 Analytics for Management | 10 |
BSC063 Decision and Efficience Analysis | 10 |
BSC165 Business Forecasting | 10 |
GROUP 2 | |
BSC015 Financial Management and Corporate Policy | 10 |
BSC020 Corporate Reconstruction and Turnaround | 10 |
BSC030 Corporate Governance | 10 |
BSC051 International Corporate Governance and Firms. | 10 |
BSC071 Manageing Big Data | 10 |
BSC097 Knowledge Management | 10 |
BSC100 Advanced Interpersonal Skills | 10 |
BSC115 International Marketing | 10 |
BSC130 Business Programming | 10 |
BSC132 Small Business Issues | 10 |
University Wide Languages Programme | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 OPTIONAL MODULES, with a total credit weighting of 40 from the approved list of options* | |
GROUP 1* | |
BSC064 Business Optimisation | 10 |
BSC067 Simulation for Decision Support | 10 |
BSC068 Consulting for Decision Making | 10 |
GROUP 2 | |
BSC016 Financial Risk Management | 10 |
BSC018 Behavioural Finance | 10 |
BSC042 Corporate and Wholesale Banking | 10 |
BSC053 International Negotiations | 10 |
BSC059 Business and Entrepreneurialism in Postconflict Spaces | 10 |
BSC072 Strategic Information Management | 10 |
BSC080 Analysing Careers | 10 |
BSC085 The Changing Work Organisation | 10 |
BSC117 Services Marketing | 10 |
BSC124 Marketing Communications | 10 |
BSC132 Business Planning for New Ventures | 10 |
BSC136 Enterprise Resource Planning | 10 |
BSC140 Lean Operations | 10 |
BSC144 Project Management | 10 |
BSC175 Retail Location | 10 |
University Wide Languages Programme | 10 |
*Over Semester 1 and Semester 2 at least 20 credits must be chosen from Group 1*. Various semester 2 modules in the final year have a pre-requisite module in semester 1 of the final year. Students must carefully check their preferred modules' pre-requisites before making selections as all pre-requisites will be rigorously enforced. |
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
In order to progress from Part A to Part B and from Part B to C and to be eligible for the award of an Honours degree, candidates must not only satisfy the minimum credit requirements set out in Regulation XX but also:
- To progress from Part B to the period of professional training or study at an approved institution abroad, candidates must accumulate at least 100 credits in Part B as well as achieving at least 30% in all modules taken in Part B.
Provision will be made in accordance with regulation XX for candidates who have the right of re-assessment in Part A or Part B of the programme to undergo re-assessment in the University’s special assessment period.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
Candidates’ final degree classification will be determined on the basis of their performance in degree level Module Assessments in Parts B and C, in accordance with the scheme set out in regulation XX. The average percentage marks for each Part will be combined in the ratio Part B 25: Part C 75, to determine the final overall percentage mark for the Programme (the Programme Mark).
Programme Specification
BS BSc (Hons) Management Sciences (2015 entry)
Academic Year: 2017/18
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at 天堂视频 (available soon)
- What makes 天堂视频 programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | 天堂视频 |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | School of Business and Economics |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | |
Final award | BSc (Hons) + DPS/DIntS |
Programme title | Management Sciences |
Programme code | BSUB40 |
Length of programme | The duration of the programme is six semesters, plus one academic year, and has four streams. Candidates following the Placement Stream are required to spend the third academic year undertaking professional training leading to the Diploma in Professional Studies in accordance with Senate Regulation XI. Candidates following the Study Abroad stream or the Language Related Placement Stream are required to spend the third academic year at an approved academic institution. Candidates following the Split Stream are required to spend six months of the third academic year undertaking professional training, and the other half of the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution. The Study Abroad, the Language Related Placement and the Split Stream lead to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI. The third academic year (Part I) occurs between Part B and Part C. |
UCAS code | N201 |
Admissions criteria | http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/undergraduate/courses/departments/business-economics/managementsciences/ |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
The Management Sciences degree programme aims to produce high quality graduates with the knowledge, skills and understanding for an effective and valued career in a wide range of management situations including those requiring quantitative approaches, analytical techniques and significant IT skills.
Within this general aim the programme specifically seeks to encourage students
- To develop knowledge, concepts and skills in the major academic disciplines of business and management as a sound basis for practice, study and training in the graduate’s chosen profession or management specialism.
- To develop a comprehensive understanding of the concepts, analytical approaches, evaluative thinking and numeracy skills necessary for management problem solving, including through individual experience on placement.
- To develop skills in the choice, application, interpretation and implementation of industry standard and bespoke software packages required to meet the needs of the modern data-driven business environment.
- To develop a deep understanding in areas of particular interest by pursuing them over an extended period and in considerable depth.
- To develop a positive attitude to change, a desire for excellence, a visionary and positive approach to future developments and an openness to new ideas.
Consequently the programme seeks
- To provide a relevant, practical and constantly updated programme through close links with many large organisations and through vocational experience in a professional placement.
- To provide students with a dynamic learning environment showing the importance and relevance of numeracy and computing skills in meeting the needs of successful modern organisations.
- To provide students with a flexible learning environment allowing students to explore and develop their own interests and strengths as they progress through the programme.
- To develop teaching and learning in response to advances in scholarship and the needs of the business community.
- To enhance the employability of our graduates.
The School of Business and Economics at 天堂视频 is distinctive amongst 'traditional' university business schools in incorporating a third year spent on professional placement. This is an integral element of the programme and something which we believe is of particular benefit in achieving these aims and offers graduates of our degrees additional and valuable opportunities to develop their knowledge, understanding and skills.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
- The benchmark statement for General Business and Management (B&M)
- The Framework for Higher Education Qualifications
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
The programme provides opportunities for students to develop and demonstrate knowledge and understanding, qualities, skills and other attributes in the areas shown below. These intended learning outcomes are set in the context of the QAA subject benchmark statement for Business and Management and those relating directly to this benchmark are marked (B&M) below.
On successful completion of this programme students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding in the following areas
- Foundational disciplines of business and management including economics, business mathematics and statistics sufficient to enable a clear understanding of the central aspects of the main business and management functions (B&M);
- Key areas of the technological, economic, fiscal, legal, and political contexts in which business operates (B&M, altered);
- The behaviour of people in organisations;
- The processes of management and decision making;
- Familiarity with a range of business data, research sources and appropriate methodologies (B&M, altered);
- The development and operation of markets for resources, goods and services including customer expectations, market orientation and the marketing mix (B&M, altered);
- The sources, uses and management of finance, the use of accounting and other information systems for managerial applications (B&M);
- The management and development of people within organisations (B&M);
- the management of operations in both the manufacturing and service industries (B&M, altered);
- The development, management and exploitation of information systems and their impact upon organisations (B&M);
- The key communication and information technologies used in business and management (B&M, altered);
- The development of appropriate policies and strategies at the corporate level within a changing national and international environment (B&M, altered);
- Modelling and analytical techniques in management including their strengths and weaknesses and appropriateness;
- Appropriate packages for modelling and decision making in management;
- A range of contemporary issues impacting on various areas of management.
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme students should be able to
- Use critical thinking, analysis and synthesis to evaluate and apply concepts and insights from business disciplines, including comprehension of complex scenarios (B&M);
- Formulate and solve both structured and unstructured business problems;
- Advise on business decisions using appropriate qualitative and quantitative skills, including the ability to identify and evaluate a range of alternative solutions (B&M);
- Relate theory to practice in business and management(B&M).
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme students should be able to
- Communicate effectively in a business context, using a range of styles and media appropriate for management (B&M);
- Make effective use of a wide range of information and communication technologies (ICT) in a business context including the selection of appropriate software for various tasks (B&M);
- Conduct research using a range of sources of business-related materials including books, journals, trade and financial press, official statistics and the Internet (B&M);
- Create, evaluate and assess a range of options in a business situation, applying ideas and knowledge from a variety of sources (B&M);
- Apply highly developed numerical skills and sophisticated quantitative skills including data analysis, interpretation and extrapolation to business problems (B&M);
- Create, exploit and apply quantitative models to business problems and phenomena (B&M);
- Perform effectively within a team environment, displaying effective team-working skills including leaderships, team-building and project management skills(B&M)
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of the programme students should be able to
- Organise themselves personally and independently to be a valued contributor through time management, self-direction, self-motivation, tenacity and proactiveness (B&M);
- Analyse and assess their own personality, needs and abilities and be proactive in managing their personal development (B&M);
- Deploy appropriate interpersonal skills to achieve the best from others, including effective communication, listening, influencing and conflict resolution (B&M);
- Display a positive attitude to change, with a desire for excellence and a visionary and positive approach to future developments;
- Accept and analyse new ideas and assess alternatives when presented with a range of possible interpretations and/or solutions;
- Learn and work independently (B&M);
- Interpret numerical information, reason numerically and apply appropriate mathematical and statistical techniques (B&M);
- Communicate clearly and persuasively, both orally and in writing (B&M);
- Use information and communication technologies effectively and efficiently (ICT);
- Work well in a team, using appropriate skills, including leadership, team-building and project management (B&M).
4. Programme structure
4.1 Part A - Introductory Modules
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTER 1 and 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSA007 Skills for Study, Placement and Employment | 20 |
SEMESTER 1 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSA005 Organisational Behaviour | 10 |
BSA005 Organisational Behaviour | 10 |
BSA055 Principles of Marketing | 10 |
BSA070 Financial Framework | 10 |
BSA080 Quantitative Methods for Business A or BSA085 Quantitative Methods for Business B |
10 |
SEMESTER 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSA053 Organisations in the International Context | 10 |
BSA057 The Marketing Mix | 10 |
BSA060 Microeconomics for Business | 10 |
BSA110 Business Modelling A or BSA115 Business Modelling B |
10 |
SEMESTER 1 OPTIONAL MODULES (CHOOSE ONE) | |
BSA035 Introduction to Banking | 10 |
BSA050 Introduction to Management | 10 |
BSA075 Introduction to Retail Management | 10 |
University Wide Languages Programme | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 OPTIONAL MODULES (CHOOSE ONE) | |
BSA026 Principles of Law | 10 |
BSA036 Banking Law and Practice | 10 |
BSA052 Sociology of Work | 10 |
BSA077 Retailing Environment | 10 |
University Wide Languages Programme | 10 |
4.2 Part B - Degree Modules
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTER 1 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSB010 Business Information Management | 10 |
BSB040 Human Resource Management | 10 |
BSB100 Operations Management | 10 |
BSB120 Management Science Methods | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSB012 Information Systems Development | 10 |
BSB070 Accounting for Management Decisions | 10 |
BSB105 Brand Management | 10 |
BSB110 Data Analysis for Management | 10 |
SEMESTER 1 OPTIONAL MODULES (SELECT TWO) | |
BSB015 Company Law | 10 |
BSB023 Macroeconomics for Business | 10 |
BSB035 Sales Management | 10 |
BSB050 International Business | 10 |
University Wide Languages Programme | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 OPTIONAL MODULES (SELECT TWO) | |
BSB024 International Economics | 10 |
BSB025 Financial Management | 10 |
BSB046 Organisation Studies | 10 |
BSB052 International Management | 10 |
BSB067 Business Lending | 10 |
BSB087 Vocational Psychology | 10 |
BSB132 Retail Buying | 10 |
BSB135 Consumer Behaviour | 10 |
BSB150 Business Ethics and Corporate Social Responsibility | 10 |
University Wide Languages Programme | 10 |
Candidates may replace the modules required for Part B Semester Two with an approved course of study taught in English at a foreign University. Candidates will undertake assessed work equivalent to 60 credits, as required by the School of Business and Economics. Students who select this option must ensure that they have taken a total of 60 credits in Semester One.
4.3 Part I
Candidates pursue one of the following streams:
i) Placement Stream
Candidates will undertake an appropriate business placement.
ii) Study Abroad Stream
Candidates will study at one of the School of Business and Economics approved academic institutions.
iii) Split Stream
Candidates will undertake an appropriate business placement for half the year and will study at one of the School of Business and Economicsapproved academic institutions for the other half of the academic year.
(iv) Language Related Placement
Candidates will undertake a year abroad in employment, for example as an English language assistant in a school or other educational establishment, approved by the School of Business and Economics.
4.4 Part C - Degree Modules
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTER 1 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSC070 Technology in Business and Society | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSC055 Strategic Management | 20 |
SEMESTER 1 OPTIONAL MODULES, with a total credit weighting of 50 from the approved list of options* | |
GROUP 1* | |
BSC062 Analytics for Management | 10 |
BSC063 Decision and Efficiency Analysis | 10 |
BSC165 Business Forecasting | 10 |
GROUP 2 | |
BSC015 Financial Management and Corporate Policy | 10 |
BSC020 Corporate Reconstruction and Turnaround | 10 |
BSC030 Corporate Governance | 10 |
BSC051 International Corporate Governance and Firms. | 10 |
BSC097 Knowledge Management | 10 |
BSC100 Advanced Interpersonal Skills | 10 |
BSC105 International Human Resource Management | 10 |
BSC110 Marketing Strategy and Planning | 10 |
BSC115 International Marketing | 10 |
BSC130 Business Programming | 10 |
BSC132 Small Business Issues | 10 |
University Wide Languages Programme | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 OPTIONAL MODULES, with a total credit weighting of 40 from the approved list of options* | |
GROUP 1* | |
BSC064 Business Optimisation | 10 |
BSC067 Simulation for Decision Making | 10 |
BSC068 Consulting for Decision Making | 10 |
GROUP 2 | |
BSC016 Financial Risk Management | 10 |
BSC018 Behavioural Finance | 10 |
BSC042 Corporate and Wholesale Banking | 10 |
BSC053 International Negotiations | 10 |
BSC059 Business and Entrepreneurialism in Postconflict Spaces | 10 |
BSC071 Managing Big Data | 10 |
BSC072 Strategic Information Management | 10 |
BSC080 Analysing Careers | 10 |
BSC085 The Changing Work Organisation | 10 |
BSC117 Services Marketing | 10 |
BSC124 Marketing Communications | 10 |
BSC134 Business Planning for New Ventures | 10 |
BSC136 Enterprise Resource Planning | 10 |
BSC140 Lean Operations | 10 |
BSC144 Project Management | 10 |
BSC175 Retail Location | 10 |
University Wide Languages Programme | 10 |
*Over Semester 1 and Semester 2 at least 20 credits must be chosen from Group 1*. Various semester 2 modules in the final year have a pre-requisite module in semester 1 of the final year. Students must carefully check their preferred modules' pre-requisites before making selections as all pre-requisites will be rigorously enforced. |
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
In order to progress from Part A to Part B and from Part B to C and to be eligible for the award of an Honours degree, candidates must not only satisfy the minimum credit requirements set out in Regulation XX but also:
- To progress from Part B to the period of professional training or study at an approved institution abroad, candidates must accumulate at least 100 credits in Part B as well as achieving at least 30% in all modules taken in Part B.
Provision will be made in accordance with regulation XX for candidates who have the right of re-assessment in Part A or Part B of the programme to undergo re-assessment in the University’s special assessment period.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
Candidates’ final degree classification will be determined on the basis of their performance in degree level Module Assessments in Parts B and C, in accordance with the scheme set out in regulation XX. The average percentage marks for each Part will be combined in the ratio Part B 25: Part C 75, to determine the final overall percentage mark for the Programme (the Programme Mark).
Programme Specification
BS BSc (Hons) Management Sciences (2014 entry)
Academic Year: 2017/18
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at 天堂视频 (available soon)
- What makes 天堂视频 programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | 天堂视频 |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | School of Business and Economics |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | |
Final award | BSc (Hons) + DPS/DIntS |
Programme title | Management Sciences |
Programme code | BSUB40 |
Length of programme | The duration of the programme is six semesters, plus one academic year, and has four streams. Candidates following the Placement Stream are required to spend the third academic year undertaking professional training leading to the Diploma in Professional Studies in accordance with Senate Regulation XI. Candidates following the Study Abroad stream or the Language Related Placement Stream are required to spend the third academic year at an approved academic institution. Candidates following the Split Stream are required to spend six months of the third academic year undertaking professional training, and the other half of the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution. The Study Abroad, the Language Related Placement and the Split Stream lead to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI. The third academic year (Part I) occurs between Part B and Part C. |
UCAS code | N201 |
Admissions criteria | http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/undergraduate/courses/departments/business-economics/managementsciences/ |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
The Management Sciences degree programme aims to produce high quality graduates with the knowledge, skills and understanding for an effective and valued career in a wide range of management situations including those requiring quantitative approaches, analytical techniques and significant IT skills.
Within this general aim the programme specifically seeks to encourage students
- To develop knowledge, concepts and skills in the major academic disciplines of business and management as a sound basis for practice, study and training in the graduate’s chosen profession or management specialism.
- To develop a comprehensive understanding of the concepts, analytical approaches, evaluative thinking and numeracy skills necessary for management problem solving, including through individual experience on placement.
- To develop skills in the choice, application, interpretation and implementation of industry standard and bespoke software packages required to meet the needs of the modern data-driven business environment.
- To develop a deep understanding in areas of particular interest by pursuing them over an extended period and in considerable depth.
- To develop a positive attitude to change, a desire for excellence, a visionary and positive approach to future developments and an openness to new ideas.
Consequently the programme seeks
- To provide a relevant, practical and constantly updated programme through close links with many large organisations and through vocational experience in a professional placement.
- To provide students with a dynamic learning environment showing the importance and relevance of numeracy and computing skills in meeting the needs of successful modern organisations.
- To provide students with a flexible learning environment allowing students to explore and develop their own interests and strengths as they progress through the programme.
- To develop teaching and learning in response to advances in scholarship and the needs of the business community.
- To enhance the employability of our graduates.
The School of Business and Economics at 天堂视频 is distinctive amongst 'traditional' university business schools in incorporating a third year spent on professional placement. This is an integral element of the programme and something which we believe is of particular benefit in achieving these aims and offers graduates of our degrees additional and valuable opportunities to develop their knowledge, understanding and skills.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
- The benchmark statement for General Business and Management (B&M)
- The Framework for Higher Education Qualifications
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
The programme provides opportunities for students to develop and demonstrate knowledge and understanding, qualities, skills and other attributes in the areas shown below. These intended learning outcomes are set in the context of the QAA subject benchmark statement for Business and Management and those relating directly to this benchmark are marked (B&M) below.
On successful completion of this programme students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding in the following areas
- Foundational disciplines of business and management including economics, business mathematics and statistics sufficient to enable a clear understanding of the central aspects of the main business and management functions (B&M);
- Key areas of the technological, economic, fiscal, legal, and political contexts in which business operates (B&M, altered);
- The behaviour of people in organisations;
- The processes of management and decision making;
- Familiarity with a range of business data, research sources and appropriate methodologies (B&M, altered);
- The development and operation of markets for resources, goods and services including customer expectations, market orientation and the marketing mix (B&M, altered);
- The sources, uses and management of finance, the use of accounting and other information systems for managerial applications (B&M);
- The management and development of people within organisations (B&M);
- the management of operations in both the manufacturing and service industries (B&M, altered);
- The development, management and exploitation of information systems and their impact upon organisations (B&M);
- The key communication and information technologies used in business and management (B&M, altered);
- The development of appropriate policies and strategies at the corporate level within a changing national and international environment (B&M, altered);
- Modelling and analytical techniques in management including their strengths and weaknesses and appropriateness;
- Appropriate packages for modelling and decision making in management;
- A range of contemporary issues impacting on various areas of management.
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme students should be able to
- Use critical thinking, analysis and synthesis to evaluate and apply concepts and insights from business disciplines, including comprehension of complex scenarios (B&M);
- Formulate and solve both structured and unstructured business problems;
- Advise on business decisions using appropriate qualitative and quantitative skills, including the ability to identify and evaluate a range of alternative solutions (B&M);
- Relate theory to practice in business and management(B&M).
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme students should be able to
- Communicate effectively in a business context, using a range of styles and media appropriate for management (B&M);
- Make effective use of a wide range of information and communication technologies (ICT) in a business context including the selection of appropriate software for various tasks (B&M);
- Conduct research using a range of sources of business-related materials including books, journals, trade and financial press, official statistics and the Internet (B&M);
- Create, evaluate and assess a range of options in a business situation, applying ideas and knowledge from a variety of sources (B&M);
- Apply highly developed numerical skills and sophisticated quantitative skills including data analysis, interpretation and extrapolation to business problems (B&M);
- Create, exploit and apply quantitative models to business problems and phenomena (B&M);
- Perform effectively within a team environment, displaying effective team-working skills including leaderships, team-building and project management skills(B&M)
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of the programme students should be able to
- Organise themselves personally and independently to be a valued contributor through time management, self-direction, self-motivation, tenacity and proactiveness (B&M);
- Analyse and assess their own personality, needs and abilities and be proactive in managing their personal development (B&M);
- Deploy appropriate interpersonal skills to achieve the best from others, including effective communication, listening, influencing and conflict resolution (B&M);
- Display a positive attitude to change, with a desire for excellence and a visionary and positive approach to future developments;
- Accept and analyse new ideas and assess alternatives when presented with a range of possible interpretations and/or solutions;
- Learn and work independently (B&M);
- Interpret numerical information, reason numerically and apply appropriate mathematical and statistical techniques (B&M);
- Communicate clearly and persuasively, both orally and in writing (B&M);
- Use information and communication technologies effectively and efficiently (ICT);
- Work well in a team, using appropriate skills, including leadership, team-building and project management (B&M).
4. Programme structure
4.1 Part A - Introductory Modules
Semester 1
i) COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 50)
Code |
Title |
Modular Weight |
BSA005 |
Organisational Behaviour |
10 |
BSA007 |
Skills for Study, Placement and Employment (weight 20) continued in Semester 2 |
10 |
BSA055 |
Principles of Marketing |
10 |
BSA070 |
Financial Framework |
10 |
BSA080 |
Quantitative Methods for Business A |
10 |
|
Or |
|
BSA085 |
Quantitative Methods for Business B |
10 |
ii) OPTIONAL MODULES (total modular weight 10)
One module from the Business catalogue of Part A optional modules for this programme, or any University-Wide Language module (level 3 and above).
Semester 2
i) COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 50)
Code |
Title |
Modular Weight |
BSA007 |
Skills for Study, Placement and Employment (weight 20) continued from Semester 1 |
10 |
BSA053 |
Organisations in the Internatiional Context |
10 |
BSA057 |
The Marketing Mix |
10 |
BSA060 |
Microeconomics for Business |
10 |
BSA110 |
Business Modelling A |
10 |
|
Or |
|
BSA115 |
Business Modelling B |
10 |
ii) OPTIONAL MODULES (total modular weight 10)
One module from the Business catalogue of Part A optional modules for this programme, or any University-Wide Language module (level 4 and above).
4.2 Part B - Degree Modules
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTER 1 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSB010 Business Information Management | 10 |
BSB040 Human Resource Management | 10 |
BSB100 Operations Management | 10 |
BSB120 Decision Making Analysis | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSB012 Information Systems Development | 10 |
BSB070 Accounting for Management Decisions | 10 |
BSB105 Brand Management | 10 |
BSB110 Data Analysis for Management | 10 |
SEMESTER 1 OPTIONAL MODULES (SELECT TWO) | |
BSB015 Company Law | 10 |
BSB023 Macroeconomics for Business | 10 |
BSB035 Sales Management | 10 |
BSB050 International Business | 10 |
University Wide Languages Programme | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 OPTIONAL MODULES (SELECT TWO) | |
BSB024 International Economics | 10 |
BSB025 Financial Management | 10 |
BSB046 Organisation Studies | 10 |
BSB052 International Management | 10 |
BSB067 Business Lending | 10 |
BSB086 International Employment Relations | 10 |
BSB087 Vocational Psychology | 10 |
BSB132 Retail Buying | 10 |
BSB135 Consumer Behaviour | 10 |
University Wide Languages Programme | 10 |
Candidates may replace the modules required for Part B Semester Two with an approved course of study taught in English at a foreign University. Candidates will undertake assessed work equivalent to 60 credits, as required by the School of Business and Economics. Students who select this option must ensure that they have taken a total of 60 credits in Semester One.
4.3 Part I
Candidates pursue one of the following streams:
i) Placement Stream
Candidates will undertake an appropriate business placement.
ii) Study Abroad Stream
Candidates will study at one of the School of Business and Economics approved academic institutions.
iii) Split Stream
Candidates will undertake an appropriate business placement for half the year and will study at one of the School of Business and Economicsapproved academic institutions for the other half of the academic year.
(iv) Language Related Placement
Candidates will undertake a year abroad in employment, for example as an English language assistant in a school or other educational establishment, approved by the School of Business and Economics.
4.4 Part C - Degree Modules
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTER 1 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSC070 Technology in Business and Society | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSC055 Strategic Management | 20 |
SEMESTER 1 OPTIONAL MODULES, with a total credit weighting of 50 from the approved list of options* | |
GROUP 1* | |
BSC063 Decision and Efficience Analysis | 10 |
BSC165 Business Forecasting | 10 |
GROUP 2 | |
BSC015 Financial Management and Corporate Policy | 10 |
BSC030 Corporate Governance | 10 |
BSC051 International Corporate Governance and Firms. | 10 |
BSC059 Business and Entrepreneurialism in Postconflict Spaces | 10 |
BSC097 Knowledge Management | 10 |
BSC100 Advanced Interpersonal Skills | 10 |
BSC105 International Human Resource Management | 10 |
BSC110 Marketing Strategy and Planning | 10 |
BSC115 International Marketing | 10 |
BSC130 Business Programming | 10 |
BSC132 Small Business Issues | 10 |
University Wide Languages Programme | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 OPTIONAL MODULES, with a total credit weighting of 40 from the approved list of options* | |
GROUP 1* | |
BSC064 Business Optimisation | 10 |
BSC067 Simulation for Decision Support | 10 |
BSC068 Consulting for Decision Making | 10 |
GROUP 2 | |
BSC016 Financial Risk Management | 10 |
BSC018 Behavioural Finance | 10 |
BSC042 Corporate and Wholesale OBanking | 10 |
BSC053 International Negotiations | 10 |
BSC071 Managing Big Data | 10 |
BSC072 Strategic Information Management | 10 |
BSC080 Analysing Careers | 10 |
BSC085 The Changing Work Organisation | 10 |
BSC117 Services Marketing | 10 |
BSC124 Marketing Communications | 10 |
BSC134 Business Planning for New Ventures | 10 |
BSC136 Enterprise Resource Planning | 10 |
BSC144 Project Management | 10 |
BSC175 Retail Location | 10 |
University Wide Languages Programme | 10 |
*Over Semester 1 and Semester 2 at least 20 credits must be chosen from Group 1*. Various semester 2 modules in the final year have a pre-requisite module in semester 1 of the final year. Students must carefully check their preferred modules' pre-requisites before making selections as all pre-requisites will be rigorously enforced. |
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
In order to progress from Part A to Part B and from Part B to C and to be eligible for the award of an Honours degree, candidates must not only satisfy the minimum credit requirements set out in Regulation XX but also:
- To progress from Part B to the period of professional training or study at an approved institution abroad, candidates must accumulate at least 100 credits in Part B as well as achieving at least 30% in all modules taken in Part B.
Provision will be made in accordance with regulation XX for candidates who have the right of re-assessment in Part A or Part B of the programme to undergo re-assessment in the University’s special assessment period.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
Candidates’ final degree classification will be determined on the basis of their performance in degree level Module Assessments in Parts B and C, in accordance with the scheme set out in regulation XX. The average percentage marks for each Part will be combined in the ratio Part B 25: Part C 75, to determine the final overall percentage mark for the Programme (the Programme Mark).
Programme Specification
BS BSc (Hons) Management Sciences (2013 entry)
Academic Year: 2017/18
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at 天堂视频 (available soon)
- What makes 天堂视频 programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | 天堂视频 |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | School of Business and Economics |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | |
Final award | BSc (Hons) + DPS/DIntS |
Programme title | Management Sciences |
Programme code | BSUB40 |
Length of programme | The duration of the programme is six semesters, plus one academic year, and has four streams. Candidates following the Placement Stream are required to spend the third academic year undertaking professional training leading to the Diploma in Professional Studies in accordance with Senate Regulation XI. Candidates following the Study Abroad stream or the Language Related Placement Stream are required to spend the third academic year at an approved academic institution. Candidates following the Split Stream are required to spend six months of the third academic year undertaking professional training, and the other half of the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution. The Study Abroad, the Language Related Placement and the Split Stream lead to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI. The third academic year (Part I) occurs between Part B and Part C. |
UCAS code | N201 |
Admissions criteria | http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/undergraduate/courses/departments/business-economics/managementsciences/ |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
The Management Sciences degree programme aims to produce high quality graduates with the knowledge, skills and understanding for an effective and valued career in a wide range of management situations including those requiring quantitative approaches, analytical techniques and significant IT skills.
Within this general aim the programme specifically seeks to encourage students
- To develop knowledge, concepts and skills in the major academic disciplines of business and management as a sound basis for practice, study and training in the graduate’s chosen profession or management specialism.
- To develop a comprehensive understanding of the concepts, analytical approaches, evaluative thinking and numeracy skills necessary for management problem solving, including through individual experience on placement.
- To develop skills in the choice, application, interpretation and implementation of industry standard and bespoke software packages required to meet the needs of the modern data-driven business environment.
- To develop a deep understanding in areas of particular interest by pursuing them over an extended period and in considerable depth.
- To develop a positive attitude to change, a desire for excellence, a visionary and positive approach to future developments and an openness to new ideas.
Consequently the programme seeks
- To provide a relevant, practical and constantly updated programme through close links with many large organisations and through vocational experience in a professional placement.
- To provide students with a dynamic learning environment showing the importance and relevance of numeracy and computing skills in meeting the needs of successful modern organisations.
- To provide students with a flexible learning environment allowing students to explore and develop their own interests and strengths as they progress through the programme.
- To develop teaching and learning in response to advances in scholarship and the needs of the business community.
- To enhance the employability of our graduates.
The School of Business and Economics at 天堂视频 is distinctive amongst 'traditional' university business schools in incorporating a third year spent on professional placement. This is an integral element of the programme and something which we believe is of particular benefit in achieving these aims and offers graduates of our degrees additional and valuable opportunities to develop their knowledge, understanding and skills.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
- The benchmark statement for General Business and Management (B&M)
- The Framework for Higher Education Qualifications
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
The programme provides opportunities for students to develop and demonstrate knowledge and understanding, qualities, skills and other attributes in the areas shown below. These intended learning outcomes are set in the context of the QAA subject benchmark statement for Business and Management and those relating directly to this benchmark are marked (B&M) below.
On successful completion of this programme students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding in the following areas
- Foundational disciplines of business and management including economics, business mathematics and statistics sufficient to enable a clear understanding of the central aspects of the main business and management functions (B&M);
- Key areas of the technological, economic, fiscal, legal, and political contexts in which business operates (B&M, altered);
- The behaviour of people in organisations;
- The processes of management and decision making;
- Familiarity with a range of business data, research sources and appropriate methodologies (B&M, altered);
- The development and operation of markets for resources, goods and services including customer expectations, market orientation and the marketing mix (B&M, altered);
- The sources, uses and management of finance, the use of accounting and other information systems for managerial applications (B&M);
- The management and development of people within organisations (B&M);
- the management of operations in both the manufacturing and service industries (B&M, altered);
- The development, management and exploitation of information systems and their impact upon organisations (B&M);
- The key communication and information technologies used in business and management (B&M, altered);
- The development of appropriate policies and strategies at the corporate level within a changing national and international environment (B&M, altered);
- Modelling and analytical techniques in management including their strengths and weaknesses and appropriateness;
- Appropriate packages for modelling and decision making in management;
- A range of contemporary issues impacting on various areas of management.
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme students should be able to
- Use critical thinking, analysis and synthesis to evaluate and apply concepts and insights from business disciplines, including comprehension of complex scenarios (B&M);
- Formulate and solve both structured and unstructured business problems;
- Advise on business decisions using appropriate qualitative and quantitative skills, including the ability to identify and evaluate a range of alternative solutions (B&M);
- Relate theory to practice in business and management(B&M).
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme students should be able to
- Communicate effectively in a business context, using a range of styles and media appropriate for management (B&M);
- Make effective use of a wide range of information and communication technologies (ICT) in a business context including the selection of appropriate software for various tasks (B&M);
- Conduct research using a range of sources of business-related materials including books, journals, trade and financial press, official statistics and the Internet (B&M);
- Create, evaluate and assess a range of options in a business situation, applying ideas and knowledge from a variety of sources (B&M);
- Apply highly developed numerical skills and sophisticated quantitative skills including data analysis, interpretation and extrapolation to business problems (B&M);
- Create, exploit and apply quantitative models to business problems and phenomena (B&M);
- Perform effectively within a team environment, displaying effective team-working skills including leaderships, team-building and project management skills(B&M)
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of the programme students should be able to
- Organise themselves personally and independently to be a valued contributor through time management, self-direction, self-motivation, tenacity and proactiveness (B&M);
- Analyse and assess their own personality, needs and abilities and be proactive in managing their personal development (B&M);
- Deploy appropriate interpersonal skills to achieve the best from others, including effective communication, listening, influencing and conflict resolution (B&M);
- Display a positive attitude to change, with a desire for excellence and a visionary and positive approach to future developments;
- Accept and analyse new ideas and assess alternatives when presented with a range of possible interpretations and/or solutions;
- Learn and work independently (B&M);
- Interpret numerical information, reason numerically and apply appropriate mathematical and statistical techniques (B&M);
- Communicate clearly and persuasively, both orally and in writing (B&M);
- Use information and communication technologies effectively and efficiently (ICT);
- Work well in a team, using appropriate skills, including leadership, team-building and project management (B&M).
4. Programme structure
4.1 Part A - Introductory Modules
Semester 1
i) COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 50)
Code |
Title |
Modular Weight |
BSA005 |
Organisational Behaviour |
10 |
BSA007 |
Skills for Study, Placement and Employment (weight 20) continued in Semester 2 |
10 |
BSA055 |
Principles of Marketing |
10 |
BSA070 |
Financial Framework |
10 |
BSA080 |
Quantitative Methods for Business A |
10 |
|
Or |
|
BSA085 |
Quantitative Methods for Business B |
10 |
ii) OPTIONAL MODULES (total modular weight 10)
One module from the Business catalogue of Part A optional modules for this programme, or any University-Wide Language module (level 3 and above).
Semester 2
i) COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 50)
Code |
Title |
Modular Weight |
BSA007 |
Skills for Study, Placement and Employment (weight 20) continued from Semester 1 |
10 |
BSA053 |
Organisations in the Internatiional Context |
10 |
BSA057 |
The Marketing Mix |
10 |
BSA060 |
Microeconomics for Business |
10 |
BSA110 |
Business Modelling A |
10 |
|
Or |
|
BSA115 |
Business Modelling B |
10 |
ii) OPTIONAL MODULES (total modular weight 10)
One module from the Business catalogue of Part A optional modules for this programme, or any University-Wide Language module (level 4 and above).
4.2 Part B - Degree Modules
Semester 1
i) COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 40)
Code |
Title |
Modular Weight |
BSB010 |
Business Information Management |
10 |
BSB040 |
Human Resource Management |
10 |
BSB100 |
Operations Management |
10 |
BSB120 |
Decision Making Analysis |
10 |
ii) OPTIONAL MODULES (total modular weight 20)
Two modules from the Business catalogue of Part B optional modules for this programme, or any University-Wide Language module (level 5 and above).
Semester 2
i) COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 40)
Code |
Title |
Modular Weight |
BSB012 |
Information Systems Development |
10 |
BSB070 |
Accounting for Management Decisions |
10 |
BSB105 |
Brand Management |
10 |
BSB110 |
Data Analysis for Management |
10 |
ii) OPTIONAL MODULES (total modular weight 20)
Two modules from the Business catalogue of Part B optional modules for this programme, or any University-Wide Language module (level 6 and above).
Candidates may replace the modules required for Part B Semester Two with an approved course of study taught in English at a foreign University. Candidates will undertake assessed work equivalent to 60 credits, as required by the School of Business and Economics. Students who select this option must ensure that they have taken a total of 60 credits in Semester One.
4.3 Part I
Candidates pursue one of the following streams:
i) Placement Stream
Candidates will undertake an appropriate business placement.
ii) Study Abroad Stream
Candidates will study at one of the School of Business and Economics approved academic institutions.
iii) Split Stream
Candidates will undertake an appropriate business placement for half the year and will study at one of the School of Business and Economicsapproved academic institutions for the other half of the academic year.
(iv) Language Related Placement
Candidates will undertake a year abroad in employment, for example as an English language assistant in a school or other educational establishment, approved by the School of Business and Economics.
4.4 Part C - Degree Modules
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTER 1 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSC070 Technology in Business and Society | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSC055 Strategic Management | 20 |
SEMESTER 1 OPTIONAL MODULES, with a total credit weighting of 50 from the approved list of options* | |
GROUP 1* | |
BSC063 Decision and Efficiency Analysis | 10 |
BSC165 Business Forecasting | 10 |
GROUP 2 | |
BSC015 Financial Management and Corporate Policy | 10 |
BSC020 Corporate Reconstruction and Turnaround | 10 |
BSC030 Corporate Governance | 10 |
BSC051 International Corporate Governance and Firms. | 10 |
BSC097 Knowledge Management | 10 |
BSC100 Advanced Interpersonal Skills | 10 |
BSC105 International Human Resource Management | 10 |
BSC110 Marketing Strategy and Planning | 10 |
BSC115 International Marketing | 10 |
BSC130 Business Programming | 10 |
BSC132 Small Business Issues | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 OPTIONAL MODULES, with a total credit weighting of 40 from the approved list of options* | |
GROUP 1* | |
BSC067 Simulation for Decision Support | 10 |
BSC068 Consulting for Decision Making | 10 |
GROUP 2 | |
BSC016 Financial Risk Management | 10 |
BSC018 Behavioural Finance | 10 |
BSC042 Corporate and Wholesale OBanking | 10 |
BSC053 International Negotiations | 10 |
BSC071 Managing Big Data | 10 |
BSC072 Strategic Information Management | 10 |
BSC080 Analysing Careers | 10 |
BSC117 Services Marketing | 10 |
BSC124 Marketing Communications | 10 |
BSC134 Business Planning for New Ventures | 10 |
BSC136 Enterprise Resource Planning | 10 |
BSC140 Lean Operations | 10 |
BSC144 Project Management | 10 |
BSC175 Retail Location | 10 |
*Over Semester 1 and Semester 2 at least 20 credits must be chosen from Group 1*. Various semester 2 modules in the final year have a pre-requisite module in semester 1 of the final year. Students must carefully check their preferred modules' pre-requisites before making selections as all pre-requisites will be rigorously enforced. |
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
In order to progress from Part A to Part B and from Part B to C and to be eligible for the award of an Honours degree, candidates must not only satisfy the minimum credit requirements set out in Regulation XX but also:
- To progress from Part B to the period of professional training or study at an approved institution abroad, candidates must accumulate at least 100 credits in Part B as well as achieving at least 30% in all modules taken in Part B.
Provision will be made in accordance with regulation XX for candidates who have the right of re-assessment in Part A or Part B of the programme to undergo re-assessment in the University’s special assessment period.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
Candidates’ final degree classification will be determined on the basis of their performance in degree level Module Assessments in Parts B and C, in accordance with the scheme set out in regulation XX. The average percentage marks for each Part will be combined in the ratio Part B 25: Part C 75, to determine the final overall percentage mark for the Programme (the Programme Mark).
Programme Specification
BS BSc (Hons) Management Sciences (2012 entry)
Academic Year: 2017/18
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at 天堂视频 (available soon)
- What makes 天堂视频 programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | 天堂视频 |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | School of Business and Economics |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | |
Final award | BSc (Hons) + DPS/DIntS |
Programme title | Management Sciences |
Programme code | BSUB40 |
Length of programme | The duration of the programme is six semesters, plus one academic year, and has four streams. Candidates following the Placement Stream are required to spend the third academic year undertaking professional training leading to the Diploma in Professional Studies in accordance with Senate Regulation XI. Candidates following the Study Abroad stream or the Language Related Placement Stream are required to spend the third academic year at an approved academic institution. Candidates following the Split Stream are required to spend six months of the third academic year undertaking professional training, and the other half of the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution. The Study Abroad, the Language Related Placement and the Split Stream lead to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI. The third academic year (Part I) occurs between Part B and Part C. |
UCAS code | N201 |
Admissions criteria | http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/undergraduate/courses/departments/business-economics/managementsciences/ |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
The Management Sciences degree programme aims to produce high quality graduates with the knowledge, skills and understanding for an effective and valued career in a wide range of management situations including those requiring quantitative approaches, analytical techniques and significant IT skills.
Within this general aim the programme specifically seeks to encourage students
- To develop knowledge, concepts and skills in the major academic disciplines of business and management as a sound basis for practice, study and training in the graduate’s chosen profession or management specialism.
- To develop a comprehensive understanding of the concepts, analytical approaches, evaluative thinking and numeracy skills necessary for management problem solving, including through individual experience on placement.
- To develop skills in the choice, application, interpretation and implementation of industry standard and bespoke software packages required to meet the needs of the modern data-driven business environment.
- To develop a deep understanding in areas of particular interest by pursuing them over an extended period and in considerable depth.
- To develop a positive attitude to change, a desire for excellence, a visionary and positive approach to future developments and an openness to new ideas.
Consequently the programme seeks
- To provide a relevant, practical and constantly updated programme through close links with many large organisations and through vocational experience in a professional placement.
- To provide students with a dynamic learning environment showing the importance and relevance of numeracy and computing skills in meeting the needs of successful modern organisations.
- To provide students with a flexible learning environment allowing students to explore and develop their own interests and strengths as they progress through the programme.
- To develop teaching and learning in response to advances in scholarship and the needs of the business community.
- To enhance the employability of our graduates.
The School of Business and Economics at 天堂视频 is distinctive amongst 'traditional' university business schools in incorporating a third year spent on professional placement. This is an integral element of the programme and something which we believe is of particular benefit in achieving these aims and offers graduates of our degrees additional and valuable opportunities to develop their knowledge, understanding and skills.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
- The benchmark statement for General Business and Management (B&M)
- The Framework for Higher Education Qualifications
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
The programme provides opportunities for students to develop and demonstrate knowledge and understanding, qualities, skills and other attributes in the areas shown below. These intended learning outcomes are set in the context of the QAA subject benchmark statement for Business and Management and those relating directly to this benchmark are marked (B&M) below.
On successful completion of this programme students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding in the following areas
- Foundational disciplines of business and management including economics, business mathematics and statistics sufficient to enable a clear understanding of the central aspects of the main business and management functions (B&M);
- Key areas of the technological, economic, fiscal, legal, and political contexts in which business operates (B&M, altered);
- The behaviour of people in organisations;
- The processes of management and decision making;
- Familiarity with a range of business data, research sources and appropriate methodologies (B&M, altered);
- The development and operation of markets for resources, goods and services including customer expectations, market orientation and the marketing mix (B&M, altered);
- The sources, uses and management of finance, the use of accounting and other information systems for managerial applications (B&M);
- The management and development of people within organisations (B&M);
- the management of operations in both the manufacturing and service industries (B&M, altered);
- The development, management and exploitation of information systems and their impact upon organisations (B&M);
- The key communication and information technologies used in business and management (B&M, altered);
- The development of appropriate policies and strategies at the corporate level within a changing national and international environment (B&M, altered);
- Modelling and analytical techniques in management including their strengths and weaknesses and appropriateness;
- Appropriate packages for modelling and decision making in management;
- A range of contemporary issues impacting on various areas of management.
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme students should be able to
- Use critical thinking, analysis and synthesis to evaluate and apply concepts and insights from business disciplines, including comprehension of complex scenarios (B&M);
- Formulate and solve both structured and unstructured business problems;
- Advise on business decisions using appropriate qualitative and quantitative skills, including the ability to identify and evaluate a range of alternative solutions (B&M);
- Relate theory to practice in business and management(B&M).
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme students should be able to
- Communicate effectively in a business context, using a range of styles and media appropriate for management (B&M);
- Make effective use of a wide range of information and communication technologies (ICT) in a business context including the selection of appropriate software for various tasks (B&M);
- Conduct research using a range of sources of business-related materials including books, journals, trade and financial press, official statistics and the Internet (B&M);
- Create, evaluate and assess a range of options in a business situation, applying ideas and knowledge from a variety of sources (B&M);
- Apply highly developed numerical skills and sophisticated quantitative skills including data analysis, interpretation and extrapolation to business problems (B&M);
- Create, exploit and apply quantitative models to business problems and phenomena (B&M);
- Perform effectively within a team environment, displaying effective team-working skills including leaderships, team-building and project management skills(B&M)
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of the programme students should be able to
- Organise themselves personally and independently to be a valued contributor through time management, self-direction, self-motivation, tenacity and proactiveness (B&M);
- Analyse and assess their own personality, needs and abilities and be proactive in managing their personal development (B&M);
- Deploy appropriate interpersonal skills to achieve the best from others, including effective communication, listening, influencing and conflict resolution (B&M);
- Display a positive attitude to change, with a desire for excellence and a visionary and positive approach to future developments;
- Accept and analyse new ideas and assess alternatives when presented with a range of possible interpretations and/or solutions;
- Learn and work independently (B&M);
- Interpret numerical information, reason numerically and apply appropriate mathematical and statistical techniques (B&M);
- Communicate clearly and persuasively, both orally and in writing (B&M);
- Use information and communication technologies effectively and efficiently (ICT);
- Work well in a team, using appropriate skills, including leadership, team-building and project management (B&M).
4. Programme structure
4.1 Part A - Introductory Modules
Semester 1
i) COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 50)
Code |
Title |
Modular Weight |
BSA005 |
Organisational Behaviour |
10 |
BSA007 |
Skills for Study, Placement and Employment (weight 20) continued in Semester 2 |
10 |
BSA055 |
Principles of Marketing |
10 |
BSA070 |
Financial Framework |
10 |
BSA080 |
Quantitative Methods for Business A |
10 |
|
Or |
|
BSA085 |
Quantitative Methods for Business B |
10 |
ii) OPTIONAL MODULES (total modular weight 10)
One module from the Business catalogue of Part A optional modules for this programme, or any University-Wide Language module (level 3 and above).
Semester 2
i) COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 50)
Code |
Title |
Modular Weight |
BSA007 |
Skills for Study, Placement and Employment (weight 20) continued from Semester 1 |
10 |
BSA057 |
The Marketing Mix |
10 |
BSA060 |
Microeconomics for Business |
10 |
BSA110 |
Business Modelling A |
20 |
|
Or |
|
BSA115 |
Business Modelling B |
20 |
ii) OPTIONAL MODULES (total modular weight 10)
One module from the Business catalogue of Part A optional modules for this programme, or any University-Wide Language module (level 4 and above).
4.2 Part B - Degree Modules
Semester 1
i) COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 40)
Code |
Title |
Modular Weight |
BSB010 |
Business Information Management |
10 |
BSB040 |
Human Resource Management |
10 |
BSB100 |
Operations Management |
10 |
BSB120 |
Decision Making Analysis |
10 |
ii) OPTIONAL MODULES (total modular weight 20)
Two modules from the Business catalogue of Part B optional modules for this programme, or any University-Wide Language module (level 5 and above).
Semester 2
i) COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 40)
Code |
Title |
Modular Weight |
BSB012 |
Information Systems Development |
10 |
BSB070 |
Accounting for Management Decisions |
10 |
BSB105 |
Brand Management |
10 |
BSB110 |
Data Analysis for Management |
10 |
ii) OPTIONAL MODULES (total modular weight 20)
Two modules from the Business catalogue of Part B optional modules for this programme, or any University-Wide Language module (level 6 and above).
4.3 Part I
Candidates pursue one of the following streams:
i) Placement Stream
Candidates will undertake an appropriate business placement.
ii) Study Abroad Stream
Candidates will study at one of the School of Business and Economics approved academic institutions.
iii) Split Stream
Candidates will undertake an appropriate business placement for half the year and will study at one of the School of Business and Economicsapproved academic institutions for the other half of the academic year.
(iv) Language Related Placement
Candidates will undertake a year abroad in employment, for example as an English language assistant in a school or other educational establishment, approved by the School of Business and Economics.
4.4 Part C - Degree Modules
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTER 1 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSC070 Technology in Business and Society | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSC055 Strategic Management | 20 |
SEMESTER 1 OPTIONAL MODULES, with a total credit weighting of 50 from the approved list of options* | |
GROUP 1* | |
BSC062 Analytics for Management | 10 |
BSC165 Business Forecasting | 10 |
GROUP 2 | |
BSC015 Financial Management and Corporate Policy | 10 |
BSC020 Corporate Reconstruction and Turnaround | 10 |
BSC030 Corporate Governance | 10 |
BSC051 International Corporate Governance and Firms. | 10 |
BSC056 Exploring Political Risks in the Asia-Pacific and Emerging Markets | 10 |
BSC058 The Business and Politics of Intelligence and Espionage | 10 |
BSC097 Knowledge Management | 10 |
BSC100 Advanced Interpersonal Skills | 10 |
BSC105 International Human Resource Management | 10 |
BSC110 Marketing Strategy and Planning | 10 |
BSC115 International Marketing | 10 |
BSC130 Business Programming | 10 |
BSC132 Small Business Issues | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 OPTIONAL MODULES, with a total credit weighting of 40 from the approved list of options* | |
GROUP 1* | |
BSC064 Business Optimisation | 10 |
BSC067 Business Dynamics and Simulation | 10 |
BSC068 Consulting Practice and Decision Making | 10 |
GROUP 2 | |
BSC016 Financial Risk Management | 10 |
BSC018 Behavioural Finance | 10 |
BSC042 Corporate and Wholesale OBanking | 10 |
BSC053 International Negotiations | 10 |
BSC057 The Business of Crisis and the Crisis of Business | 10 |
BSC059 Business and Entrepreneurialism in Postconflict Spaces | 10 |
BSC072 Strategic Information Management | 10 |
BSC080 Analysing Careers | 10 |
BSC085 The Changing Work Organisation | 10 |
BSC088 Working Lives Under Globalisation | 10 |
BSC117 Services Marketing | 10 |
BSC124 Marketing Communications | 10 |
BSC134 Business Planning for New Ventures | 10 |
BSC136 Enterprise Resource Planning | 10 |
BSC140 Lean Operations | 10 |
BSC144 Project Management | 10 |
BSC150 Business Ethics | 10 |
BSC175 Retail Location | 10 |
*Over Semester 1 and Semester 2 at least 20 credits must be chosen from Group 1*. Various semester 2 modules in the final year have a pre-requisite module in semester 1 of the final year. Students must carefully check their preferred modules' pre-requisites before making selections as all pre-requisites will be rigorously enforced. |
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
In order to progress from Part A to Part B and from Part B to C and to be eligible for the award of an Honours degree, candidates must not only satisfy the minimum credit requirements set out in Regulation XX but also:
- To progress from Part B to the period of professional training or study at an approved institution abroad, candidates must accumulate at least 100 credits in Part B as well as achieving at least 30% in all modules taken in Part B.
Provision will be made in accordance with regulation XX for candidates who have the right of re-assessment in Part A or Part B of the programme to undergo re-assessment in the University’s special assessment period.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
Candidates’ final degree classification will be determined on the basis of their performance in degree level Module Assessments in Parts B and C, in accordance with the scheme set out in regulation XX. The average percentage marks for each Part will be combined in the ratio Part B 25: Part C 75, to determine the final overall percentage mark for the Programme (the Programme Mark).
Programme Specification
BS BSc (Hons) Retailing, Marketing and Management (2017 entry)
Academic Year: 2017/18
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at 天堂视频 (available soon)
- What makes 天堂视频 programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | 天堂视频 |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | School of Business and Economics |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | |
Final award | BSc (Hons) + DPS/DIntS |
Programme title | Retailing, Marketing and Management |
Programme code | BSUB50 |
Length of programme | The duration of the programme is six semesters, plus one academic year, and has four streams. Candidates following the Placement Stream are required to spend the third academic year undertaking professional training leading to the Diploma in Professional Studies in accordance with Senate Regulation XI. Candidates following the Study Abroad stream or the Language Related Placement Stream are required to spend the third academic year at an approved academic institution. Candidates following the Split Stream are required to spend six months of the third academic year undertaking professional training, and the other half of the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution. The Study Abroad, the Language Related Placement and the Split Stream lead to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI. The third academic year (Part I) occurs between Part B and Part C. |
UCAS code | NN25 |
Admissions criteria | http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/undergraduate/courses/departments/business-economics/etailingmarketingmanagement/ |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
The Retailing, Marketing and Management degree programme aims to produce high quality graduates with the knowledge, skills and understanding for an effective and valued career in retail management, marketing or other similar management situations.
Within this general aim the programme specifically seeks to encourage students
- To develop knowledge, concepts and skills in the major academic disciplines of business and management as a sound basis for practice, study and training, particularly in the areas of retailing and marketing.
- To develop a deep understanding in the areas of retailing and marketing by pursuing them over an extended period and in considerable depth.
- To develop the concepts, analytical approaches, evaluative thinking and numeracy skills necessary for management problem solving, including through individual experience on placement.
- To develop a positive attitude to change, a desire for excellence, a visionary and positive approach to future developments and an openness to new ideas.
Consequently the programme seeks
- To provide a relevant, practical and constantly updated programme through close links with many large organisations and through vocational experience in a professional placement.
- To provide students with the opportunity to see ways in which theory can be applied in practice, both through taught content and through individual experience on professional placement.
- To provide students with deep insight into retailing and management through the use of a wide variety of case studies.
- To develop teaching and learning in response to advances in scholarship and the needs of the business community.
- To enhance the employability of our graduates.
The School of Business and Economics at 天堂视频 is distinctive amongst 'traditional' university business schools in incorporating a third year spent on professional placement. This is an integral element of the programme and something which we believe is of particular benefit in achieving these aims. It offers students on our degrees additional and valuable opportunities to develop their knowledge, understanding and skills.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
- The benchmark statement for General and Business Management
- The Framework for Higher Education Qualifications
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
The programme provides opportunities for students to develop and demonstrate knowledge and understanding, qualities, skills and other attributes in the areas shown below. These intended learning outcomes are set in the context of the QAA subject benchmark statement for Business and Management and those relating directly to this benchmark are marked (B&M) below.
On successful completion of this programme students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding in the following areas
- the foundation disciplines of business and management including marketing, economics, business mathematics and statistics sufficient to enable a clear understanding of the central aspects of the main business and management functions (B&M)
- the economic, technological, financial, legal, cultural and political context within which retail business operates (B&M)
- integration of concepts from the various business disciplines to comprehend retail business situations and develop appropriate analysis and solutions (B&M)
- the processes of management and decision making;
- concepts, analytical approaches, evaluative thinking and numeracy skills relevant to solving problems in a retail context
- the nature of retailing and other organisations and the behaviour of people within them, both individually and working in groups (B&M)
- the development and operation of markets for resources, goods and services including customer expectations, market orientation and the marketing mix (B&M);
- the use of accounting and other information systems for managerial applications (B&M);
- the management and development of people within organisations (B&M);
- the management of operations in the retailing industries (B&M);
- the development, management and exploitation of information systems and their impact upon retailing organisations (B&M);
- the key communication and information technologies used in business and management (B&M);
- the development of appropriate policies and retailing strategies at the corporate level within a changing national and international environment (B&M).
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of the programme students should be able to
- Use critical thinking, analysis and synthesis to evaluate and apply concepts and insights from business disciplines, including comprehension of complex scenarios (B&M);
- Formulate and solve both structured and unstructured business problems;
- Advise on business decisions using appropriate qualitative and quantitative skills, including the ability to identify and evaluate a range of alternative solutions (B&M);
- Relate theory to practice in business and management(B&M).
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of the programme students should be able to
- Communicate effectively in a business context, using a range of styles and media appropriate for management (B&M);
- make effective use of information and communication technologies (ICT) in a business context including word processing, storage and manipulation of data, generation of presentations, use of the internet and e-mail using appropriate software (B&M)
- conduct research using a range of sources of business-related materials including books, journals, trade and financial press, official statistics and the internet (B&M)
- use effective team-working skills, including leadership, team-building and project management (B&M)
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of the programme students should be able to
- Organise themselves personally and independently to be a valued contributor through time management, self-direction, self-motivation, tenacity and proactiveness (B&M);
- Analyse and assess their own personality, needs and abilities and be proactive in managing their personal development (B&M);
- Deploy appropriate interpersonal skills to achieve the best from others, including effective communication, listening, influencing and conflict resolution (B&M);
- Display a positive attitude to change, with a desire for excellence and a visionary and positive approach to future developments;
- Accept and analyse new ideas and assess alternatives when presented with a range of possible interpretations and/or solutions;
- Learn and work independently (B&M);
- Interpret numerical information, reason numerically and apply appropriate mathematical and statistical techniques (B&M);
- Communicate clearly and persuasively, both orally and in writing (B&M);
- Use information and communication technologies effectively and efficiently (ICT);
- Work well in a team, using appropriate skills, including leadership, team-building and project management (B&M).
4. Programme structure
4.1 Part A - Introductory Modules
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTER 1 and 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSA007 Skills for Study, Placement and Employment | 20 |
SEMESTER 1 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSA005 Organisational Behaviour | 10 |
BSA055 Principles of Marketing | 10 |
BSA070 Financial Framework | 10 |
BSA075 Introduction to Retail Management | 10 |
BSA080 Quantitative Methods for Business A or BSA085 Quantitative Methods for Business B |
10 |
SEMESTER 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSA053 Organisations in the International Context | 10 |
BSA057 The Marketing Mix | 10 |
BSA060 Microeconomics for Business | 10 |
BSA077 Retailing Environment | 10 |
BSA110 Business Modelling A or BSA115 Business Modelling B |
10 |
4.2 Part B - Degree Modules
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTER 1 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSB010 Business Information Management | 10 |
BSB040 Human Resource Management | 10 |
BSB125 Retail and Service Operations | 20 |
SEMESTER 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSA070 Accounting for Management Decisions | 10 |
BSB105 Brand Management | 10 |
BSB131 Visual Merchandising | 10 |
BSB132 Retail Buying | 10 |
BSB135 Consumer Behaviour | 10 |
SEMESTER 1 OPTIONAL MODULES (CHOOSE TWO) | |
BSB023 Macroeconomics for Business | 10 |
BSB025 Financial Management | 10 |
BSB035 Sales Management | 10 |
BSB046 Organisation Studies | 10 |
BSB050 International Business | 10 |
BSB137 Data Analysis for Marketing Decisions | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 OPTIONAL MODULES (CHOOSE ONE) | |
BSB012 Information Systems Development | 10 |
BSB024 International Economics | 10 |
BSB027 Financial Markets and Derivatives | 10 |
BSB052 International Management | 10 |
BSB087 Vocational Psychology | 10 |
BSB110 Data Analysis for Management | 10 |
BSB150 Business Ethics and Corporate Social Responsibility | 10 |
Candidates may replace the modules required for Part B Semester Two with an approved course of study taught in English at a foreign University. Candidates will undertake assessed work equivalent to 60 credits, as required by the School of Business and Economics. Students who select this option must ensure that they have taken a total of 60 credits in Semester One.
4.3 Part I
Candidates pursue one of the following streams:
i) Placement Stream
Candidates will undertake an appropriate business placement.
ii) Study Abroad Stream
Candidates will study at one of the School of Business and Economics approved academic institutions.
iii) Split Stream
Candidates will undertake an appropriate business placement for half the year and will study at one of the School of Business and Economics approved academic institutions for the other half of the academic year.
(iv) Language Related Placement
Candidates will undertake a year abroad in employment, for example as an English language assistant in a school or other educational establishment, approved by the School of Business and Economics.
4.4 Part C - Degree Modules
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTER 1 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSC110 Marketing Strategy and Planning | 10 |
BSC180 Retailing Logistics | 20 |
SEMESTER 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSC170 Retailing Strategy | 10 |
SEMESTER 1 OPTIONAL MODULES, with a total credit weighting of 30 from the approved list of options* | |
GROUP 1* | |
BSC115 International Marketing | 10 |
GROUP 2 | |
BSC015 Financial Management and Corporate Policy | 10 |
BSC020 Corporate Reconstruction and Turnaround | 10 |
BSC030 Corporate Governance | 10 |
BSC051 International Corporate Governance and Firms. | 10 |
BSC062 Analytics for Management | 10 |
BSC070 Technology in Business and Society | 10 |
BSC071 Managing Big Data | 10 |
BSC097 Knowledge Management | 10 |
BSC100 Advanced Interpersonal Skills | 10 |
BSC105 International Human Resource Management | 10 |
BSC130 Business Programming | 10 |
BSC132 Small Business Issues | 10 |
BSC165 Business Forecasting | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 OPTIONAL MODULES, with a total credit weighting of 50 from the approved list of options* | |
GROUP 1* | |
BSC117 Services Marketing | 10 |
BSC124 Marketing Communications | 10 |
GROUP 2 | |
BSC016 Financial Risk Management | 10 |
BSC018 Behavioural Finance | 10 |
BSC042 Corporate and Wholesale Banking | 10 |
BSC053 International Negotiations | 10 |
BSC059 Business and Entrepreneurialism in Postconflict Spaces | 10 |
BSC068 Consulting for Decision Making | 10 |
BSC072 Strategic Information Management | 10 |
BSC080 Analysing Careers | 10 |
BSC085 The Changing Work Organisation | 10 |
BSC134 Business Planning for New Ventures | 10 |
BSC136 Enterprise Resource Planning | 10 |
BSC140 Lean Operations | 10 |
BSC144 Project Management | 10 |
BSC175 Retail Location | 10 |
*Over Semester 1 and Semester 2 at least 10 credits must be chosen from Group 1*. Various semester 2 modules in the final year have a pre-requisite module in semester 1 of the final year. Students must carefully check their preferred modules' pre-requisites before making selections as all pre-requisites will be rigorously enforced. |
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
In order to progress from Part A to Part B and from Part B to C and to be eligible for the award of an Honours degree, candidates must not only satisfy the minimum credit requirements set out in Regulation XX but also:
- To progress from Part B to the period of professional training or study at an approved institution abroad, candidates must accumulate at least 100 credits in Part B as well as achieving at least 30% in all modules taken in Part B.
Provision will be made in accordance with regulation XX for candidates who have the right of re-assessment in Part A or Part B of the programme to undergo re-assessment in the University’s special assessment period.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
Candidates’ final degree classification will be determined on the basis of their performance in degree level Module Assessments in Parts B and C, in accordance with the scheme set out in regulation XX. The average percentage marks for each Part will be combined in the ratio Part B 25: Part C 75, to determine the final overall percentage mark for the Programme (the Programme Mark).
Programme Specification
BS BSc (Hons) Retailing, Marketing and Management (2016 entry)
Academic Year: 2017/18
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at 天堂视频 (available soon)
- What makes 天堂视频 programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | 天堂视频 |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | School of Business and Economics |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | |
Final award | BSc (Hons) + DPS/DIntS |
Programme title | Retailing, Marketing and Management |
Programme code | BSUB50 |
Length of programme | The duration of the programme is six semesters, plus one academic year, and has four streams. Candidates following the Placement Stream are required to spend the third academic year undertaking professional training leading to the Diploma in Professional Studies in accordance with Senate Regulation XI. Candidates following the Study Abroad stream or the Language Related Placement Stream are required to spend the third academic year at an approved academic institution. Candidates following the Split Stream are required to spend six months of the third academic year undertaking professional training, and the other half of the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution. The Study Abroad, the Language Related Placement and the Split Stream lead to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI. The third academic year (Part I) occurs between Part B and Part C. |
UCAS code | NN25 |
Admissions criteria | http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/undergraduate/courses/departments/business-economics/etailingmarketingmanagement/ |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
The Retailing, Marketing and Management degree programme aims to produce high quality graduates with the knowledge, skills and understanding for an effective and valued career in retail management, marketing or other similar management situations.
Within this general aim the programme specifically seeks to encourage students
- To develop knowledge, concepts and skills in the major academic disciplines of business and management as a sound basis for practice, study and training, particularly in the areas of retailing and marketing.
- To develop a deep understanding in the areas of retailing and marketing by pursuing them over an extended period and in considerable depth.
- To develop the concepts, analytical approaches, evaluative thinking and numeracy skills necessary for management problem solving, including through individual experience on placement.
- To develop a positive attitude to change, a desire for excellence, a visionary and positive approach to future developments and an openness to new ideas.
Consequently the programme seeks
- To provide a relevant, practical and constantly updated programme through close links with many large organisations and through vocational experience in a professional placement.
- To provide students with the opportunity to see ways in which theory can be applied in practice, both through taught content and through individual experience on professional placement.
- To provide students with deep insight into retailing and management through the use of a wide variety of case studies.
- To develop teaching and learning in response to advances in scholarship and the needs of the business community.
- To enhance the employability of our graduates.
The School of Business and Economics at 天堂视频 is distinctive amongst 'traditional' university business schools in incorporating a third year spent on professional placement. This is an integral element of the programme and something which we believe is of particular benefit in achieving these aims. It offers students on our degrees additional and valuable opportunities to develop their knowledge, understanding and skills.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
- The benchmark statement for General and Business Management
- The Framework for Higher Education Qualifications
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
The programme provides opportunities for students to develop and demonstrate knowledge and understanding, qualities, skills and other attributes in the areas shown below. These intended learning outcomes are set in the context of the QAA subject benchmark statement for Business and Management and those relating directly to this benchmark are marked (B&M) below.
On successful completion of this programme students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding in the following areas
- the foundation disciplines of business and management including marketing, economics, business mathematics and statistics sufficient to enable a clear understanding of the central aspects of the main business and management functions (B&M)
- the economic, technological, financial, legal, cultural and political context within which retail business operates (B&M)
- integration of concepts from the various business disciplines to comprehend retail business situations and develop appropriate analysis and solutions (B&M)
- the processes of management and decision making;
- concepts, analytical approaches, evaluative thinking and numeracy skills relevant to solving problems in a retail context
- the nature of retailing and other organisations and the behaviour of people within them, both individually and working in groups (B&M)
- the development and operation of markets for resources, goods and services including customer expectations, market orientation and the marketing mix (B&M);
- the use of accounting and other information systems for managerial applications (B&M);
- the management and development of people within organisations (B&M);
- the management of operations in the retailing industries (B&M);
- the development, management and exploitation of information systems and their impact upon retailing organisations (B&M);
- the key communication and information technologies used in business and management (B&M);
- the development of appropriate policies and retailing strategies at the corporate level within a changing national and international environment (B&M).
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of the programme students should be able to
- Use critical thinking, analysis and synthesis to evaluate and apply concepts and insights from business disciplines, including comprehension of complex scenarios (B&M);
- Formulate and solve both structured and unstructured business problems;
- Advise on business decisions using appropriate qualitative and quantitative skills, including the ability to identify and evaluate a range of alternative solutions (B&M);
- Relate theory to practice in business and management(B&M).
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of the programme students should be able to
- Communicate effectively in a business context, using a range of styles and media appropriate for management (B&M);
- make effective use of information and communication technologies (ICT) in a business context including word processing, storage and manipulation of data, generation of presentations, use of the internet and e-mail using appropriate software (B&M)
- conduct research using a range of sources of business-related materials including books, journals, trade and financial press, official statistics and the internet (B&M)
- use effective team-working skills, including leadership, team-building and project management (B&M)
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of the programme students should be able to
- Organise themselves personally and independently to be a valued contributor through time management, self-direction, self-motivation, tenacity and proactiveness (B&M);
- Analyse and assess their own personality, needs and abilities and be proactive in managing their personal development (B&M);
- Deploy appropriate interpersonal skills to achieve the best from others, including effective communication, listening, influencing and conflict resolution (B&M);
- Display a positive attitude to change, with a desire for excellence and a visionary and positive approach to future developments;
- Accept and analyse new ideas and assess alternatives when presented with a range of possible interpretations and/or solutions;
- Learn and work independently (B&M);
- Interpret numerical information, reason numerically and apply appropriate mathematical and statistical techniques (B&M);
- Communicate clearly and persuasively, both orally and in writing (B&M);
- Use information and communication technologies effectively and efficiently (ICT);
- Work well in a team, using appropriate skills, including leadership, team-building and project management (B&M).
4. Programme structure
4.1 Part A - Introductory Modules
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTER 1 and 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSA007 Skills for Study, Placement and Employment | 20 |
SEMESTER 1 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSA005 Organisational Behaviour | 10 |
BSA055 Principles of Marketing | 10 |
BSA070 Financial Framework | 10 |
BSA075 Introduction to Retail Management | 10 |
BSA080 Quantitative Methods for Business A | 10 |
or BSA085 Quantitative Methods for Business B | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSA053 Organisations in the International Context | 10 |
BSA057 The Marketing Mix | 10 |
BSA060 Microeconomics for Business | 10 |
BSA077 Retailing Environment | 10 |
BSA110 Business Modelling A | 10 |
or BSA115 Business Modelling B | 10 |
4.2 Part B - Degree Modules
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTER 1 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSB010 Business Information Management | 10 |
BSB040 Human Resource Management | 10 |
BSB125 Retail and Service Operations | 20 |
SEMESTER 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSA070 Accounting for Management Decisions | 10 |
BSB105 Brand Management | 10 |
BSB131 Visual Merchandising | 10 |
BSB132 Retail Buying | 10 |
BSB135 Consumer Behaviour | 10 |
SEMESTER 1 OPTIONAL MODULES (CHOOSE TWO) | |
BSB023 Macroeconomics for Business | 10 |
BSB025 Financial Management | 10 |
BSB035 Sales Management | 10 |
BSB046 Organisation Studies | 10 |
BSB050 International Business | 10 |
BSB137 Data Analysis for Marketing Decisions | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 OPTIONAL MODULES (CHOOSE ONE) | |
BSB012 Information Systems Development | 10 |
BSB024 International Economics | 10 |
BSB027 Financial Markets and Derivatives | 10 |
BSB052 International Management | 10 |
BSB087 Vocational Psychology | 10 |
BSB110 Data Analysis for Management | 10 |
BSB150 Business Ethics and Corporate Social Responsibility | 10 |
Candidates may replace the modules required for Part B Semester Two with an approved course of study taught in English at a foreign University. Candidates will undertake assessed work equivalent to 60 credits, as required by the School of Business and Economics. Students who select this option must ensure that they have taken a total of 60 credits in Semester One.
4.3 Part I
Candidates pursue one of the following streams:
i) Placement Stream
Candidates will undertake an appropriate business placement.
ii) Study Abroad Stream
Candidates will study at one of the School of Business and Economics approved academic institutions.
iii) Split Stream
Candidates will undertake an appropriate business placement for half the year and will study at one of the School of Business and Economics approved academic institutions for the other half of the academic year.
(iv) Language Related Placement
Candidates will undertake a year abroad in employment, for example as an English language assistant in a school or other educational establishment, approved by the School of Business and Economics.
4.4 Part C - Degree Modules
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTER 1 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSC110 Marketing Strategy and Planning | 10 |
BSC180 Retailing Logistics | 20 |
SEMESTER 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSC170 Retailing Strategy | 10 |
SEMESTER 1 OPTIONAL MODULES, with a total credit weighting of 30 from the approved list of options* | |
GROUP 1* | |
BSC115 International Marketing | 10 |
GROUP 2 | |
BSC015 Financial Management and Corporate Policy | 10 |
BSC020 Corporate Reconstruction and Turnaround | 10 |
BSC030 Corporate Governance | 10 |
BSC051 International Corporate Governance and Firms. | 10 |
BSC062 Analytics for Management | 10 |
BSC070 Technology in Business and Society | 10 |
BSC071 Managing Big Data | 10 |
BSC097 Knowledge Management | 10 |
BSC100 Advanced Interpersonal Skills | 10 |
BSC105 International Human Resource Management | 10 |
BSC130 Business Programming | 10 |
BSC132 Small Business Issues | 10 |
BSC165 Business Forecasting | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 OPTIONAL MODULES, with a total credit weighting of 50 from the approved list of options* | |
GROUP 1* | |
BSC117 Services Marketing | 10 |
BSC124 Marketing Communications | 10 |
GROUP 2 | |
BSC016 Financial Risk Management | 10 |
BSC018 Behavioural Finance | 10 |
BSC042 Corporate and Wholesale Banking | 10 |
BSC053 International Negotiations | 10 |
BSC059 Business and Entrepreneurialism in Postconflict Spaces | 10 |
BSC068 Consulting for Decision Making | 10 |
BSC072 Strategic Information Management | 10 |
BSC080 Analysing Careers | 10 |
BSC085 The Changing Work Organisation | 10 |
BSC134 Business Planning for New Ventures | 10 |
BSC136 Enterprise Resource Planning | 10 |
BSC140 Lean Operations | 10 |
BSC144 Project Management | 10 |
BSC175 Retail Location | 10 |
*Over Semester 1 and Semester 2 at least 10 credits must be chosen from Group 1*. Various semester 2 modules in the final year have a pre-requisite module in semester 1 of the final year. Students must carefully check their preferred modules' pre-requisites before making selections as all pre-requisites will be rigorously enforced. |
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
In order to progress from Part A to Part B and from Part B to C and to be eligible for the award of an Honours degree, candidates must not only satisfy the minimum credit requirements set out in Regulation XX but also:
- To progress from Part B to the period of professional training or study at an approved institution abroad, candidates must accumulate at least 100 credits in Part B as well as achieving at least 30% in all modules taken in Part B.
Provision will be made in accordance with regulation XX for candidates who have the right of re-assessment in Part A or Part B of the programme to undergo re-assessment in the University’s special assessment period.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
Candidates’ final degree classification will be determined on the basis of their performance in degree level Module Assessments in Parts B and C, in accordance with the scheme set out in regulation XX. The average percentage marks for each Part will be combined in the ratio Part B 25: Part C 75, to determine the final overall percentage mark for the Programme (the Programme Mark).
Programme Specification
BS BSc (Hons) Retailing, Marketing and Management (2015 entry)
Academic Year: 2017/18
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at 天堂视频 (available soon)
- What makes 天堂视频 programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | 天堂视频 |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | School of Business and Economics |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | |
Final award | BSc (Hons) + DPS/DIntS |
Programme title | Retailing, Marketing and Management |
Programme code | BSUB50 |
Length of programme | The duration of the programme is six semesters, plus one academic year, and has four streams. Candidates following the Placement Stream are required to spend the third academic year undertaking professional training leading to the Diploma in Professional Studies in accordance with Senate Regulation XI. Candidates following the Study Abroad stream or the Language Related Placement Stream are required to spend the third academic year at an approved academic institution. Candidates following the Split Stream are required to spend six months of the third academic year undertaking professional training, and the other half of the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution. The Study Abroad, the Language Related Placement and the Split Stream lead to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI. The third academic year (Part I) occurs between Part B and Part C. |
UCAS code | NN25 |
Admissions criteria | http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/undergraduate/courses/departments/business-economics/etailingmarketingmanagement/ |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
The Retailing, Marketing and Management degree programme aims to produce high quality graduates with the knowledge, skills and understanding for an effective and valued career in retail management, marketing or other similar management situations.
Within this general aim the programme specifically seeks to encourage students
- To develop knowledge, concepts and skills in the major academic disciplines of business and management as a sound basis for practice, study and training, particularly in the areas of retailing and marketing.
- To develop a deep understanding in the areas of retailing and marketing by pursuing them over an extended period and in considerable depth.
- To develop the concepts, analytical approaches, evaluative thinking and numeracy skills necessary for management problem solving, including through individual experience on placement.
- To develop a positive attitude to change, a desire for excellence, a visionary and positive approach to future developments and an openness to new ideas.
Consequently the programme seeks
- To provide a relevant, practical and constantly updated programme through close links with many large organisations and through vocational experience in a professional placement.
- To provide students with the opportunity to see ways in which theory can be applied in practice, both through taught content and through individual experience on professional placement.
- To provide students with deep insight into retailing and management through the use of a wide variety of case studies.
- To develop teaching and learning in response to advances in scholarship and the needs of the business community.
- To enhance the employability of our graduates.
The School of Business and Economics at 天堂视频 is distinctive amongst 'traditional' university business schools in incorporating a third year spent on professional placement. This is an integral element of the programme and something which we believe is of particular benefit in achieving these aims. It offers students on our degrees additional and valuable opportunities to develop their knowledge, understanding and skills.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
- The benchmark statement for General and Business Management
- The Framework for Higher Education Qualifications
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
The programme provides opportunities for students to develop and demonstrate knowledge and understanding, qualities, skills and other attributes in the areas shown below. These intended learning outcomes are set in the context of the QAA subject benchmark statement for Business and Management and those relating directly to this benchmark are marked (B&M) below.
On successful completion of this programme students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding in the following areas
- the foundation disciplines of business and management including marketing, economics, business mathematics and statistics sufficient to enable a clear understanding of the central aspects of the main business and management functions (B&M)
- the economic, technological, financial, legal, cultural and political context within which retail business operates (B&M)
- integration of concepts from the various business disciplines to comprehend retail business situations and develop appropriate analysis and solutions (B&M)
- the processes of management and decision making;
- concepts, analytical approaches, evaluative thinking and numeracy skills relevant to solving problems in a retail context
- the nature of retailing and other organisations and the behaviour of people within them, both individually and working in groups (B&M)
- the development and operation of markets for resources, goods and services including customer expectations, market orientation and the marketing mix (B&M);
- the use of accounting and other information systems for managerial applications (B&M);
- the management and development of people within organisations (B&M);
- the management of operations in the retailing industries (B&M);
- the development, management and exploitation of information systems and their impact upon retailing organisations (B&M);
- the key communication and information technologies used in business and management (B&M);
- the development of appropriate policies and retailing strategies at the corporate level within a changing national and international environment (B&M).
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of the programme students should be able to
- Use critical thinking, analysis and synthesis to evaluate and apply concepts and insights from business disciplines, including comprehension of complex scenarios (B&M);
- Formulate and solve both structured and unstructured business problems;
- Advise on business decisions using appropriate qualitative and quantitative skills, including the ability to identify and evaluate a range of alternative solutions (B&M);
- Relate theory to practice in business and management(B&M).
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of the programme students should be able to
- Communicate effectively in a business context, using a range of styles and media appropriate for management (B&M);
- make effective use of information and communication technologies (ICT) in a business context including word processing, storage and manipulation of data, generation of presentations, use of the internet and e-mail using appropriate software (B&M)
- conduct research using a range of sources of business-related materials including books, journals, trade and financial press, official statistics and the internet (B&M)
- use effective team-working skills, including leadership, team-building and project management (B&M)
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of the programme students should be able to
- Organise themselves personally and independently to be a valued contributor through time management, self-direction, self-motivation, tenacity and proactiveness (B&M);
- Analyse and assess their own personality, needs and abilities and be proactive in managing their personal development (B&M);
- Deploy appropriate interpersonal skills to achieve the best from others, including effective communication, listening, influencing and conflict resolution (B&M);
- Display a positive attitude to change, with a desire for excellence and a visionary and positive approach to future developments;
- Accept and analyse new ideas and assess alternatives when presented with a range of possible interpretations and/or solutions;
- Learn and work independently (B&M);
- Interpret numerical information, reason numerically and apply appropriate mathematical and statistical techniques (B&M);
- Communicate clearly and persuasively, both orally and in writing (B&M);
- Use information and communication technologies effectively and efficiently (ICT);
- Work well in a team, using appropriate skills, including leadership, team-building and project management (B&M).
4. Programme structure
4.1 Part A - Introductory Modules
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTER 1 and 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSA007 Skills for Study, Placement and Employment | 20 |
SEMESTER 1 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSA005 Organisational Behaviour | 10 |
BSA055 Principles of Marketing | 10 |
BSA070 Financial Framework | 10 |
BSA075 Introduction to Retail Management | 10 |
BSA080 Quantitative Methods for Business A | 10 |
or BSA085 Quantitative Methods for Business B | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSA053 Organisations in the International Context | 10 |
BSA057 The Marketing Mix | 10 |
BSA060 Microeconomics for Business | 10 |
BSA077 Retailing Environment | 10 |
BSA110 Business Modelling A | 10 |
or BSA115 Business Modelling B | 10 |
4.2 Part B - Degree Modules
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTER 1 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSB010 Business Information Management | 10 |
BSB040 Human Resource Management | 10 |
BSB125 Retail and Service Operations | 20 |
SEMESTER 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSA070 Accounting for Management Decisions | 10 |
BSB105 Brand Management | 10 |
BSB131 Visual Merchandising | 10 |
BSB132 Retail Buying | 10 |
BSB135 Consumer Behaviour | 10 |
SEMESTER 1 OPTIONAL MODULES (CHOOSE TWO) | |
BSB023 Macroeconomics for Business | 10 |
BSB035 Sales Management | 10 |
BSB050 International Business | 10 |
BSB137 Data Analysis for Marketing Decisions | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 OPTIONAL MODULES (CHOOSE ONE) | |
BSB012 Information Systems Development | 10 |
BSB024 International Economics | 10 |
BSB025 Financial Management | 10 |
BSB046 Organisation Studies | 10 |
BSB052 International Management | 10 |
BSB087 Vocational Psychology | 10 |
BSB110 Data Analysis for Management | 10 |
BSB150 Business Ethics and Corporate Social Responsibility | 10 |
Candidates may replace the modules required for Part B Semester Two with an approved course of study taught in English at a foreign University. Candidates will undertake assessed work equivalent to 60 credits, as required by the School of Business and Economics. Students who select this option must ensure that they have taken a total of 60 credits in Semester One.
4.3 Part I
Candidates pursue one of the following streams:
i) Placement Stream
Candidates will undertake an appropriate business placement.
ii) Study Abroad Stream
Candidates will study at one of the School of Business and Economics approved academic institutions.
iii) Split Stream
Candidates will undertake an appropriate business placement for half the year and will study at one of the School of Business and Economics approved academic institutions for the other half of the academic year.
(iv) Language Related Placement
Candidates will undertake a year abroad in employment, for example as an English language assistant in a school or other educational establishment, approved by the School of Business and Economics.
4.4 Part C - Degree Modules
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTER 1 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSC110 Marketing Strategy and Planning | 10 |
BSC180 Retailing Logistics | 20 |
SEMESTER 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSC170 Retailing Strategy | 10 |
SEMESTER 1 OPTIONAL MODULES, with a total credit weighting of 30 from the approved list of options* | |
GROUP 1* | |
BSC115 International Marketing | 10 |
GROUP 2 | |
BSC015 Financial Management and Corporate Policy | 10 |
BSC020 Corporate Reconstruction and Turnaround | 10 |
BSC030 Corporate Governance | 10 |
BSC051 International Corporate Governance and Firms. | 10 |
BSC062 Analytics for Management | 10 |
BSC070 Technology in Business and Society | 10 |
BSC097 Knowledge Management | 10 |
BSC100 Advanced Interpersonal Skills | 10 |
BSC105 International Human Resource Management | 10 |
BSC130 Business Programming | 10 |
BSC132 Small Business Issues | 10 |
BSC165 Business Forecasting | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 OPTIONAL MODULES, with a total credit weighting of 50 from the approved list of options* | |
GROUP 1* | |
BSC117 Services Marketing | 10 |
BSC124 Marketing Communications | 10 |
GROUP 2 | |
BSC016 Financial Risk Management | 10 |
BSC018 Behavioural Finance | 10 |
BSC042 Corporate and Wholesale Banking | 10 |
BSC053 International Negotiations | 10 |
BSC059 Business and Entrepreneurialism in Postconflict Spaces | 10 |
BSC068 Consulting for Decision Making | 10 |
BSC071 Managing Big Data | 10 |
BSC072 Strategic Information Management | 10 |
BSC080 Analysing Careers | 10 |
BSC085 The Changing Work Organisation | 10 |
BSC134 Business Planning for New Ventures | 10 |
BSC136 Enterprise Resource Planning | 10 |
BSC140 Lean Operations | 10 |
BSC144 Project Management | 10 |
BSC175 Retail Location | 10 |
*Over Semester 1 and Semester 2 at least 10 credits must be chosen from Group 1*. Various semester 2 modules in the final year have a pre-requisite module in semester 1 of the final year. Students must carefully check their preferred modules' pre-requisites before making selections as all pre-requisites will be rigorously enforced. |
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
In order to progress from Part A to Part B and from Part B to C and to be eligible for the award of an Honours degree, candidates must not only satisfy the minimum credit requirements set out in Regulation XX but also:
- To progress from Part B to the period of professional training or study at an approved institution abroad, candidates must accumulate at least 100 credits in Part B as well as achieving at least 30% in all modules taken in Part B.
Provision will be made in accordance with regulation XX for candidates who have the right of re-assessment in Part A or Part B of the programme to undergo re-assessment in the University’s special assessment period.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
Candidates’ final degree classification will be determined on the basis of their performance in degree level Module Assessments in Parts B and C, in accordance with the scheme set out in regulation XX. The average percentage marks for each Part will be combined in the ratio Part B 25: Part C 75, to determine the final overall percentage mark for the Programme (the Programme Mark).
Programme Specification
BS BSc (Hons) Retailing, Marketing and Management (2014 entry)
Academic Year: 2017/18
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at 天堂视频 (available soon)
- What makes 天堂视频 programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | 天堂视频 |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | School of Business and Economics |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | |
Final award | BSc (Hons) + DPS/DIntS |
Programme title | Retailing, Marketing and Management |
Programme code | BSUB50 |
Length of programme | The duration of the programme is six semesters, plus one academic year, and has four streams. Candidates following the Placement Stream are required to spend the third academic year undertaking professional training leading to the Diploma in Professional Studies in accordance with Senate Regulation XI. Candidates following the Study Abroad stream or the Language Related Placement Stream are required to spend the third academic year at an approved academic institution. Candidates following the Split Stream are required to spend six months of the third academic year undertaking professional training, and the other half of the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution. The Study Abroad, the Language Related Placement and the Split Stream lead to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI. The third academic year (Part I) occurs between Part B and Part C. |
UCAS code | NN25 |
Admissions criteria | http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/undergraduate/courses/departments/business-economics/etailingmarketingmanagement/ |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
The Retailing, Marketing and Management degree programme aims to produce high quality graduates with the knowledge, skills and understanding for an effective and valued career in retail management, marketing or other similar management situations.
Within this general aim the programme specifically seeks to encourage students
- To develop knowledge, concepts and skills in the major academic disciplines of business and management as a sound basis for practice, study and training, particularly in the areas of retailing and marketing.
- To develop a deep understanding in the areas of retailing and marketing by pursuing them over an extended period and in considerable depth.
- To develop the concepts, analytical approaches, evaluative thinking and numeracy skills necessary for management problem solving, including through individual experience on placement.
- To develop a positive attitude to change, a desire for excellence, a visionary and positive approach to future developments and an openness to new ideas.
Consequently the programme seeks
- To provide a relevant, practical and constantly updated programme through close links with many large organisations and through vocational experience in a professional placement.
- To provide students with the opportunity to see ways in which theory can be applied in practice, both through taught content and through individual experience on professional placement.
- To provide students with deep insight into retailing and management through the use of a wide variety of case studies.
- To develop teaching and learning in response to advances in scholarship and the needs of the business community.
- To enhance the employability of our graduates.
The School of Business and Economics at 天堂视频 is distinctive amongst 'traditional' university business schools in incorporating a third year spent on professional placement. This is an integral element of the programme and something which we believe is of particular benefit in achieving these aims. It offers students on our degrees additional and valuable opportunities to develop their knowledge, understanding and skills.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
- The benchmark statement for General and Business Management
- The Framework for Higher Education Qualifications
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
The programme provides opportunities for students to develop and demonstrate knowledge and understanding, qualities, skills and other attributes in the areas shown below. These intended learning outcomes are set in the context of the QAA subject benchmark statement for Business and Management and those relating directly to this benchmark are marked (B&M) below.
On successful completion of this programme students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding in the following areas
- the foundation disciplines of business and management including marketing, economics, business mathematics and statistics sufficient to enable a clear understanding of the central aspects of the main business and management functions (B&M)
- the economic, technological, financial, legal, cultural and political context within which retail business operates (B&M)
- integration of concepts from the various business disciplines to comprehend retail business situations and develop appropriate analysis and solutions (B&M)
- the processes of management and decision making;
- concepts, analytical approaches, evaluative thinking and numeracy skills relevant to solving problems in a retail context
- the nature of retailing and other organisations and the behaviour of people within them, both individually and working in groups (B&M)
- the development and operation of markets for resources, goods and services including customer expectations, market orientation and the marketing mix (B&M);
- the use of accounting and other information systems for managerial applications (B&M);
- the management and development of people within organisations (B&M);
- the management of operations in the retailing industries (B&M);
- the development, management and exploitation of information systems and their impact upon retailing organisations (B&M);
- the key communication and information technologies used in business and management (B&M);
- the development of appropriate policies and retailing strategies at the corporate level within a changing national and international environment (B&M).
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of the programme students should be able to
- Use critical thinking, analysis and synthesis to evaluate and apply concepts and insights from business disciplines, including comprehension of complex scenarios (B&M);
- Formulate and solve both structured and unstructured business problems;
- Advise on business decisions using appropriate qualitative and quantitative skills, including the ability to identify and evaluate a range of alternative solutions (B&M);
- Relate theory to practice in business and management(B&M).
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of the programme students should be able to
- Communicate effectively in a business context, using a range of styles and media appropriate for management (B&M);
- make effective use of information and communication technologies (ICT) in a business context including word processing, storage and manipulation of data, generation of presentations, use of the internet and e-mail using appropriate software (B&M)
- conduct research using a range of sources of business-related materials including books, journals, trade and financial press, official statistics and the internet (B&M)
- use effective team-working skills, including leadership, team-building and project management (B&M)
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of the programme students should be able to
- Organise themselves personally and independently to be a valued contributor through time management, self-direction, self-motivation, tenacity and proactiveness (B&M);
- Analyse and assess their own personality, needs and abilities and be proactive in managing their personal development (B&M);
- Deploy appropriate interpersonal skills to achieve the best from others, including effective communication, listening, influencing and conflict resolution (B&M);
- Display a positive attitude to change, with a desire for excellence and a visionary and positive approach to future developments;
- Accept and analyse new ideas and assess alternatives when presented with a range of possible interpretations and/or solutions;
- Learn and work independently (B&M);
- Interpret numerical information, reason numerically and apply appropriate mathematical and statistical techniques (B&M);
- Communicate clearly and persuasively, both orally and in writing (B&M);
- Use information and communication technologies effectively and efficiently (ICT);
- Work well in a team, using appropriate skills, including leadership, team-building and project management (B&M).
4. Programme structure
4.1 Part A - Introductory Modules
Semester 1
i) COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 60)
Code |
Title |
Modular Weight |
|
BSA005 |
Organisational Behaviour |
10 |
|
BSA007 |
Skills for Study, Placement and Employment (weight 20) continued in Semester 2 |
10
|
|
BSA055 |
Principles of Marketing |
10 |
|
BSA070 |
Financial Framework |
10 |
|
BSA075 |
Introduction to Retail Management |
10 |
|
BSA080 |
Quantitative Methods for Business A |
10 |
|
|
Or |
|
|
BSA085 |
Quantitative Methods for Business B |
10 |
|
Semester 2
i) COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 60)
Code |
Title |
Modular Weight |
|
BSA007 |
Skills for Study, Placement and Employment (weight 20) continued from Semester 1 |
10 |
|
BSA053 |
Organisations in the International Context |
10 |
|
BSA057 |
The Marketing Mix |
10 |
|
BSA060 |
Microeconomics for Business |
10 |
|
BSA077 |
Retailing Environment |
10 |
|
BSA110 |
Business Modelling A |
10 |
|
|
Or |
|
|
BSA115 |
Business Modelling B |
10 |
|
4.2 Part B - Degree Modules
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTER 1 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSB010 Business Information Management | 10 |
BSB040 Human Resource Management | 10 |
BSB125 Retail and Service Operations | 20 |
SEMESTER 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSB070 Accounting for Management Decisions | 10 |
BSB105 Brand Management | 10 |
BSB131 Visual Merchandising | 10 |
BSB132 Retail Buying | 10 |
BSB135 Consumer Behaviour | 10 |
SEMESTER 1 OPTIONAL MODULES (CHOOSE TWO) | |
BSB023 Macroeconomics for Business | 10 |
BSB035 Sales Management | 10 |
BSB050 International Business | 10 |
BSB137 Data Analysis for Marketing Decisions | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 OPTIONAL MODULES (CHOOSE ONE) | |
BSB012 Information Systems Development | 10 |
BSB024 International Economics | 10 |
BSB025 Financial Management | 10 |
BSB046 Organisation Studies | 10 |
BSB052 International Management | 10 |
BSB086 International Employment Relations | 10 |
BSB087 Vocational Psychology | 10 |
BSB110 Data Analysis for Management | 10 |
Candidates may replace the modules required for Part B Semester Two with an approved course of study taught in English at a foreign University. Candidates will undertake assessed work equivalent to 60 credits, as required by the School of Business and Economics. Students who select this option must ensure that they have taken a total of 60 credits in Semester One.
4.3 Part I
Candidates pursue one of the following streams:
i) Placement Stream
Candidates will undertake an appropriate business placement.
ii) Study Abroad Stream
Candidates will study at one of the School of Business and Economics approved academic institutions.
iii) Split Stream
Candidates will undertake an appropriate business placement for half the year and will study at one of the School of Business and Economics approved academic institutions for the other half of the academic year.
(iv) Language Related Placement
Candidates will undertake a year abroad in employment, for example as an English language assistant in a school or other educational establishment, approved by the School of Business and Economics.
4.4 Part C - Degree Modules
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTER 1 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSC110 Marketing Strategy and Planning | 10 |
BSC180 Retailing Logistics | 20 |
SEMESTER 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSC170 Retailing Strategy | 10 |
SEMESTER 1 OPTIONAL MODULES, with a total credit weighting of 30 from the approved list of options* | |
GROUP 1* | |
BSC115 International Marketing | 10 |
GROUP 2 | |
BSC015 Financial Management and Corporate Policy | 10 |
BSC030 Corporate Governance | 10 |
BSC051 International Corporate Governance and Firms. | 10 |
BSC070 Technology in Business and Society | 10 |
BSC097 Knowledge Management | 10 |
BSC100 Advanced Interpersonal Skills | 10 |
BSC105 International Human Resource Management | 10 |
BSC130 Business Programming | 10 |
BSC132 Small Business Issues | 10 |
BSC165 Business Forecasting | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 OPTIONAL MODULES, with a total credit weighting of 50 from the approved list of options* | |
GROUP 1* | |
BSC117 Services Marketing | 10 |
BSC124 Marketing Communications | 10 |
GROUP 2 | |
BSC016 Financial Risk Management | 10 |
BSC018 Behavioural Finance | 10 |
BSC042 Corporate and Wholesale Banking | 10 |
BSC053 International Negotiations | 10 |
BSC059 Business and Entrepreneurialism in Postconflict Spaces | 10 |
BSC068 Consulting for Decision Making | 10 |
BSC071 Managing Big Data | 10 |
BSC072 Strategic Information Management | 10 |
BSC080 Analysing Careers | 10 |
BSC085 The Changing Work Organisation | 10 |
BSC134 Business Planning for New Ventures | 10 |
BSC136 Enterprise Resource Planning | 10 |
BSC144 Project Management | 10 |
BSC175 Retail Location | 10 |
*Over Semester 1 and Semester 2 at least 10 credits must be chosen from Group 1*. Various semester 2 modules in the final year have a pre-requisite module in semester 1 of the final year. Students must carefully check their preferred modules' pre-requisites before making selections as all pre-requisites will be rigorously enforced. |
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
In order to progress from Part A to Part B and from Part B to C and to be eligible for the award of an Honours degree, candidates must not only satisfy the minimum credit requirements set out in Regulation XX but also:
- To progress from Part B to the period of professional training or study at an approved institution abroad, candidates must accumulate at least 100 credits in Part B as well as achieving at least 30% in all modules taken in Part B.
Provision will be made in accordance with regulation XX for candidates who have the right of re-assessment in Part A or Part B of the programme to undergo re-assessment in the University’s special assessment period.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
Candidates’ final degree classification will be determined on the basis of their performance in degree level Module Assessments in Parts B and C, in accordance with the scheme set out in regulation XX. The average percentage marks for each Part will be combined in the ratio Part B 25: Part C 75, to determine the final overall percentage mark for the Programme (the Programme Mark).
Programme Specification
BS BSc (Hons) Retailing, Marketing and Management (2013 entry)
Academic Year: 2017/18
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at 天堂视频 (available soon)
- What makes 天堂视频 programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | 天堂视频 |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | School of Business and Economics |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | |
Final award | BSc (Hons) + DPS/DIntS |
Programme title | Retailing, Marketing and Management |
Programme code | BSUB50 |
Length of programme | The duration of the programme is six semesters, plus one academic year, and has four streams. Candidates following the Placement Stream are required to spend the third academic year undertaking professional training leading to the Diploma in Professional Studies in accordance with Senate Regulation XI. Candidates following the Study Abroad stream or the Language Related Placement Stream are required to spend the third academic year at an approved academic institution. Candidates following the Split Stream are required to spend six months of the third academic year undertaking professional training, and the other half of the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution. The Study Abroad, the Language Related Placement and the Split Stream lead to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI. The third academic year (Part I) occurs between Part B and Part C. |
UCAS code | NN25 |
Admissions criteria | http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/undergraduate/courses/departments/business-economics/etailingmarketingmanagement/ |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
The Retailing, Marketing and Management degree programme aims to produce high quality graduates with the knowledge, skills and understanding for an effective and valued career in retail management, marketing or other similar management situations.
Within this general aim the programme specifically seeks to encourage students
- To develop knowledge, concepts and skills in the major academic disciplines of business and management as a sound basis for practice, study and training, particularly in the areas of retailing and marketing.
- To develop a deep understanding in the areas of retailing and marketing by pursuing them over an extended period and in considerable depth.
- To develop the concepts, analytical approaches, evaluative thinking and numeracy skills necessary for management problem solving, including through individual experience on placement.
- To develop a positive attitude to change, a desire for excellence, a visionary and positive approach to future developments and an openness to new ideas.
Consequently the programme seeks
- To provide a relevant, practical and constantly updated programme through close links with many large organisations and through vocational experience in a professional placement.
- To provide students with the opportunity to see ways in which theory can be applied in practice, both through taught content and through individual experience on professional placement.
- To provide students with deep insight into retailing and management through the use of a wide variety of case studies.
- To develop teaching and learning in response to advances in scholarship and the needs of the business community.
- To enhance the employability of our graduates.
The School of Business and Economics at 天堂视频 is distinctive amongst 'traditional' university business schools in incorporating a third year spent on professional placement. This is an integral element of the programme and something which we believe is of particular benefit in achieving these aims. It offers students on our degrees additional and valuable opportunities to develop their knowledge, understanding and skills.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
- The benchmark statement for General and Business Management
- The Framework for Higher Education Qualifications
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
The programme provides opportunities for students to develop and demonstrate knowledge and understanding, qualities, skills and other attributes in the areas shown below. These intended learning outcomes are set in the context of the QAA subject benchmark statement for Business and Management and those relating directly to this benchmark are marked (B&M) below.
On successful completion of this programme students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding in the following areas
- the foundation disciplines of business and management including marketing, economics, business mathematics and statistics sufficient to enable a clear understanding of the central aspects of the main business and management functions (B&M)
- the economic, technological, financial, legal, cultural and political context within which retail business operates (B&M)
- integration of concepts from the various business disciplines to comprehend retail business situations and develop appropriate analysis and solutions (B&M)
- the processes of management and decision making;
- concepts, analytical approaches, evaluative thinking and numeracy skills relevant to solving problems in a retail context
- the nature of retailing and other organisations and the behaviour of people within them, both individually and working in groups (B&M)
- the development and operation of markets for resources, goods and services including customer expectations, market orientation and the marketing mix (B&M);
- the use of accounting and other information systems for managerial applications (B&M);
- the management and development of people within organisations (B&M);
- the management of operations in the retailing industries (B&M);
- the development, management and exploitation of information systems and their impact upon retailing organisations (B&M);
- the key communication and information technologies used in business and management (B&M);
- the development of appropriate policies and retailing strategies at the corporate level within a changing national and international environment (B&M).
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of the programme students should be able to
- Use critical thinking, analysis and synthesis to evaluate and apply concepts and insights from business disciplines, including comprehension of complex scenarios (B&M);
- Formulate and solve both structured and unstructured business problems;
- Advise on business decisions using appropriate qualitative and quantitative skills, including the ability to identify and evaluate a range of alternative solutions (B&M);
- Relate theory to practice in business and management(B&M).
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of the programme students should be able to
- Communicate effectively in a business context, using a range of styles and media appropriate for management (B&M);
- make effective use of information and communication technologies (ICT) in a business context including word processing, storage and manipulation of data, generation of presentations, use of the internet and e-mail using appropriate software (B&M)
- conduct research using a range of sources of business-related materials including books, journals, trade and financial press, official statistics and the internet (B&M)
- use effective team-working skills, including leadership, team-building and project management (B&M)
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of the programme students should be able to
- Organise themselves personally and independently to be a valued contributor through time management, self-direction, self-motivation, tenacity and proactiveness (B&M);
- Analyse and assess their own personality, needs and abilities and be proactive in managing their personal development (B&M);
- Deploy appropriate interpersonal skills to achieve the best from others, including effective communication, listening, influencing and conflict resolution (B&M);
- Display a positive attitude to change, with a desire for excellence and a visionary and positive approach to future developments;
- Accept and analyse new ideas and assess alternatives when presented with a range of possible interpretations and/or solutions;
- Learn and work independently (B&M);
- Interpret numerical information, reason numerically and apply appropriate mathematical and statistical techniques (B&M);
- Communicate clearly and persuasively, both orally and in writing (B&M);
- Use information and communication technologies effectively and efficiently (ICT);
- Work well in a team, using appropriate skills, including leadership, team-building and project management (B&M).
4. Programme structure
4.1 Part A - Introductory Modules
Semester 1
i) COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 60)
Code |
Title |
Modular Weight |
|
BSA005 |
Organisational Behaviour |
10 |
|
BSA007 |
Skills for Study, Placement and Employment (weight 20) continued in Semester 2 |
10
|
|
BSA055 |
Principles of Marketing |
10 |
|
BSA070 |
Financial Framework |
10 |
|
BSA075 |
Introduction to Retail Management |
10 |
|
BSA080 |
Quantitative Methods for Business A |
10 |
|
|
Or |
|
|
BSA085 |
Quantitative Methods for Business B |
10 |
|
Semester 2
i) COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 60)
Code |
Title |
Modular Weight |
|
BSA007 |
Skills for Study, Placement and Employment (weight 20) continued from Semester 1 |
10 |
|
BSA053 |
Organisations in the International Context |
10 |
|
BSA057 |
The Marketing Mix |
10 |
|
BSA060 |
Microeconomics for Business |
10 |
|
BSA077 |
Retailing Environment |
10 |
|
BSA110 |
Business Modelling A |
10 |
|
|
Or |
|
|
BSA115 |
Business Modelling B |
10 |
|
4.2 Part B - Degree Modules
Semester 1
i) COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 40)
Code |
Title |
Modular Weight |
BSB010 |
Business Information Management |
10 |
BSB040 |
Human Resource Management |
10 |
BSB125 |
Retail and Service Operations |
20 |
ii) OPTIONAL MODULES (total modular weight 20)
Two modules from the Business catalogue of Part B optional modules for this programme.
Semester 2
i) COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 50)
Code |
Title |
Modular Weight |
BSB070 |
Accounting for Management Decisions |
10 |
BSB105 |
Brand Management |
10 |
BSB131 |
Visual Merchandising |
10 |
BSB132 |
Retail Buying |
10 |
BSB135 |
Consumer Behaviour |
10 |
ii) OPTIONAL MODULES (total modular weight 10)
One module from the Business catalogue of Part B optional modules for this programme.
Candidates may replace the modules required for Part B Semester Two with an approved course of study taught in English at a foreign University. Candidates will undertake assessed work equivalent to 60 credits, as required by the School of Business and Economics. Students who select this option must ensure that they have taken a total of 60 credits in Semester One.
4.3 Part I
Candidates pursue one of the following streams:
i) Placement Stream
Candidates will undertake an appropriate business placement.
ii) Study Abroad Stream
Candidates will study at one of the School of Business and Economics approved academic institutions.
iii) Split Stream
Candidates will undertake an appropriate business placement for half the year and will study at one of the School of Business and Economics approved academic institutions for the other half of the academic year.
(iv) Language Related Placement
Candidates will undertake a year abroad in employment, for example as an English language assistant in a school or other educational establishment, approved by the School of Business and Economics.
4.4 Part C - Degree Modules
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTER 1 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSC110 Marketing Strategy and Planning | 10 |
BSC180 Retailing Logistics | 20 |
SEMESTER 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSC170 Retailing Strategy | 10 |
SEMESTER 1 OPTIONAL MODULES, with a total credit weighting of 30 from the approved list of options* | |
GROUP 1* | |
BSC115 International Marketing | 10 |
GROUP 2 | |
BSC015 Financial Management and Corporate Policy | 10 |
BSC020 Corporate Reconstruction and Turnaround | 10 |
BSC030 Corporate Governance | 10 |
BSC051 International Corporate Governance and Firms. | 10 |
BSC070 Technology in Business and Society | 10 |
BSC097 Knowledge Management | 10 |
BSC100 Advanced Interpersonal Skills | 10 |
BSC105 International Human Resource Management | 10 |
BSC130 Business Programming | 10 |
BSC132 Small Business Issues | 10 |
BSC165 Business Forecasting | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 OPTIONAL MODULES, with a total credit weighting of 50 from the approved list of options* | |
GROUP 1* | |
BSC117 Services Marketing | 10 |
BSC124 Marketing Communications | 10 |
GROUP 2 | |
BSC016 Financial Risk Management | 10 |
BSC018 Behavioural Finance | 10 |
BSC042 Corporate and Wholesale OBanking | 10 |
BSC053 International Negotiations | 10 |
BSC068 Consulting for Decision Making | 10 |
BSC071 Managing Big Data | 10 |
BSC072 Strategic Information Management | 10 |
BSC080 Analysing Careers | 10 |
BSC134 Business Planning for New Ventures | 10 |
BSC136 Enterprise Resource Planning | 10 |
BSC140 Lean Operations | 10 |
BSC144 Project Management | 10 |
BSC175 Retail Location | 10 |
*Over Semester 1 and Semester 2 at least 10 credits must be chosen from Group 1*. Various semester 2 modules in the final year have a pre-requisite module in semester 1 of the final year. Students must carefully check their preferred modules' pre-requisites before making selections as all pre-requisites will be rigorously enforced. |
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
In order to progress from Part A to Part B and from Part B to C and to be eligible for the award of an Honours degree, candidates must not only satisfy the minimum credit requirements set out in Regulation XX but also:
- To progress from Part B to the period of professional training or study at an approved institution abroad, candidates must accumulate at least 100 credits in Part B as well as achieving at least 30% in all modules taken in Part B.
Provision will be made in accordance with regulation XX for candidates who have the right of re-assessment in Part A or Part B of the programme to undergo re-assessment in the University’s special assessment period.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
Candidates’ final degree classification will be determined on the basis of their performance in degree level Module Assessments in Parts B and C, in accordance with the scheme set out in regulation XX. The average percentage marks for each Part will be combined in the ratio Part B 25: Part C 75, to determine the final overall percentage mark for the Programme (the Programme Mark).
Programme Specification
BS BSc (Hons) Retailing, Marketing and Management (2012 entry)
Academic Year: 2017/18
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at 天堂视频 (available soon)
- What makes 天堂视频 programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | 天堂视频 |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | School of Business and Economics |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | |
Final award | BSc (Hons) + DPS/DIntS |
Programme title | Retailing, Marketing and Management |
Programme code | BSUB50 |
Length of programme | The duration of the programme is six semesters, plus one academic year, and has four streams. Candidates following the Placement Stream are required to spend the third academic year undertaking professional training leading to the Diploma in Professional Studies in accordance with Senate Regulation XI. Candidates following the Study Abroad stream or the Language Related Placement Stream are required to spend the third academic year at an approved academic institution. Candidates following the Split Stream are required to spend six months of the third academic year undertaking professional training, and the other half of the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution. The Study Abroad, the Language Related Placement and the Split Stream lead to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI. The third academic year (Part I) occurs between Part B and Part C. |
UCAS code | NN25 |
Admissions criteria | http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/undergraduate/courses/departments/business-economics/etailingmarketingmanagement/ |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
The Retailing, Marketing and Management degree programme aims to produce high quality graduates with the knowledge, skills and understanding for an effective and valued career in retail management, marketing or other similar management situations.
Within this general aim the programme specifically seeks to encourage students
- To develop knowledge, concepts and skills in the major academic disciplines of business and management as a sound basis for practice, study and training, particularly in the areas of retailing and marketing.
- To develop a deep understanding in the areas of retailing and marketing by pursuing them over an extended period and in considerable depth.
- To develop the concepts, analytical approaches, evaluative thinking and numeracy skills necessary for management problem solving, including through individual experience on placement.
- To develop a positive attitude to change, a desire for excellence, a visionary and positive approach to future developments and an openness to new ideas.
Consequently the programme seeks
- To provide a relevant, practical and constantly updated programme through close links with many large organisations and through vocational experience in a professional placement.
- To provide students with the opportunity to see ways in which theory can be applied in practice, both through taught content and through individual experience on professional placement.
- To provide students with deep insight into retailing and management through the use of a wide variety of case studies.
- To develop teaching and learning in response to advances in scholarship and the needs of the business community.
- To enhance the employability of our graduates.
The School of Business and Economics at 天堂视频 is distinctive amongst 'traditional' university business schools in incorporating a third year spent on professional placement. This is an integral element of the programme and something which we believe is of particular benefit in achieving these aims. It offers students on our degrees additional and valuable opportunities to develop their knowledge, understanding and skills.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
- The benchmark statement for General and Business Management
- The Framework for Higher Education Qualifications
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
The programme provides opportunities for students to develop and demonstrate knowledge and understanding, qualities, skills and other attributes in the areas shown below. These intended learning outcomes are set in the context of the QAA subject benchmark statement for Business and Management and those relating directly to this benchmark are marked (B&M) below.
On successful completion of this programme students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding in the following areas
- the foundation disciplines of business and management including marketing, economics, business mathematics and statistics sufficient to enable a clear understanding of the central aspects of the main business and management functions (B&M)
- the economic, technological, financial, legal, cultural and political context within which retail business operates (B&M)
- integration of concepts from the various business disciplines to comprehend retail business situations and develop appropriate analysis and solutions (B&M)
- the processes of management and decision making;
- concepts, analytical approaches, evaluative thinking and numeracy skills relevant to solving problems in a retail context
- the nature of retailing and other organisations and the behaviour of people within them, both individually and working in groups (B&M)
- the development and operation of markets for resources, goods and services including customer expectations, market orientation and the marketing mix (B&M);
- the use of accounting and other information systems for managerial applications (B&M);
- the management and development of people within organisations (B&M);
- the management of operations in the retailing industries (B&M);
- the development, management and exploitation of information systems and their impact upon retailing organisations (B&M);
- the key communication and information technologies used in business and management (B&M);
- the development of appropriate policies and retailing strategies at the corporate level within a changing national and international environment (B&M).
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of the programme students should be able to
- Use critical thinking, analysis and synthesis to evaluate and apply concepts and insights from business disciplines, including comprehension of complex scenarios (B&M);
- Formulate and solve both structured and unstructured business problems;
- Advise on business decisions using appropriate qualitative and quantitative skills, including the ability to identify and evaluate a range of alternative solutions (B&M);
- Relate theory to practice in business and management(B&M).
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of the programme students should be able to
- Communicate effectively in a business context, using a range of styles and media appropriate for management (B&M);
- make effective use of information and communication technologies (ICT) in a business context including word processing, storage and manipulation of data, generation of presentations, use of the internet and e-mail using appropriate software (B&M)
- conduct research using a range of sources of business-related materials including books, journals, trade and financial press, official statistics and the internet (B&M)
- use effective team-working skills, including leadership, team-building and project management (B&M)
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of the programme students should be able to
- Organise themselves personally and independently to be a valued contributor through time management, self-direction, self-motivation, tenacity and proactiveness (B&M);
- Analyse and assess their own personality, needs and abilities and be proactive in managing their personal development (B&M);
- Deploy appropriate interpersonal skills to achieve the best from others, including effective communication, listening, influencing and conflict resolution (B&M);
- Display a positive attitude to change, with a desire for excellence and a visionary and positive approach to future developments;
- Accept and analyse new ideas and assess alternatives when presented with a range of possible interpretations and/or solutions;
- Learn and work independently (B&M);
- Interpret numerical information, reason numerically and apply appropriate mathematical and statistical techniques (B&M);
- Communicate clearly and persuasively, both orally and in writing (B&M);
- Use information and communication technologies effectively and efficiently (ICT);
- Work well in a team, using appropriate skills, including leadership, team-building and project management (B&M).
4. Programme structure
4.1 Part A - Introductory Modules
Semester 1
i) COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 60)
Code |
Title |
Modular Weight |
|
BSA005 |
Organisational Behaviour |
10 |
|
BSA007 |
Skills for Study, Placement and Employment (weight 20) continued in Semester 2 |
10 |
|
BSA055 |
Principles of Marketing |
10 |
|
BSA070 |
Financial Framework |
10 |
|
BSA075 |
Introduction to Retail Management |
10 |
|
BSA080 |
Quantitative Methods for Business A |
10 |
|
|
Or |
|
|
Semester 2
i) COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 60)
Code |
Title |
Modular Weight |
|
BSA007 |
Skills for Study, Placement and Employment (weight 20) continued from Semester 1 |
10 |
|
BSA057 |
The Marketing Mix |
10 |
|
BSA060 |
Microeconomics for Business |
10 |
|
BSA077 |
Retailing Environment |
10 |
|
BSA110 |
Business Modelling A |
20 |
|
|
Or |
|
|
BSA115 |
Business Modelling B |
20 |
|
4.2 Part B - Degree Modules
Semester 1
i) COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 40)
Code |
Title |
Modular Weight |
BSB010 |
Business Information Management |
10 |
BSB040 |
Human Resource Management |
10 |
BSB125 |
Retail and Service Operations |
20 |
ii) OPTIONAL MODULES (total modular weight 20)
Two modules from the Business catalogue of Part B optional modules for this programme.
Semester 2
i) COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 50)
Code |
Title |
Modular Weight |
BSB070 |
Accounting for Management Decisions |
10 |
BSB105 |
Brand Management |
10 |
BSB131 |
Visual Merchandising |
10 |
BSB132 |
Retail Buying |
10 |
BSB135 |
Consumer Behaviour |
10 |
ii) OPTIONAL MODULES (total modular weight 10)
One module from the Business catalogue of Part B optional modules for this programme.
4.3 Part I
Candidates pursue one of the following streams:
i) Placement Stream
Candidates will undertake an appropriate business placement.
ii) Study Abroad Stream
Candidates will study at one of the School of Business and Economics approved academic institutions.
iii) Split Stream
Candidates will undertake an appropriate business placement for half the year and will study at one of the School of Business and Economics approved academic institutions for the other half of the academic year.
(iv) Language Related Placement
Candidates will undertake a year abroad in employment, for example as an English language assistant in a school or other educational establishment, approved by the School of Business and Economics.
4.4 Part C - Degree Modules
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTER 1 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSC110 Marketing Strategy and Planning | 10 |
BSC180 Retailing Logistics | 20 |
SEMESTER 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSC170 Retailing Strategy | 10 |
SEMESTER 1 OPTIONAL MODULES, with a total credit weighting of 30 from the approved list of options* | |
GROUP 1* | |
BSC115 International Marketing | 10 |
GROUP 2 | |
BSC015 Financial Management and Corporate Policy | 10 |
BSC020 Corporate Reconstruction and Turnaround | 10 |
BSC030 Corporate Governance | 10 |
BSC051 International Corporate Governance and Firms. | 10 |
BSC056 Exploring Political Risks in the Asia-Pacific and Emerging Markets | 10 |
BSC058 The Business and Politics of Intelligence and Espionage | 10 |
BSC062 Analytics for Management | 10 |
BSC070 Technology in Business and Society | 10 |
BSC097 Knowledge Management | 10 |
BSC100 Advanced Interpersonal Skills | 10 |
BSC105 International Human Resource Management | 10 |
BSC130 Business Programming | 10 |
BSC132 Small Business Issues | 10 |
BSC165 Business Forecasting | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 OPTIONAL MODULES, with a total credit weighting of 50 from the approved list of options* | |
GROUP 1* | |
BSC117 Services Marketing | 10 |
BSC124 Marketing Communications | 10 |
GROUP 2 | |
BSC016 Financial Risk Management | 10 |
BSC018 Behavioural Finance | 10 |
BSC042 Corporate and Wholesale OBanking | 10 |
BSC053 International Negotiations | 10 |
BSC057 The Business of Crisis and the Crisis of Business | 10 |
BSC059 Business and Entrepreneurialism in Postconflict Spaces | 10 |
BSC064 Business Optimisation | 10 |
BSC067 Business Dynamics and Simulation | 10 |
BSC068 Consulting Practice and Decision Making | 10 |
BSC072 Strategic Information Management | 10 |
BSC080 Analysing Careers | 10 |
BSC085 The Changing Work Organisation | 10 |
BSC134 Business Planning for New Ventures | 10 |
BSC136 Enterprise Resource Planning | 10 |
BSC140 Lean Operations | 10 |
BSC144 Project Management | 10 |
BSC150 Business Ethics | 10 |
BSC175 Retail Location | 10 |
*Over Semester 1 and Semester 2 at least 10 credits must be chosen from Group 1*. Various semester 2 modules in the final year have a pre-requisite module in semester 1 of the final year. Students must carefully check their preferred modules' pre-requisites before making selections as all pre-requisites will be rigorously enforced. |
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
In order to progress from Part A to Part B and from Part B to C and to be eligible for the award of an Honours degree, candidates must not only satisfy the minimum credit requirements set out in Regulation XX but also:
- To progress from Part B to the period of professional training or study at an approved institution abroad, candidates must accumulate at least 100 credits in Part B as well as achieving at least 30% in all modules taken in Part B.
Provision will be made in accordance with regulation XX for candidates who have the right of re-assessment in Part A or Part B of the programme to undergo re-assessment in the University’s special assessment period.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
Candidates’ final degree classification will be determined on the basis of their performance in degree level Module Assessments in Parts B and C, in accordance with the scheme set out in regulation XX. The average percentage marks for each Part will be combined in the ratio Part B 25: Part C 75, to determine the final overall percentage mark for the Programme (the Programme Mark).
Programme Specification
BS BSc (Hons) Economics and Management (2017 entry)
Academic Year: 2017/18
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at 天堂视频 (available soon)
- What makes 天堂视频 programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | 天堂视频 |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | School of Business and Economics |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | |
Final award | BSc/ BSc+DPS/ BSc+DIntS |
Programme title | Economics and Management |
Programme code | ECUB01 |
Length of programme | The duration of the programmes is either six semesters or eight semesters. The option of eight semesters has four streams. Permission to transfer to the 8 semester programme will be at the discretion of the Programme Director (Economics). See Programme Structure for further details of eight semester streams. |
UCAS code | LN12 Economics and Management (3 years) LN1F Economics and Management (4 years sandwich) |
Admissions criteria | |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
- To provide students with specialised training in the core aspects of economics and management particularly relevant to industry and commerce.
- To provide students with the opportunity to study a broad curriculum in both economics and in management.
- To provide students with core concepts in management and business.
- To equip students with the relevant tools to understand how firms behave, compete and implement strategies with reference to both their internal and external environment.
- To provide a foundation of knowledge about the workings of the domestic and international economy and to understand the impact of the economic environment on a range of business settings.
- To develop in students the ability to apply the knowledge and skills they have acquired to the solution of theoretical and applied problems in economics.
- To enable data handling skills relating to the analysis on information available and generated by modern business in order for managers to make effective and timely decisions.
- To develop students' communication and interpersonal skills and their ability to work in groups developing practical skills essential for working in a business environment.
- To provide students with the knowledge, skills and understanding required for a career in the economics and management professions.
- To provide students with analytical skills and an ability to develop simplifying frameworks for studying the real world.
- To develop in students the ability to appreciate what would be an appropriate level of abstraction for a range of economic issues.
- To provide students with the knowledge and skill base, from which they can proceed to further studies in economics, related areas or in multi-disciplinary areas that involve economics.
- To stimulate students intellectually through the study of economics and to lead them to appreciate its application to a range of managerial problems and its relevance in a variety of contexts.
- To provide a relevant, practical and constantly updated programme through close links with industry, professional firms and accounting bodies, and through accreditation by the major professional accounting bodies.
- To enhance students’ career and employment prospects on graduating by developing a range of transferable skills embedded in the programme.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
- QAA Subject Benchmark Statements: Economics.
- Benchmark Statements for General Business and Management
- Framework for Higher Education Qualifications.
- International links with a network of eleven European Universities within the Erasmus exchange programme.
- University Learning and Teaching Strategy.
- Departmental learning and teaching policies.
- Links, both formal and informal, with external examiners.
- Staff research specialisms and professional involvement in the discipline.
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
On successful completion of this programme, within the Economics portion of the programme students will learn:
K1. A coherent core of economic principles. The understanding of these might be verbal, graphical or mathematical.
K2. Relevant quantitative methods and computing techniques. These cover mathematical and statistical methods, that may possibly include econometrics. Students will have exposure to the use of such techniques on actual economic, financial or social data. A knowledge and appreciation of economic data, both quantitative and qualitative. Students should also have some knowledge of the appropriate methods that the economist might use to structure and analyse such data.
K3. The applications of economics. Students should have the ability to apply a core of microeconomic and macroeconomic principles and reasoning to a variety of applied topics. They should also be aware of the economic principles that can be used to design, guide and interpret commercial policy. Related to this, they should have the ability to evaluate government economic policy and to assess the performance of the UK and other economies and the impact on the business environment.
Within the Management portion of the degree students will develop an understanding of:
K4. organisations; their internal structures and their management, including the management of human resources, financial resources and information systems.
K5. the external environment within which organisations operate; the markets for goods, services and finance; customers and the implications for marketing.
K6. analytical frameworks, techniques and processes; business policy and strategy; development of policy and strategy; current issues in strategic management.
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
C1. Abstract and synthesise information.
C2. Develop problem-solving and decision-making skills using the analytical tools of deduction and induction reasoning.
C3. Critically evaluate and interpret a range of evidence, including data and text.
C4. Framing an economic problem within the merits of contrasting theories, explanations and arguments.
C5. Use critical thinking, analysis and synthesis to evaluate and apply concepts and insights from business disciplines, including comprehension of complex scenarios.
C6. Formulate and solve both structured and unstructured business problems.
C7. Advise on business decisions using appropriate qualitative and quantitative skills, including the ability to identify and evaluate a range of alternative solutions.
C8. Relate theory to practice in business and management (B&M).
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
P1. Construct economic models using verbal, diagrammatic, mathematical, statistical and econometric techniques and reasoning.
P2. Combine and interpret different types of evidence using appropriate techniques.
P3. Use effective communication, both oral and written, in a range of styles and media appropriate for management in different cultures.
P4. Make effective use of information and communication technologies (ICT) in a business context including word processing, storage and manipulation of data, generation of presentations, use of the internet and e-mail using appropriate software.
P5. Conduct research using a range of sources of business-related materials including books, journals, trade and financial press, official statistics and the internet (B&M).
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate the key skills of:
T1. Analysis and decision making.
T2. Communication, both written and verbal.
T3. Numeracy and computation.
T4. IT, information handling and retrieval, including library skills.
T5. Independent study and group work.
T6. Time management.
T7. Problem solving.
4. Programme structure
4.1 Structure
4.1.1 Students must have a total modular weighting of 120 credits per year. This must include the compulsory modules. The remaining optional modules may be chosen to give a 60:60 split over the two semesters, or alternatively, 50:70 or 70:50.
4.1.2 The prefixes on module codes represent the credit levels as follows:
A level 4; B level 5; C level 6.
4.1.3 The option of eight semesters has four streams:
- Candidates following the Placement Stream are required to spend the third academic year undertaking professional training leading to the Diploma in Professional Studies, in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
- Candidates following the Study Abroad Stream or the Language Related Placement Stream are required to spend the third academic year at an approved academic institution.
- Candidates following the Split Stream are required to spend six months of the third academic year undertaking professional training, and the other half of the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution.
The Study Abroad, the Language Related Placement and the Split Stream lead to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI. The third academic year (Part I) occurs between Part B and Part C.
4.2 Content
Modules are classified as either Economics (codes beginning with EC), or Management (codes beginning with BS).
4.2.1 Part A
All the following Part A modules are compulsory.
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTER 1 and 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
ECA001 Principles of Macroeconomics | 20 |
ECA002 Principles of Microeconomics | 20 |
ECA004 Quantitative Economics | 20 |
SEMESTER 1 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
ECA003 Data Analysis I | 10 |
BSA505 Organisational Behaviour | 10 |
BSA525 Introduction to Accounting | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSA008 Skills for Study and Employment | 10 |
BSA506 Management of Human Resources | 10 |
ECA005 Data Analysis II | 10 |
4.2.2 Part B
Compulsory Modules (total modular weight: 90 credits):
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTER 1 and 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
ECB001 Intermediate Macroeconomics | 20 |
ECB002 Intermediate Microeconomics | 20 |
SEMESTER 1 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSB010 Business Information Management | 10 |
BSB560 Principles of Marketing | 10 |
BSB580 Operations Management | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSB532 Accounting for Managers | 10 |
BSB562 The Marketing Mix | 10 |
BSB590 The Contemporary Business Environment | 10 |
OPTIONAL MODULES - Choose a MAXIMUM of 20 credits from: | |
SEMESTER 1 and 2 OPTIONAL MODULES | |
ECB003 Introduction to Econometrics (not if taking BSB110) | 20 |
ECB004 Introduction to Financial Economics (not if taking BSB025) | 20 |
SEMESTER 1 OPTIONAL MODULES | |
BSB025 Financial Management (not if taking ECB004) | 10 |
BSB046 Organisation Studies | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 OPTIONAL MODULES | |
BSB012 Information Systems Development | 10 |
BSB110 Data Analysis for Management (not if taking ECB003) | 10 |
BSB135 Consumer Behaviour | 10 |
Compulsory and optional modules must be taken such that the total modular weight for the year is 120 credits.
Please note: Optional modules are subject to availability and timetable permitting.
4.2.3 Optional Part I (8 semester programme only)
Candidates pursue one of the following streams:
i) Placement Stream
Candidates will undertake industrial or professional training.
ii) Study Abroad Stream
Candidates will study at one of the School of Business and Economics approved academic institutions.
iii) Split Stream
Candidates will undertake industrial or professional training for half the year and will study at one of the School of Business and Economics approved academic institutions for the other half of the academic year.
(iv) Language Related Placement
Candidates will undertake a year abroad in employment, for example as an English language assistant in a school or other educational establishment, approved by the School of Business and Economics.
4.2.4 Part C - student must chose 60 credits in Economics (EC) and 60 credits in Management (BS)
Compulsory modules (total modular weight: 40 credits):
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTER 1 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSC070 Technology in Business and Society | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
ECC142 Research and Communication Skills for Economists | 20 |
BSC575 Leadership and Interpersonal Skills | 10 |
SEMESTER 1 and 2 OPTIONAL MODULES | |
ECC038 Applied Econometrics | 20 |
SEMESTER 1 OPTIONAL MODULES | |
ECC001 Developments in Microeconomics | 20 |
ECC003 International Money and Finance | 20 |
ECC004 Financial Economics and Asset Pricing | 20 |
ECC031 International Trade | 20 |
ECC101 Developments in Macroeconomics | 20 |
BSC097 Knowledge Management | 10 |
BSC105 International Human Resource Management | 10 |
BSC110 Marketing Strategy and Planning | 10 |
BSC115 International Marketing | 10 |
BSC522 Entrepreneurship and Innovation | 10 |
BSC570 Strategic Management | 20 |
SEMESTER 2 OPTIONAL MODULES | |
ECC005 Industrial Economics | 20 |
ECC035 Central Banking and Financial Crises | 20 |
ECC119 Development Economics | 20 |
ECC139 Environmental Economics | 20 |
ECC141 Corporate Finance and Derivatives | 20 |
BSC080 Analysing Careers | 10 |
BSC085 The Changing Work Organisation | 10 |
BSC124 Marketing Communications | 10 |
BSC144 Project Management | 10 |
BSC524 Entrepreneurship and Small Business Planning | 10 |
Compulsory and optional modules must be taken such that the total modular weight for the year is 120 credits.
Please note: Optional modules are subject to availability and timetable permitting.
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
5.1 Progression Criteria
In order to progress from Part A to Part B and from Part B to C and to be eligible for the award of an Honours degree, candidates must satisfy the minimum credit requirements set out in Regulation XX.
A Diploma in Professional Studies will be awarded to students who have satisfactorily completed the programme of study required for Part I.
5.2 Reassessment
Candidates must accumulate at least 60 credits in a Part of a Programme in order to be eligible for reassessment in the relevant Part during the University’s Special Assessment Period.
If a student registers to resit a module, they will be required to resit all failed components of that module (ie if their coursework mark was less than 40% they must resit the coursework and if their exam mark was less than 40% they must resit the exam). If a student resits the coursework element of a module and there was more than 1 coursework assignment for that module, then the student would be required to resit all coursework assignments in which they achieved a mark below 40%. Marks for elements of a module not being re-sat will be carried forward.
5.3 Accreditation for Economics and Management
In order to retain exemptions from foundation-level professional courses (under the requirements of the professional bodies) following graduation, candidates must achieve a minimum mark of 40% overall and 35% in each assessed component in core modules as defined by the various professional bodies for accreditation purposes.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
Candidates' final degree classification will be determined on the basis of performance in degree level Module Assessments in Parts B and C in accordance with the scheme set out in Regulation XX. The average percentage marks for each Part will be combined in the ratio Part B 30% : Part C 70% to determine the final Programme Mark.
Programme Specification
BS BSc (Hons) Economics and Management (2016 entry)
Academic Year: 2017/18
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at 天堂视频 (available soon)
- What makes 天堂视频 programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | 天堂视频 |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | School of Business and Economics |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | |
Final award | BSc/ BSc+DPS/ BSc+DIntS |
Programme title | Economics and Management |
Programme code | ECUB01 |
Length of programme | The duration of the programmes is either six semesters or eight semesters. The option of eight semesters has four streams. Permission to transfer to the 8 semester programme will be at the discretion of the Programme Director (Economics). See Programme Structure for further details of eight semester streams. |
UCAS code | LN12 Economics and Management (3 years) LN1F Economics and Management (4 years sandwich) |
Admissions criteria | |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
- To provide students with specialised training in the core aspects of economics and management particularly relevant to industry and commerce.
- To provide students with the opportunity to study a broad curriculum in both economics and in management.
- To provide students with core concepts in management and business.
- To equip students with the relevant tools to understand how firms behave, compete and implement strategies with reference to both their internal and external environment.
- To provide a foundation of knowledge about the workings of the domestic and international economy and to understand the impact of the economic environment on a range of business settings.
- To develop in students the ability to apply the knowledge and skills they have acquired to the solution of theoretical and applied problems in economics.
- To enable data handling skills relating to the analysis on information available and generated by modern business in order for managers to make effective and timely decisions.
- To develop students' communication and interpersonal skills and their ability to work in groups developing practical skills essential for working in a business environment.
- To provide students with the knowledge, skills and understanding required for a career in the economics and management professions.
- To provide students with analytical skills and an ability to develop simplifying frameworks for studying the real world.
- To develop in students the ability to appreciate what would be an appropriate level of abstraction for a range of economic issues.
- To provide students with the knowledge and skill base, from which they can proceed to further studies in economics, related areas or in multi-disciplinary areas that involve economics.
- To stimulate students intellectually through the study of economics and to lead them to appreciate its application to a range of managerial problems and its relevance in a variety of contexts.
- To provide a relevant, practical and constantly updated programme through close links with industry, professional firms and accounting bodies, and through accreditation by the major professional accounting bodies.
- To enhance students’ career and employment prospects on graduating by developing a range of transferable skills embedded in the programme.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
- QAA Subject Benchmark Statements: Economics.
- Benchmark Statements for General Business and Management
- Framework for Higher Education Qualifications.
- International links with a network of eleven European Universities within the Erasmus exchange programme.
- University Learning and Teaching Strategy.
- Departmental learning and teaching policies.
- Links, both formal and informal, with external examiners.
- Staff research specialisms and professional involvement in the discipline.
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
On successful completion of this programme, within the Economics portion of the programme students will learn:
K1. A coherent core of economic principles. The understanding of these might be verbal, graphical or mathematical.
K2. Relevant quantitative methods and computing techniques. These cover mathematical and statistical methods, that may possibly include econometrics. Students will have exposure to the use of such techniques on actual economic, financial or social data. A knowledge and appreciation of economic data, both quantitative and qualitative. Students should also have some knowledge of the appropriate methods that the economist might use to structure and analyse such data.
K3. The applications of economics. Students should have the ability to apply a core of microeconomic and macroeconomic principles and reasoning to a variety of applied topics. They should also be aware of the economic principles that can be used to design, guide and interpret commercial policy. Related to this, they should have the ability to evaluate government economic policy and to assess the performance of the UK and other economies and the impact on the business environment.
Within the Management portion of the degree students will develop an understanding of:
K4. organisations; their internal structures and their management, including the management of human resources, financial resources and information systems.
K5. the external environment within which organisations operate; the markets for goods, services and finance; customers and the implications for marketing.
K6. analytical frameworks, techniques and processes; business policy and strategy; development of policy and strategy; current issues in strategic management.
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
C1. Abstract and synthesise information.
C2. Develop problem-solving and decision-making skills using the analytical tools of deduction and induction reasoning.
C3. Critically evaluate and interpret a range of evidence, including data and text.
C4. Framing an economic problem within the merits of contrasting theories, explanations and arguments.
C5. Use critical thinking, analysis and synthesis to evaluate and apply concepts and insights from business disciplines, including comprehension of complex scenarios.
C6. Formulate and solve both structured and unstructured business problems.
C7. Advise on business decisions using appropriate qualitative and quantitative skills, including the ability to identify and evaluate a range of alternative solutions.
C8. Relate theory to practice in business and management (B&M).
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
P1. Construct economic models using verbal, diagrammatic, mathematical, statistical and econometric techniques and reasoning.
P2. Combine and interpret different types of evidence using appropriate techniques.
P3. Use effective communication, both oral and written, in a range of styles and media appropriate for management in different cultures.
P4. Make effective use of information and communication technologies (ICT) in a business context including word processing, storage and manipulation of data, generation of presentations, use of the internet and e-mail using appropriate software.
P5. Conduct research using a range of sources of business-related materials including books, journals, trade and financial press, official statistics and the internet (B&M).
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate the key skills of:
T1. Analysis and decision making.
T2. Communication, both written and verbal.
T3. Numeracy and computation.
T4. IT, information handling and retrieval, including library skills.
T5. Independent study and group work.
T6. Time management.
T7. Problem solving.
4. Programme structure
4.1 Structure
4.1.1 Students must have a total modular weighting of 120 credits per year. This must include the compulsory modules. The remaining optional modules may be chosen to give a 60:60 split over the two semesters, or alternatively, 50:70 or 70:50.
4.1.2 The prefixes on module codes represent the credit levels as follows:
A level 4; B level 5; C level 6.
4.1.3 The option of eight semesters has four streams:
- Candidates following the Placement Stream are required to spend the third academic year undertaking professional training leading to the Diploma in Professional Studies, in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
- Candidates following the Study Abroad Stream or the Language Related Placement Stream are required to spend the third academic year at an approved academic institution.
- Candidates following the Split Stream are required to spend six months of the third academic year undertaking professional training, and the other half of the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution.
The Study Abroad, the Language Related Placement and the Split Stream lead to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI. The third academic year (Part I) occurs between Part B and Part C.
4.2 Content
Modules are classified as either Economics (codes beginning with EC), or Management (codes beginning with BS).
4.2.1 Part A
All the following Part A modules are compulsory.
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTER 1 and 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
ECA001 Principles of Macroeconomics | 20 |
ECA002 Principles of Microeconomics | 20 |
ECA004 Quantitative Economics | 20 |
SEMESTER 1 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
ECA003 Data Analysis I | 10 |
BSA505 Organisational Behaviour | 10 |
BSA525 Introduction to Accounting | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
ECA005 Data Analysis II | 10 |
BSA008 Skills for Study and Employment | 10 |
BSA506 Management of Human Resources | 10 |
4.2.2 Part B
Compulsory Modules (total modular weight: 90 credits):
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTER 1 and 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
ECB001 Intermediate Macroeconomics | 20 |
ECB002 Intermediate Microeconomics | 20 |
SEMESTER 1 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSB010 Business Information Management | 10 |
BSB560 Principles of Marketing | 10 |
BSB580 Operations Management | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSB532 Accounting for Managers | 10 |
BSB562 The Marketing Mix | 10 |
BSB590 The Contemporary Business Environment | 10 |
SEMESTER 1 and 2 OPTIONAL MODULES - Choose at most one from: | |
ECB003 Introduction to Econometrics (not if taking BSB110) | 20 |
ECB004 Introduction to Financial Economics (not if taking BSB025) | 20 |
SEMESTER 1 OPTIONAL MODULES | |
BSB025 Financial Management (not if taking ECB004) | 10 |
BSB046 Organisation Studies | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 OPTIONAL MODULES | |
BSB012 Information Systems Development | 10 |
BSB110 Data Analysis for Management (not if taking ECB003) | 10 |
BSB135 Consumer Behaviour | 10 |
Compulsory and optional modules must be taken such that the total modular weight for the year is 120 credits.
Please note: Optional modules are subject to availability and timetable permitting.
4.2.3 Optional Part I (8 semester programme only)
Candidates pursue one of the following streams:
i) Placement Stream
Candidates will undertake industrial or professional training.
ii) Study Abroad Stream
Candidates will study at one of the School of Business and Economics approved academic institutions.
iii) Split Stream
Candidates will undertake industrial or professional training for half the year and will study at one of the School of Business and Economics approved academic institutions for the other half of the academic year.
(iv) Language Related Placement
Candidates will undertake a year abroad in employment, for example as an English language assistant in a school or other educational establishment, approved by the School of Business and Economics.
4.2.4 Part C - student must chose 60 credits in Economics (EC) and 60 credits in Management (BS)
Compulsory modules (total modular weight: 40 credits):
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTER 1 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSC070 Technology in Business and Society | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
ECC142 Research and Communication Skills for Economists | 20 |
BSC575 Leadership and Interpersonal Skills | 10 |
SEMESTER 1 and 2 OPTIONAL MODULES | |
ECC038 Applied Econometrics | 20 |
SEMESTER 1 OPTIONAL MODULES | |
ECC001 Developments in Microeconomics | 20 |
ECC003 International Money and Finance | 20 |
ECC004 Financial Economics and Asset Pricing | 20 |
ECC031 International Trade | 20 |
ECC101 Developments in Macroeconomics | 20 |
BSC097 Knowledge Management | 10 |
BSC105 International Human Resource Management | 10 |
BSC110 Marketing Strategy and Planning | 10 |
BSC115 International Marketing | 10 |
BSC522 Entrepreneurship and Innovation | 10 |
BSC570 Strategic Management | 20 |
SEMESTER 2 OPTIONAL MODULES | |
ECC005 Industrial Economics | 20 |
ECC035 Central Banking and Financial Crises | 20 |
ECC119 Development Economics | 20 |
ECC139 Environmental Economics | 20 |
ECC141 Corporate Finance and Derivatives | 20 |
BSC080 Analysing Careers | 10 |
BSC085 The Changing Work Organisation | 10 |
BSC124 Marketing Communications | 10 |
BSC144 Project Management | 10 |
BSC524 Entrepreneurship and Small Business Planning | 10 |
Compulsory and optional modules must be taken such that the total modular weight for the year is 120 credits.
Please note: Optional modules are subject to availability and timetable permitting.
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
5.1 Progression Criteria
In order to progress from Part A to Part B and from Part B to C and to be eligible for the award of an Honours degree, candidates must satisfy the minimum credit requirements set out in Regulation XX.
A Diploma in Professional Studies will be awarded to students who have satisfactorily completed the programme of study required for Part I.
5.2 Reassessment
Candidates must accumulate at least 60 credits in a Part of a Programme in order to be eligible for reassessment in the relevant Part during the University’s Special Assessment Period.
If a student registers to resit a module, they will be required to resit all failed components of that module (ie if their coursework mark was less than 40% they must resit the coursework and if their exam mark was less than 40% they must resit the exam). If a student resits the coursework element of a module and there was more than 1 coursework assignment for that module, then the student would be required to resit all coursework assignments in which they achieved a mark below 40%. Marks for elements of a module not being re-sat will be carried forward.
5.3 Accreditation for Economics and Management
In order to retain exemptions from foundation-level professional courses (under the requirements of the professional bodies) following graduation, candidates must achieve a minimum mark of 40% overall and 35% in each assessed component in core modules as defined by the various professional bodies for accreditation purposes.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
Candidates' final degree classification will be determined on the basis of performance in degree level Module Assessments in Parts B and C in accordance with the scheme set out in Regulation XX. The average percentage marks for each Part will be combined in the ratio Part B 30% : Part C 70% to determine the final Programme Mark.
Programme Specification
BS BSc (Hons) Economics and Management (2015 entry)
Academic Year: 2017/18
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at 天堂视频 (available soon)
- What makes 天堂视频 programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | 天堂视频 |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | School of Business and Economics |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | |
Final award | BSc/ BSc+DPS/ BSc+DIntS |
Programme title | Economics and Management |
Programme code | ECUB01 |
Length of programme | The duration of the programmes is either six semesters or eight semesters. The option of eight semesters has four streams. Permission to transfer to the 8 semester programme will be at the discretion of the Programme Director (Economics). See Programme Structure for further details of eight semester streams. |
UCAS code | LN12 Economics and Management (3 years) LN1F Economics and Management (4 years sandwich) |
Admissions criteria | |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
- To provide students with specialised training in the core aspects of economics and management particularly relevant to industry and commerce.
- To provide students with the opportunity to study a broad curriculum in both economics and in management.
- To provide students with core concepts in management and business.
- To equip students with the relevant tools to understand how firms behave, compete and implement strategies with reference to both their internal and external environment.
- To provide a foundation of knowledge about the workings of the domestic and international economy and to understand the impact of the economic environment on a range of business settings.
- To develop in students the ability to apply the knowledge and skills they have acquired to the solution of theoretical and applied problems in economics.
- To enable data handling skills relating to the analysis on information available and generated by modern business in order for managers to make effective and timely decisions.
- To develop students' communication and interpersonal skills and their ability to work in groups developing practical skills essential for working in a business environment.
- To provide students with the knowledge, skills and understanding required for a career in the economics and management professions.
- To provide students with analytical skills and an ability to develop simplifying frameworks for studying the real world.
- To develop in students the ability to appreciate what would be an appropriate level of abstraction for a range of economic issues.
- To provide students with the knowledge and skill base, from which they can proceed to further studies in economics, related areas or in multi-disciplinary areas that involve economics.
- To stimulate students intellectually through the study of economics and to lead them to appreciate its application to a range of managerial problems and its relevance in a variety of contexts.
- To provide a relevant, practical and constantly updated programme through close links with industry, professional firms and accounting bodies, and through accreditation by the major professional accounting bodies.
- To enhance students’ career and employment prospects on graduating by developing a range of transferable skills embedded in the programme.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
- QAA Subject Benchmark Statements: Economics.
- Benchmark Statements for General Business and Management
- Framework for Higher Education Qualifications.
- International links with a network of eleven European Universities within the Erasmus exchange programme.
- University Learning and Teaching Strategy.
- Departmental learning and teaching policies.
- Links, both formal and informal, with external examiners.
- Staff research specialisms and professional involvement in the discipline.
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
On successful completion of this programme, within the Economics portion of the programme students will learn:
K1. A coherent core of economic principles. The understanding of these might be verbal, graphical or mathematical.
K2. Relevant quantitative methods and computing techniques. These cover mathematical and statistical methods, that may possibly include econometrics. Students will have exposure to the use of such techniques on actual economic, financial or social data. A knowledge and appreciation of economic data, both quantitative and qualitative. Students should also have some knowledge of the appropriate methods that the economist might use to structure and analyse such data.
K3. The applications of economics. Students should have the ability to apply a core of microeconomic and macroeconomic principles and reasoning to a variety of applied topics. They should also be aware of the economic principles that can be used to design, guide and interpret commercial policy. Related to this, they should have the ability to evaluate government economic policy and to assess the performance of the UK and other economies and the impact on the business environment.
Within the Management portion of the degree students will develop an understanding of:
K4. organisations; their internal structures and their management, including the management of human resources, financial resources and information systems.
K5. the external environment within which organisations operate; the markets for goods, services and finance; customers and the implications for marketing.
K6. analytical frameworks, techniques and processes; business policy and strategy; development of policy and strategy; current issues in strategic management.
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
C1. Abstract and synthesise information.
C2. Develop problem-solving and decision-making skills using the analytical tools of deduction and induction reasoning.
C3. Critically evaluate and interpret a range of evidence, including data and text.
C4. Framing an economic problem within the merits of contrasting theories, explanations and arguments.
C5. Use critical thinking, analysis and synthesis to evaluate and apply concepts and insights from business disciplines, including comprehension of complex scenarios.
C6. Formulate and solve both structured and unstructured business problems.
C7. Advise on business decisions using appropriate qualitative and quantitative skills, including the ability to identify and evaluate a range of alternative solutions.
C8. Relate theory to practice in business and management (B&M).
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
P1. Construct economic models using verbal, diagrammatic, mathematical, statistical and econometric techniques and reasoning.
P2. Combine and interpret different types of evidence using appropriate techniques.
P3. Use effective communication, both oral and written, in a range of styles and media appropriate for management in different cultures.
P4. Make effective use of information and communication technologies (ICT) in a business context including word processing, storage and manipulation of data, generation of presentations, use of the internet and e-mail using appropriate software.
P5. Conduct research using a range of sources of business-related materials including books, journals, trade and financial press, official statistics and the internet (B&M).
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate the key skills of:
T1. Analysis and decision making.
T2. Communication, both written and verbal.
T3. Numeracy and computation.
T4. IT, information handling and retrieval, including library skills.
T5. Independent study and group work.
T6. Time management.
T7. Problem solving.
4. Programme structure
4.1 Structure
4.1.1 Students must have a total modular weighting of 120 credits per year. This must include the compulsory modules. The remaining optional modules may be chosen to give a 60:60 split over the two semesters, or alternatively, 50:70 or 70:50.
4.1.2 The prefixes on module codes represent the credit levels as follows:
A level 4; B level 5; C level 6.
4.1.3 The option of eight semesters has four streams:
- Candidates following the Placement Stream are required to spend the third academic year undertaking professional training leading to the Diploma in Professional Studies, in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
- Candidates following the Study Abroad Stream or the Language Related Placement Stream are required to spend the third academic year at an approved academic institution.
- Candidates following the Split Stream are required to spend six months of the third academic year undertaking professional training, and the other half of the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution.
The Study Abroad, the Language Related Placement and the Split Stream lead to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI. The third academic year (Part I) occurs between Part B and Part C.
4.2 Content
Modules are classified as either Economics (codes beginning with EC), or Management (codes beginning with BS).
4.2.1 Part A
All the following Part A modules are compulsory.
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTER 1 and 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
ECA001 Principles of Macroeconomics | 20 |
ECA002 Principles of Microeconomics | 20 |
ECA004 Quantitative Economics | 20 |
SEMESTER 1 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
ECA003 Data Analysis I | 10 |
BSA505 Organisational Behaviour | 10 |
BSA525 Introduction to Accounting | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSA008 Skills for Study and Employment | 10 |
BSA506 Management of Human Resources | 10 |
BSA526 Accounting for Managers | 10 |
4.2.2 Part B
Compulsory Modules (total modular weight: 90 credits):
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTER 1 and 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
ECB001 Intermediate Macroeconomics | 20 |
ECB002 Intermediate Microeconomics | 20 |
SEMESTER 1 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSB010 Business Information Management | 10 |
BSB560 Principles of Marketing | 10 |
BSB580 Operations Management | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSB562 The Marketing Mix | 10 |
BSB590 The Contemporary Business Environment | 10 |
SEMESTER 1 and 2 OPTIONAL MODULES | |
ECB004 Introduction to Financial Economics (not if taking BSB025) | 20 |
SEMESTER 2 OPTIONAL MODULES | |
ECB006 Data Analysis II (not if taking BSB110) | 10 |
BSB012 Information Systems Development | 10 |
BSB025 Financial Management (not if taking ECB004) | 10 |
BSB046 Organisation Studies | 10 |
BSB110 Data Analysis for Management (not if taking ECB006) | 10 |
BSB135 Consumer Behaviour | 10 |
Compulsory and optional modules must be taken such that the total modular weight for the year is 120 credits.
Please note: Optional modules are subject to availability and timetable permitting.
4.2.3 Optional Part I (8 semester programme only)
Candidates pursue one of the following streams:
i) Placement Stream
Candidates will undertake industrial or professional training.
ii) Study Abroad Stream
Candidates will study at one of the School of Business and Economics approved academic institutions.
iii) Split Stream
Candidates will undertake industrial or professional training for half the year and will study at one of the School of Business and Economics approved academic institutions for the other half of the academic year.
(iv) Language Related Placement
Candidates will undertake a year abroad in employment, for example as an English language assistant in a school or other educational establishment, approved by the School of Business and Economics.
4.2.4 Part C - Student must choose 60 credits in Economics (EC) and 60 credits in Management (BS)
Compulsory modules (total modular weight: 40 credits):
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTER 1 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSC070 Technology in Business and Society | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
ECC142 Research and Communication Skills for Economists | 20 |
BSC575 Leadership and Interpersonal Skills | 10 |
ECONOMICS OPTIONAL MODULES (Choose 40 weight) | |
SEMESTER 1 and 2 OPTIONAL MODULES | |
ECC038 Applied Econometrics | 20 |
SEMESTER 1 OPTIONAL MODULES | |
ECC001 Developments in Microeconomics | 20 |
ECC003 International Money and Finance | 20 |
ECC004 Financial Economics and Asset Pricing | 20 |
ECC031 International Trade | 20 |
ECC101 Developments in Macroeconomics | 20 |
SEMESTER 2 OPTIONAL MODULES | |
ECC005 Industrial Economics | 20 |
ECC035 Central Banking and Financial Crises | 20 |
ECC119 Development Economics | 20 |
ECC139 Environmental Economics | 20 |
ECC141 Corporate Finance and Derivatives | 20 |
BUSINESS OPTIONAL MODULES (Choose 40 weight) | |
SEMESTER 1 OPTIONAL MODULES | |
BSC097 Knowledge Management | 10 |
BSC105 International Human Resource Management | 10 |
BSC110 Marketing Strategy and Planning | 10 |
BSC115 International Marketing | 10 |
BSC570 Strategic Management | 20 |
BSC522 Entrepreneurship and Innovation | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 OPTIONAL MODULES | |
BSC080 Analysing Careers | 10 |
BSC085 The Changing Work Organisation | 10 |
BSC124 Marketing Communications | 10 |
BSC144 Project Management | 10 |
BSC524 Entrepreneurship and Small Business Planning | 10 |
Compulsory and optional modules must be taken such that the total modular weight for the year is 120 credits.
Please note: Optional modules are subject to availability and timetable permitting.
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
5.1 Progression Criteria
In order to progress from Part A to Part B and from Part B to C and to be eligible for the award of an Honours degree, candidates must satisfy the minimum credit requirements set out in Regulation XX.
A Diploma in Professional Studies will be awarded to students who have satisfactorily completed the programme of study required for Part I.
5.2 Reassessment
Candidates must accumulate at least 60 credits in a Part of a Programme in order to be eligible for reassessment in the relevant Part during the University’s Special Assessment Period.
If a student registers to resit a module, they will be required to resit all failed components of that module (ie if their coursework mark was less than 40% they must resit the coursework and if their exam mark was less than 40% they must resit the exam). If a student resits the coursework element of a module and there was more than 1 coursework assignment for that module, then the student would be required to resit all coursework assignments in which they achieved a mark below 40%. Marks for elements of a module not being re-sat will be carried forward.
5.3 Accreditation for Economics and Management
In order to retain exemptions from foundation-level professional courses (under the requirements of the professional bodies) following graduation, candidates must achieve a minimum mark of 40% overall and 35% in each assessed component in core modules as defined by the various professional bodies for accreditation purposes.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
Candidates' final degree classification will be determined on the basis of performance in degree level Module Assessments in Parts B and C in accordance with the scheme set out in Regulation XX. The average percentage marks for each Part will be combined in the ratio Part B 30% : Part C 70% to determine the final Programme Mark.
Programme Specification
BS BSc (Hons) Economics and Management (2014 entry)
Academic Year: 2017/18
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at 天堂视频 (available soon)
- What makes 天堂视频 programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | 天堂视频 |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | School of Business and Economics |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | |
Final award | BSc/ BSc+DPS/ BSc+DIntS |
Programme title | Economics and Management |
Programme code | ECUB01 |
Length of programme | The duration of the programmes is either six semesters or eight semesters. The option of eight semesters has four streams. Permission to transfer to the 8 semester programme will be at the discretion of the Programme Director (Economics). See Programme Structure for further details of eight semester streams. |
UCAS code | LN12 Economics and Management (3 years) LN1F Economics and Management (4 years sandwich) |
Admissions criteria | |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
- To provide students with specialised training in the core aspects of economics and management particularly relevant to industry and commerce.
- To provide students with the opportunity to study a broad curriculum in both economics and in management.
- To provide students with core concepts in management and business.
- To equip students with the relevant tools to understand how firms behave, compete and implement strategies with reference to both their internal and external environment.
- To provide a foundation of knowledge about the workings of the domestic and international economy and to understand the impact of the economic environment on a range of business settings.
- To develop in students the ability to apply the knowledge and skills they have acquired to the solution of theoretical and applied problems in economics.
- To enable data handling skills relating to the analysis on information available and generated by modern business in order for managers to make effective and timely decisions.
- To develop communication and interpersonal skills and your ability to work in groups developing practical skills essential for working in a business environment.
- To provide students with the knowledge, skills and understanding required for a career in the economics and management professions.
- To provide students with analytical skills and an ability to develop simplifying frameworks for studying the real world.
- To develop in students the ability to appreciate what would be an appropriate level of abstraction for a range of economic issues.
- To provide students with the knowledge and skill base, from which they can proceed to further studies in economics, related areas or in multi-disciplinary areas that involve economics.
- To stimulate students intellectually through the study of economics and to lead them to appreciate its application to a range of managerial problems and its relevance in a variety of contexts.
- To provide a relevant, practical and constantly updated programme through close links with industry, professional firms and accounting bodies, and through accreditation by the major professional accounting bodies.
- To enhance students’ career and employment prospects on graduating by developing a range of transferable skills embedded in the programme.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
- QAA Subject Benchmark Statements: Economics.
- Benchmark Statements for General Business and Management
- Framework for Higher Education Qualifications.
- International links with a network of eleven European Universities within the Erasmus exchange programme.
- University Learning and Teaching Strategy.
- Departmental learning and teaching policies.
- Links, both formal and informal, with external examiners.
- Staff research specialisms and professional involvement in the discipline.
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
On successful completion of this programme, within the Economics portion of the programme students will learn:
K1. A coherent core of economic principles. The understanding of these might be verbal, graphical or mathematical.
K2. Relevant quantitative methods and computing techniques. These cover mathematical and statistical methods, that may possibly include econometrics. Students will have exposure to the use of such techniques on actual economic, financial or social data. A knowledge and appreciation of economic data, both quantitative and qualitative. Students should also have some knowledge of the appropriate methods that the economist might use to structure and analyse such data.
K3. The applications of economics. Students should have the ability to apply a core of microeconomic and macroeconomic principles and reasoning to a variety of applied topics. They should also be aware of the economic principles that can be used to design, guide and interpret commercial policy. Related to this, they should have the ability to evaluate government economic policy and to assess the performance of the UK and other economies and the impact on the business environment.
Within the Management portion of the degree will develop an understanding of:
K4. organisations; their internal structures and their management, including the management of human resources, financial resources and information systems.
K5. the external environment within which organisations operate; the markets for goods, services and finance; customers and the implications for marketing.
K6. analytical frameworks, techniques and processes; business policy and strategy; development of policy and strategy; current issues in strategic management.
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
C1. Abstract and synthesise information.
C2. Develop problem-solving and decision-making skills using the analytical tools of deduction and induction reasoning.
C3. Critically evaluate and interpret a range of evidence, including data and text.
C4. Framing an economic problem within the merits of contrasting theories, explanations and arguments.
C5. Use critical thinking, analysis and synthesis to evaluate and apply concepts and insights from business disciplines, including comprehension of complex scenarios
C6. Formulate and solve both structured and unstructured business problems.
C7. Advise on business decisions using appropriate qualitative and quantitative skills, including the ability to identify and evaluate a range of alternative solutions.
C8. Relate theory to practice in business and management (B&M).
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
P1. Construct economic models using verbal, diagrammatic, mathematical, statistical and econometric techniques and reasoning.
P2. Combine and interpret different types of evidence using appropriate techniques.
P3. Use effective communication, both oral and written, in a range of styles and media appropriate for management in different cultures.
P4. Make effective use of information and communication technologies (ICT) in a business context including word processing, storage and manipulation of data, generation of presentations, use of the internet and e-mail using appropriate software.
P5. Conduct research using a range of sources of business-related materials including books, journals, trade and financial press, official statistics and the internet (B&M).
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate the key skills of:
T1. Analysis and decision making.
T2. Communication, both written and verbal.
T3. Numeracy and computation.
T4. IT, information handling and retrieval, including library skills.
T5. Independent study and group work.
T6. Time management.
T7. Problem solving.
4. Programme structure
4.1 Structure
4.1.1 Students must have a total modular weighting of 120 credits per year. This must include the compulsory modules. The remaining optional modules may be chosen to give a 60:60 split over the two semesters, or alternatively, 50:70 or 70:50.
4.1.2 The prefixes on module codes represent the credit levels as follows:
A level 4; B level 5; C level 6.
4.1.3 The option of eight semesters has four streams:
- Candidates following the Placement Stream are required to spend the third academic year undertaking professional training leading to the Diploma in Professional Studies, in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
- Candidates following the Study Abroad Stream or the Language Related Placement Stream are required to spend the third academic year at an approved academic institution.
- Candidates following the Split Stream are required to spend six months of the third academic year undertaking professional training, and the other half of the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution.
The Study Abroad, the Language Related Placement and the Split Stream lead to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI. The third academic year (Part I) occurs between Part B and Part C.
4.2 Content
Modules are classified as either Economics (codes beginning with EC), or Management (codes beginning with BS).
4.2.1 Part A
All the following Part A modules are compulsory.
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTER 1 and 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
ECA001 Principles of Macroeconomics | 20 |
ECA002 Principles of Microeconomics | 20 |
ECA003 Data Analysis | 20 |
ECA004 Quantitative Economics | 20 |
SEMESTER 1 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSA505 Organisational Behaviour | 10 |
BSA525 Introduction to Accounting | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSA506 Management of Human Resources | 10 |
BSA526 Accounting for Managers | 10 |
4.2.2 Part B
Compulsory Modules (total modular weight: 90 credits):
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTER 1 and 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
ECB001 Intermediate Macroeconomics | 20 |
ECB002 Intermediate Microeconomics | 20 |
SEMESTER 1 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSB560 Principles of Marketing | 10 |
BSB580 Operations Management | 10 |
BSB010 Business Information Management | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSB562 The Marketing Mix | 10 |
BSB590 The Contemporary Business Environment | 10 |
SEMESTER 1 and 2 OPTIONAL MODULES | |
ECB003 Introduction to Econometrics | 20 |
ECB004 Introduction to Finance | 20 |
SEMESTER 2 OPTIONAL MODULES | |
BSB135 Consumer Behaviour | 10 |
BSB012 Information Systems Development | 10 |
BSB046 Organisation Studies | 10 |
BSB025 Financial Management (not if taking ECB004) | 10 |
BSB110 Data Analysis for Management (not if taking ECB003) | 10 |
Compulsory and optional modules must be taken such that the total modular weight for the year is 120 credits.
Please note: Optional modules are subject to availability and timetable permitting.
4.2.3 Optional Part I (8 semester programme only)
Candidates pursue one of the following streams:
i) Placement Stream
Candidates will undertake industrial or professional training.
ii) Study Abroad Stream
Candidates will study at one of the School of Business and Economics approved academic institutions.
iii) Split Stream
Candidates will undertake industrial or professional training for half the year and will study at one of the School of Business and Economics approved academic institutions for the other half of the academic year.
(iv) Language Related Placement
Candidates will undertake a year abroad in employment, for example as an English language assistant in a school or other educational establishment, approved by the School of Business and Economics.
4.2.4 Part C - student must choose 60 credits in Economics (EC) and 60 credits in Management (BS)
Compulsory modules (total modular weight: 40 credits):
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTER 1 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSC070 Technology in Business and Society | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
ECC142 Research and Communication Skills for Economists | 20 |
BSC575 Leadership and Interpersonal Skills | 10 |
ECONOMICS OPTIONAL MODULES (Choose 40 weight) | |
SEMESTER 1 and 2 OPTIONAL MODULES | |
ECC038 Applied Econometrics | 20 |
SEMESTER 1 OPTIONAL MODULES | |
ECC001 Developments in Microeconomics | 20 |
ECC003 International Money and Finance | 20 |
ECC004 Financial Economics and Asset Pricing | 20 |
ECC031 International Trade | 20 |
ECC101 Developments in Macroeconomics | 20 |
SEMESTER 2 OPTIONAL MODULES | |
ECC005 Industrial Economics | 20 |
ECC035 Central Banking and Financial Crises | 20 |
ECC119 Development Economics | 20 |
ECC141 Corporate Finance and Derivatives | 20 |
BUSINESS OPTIONAL MODULES (Choose 40 weight) | |
SEMESTER 1 OPTIONAL MODULES | |
BSC097 Knowledge Management | 10 |
BSC105 International Human Resource Management | 10 |
BSC110 Marketing Strategy and Planning | 10 |
BSC115 International Marketing | 10 |
BSC522 Entrepreneurship and Innovation | 10 |
BSC570 Strategic Management | 20 |
SEMESTER 2 OPTIONAL MODULES | |
BSC080 Analysing Careers | 10 |
BSC124 Marketing Communications | 10 |
BSC144 Project Management | 10 |
BSC524 Entrepreneurship and Small Business Planning | 10 |
Compulsory and optional modules must be taken such that the total modular weight for the year is 120 credits.
Please note: Optional modules are subject to availability and timetable permitting.
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
5.1 Progression Criteria
In order to progress from Part A to Part B and from Part B to C and to be eligible for the award of an Honours degree, candidates must satisfy the minimum credit requirements set out in Regulation XX.
A Diploma in Professional Studies will be awarded to students who have satisfactorily completed the programme of study required for Part I.
5.2 Reassessment
Candidates must accumulate at least 60 credits in a Part of a Programme in order to be eligible for reassessment in the relevant Part during the University’s Special Assessment Period.
If a student registers to resit a module, they will be required to resit all failed components of that module (ie if their coursework mark was less than 40% they must resit the coursework and if their exam mark was less than 40% they must resit the exam). If a student resits the coursework element of a module and there was more than 1 coursework assignment for that module, then the student would be required to resit all coursework assignments in which they achieved a mark below 40%. Marks for elements of a module not being re-sat will be carried forward.
5.3 Accreditation for Economics and Management
In order to retain exemptions from foundation-level professional courses (under the requirements of the professional bodies) following graduation, candidates must achieve a minimum mark of 40% overall and 35% in each assessed component in core modules as defined by the various professional bodies for accreditation purposes.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
Candidates' final degree classification will be determined on the basis of performance in degree level Module Assessments in Parts B and C in accordance with the scheme set out in Regulation XX. The average percentage marks for each Part will be combined in the ratio Part B 30% : Part C 70% to determine the final Programme Mark.
Programme Specification
BS BSc (Hons) Business Economics and Finance (2017 entry)
Academic Year: 2017/18
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at 天堂视频 (available soon)
- What makes 天堂视频 programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | 天堂视频 |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | School of Business and Economics |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | |
Final award | BSc / BSc+DPS / BSc+DIntS |
Programme title | Business Economics and Finance |
Programme code | ECUB02 |
Length of programme | The duration of the programme is either six semesters or six semesters plus one academic year if candidates select one of the available part I streams. The third academic year (Part I) occurs between Part B and Part C. Permission to transfer to the eight semester programme will be at the discretion of the Programme Director (Economics). See Programme Structure for further details of eight semester streams. |
UCAS code | L1NK Business Economics and Finance (3 years) LN14 Business Economics and Finance (4 years sandwich) |
Admissions criteria | |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
- To provide specialised training in the aspects of economics particularly relevant to industry, commerce and financial services.
- To provide training in the principles of economics and their application.
- To stimulate students intellectually through the study of economics and to lead them to appreciate its application to a range of problems and its relevance in a variety of contexts.
- To provide a firm foundation of knowledge about the workings of the economy and to develop the relevant skills for the constructive use of that knowledge in a range of settings.
- To develop in students the ability to apply the knowledge and skills they have acquired to the solution of theoretical and applied problems in economics.
- To equip students with appropriate tools of analysis to tackle issues and problems of economic policy.
- To develop in students, through the study of economics, a range of transferable skills that will be of value in employment and self-employment.
- To provide students with analytical skills and an ability to develop simplifying frameworks for studying the real world.
- To develop in students the ability to appreciate what would be an appropriate level of abstraction for a range of economic issues.
- To provide students with the knowledge and skill base, from which they can proceed to further studies in economics, related areas or in multi-disciplinary areas that involve economics.
- To generate in students an appreciation of the economic dimension of wider social and political issues.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
- QAA Subject Benchmark Statements: Economics.
- Framework for Higher Education Qualifications.
- International links with a network of eleven European Universities within the Erasmus exchange programme.
- University Learning and Teaching Strategy.
- Departmental learning and teaching policies.
- Links, both formal and informal, with external examiners.
- Staff research specialisms and professional involvement in the discipline.
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding of:
K1. A coherent core of economic principles. The understanding of these might be verbal, graphical or mathematical.
These principles cover the microeconomic issues of decision and choice, the production and exchange of goods, the interdependency of markets, and economic welfare. They also include macroeconomic issues, such as employment, national income, the balance of payments and the distribution of income, inflation, growth and business cycles, money and finance. The understanding should extend to economic policy at both microeconomic and macroeconomic levels. In all these, students should show understanding of analytical methods and model-based argument and appreciate the existence of different methodological approaches.
K2. Relevant quantitative methods and computing techniques. These cover mathematical and statistical methods, including econometrics. Students will have exposure to the use of such techniques on actual economic, financial or social data. A knowledge and appreciation of economic data, both quantitative and qualitative. Students should also have some knowledge of the appropriate methods that the economist might use to structure and analyse such data.
K3. The applications of economics. Students should have the ability to apply a core of economic principles and reasoning to a variety of applied topics. They should also be aware of the economic principles that can be used to design, guide and interpret commercial, economic and social policy. As part of this, they should have the ability to discuss and analyse government policy and to assess the performance of the UK and other economies.
- Specific applications to financial economics. Students should have the ability to analyse financial markets and the industrial organization of firms.
The above implies that the attainments of students should show:
- Ability to apply core economic theory and economic reasoning to applied topics.
- Ability to relate differences in policy recommendations to differences in the theoretical and empirical features of economic analyses which underlie such recommendations.
- Ability to discuss and analyse government policy and to assess the performance of the UK and other economies.
- Understanding of verbal, graphical, mathematical and econometric representation of economic ideas and analysis, including the relationship between them.
- Understanding of relevant mathematical and statistical techniques.
- Understanding of analytical methods, both theory- and model-based.
- Appreciation of the history and development of economic ideas and the differing methods of analysis that have been and are used by economists.
- Understanding of the appropriate techniques to enable manipulation, treatment and interpretation of the relevant statistical data.
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- Know and understand the core of economic theory and applied economics, with a particular application to the world of business and finance.
- Know and understand the behaviour of agents in financial markets, and the behaviour of firms and consumers in the national and international economy.
- Discuss in an informed manner the major policy directions and regulations to implement economic policy.
- Know and understand the nature of incentives in economic decision making by agents in the economy.
- Evaluate the outcomes of market and policy changes in all spheres of the economy, with special emphasis on business and finance.
More specifically students should be able to demonstrate the following rigorous transferable skills:
C1. Abstraction. From the study of economic principles and models, students see how one can abstract the essential features of complex systems and provide a useable framework for evaluation and assessment of the effects of policy or other exogenous events. Through this, the typical student will acquire proficiency in how to simplify while still retaining relevance. This is an approach that they can then apply in other contexts, thereby becoming more effective problem-solvers and decision-makers.
C2. Analysis, deduction and induction. Economic reasoning is highly deductive, and logical analysis is applied to assumption-based models. However, inductive reasoning is also important. The typical student will have been exposed to some or all of these and be able to use some of them. Such skills also enhance their problem-solving and decision-making ability.
C3. Quantification and design. Data, and their effective organization, presentation and analysis, are important in economics. The typical student will have some familiarity with the principal sources of economic information and data relevant to industry, commerce and government, and have had practice in organising it and presenting it informatively. This skill is important at all stages in the decision-making process.
C4. Framing. Through the study of economics, a student should learn how to decide what should be taken as given or fixed for the purposes of setting up and solving a problem, i.e. what the important 'parameters' are in constraining the solution to the problem. Learning to think about how and why these parameters might change encourages a student to place the economic problem in its broader social and political context. This `framing' skill is important in determining the decision-maker's ability to implement the solutions to problems.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
P1. Construct economic models using verbal, diagrammatic, mathematical, statistical and econometric techniques and reasoning.
P2. Access, search for and evaluate relevant data sources for validation of economic models
P3. Apply and use specialised software including spreadsheets for the analysis of economic models.
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate the key skills of:
T1. Analysis and decision making.
T2. Communication.
T3. Numeracy and computation.
T4. IT, information handling and retrieval, including library skills.
T5. Independent study and group work.
T6. Time management.
T7. Problem solving.
4. Programme structure
Students must have a total modular weighting of 120 credits per year. This must include the compulsory modules. The remaining optional modules may be chosen to give a 60:60 split over the two semesters, or alternatively, 50:70 or 70:50.
The prefixes on module codes represent the credit levels as follows:
A level 4; B level 5; C level 6.
Candidates following the Placement Stream are required to spend the third academic year undertaking professional training leading to the Diploma in Professional Studies, in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
Candidates following the Study Abroad Stream are required to spend the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution leading to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
Candidates following the Split Stream are required to spend six months of the third academic year undertaking professional training, and the other half of the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution. This leads to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
4.1 Part A - Introductory Modules
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTER 1 and 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
ECA001 Principles of Macroeconomics | 20 |
ECA002 Principles of Microeconomics | 20 |
ECA003 Data Analysis I (Semester 1) | 10 |
ECA004 Quantitative Economics | 20 |
ECA005 Data Analysis II (Semester 2) | 10 |
BSA008 Skills for Study and Employment (Semester 2) | 10 |
SEMESTER 1 OPTIONAL MODULES (CHOOSE ONE) | |
BSA505 Organisational Behaviour | 10 |
BSA525 Introduction to Accounting | 10 |
EUA607 Introduction to Democratic Government | 10 |
GYA002 Georgraphies of Global Economic Change | 20 |
SSA001 Introduction to Sociology A | 10 |
SSA201 Introduction to Criminology and Social Policy A | 10 |
University Wide Languages Programme (see additional form) | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 OPTIONAL MODULES (CHOOSE TWO) | |
BSA026 Principles of Law | 10 |
BSA506 Management of Human Resources | 10 |
EUA614 Political Ideologies | 10 |
GYA104 Geographies of Identity | 10 |
SSA002 Introduction to Sociology B | 10 |
SSA202 Introduction to Criminology and Social Policy B | 10 |
University Wide Languages Programme (see additional form) | 10 |
Compulsory and optional modules must be taken such that the total modular weight for the year is 120 credits divided equally over each Semester, or split 70:50 or 50:70 over the two Semesters. Please note: Optional modules are subject to availability and timetable permitting. |
4.2 Part B - Degree Modules
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTERS 1 AND 2 COMPULSORY MODULES: | |
ECB001 Intermediate Macroeconomics | 20 |
ECB002 Intermediate Microeconomics | 20 |
ECB003 Introduction to Econometrics | 20 |
ECB004 Introduction to Financial Economics | 20 |
SEMESTER 1 AND 2 OPTIONAL MODULES | |
ECB005 International Economics Relations | 20 |
ECB015 Economics of the Financial System | 20 |
ECB016 History of Economic Thought | 20 |
ECB030 Energy and the Environment | 20 |
SEMESTER 1 OPTIONAL MODULES | |
ECB136 Transport Economics | 20 |
BSB015 Company Law | 10 |
BSB560 Principles of Marketing | 10 |
BSB580 Operations Management | 10 |
University Wide Languages Programme | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 OPTIONAL MODULES | |
ECB035 The Economics of Social Issues | 20 |
BSB532 Accounting for Managers | 10 |
BSB562 The Marketing Mix | 10 |
University Wide Languages Programme | 10 |
Compulsory and optional modules must be taken such that the total modular weight for the year is 120 credits divided equally over each Semester, or split 70:50 or 50:70 over the two Semesters. Please note: Optional modules are subject to availability and timetable permitting. |
4.3 Part I : Optional (8 semester programme only)
Candidates pursue one of the following streams:
The duration of the programme is either six semesters or six semesters plus one academic year if candidates select one of the following three streams:
Candidates following the Placement Stream are required to spend the third academic year undertaking professional training leading to the Diploma in Professional Studies, in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
Candidates following the Study Abroad Stream are required to spend the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution leading to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
Candidates following the Split Stream are required to spend six months of the third academic year undertaking professional training, and the other half of the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution. This leads to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
The third academic year (Part I) occurs between Part B and Part C. Permission to transfer to the eight semester programme will be at the discretion of the Associate Dean (Teaching) for the School.
4.4 Part C - Degree Modules
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTER 1 AND 2 COMPULSORY MODULES (you must choose at least one) | |
ECC004 Financial Economics and Asset Pricing (Semester 1) | 20 |
ECC141 Corporate Finance and Derivatives (Semester 2) | 20 |
SEMESTER 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
ECC005 Industrial Economics | 20 |
ECC142 Research and Communication Skills for Economists | 20 |
SEMESTER 1 AND 2 OPTIONAL MODULE | |
ECC038 Applied Econometrics | 20 |
SEMESTER 1 OPTIONAL MODULES | |
ECC001 Development in Microeconomics | 20 |
ECC003 International Money and Finance | 20 |
ECC031 International Trade | 20 |
ECC101 Developments in Macroeconomics | 20 |
SEMESTER 2 OPTIONAL MODULES | |
ECC035 Central Banking and Financial Crises | 20 |
ECC119 Development Economics | 20 |
ECC139 Environment Economics | 20 |
Compulsory and optional modules must be taken such that the total modular weight for the year is 120 credits divided equally over each Semester. Please note: Optional modules are subject to availability and timetable permitting. |
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
5.1 Criteria for Progression
In order to progress from Part A to Part B and from Part B to C and to be eligible for the award of an Honours degree, candidates must satisfy the minimum credit requirements set out in Regulation XX.
A Diploma in Professional Studies will be awarded to students who have satisfactorily completed the programme of study required for Part I.
5.2 Reassessment
Candidates must accumulate at least 60 credits in a Part of a Programme in order to be eligible for reassessment in the relevant Part during the University’s Special Assessment Period.
If a student registers to resit a module, they will be required to resit all failed components of that module (ie if their coursework mark was less than 40% they must resit the coursework and if their exam mark was less than 40% they must resit the exam). If a student resits the coursework element of a module and there was more than 1 coursework assignment for that module, then the student would be required to resit all coursework assignments in which they achieved a mark below 40%. Marks for elements of a module not being re-sat will be carried forward.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
Candidates' final degree classification will be determined on the basis of performance in degree level Module Assessments in Parts B and C in accordance with the scheme set out in Regulation XX of the University Regulations. The average percentage marks for each Part will be combined in the ratio Part B 30% : Part C 70% to determine the final Programme Mark.
Programme Specification
BS BSc (Hons) Business Economics and Finance (2016 entry)
Academic Year: 2017/18
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at 天堂视频 (available soon)
- What makes 天堂视频 programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | 天堂视频 |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | School of Business and Economics |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | |
Final award | BSc / BSc+DPS / BSc+DIntS |
Programme title | Business Economics and Finance |
Programme code | ECUB02 |
Length of programme | The duration of the programme is either six semesters or six semesters plus one academic year if candidates select one of the available part I streams. The third academic year (Part I) occurs between Part B and Part C. Permission to transfer to the eight semester programme will be at the discretion of the Programme Director (Economics). See Programme Structure for further details of eight semester streams. |
UCAS code | L1NK Business Economics and Finance (3 years) LN14 Business Economics and Finance (4 years sandwich) |
Admissions criteria | |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
- To provide specialised training in the aspects of economics particularly relevant to industry, commerce and financial services.
- To provide training in the principles of economics and their application.
- To stimulate students intellectually through the study of economics and to lead them to appreciate its application to a range of problems and its relevance in a variety of contexts.
- To provide a firm foundation of knowledge about the workings of the economy and to develop the relevant skills for the constructive use of that knowledge in a range of settings.
- To develop in students the ability to apply the knowledge and skills they have acquired to the solution of theoretical and applied problems in economics.
- To equip students with appropriate tools of analysis to tackle issues and problems of economic policy.
- To develop in students, through the study of economics, a range of transferable skills that will be of value in employment and self-employment.
- To provide students with analytical skills and an ability to develop simplifying frameworks for studying the real world.
- To develop in students the ability to appreciate what would be an appropriate level of abstraction for a range of economic issues.
- To provide students with the knowledge and skill base, from which they can proceed to further studies in economics, related areas or in multi-disciplinary areas that involve economics.
- To generate in students an appreciation of the economic dimension of wider social and political issues.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
- QAA Subject Benchmark Statements: Economics.
- Framework for Higher Education Qualifications.
- International links with a network of eleven European Universities within the Erasmus exchange programme.
- University Learning and Teaching Strategy.
- Departmental learning and teaching policies.
- Links, both formal and informal, with external examiners.
- Staff research specialisms and professional involvement in the discipline.
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding of:
K1. A coherent core of economic principles. The understanding of these might be verbal, graphical or mathematical.
These principles cover the microeconomic issues of decision and choice, the production and exchange of goods, the interdependency of markets, and economic welfare. They also include macroeconomic issues, such as employment, national income, the balance of payments and the distribution of income, inflation, growth and business cycles, money and finance. The understanding should extend to economic policy at both microeconomic and macroeconomic levels. In all these, students should show understanding of analytical methods and model-based argument and appreciate the existence of different methodological approaches.
K2. Relevant quantitative methods and computing techniques. These cover mathematical and statistical methods, including econometrics. Students will have exposure to the use of such techniques on actual economic, financial or social data. A knowledge and appreciation of economic data, both quantitative and qualitative. Students should also have some knowledge of the appropriate methods that the economist might use to structure and analyse such data.
K3. The applications of economics. Students should have the ability to apply a core of economic principles and reasoning to a variety of applied topics. They should also be aware of the economic principles that can be used to design, guide and interpret commercial, economic and social policy. As part of this, they should have the ability to discuss and analyse government policy and to assess the performance of the UK and other economies.
- Specific applications to financial economics. Students should have the ability to analyse financial markets and the industrial organization of firms.
The above implies that the attainments of students should show:
- Ability to apply core economic theory and economic reasoning to applied topics.
- Ability to relate differences in policy recommendations to differences in the theoretical and empirical features of economic analyses which underlie such recommendations.
- Ability to discuss and analyse government policy and to assess the performance of the UK and other economies.
- Understanding of verbal, graphical, mathematical and econometric representation of economic ideas and analysis, including the relationship between them.
- Understanding of relevant mathematical and statistical techniques.
- Understanding of analytical methods, both theory- and model-based.
- Appreciation of the history and development of economic ideas and the differing methods of analysis that have been and are used by economists.
- Understanding of the appropriate techniques to enable manipulation, treatment and interpretation of the relevant statistical data.
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- Know and understand the core of economic theory and applied economics, with a particular application to the world of business and finance.
- Know and understand the behaviour of agents in financial markets, and the behaviour of firms and consumers in the national and international economy.
- Discuss in an informed manner the major policy directions and regulations to implement economic policy.
- Know and understand the nature of incentives in economic decision making by agents in the economy.
- Evaluate the outcomes of market and policy changes in all spheres of the economy, with special emphasis on business and finance.
More specifically students should be able to demonstrate the following rigorous transferable skills:
C1. Abstraction. From the study of economic principles and models, students see how one can abstract the essential features of complex systems and provide a useable framework for evaluation and assessment of the effects of policy or other exogenous events. Through this, the typical student will acquire proficiency in how to simplify while still retaining relevance. This is an approach that they can then apply in other contexts, thereby becoming more effective problem-solvers and decision-makers.
C2. Analysis, deduction and induction. Economic reasoning is highly deductive, and logical analysis is applied to assumption-based models. However, inductive reasoning is also important. The typical student will have been exposed to some or all of these and be able to use some of them. Such skills also enhance their problem-solving and decision-making ability.
C3. Quantification and design. Data, and their effective organization, presentation and analysis, are important in economics. The typical student will have some familiarity with the principal sources of economic information and data relevant to industry, commerce and government, and have had practice in organising it and presenting it informatively. This skill is important at all stages in the decision-making process.
C4. Framing. Through the study of economics, a student should learn how to decide what should be taken as given or fixed for the purposes of setting up and solving a problem, i.e. what the important 'parameters' are in constraining the solution to the problem. Learning to think about how and why these parameters might change encourages a student to place the economic problem in its broader social and political context. This `framing' skill is important in determining the decision-maker's ability to implement the solutions to problems.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
P1. Construct economic models using verbal, diagrammatic, mathematical, statistical and econometric techniques and reasoning.
P2. Access, search for and evaluate relevant data sources for validation of economic models
P3. Apply and use specialised software including spreadsheets for the analysis of economic models.
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate the key skills of:
T1. Analysis and decision making.
T2. Communication.
T3. Numeracy and computation.
T4. IT, information handling and retrieval, including library skills.
T5. Independent study and group work.
T6. Time management.
T7. Problem solving.
4. Programme structure
Students must have a total modular weighting of 120 credits per year. This must include the compulsory modules. The remaining optional modules may be chosen to give a 60:60 split over the two semesters, or alternatively, 50:70 or 70:50.
The prefixes on module codes represent the credit levels as follows:
A level 4; B level 5; C level 6.
Candidates following the Placement Stream are required to spend the third academic year undertaking professional training leading to the Diploma in Professional Studies, in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
Candidates following the Study Abroad Stream are required to spend the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution leading to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
Candidates following the Split Stream are required to spend six months of the third academic year undertaking professional training, and the other half of the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution. This leads to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
4.1 Part A - Introductory Modules
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTER 1 and 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
ECA001 Principles of Macroeconomics | 20 |
ECA002 Principles of Microeconomics | 20 |
ECA003 Data Analysis I (Semester 1) | 10 |
ECA004 Quantitative Economics | 20 |
ECA005 Data Analysis II (Semester 2) | 10 |
BSA008 Skills for Study and Employment (Semester 2) | 10 |
SEMESTER 1 OPTIONAL MODULES (CHOOSE ONE) | |
BSA505 Organisational Behaviour | 10 |
BSA525 Introduction to Accounting | 10 |
EUA607 Introduction to Democratic Government | 10 |
GYA002 Georgraphies of Global Economic Change | 20 |
SSA001 Introduction to Sociology A | 10 |
SSA201 Introduction to Criminology and Social Policy A | 10 |
University Wide Languages Programme (see additional form) | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 OPTIONAL MODULES (CHOOSE TWO) | |
BSA026 Principles of Law | 10 |
BSA506 Management of Human Resources | 10 |
EUA614 Political Ideologies | 10 |
GYA104 Geographies of Identity | 10 |
SSA002 Introduction to Sociology B | 10 |
SSA202 Introduction to Criminology and Social Policy B | 10 |
University Wide Languages Programme (see additional form) | 10 |
Compulsory and optional modules must be taken such that the total modular weight for the year is 120 credits divided equally over each Semester, or split 70:50 or 50:70 over the two Semesters. Please note: Optional modules are subject to availability and timetable permitting. |
4.2 Part B - Degree Modules
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTERS 1 AND 2 COMPULSORY MODULES: | |
ECB001 Intermediate Macroeconomics | 20 |
ECB002 Intermediate Microeconomics | 20 |
ECB003 Introduction to Econometrics | 20 |
ECB004 Introduction to Financial Economics | 20 |
SEMESTER 1 AND 2 OPTIONAL MODULES | |
ECB005 International Economics Relations | 20 |
ECB015 Economics of the Financial System | 20 |
ECB016 History of Economic Thought | 20 |
SEMESTER 1 OPTIONAL MODULES | |
ECB136 Transport Economics | 20 |
BSB015 Company Law | 10 |
BSB560 Principles of Marketing | 10 |
BSB580 Operations Management | 10 |
University Wide Languages Programme | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 OPTIONAL MODULES | |
ECB035 The Economics of Social Issues | 20 |
BSB532 Accounting for Managers | 10 |
BSB562 The Marketing Mix | 10 |
University Wide Languages Programme | 10 |
Compulsory and optional modules must be taken such that the total modular weight for the year is 120 credits divided equally over each Semester, or split 70:50 or 50:70 over the two Semesters. Please note: Optional modules are subject to availability and timetable permitting. |
4.3 Part I : Optional (8 semester programme only)
Candidates pursue one of the following streams:
The duration of the programme is either six semesters or six semesters plus one academic year if candidates select one of the following three streams:
Candidates following the Placement Stream are required to spend the third academic year undertaking professional training leading to the Diploma in Professional Studies, in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
Candidates following the Study Abroad Stream are required to spend the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution leading to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
Candidates following the Split Stream are required to spend six months of the third academic year undertaking professional training, and the other half of the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution. This leads to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
The third academic year (Part I) occurs between Part B and Part C. Permission to transfer to the eight semester programme will be at the discretion of the Associate Dean (Teaching) for the School.
4.4 Part C - Degree Modules
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTER 1 AND 2 COMPULSORY MODULES (you must choose at least one) | |
ECC004 Financial Economics and Asset Pricing (Semester 1) | 20 |
ECC141 Corporate Finance and Derivatives (Semester 2) | 20 |
SEMESTER 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
ECC005 Industrial Economics | 20 |
ECC142 Research and Communication Skills for Economists | 20 |
SEMESTER 1 AND 2 OPTIONAL MODULE | |
ECC038 Applied Econometrics | 20 |
SEMESTER 1 OPTIONAL MODULES | |
ECC001 Development in Microeconomics | 20 |
ECC003 International Money and Finance | 20 |
ECC031 International Trade | 20 |
ECC101 Developments in Macroeconomics | 20 |
SEMESTER 2 OPTIONAL MODULES | |
ECC035 Central Banking and Financial Crises | 20 |
ECC119 Development Economics | 20 |
ECC139 Environment Economics | 20 |
Compulsory and optional modules must be taken such that the total modular weight for the year is 120 credits divided equally over each Semester. Please note: Optional modules are subject to availability and timetable permitting. |
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
5.1 Criteria for Progression
In order to progress from Part A to Part B and from Part B to C and to be eligible for the award of an Honours degree, candidates must satisfy the minimum credit requirements set out in Regulation XX.
A Diploma in Professional Studies will be awarded to students who have satisfactorily completed the programme of study required for Part I.
5.2 Reassessment
Candidates must accumulate at least 60 credits in a Part of a Programme in order to be eligible for reassessment in the relevant Part during the University’s Special Assessment Period.
If a student registers to resit a module, they will be required to resit all failed components of that module (ie if their coursework mark was less than 40% they must resit the coursework and if their exam mark was less than 40% they must resit the exam). If a student resits the coursework element of a module and there was more than 1 coursework assignment for that module, then the student would be required to resit all coursework assignments in which they achieved a mark below 40%. Marks for elements of a module not being re-sat will be carried forward.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
Candidates' final degree classification will be determined on the basis of performance in degree level Module Assessments in Parts B and C in accordance with the scheme set out in Regulation XX of the University Regulations. The average percentage marks for each Part will be combined in the ratio Part B 30% : Part C 70% to determine the final Programme Mark.
Programme Specification
BS BSc (Hons) Business Economics and Finance (2015 entry)
Academic Year: 2017/18
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at 天堂视频 (available soon)
- What makes 天堂视频 programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | 天堂视频 |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | School of Business and Economics |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | |
Final award | BSc / BSc+DPS / BSc+DIntS |
Programme title | Business Economics and Finance |
Programme code | ECUB02 |
Length of programme | The duration of the programme is either six semesters or six semesters plus one academic year if candidates select one of the available part I streams. The third academic year (Part I) occurs between Part B and Part C. Permission to transfer to the eight semester programme will be at the discretion of the Programme Director (Economics). See Programme Structure for further details of eight semester streams. |
UCAS code | L1NK Business Economics and Finance (3 years) LN14 Business Economics and Finance (4 years sandwich) |
Admissions criteria | |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
- To provide specialised training in the aspects of economics particularly relevant to industry, commerce and financial services.
- To provide training in the principles of economics and their application.
- To stimulate students intellectually through the study of economics and to lead them to appreciate its application to a range of problems and its relevance in a variety of contexts.
- To provide a firm foundation of knowledge about the workings of the economy and to develop the relevant skills for the constructive use of that knowledge in a range of settings.
- To develop in students the ability to apply the knowledge and skills they have acquired to the solution of theoretical and applied problems in economics.
- To equip students with appropriate tools of analysis to tackle issues and problems of economic policy.
- To develop in students, through the study of economics, a range of transferable skills that will be of value in employment and self-employment.
- To provide students with analytical skills and an ability to develop simplifying frameworks for studying the real world.
- To develop in students the ability to appreciate what would be an appropriate level of abstraction for a range of economic issues.
- To provide students with the knowledge and skill base, from which they can proceed to further studies in economics, related areas or in multi-disciplinary areas that involve economics.
- To generate in students an appreciation of the economic dimension of wider social and political issues.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
- QAA Subject Benchmark Statements: Economics.
- Framework for Higher Education Qualifications.
- International links with a network of eleven European Universities within the Erasmus exchange programme.
- University Learning and Teaching Strategy.
- Departmental learning and teaching policies.
- Links, both formal and informal, with external examiners.
- Staff research specialisms and professional involvement in the discipline.
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding of:
K1. A coherent core of economic principles. The understanding of these might be verbal, graphical or mathematical.
These principles cover the microeconomic issues of decision and choice, the production and exchange of goods, the interdependency of markets, and economic welfare. They also include macroeconomic issues, such as employment, national income, the balance of payments and the distribution of income, inflation, growth and business cycles, money and finance. The understanding should extend to economic policy at both microeconomic and macroeconomic levels. In all these, students should show understanding of analytical methods and model-based argument and appreciate the existence of different methodological approaches.
K2. Relevant quantitative methods and computing techniques. These cover mathematical and statistical methods, including econometrics. Students will have exposure to the use of such techniques on actual economic, financial or social data. A knowledge and appreciation of economic data, both quantitative and qualitative. Students should also have some knowledge of the appropriate methods that the economist might use to structure and analyse such data.
K3. The applications of economics. Students should have the ability to apply a core of economic principles and reasoning to a variety of applied topics. They should also be aware of the economic principles that can be used to design, guide and interpret commercial, economic and social policy. As part of this, they should have the ability to discuss and analyse government policy and to assess the performance of the UK and other economies.
- Specific applications to financial economics. Students should have the ability to analyse financial markets and the industrial organization of firms.
The above implies that the attainments of students should show:
- Ability to apply core economic theory and economic reasoning to applied topics.
- Ability to relate differences in policy recommendations to differences in the theoretical and empirical features of economic analyses which underlie such recommendations.
- Ability to discuss and analyse government policy and to assess the performance of the UK and other economies.
- Understanding of verbal, graphical, mathematical and econometric representation of economic ideas and analysis, including the relationship between them.
- Understanding of relevant mathematical and statistical techniques.
- Understanding of analytical methods, both theory- and model-based.
- Appreciation of the history and development of economic ideas and the differing methods of analysis that have been and are used by economists.
- Understanding of the appropriate techniques to enable manipulation, treatment and interpretation of the relevant statistical data.
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- Know and understand the core of economic theory and applied economics, with a particular application to the world of business and finance.
- Know and understand the behaviour of agents in financial markets, and the behaviour of firms and consumers in the national and international economy.
- Discuss in an informed manner the major policy directions and regulations to implement economic policy.
- Know and understand the nature of incentives in economic decision making by agents in the economy.
- Evaluate the outcomes of market and policy changes in all spheres of the economy, with special emphasis on business and finance.
More specifically students should be able to demonstrate the following rigorous transferable skills:
C1. Abstraction. From the study of economic principles and models, students see how one can abstract the essential features of complex systems and provide a useable framework for evaluation and assessment of the effects of policy or other exogenous events. Through this, the typical student will acquire proficiency in how to simplify while still retaining relevance. This is an approach that they can then apply in other contexts, thereby becoming more effective problem-solvers and decision-makers.
C2. Analysis, deduction and induction. Economic reasoning is highly deductive, and logical analysis is applied to assumption-based models. However, inductive reasoning is also important. The typical student will have been exposed to some or all of these and be able to use some of them. Such skills also enhance their problem-solving and decision-making ability.
C3. Quantification and design. Data, and their effective organization, presentation and analysis, are important in economics. The typical student will have some familiarity with the principal sources of economic information and data relevant to industry, commerce and government, and have had practice in organising it and presenting it informatively. This skill is important at all stages in the decision-making process.
C4. Framing. Through the study of economics, a student should learn how to decide what should be taken as given or fixed for the purposes of setting up and solving a problem, i.e. what the important 'parameters' are in constraining the solution to the problem. Learning to think about how and why these parameters might change encourages a student to place the economic problem in its broader social and political context. This `framing' skill is important in determining the decision-maker's ability to implement the solutions to problems.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
P1. Construct economic models using verbal, diagrammatic, mathematical, statistical and econometric techniques and reasoning.
P2. Access, search for and evaluate relevant data sources for validation of economic models
P3. Apply and use specialised software including spreadsheets for the analysis of economic models.
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate the key skills of:
T1. Analysis and decision making.
T2. Communication.
T3. Numeracy and computation.
T4. IT, information handling and retrieval, including library skills.
T5. Independent study and group work.
T6. Time management.
T7. Problem solving.
4. Programme structure
Students must have a total modular weighting of 120 credits per year. This must include the compulsory modules. The remaining optional modules may be chosen to give a 60:60 split over the two semesters, or alternatively, 50:70 or 70:50.
The prefixes on module codes represent the credit levels as follows:
A level 4; B level 5; C level 6.
Candidates following the Placement Stream are required to spend the third academic year undertaking professional training leading to the Diploma in Professional Studies, in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
Candidates following the Study Abroad Stream are required to spend the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution leading to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
Candidates following the Split Stream are required to spend six months of the third academic year undertaking professional training, and the other half of the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution. This leads to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
4.1 Part A - Introductory Modules
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTER 1 and 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
ECA001 Principles of Macroeconomics | 20 |
ECA002 Principles of Microeconomics | 20 |
ECA003 Data Analysis I (Semester 1) | 10 |
ECA004 Quantitative Economics | 20 |
ECA005 Data Analysis II (Semester 2) | 10 |
BSA008 Skills for Study and Employment (Semester 2) | 10 |
BSA026 Principles of Law (Semester 2) | 10 |
SEMESTER 1 OPTIONAL MODULES (CHOOSE ONE) | |
BSA505 Organisational Behaviour | 10 |
BSA525 Introduction to Accounting | 10 |
EUA607 Introduction to Democratic Government | 10 |
GYA004 Geographies of Global Economic Change | 10 |
SSA001 Introduction to Sociology A | 10 |
SSA201 Introduction to Criminology and Social Policy A | 10 |
University Wide Languages Programme (see additional form) | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 OPTIONAL MODULES (CHOOSE TWO) | |
BSA506 Management of Human Resources | 10 |
BSA526 Accounting for Managers | 10 |
GYA104 Geographies of Identity | 10 |
SSA002 Introduction to Sociology B | 10 |
SSA202 Introduction to Criminology and Social Policy B | 10 |
University Wide Languages Programme (see additional form) | 10 |
Compulsory and optional modules must be taken such that the total modular weight for the year is 120 credits divided equally over each Semester, or split 70:50 or 50:70 over the two Semesters. Please note: Optional modules are subject to availability and timetable permitting. |
4.2 Part B - Degree Modules
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTERS 1 AND 2 COMPULSORY MODULES: | |
ECB001 Intermediate Macroeconomics | 20 |
ECB002 Intermediate Microeconomics | 20 |
ECB003 Introduction to Econometrics | 20 |
ECB004 Introduction to Financial Economics | 20 |
SEMESTER 1 AND 2 OPTIONAL MODULES | |
ECB005 International Economics Relations | 20 |
ECB015 Economics of the Financial System | 20 |
ECB016 History of Economic Thought | 20 |
ECB030 Energy and the Environment | 20 |
SEMESTER 1 OPTIONAL MODULES | |
ECB136 Transport Economics | 20 |
BSB015 Company Law | 10 |
BSB560 Principles of Marketing | 10 |
BSB580 Operations Management | 10 |
University-Wide Languages Programme | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 OPTIONAL MODULES | |
ECB035 The Economics of Social Issues | 20 |
BSB562 The Marketing Mix | 10 |
University-Wide Languages Programme | 10 |
Compulsory and optional modules must be taken such that the total modular weight for the year is 120 credits divided equally over each Semester, or split 70:50 or 50:70 over the two Semesters. Please note: Optional modules are subject to availability and timetable permitting. |
4.3 Part I : Optional (8 semester programme only)
Candidates pursue one of the following streams:
The duration of the programme is either six semesters or six semesters plus one academic year if candidates select one of the following three streams:
Candidates following the Placement Stream are required to spend the third academic year undertaking professional training leading to the Diploma in Professional Studies, in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
Candidates following the Study Abroad Stream are required to spend the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution leading to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
Candidates following the Split Stream are required to spend six months of the third academic year undertaking professional training, and the other half of the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution. This leads to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
The third academic year (Part I) occurs between Part B and Part C. Permission to transfer to the eight semester programme will be at the discretion of the Associate Dean (Teaching) for the School.
4.4 Part C - Degree Modules
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTER 1 and 2 COMPULSORY MODULES (you must choose at least one) | |
ECC004 Financial Economics and Asset Pricing (Semester 1) | 20 |
ECC141 Corporate Finance and Derivatives (Semester 2) | 20 |
SEMESTER 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
ECC005 Industrial Economics | 20 |
ECC142 Research and Communication Skills for Economists | 20 |
SEMESTER 1 OPTIONAL MODULES | |
ECC001 Developments in Microeconomics | 20 |
ECC003 International Money and Finance | 20 |
ECC031 International Trade | 20 |
ECC038 Applied Econometrics (Semesters 1 and 2) | 20 |
ECC101 Developments in Macroeconomics | 20 |
SEMESTER 2 OPTIONAL MODULES | |
ECC035 Central Banking and Financial Crises | 20 |
ECC119 Development Economics | 20 |
ECC139 Environmental Economics | 20 |
Compulsory and optional modules must be taken such that the total modular weight for the year is 120 credits divided equally over each Semester. Please note: Optional modules are subject to availability and timetable permitting. |
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
5.1 Criteria for Progression
In order to progress from Part A to Part B and from Part B to C and to be eligible for the award of an Honours degree, candidates must satisfy the minimum credit requirements set out in Regulation XX.
A Diploma in Professional Studies will be awarded to students who have satisfactorily completed the programme of study required for Part I.
5.2 Reassessment
Candidates must accumulate at least 60 credits in a Part of a Programme in order to be eligible for reassessment in the relevant Part during the University’s Special Assessment Period.
If a student registers to resit a module, they will be required to resit all failed components of that module (ie if their coursework mark was less than 40% they must resit the coursework and if their exam mark was less than 40% they must resit the exam). If a student resits the coursework element of a module and there was more than 1 coursework assignment for that module, then the student would be required to resit all coursework assignments in which they achieved a mark below 40%. Marks for elements of a module not being re-sat will be carried forward.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
Candidates' final degree classification will be determined on the basis of performance in degree level Module Assessments in Parts B and C in accordance with the scheme set out in Regulation XX of the University Regulations. The average percentage marks for each Part will be combined in the ratio Part B 30% : Part C 70% to determine the final Programme Mark.
Programme Specification
BS BSc (Hons) Business Economics and Finance (2014 entry)
Academic Year: 2017/18
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at 天堂视频 (available soon)
- What makes 天堂视频 programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | 天堂视频 |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | School of Business and Economics |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | |
Final award | BSc / BSc+DPS / BSc+DIntS |
Programme title | Business Economics and Finance |
Programme code | ECUB02 |
Length of programme | The duration of the programme is either six semesters or six semesters plus one academic year if candidates select one of the available part I streams. The third academic year (Part I) occurs between Part B and Part C. Permission to transfer to the eight semester programme will be at the discretion of the Programme Director (Economics). See Programme Structure for further details of eight semester streams. |
UCAS code | L1NK Business Economics and Finance (3 years) LN14 Business Economics and Finance (4 years sandwich) |
Admissions criteria | |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
- To provide specialised training in the aspects of economics particularly relevant to industry, commerce and financial services.
- To provide training in the principles of economics and their application.
- To stimulate students intellectually through the study of economics and to lead them to appreciate its application to a range of problems and its relevance in a variety of contexts.
- To provide a firm foundation of knowledge about the workings of the economy and to develop the relevant skills for the constructive use of that knowledge in a range of settings.
- To develop in students the ability to apply the knowledge and skills they have acquired to the solution of theoretical and applied problems in economics.
- To equip students with appropriate tools of analysis to tackle issues and problems of economic policy.
- To develop in students, through the study of economics, a range of transferable skills that will be of value in employment and self-employment.
- To provide students with analytical skills and an ability to develop simplifying frameworks for studying the real world.
- To develop in students the ability to appreciate what would be an appropriate level of abstraction for a range of economic issues.
- To provide students with the knowledge and skill base, from which they can proceed to further studies in economics, related areas or in multi-disciplinary areas that involve economics.
- To generate in students an appreciation of the economic dimension of wider social and political issues.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
- QAA Subject Benchmark Statements: Economics.
- Framework for Higher Education Qualifications.
- International links with a network of eleven European Universities within the Erasmus exchange programme.
- University Learning and Teaching Strategy.
- Departmental learning and teaching policies.
- Links, both formal and informal, with external examiners.
- Staff research specialisms and professional involvement in the discipline.
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding of:
K1. A coherent core of economic principles. The understanding of these might be verbal, graphical or mathematical.
These principles cover the microeconomic issues of decision and choice, the production and exchange of goods, the interdependency of markets, and economic welfare. They also include macroeconomic issues, such as employment, national income, the balance of payments and the distribution of income, inflation, growth and business cycles, money and finance. The understanding should extend to economic policy at both microeconomic and macroeconomic levels. In all these, students should show understanding of analytical methods and model-based argument and appreciate the existence of different methodological approaches.
K2. Relevant quantitative methods and computing techniques. These cover mathematical and statistical methods, including econometrics. Students will have exposure to the use of such techniques on actual economic, financial or social data. A knowledge and appreciation of economic data, both quantitative and qualitative. Students should also have some knowledge of the appropriate methods that the economist might use to structure and analyse such data.
K3. The applications of economics. Students should have the ability to apply a core of economic principles and reasoning to a variety of applied topics. They should also be aware of the economic principles that can be used to design, guide and interpret commercial, economic and social policy. As part of this, they should have the ability to discuss and analyse government policy and to assess the performance of the UK and other economies.
- Specific applications to financial economics. Students should have the ability to analyse financial markets and the industrial organization of firms.
The above implies that the attainments of students should show:
- Ability to apply core economic theory and economic reasoning to applied topics.
- Ability to relate differences in policy recommendations to differences in the theoretical and empirical features of economic analyses which underlie such recommendations.
- Ability to discuss and analyse government policy and to assess the performance of the UK and other economies.
- Understanding of verbal, graphical, mathematical and econometric representation of economic ideas and analysis, including the relationship between them.
- Understanding of relevant mathematical and statistical techniques.
- Understanding of analytical methods, both theory- and model-based.
- Appreciation of the history and development of economic ideas and the differing methods of analysis that have been and are used by economists.
- Understanding of the appropriate techniques to enable manipulation, treatment and interpretation of the relevant statistical data.
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- Know and understand the core of economic theory and applied economics, with a particular application to the world of business and finance.
- Know and understand the behaviour of agents in financial markets, and the behaviour of firms and consumers in the national and international economy.
- Discuss in an informed manner the major policy directions and regulations to implement economic policy.
- Know and understand the nature of incentives in economic decision making by agents in the economy.
- Evaluate the outcomes of market and policy changes in all spheres of the economy, with special emphasis on business and finance.
More specifically students should be able to demonstrate the following rigorous transferable skills:
C1. Abstraction. From the study of economic principles and models, students see how one can abstract the essential features of complex systems and provide a useable framework for evaluation and assessment of the effects of policy or other exogenous events. Through this, the typical student will acquire proficiency in how to simplify while still retaining relevance. This is an approach that they can then apply in other contexts, thereby becoming more effective problem-solvers and decision-makers.
C2. Analysis, deduction and induction. Economic reasoning is highly deductive, and logical analysis is applied to assumption-based models. However, inductive reasoning is also important. The typical student will have been exposed to some or all of these and be able to use some of them. Such skills also enhance their problem-solving and decision-making ability.
C3. Quantification and design. Data, and their effective organization, presentation and analysis, are important in economics. The typical student will have some familiarity with the principal sources of economic information and data relevant to industry, commerce and government, and have had practice in organising it and presenting it informatively. This skill is important at all stages in the decision-making process.
C4. Framing. Through the study of economics, a student should learn how to decide what should be taken as given or fixed for the purposes of setting up and solving a problem, i.e. what the important 'parameters' are in constraining the solution to the problem. Learning to think about how and why these parameters might change encourages a student to place the economic problem in its broader social and political context. This `framing' skill is important in determining the decision-maker's ability to implement the solutions to problems.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
P1. Construct economic models using verbal, diagrammatic, mathematical, statistical and econometric techniques and reasoning.
P2. Access, search for and evaluate relevant data sources for validation of economic models
P3. Apply and use specialised software including spreadsheets for the analysis of economic models.
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate the key skills of:
T1. Analysis and decision making.
T2. Communication.
T3. Numeracy and computation.
T4. IT, information handling and retrieval, including library skills.
T5. Independent study and group work.
T6. Time management.
T7. Problem solving.
4. Programme structure
Students must have a total modular weighting of 120 credits per year. This must include the compulsory modules. The remaining optional modules may be chosen to give a 60:60 split over the two semesters, or alternatively, 50:70 or 70:50.
The prefixes on module codes represent the credit levels as follows:
A level 4; B level 5; C level 6.
Candidates following the Placement Stream are required to spend the third academic year undertaking professional training leading to the Diploma in Professional Studies, in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
Candidates following the Study Abroad Stream are required to spend the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution leading to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
Candidates following the Split Stream are required to spend six months of the third academic year undertaking professional training, and the other half of the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution. This leads to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
4.1 Part A - Introductory Modules
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTER 1 and 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
ECA001 Principles of Macroeconomics | 20 |
ECA002 Principles of Microeconomics | 20 |
ECA003 Data Analysis | 20 |
ECA004 Quantitative Economics | 20 |
SEMESTER 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSA025 Introduction to Law | 10 |
SEMESTER 1 OPTIONAL MODULES (CHOOSE ONE) | |
BSA505 Organisational Behaviour | 10 |
BSA525 Introduction to Accounting | 10 |
EUA620 The Contemporary World Arena | 10 |
GYA004 Geographies of Global Economic Change | 10 |
SSA001 Introduction to Sociology A | 10 |
SSA201 Introduction to Criminology and Social Policy A | 10 |
University Wide Languages Programme (see additional form) | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 OPTIONAL MODULES (CHOOSE TWO) | |
BSA506 Management of Human Resources | 10 |
BSA526 Accounting for Managers | 10 |
EUA607 Introduction to Democratic Government | 10 |
GYA104 Geographies of Identity | 10 |
SSA002 Introduction to Sociology B | 10 |
SSA202 Introduction to Criminology and Social Policy B | 10 |
University Wide Languages Programme (see additional form) | 10 |
Compulsory and optional modules must be taken such that the total modular weight for the year is 120 credits divided equally over each Semester, or split 70:50 or 50:70 over the two Semesters. Please note: Optional modules are subject to availability and timetable permitting. |
4.2 Part B - Degree Modules
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTERS 1 AND 2 COMPULSORY MODULES: | |
ECB001 Intermediate Macroeconomics | 20 |
ECB002 Intermediate Microeconomics | 20 |
ECB003 Introduction to Econometrics | 20 |
ECB004 Introduction to Finance | 20 |
SEMESTER 1 AND 2 OPTIONAL MODULES | |
ECB005 International Economics Relations | 20 |
ECB015 Economics of the Financial System | 20 |
ECB016 History of Economic Thought | 20 |
ECB030 Energy and the Environment | 20 |
SEMESTER 1 OPTIONAL MODULES (CHOOSE SELECTION) | |
ECB136 Transport Economics | 20 |
BSB015 Company Law | 10 |
BSB560 Principles of Marketing | 10 |
BSB580 Operations Management | 10 |
University Wide Languages Programme | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 OPTIONAL MODULES (CHOOSE SELECTION) | |
ECB035 Economics of the Welfare State | 20 |
BSB522 The Marketing Mix for Sport and Leisure | 10 |
University Wide Languages Programme | 10 |
Compulsory and optional modules must be taken such that the total modular weight for the year is 120 credits divided equally over each Semester, or split 70:50 or 50:70 over the two Semesters. Please note: Optional modules are subject to availability and timetable permitting. |
4.3 Part I : Optional (8 semester programme only)
Candidates pursue one of the following streams:
The duration of the programme is either six semesters or six semesters plus one academic year if candidates select one of the following three streams:
Candidates following the Placement Stream are required to spend the third academic year undertaking professional training leading to the Diploma in Professional Studies, in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
Candidates following the Study Abroad Stream are required to spend the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution leading to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
Candidates following the Split Stream are required to spend six months of the third academic year undertaking professional training, and the other half of the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution. This leads to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
The third academic year (Part I) occurs between Part B and Part C. Permission to transfer to the eight semester programme will be at the discretion of the Associate Dean (Teaching) for the School.
4.4 Part C - Degree Modules
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTER 1 and 2 COMPULSORY MODULES (you must choose at least one) | |
ECC004 Financial Economics and Asset Pricing (Semester 1) | 20 |
ECC141 Corporate Finance and Derivatives (Semester 2) | 20 |
SEMESTER 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
ECC005 Industrial Economics | 20 |
ECC142 Research and Communication Skills for Economists | 20 |
SEMESTER 1 OPTIONAL MODULES | |
ECC001 Developments in Microeconomics | 20 |
ECC003 International Money and Finance | 20 |
ECC031 International Trade | 20 |
ECC038 Applied Econometrics (Semesters 1 and 2) | 20 |
ECC101 Developments in Macroeconomics | 20 |
SEMESTER 2 OPTIONAL MODULES | |
ECC035 Central Banking and Financial Crises | 20 |
ECC119 Development Economics | 20 |
ECC139 Environmental Economics | 20 |
Compulsory and optional modules must be taken such that the total modular weight for the year is 120 credits divided equally over each Semester. Please note: Optional modules are subject to availability and timetable permitting. |
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
5.1 Criteria for Progression
In order to progress from Part A to Part B and from Part B to C and to be eligible for the award of an Honours degree, candidates must satisfy the minimum credit requirements set out in Regulation XX.
A Diploma in Professional Studies will be awarded to students who have satisfactorily completed the programme of study required for Part I.
5.2 Reassessment
Candidates must accumulate at least 60 credits in a Part of a Programme in order to be eligible for reassessment in the relevant Part during the University’s Special Assessment Period.
If a student registers to resit a module, they will be required to resit all failed components of that module (ie if their coursework mark was less than 40% they must resit the coursework and if their exam mark was less than 40% they must resit the exam). If a student resits the coursework element of a module and there was more than 1 coursework assignment for that module, then the student would be required to resit all coursework assignments in which they achieved a mark below 40%. Marks for elements of a module not being re-sat will be carried forward.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
Candidates' final degree classification will be determined on the basis of performance in degree level Module Assessments in Parts B and C in accordance with the scheme set out in Regulation XX of the University Regulations. The average percentage marks for each Part will be combined in the ratio Part B 30% : Part C 70% to determine the final Programme Mark.
Programme Specification
BS BSc (Hons) Business Economics and Finance (2013 entry)
Academic Year: 2017/18
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at 天堂视频 (available soon)
- What makes 天堂视频 programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | 天堂视频 |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | School of Business and Economics |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | |
Final award | BSc / BSc+DPS / BSc+DIntS |
Programme title | Business Economics and Finance |
Programme code | ECUB02 |
Length of programme | The duration of the programme is either six semesters or six semesters plus one academic year if candidates select one of the available part I streams. The third academic year (Part I) occurs between Part B and Part C. Permission to transfer to the eight semester programme will be at the discretion of the Programme Director (Economics). See Programme Structure for further details of eight semester streams. |
UCAS code | L1NK Business Economics and Finance (3 years) LN14 Business Economics and Finance (4 years sandwich) |
Admissions criteria | |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
- To provide specialised training in the aspects of economics particularly relevant to industry, commerce and financial services.
- To provide training in the principles of economics and their application.
- To stimulate students intellectually through the study of economics and to lead them to appreciate its application to a range of problems and its relevance in a variety of contexts.
- To provide a firm foundation of knowledge about the workings of the economy and to develop the relevant skills for the constructive use of that knowledge in a range of settings.
- To develop in students the ability to apply the knowledge and skills they have acquired to the solution of theoretical and applied problems in economics.
- To equip students with appropriate tools of analysis to tackle issues and problems of economic policy.
- To develop in students, through the study of economics, a range of transferable skills that will be of value in employment and self-employment.
- To provide students with analytical skills and an ability to develop simplifying frameworks for studying the real world.
- To develop in students the ability to appreciate what would be an appropriate level of abstraction for a range of economic issues.
- To provide students with the knowledge and skill base, from which they can proceed to further studies in economics, related areas or in multi-disciplinary areas that involve economics.
- To generate in students an appreciation of the economic dimension of wider social and political issues.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
- QAA Subject Benchmark Statements: Economics.
- Framework for Higher Education Qualifications.
- International links with a network of eleven European Universities within the Erasmus exchange programme.
- University Learning and Teaching Strategy.
- Departmental learning and teaching policies.
- Links, both formal and informal, with external examiners.
- Staff research specialisms and professional involvement in the discipline.
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding of:
K1. A coherent core of economic principles. The understanding of these might be verbal, graphical or mathematical.
These principles cover the microeconomic issues of decision and choice, the production and exchange of goods, the interdependency of markets, and economic welfare. They also include macroeconomic issues, such as employment, national income, the balance of payments and the distribution of income, inflation, growth and business cycles, money and finance. The understanding should extend to economic policy at both microeconomic and macroeconomic levels. In all these, students should show understanding of analytical methods and model-based argument and appreciate the existence of different methodological approaches.
K2. Relevant quantitative methods and computing techniques. These cover mathematical and statistical methods, including econometrics. Students will have exposure to the use of such techniques on actual economic, financial or social data. A knowledge and appreciation of economic data, both quantitative and qualitative. Students should also have some knowledge of the appropriate methods that the economist might use to structure and analyse such data.
K3. The applications of economics. Students should have the ability to apply a core of economic principles and reasoning to a variety of applied topics. They should also be aware of the economic principles that can be used to design, guide and interpret commercial, economic and social policy. As part of this, they should have the ability to discuss and analyse government policy and to assess the performance of the UK and other economies.
- Specific applications to financial economics. Students should have the ability to analyse financial markets and the industrial organization of firms.
The above implies that the attainments of students should show:
- Ability to apply core economic theory and economic reasoning to applied topics.
- Ability to relate differences in policy recommendations to differences in the theoretical and empirical features of economic analyses which underlie such recommendations.
- Ability to discuss and analyse government policy and to assess the performance of the UK and other economies.
- Understanding of verbal, graphical, mathematical and econometric representation of economic ideas and analysis, including the relationship between them.
- Understanding of relevant mathematical and statistical techniques.
- Understanding of analytical methods, both theory- and model-based.
- Appreciation of the history and development of economic ideas and the differing methods of analysis that have been and are used by economists.
- Understanding of the appropriate techniques to enable manipulation, treatment and interpretation of the relevant statistical data.
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- Know and understand the core of economic theory and applied economics, with a particular application to the world of business and finance.
- Know and understand the behaviour of agents in financial markets, and the behaviour of firms and consumers in the national and international economy.
- Discuss in an informed manner the major policy directions and regulations to implement economic policy.
- Know and understand the nature of incentives in economic decision making by agents in the economy.
- Evaluate the outcomes of market and policy changes in all spheres of the economy, with special emphasis on business and finance.
More specifically students should be able to demonstrate the following rigorous transferable skills:
C1. Abstraction. From the study of economic principles and models, students see how one can abstract the essential features of complex systems and provide a useable framework for evaluation and assessment of the effects of policy or other exogenous events. Through this, the typical student will acquire proficiency in how to simplify while still retaining relevance. This is an approach that they can then apply in other contexts, thereby becoming more effective problem-solvers and decision-makers.
C2. Analysis, deduction and induction. Economic reasoning is highly deductive, and logical analysis is applied to assumption-based models. However, inductive reasoning is also important. The typical student will have been exposed to some or all of these and be able to use some of them. Such skills also enhance their problem-solving and decision-making ability.
C3. Quantification and design. Data, and their effective organization, presentation and analysis, are important in economics. The typical student will have some familiarity with the principal sources of economic information and data relevant to industry, commerce and government, and have had practice in organising it and presenting it informatively. This skill is important at all stages in the decision-making process.
C4. Framing. Through the study of economics, a student should learn how to decide what should be taken as given or fixed for the purposes of setting up and solving a problem, i.e. what the important 'parameters' are in constraining the solution to the problem. Learning to think about how and why these parameters might change encourages a student to place the economic problem in its broader social and political context. This `framing' skill is important in determining the decision-maker's ability to implement the solutions to problems.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
P1. Construct economic models using verbal, diagrammatic, mathematical, statistical and econometric techniques and reasoning.
P2. Access, search for and evaluate relevant data sources for validation of economic models
P3. Apply and use specialised software including spreadsheets for the analysis of economic models.
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate the key skills of:
T1. Analysis and decision making.
T2. Communication.
T3. Numeracy and computation.
T4. IT, information handling and retrieval, including library skills.
T5. Independent study and group work.
T6. Time management.
T7. Problem solving.
4. Programme structure
Students must have a total modular weighting of 120 credits per year. This must include the compulsory modules. The remaining optional modules may be chosen to give a 60:60 split over the two semesters, or alternatively, 50:70 or 70:50.
The prefixes on module codes represent the credit levels as follows:
A level 4; B level 5; C level 6.
Candidates following the Placement Stream are required to spend the third academic year undertaking professional training leading to the Diploma in Professional Studies, in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
Candidates following the Study Abroad Stream are required to spend the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution leading to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
Candidates following the Split Stream are required to spend six months of the third academic year undertaking professional training, and the other half of the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution. This leads to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
4.1 Part A - Introductory Modules
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTER 1 and 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
ECA001 Principles of Macroeconomics | 20 |
ECA002 Principles of Microeconomics | 20 |
ECA003 Data Analysis | 20 |
ECA004 Quantitative Economics | 20 |
SEMESTER 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSA025 Introduction to Law | 10 |
SEMESTER 1 OPTIONAL MODULES (CHOOSE ONE) | |
BSA505 Organisational Behaviour | 10 |
BSA525 Introduction to Accounting | 10 |
EUA620 The Contemporary World Arena | 10 |
GYA004 Geographies of Global Economic Change | 10 |
SSA001 Introduction to Sociology A | 10 |
SSA201 Introduction to Criminology and Social Policy A | 10 |
University Wide Languages Programme (see additional form) | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 OPTIONAL MODULES (CHOOSE TWO) | |
BSA506 Management of Human Resources | 10 |
BSA526 Accounting for Managers | 10 |
EUA607 Introduction to Democratic Government | 10 |
GYA104 Geographies of Identity | 10 |
SSA002 Introduction to Sociology B | 10 |
SSA202 Introduction to Criminology and Social Policy B | 10 |
University Wide Languages Programme (see additional form) | 10 |
Compulsory and optional modules must be taken such that the total modular weight for the year is 120 credits divided equally over each Semester, or split 70:50 or 50:70 over the two Semesters. Please note: Optional modules are subject to availability and timetable permitting. |
4.2 Part B - Degree Modules
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTERS 1 AND 2 COMPULSORY MODULES: | |
ECB001 Intermediate Macroeconomics | 20 |
ECB002 Intermediate Microeconomics | 20 |
ECB003 Introduction to Econometrics | 20 |
ECB004 Introduction to Finance | 20 |
SEMESTER 1 AND 2 OPTIONAL MODULES | |
ECB005 International Economics Relations | 20 |
ECB015 Economics of the Financial System | 20 |
ECB016 History of Economic Thought | 20 |
ECB030 Energy and the Environment | 20 |
SEMESTER 1 OPTIONAL MODULES (CHOOSE SELECTION) | |
ECB136 Transport Economics | 20 |
BSB015 Company Law | 10 |
BSB560 Principles of Marketing | 10 |
BSB580 Operations Management | 10 |
University Wide Languages Programme | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 OPTIONAL MODULES (CHOOSE SELECTION) | |
ECB035 Economics of the Welfare State | 20 |
BSB522 The Marketing Mix for Sport and Leisure | 10 |
University Wide Languages Programme | 10 |
Compulsory and optional modules must be taken such that the total modular weight for the year is 120 credits divided equally over each Semester, or split 70:50 or 50:70 over the two Semesters. Please note: Optional modules are subject to availability and timetable permitting. |
4.3 Part I : Optional (8 semester programme only)
Candidates pursue one of the following streams:
The duration of the programme is either six semesters or six semesters plus one academic year if candidates select one of the following three streams:
Candidates following the Placement Stream are required to spend the third academic year undertaking professional training leading to the Diploma in Professional Studies, in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
Candidates following the Study Abroad Stream are required to spend the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution leading to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
Candidates following the Split Stream are required to spend six months of the third academic year undertaking professional training, and the other half of the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution. This leads to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
The third academic year (Part I) occurs between Part B and Part C. Permission to transfer to the eight semester programme will be at the discretion of the Associate Dean (Teaching) for the School.
4.4 Part C - Degree Modules
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTER 1 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
ECC004 Financial Economics and Asset Pricing | 20 |
SEMESTER 1 OPTIONAL MODULES | |
ECC001 Developments in Microeconomics | 20 |
ECC003 International Money and Finance | 20 |
ECC031 International Trade | 20 |
ECC038 Applied Econometrics (Semesters 1 and 2) | 20 |
ECC101 Developments in Macroeconomics | 20 |
SEMESTER 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
ECC005 Industrial Economics | 20 |
ECC141 Corporate Finance and Derivatives | 20 |
ECC142 Research and Communication Skills for Economists | 20 |
Compulsory and optional modules must be taken such that the total modular weight for the year is 120 credits divided equally over each Semester. Please note: Optional modules are subject to availability and timetable permitting. |
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
5.1 Criteria for Progression
In order to progress from Part A to Part B and from Part B to C and to be eligible for the award of an Honours degree, candidates must satisfy the minimum credit requirements set out in Regulation XX.
A Diploma in Professional Studies will be awarded to students who have satisfactorily completed the programme of study required for Part I.
5.2 Reassessment
Candidates must accumulate at least 60 credits in a Part of a Programme in order to be eligible for reassessment in the relevant Part during the University’s Special Assessment Period.
If a student registers to resit a module, they will be required to resit all failed components of that module (ie if their coursework mark was less than 40% they must resit the coursework and if their exam mark was less than 40% they must resit the exam). If a student resits the coursework element of a module and there was more than 1 coursework assignment for that module, then the student would be required to resit all coursework assignments in which they achieved a mark below 40%. Marks for elements of a module not being re-sat will be carried forward.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
Candidates' final degree classification will be determined on the basis of performance in degree level Module Assessments in Parts B and C in accordance with the scheme set out in Regulation XX of the University Regulations. The average percentage marks for each Part will be combined in the ratio Part B 30% : Part C 70% to determine the final Programme Mark.
Programme Specification
BS BSc (Hons) International Economics (2017 entry)
Academic Year: 2017/18
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at 天堂视频 (available soon)
- What makes 天堂视频 programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | 天堂视频 |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | School of Business and Economics |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | |
Final award | BSc (Hons) / BSc+DPS / BSc+DInts |
Programme title | International Economics |
Programme code | ECUB03 |
Length of programme | The duration of the programme is either six semesters or six semesters plus one academic year if candidates select one of the available part I streams. The third academic year (Part I) occurs between Part B and Part C. Permission to transfer to the eight semester programme will be at the discretion of the Programme Director (Economics). See Programme Structure for further details of eight semester streams. |
UCAS code | L115 International Economics (3 years) L110 International Economics (4 years sandwich) |
Admissions criteria | http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/undergraduate/courses/departments/business-economics/internationaleconomics/ |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- Know and understand the core of economic theory and applied economics, with a particular application to the international setting.
- Know and understand the behaviour of agents firms and consumers in the national and international economy
- Discuss in an informed manner the major policy directions and regulations for the implementation of economic policy
- Know and understand the nature of incentives in economic decision-making by agents in the economy
- Evaluate the outcomes of market and policy changes in all spheres of the economy, with special emphasis on international economics.
- To provide specialised training in the aspects of economics relevant to the international economy including trade, finance and development.
- To provide training in the principles of economics and their application.
- To stimulate students intellectually through the study of economics and to lead them to appreciate its application to a range of problems and its relevance in a variety of contexts.
- To provide a firm foundation of knowledge about the workings of the economy and to develop the relevant skills for the constructive use of that knowledge in a range of settings.
- To develop in students the ability to apply the knowledge and skills they have acquired to the solution of theoretical and applied problems in economics.
- To equip students with appropriate tools of analysis to tackle issues and problems of economic policy.
- To develop in students, through the study of economics, a range of transferable skills that will be of value in employment and self-employment.
- To provide students with analytical skills and an ability to develop simplifying frameworks for studying the real world.
- To develop in students the ability to appreciate what would be an appropriate level of abstraction for a range of economic issues.
- To provide students with the knowledge and skill base, from which they can proceed to further studies in economics, related areas or in multi-disciplinary areas that involve economics.
- To generate in students an appreciation of the economic dimension of wider social and political issues.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
- QAA Subject Benchmark Statements: Economics.
- Framework for Higher Education Qualifications.
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding of:
K1. A coherent core of economic principles. The understanding of these might be verbal, graphical or mathematical.
These principles cover the microeconomic issues of decision and choice, the production and exchange of goods, the interdependency of markets, and economic welfare. They also include macroeconomic issues, such as employment, national income, the balance of payments and the distribution of income, inflation, growth and business cycles, money and finance. The understanding should extend to economic policy at both microeconomic and macroeconomic levels. In all these, students should show understanding of analytical methods and model-based argument and appreciate the existence of different methodological approaches.
K2. Relevant quantitative methods and computing techniques. These cover mathematical and statistical methods, including econometrics. Students will have exposure to the use of such techniques on actual economic, financial or social data. A knowledge and appreciation of economic data, both quantitative and qualitative. Students should also have some knowledge of the appropriate methods that the economist might use to structure and analyse such data.
K3. The applications of economics. Students should have the ability to apply a core of economic principles and reasoning to a variety of applied topics. They should also be aware of the economic principles that can be used to design, guide and interpret commercial, economic and social policy. As part of this, they should have the ability to discuss and analyse government policy and to assess the performance of the UK and other economies.
The above implies that the attainments of students should show:
- Ability to apply core economic theory and economic reasoning to applied topics.
- Ability to relate differences in policy recommendations to differences in the theoretical and empirical features of economic analyses which underlie such recommendations.
- Ability to discuss and analyse government policy and to assess the performance of the UK and other economies.
- Understanding of verbal, graphical, mathematical and econometric representation of economic ideas and analysis, including the relationship between them.
- Understanding of relevant mathematical and statistical techniques.
- Understanding of analytical methods, both theory- and model-based.
- Appreciation of the history and development of economic ideas and the differing methods of analysis that have been and are used by economists.
- Understanding of the appropriate techniques to enable manipulation, treatment and interpretation of the relevant statistical data.
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
C1. Abstraction. From the study of economic principles and models, students see how one can abstract the essential features of complex systems and provide a useable framework for evaluation and assessment of the effects of policy or other exogenous events. Through this, the typical student will acquire proficiency in how to simplify while still retaining relevance. This is an approach that they can then apply in other contexts, thereby becoming more effective problem-solvers and decision-makers.
C2. Analysis, deduction and induction. Economic reasoning is highly deductive, and logical analysis is applied to assumption-based models. However, inductive reasoning is also important. The typical student will have been exposed to some or all of these and be able to use some of them. Such skills also enhance their problem-solving and decision-making ability.
C3. Quantification and design. Data, and their effective organization, presentation and analysis, are important in economics. The typical student will have some familiarity with the principal sources of economic information and data relevant to industry, commerce and government, and have had practice in organising it and presenting it informatively. This skill is important at all stages in the decision-making process.
C4. Framing. Through the study of economics, a student should learn how to decide what should be taken as given or fixed for the purposes of setting up and solving a problem, i.e. what the important 'parameters' are in constraining the solution to the problem. Learning to think about how and why these parameters might change encourages a student to place the economic problem in its broader social and political context. This `framing' skill is important in determining the decision-maker's ability to implement the solutions to problems.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
P1. Construct economic models using verbal, diagrammatic, mathematical, statistical and econometric techniques and reasoning.
P2. Access, search for and evaluate relevant data sources for validation of economic models.
P3. Apply and use specialised software including spreadsheets for the analysis of economic models.
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate the key skills of:
T1. Analysis and decision making.
T2. Communication.
T3. Numeracy and computation.
T4. IT, information handling and retrieval, including library skills.
T5. Independent study and group work.
T6. Time management.
T7. Problem solving.
4. Programme structure
Students must have a total modular weighting of 120 credits per year. This must include the compulsory modules. The remaining optional modules may be chosen to give a 60:60 split over the two semesters, or alternatively, 50:70 or 70:50.
The prefixes on module codes represent the credit levels as follows:
A level 4; B level 5; C level 6.
Candidates following the Placement Stream are required to spend the third academic year undertaking professional training leading to the Diploma in Professional Studies, in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
Candidates following the Study Abroad Stream are required to spend the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution leading to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
Candidates following the Split Stream are required to spend six months of the third academic year undertaking professional training, and the other half of the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution. This leads to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
4.1 Part A - Introductory Modules
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTER 1 and 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
ECA001 Principles of Macroeconomics | 20 |
ECA002 Principles of Microeconomics | 20 |
ECA003 Data Analysis I (Semester 1) | 10 |
ECA004 Quantitative Economics | 20 |
ECA005 Data Analysis II (Semester 2) | 10 |
BSA008 Skills for Study and Employment (Semester 2) | 10 |
SEMESTER 1 OPTIONAL MODULES | |
BSA505 Organisational Behaviour | 10 |
BSA525 Introduction to Accounting | 10 |
EUA607 Introduction to Democratic Government | 10 |
GYA002 Geographies of Global Economic Change | 20 |
SSA001 Introduction to Sociology A | 10 |
SSA201 Introduction to Criminology and Social Policy A | 10 |
University Wide Languages Programme (see additional form) | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 OPTIONAL MODULES | |
BSA026 Principles of Law | 10 |
BSA506 Management of Human Resources | 10 |
EUA614 Political Ideologies | 10 |
GYA104 Geographies of Identity | 10 |
SSA002 Introduction to Sociology B | 10 |
SSA202 Introduction to Criminology and Social Policy B | 10 |
University Wide Languages Programme (see additional form) | 10 |
Compulsory and optional modules must be taken such that the total modular weight for the year is 120 credits divided equally over each Semester, or split 70:50 or 50:70 over the two Semesters. Please note: Optional modules are subject to availability and timetable permitting. |
4.2 Part B - Degree Modules
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTER 1 and 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
ECB001 Intermediate Macroeconomics | 20 |
ECB002 Intermediate Microeconomics | 20 |
ECB003 Introduction to Econometrics | 20 |
ECB005 International Economic Relations | 20 |
SEMESTER 1 and 2 OPTIONAL MODULES | |
ECB004 Introduction to Financial Economics | 20 |
ECB015 Economics of the Financial System | 20 |
ECB016 History of Economic Thought | 20 |
SEMESTER 1 OPTIONAL MODULES | |
BSB560 Principles of Marketing | 10 |
BSB580 Operations Management | 10 |
ECB136 Transport Economics | 20 |
University Wide Languages Programme | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 OPTIONAL MODULES | |
BSB532 Accounting for Managers | 10 |
BSB562 The Marketing Mix | 10 |
ECB035 The Economics of Social Issues | 20 |
University Wide Languages Programme | 10 |
Compulsory and optional modules must be taken such that the total modular weight for the year is 120 credits divided equally over each Semester, or split 70:50 or 50:70 over the two Semesters. Please note: Optional modules are subject to availability and timetable permitting. |
4.3 Part I : Optional (8 semester programme only)
Candidates pursue one of the following streams:
The duration of the programme is either six semesters or six semesters plus one academic year if candidates select one of the following three streams:
Candidates following the Placement Stream are required to spend the third academic year undertaking professional training leading to the Diploma in Professional Studies, in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
Candidates following the Study Abroad Stream are required to spend the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution leading to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
Candidates following the Split Stream are required to spend six months of the third academic year undertaking professional training, and the other half of the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution. This leads to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
The third academic year (Part I) occurs between Part B and Part C. Permission to transfer to the eight semester programme will be at the discretion of the Associate Dean (Teaching) for the School.
4.4 Part C - Degree Modules
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTER 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
ECC142 Research and Communication Skills for Economists | 20 |
SEMESTER 1 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
ECC003 International Money and Finance | 20 |
ECC031 International Trade | 20 |
SEMESTER 1 and 2 OPTIONAL MODULES | |
ECC038 Applied Econometrics | 20 |
SEMESTER 1 OPTIONAL MODULES | |
ECC001 Developments in Microeconomics | 20 |
ECC004 Financial Economics and Asset Pricing | 20 |
ECC101 Developments in Macroeconomics | 20 |
SEMESTER 2 OPTIONAL MODULES | |
ECC005 Industrial Economics | 20 |
ECC035 Central Banking and Economic Crises | 20 |
ECC119 Development Economics (Semester 2) | 20 |
ECC139 Environmental Economics | 20 |
ECC141 Corporate Finance and Derivatives | 20 |
Compulsory and optional modules must be taken such that the total modular weight for the year is 120 credits divided equally over each Semester. Please note: Optional modules are subject to availability and timetable permitting. |
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
5.1 Progression Criteria
In order to progress from Part A to Part B and from Part B to C and to be eligible for the award of an Honours degree, candidates must satisfy the minimum credit requirements set out in Regulation XX.
A Diploma in Professional Studies will be awarded to students who have satisfactorily completed the programme of study required for Part I.
5.2 Reassessment
Candidates must accumulate at least 60 credits in a Part of a Programme in order to be eligible for reassessment in the relevant Part during the University’s Special Assessment Period.
If a student registers to resit a module, they will be required to resit all failed components of that module (ie if their coursework mark was less than 40% they must resit the coursework and if their exam mark was less than 40% they must resit the exam). If a student resits the coursework element of a module and there was more than 1 coursework assignment for that module, then the student would be required to resit all coursework assignments in which they achieved a mark below 40%. Marks for elements of a module not being re-sat will be carried forward.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
Candidates' final degree classification will be determined on the basis of performance in degree level Module Assessments in Parts B and C in accordance with the scheme set out in Regulation XX of the University Regulations. The average percentage marks for each Part will be combined in the ratio Part B 30% : Part C 70% to determine the final Programme Mark.
Programme Specification
BS BSc (Hons) International Economics (2016 entry)
Academic Year: 2017/18
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at 天堂视频 (available soon)
- What makes 天堂视频 programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | 天堂视频 |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | School of Business and Economics |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | |
Final award | BSc (Hons) / BSc+DPS / BSc+DInts |
Programme title | International Economics |
Programme code | ECUB03 |
Length of programme | The duration of the programme is either six semesters or six semesters plus one academic year if candidates select one of the available part I streams. The third academic year (Part I) occurs between Part B and Part C. Permission to transfer to the eight semester programme will be at the discretion of the Programme Director (Economics). See Programme Structure for further details of eight semester streams. |
UCAS code | L115 International Economics (3 years) L110 International Economics (4 years sandwich) |
Admissions criteria | http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/undergraduate/courses/departments/business-economics/internationaleconomics/ |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- Know and understand the core of economic theory and applied economics, with a particular application to the international setting.
- Know and understand the behaviour of agents firms and consumers in the national and international economy
- Discuss in an informed manner the major policy directions and regulations for the implementation of economic policy
- Know and understand the nature of incentives in economic decision-making by agents in the economy
- Evaluate the outcomes of market and policy changes in all spheres of the economy, with special emphasis on international economics.
- To provide specialised training in the aspects of economics relevant to the international economy including trade, finance and development.
- To provide training in the principles of economics and their application.
- To stimulate students intellectually through the study of economics and to lead them to appreciate its application to a range of problems and its relevance in a variety of contexts.
- To provide a firm foundation of knowledge about the workings of the economy and to develop the relevant skills for the constructive use of that knowledge in a range of settings.
- To develop in students the ability to apply the knowledge and skills they have acquired to the solution of theoretical and applied problems in economics.
- To equip students with appropriate tools of analysis to tackle issues and problems of economic policy.
- To develop in students, through the study of economics, a range of transferable skills that will be of value in employment and self-employment.
- To provide students with analytical skills and an ability to develop simplifying frameworks for studying the real world.
- To develop in students the ability to appreciate what would be an appropriate level of abstraction for a range of economic issues.
- To provide students with the knowledge and skill base, from which they can proceed to further studies in economics, related areas or in multi-disciplinary areas that involve economics.
- To generate in students an appreciation of the economic dimension of wider social and political issues.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
- QAA Subject Benchmark Statements: Economics.
- Framework for Higher Education Qualifications.
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding of:
K1. A coherent core of economic principles. The understanding of these might be verbal, graphical or mathematical.
These principles cover the microeconomic issues of decision and choice, the production and exchange of goods, the interdependency of markets, and economic welfare. They also include macroeconomic issues, such as employment, national income, the balance of payments and the distribution of income, inflation, growth and business cycles, money and finance. The understanding should extend to economic policy at both microeconomic and macroeconomic levels. In all these, students should show understanding of analytical methods and model-based argument and appreciate the existence of different methodological approaches.
K2. Relevant quantitative methods and computing techniques. These cover mathematical and statistical methods, including econometrics. Students will have exposure to the use of such techniques on actual economic, financial or social data. A knowledge and appreciation of economic data, both quantitative and qualitative. Students should also have some knowledge of the appropriate methods that the economist might use to structure and analyse such data.
K3. The applications of economics. Students should have the ability to apply a core of economic principles and reasoning to a variety of applied topics. They should also be aware of the economic principles that can be used to design, guide and interpret commercial, economic and social policy. As part of this, they should have the ability to discuss and analyse government policy and to assess the performance of the UK and other economies.
The above implies that the attainments of students should show:
- Ability to apply core economic theory and economic reasoning to applied topics.
- Ability to relate differences in policy recommendations to differences in the theoretical and empirical features of economic analyses which underlie such recommendations.
- Ability to discuss and analyse government policy and to assess the performance of the UK and other economies.
- Understanding of verbal, graphical, mathematical and econometric representation of economic ideas and analysis, including the relationship between them.
- Understanding of relevant mathematical and statistical techniques.
- Understanding of analytical methods, both theory- and model-based.
- Appreciation of the history and development of economic ideas and the differing methods of analysis that have been and are used by economists.
- Understanding of the appropriate techniques to enable manipulation, treatment and interpretation of the relevant statistical data.
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
C1. Abstraction. From the study of economic principles and models, students see how one can abstract the essential features of complex systems and provide a useable framework for evaluation and assessment of the effects of policy or other exogenous events. Through this, the typical student will acquire proficiency in how to simplify while still retaining relevance. This is an approach that they can then apply in other contexts, thereby becoming more effective problem-solvers and decision-makers.
C2. Analysis, deduction and induction. Economic reasoning is highly deductive, and logical analysis is applied to assumption-based models. However, inductive reasoning is also important. The typical student will have been exposed to some or all of these and be able to use some of them. Such skills also enhance their problem-solving and decision-making ability.
C3. Quantification and design. Data, and their effective organization, presentation and analysis, are important in economics. The typical student will have some familiarity with the principal sources of economic information and data relevant to industry, commerce and government, and have had practice in organising it and presenting it informatively. This skill is important at all stages in the decision-making process.
C4. Framing. Through the study of economics, a student should learn how to decide what should be taken as given or fixed for the purposes of setting up and solving a problem, i.e. what the important 'parameters' are in constraining the solution to the problem. Learning to think about how and why these parameters might change encourages a student to place the economic problem in its broader social and political context. This `framing' skill is important in determining the decision-maker's ability to implement the solutions to problems.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
P1. Construct economic models using verbal, diagrammatic, mathematical, statistical and econometric techniques and reasoning.
P2. Access, search for and evaluate relevant data sources for validation of economic models.
P3. Apply and use specialised software including spreadsheets for the analysis of economic models.
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate the key skills of:
T1. Analysis and decision making.
T2. Communication.
T3. Numeracy and computation.
T4. IT, information handling and retrieval, including library skills.
T5. Independent study and group work.
T6. Time management.
T7. Problem solving.
4. Programme structure
Students must have a total modular weighting of 120 credits per year. This must include the compulsory modules. The remaining optional modules may be chosen to give a 60:60 split over the two semesters, or alternatively, 50:70 or 70:50.
The prefixes on module codes represent the credit levels as follows:
A level 4; B level 5; C level 6.
Candidates following the Placement Stream are required to spend the third academic year undertaking professional training leading to the Diploma in Professional Studies, in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
Candidates following the Study Abroad Stream are required to spend the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution leading to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
Candidates following the Split Stream are required to spend six months of the third academic year undertaking professional training, and the other half of the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution. This leads to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
4.1 Part A - Introductory Modules
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTER 1 and 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
ECA001 Principles of Macroeconomics | 20 |
ECA002 Principles of Microeconomics | 20 |
ECA003 Data Analysis I (Semester 1) | 10 |
ECA004 Quantitative Economics | 20 |
ECA005 Data Analysis II (Semester 2) | 10 |
BSA008 Skills for Study and Employment (Semester 2) | 10 |
SEMESTER 1 OPTIONAL MODULES | |
BSA505 Organisational Behaviour | 10 |
BSA525 Introduction to Accounting | 10 |
EUA607 Introduction to Democratic Government | 10 |
GYA002 Geographies of Global Economic Change | 20 |
SSA001 Introduction to Sociology A | 10 |
SSA201 Introduction to Criminology and Social Policy A | 10 |
University Wide Languages Programme (see additional form) | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 OPTIONAL MODULES | |
BSA026 Principles of Law | 10 |
BSA506 Management of Human Resources | 10 |
EUA614 Political Ideologies | 10 |
GYA104 Geographies of Identity | 10 |
SSA002 Introduction to Sociology B | 10 |
SSA202 Introduction to Criminology and Social Policy B | 10 |
University Wide Languages Programme (see additional form) | 10 |
Compulsory and optional modules must be taken such that the total modular weight for the year is 120 credits divided equally over each Semester, or split 70:50 or 50:70 over the two Semesters. Please note: Optional modules are subject to availability and timetable permitting. |
4.2 Part B - Degree Modules
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTER 1 and 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
ECB001 Intermediate Macroeconomics | 20 |
ECB002 Intermediate Microeconomics | 20 |
ECB003 Introduction to Econometrics | 20 |
ECB005 International Economic Relations | 20 |
SEMESTER 1 and 2 OPTIONAL MODULES | |
ECB004 Introduction to Financial Economics | 20 |
ECB015 Economics of the Financial System | 20 |
ECB016 History of Economic Thought | 20 |
SEMESTER 1 OPTIONAL MODULES | |
BSB560 Principles of Marketing | 10 |
BSB580 Operations Management | 10 |
ECB136 Transport Economics | 20 |
University Wide Languages Programme | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 OPTIONAL MODULES | |
BSB532 Accounting for Managers | 10 |
BSB562 The Marketing Mix | 10 |
ECB035 The Economics of Social Issues | 20 |
University Wide Languages Programme | 10 |
Compulsory and optional modules must be taken such that the total modular weight for the year is 120 credits divided equally over each Semester, or split 70:50 or 50:70 over the two Semesters. Please note: Optional modules are subject to availability and timetable permitting. |
4.3 Part I : Optional (8 semester programme only)
Candidates pursue one of the following streams:
The duration of the programme is either six semesters or six semesters plus one academic year if candidates select one of the following three streams:
Candidates following the Placement Stream are required to spend the third academic year undertaking professional training leading to the Diploma in Professional Studies, in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
Candidates following the Study Abroad Stream are required to spend the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution leading to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
Candidates following the Split Stream are required to spend six months of the third academic year undertaking professional training, and the other half of the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution. This leads to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
The third academic year (Part I) occurs between Part B and Part C. Permission to transfer to the eight semester programme will be at the discretion of the Associate Dean (Teaching) for the School.
4.4 Part C - Degree Modules
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTER 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
ECC142 Research and Communication Skills for Economists | 20 |
SEMESTER 1 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
ECC003 International Money and Finance | 20 |
ECC031 International Trade | 20 |
SEMESTER 1 and 2 OPTIONAL MODULES | |
ECC038 Applied Econometrics | 20 |
SEMESTER 1 OPTIONAL MODULES | |
ECC001 Developments in Microeconomics | 20 |
ECC004 Financial Economics and Asset Pricing | 20 |
ECC101 Developments in Macroeconomics | 20 |
SEMESTER 2 OPTIONAL MODULES | |
ECC005 Industrial Economics | 20 |
ECC035 Central Banking and Economic Crises | 20 |
ECC119 Development Economics (Semester 2) | 20 |
ECC139 Environmental Economics | 20 |
ECC141 Corporate Finance and Derivatives | 20 |
Compulsory and optional modules must be taken such that the total modular weight for the year is 120 credits divided equally over each Semester. Please note: Optional modules are subject to availability and timetable permitting. |
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
5.1 Progression Criteria
In order to progress from Part A to Part B and from Part B to C and to be eligible for the award of an Honours degree, candidates must satisfy the minimum credit requirements set out in Regulation XX.
A Diploma in Professional Studies will be awarded to students who have satisfactorily completed the programme of study required for Part I.
5.2 Reassessment
Candidates must accumulate at least 60 credits in a Part of a Programme in order to be eligible for reassessment in the relevant Part during the University’s Special Assessment Period.
If a student registers to resit a module, they will be required to resit all failed components of that module (ie if their coursework mark was less than 40% they must resit the coursework and if their exam mark was less than 40% they must resit the exam). If a student resits the coursework element of a module and there was more than 1 coursework assignment for that module, then the student would be required to resit all coursework assignments in which they achieved a mark below 40%. Marks for elements of a module not being re-sat will be carried forward.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
Candidates' final degree classification will be determined on the basis of performance in degree level Module Assessments in Parts B and C in accordance with the scheme set out in Regulation XX of the University Regulations. The average percentage marks for each Part will be combined in the ratio Part B 30% : Part C 70% to determine the final Programme Mark.
Programme Specification
BS BSc (Hons) International Economics (2015 entry)
Academic Year: 2017/18
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at 天堂视频 (available soon)
- What makes 天堂视频 programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | 天堂视频 |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | School of Business and Economics |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | |
Final award | BSc (Hons) / BSc+DPS / BSc+DInts |
Programme title | International Economics |
Programme code | ECUB03 |
Length of programme | The duration of the programme is either six semesters or six semesters plus one academic year if candidates select one of the available part I streams. The third academic year (Part I) occurs between Part B and Part C. Permission to transfer to the eight semester programme will be at the discretion of the Programme Director (Economics). See Programme Structure for further details of eight semester streams. |
UCAS code | L115 International Economics (3 years) L110 International Economics (4 years sandwich) |
Admissions criteria | http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/undergraduate/courses/departments/business-economics/internationaleconomics/ |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- Know and understand the core of economic theory and applied economics, with a particular application to the international setting.
- Know and understand the behaviour of agents firms and consumers in the national and international economy
- Discuss in an informed manner the major policy directions and regulations for the implementation of economic policy
- Know and understand the nature of incentives in economic decision-making by agents in the economy
- Evaluate the outcomes of market and policy changes in all spheres of the economy, with special emphasis on international economics.
- To provide specialised training in the aspects of economics relevant to the international economy including trade, finance and development.
- To provide training in the principles of economics and their application.
- To stimulate students intellectually through the study of economics and to lead them to appreciate its application to a range of problems and its relevance in a variety of contexts.
- To provide a firm foundation of knowledge about the workings of the economy and to develop the relevant skills for the constructive use of that knowledge in a range of settings.
- To develop in students the ability to apply the knowledge and skills they have acquired to the solution of theoretical and applied problems in economics.
- To equip students with appropriate tools of analysis to tackle issues and problems of economic policy.
- To develop in students, through the study of economics, a range of transferable skills that will be of value in employment and self-employment.
- To provide students with analytical skills and an ability to develop simplifying frameworks for studying the real world.
- To develop in students the ability to appreciate what would be an appropriate level of abstraction for a range of economic issues.
- To provide students with the knowledge and skill base, from which they can proceed to further studies in economics, related areas or in multi-disciplinary areas that involve economics.
- To generate in students an appreciation of the economic dimension of wider social and political issues.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
- QAA Subject Benchmark Statements: Economics.
- Framework for Higher Education Qualifications.
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding of:
K1. A coherent core of economic principles. The understanding of these might be verbal, graphical or mathematical.
These principles cover the microeconomic issues of decision and choice, the production and exchange of goods, the interdependency of markets, and economic welfare. They also include macroeconomic issues, such as employment, national income, the balance of payments and the distribution of income, inflation, growth and business cycles, money and finance. The understanding should extend to economic policy at both microeconomic and macroeconomic levels. In all these, students should show understanding of analytical methods and model-based argument and appreciate the existence of different methodological approaches.
K2. Relevant quantitative methods and computing techniques. These cover mathematical and statistical methods, including econometrics. Students will have exposure to the use of such techniques on actual economic, financial or social data. A knowledge and appreciation of economic data, both quantitative and qualitative. Students should also have some knowledge of the appropriate methods that the economist might use to structure and analyse such data.
K3. The applications of economics. Students should have the ability to apply a core of economic principles and reasoning to a variety of applied topics. They should also be aware of the economic principles that can be used to design, guide and interpret commercial, economic and social policy. As part of this, they should have the ability to discuss and analyse government policy and to assess the performance of the UK and other economies.
The above implies that the attainments of students should show:
- Ability to apply core economic theory and economic reasoning to applied topics.
- Ability to relate differences in policy recommendations to differences in the theoretical and empirical features of economic analyses which underlie such recommendations.
- Ability to discuss and analyse government policy and to assess the performance of the UK and other economies.
- Understanding of verbal, graphical, mathematical and econometric representation of economic ideas and analysis, including the relationship between them.
- Understanding of relevant mathematical and statistical techniques.
- Understanding of analytical methods, both theory- and model-based.
- Appreciation of the history and development of economic ideas and the differing methods of analysis that have been and are used by economists.
- Understanding of the appropriate techniques to enable manipulation, treatment and interpretation of the relevant statistical data.
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
C1. Abstraction. From the study of economic principles and models, students see how one can abstract the essential features of complex systems and provide a useable framework for evaluation and assessment of the effects of policy or other exogenous events. Through this, the typical student will acquire proficiency in how to simplify while still retaining relevance. This is an approach that they can then apply in other contexts, thereby becoming more effective problem-solvers and decision-makers.
C2. Analysis, deduction and induction. Economic reasoning is highly deductive, and logical analysis is applied to assumption-based models. However, inductive reasoning is also important. The typical student will have been exposed to some or all of these and be able to use some of them. Such skills also enhance their problem-solving and decision-making ability.
C3. Quantification and design. Data, and their effective organization, presentation and analysis, are important in economics. The typical student will have some familiarity with the principal sources of economic information and data relevant to industry, commerce and government, and have had practice in organising it and presenting it informatively. This skill is important at all stages in the decision-making process.
C4. Framing. Through the study of economics, a student should learn how to decide what should be taken as given or fixed for the purposes of setting up and solving a problem, i.e. what the important 'parameters' are in constraining the solution to the problem. Learning to think about how and why these parameters might change encourages a student to place the economic problem in its broader social and political context. This `framing' skill is important in determining the decision-maker's ability to implement the solutions to problems.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
P1. Construct economic models using verbal, diagrammatic, mathematical, statistical and econometric techniques and reasoning.
P2. Access, search for and evaluate relevant data sources for validation of economic models.
P3. Apply and use specialised software including spreadsheets for the analysis of economic models.
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate the key skills of:
T1. Analysis and decision making.
T2. Communication.
T3. Numeracy and computation.
T4. IT, information handling and retrieval, including library skills.
T5. Independent study and group work.
T6. Time management.
T7. Problem solving.
4. Programme structure
Students must have a total modular weighting of 120 credits per year. This must include the compulsory modules. The remaining optional modules may be chosen to give a 60:60 split over the two semesters, or alternatively, 50:70 or 70:50.
The prefixes on module codes represent the credit levels as follows:
A level 4; B level 5; C level 6.
Candidates following the Placement Stream are required to spend the third academic year undertaking professional training leading to the Diploma in Professional Studies, in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
Candidates following the Study Abroad Stream are required to spend the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution leading to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
Candidates following the Split Stream are required to spend six months of the third academic year undertaking professional training, and the other half of the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution. This leads to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
4.1 Part A - Introductory Modules
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTER 1 and 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
ECA001 Principles of Macroeconomics | 20 |
ECA002 Principles of Microeconomics | 20 |
ECA003 Data Analysis I (Semester 1) | 10 |
ECA004 Quantitative Economics | 20 |
ECA005 Data Analysis II (Semester 2) | 10 |
BSA008 Skills for Study and Employment (Semester 2) | 10 |
SEMESTER 1 OPTIONAL MODULES (CHOOSE TWO) | |
BSA505 Organisational Behaviour | 10 |
BSA525 Introduction to Accounting | 10 |
EUA607 Introduction to Democratic Government | 10 |
GYA004 Geographies of Global Economic Change | 10 |
SSA001 Introduction to Sociology A | 10 |
SSA201 Introduction to Criminology and Social Policy A | 10 |
University Wide Languages Programme (see additional form) | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 OPTIONAL MODULES (CHOOSE TWO) | |
BSA026 Principles of Law | 10 |
BSA506 Management of Human Resources | 10 |
BSA526 Accounting for Managers | 10 |
GYA104 Geographies of Identity | 10 |
SSA002 Introduction to Sociology B | 10 |
SSA202 Introduction to Criminology and Social Policy B | 10 |
University Wide Languages Programme (see additional form) | 10 |
Compulsory and optional modules must be taken such that the total modular weight for the year is 120 credits divided equally over each Semester, or split 70:50 or 50:70 over the two Semesters. Please note: Optional modules are subject to availability and timetable permitting. |
4.2 Part B - Degree Modules
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTER 1 and 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
ECB001 Intermediate Macroeconomics | 20 |
ECB002 Intermediate Microeconomics | 20 |
ECB003 Introduction to Econometrics | 20 |
ECB005 International Economic Relations | 20 |
SEMESTER 1 and 2 OPTIONAL MODULES | |
ECB004 Introduction to Financial Economics | 20 |
ECB015 Economics of the Financial System | 20 |
ECB016 History of Economic Thought | 20 |
ECB030 Energy and the Environment | 20 |
SEMESTER 1 OPTIONAL MODULES | |
BSB560 Principles of Marketing | 10 |
BSB580 Operations Management | 10 |
ECB136 Transport Economics | 20 |
University-Wide Languages Programme | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 OPTIONAL MODULES | |
BSB562 The Marketing Mix | 10 |
ECB035 The Economics of Social Issues | 20 |
University-Wide Languages Programme | 10 |
Compulsory and optional modules must be taken such that the total modular weight for the year is 120 credits divided equally over each Semester, or split 70:50 or 50:70 over the two Semesters. Please note: Optional modules are subject to availability and timetable permitting. |
4.3 Part I : Optional (8 semester programme only)
Candidates pursue one of the following streams:
The duration of the programme is either six semesters or six semesters plus one academic year if candidates select one of the following three streams:
Candidates following the Placement Stream are required to spend the third academic year undertaking professional training leading to the Diploma in Professional Studies, in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
Candidates following the Study Abroad Stream are required to spend the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution leading to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
Candidates following the Split Stream are required to spend six months of the third academic year undertaking professional training, and the other half of the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution. This leads to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
The third academic year (Part I) occurs between Part B and Part C. Permission to transfer to the eight semester programme will be at the discretion of the Associate Dean (Teaching) for the School.
4.4 Part C - Degree Modules
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTER 1 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
ECC003 International Money and Finance | 20 |
ECC031 International Trade | 20 |
SEMESTER 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
ECC142 Research and Communication Skills for Economists | 20 |
SEMESTER 1 OPTIONAL MODULES | |
ECC001 Developments in Microeconomics | 20 |
ECC004 Financial Economics and Asset Pricing | 20 |
ECC038 Applied Econometrics (Semesters 1 and 2) | 20 |
ECC101 Developments in Macroeconomics | 20 |
SEMESTER 2 OPTIONAL MODULES | |
ECC005 Industrial Economics | 20 |
ECC035 Central Banking and Economic Crises | 20 |
ECC119 Development Economics | 20 |
ECC139 Environmental Economics | 20 |
ECC141 Corporate Finance and Derivatives | 20 |
Compulsory and optional modules must be taken such that the total modular weight for the year is 120 credits divided equally over each Semester. Please note: Optional modules are subject to availability and timetable permitting. |
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
5.1 Progression Criteria
In order to progress from Part A to Part B and from Part B to C and to be eligible for the award of an Honours degree, candidates must satisfy the minimum credit requirements set out in Regulation XX.
A Diploma in Professional Studies will be awarded to students who have satisfactorily completed the programme of study required for Part I.
5.2 Reassessment
Candidates must accumulate at least 60 credits in a Part of a Programme in order to be eligible for reassessment in the relevant Part during the University’s Special Assessment Period.
If a student registers to resit a module, they will be required to resit all failed components of that module (ie if their coursework mark was less than 40% they must resit the coursework and if their exam mark was less than 40% they must resit the exam). If a student resits the coursework element of a module and there was more than 1 coursework assignment for that module, then the student would be required to resit all coursework assignments in which they achieved a mark below 40%. Marks for elements of a module not being re-sat will be carried forward.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
Candidates' final degree classification will be determined on the basis of performance in degree level Module Assessments in Parts B and C in accordance with the scheme set out in Regulation XX of the University Regulations. The average percentage marks for each Part will be combined in the ratio Part B 30% : Part C 70% to determine the final Programme Mark.
Programme Specification
BS BSc (Hons) International Economics (2014 entry)
Academic Year: 2017/18
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at 天堂视频 (available soon)
- What makes 天堂视频 programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | 天堂视频 |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | School of Business and Economics |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | |
Final award | BSc (Hons) / BSc+DPS / BSc+DInts |
Programme title | International Economics |
Programme code | ECUB03 |
Length of programme | The duration of the programme is either six semesters or six semesters plus one academic year if candidates select one of the available part I streams. The third academic year (Part I) occurs between Part B and Part C. Permission to transfer to the eight semester programme will be at the discretion of the Programme Director (Economics). See Programme Structure for further details of eight semester streams. |
UCAS code | L115 International Economics (3 years) L110 International Economics (4 years sandwich) |
Admissions criteria | http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/undergraduate/courses/departments/business-economics/internationaleconomics/ |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- Know and understand the core of economic theory and applied economics, with a particular application to the international setting.
- Know and understand the behaviour of agents firms and consumers in the national and international economy
- Discuss in an informed manner the major policy directions and regulations for the implementation of economic policy
- Know and understand the nature of incentives in economic decision-making by agents in the economy
- Evaluate the outcomes of market and policy changes in all spheres of the economy, with special emphasis on international economics.
- To provide specialised training in the aspects of economics relevant to the international economy including trade, finance and development.
- To provide training in the principles of economics and their application.
- To stimulate students intellectually through the study of economics and to lead them to appreciate its application to a range of problems and its relevance in a variety of contexts.
- To provide a firm foundation of knowledge about the workings of the economy and to develop the relevant skills for the constructive use of that knowledge in a range of settings.
- To develop in students the ability to apply the knowledge and skills they have acquired to the solution of theoretical and applied problems in economics.
- To equip students with appropriate tools of analysis to tackle issues and problems of economic policy.
- To develop in students, through the study of economics, a range of transferable skills that will be of value in employment and self-employment.
- To provide students with analytical skills and an ability to develop simplifying frameworks for studying the real world.
- To develop in students the ability to appreciate what would be an appropriate level of abstraction for a range of economic issues.
- To provide students with the knowledge and skill base, from which they can proceed to further studies in economics, related areas or in multi-disciplinary areas that involve economics.
- To generate in students an appreciation of the economic dimension of wider social and political issues.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
- QAA Subject Benchmark Statements: Economics.
- Framework for Higher Education Qualifications.
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding of:
K1. A coherent core of economic principles. The understanding of these might be verbal, graphical or mathematical.
These principles cover the microeconomic issues of decision and choice, the production and exchange of goods, the interdependency of markets, and economic welfare. They also include macroeconomic issues, such as employment, national income, the balance of payments and the distribution of income, inflation, growth and business cycles, money and finance. The understanding should extend to economic policy at both microeconomic and macroeconomic levels. In all these, students should show understanding of analytical methods and model-based argument and appreciate the existence of different methodological approaches.
K2. Relevant quantitative methods and computing techniques. These cover mathematical and statistical methods, including econometrics. Students will have exposure to the use of such techniques on actual economic, financial or social data. A knowledge and appreciation of economic data, both quantitative and qualitative. Students should also have some knowledge of the appropriate methods that the economist might use to structure and analyse such data.
K3. The applications of economics. Students should have the ability to apply a core of economic principles and reasoning to a variety of applied topics. They should also be aware of the economic principles that can be used to design, guide and interpret commercial, economic and social policy. As part of this, they should have the ability to discuss and analyse government policy and to assess the performance of the UK and other economies.
The above implies that the attainments of students should show:
- Ability to apply core economic theory and economic reasoning to applied topics.
- Ability to relate differences in policy recommendations to differences in the theoretical and empirical features of economic analyses which underlie such recommendations.
- Ability to discuss and analyse government policy and to assess the performance of the UK and other economies.
- Understanding of verbal, graphical, mathematical and econometric representation of economic ideas and analysis, including the relationship between them.
- Understanding of relevant mathematical and statistical techniques.
- Understanding of analytical methods, both theory- and model-based.
- Appreciation of the history and development of economic ideas and the differing methods of analysis that have been and are used by economists.
- Understanding of the appropriate techniques to enable manipulation, treatment and interpretation of the relevant statistical data.
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
C1. Abstraction. From the study of economic principles and models, students see how one can abstract the essential features of complex systems and provide a useable framework for evaluation and assessment of the effects of policy or other exogenous events. Through this, the typical student will acquire proficiency in how to simplify while still retaining relevance. This is an approach that they can then apply in other contexts, thereby becoming more effective problem-solvers and decision-makers.
C2. Analysis, deduction and induction. Economic reasoning is highly deductive, and logical analysis is applied to assumption-based models. However, inductive reasoning is also important. The typical student will have been exposed to some or all of these and be able to use some of them. Such skills also enhance their problem-solving and decision-making ability.
C3. Quantification and design. Data, and their effective organization, presentation and analysis, are important in economics. The typical student will have some familiarity with the principal sources of economic information and data relevant to industry, commerce and government, and have had practice in organising it and presenting it informatively. This skill is important at all stages in the decision-making process.
C4. Framing. Through the study of economics, a student should learn how to decide what should be taken as given or fixed for the purposes of setting up and solving a problem, i.e. what the important 'parameters' are in constraining the solution to the problem. Learning to think about how and why these parameters might change encourages a student to place the economic problem in its broader social and political context. This `framing' skill is important in determining the decision-maker's ability to implement the solutions to problems.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
P1. Construct economic models using verbal, diagrammatic, mathematical, statistical and econometric techniques and reasoning.
P2. Access, search for and evaluate relevant data sources for validation of economic models.
P3. Apply and use specialised software including spreadsheets for the analysis of economic models.
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate the key skills of:
T1. Analysis and decision making.
T2. Communication.
T3. Numeracy and computation.
T4. IT, information handling and retrieval, including library skills.
T5. Independent study and group work.
T6. Time management.
T7. Problem solving.
4. Programme structure
Students must have a total modular weighting of 120 credits per year. This must include the compulsory modules. The remaining optional modules may be chosen to give a 60:60 split over the two semesters, or alternatively, 50:70 or 70:50.
The prefixes on module codes represent the credit levels as follows:
A level 4; B level 5; C level 6.
Candidates following the Placement Stream are required to spend the third academic year undertaking professional training leading to the Diploma in Professional Studies, in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
Candidates following the Study Abroad Stream are required to spend the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution leading to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
Candidates following the Split Stream are required to spend six months of the third academic year undertaking professional training, and the other half of the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution. This leads to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
4.1 Part A - Introductory Modules
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTER 1 and 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
ECA001 Principles of Macroeconomics | 20 |
ECA002 Principles of Microeconomics | 20 |
ECA003 Data Analysis | 20 |
ECA004 Quantitative Economics | 20 |
SEMESTER 1 OPTIONAL MODULES (CHOOSE TWO) | |
BSA505 Organisational Behaviour | 10 |
BSA525 Introduction to Accounting | 10 |
EUA620 The Contemporary World Arena | 10 |
GYA004 Geographies of Global Economic Change | 10 |
SSA001 Introduction to Sociology A | 10 |
SSA201 Introduction to Criminology and Social Policy A | 10 |
University Wide Languages Programme (see additional form) | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 OPTIONAL MODULES (CHOOSE TWO) | |
BSA025 Introduction to Law | 10 |
BSA506 Management of Human Resources | 10 |
BSA526 Accounting for Managers | 10 |
EUA607 Introduction to Democratic Government | 10 |
GYA104 Geographies of Identity | 10 |
SSA002 Introduction to Sociology B | 10 |
SSA202 Introduction to Criminology and Social Policy B | 10 |
University Wide Languages Programme (see additional form) | 10 |
Compulsory and optional modules must be taken such that the total modular weight for the year is 120 credits divided equally over each Semester, or split 70:50 or 50:70 over the two Semesters. Please note: Optional modules are subject to availability and timetable permitting. |
4.2 Part B - Degree Modules
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTER 1 and 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
ECB001 Intermediate Macroeconomics | 20 |
ECB002 Intermediate Microeconomics | 20 |
ECB003 Introduction to Econometrics | 20 |
ECB005 International Economic Relations | 20 |
SEMESTER 1 and 2 OPTIONAL MODULES | |
ECB004 Introduction to Finance | 20 |
ECB015 Economics of the Financial System | 20 |
ECB016 History of Economic Thought | 20 |
ECB030 Energy and the Environment | 20 |
SEMESTER 1 OPTIONAL MODULES | |
BSB560 Principles of Marketing | 10 |
BSB580 Operations Management | 10 |
ECB136 Transport Economics | 20 |
University Wide Languages Programme | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 OPTIONAL MODULES | |
BSB522 The Marketing Mix for Sport and Leisure | 10 |
ECB035 Economics of the Welfare State | 20 |
University Wide Languages Programme | 10 |
Compulsory and optional modules must be taken such that the total modular weight for the year is 120 credits divided equally over each Semester, or split 70:50 or 50:70 over the two Semesters. Please note: Optional modules are subject to availability and timetable permitting. |
4.3 Part I : Optional (8 semester programme only)
Candidates pursue one of the following streams:
The duration of the programme is either six semesters or six semesters plus one academic year if candidates select one of the following three streams:
Candidates following the Placement Stream are required to spend the third academic year undertaking professional training leading to the Diploma in Professional Studies, in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
Candidates following the Study Abroad Stream are required to spend the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution leading to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
Candidates following the Split Stream are required to spend six months of the third academic year undertaking professional training, and the other half of the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution. This leads to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
The third academic year (Part I) occurs between Part B and Part C. Permission to transfer to the eight semester programme will be at the discretion of the Associate Dean (Teaching) for the School.
4.4 Part C - Degree Modules
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTER 1 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
ECC003 International Money and Finance | 20 |
ECC031 International Trade | 20 |
SEMESTER 2 COMPULSORY MODULE | |
ECC142 Research and Communication Skills for Economists | 20 |
SEMESTER 1 and 2 OPTIONAL MODULES | |
ECC038 Applied Econometrics | 20 |
SEMESTER 1 OPTIONAL MODULES | |
ECC001 Developments in Microeconomics | 20 |
ECC004 Financial Economics and Asset Pricing | 20 |
ECC101 Developments in Macroeconomics | 20 |
SEMESTER 2 OPTIONAL MODULES | |
ECC005 Industrial Economics | 20 |
ECC035 Central Banking and Economic Crises | 20 |
ECC119 Development Economics | 20 |
ECC141 Corporate Finance and Derivatives | 20 |
Compulsory and optional modules must be taken such that the total modular weight for the year is 120 credits divided equally over each Semester. Please note: Optional modules are subject to availability and timetable permitting. |
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
5.1 Progression Criteria
In order to progress from Part A to Part B and from Part B to C and to be eligible for the award of an Honours degree, candidates must satisfy the minimum credit requirements set out in Regulation XX.
A Diploma in Professional Studies will be awarded to students who have satisfactorily completed the programme of study required for Part I.
5.2 Reassessment
Candidates must accumulate at least 60 credits in a Part of a Programme in order to be eligible for reassessment in the relevant Part during the University’s Special Assessment Period.
If a student registers to resit a module, they will be required to resit all failed components of that module (ie if their coursework mark was less than 40% they must resit the coursework and if their exam mark was less than 40% they must resit the exam). If a student resits the coursework element of a module and there was more than 1 coursework assignment for that module, then the student would be required to resit all coursework assignments in which they achieved a mark below 40%. Marks for elements of a module not being re-sat will be carried forward.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
Candidates' final degree classification will be determined on the basis of performance in degree level Module Assessments in Parts B and C in accordance with the scheme set out in Regulation XX of the University Regulations. The average percentage marks for each Part will be combined in the ratio Part B 30% : Part C 70% to determine the final Programme Mark.
Programme Specification
BS BSc (Hons) International Economics (2013 entry)
Academic Year: 2017/18
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at 天堂视频 (available soon)
- What makes 天堂视频 programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | 天堂视频 |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | School of Business and Economics |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | |
Final award | BSc (Hons) / BSc+DPS / BSc+DInts |
Programme title | International Economics |
Programme code | ECUB03 |
Length of programme | The duration of the programme is either six semesters or six semesters plus one academic year if candidates select one of the available part I streams. The third academic year (Part I) occurs between Part B and Part C. Permission to transfer to the eight semester programme will be at the discretion of the Programme Director (Economics). See Programme Structure for further details of eight semester streams. |
UCAS code | L115 International Economics (3 years) L110 International Economics (4 years sandwich) |
Admissions criteria | http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/undergraduate/courses/departments/business-economics/internationaleconomics/ |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- Know and understand the core of economic theory and applied economics, with a particular application to the international setting.
- Know and understand the behaviour of agents firms and consumers in the national and international economy
- Discuss in an informed manner the major policy directions and regulations for the implementation of economic policy
- Know and understand the nature of incentives in economic decision-making by agents in the economy
- Evaluate the outcomes of market and policy changes in all spheres of the economy, with special emphasis on international economics.
- To provide specialised training in the aspects of economics relevant to the international economy including trade, finance and development.
- To provide training in the principles of economics and their application.
- To stimulate students intellectually through the study of economics and to lead them to appreciate its application to a range of problems and its relevance in a variety of contexts.
- To provide a firm foundation of knowledge about the workings of the economy and to develop the relevant skills for the constructive use of that knowledge in a range of settings.
- To develop in students the ability to apply the knowledge and skills they have acquired to the solution of theoretical and applied problems in economics.
- To equip students with appropriate tools of analysis to tackle issues and problems of economic policy.
- To develop in students, through the study of economics, a range of transferable skills that will be of value in employment and self-employment.
- To provide students with analytical skills and an ability to develop simplifying frameworks for studying the real world.
- To develop in students the ability to appreciate what would be an appropriate level of abstraction for a range of economic issues.
- To provide students with the knowledge and skill base, from which they can proceed to further studies in economics, related areas or in multi-disciplinary areas that involve economics.
- To generate in students an appreciation of the economic dimension of wider social and political issues.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
- QAA Subject Benchmark Statements: Economics.
- Framework for Higher Education Qualifications.
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding of:
K1. A coherent core of economic principles. The understanding of these might be verbal, graphical or mathematical.
These principles cover the microeconomic issues of decision and choice, the production and exchange of goods, the interdependency of markets, and economic welfare. They also include macroeconomic issues, such as employment, national income, the balance of payments and the distribution of income, inflation, growth and business cycles, money and finance. The understanding should extend to economic policy at both microeconomic and macroeconomic levels. In all these, students should show understanding of analytical methods and model-based argument and appreciate the existence of different methodological approaches.
K2. Relevant quantitative methods and computing techniques. These cover mathematical and statistical methods, including econometrics. Students will have exposure to the use of such techniques on actual economic, financial or social data. A knowledge and appreciation of economic data, both quantitative and qualitative. Students should also have some knowledge of the appropriate methods that the economist might use to structure and analyse such data.
K3. The applications of economics. Students should have the ability to apply a core of economic principles and reasoning to a variety of applied topics. They should also be aware of the economic principles that can be used to design, guide and interpret commercial, economic and social policy. As part of this, they should have the ability to discuss and analyse government policy and to assess the performance of the UK and other economies.
The above implies that the attainments of students should show:
- Ability to apply core economic theory and economic reasoning to applied topics.
- Ability to relate differences in policy recommendations to differences in the theoretical and empirical features of economic analyses which underlie such recommendations.
- Ability to discuss and analyse government policy and to assess the performance of the UK and other economies.
- Understanding of verbal, graphical, mathematical and econometric representation of economic ideas and analysis, including the relationship between them.
- Understanding of relevant mathematical and statistical techniques.
- Understanding of analytical methods, both theory- and model-based.
- Appreciation of the history and development of economic ideas and the differing methods of analysis that have been and are used by economists.
- Understanding of the appropriate techniques to enable manipulation, treatment and interpretation of the relevant statistical data.
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
C1. Abstraction. From the study of economic principles and models, students see how one can abstract the essential features of complex systems and provide a useable framework for evaluation and assessment of the effects of policy or other exogenous events. Through this, the typical student will acquire proficiency in how to simplify while still retaining relevance. This is an approach that they can then apply in other contexts, thereby becoming more effective problem-solvers and decision-makers.
C2. Analysis, deduction and induction. Economic reasoning is highly deductive, and logical analysis is applied to assumption-based models. However, inductive reasoning is also important. The typical student will have been exposed to some or all of these and be able to use some of them. Such skills also enhance their problem-solving and decision-making ability.
C3. Quantification and design. Data, and their effective organization, presentation and analysis, are important in economics. The typical student will have some familiarity with the principal sources of economic information and data relevant to industry, commerce and government, and have had practice in organising it and presenting it informatively. This skill is important at all stages in the decision-making process.
C4. Framing. Through the study of economics, a student should learn how to decide what should be taken as given or fixed for the purposes of setting up and solving a problem, i.e. what the important 'parameters' are in constraining the solution to the problem. Learning to think about how and why these parameters might change encourages a student to place the economic problem in its broader social and political context. This `framing' skill is important in determining the decision-maker's ability to implement the solutions to problems.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
P1. Construct economic models using verbal, diagrammatic, mathematical, statistical and econometric techniques and reasoning.
P2. Access, search for and evaluate relevant data sources for validation of economic models.
P3. Apply and use specialised software including spreadsheets for the analysis of economic models.
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate the key skills of:
T1. Analysis and decision making.
T2. Communication.
T3. Numeracy and computation.
T4. IT, information handling and retrieval, including library skills.
T5. Independent study and group work.
T6. Time management.
T7. Problem solving.
4. Programme structure
Students must have a total modular weighting of 120 credits per year. This must include the compulsory modules. The remaining optional modules may be chosen to give a 60:60 split over the two semesters, or alternatively, 50:70 or 70:50.
The prefixes on module codes represent the credit levels as follows:
A level 4; B level 5; C level 6.
Candidates following the Placement Stream are required to spend the third academic year undertaking professional training leading to the Diploma in Professional Studies, in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
Candidates following the Study Abroad Stream are required to spend the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution leading to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
Candidates following the Split Stream are required to spend six months of the third academic year undertaking professional training, and the other half of the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution. This leads to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
4.1 Part A - Introductory Modules
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTER 1 and 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
ECA001 Principles of Macroeconomics | 20 |
ECA002 Principles of Microeconomics | 20 |
ECA003 Data Analysis | 20 |
ECA004 Quantitative Economics | 20 |
SEMESTER 1 OPTIONAL MODULES (CHOOSE TWO) | |
BSA505 Organisational Behaviour | 10 |
BSA525 Introduction to Accounting | 10 |
EUA620 The Contemporary World Arena | 10 |
GYA004 Geographies of Global Economic Change | 10 |
SSA001 Introduction to Sociology A | 10 |
SSA201 Introduction to Criminology and Social Policy A | 10 |
University Wide Languages Programme (see additional form) | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 OPTIONAL MODULES (CHOOSE TWO) | |
BSA025 Introduction to Law | 10 |
BSA506 Management of Human Resources | 10 |
BSA526 Accounting for Managers | 10 |
EUA607 Introduction to Democratic Government | 10 |
GYA104 Geographies of Identity | 10 |
SSA002 Introduction to Sociology B | 10 |
SSA202 Introduction to Criminology and Social Policy B | 10 |
University Wide Languages Programme (see additional form) | 10 |
Compulsory and optional modules must be taken such that the total modular weight for the year is 120 credits divided equally over each Semester, or split 70:50 or 50:70 over the two Semesters. Please note: Optional modules are subject to availability and timetable permitting. |
4.2 Part B - Degree Modules
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTER 1 and 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
ECB001 Intermediate Macroeconomics | 20 |
ECB002 Intermediate Microeconomics | 20 |
ECB003 Introduction to Econometrics | 20 |
ECB005 International Economic Relations | 20 |
SEMESTER 1 and 2 OPTIONAL MODULES | |
ECB004 Introduction to Finance | 20 |
ECB015 Economics of the Financial System | 20 |
ECB016 History of Economic Thought | 20 |
ECB030 Energy and the Environment | 20 |
SEMESTER 1 OPTIONAL MODULES | |
BSB560 Principles of Marketing | 10 |
BSB580 Operations Management | 10 |
ECB136 Transport Economics | 20 |
University Wide Languages Programme | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 OPTIONAL MODULES | |
BSB522 The Marketing Mix for Sport and Leisure | 10 |
ECB035 Economics of the Welfare State | 20 |
University Wide Languages Programme | 10 |
Compulsory and optional modules must be taken such that the total modular weight for the year is 120 credits divided equally over each Semester, or split 70:50 or 50:70 over the two Semesters. Please note: Optional modules are subject to availability and timetable permitting. |
4.3 Part I : Optional (8 semester programme only)
Candidates pursue one of the following streams:
The duration of the programme is either six semesters or six semesters plus one academic year if candidates select one of the following three streams:
Candidates following the Placement Stream are required to spend the third academic year undertaking professional training leading to the Diploma in Professional Studies, in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
Candidates following the Study Abroad Stream are required to spend the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution leading to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
Candidates following the Split Stream are required to spend six months of the third academic year undertaking professional training, and the other half of the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution. This leads to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
The third academic year (Part I) occurs between Part B and Part C. Permission to transfer to the eight semester programme will be at the discretion of the Associate Dean (Teaching) for the School.
4.4 Part C - Degree Modules
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTER 2 COMPULSORY MODULE | |
ECC142 Research and Communication Skills for Economists | 20 |
SEMESTER 1 and 2 COMPULSORY MODULES - You must choose at least two from the three listed: | |
ECC003 International Money and Finance (Semester 1) | 20 |
ECC031 International Trade (Semester 1) | 20 |
ECC119 Development Economics (Semester 2) | 20 |
SEMESTER 1 and 2 OPTIONAL MODULES | |
ECC038 Applied Econometrics (Semesters 1 and 2) | 20 |
SEMESTER 1 OPTIONAL MODULES | |
ECC001 Developments in Microeconomics | 20 |
ECC004 Financial Economics and Asset Pricing | 20 |
ECC101 Developments in Macroeconomics | 20 |
SEMESTER 2 OPTIONAL MODULES | |
ECC005 Industrial Economics | 20 |
ECC035 Central Banking and Economic Crises | 20 |
ECC141 Corporate Finance and Derivatives | 20 |
Compulsory and optional modules must be taken such that the total modular weight for the year is 120 credits divided equally over each Semester. Please note: Optional modules are subject to availability and timetable permitting. |
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
5.1 Progression Criteria
In order to progress from Part A to Part B and from Part B to C and to be eligible for the award of an Honours degree, candidates must satisfy the minimum credit requirements set out in Regulation XX.
A Diploma in Professional Studies will be awarded to students who have satisfactorily completed the programme of study required for Part I.
5.2 Reassessment
Candidates must accumulate at least 60 credits in a Part of a Programme in order to be eligible for reassessment in the relevant Part during the University’s Special Assessment Period.
If a student registers to resit a module, they will be required to resit all failed components of that module (ie if their coursework mark was less than 40% they must resit the coursework and if their exam mark was less than 40% they must resit the exam). If a student resits the coursework element of a module and there was more than 1 coursework assignment for that module, then the student would be required to resit all coursework assignments in which they achieved a mark below 40%. Marks for elements of a module not being re-sat will be carried forward.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
Candidates' final degree classification will be determined on the basis of performance in degree level Module Assessments in Parts B and C in accordance with the scheme set out in Regulation XX of the University Regulations. The average percentage marks for each Part will be combined in the ratio Part B 30% : Part C 70% to determine the final Programme Mark.
Programme Specification
BS BSc (Hons) International Economics (2012 entry)
Academic Year: 2017/18
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at 天堂视频 (available soon)
- What makes 天堂视频 programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | 天堂视频 |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | School of Business and Economics |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | |
Final award | BSc (Hons) / BSc+DPS / BSc+DInts |
Programme title | International Economics |
Programme code | ECUB03 |
Length of programme | The duration of the programme is either six semesters or six semesters plus one academic year if candidates select one of the available part I streams. The third academic year (Part I) occurs between Part B and Part C. Permission to transfer to the eight semester programme will be at the discretion of the Programme Director (Economics). See Programme Structure for further details of eight semester streams. |
UCAS code | L115 |
Admissions criteria | http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/undergraduate/courses/departments/business-economics/internationaleconomics/ |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- Know and understand the core of economic theory and applied economics, with a particular application to the international setting.
- Know and understand the behaviour of agents firms and consumers in the national and international economy
- Discuss in an informed manner the major policy directions and regulations for the implementation of economic policy
- Know and understand the nature of incentives in economic decision-making by agents in the economy
- Evaluate the outcomes of market and policy changes in all spheres of the economy, with special emphasis on international economics.
- To provide specialised training in the aspects of economics relevant to the international economy including trade, finance and development.
- To provide training in the principles of economics and their application.
- To stimulate students intellectually through the study of economics and to lead them to appreciate its application to a range of problems and its relevance in a variety of contexts.
- To provide a firm foundation of knowledge about the workings of the economy and to develop the relevant skills for the constructive use of that knowledge in a range of settings.
- To develop in students the ability to apply the knowledge and skills they have acquired to the solution of theoretical and applied problems in economics.
- To equip students with appropriate tools of analysis to tackle issues and problems of economic policy.
- To develop in students, through the study of economics, a range of transferable skills that will be of value in employment and self-employment.
- To provide students with analytical skills and an ability to develop simplifying frameworks for studying the real world.
- To develop in students the ability to appreciate what would be an appropriate level of abstraction for a range of economic issues.
- To provide students with the knowledge and skill base, from which they can proceed to further studies in economics, related areas or in multi-disciplinary areas that involve economics.
- To generate in students an appreciation of the economic dimension of wider social and political issues.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
- QAA Subject Benchmark Statements: Economics.
- Framework for Higher Education Qualifications.
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding of:
K1. A coherent core of economic principles. The understanding of these might be verbal, graphical or mathematical.
These principles cover the microeconomic issues of decision and choice, the production and exchange of goods, the interdependency of markets, and economic welfare. They also include macroeconomic issues, such as employment, national income, the balance of payments and the distribution of income, inflation, growth and business cycles, money and finance. The understanding should extend to economic policy at both microeconomic and macroeconomic levels. In all these, students should show understanding of analytical methods and model-based argument and appreciate the existence of different methodological approaches.
K2. Relevant quantitative methods and computing techniques. These cover mathematical and statistical methods, including econometrics. Students will have exposure to the use of such techniques on actual economic, financial or social data. A knowledge and appreciation of economic data, both quantitative and qualitative. Students should also have some knowledge of the appropriate methods that the economist might use to structure and analyse such data.
K3. The applications of economics. Students should have the ability to apply a core of economic principles and reasoning to a variety of applied topics. They should also be aware of the economic principles that can be used to design, guide and interpret commercial, economic and social policy. As part of this, they should have the ability to discuss and analyse government policy and to assess the performance of the UK and other economies.
The above implies that the attainments of students should show:
- Ability to apply core economic theory and economic reasoning to applied topics.
- Ability to relate differences in policy recommendations to differences in the theoretical and empirical features of economic analyses which underlie such recommendations.
- Ability to discuss and analyse government policy and to assess the performance of the UK and other economies.
- Understanding of verbal, graphical, mathematical and econometric representation of economic ideas and analysis, including the relationship between them.
- Understanding of relevant mathematical and statistical techniques.
- Understanding of analytical methods, both theory- and model-based.
- Appreciation of the history and development of economic ideas and the differing methods of analysis that have been and are used by economists.
- Understanding of the appropriate techniques to enable manipulation, treatment and interpretation of the relevant statistical data.
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
C1. Abstraction. From the study of economic principles and models, students see how one can abstract the essential features of complex systems and provide a useable framework for evaluation and assessment of the effects of policy or other exogenous events. Through this, the typical student will acquire proficiency in how to simplify while still retaining relevance. This is an approach that they can then apply in other contexts, thereby becoming more effective problem-solvers and decision-makers.
C2. Analysis, deduction and induction. Economic reasoning is highly deductive, and logical analysis is applied to assumption-based models. However, inductive reasoning is also important. The typical student will have been exposed to some or all of these and be able to use some of them. Such skills also enhance their problem-solving and decision-making ability.
C3. Quantification and design. Data, and their effective organization, presentation and analysis, are important in economics. The typical student will have some familiarity with the principal sources of economic information and data relevant to industry, commerce and government, and have had practice in organising it and presenting it informatively. This skill is important at all stages in the decision-making process.
C4. Framing. Through the study of economics, a student should learn how to decide what should be taken as given or fixed for the purposes of setting up and solving a problem, i.e. what the important 'parameters' are in constraining the solution to the problem. Learning to think about how and why these parameters might change encourages a student to place the economic problem in its broader social and political context. This `framing' skill is important in determining the decision-maker's ability to implement the solutions to problems.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
P1. Construct economic models using verbal, diagrammatic, mathematical, statistical and econometric techniques and reasoning.
P2. Access, search for and evaluate relevant data sources for validation of economic models.
P3. Apply and use specialised software including spreadsheets for the analysis of economic models.
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate the key skills of:
T1. Analysis and decision making.
T2. Communication.
T3. Numeracy and computation.
T4. IT, information handling and retrieval, including library skills.
T5. Independent study and group work.
T6. Time management.
T7. Problem solving.
4. Programme structure
Students must have a total modular weighting of 120 credits per year. This must include the compulsory modules. The remaining optional modules may be chosen to give a 60:60 split over the two semesters, or alternatively, 50:70 or 70:50.
The prefixes on module codes represent the credit levels as follows:
A level 4; B level 5; C level 6.
Candidates following the Placement Stream are required to spend the third academic year undertaking professional training leading to the Diploma in Professional Studies, in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
Candidates following the Study Abroad Stream are required to spend the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution leading to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
Candidates following the Split Stream are required to spend six months of the third academic year undertaking professional training, and the other half of the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution. This leads to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
4.1 Part A - Introductory Modules
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTER 1 and 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
ECA001 Principles of Macroeconomics | 20 |
ECA002 Principles of Microeconomics | 20 |
ECA003 Data Analysis | 20 |
ECA004 Quantitative Economics | 20 |
SEMESTER 1 OPTIONAL MODULES (CHOOSE TWO) | |
BSA505 Organisational Behaviour | 10 |
BSA525 Introduction to Accounting | 10 |
EUA620 The Contemporary World Arena | 10 |
GYA004 Geographies of Global Economic Change | 10 |
SSA001 Introduction to Sociology A | 10 |
SSA201 Introduction to Criminology and Social Policy A | 10 |
University Wide Languages Programme (see additional form) | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 OPTIONAL MODULES (CHOOSE TWO) | |
BSA025 Introduction to Law | 10 |
BSA506 Management of Human Resources | 10 |
BSA526 Accounting for Managers | 10 |
EUA607 Introduction to Democratic Government | 10 |
GYA104 Geographies of Identity | 10 |
SSA002 Introduction to Sociology B | 10 |
SSA202 Introduction to Criminology and Social Policy B | 10 |
University Wide Languages Programme (see additional form) | 10 |
Compulsory and optional modules must be taken such that the total modular weight for the year is 120 credits divided equally over each Semester, or split 70:50 or 50:70 over the two Semesters. Please note: Optional modules are subject to availability and timetable permitting. |
4.2 Part B - Degree Modules
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTER 1 and 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
ECB001 Intermediate Macroeconomics | 20 |
ECB002 Intermediate Microeconomics | 20 |
ECB003 Introduction to Econometrics | 20 |
ECB005 International Economic Relations | 20 |
SEMESTER 1 and 2 OPTIONAL MODULES | |
ECB004 Introduction to Finance | 20 |
ECB015 Economics of the Financial System | 20 |
ECB016 History of Economic Thought | 20 |
ECB030 Energy and the Environment | 20 |
SEMESTER 1 OPTIONAL MODULES | |
BSB560 Principles of Marketing | 10 |
BSB580 Operations Management | 10 |
ECB136 Transport Economics | 20 |
University Wide Languages Programme | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 OPTIONAL MODULES | |
BSB522 The Marketing Mix for Sport and Leisure | 10 |
ECB035 Economics of the Welfare State | 20 |
University Wide Languages Programme | 10 |
Compulsory and optional modules must be taken such that the total modular weight for the year is 120 credits divided equally over each Semester, or split 70:50 or 50:70 over the two Semesters. Please note: Optional modules are subject to availability and timetable permitting. |
4.3 Part I : Optional (8 semester programme only)
Candidates pursue one of the following streams:
The duration of the programme is either six semesters or six semesters plus one academic year if candidates select one of the following three streams:
Candidates following the Placement Stream are required to spend the third academic year undertaking professional training leading to the Diploma in Professional Studies, in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
Candidates following the Study Abroad Stream are required to spend the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution leading to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
Candidates following the Split Stream are required to spend six months of the third academic year undertaking professional training, and the other half of the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution. This leads to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
The third academic year (Part I) occurs between Part B and Part C. Permission to transfer to the eight semester programme will be at the discretion of the Associate Dean (Teaching) for the School.
4.4 Part C - Degree Modules
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTER 1 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
ECC142 Communication and Presentation Skills for Economics | 20 |
SEMESTER 1 and 2 COMPULSORY MODULES - You must choose at least two from the three listed: | |
ECC003 International Money and Finance (Semester 1) | 20 |
ECC031 International Trade (Semester 1) | 20 |
ECC119 Development Economics (Semester 2) | 20 |
SEMESTER 1 OPTIONAL MODULES | |
ECC004 Financial Economics and Asset Pricing | 20 |
ECC024 Time Series Econometrics | 20 |
ECC035 Central Banking and Economic Crises | 20 |
ECC101 Developments in Macroeconomics | 20 |
SEMESTER 2 OPTIONAL MODULES | |
ECC001 Developments in Microeconomics | 20 |
ECC005 Industrial Economics | 20 |
ECC050 Comparative Banking | 20 |
ECC124 Applied Microeconometrics | 20 |
ECC139 Environmental Economics | 20 |
ECC141 Corporate Finance and Derivatives | 20 |
Compulsory and optional modules must be taken such that the total modular weight for the year is 120 credits divided equally over each Semester. Please note: Optional modules are subject to availability and timetable permitting. |
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
5.1 Progression Criteria
In order to progress from Part A to Part B and from Part B to C and to be eligible for the award of an Honours degree, candidates must satisfy the minimum credit requirements set out in Regulation XX.
A Diploma in Professional Studies will be awarded to students who have satisfactorily completed the programme of study required for Part I.
5.2 Reassessment
Candidates must accumulate at least 60 credits in a Part of a Programme in order to be eligible for reassessment in the relevant Part during the University’s Special Assessment Period.
If a student registers to resit a module, they will be required to resit all failed components of that module (ie if their coursework mark was less than 40% they must resit the coursework and if their exam mark was less than 40% they must resit the exam). If a student resits the coursework element of a module and there was more than 1 coursework assignment for that module, then the student would be required to resit all coursework assignments in which they achieved a mark below 40%. Marks for elements of a module not being re-sat will be carried forward.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
Candidates' final degree classification will be determined on the basis of performance in degree level Module Assessments in Parts B and C in accordance with the scheme set out in Regulation XX of the University Regulations. The average percentage marks for each Part will be combined in the ratio Part B 30% : Part C 70% to determine the final Programme Mark.
Programme Specification
BS BSc (Hons) Economics (2017 entry)
Academic Year: 2017/18
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at 天堂视频 (available soon)
- What makes 天堂视频 programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | 天堂视频 |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | School of Business and Economics |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | |
Final award | BSc / BSc+DPS / BSc+DIntS |
Programme title | Economics |
Programme code | ECUB04 |
Length of programme | The duration of the programme is either six semesters or six semesters plus one academic year if candidates select one of the available part I streams. The third academic year (Part I) occurs between Part B and Part C. Permission to transfer to the eight semester programme will be at the discretion of the Programme Director (Economics). See Programme Structure for further details of eight semester streams. |
UCAS code | L100 Economics (3 years) L10A Economics (4 years sandwich) |
Admissions criteria | http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/undergraduate/courses/departments/business-economics/economics/ |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- Know and understand the core of economic theory and applied economics.
- Know and understand the behaviour of firms and consumers in the national and international economy.
- Discuss in an informed manner the major policy directions and regulations for the implementation of economic policy.
- Know and understand the nature of incentives in economic decision making by agents in the economy.
- Evaluate the outcomes of market and policy changes in all spheres of the economy.
- To provide specialised training in the aspects of economics relevant to the international economy including trade, finance and development.
- To provide training in the principles of economics and their application.
- To stimulate students intellectually through the study of economics and to lead them to appreciate its application to a range of problems and its relevance in a variety of contexts.
- To provide a firm foundation of knowledge about the workings of the economy and to develop the relevant skills for the constructive use of that knowledge in a range of settings.
- To develop in students the ability to apply the knowledge and skills they have acquired to the solution of theoretical and applied problems in economics.
- To equip students with appropriate tools of analysis to tackle issues and problems of economic policy.
- To develop in students, through the study of economics, a range of transferable skills that will be of value in employment and self-employment.
- To provide students with analytical skills and an ability to develop simplifying frameworks for studying the real world.
- To develop in students the ability to appreciate what would be an appropriate level of abstraction for a range of economic issues.
- To provide students with the knowledge and skill base, from which they can proceed to further studies in economics, related areas or in multi-disciplinary areas that involve economics.
- To generate in students an appreciation of the economic dimension of wider social and political issues.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
- QAA Subject Benchmark Statements: Economics.
- Framework for Higher Education Qualifications.
- International links with a network of eleven European Universities within the Erasmus exchange programme.
- University Learning and Teaching Strategy.
- Departmental learning and teaching policies.
- Links, both formal and informal, with external examiners.
- Staff research specialisms and professional involvement in the discipline.
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding of:
K1. A coherent core of economic principles. The understanding of these might be verbal, graphical or mathematical.
These principles will cover the microeconomic issues of decision and choice, the production and exchange of goods, the interdependency of markets, and economic welfare. They also include macroeconomic issues, such as employment, national income, the balance of payments and the distribution of income, inflation, growth and business cycles, money and finance. The understanding should extend to economic policy at both the microeconomic and macroeconomic levels. In all these, students should show an understanding of analytical methods and model-based argument and should appreciate the existence of different methodological approaches.
K2. Relevant quantitative methods and computing techniques. These are likely to cover mathematical and statistical methods, including econometrics. Students will have exposure to the use of such techniques on actual economic, financial or social data. A knowledge and appreciation of economic data, both quantitative and qualitative. Students should also have some knowledge of the appropriate methods that the economist might use to structure and analyse such data.
K3. The applications of economics. Students should have the ability to apply a core of economic principles and reasoning to a variety of applied topics. They should also be aware of the economic principles that can be used to design, guide and interpret commercial, economic and social policy. As part of this, they should have the ability to discuss and analyse government policy and to assess the performance of the UK and other economies.
Specific applications to financial economics. Students should have the ability to analyse financial markets and the industrial organization of firms.
The above implies that the attainments of students should be:
- Ability to apply core economic theory and economic reasoning to applied topics.
- Ability to relate differences in economic policy recommendations to differences in the theoretical and empirical features of the economic analysis, that underlies such recommendations.
- Ability to discuss and analyse government policy and to assess the performance of the UK and other economies.
- Understanding of verbal, graphical, mathematical and econometric representation of economic ideas and analysis, including the relationships between them.
- Understanding of relevant mathematical and statistical techniques.
- Understanding of analytical methods, both theory- and model-based.
- Appreciation of the history and development of economic ideas and the differing methods of analysis that have been and are used by economists.
- Understanding of the appropriate techniques to enable manipulation, treatment and interpretation of relevant statistical data.
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
C1. Abstraction. From the study of economic principles and models, students see how one can abstract the essential features of complex systems and provide a useable framework for evaluation and assessment of the effects of policy or other exogenous events. Through this, the typical student will acquire proficiency in how to simplify while still retaining relevance. This is an approach that they can then apply in other contexts, thereby becoming more effective problem-solvers and decision-makers.
C2. Analysis, deduction and induction. Economic reasoning is highly deductive, and logical analysis is applied to assumption-based models. However, inductive reasoning is also important. The typical student will have been exposed to some or all of these and be able to use some of them. Such skills also enhance their problem-solving and decision-making ability.
C3. Quantification and design. Data, and their effective organization, presentation and analysis, are important in economics. The typical student will have some familiarity with the principal sources of economic information and data relevant to industry, commerce and government, and have had practice in organising it and presenting it informatively. This skill is important at all stages in the decision-making process.
C4. Framing. Through the study of economics, a student should learn how to decide what should be taken as given or fixed for the purposes of setting up and solving a problem, i.e. what the important 'parameters' are in constraining the solution to the problem. Learning to think about how and why these parameters might change encourages a student to place the economic problem in its broader social and political context. This `framing' skill is important in determining the decision-maker's ability to implement the solutions to problems.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
P1. Construct economic models using verbal, diagrammatic, mathematical, statistical and econometric techniques and reasoning.
P2. Access, search for and evaluate relevant data sources for validation of economic models
P3. Apply and use specialised software including spreadsheets for the analysis of economic models.
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate the key skills of,
T1. Analysis and decision making.
T2. Communication, both written and verbal.
T3. Numeracy and computation.
T4. IT, information handling and retrieval, including library skills.
T5. Independent study and group work.
T6. Time management.
T7. Problem solving.
4. Programme structure
Students must have a total modular weighting of 120 credits per year. This must include the compulsory modules. The remaining optional modules may be chosen to give a 60:60 split over the two semesters, or alternatively, 50:70 or 70:50.
The prefixes on module codes represent the credit levels as follows:
A level 4; B level 5; C level 6.
Candidates following the Placement Stream are required to spend the third academic year undertaking professional training leading to the Diploma in Professional Studies, in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
Candidates following the Study Abroad Stream are required to spend the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution leading to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
Candidates following the Split Stream are required to spend six months of the third academic year undertaking professional training, and the other half of the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution. This leads to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
4.1 Part A - Economics Introductory Modules
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTER 1 and 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
ECA001 Principles of Macroeconomics | 20 |
ECA002 Principles of Microeconomics | 20 |
ECA003 Data Analysis I (Semester 1) | 10 |
ECA004 Quantitative Economics | 20 |
ECA005 Data Analysis II (Semester 2) | 10 |
BSA008 Skills for Study and Employment (Semester 2) | 10 |
SEMESTER 1 OPTIONAL MODULES | |
BSA505 Organisational Behaviour | 10 |
BSA525 Introduction to Accounting | 10 |
EUA607 Introduction to Democratic Government | 10 |
GYA002 Geographies of Global Economic Change | 20 |
SSA001 Introduction to Sociology A | 10 |
SSA201 Introduction to Criminology and Social Policy A | 10 |
University Wide Languages Programme (see additional form) | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 OPTIONAL MODULES | |
BSA026 Principles of Law | 10 |
BSA506 Management of Human Resources | 10 |
EUA614 Political Ideologies | 10 |
GYA104 Geographies of Identity | 10 |
SSA002 Introduction to Sociology B | 10 |
SSA202 Introduction to Criminology and Social Policy B | 10 |
University Wide Languages Programme (see additional form) | 10 |
Compulsory and optional modules must be taken such that the total modular weight for the year is 120 credits divided equally over each Semester, or split 70:50 or 50:70 over the two Semesters. Please note: Optional modules are subject to availability and timetable permitting. |
2.2 Part B - Degree Modules
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTER 1 and 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
ECB001 Intermediate Macroeconomics | 20 |
ECB002 Intermediate Microeconomics | 20 |
ECB003 Introduction to Econometrics | 20 |
SEMESTER 1 and 2 OPTIONAL MODULES | |
ECB004 Introduction to Financial Economics | 20 |
ECB005 International Economic Relations | 20 |
ECB015 Economics of the Financial System | 20 |
ECB016 History of Economic Thought | 20 |
SEMESTER 1 OPTIONAL MODULES | |
BSB560 Principles of Marketing | 10 |
BSB580 Operations Management | 10 |
ECB136 Transport Economics | 20 |
University Wide Languages Programme | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 OPTIONAL MODULES | |
BSB532 Accounting for Managers | 10 |
BSB562 The Marketing Mix | 10 |
ECB035 The Economics of Social Issues | 20 |
University Wide Languages Programme | 10 |
Compulsory and optional modules must be taken such that the total modular weight for the year is 120 credits divided equally over each Semester, or split 70:50 or 50:70 over the two Semesters. Please note: Optional modules are subject to availability and timetable permitting. |
4.3 Part I : Optional (8 semester programme only)
Candidates pursue one of the following streams:
The duration of the programme is either six semesters or six semesters plus one academic year if candidates select one of the following three streams:
Candidates following the Placement Stream are required to spend the third academic year undertaking professional training leading to the Diploma in Professional Studies, in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
Candidates following the Study Abroad Stream are required to spend the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution leading to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
Candidates following the Split Stream are required to spend six months of the third academic year undertaking professional training, and the other half of the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution. This leads to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
The third academic year (Part I) occurs between Part B and Part C. Permission to transfer to the eight semester programme will be at the discretion of the Associate Dean (Teaching) for the School.
4.4 Part C - Degree Modules
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTER 2 COMPULSORY MODULE | |
ECC142 Research and Communication Skills for Economists | 20 |
COMPULSORY MODULES - You must choose at least two from the three listed: | |
ECC038 Applied Econometrics (Semester 1 and 2) | 20 |
ECC101 Developments in Macroeconomics (Semester 1) | 20 |
ECC001 Developments in Microeconomics (Semester 1) | 20 |
SEMESTER 1 OPTIONAL MODULES | |
ECC003 International Money and Finance | 20 |
ECC004 Financial Economics and Asset Pricing | 20 |
ECC031 International Trade | 20 |
SEMESTER 2 OPTIONAL MODULES | |
ECC005 Industrial Economics | 20 |
ECC035 Central Banking and Financial Crises | 20 |
ECC119 Development Economics | 20 |
ECC139 Environmental Economics | 20 |
ECC141 Corporate Finance and Derivatives | 20 |
Compulsory and optional modules must be taken such that the total modular weight for the year is 120 credits divided equally over each Semester. Please note: Optional modules are subject to availability and timetable permitting. |
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
5.1 Criteria for Progression
In order to progress from Part A to Part B and from Part B to C and to be eligible for the award of an Honours degree, candidates must satisfy the minimum credit requirements set out in Regulation XX.
A Diploma in Professional Studies will be awarded to students who have satisfactorily completed the programme of study required for Part I.
5.2 Reassessment
Candidates must accumulate at least 60 credits in a Part of a Programme in order to be eligible for reassessment in the relevant Part during the University’s Special Assessment Period.
If a student registers to resit a module, they will be required to resit all failed components of that module (ie if their coursework mark was less than 40% they must resit the coursework and if their exam mark was less than 40% they must resit the exam). If a student resits the coursework element of a module and there was more than 1 coursework assignment for that module, then the student would be required to resit all coursework assignments in which they achieved a mark below 40%. Marks for elements of a module not being re-sat will be carried forward.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
Candidates' final degree classification will be determined on the basis of performance in degree level Module Assessments in Parts B and C in accordance with the scheme set out in Regulation XX of the University Regulations. The average percentage marks for each Part will be combined in the ratio Part B 30% : Part C 70% to determine the final Programme Mark.
Programme Specification
BS BSc (Hons) Economics (2016 entry)
Academic Year: 2017/18
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at 天堂视频 (available soon)
- What makes 天堂视频 programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | 天堂视频 |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | School of Business and Economics |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | |
Final award | BSc / BSc+DPS / BSc+DIntS |
Programme title | Economics |
Programme code | ECUB04 |
Length of programme | The duration of the programme is either six semesters or six semesters plus one academic year if candidates select one of the available part I streams. The third academic year (Part I) occurs between Part B and Part C. Permission to transfer to the eight semester programme will be at the discretion of the Programme Director (Economics). See Programme Structure for further details of eight semester streams. |
UCAS code | L100 Economics (3 years) L10A Economics (4 years sandwich) |
Admissions criteria | http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/undergraduate/courses/departments/business-economics/economics/ |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- Know and understand the core of economic theory and applied economics.
- Know and understand the behaviour of firms and consumers in the national and international economy.
- Discuss in an informed manner the major policy directions and regulations for the implementation of economic policy.
- Know and understand the nature of incentives in economic decision making by agents in the economy.
- Evaluate the outcomes of market and policy changes in all spheres of the economy.
- To provide specialised training in the aspects of economics relevant to the international economy including trade, finance and development.
- To provide training in the principles of economics and their application.
- To stimulate students intellectually through the study of economics and to lead them to appreciate its application to a range of problems and its relevance in a variety of contexts.
- To provide a firm foundation of knowledge about the workings of the economy and to develop the relevant skills for the constructive use of that knowledge in a range of settings.
- To develop in students the ability to apply the knowledge and skills they have acquired to the solution of theoretical and applied problems in economics.
- To equip students with appropriate tools of analysis to tackle issues and problems of economic policy.
- To develop in students, through the study of economics, a range of transferable skills that will be of value in employment and self-employment.
- To provide students with analytical skills and an ability to develop simplifying frameworks for studying the real world.
- To develop in students the ability to appreciate what would be an appropriate level of abstraction for a range of economic issues.
- To provide students with the knowledge and skill base, from which they can proceed to further studies in economics, related areas or in multi-disciplinary areas that involve economics.
- To generate in students an appreciation of the economic dimension of wider social and political issues.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
- QAA Subject Benchmark Statements: Economics.
- Framework for Higher Education Qualifications.
- International links with a network of eleven European Universities within the Erasmus exchange programme.
- University Learning and Teaching Strategy.
- Departmental learning and teaching policies.
- Links, both formal and informal, with external examiners.
- Staff research specialisms and professional involvement in the discipline.
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding of:
K1. A coherent core of economic principles. The understanding of these might be verbal, graphical or mathematical.
These principles will cover the microeconomic issues of decision and choice, the production and exchange of goods, the interdependency of markets, and economic welfare. They also include macroeconomic issues, such as employment, national income, the balance of payments and the distribution of income, inflation, growth and business cycles, money and finance. The understanding should extend to economic policy at both the microeconomic and macroeconomic levels. In all these, students should show an understanding of analytical methods and model-based argument and should appreciate the existence of different methodological approaches.
K2. Relevant quantitative methods and computing techniques. These are likely to cover mathematical and statistical methods, including econometrics. Students will have exposure to the use of such techniques on actual economic, financial or social data. A knowledge and appreciation of economic data, both quantitative and qualitative. Students should also have some knowledge of the appropriate methods that the economist might use to structure and analyse such data.
K3. The applications of economics. Students should have the ability to apply a core of economic principles and reasoning to a variety of applied topics. They should also be aware of the economic principles that can be used to design, guide and interpret commercial, economic and social policy. As part of this, they should have the ability to discuss and analyse government policy and to assess the performance of the UK and other economies.
Specific applications to financial economics. Students should have the ability to analyse financial markets and the industrial organization of firms.
The above implies that the attainments of students should be:
- Ability to apply core economic theory and economic reasoning to applied topics.
- Ability to relate differences in economic policy recommendations to differences in the theoretical and empirical features of the economic analysis, that underlies such recommendations.
- Ability to discuss and analyse government policy and to assess the performance of the UK and other economies.
- Understanding of verbal, graphical, mathematical and econometric representation of economic ideas and analysis, including the relationships between them.
- Understanding of relevant mathematical and statistical techniques.
- Understanding of analytical methods, both theory- and model-based.
- Appreciation of the history and development of economic ideas and the differing methods of analysis that have been and are used by economists.
- Understanding of the appropriate techniques to enable manipulation, treatment and interpretation of relevant statistical data.
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
C1. Abstraction. From the study of economic principles and models, students see how one can abstract the essential features of complex systems and provide a useable framework for evaluation and assessment of the effects of policy or other exogenous events. Through this, the typical student will acquire proficiency in how to simplify while still retaining relevance. This is an approach that they can then apply in other contexts, thereby becoming more effective problem-solvers and decision-makers.
C2. Analysis, deduction and induction. Economic reasoning is highly deductive, and logical analysis is applied to assumption-based models. However, inductive reasoning is also important. The typical student will have been exposed to some or all of these and be able to use some of them. Such skills also enhance their problem-solving and decision-making ability.
C3. Quantification and design. Data, and their effective organization, presentation and analysis, are important in economics. The typical student will have some familiarity with the principal sources of economic information and data relevant to industry, commerce and government, and have had practice in organising it and presenting it informatively. This skill is important at all stages in the decision-making process.
C4. Framing. Through the study of economics, a student should learn how to decide what should be taken as given or fixed for the purposes of setting up and solving a problem, i.e. what the important 'parameters' are in constraining the solution to the problem. Learning to think about how and why these parameters might change encourages a student to place the economic problem in its broader social and political context. This `framing' skill is important in determining the decision-maker's ability to implement the solutions to problems.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
P1. Construct economic models using verbal, diagrammatic, mathematical, statistical and econometric techniques and reasoning.
P2. Access, search for and evaluate relevant data sources for validation of economic models
P3. Apply and use specialised software including spreadsheets for the analysis of economic models.
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate the key skills of,
T1. Analysis and decision making.
T2. Communication, both written and verbal.
T3. Numeracy and computation.
T4. IT, information handling and retrieval, including library skills.
T5. Independent study and group work.
T6. Time management.
T7. Problem solving.
4. Programme structure
Students must have a total modular weighting of 120 credits per year. This must include the compulsory modules. The remaining optional modules may be chosen to give a 60:60 split over the two semesters, or alternatively, 50:70 or 70:50.
The prefixes on module codes represent the credit levels as follows:
A level 4; B level 5; C level 6.
Candidates following the Placement Stream are required to spend the third academic year undertaking professional training leading to the Diploma in Professional Studies, in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
Candidates following the Study Abroad Stream are required to spend the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution leading to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
Candidates following the Split Stream are required to spend six months of the third academic year undertaking professional training, and the other half of the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution. This leads to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
4.1 Part A - Economics Introductory Modules
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTER 1 and 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
ECA001 Principles of Macroeconomics | 20 |
ECA002 Principles of Microeconomics | 20 |
ECA003 Data Analysis I (Semester 1) | 10 |
ECA004 Quantitative Economics | 20 |
ECA005 Data Analysis II (Semester 2) | 10 |
BSA008 Skills for Study and Employment (Semester 2) | 10 |
SEMESTER 1 OPTIONAL MODULES | |
BSA505 Organisational Behaviour | 10 |
BSA525 Introduction to Accounting | 10 |
EUA607 Introduction to Democratic Government | 10 |
GYA002 Geographies of Global Economic Change | 20 |
SSA001 Introduction to Sociology A | 10 |
SSA201 Introduction to Criminology and Social Policy A | 10 |
University Wide Languages Programme (see additional form) | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 OPTIONAL MODULES | |
BSA026 Principles of Law | 10 |
BSA506 Management of Human Resources | 10 |
EUA614 Political Ideologies | 10 |
GYA104 Geographies of Identity | 10 |
SSA002 Introduction to Sociology B | 10 |
SSA202 Introduction to Criminology and Social Policy B | 10 |
University Wide Languages Programme (see additional form) | 10 |
Compulsory and optional modules must be taken such that the total modular weight for the year is 120 credits divided equally over each Semester, or split 70:50 or 50:70 over the two Semesters. Please note: Optional modules are subject to availability and timetable permitting. |
2.2 Part B - Degree Modules
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTER 1 and 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
ECB001 Intermediate Macroeconomics | 20 |
ECB002 Intermediate Microeconomics | 20 |
ECB003 Introduction to Econometrics | 20 |
SEMESTER 1 and 2 OPTIONAL MODULES | |
ECB004 Introduction to Financial Economics | 20 |
ECB005 International Economic Relations | 20 |
ECB015 Economics of the Financial System | 20 |
ECB016 History of Economic Thought | 20 |
SEMESTER 1 OPTIONAL MODULES | |
BSB560 Principles of Marketing | 10 |
BSB580 Operations Management | 10 |
ECB136 Transport Economics | 20 |
University Wide Languages Programme | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 OPTIONAL MODULES | |
BSB532 Accounting for Managers | 10 |
BSB562 The Marketing Mix | 10 |
ECB035 The Economics of Social Issues | 20 |
University Wide Languages Programme | 10 |
Compulsory and optional modules must be taken such that the total modular weight for the year is 120 credits divided equally over each Semester, or split 70:50 or 50:70 over the two Semesters. Please note: Optional modules are subject to availability and timetable permitting. |
4.3 Part I : Optional (8 semester programme only)
Candidates pursue one of the following streams:
The duration of the programme is either six semesters or six semesters plus one academic year if candidates select one of the following three streams:
Candidates following the Placement Stream are required to spend the third academic year undertaking professional training leading to the Diploma in Professional Studies, in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
Candidates following the Study Abroad Stream are required to spend the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution leading to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
Candidates following the Split Stream are required to spend six months of the third academic year undertaking professional training, and the other half of the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution. This leads to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
The third academic year (Part I) occurs between Part B and Part C. Permission to transfer to the eight semester programme will be at the discretion of the Associate Dean (Teaching) for the School.
4.4 Part C - Degree Modules
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTER 2 COMPULSORY MODULE | |
ECC142 Research and Communication Skills for Economists | 20 |
COMPULSORY MODULES - You must choose at least two from the three listed: | |
ECC038 Applied Econometrics (Semester 1 and 2) | 20 |
ECC101 Developments in Macroeconomics (Semester 1) | 20 |
ECC001 Developments in Microeconomics (Semester 1) | 20 |
SEMESTER 1 OPTIONAL MODULES | |
ECC003 International Money and Finance | 20 |
ECC004 Financial Economics and Asset Pricing | 20 |
ECC031 International Trade | 20 |
SEMESTER 2 OPTIONAL MODULES | |
ECC005 Industrial Economics | 20 |
ECC035 Central Banking and Financial Crises | 20 |
ECC119 Development Economics | 20 |
ECC139 Environmental Economics | 20 |
ECC141 Corporate Finance and Derivatives | 20 |
Compulsory and optional modules must be taken such that the total modular weight for the year is 120 credits divided equally over each Semester. Please note: Optional modules are subject to availability and timetable permitting. |
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
5.1 Criteria for Progression
In order to progress from Part A to Part B and from Part B to C and to be eligible for the award of an Honours degree, candidates must satisfy the minimum credit requirements set out in Regulation XX.
A Diploma in Professional Studies will be awarded to students who have satisfactorily completed the programme of study required for Part I.
5.2 Reassessment
Candidates must accumulate at least 60 credits in a Part of a Programme in order to be eligible for reassessment in the relevant Part during the University’s Special Assessment Period.
If a student registers to resit a module, they will be required to resit all failed components of that module (ie if their coursework mark was less than 40% they must resit the coursework and if their exam mark was less than 40% they must resit the exam). If a student resits the coursework element of a module and there was more than 1 coursework assignment for that module, then the student would be required to resit all coursework assignments in which they achieved a mark below 40%. Marks for elements of a module not being re-sat will be carried forward.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
Candidates' final degree classification will be determined on the basis of performance in degree level Module Assessments in Parts B and C in accordance with the scheme set out in Regulation XX of the University Regulations. The average percentage marks for each Part will be combined in the ratio Part B 30% : Part C 70% to determine the final Programme Mark.
Programme Specification
BS BSc (Hons) Economics (2015 entry)
Academic Year: 2017/18
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at 天堂视频 (available soon)
- What makes 天堂视频 programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | 天堂视频 |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | School of Business and Economics |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | |
Final award | BSc / BSc+DPS / BSc+DIntS |
Programme title | Economics |
Programme code | ECUB04 |
Length of programme | The duration of the programme is either six semesters or six semesters plus one academic year if candidates select one of the available part I streams. The third academic year (Part I) occurs between Part B and Part C. Permission to transfer to the eight semester programme will be at the discretion of the Programme Director (Economics). See Programme Structure for further details of eight semester streams. |
UCAS code | L100 Economics (3 years) L10A Economics (4 years sandwich) |
Admissions criteria | http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/undergraduate/courses/departments/business-economics/economics/ |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- Know and understand the core of economic theory and applied economics.
- Know and understand the behaviour of firms and consumers in the national and international economy.
- Discuss in an informed manner the major policy directions and regulations for the implementation of economic policy.
- Know and understand the nature of incentives in economic decision making by agents in the economy.
- Evaluate the outcomes of market and policy changes in all spheres of the economy.
- To provide specialised training in the aspects of economics relevant to the international economy including trade, finance and development.
- To provide training in the principles of economics and their application.
- To stimulate students intellectually through the study of economics and to lead them to appreciate its application to a range of problems and its relevance in a variety of contexts.
- To provide a firm foundation of knowledge about the workings of the economy and to develop the relevant skills for the constructive use of that knowledge in a range of settings.
- To develop in students the ability to apply the knowledge and skills they have acquired to the solution of theoretical and applied problems in economics.
- To equip students with appropriate tools of analysis to tackle issues and problems of economic policy.
- To develop in students, through the study of economics, a range of transferable skills that will be of value in employment and self-employment.
- To provide students with analytical skills and an ability to develop simplifying frameworks for studying the real world.
- To develop in students the ability to appreciate what would be an appropriate level of abstraction for a range of economic issues.
- To provide students with the knowledge and skill base, from which they can proceed to further studies in economics, related areas or in multi-disciplinary areas that involve economics.
- To generate in students an appreciation of the economic dimension of wider social and political issues.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
- QAA Subject Benchmark Statements: Economics.
- Framework for Higher Education Qualifications.
- International links with a network of eleven European Universities within the Erasmus exchange programme.
- University Learning and Teaching Strategy.
- Departmental learning and teaching policies.
- Links, both formal and informal, with external examiners.
- Staff research specialisms and professional involvement in the discipline.
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding of:
K1. A coherent core of economic principles. The understanding of these might be verbal, graphical or mathematical.
These principles will cover the microeconomic issues of decision and choice, the production and exchange of goods, the interdependency of markets, and economic welfare. They also include macroeconomic issues, such as employment, national income, the balance of payments and the distribution of income, inflation, growth and business cycles, money and finance. The understanding should extend to economic policy at both the microeconomic and macroeconomic levels. In all these, students should show an understanding of analytical methods and model-based argument and should appreciate the existence of different methodological approaches.
K2. Relevant quantitative methods and computing techniques. These are likely to cover mathematical and statistical methods, including econometrics. Students will have exposure to the use of such techniques on actual economic, financial or social data. A knowledge and appreciation of economic data, both quantitative and qualitative. Students should also have some knowledge of the appropriate methods that the economist might use to structure and analyse such data.
K3. The applications of economics. Students should have the ability to apply a core of economic principles and reasoning to a variety of applied topics. They should also be aware of the economic principles that can be used to design, guide and interpret commercial, economic and social policy. As part of this, they should have the ability to discuss and analyse government policy and to assess the performance of the UK and other economies.
Specific applications to financial economics. Students should have the ability to analyse financial markets and the industrial organization of firms.
The above implies that the attainments of students should be:
- Ability to apply core economic theory and economic reasoning to applied topics.
- Ability to relate differences in economic policy recommendations to differences in the theoretical and empirical features of the economic analysis, that underlies such recommendations.
- Ability to discuss and analyse government policy and to assess the performance of the UK and other economies.
- Understanding of verbal, graphical, mathematical and econometric representation of economic ideas and analysis, including the relationships between them.
- Understanding of relevant mathematical and statistical techniques.
- Understanding of analytical methods, both theory- and model-based.
- Appreciation of the history and development of economic ideas and the differing methods of analysis that have been and are used by economists.
- Understanding of the appropriate techniques to enable manipulation, treatment and interpretation of relevant statistical data.
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
C1. Abstraction. From the study of economic principles and models, students see how one can abstract the essential features of complex systems and provide a useable framework for evaluation and assessment of the effects of policy or other exogenous events. Through this, the typical student will acquire proficiency in how to simplify while still retaining relevance. This is an approach that they can then apply in other contexts, thereby becoming more effective problem-solvers and decision-makers.
C2. Analysis, deduction and induction. Economic reasoning is highly deductive, and logical analysis is applied to assumption-based models. However, inductive reasoning is also important. The typical student will have been exposed to some or all of these and be able to use some of them. Such skills also enhance their problem-solving and decision-making ability.
C3. Quantification and design. Data, and their effective organization, presentation and analysis, are important in economics. The typical student will have some familiarity with the principal sources of economic information and data relevant to industry, commerce and government, and have had practice in organising it and presenting it informatively. This skill is important at all stages in the decision-making process.
C4. Framing. Through the study of economics, a student should learn how to decide what should be taken as given or fixed for the purposes of setting up and solving a problem, i.e. what the important 'parameters' are in constraining the solution to the problem. Learning to think about how and why these parameters might change encourages a student to place the economic problem in its broader social and political context. This `framing' skill is important in determining the decision-maker's ability to implement the solutions to problems.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
P1. Construct economic models using verbal, diagrammatic, mathematical, statistical and econometric techniques and reasoning.
P2. Access, search for and evaluate relevant data sources for validation of economic models
P3. Apply and use specialised software including spreadsheets for the analysis of economic models.
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate the key skills of,
T1. Analysis and decision making.
T2. Communication, both written and verbal.
T3. Numeracy and computation.
T4. IT, information handling and retrieval, including library skills.
T5. Independent study and group work.
T6. Time management.
T7. Problem solving.
4. Programme structure
Students must have a total modular weighting of 120 credits per year. This must include the compulsory modules. The remaining optional modules may be chosen to give a 60:60 split over the two semesters, or alternatively, 50:70 or 70:50.
The prefixes on module codes represent the credit levels as follows:
A level 4; B level 5; C level 6.
Candidates following the Placement Stream are required to spend the third academic year undertaking professional training leading to the Diploma in Professional Studies, in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
Candidates following the Study Abroad Stream are required to spend the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution leading to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
Candidates following the Split Stream are required to spend six months of the third academic year undertaking professional training, and the other half of the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution. This leads to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
4.1 Part A - Economics Introductory Modules
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTER 1 and 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
ECA001 Principles of Macroeconomics | 20 |
ECA002 Principles of Microeconomics | 20 |
ECA003 Data Analysis I (Semester 1) | 10 |
ECA004 Quantitative Economics | 20 |
ECA005 Data Analysis II (Semester 2) | 10 |
BSA008 Skills for Study and Employment (Semester 2) | 10 |
SEMESTER 1 OPTIONAL MODULES (CHOOSE TWO) | |
BSA505 Organisational Behaviour | 10 |
BSA525 Introduction to Accounting | 10 |
EUA607 Introduction to Democratic Government | 10 |
GYA004 Geographies of Global Economic Change | 10 |
SSA001 Introduction to Sociology A | 10 |
SSA201 Introduction to Criminology and Social Policy A | 10 |
University Wide Languages Programme (see additional form) | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 OPTIONAL MODULES (CHOOSE TWO) | |
BSA026 Principles of Law | 10 |
BSA506 Management of Human Resources | 10 |
BSA526 Accounting for Managers | 10 |
GYA104 Geographies of Identity | 10 |
SSA002 Introduction to Sociology B | 10 |
SSA202 Introduction to Criminology and Social Policy B | 10 |
University Wide Languages Programme (see additional form) | 10 |
Compulsory and optional modules must be taken such that the total modular weight for the year is 120 credits divided equally over each Semester, or split 70:50 or 50:70 over the two Semesters. Please note: Optional modules are subject to availability and timetable permitting. |
2.2 Part B - Degree Modules
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTER 1 and 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
ECB001 Intermediate Macroeconomics | 20 |
ECB002 Intermediate Microeconomics | 20 |
ECB003 Introduction to Econometrics | 20 |
SEMESTER 1 and 2 OPTIONAL MODULES | |
ECB004 Introduction to Financial Economics | 20 |
ECB005 International Economic Relations | 20 |
ECB015 Economics of the Financial System | 20 |
ECB016 History of Economic Thought | 20 |
ECB030 Energy and the Environment | 20 |
SEMESTER 1 OPTIONAL MODULES | |
BSB560 Principles of Marketing | 10 |
BSB580 Operations Management | 10 |
ECB136 Transport Economics | 20 |
University-Wide Languages Programme | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 OPTIONAL MODULES | |
BSB562 The Marketing Mix | 10 |
ECB035 The Economics of Social Issues | 20 |
University-Wide Languages Programme | 10 |
Compulsory and optional modules must be taken such that the total modular weight for the year is 120 credits divided equally over each Semester, or split 70:50 or 50:70 over the two Semesters. Please note: Optional modules are subject to availability and timetable permitting. |
4.3 Part I : Optional (8 semester programme only)
Candidates pursue one of the following streams:
The duration of the programme is either six semesters or six semesters plus one academic year if candidates select one of the following three streams:
Candidates following the Placement Stream are required to spend the third academic year undertaking professional training leading to the Diploma in Professional Studies, in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
Candidates following the Study Abroad Stream are required to spend the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution leading to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
Candidates following the Split Stream are required to spend six months of the third academic year undertaking professional training, and the other half of the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution. This leads to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
The third academic year (Part I) occurs between Part B and Part C. Permission to transfer to the eight semester programme will be at the discretion of the Associate Dean (Teaching) for the School.
4.4 Part C - Degree Modules
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTER 2 COMPULSORY MODULE | |
ECC142 Research and Communication Skills for Economists | 20 |
COMPULSORY MODULES - You must choose at least two from the three listed: | |
ECC001 Developments in Microeconomics (Semester 2) | 20 |
ECC038 Applied Econometrics (Semesters 1 and 2) | 20 |
ECC101 Developments in Macroeconomics (Semester 1) | 20 |
SEMESTER 1 OPTIONAL MODULES | |
ECC003 International Money and Finance | 20 |
ECC004 Financial Economics and Asset Pricing | 20 |
ECC031 International Trade | 20 |
SEMESTER 2 OPTIONAL MODULES | |
ECC005 Industrial Economics | 20 |
ECC035 Central Banking and Financial Crises | 20 |
ECC119 Development Economics | 20 |
ECC139 Environmental Economics | 20 |
ECC141 Corporate Finance and Derivatives | 20 |
Compulsory and optional modules must be taken such that the total modular weight for the year is 120 credits divided equally over each Semester. Please note: Optional modules are subject to availability and timetable permitting. |
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
5.1 Criteria for Progression
In order to progress from Part A to Part B and from Part B to C and to be eligible for the award of an Honours degree, candidates must satisfy the minimum credit requirements set out in Regulation XX.
A Diploma in Professional Studies will be awarded to students who have satisfactorily completed the programme of study required for Part I.
5.2 Reassessment
Candidates must accumulate at least 60 credits in a Part of a Programme in order to be eligible for reassessment in the relevant Part during the University’s Special Assessment Period.
If a student registers to resit a module, they will be required to resit all failed components of that module (ie if their coursework mark was less than 40% they must resit the coursework and if their exam mark was less than 40% they must resit the exam). If a student resits the coursework element of a module and there was more than 1 coursework assignment for that module, then the student would be required to resit all coursework assignments in which they achieved a mark below 40%. Marks for elements of a module not being re-sat will be carried forward.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
Candidates' final degree classification will be determined on the basis of performance in degree level Module Assessments in Parts B and C in accordance with the scheme set out in Regulation XX of the University Regulations. The average percentage marks for each Part will be combined in the ratio Part B 30% : Part C 70% to determine the final Programme Mark.
Programme Specification
BS BSc (Hons) Economics (2014 entry)
Academic Year: 2017/18
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at 天堂视频 (available soon)
- What makes 天堂视频 programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | 天堂视频 |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | School of Business and Economics |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | |
Final award | BSc / BSc+DPS / BSc+DIntS |
Programme title | Economics |
Programme code | ECUB04 |
Length of programme | The duration of the programme is either six semesters or six semesters plus one academic year if candidates select one of the available part I streams. The third academic year (Part I) occurs between Part B and Part C. Permission to transfer to the eight semester programme will be at the discretion of the Programme Director (Economics). See Programme Structure for further details of eight semester streams. |
UCAS code | L100 Economics (3 years) L10A Economics (4 years sandwich) |
Admissions criteria | http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/undergraduate/courses/departments/business-economics/economics/ |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- Know and understand the core of economic theory and applied economics.
- Know and understand the behaviour of firms and consumers in the national and international economy.
- Discuss in an informed manner the major policy directions and regulations for the implementation of economic policy.
- Know and understand the nature of incentives in economic decision making by agents in the economy.
- Evaluate the outcomes of market and policy changes in all spheres of the economy.
- To provide specialised training in the aspects of economics relevant to the international economy including trade, finance and development.
- To provide training in the principles of economics and their application.
- To stimulate students intellectually through the study of economics and to lead them to appreciate its application to a range of problems and its relevance in a variety of contexts.
- To provide a firm foundation of knowledge about the workings of the economy and to develop the relevant skills for the constructive use of that knowledge in a range of settings.
- To develop in students the ability to apply the knowledge and skills they have acquired to the solution of theoretical and applied problems in economics.
- To equip students with appropriate tools of analysis to tackle issues and problems of economic policy.
- To develop in students, through the study of economics, a range of transferable skills that will be of value in employment and self-employment.
- To provide students with analytical skills and an ability to develop simplifying frameworks for studying the real world.
- To develop in students the ability to appreciate what would be an appropriate level of abstraction for a range of economic issues.
- To provide students with the knowledge and skill base, from which they can proceed to further studies in economics, related areas or in multi-disciplinary areas that involve economics.
- To generate in students an appreciation of the economic dimension of wider social and political issues.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
- QAA Subject Benchmark Statements: Economics.
- Framework for Higher Education Qualifications.
- International links with a network of eleven European Universities within the Erasmus exchange programme.
- University Learning and Teaching Strategy.
- Departmental learning and teaching policies.
- Links, both formal and informal, with external examiners.
- Staff research specialisms and professional involvement in the discipline.
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding of:
K1. A coherent core of economic principles. The understanding of these might be verbal, graphical or mathematical.
These principles will cover the microeconomic issues of decision and choice, the production and exchange of goods, the interdependency of markets, and economic welfare. They also include macroeconomic issues, such as employment, national income, the balance of payments and the distribution of income, inflation, growth and business cycles, money and finance. The understanding should extend to economic policy at both the microeconomic and macroeconomic levels. In all these, students should show an understanding of analytical methods and model-based argument and should appreciate the existence of different methodological approaches.
K2. Relevant quantitative methods and computing techniques. These are likely to cover mathematical and statistical methods, including econometrics. Students will have exposure to the use of such techniques on actual economic, financial or social data. A knowledge and appreciation of economic data, both quantitative and qualitative. Students should also have some knowledge of the appropriate methods that the economist might use to structure and analyse such data.
K3. The applications of economics. Students should have the ability to apply a core of economic principles and reasoning to a variety of applied topics. They should also be aware of the economic principles that can be used to design, guide and interpret commercial, economic and social policy. As part of this, they should have the ability to discuss and analyse government policy and to assess the performance of the UK and other economies.
Specific applications to financial economics. Students should have the ability to analyse financial markets and the industrial organization of firms.
The above implies that the attainments of students should be:
- Ability to apply core economic theory and economic reasoning to applied topics.
- Ability to relate differences in economic policy recommendations to differences in the theoretical and empirical features of the economic analysis, that underlies such recommendations.
- Ability to discuss and analyse government policy and to assess the performance of the UK and other economies.
- Understanding of verbal, graphical, mathematical and econometric representation of economic ideas and analysis, including the relationships between them.
- Understanding of relevant mathematical and statistical techniques.
- Understanding of analytical methods, both theory- and model-based.
- Appreciation of the history and development of economic ideas and the differing methods of analysis that have been and are used by economists.
- Understanding of the appropriate techniques to enable manipulation, treatment and interpretation of relevant statistical data.
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
C1. Abstraction. From the study of economic principles and models, students see how one can abstract the essential features of complex systems and provide a useable framework for evaluation and assessment of the effects of policy or other exogenous events. Through this, the typical student will acquire proficiency in how to simplify while still retaining relevance. This is an approach that they can then apply in other contexts, thereby becoming more effective problem-solvers and decision-makers.
C2. Analysis, deduction and induction. Economic reasoning is highly deductive, and logical analysis is applied to assumption-based models. However, inductive reasoning is also important. The typical student will have been exposed to some or all of these and be able to use some of them. Such skills also enhance their problem-solving and decision-making ability.
C3. Quantification and design. Data, and their effective organization, presentation and analysis, are important in economics. The typical student will have some familiarity with the principal sources of economic information and data relevant to industry, commerce and government, and have had practice in organising it and presenting it informatively. This skill is important at all stages in the decision-making process.
C4. Framing. Through the study of economics, a student should learn how to decide what should be taken as given or fixed for the purposes of setting up and solving a problem, i.e. what the important 'parameters' are in constraining the solution to the problem. Learning to think about how and why these parameters might change encourages a student to place the economic problem in its broader social and political context. This `framing' skill is important in determining the decision-maker's ability to implement the solutions to problems.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
P1. Construct economic models using verbal, diagrammatic, mathematical, statistical and econometric techniques and reasoning.
P2. Access, search for and evaluate relevant data sources for validation of economic models
P3. Apply and use specialised software including spreadsheets for the analysis of economic models.
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate the key skills of,
T1. Analysis and decision making.
T2. Communication, both written and verbal.
T3. Numeracy and computation.
T4. IT, information handling and retrieval, including library skills.
T5. Independent study and group work.
T6. Time management.
T7. Problem solving.
4. Programme structure
Students must have a total modular weighting of 120 credits per year. This must include the compulsory modules. The remaining optional modules may be chosen to give a 60:60 split over the two semesters, or alternatively, 50:70 or 70:50.
The prefixes on module codes represent the credit levels as follows:
A level 4; B level 5; C level 6.
Candidates following the Placement Stream are required to spend the third academic year undertaking professional training leading to the Diploma in Professional Studies, in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
Candidates following the Study Abroad Stream are required to spend the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution leading to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
Candidates following the Split Stream are required to spend six months of the third academic year undertaking professional training, and the other half of the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution. This leads to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
4.1 Part A - Economics Introductory Modules
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTER 1 and 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
ECA001 Principles of Macroeconomics | 20 |
ECA002 Principles of Microeconomics | 20 |
ECA003 Data Analysis | 20 |
ECA004 Quantitative Economics | 20 |
SEMESTER 1 OPTIONAL MODULES (CHOOSE TWO) | |
BSA505 Organisational Behaviour | 10 |
BSA525 Introduction to Accounting | 10 |
EUA620 The Contemporary World Arena | 10 |
GYA004 Geographies of Global Economic Change | 10 |
SSA001 Introduction to Sociology A | 10 |
SSA201 Introduction to Criminology and Social Policy A | 10 |
University Wide Languages Programme (see additional form) | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 OPTIONAL MODULES (CHOOSE TWO) | |
BSA025 Introduction to Law | 10 |
BSA506 Management of Human Resources | 10 |
BSA526 Accounting for Managers | 10 |
EUA607 Introduction to Democratic Government | 10 |
GYA104 Geographies of Identity | 10 |
SSA002 Introduction to Sociology B | 10 |
SSA202 Introduction to Criminology and Social Policy B | 10 |
University Wide Languages Programme (see additional form) | 10 |
Compulsory and optional modules must be taken such that the total modular weight for the year is 120 credits divided equally over each Semester, or split 70:50 or 50:70 over the two Semesters. Please note: Optional modules are subject to availability and timetable permitting. |
2.2 Part B - Degree Modules
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTER 1 and 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
ECB001 Intermediate Macroeconomics | 20 |
ECB002 Intermediate Microeconomics | 20 |
ECB003 Introduction to Econometrics | 20 |
SEMESTER 1 and 2 OPTIONAL MODULES | |
ECB004 Introduction to Finance | 20 |
ECB005 International Economic Relations | 20 |
ECB015 Economics of the Financial System | 20 |
ECB016 History of Economic Thought | 20 |
ECB030 Energy and the Environment | 20 |
SEMESTER 1 OPTIONAL MODULES | |
BSB560 Principles of Marketing | 10 |
BSB580 Operations Management | 10 |
ECB136 Transport Economics | 20 |
University Wide Languages Programme | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 OPTIONAL MODULES | |
BSB522 The Marketing Mix for Sport and Leisure | 10 |
ECB035 Economics of the Welfare State | 20 |
University Wide Languages Programme | 10 |
Compulsory and optional modules must be taken such that the total modular weight for the year is 120 credits divided equally over each Semester, or split 70:50 or 50:70 over the two Semesters. Please note: Optional modules are subject to availability and timetable permitting. |
4.3 Part I : Optional (8 semester programme only)
Candidates pursue one of the following streams:
The duration of the programme is either six semesters or six semesters plus one academic year if candidates select one of the following three streams:
Candidates following the Placement Stream are required to spend the third academic year undertaking professional training leading to the Diploma in Professional Studies, in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
Candidates following the Study Abroad Stream are required to spend the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution leading to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
Candidates following the Split Stream are required to spend six months of the third academic year undertaking professional training, and the other half of the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution. This leads to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
The third academic year (Part I) occurs between Part B and Part C. Permission to transfer to the eight semester programme will be at the discretion of the Associate Dean (Teaching) for the School.
4.4 Part C - Degree Modules
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTER 2 COMPULSORY MODULE | |
ECC142 Research and Communication Skills for Economists | 20 |
COMPULSORY MODULES - You must choose at least two from the three listed: | |
ECC001 Developments in Microeconomics (Semester 2) | 20 |
ECC038 Applied Econometrics (Semesters 1 and 2) | 20 |
ECC101 Developments in Macroeconomics (Semester 1) | 20 |
SEMESTER 1 OPTIONAL MODULES | |
ECC003 International Money and Finance | 20 |
ECC004 Financial Economics and Asset Pricing | 20 |
ECC031 International Trade | 20 |
SEMESTER 2 OPTIONAL MODULES | |
ECC005 Industrial Economics | 20 |
ECC035 Central Banking and Financial Crises | 20 |
ECC119 Development Economics | 20 |
ECC141 Corporate Finance and Derivatives | 20 |
Compulsory and optional modules must be taken such that the total modular weight for the year is 120 credits divided equally over each Semester. Please note: Optional modules are subject to availability and timetable permitting. |
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
5.1 Criteria for Progression
In order to progress from Part A to Part B and from Part B to C and to be eligible for the award of an Honours degree, candidates must satisfy the minimum credit requirements set out in Regulation XX.
A Diploma in Professional Studies will be awarded to students who have satisfactorily completed the programme of study required for Part I.
5.2 Reassessment
Candidates must accumulate at least 60 credits in a Part of a Programme in order to be eligible for reassessment in the relevant Part during the University’s Special Assessment Period.
If a student registers to resit a module, they will be required to resit all failed components of that module (ie if their coursework mark was less than 40% they must resit the coursework and if their exam mark was less than 40% they must resit the exam). If a student resits the coursework element of a module and there was more than 1 coursework assignment for that module, then the student would be required to resit all coursework assignments in which they achieved a mark below 40%. Marks for elements of a module not being re-sat will be carried forward.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
Candidates' final degree classification will be determined on the basis of performance in degree level Module Assessments in Parts B and C in accordance with the scheme set out in Regulation XX of the University Regulations. The average percentage marks for each Part will be combined in the ratio Part B 30% : Part C 70% to determine the final Programme Mark.
Programme Specification
BS BSc (Hons) Economics (2013 entry)
Academic Year: 2017/18
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at 天堂视频 (available soon)
- What makes 天堂视频 programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | 天堂视频 |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | School of Business and Economics |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | |
Final award | BSc / BSc+DPS / BSc+DIntS |
Programme title | Economics |
Programme code | ECUB04 |
Length of programme | The duration of the programme is either six semesters or six semesters plus one academic year if candidates select one of the available part I streams. The third academic year (Part I) occurs between Part B and Part C. Permission to transfer to the eight semester programme will be at the discretion of the Programme Director (Economics). See Programme Structure for further details of eight semester streams. |
UCAS code | L100 Economics (3 years) L10A Economics (4 years sandwich) |
Admissions criteria | http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/undergraduate/courses/departments/business-economics/economics/ |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- Know and understand the core of economic theory and applied economics.
- Know and understand the behaviour of firms and consumers in the national and international economy.
- Discuss in an informed manner the major policy directions and regulations for the implementation of economic policy.
- Know and understand the nature of incentives in economic decision making by agents in the economy.
- Evaluate the outcomes of market and policy changes in all spheres of the economy.
- To provide specialised training in the aspects of economics relevant to the international economy including trade, finance and development.
- To provide training in the principles of economics and their application.
- To stimulate students intellectually through the study of economics and to lead them to appreciate its application to a range of problems and its relevance in a variety of contexts.
- To provide a firm foundation of knowledge about the workings of the economy and to develop the relevant skills for the constructive use of that knowledge in a range of settings.
- To develop in students the ability to apply the knowledge and skills they have acquired to the solution of theoretical and applied problems in economics.
- To equip students with appropriate tools of analysis to tackle issues and problems of economic policy.
- To develop in students, through the study of economics, a range of transferable skills that will be of value in employment and self-employment.
- To provide students with analytical skills and an ability to develop simplifying frameworks for studying the real world.
- To develop in students the ability to appreciate what would be an appropriate level of abstraction for a range of economic issues.
- To provide students with the knowledge and skill base, from which they can proceed to further studies in economics, related areas or in multi-disciplinary areas that involve economics.
- To generate in students an appreciation of the economic dimension of wider social and political issues.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
- QAA Subject Benchmark Statements: Economics.
- Framework for Higher Education Qualifications.
- International links with a network of eleven European Universities within the Erasmus exchange programme.
- University Learning and Teaching Strategy.
- Departmental learning and teaching policies.
- Links, both formal and informal, with external examiners.
- Staff research specialisms and professional involvement in the discipline.
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding of:
K1. A coherent core of economic principles. The understanding of these might be verbal, graphical or mathematical.
These principles will cover the microeconomic issues of decision and choice, the production and exchange of goods, the interdependency of markets, and economic welfare. They also include macroeconomic issues, such as employment, national income, the balance of payments and the distribution of income, inflation, growth and business cycles, money and finance. The understanding should extend to economic policy at both the microeconomic and macroeconomic levels. In all these, students should show an understanding of analytical methods and model-based argument and should appreciate the existence of different methodological approaches.
K2. Relevant quantitative methods and computing techniques. These are likely to cover mathematical and statistical methods, including econometrics. Students will have exposure to the use of such techniques on actual economic, financial or social data. A knowledge and appreciation of economic data, both quantitative and qualitative. Students should also have some knowledge of the appropriate methods that the economist might use to structure and analyse such data.
K3. The applications of economics. Students should have the ability to apply a core of economic principles and reasoning to a variety of applied topics. They should also be aware of the economic principles that can be used to design, guide and interpret commercial, economic and social policy. As part of this, they should have the ability to discuss and analyse government policy and to assess the performance of the UK and other economies.
Specific applications to financial economics. Students should have the ability to analyse financial markets and the industrial organization of firms.
The above implies that the attainments of students should be:
- Ability to apply core economic theory and economic reasoning to applied topics.
- Ability to relate differences in economic policy recommendations to differences in the theoretical and empirical features of the economic analysis, that underlies such recommendations.
- Ability to discuss and analyse government policy and to assess the performance of the UK and other economies.
- Understanding of verbal, graphical, mathematical and econometric representation of economic ideas and analysis, including the relationships between them.
- Understanding of relevant mathematical and statistical techniques.
- Understanding of analytical methods, both theory- and model-based.
- Appreciation of the history and development of economic ideas and the differing methods of analysis that have been and are used by economists.
- Understanding of the appropriate techniques to enable manipulation, treatment and interpretation of relevant statistical data.
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
C1. Abstraction. From the study of economic principles and models, students see how one can abstract the essential features of complex systems and provide a useable framework for evaluation and assessment of the effects of policy or other exogenous events. Through this, the typical student will acquire proficiency in how to simplify while still retaining relevance. This is an approach that they can then apply in other contexts, thereby becoming more effective problem-solvers and decision-makers.
C2. Analysis, deduction and induction. Economic reasoning is highly deductive, and logical analysis is applied to assumption-based models. However, inductive reasoning is also important. The typical student will have been exposed to some or all of these and be able to use some of them. Such skills also enhance their problem-solving and decision-making ability.
C3. Quantification and design. Data, and their effective organization, presentation and analysis, are important in economics. The typical student will have some familiarity with the principal sources of economic information and data relevant to industry, commerce and government, and have had practice in organising it and presenting it informatively. This skill is important at all stages in the decision-making process.
C4. Framing. Through the study of economics, a student should learn how to decide what should be taken as given or fixed for the purposes of setting up and solving a problem, i.e. what the important 'parameters' are in constraining the solution to the problem. Learning to think about how and why these parameters might change encourages a student to place the economic problem in its broader social and political context. This `framing' skill is important in determining the decision-maker's ability to implement the solutions to problems.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
P1. Construct economic models using verbal, diagrammatic, mathematical, statistical and econometric techniques and reasoning.
P2. Access, search for and evaluate relevant data sources for validation of economic models
P3. Apply and use specialised software including spreadsheets for the analysis of economic models.
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate the key skills of,
T1. Analysis and decision making.
T2. Communication, both written and verbal.
T3. Numeracy and computation.
T4. IT, information handling and retrieval, including library skills.
T5. Independent study and group work.
T6. Time management.
T7. Problem solving.
4. Programme structure
Students must have a total modular weighting of 120 credits per year. This must include the compulsory modules. The remaining optional modules may be chosen to give a 60:60 split over the two semesters, or alternatively, 50:70 or 70:50.
The prefixes on module codes represent the credit levels as follows:
A level 4; B level 5; C level 6.
Candidates following the Placement Stream are required to spend the third academic year undertaking professional training leading to the Diploma in Professional Studies, in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
Candidates following the Study Abroad Stream are required to spend the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution leading to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
Candidates following the Split Stream are required to spend six months of the third academic year undertaking professional training, and the other half of the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution. This leads to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
4.1 Part A - Economics Introductory Modules
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTER 1 and 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
ECA001 Principles of Macroeconomics | 20 |
ECA002 Principles of Microeconomics | 20 |
ECA003 Data Analysis | 20 |
ECA004 Quantitative Economics | 20 |
SEMESTER 1 OPTIONAL MODULES (CHOOSE TWO) | |
BSA505 Organisational Behaviour | 10 |
BSA525 Introduction to Accounting | 10 |
EUA620 The Contemporary World Arena | 10 |
GYA004 Geographies of Global Economic Change | 10 |
SSA001 Introduction to Sociology A | 10 |
SSA201 Introduction to Criminology and Social Policy A | 10 |
University Wide Languages Programme (see additional form) | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 OPTIONAL MODULES (CHOOSE TWO) | |
BSA025 Introduction to Law | 10 |
BSA506 Management of Human Resources | 10 |
BSA526 Accounting for Managers | 10 |
EUA607 Introduction to Democratic Government | 10 |
GYA104 Geographies of Identity | 10 |
SSA002 Introduction to Sociology B | 10 |
SSA202 Introduction to Criminology and Social Policy B | 10 |
University Wide Languages Programme (see additional form) | 10 |
Compulsory and optional modules must be taken such that the total modular weight for the year is 120 credits divided equally over each Semester, or split 70:50 or 50:70 over the two Semesters. Please note: Optional modules are subject to availability and timetable permitting. |
2.2 Part B - Degree Modules
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTER 1 and 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
ECB001 Intermediate Macroeconomics | 20 |
ECB002 Intermediate Microeconomics | 20 |
ECB003 Introduction to Econometrics | 20 |
SEMESTER 1 and 2 OPTIONAL MODULES | |
ECB004 Introduction to Finance | 20 |
ECB005 International Economic Relations | 20 |
ECB015 Economics of the Financial System | 20 |
ECB016 History of Economic Thought | 20 |
ECB030 Energy and the Environment | 20 |
SEMESTER 1 OPTIONAL MODULES | |
BSB560 Principles of Marketing | 10 |
BSB580 Operations Management | 10 |
ECB136 Transport Economics | 20 |
University Wide Languages Programme | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 OPTIONAL MODULES | |
BSB522 The Marketing Mix for Sport and Leisure | 10 |
ECB035 Economics of the Welfare State | 20 |
University Wide Languages Programme | 10 |
Compulsory and optional modules must be taken such that the total modular weight for the year is 120 credits divided equally over each Semester, or split 70:50 or 50:70 over the two Semesters. Please note: Optional modules are subject to availability and timetable permitting. |
4.3 Part I : Optional (8 semester programme only)
Candidates pursue one of the following streams:
The duration of the programme is either six semesters or six semesters plus one academic year if candidates select one of the following three streams:
Candidates following the Placement Stream are required to spend the third academic year undertaking professional training leading to the Diploma in Professional Studies, in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
Candidates following the Study Abroad Stream are required to spend the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution leading to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
Candidates following the Split Stream are required to spend six months of the third academic year undertaking professional training, and the other half of the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution. This leads to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
The third academic year (Part I) occurs between Part B and Part C. Permission to transfer to the eight semester programme will be at the discretion of the Associate Dean (Teaching) for the School.
4.4 Part C - Degree Modules
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTER 2 COMPULSORY MODULE | |
ECC142 Research and Communication Skills for Economists | 20 |
COMPULSORY MODULES - You must choose at least two from the three listed: | |
ECC001 Developments in Microeconomics (Semester 2) | 20 |
ECC038 Applied Econometrics (Semesters 1 and 2) | 20 |
ECC101 Developments in Macroeconomics (Semester 1) | 20 |
SEMESTER 1 OPTIONAL MODULES | |
ECC003 International Money and Finance | 20 |
ECC004 Financial Economics and Asset Pricing | 20 |
ECC031 International Trade | 20 |
SEMESTER 2 OPTIONAL MODULES | |
ECC005 Industrial Economics | 20 |
ECC035 Central Banking and Financial Crises | 20 |
ECC119 Development Economics | 20 |
ECC141 Corporate Finance and Derivatives | 20 |
Compulsory and optional modules must be taken such that the total modular weight for the year is 120 credits divided equally over each Semester. Please note: Optional modules are subject to availability and timetable permitting. |
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
5.1 Criteria for Progression
In order to progress from Part A to Part B and from Part B to C and to be eligible for the award of an Honours degree, candidates must satisfy the minimum credit requirements set out in Regulation XX.
A Diploma in Professional Studies will be awarded to students who have satisfactorily completed the programme of study required for Part I.
5.2 Reassessment
Candidates must accumulate at least 60 credits in a Part of a Programme in order to be eligible for reassessment in the relevant Part during the University’s Special Assessment Period.
If a student registers to resit a module, they will be required to resit all failed components of that module (ie if their coursework mark was less than 40% they must resit the coursework and if their exam mark was less than 40% they must resit the exam). If a student resits the coursework element of a module and there was more than 1 coursework assignment for that module, then the student would be required to resit all coursework assignments in which they achieved a mark below 40%. Marks for elements of a module not being re-sat will be carried forward.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
Candidates' final degree classification will be determined on the basis of performance in degree level Module Assessments in Parts B and C in accordance with the scheme set out in Regulation XX of the University Regulations. The average percentage marks for each Part will be combined in the ratio Part B 30% : Part C 70% to determine the final Programme Mark.
Programme Specification
BS BSc (Hons) Economics (2012 entry)
Academic Year: 2017/18
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at 天堂视频 (available soon)
- What makes 天堂视频 programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | 天堂视频 |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | School of Business and Economics |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | |
Final award | BSc / BSc+DPS / BSc+DIntS |
Programme title | Economics |
Programme code | ECUB04 |
Length of programme | The duration of the programme is either six semesters or six semesters plus one academic year if candidates select one of the available part I streams. The third academic year (Part I) occurs between Part B and Part C. Permission to transfer to the eight semester programme will be at the discretion of the Programme Director (Economics). See Programme Structure for further details of eight semester streams. |
UCAS code | L100 |
Admissions criteria | http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/undergraduate/courses/departments/business-economics/economics/ |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- Know and understand the core of economic theory and applied economics.
- Know and understand the behaviour of firms and consumers in the national and international economy.
- Discuss in an informed manner the major policy directions and regulations for the implementation of economic policy.
- Know and understand the nature of incentives in economic decision making by agents in the economy.
- Evaluate the outcomes of market and policy changes in all spheres of the economy.
- To provide specialised training in the aspects of economics relevant to the international economy including trade, finance and development.
- To provide training in the principles of economics and their application.
- To stimulate students intellectually through the study of economics and to lead them to appreciate its application to a range of problems and its relevance in a variety of contexts.
- To provide a firm foundation of knowledge about the workings of the economy and to develop the relevant skills for the constructive use of that knowledge in a range of settings.
- To develop in students the ability to apply the knowledge and skills they have acquired to the solution of theoretical and applied problems in economics.
- To equip students with appropriate tools of analysis to tackle issues and problems of economic policy.
- To develop in students, through the study of economics, a range of transferable skills that will be of value in employment and self-employment.
- To provide students with analytical skills and an ability to develop simplifying frameworks for studying the real world.
- To develop in students the ability to appreciate what would be an appropriate level of abstraction for a range of economic issues.
- To provide students with the knowledge and skill base, from which they can proceed to further studies in economics, related areas or in multi-disciplinary areas that involve economics.
- To generate in students an appreciation of the economic dimension of wider social and political issues.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
- QAA Subject Benchmark Statements: Economics.
- Framework for Higher Education Qualifications.
- International links with a network of eleven European Universities within the Erasmus exchange programme.
- University Learning and Teaching Strategy.
- Departmental learning and teaching policies.
- Links, both formal and informal, with external examiners.
- Staff research specialisms and professional involvement in the discipline.
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding of:
K1. A coherent core of economic principles. The understanding of these might be verbal, graphical or mathematical.
These principles will cover the microeconomic issues of decision and choice, the production and exchange of goods, the interdependency of markets, and economic welfare. They also include macroeconomic issues, such as employment, national income, the balance of payments and the distribution of income, inflation, growth and business cycles, money and finance. The understanding should extend to economic policy at both the microeconomic and macroeconomic levels. In all these, students should show an understanding of analytical methods and model-based argument and should appreciate the existence of different methodological approaches.
K2. Relevant quantitative methods and computing techniques. These are likely to cover mathematical and statistical methods, including econometrics. Students will have exposure to the use of such techniques on actual economic, financial or social data. A knowledge and appreciation of economic data, both quantitative and qualitative. Students should also have some knowledge of the appropriate methods that the economist might use to structure and analyse such data.
K3. The applications of economics. Students should have the ability to apply a core of economic principles and reasoning to a variety of applied topics. They should also be aware of the economic principles that can be used to design, guide and interpret commercial, economic and social policy. As part of this, they should have the ability to discuss and analyse government policy and to assess the performance of the UK and other economies.
Specific applications to financial economics. Students should have the ability to analyse financial markets and the industrial organization of firms.
The above implies that the attainments of students should be:
- Ability to apply core economic theory and economic reasoning to applied topics.
- Ability to relate differences in economic policy recommendations to differences in the theoretical and empirical features of the economic analysis, that underlies such recommendations.
- Ability to discuss and analyse government policy and to assess the performance of the UK and other economies.
- Understanding of verbal, graphical, mathematical and econometric representation of economic ideas and analysis, including the relationships between them.
- Understanding of relevant mathematical and statistical techniques.
- Understanding of analytical methods, both theory- and model-based.
- Appreciation of the history and development of economic ideas and the differing methods of analysis that have been and are used by economists.
- Understanding of the appropriate techniques to enable manipulation, treatment and interpretation of relevant statistical data.
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
C1. Abstraction. From the study of economic principles and models, students see how one can abstract the essential features of complex systems and provide a useable framework for evaluation and assessment of the effects of policy or other exogenous events. Through this, the typical student will acquire proficiency in how to simplify while still retaining relevance. This is an approach that they can then apply in other contexts, thereby becoming more effective problem-solvers and decision-makers.
C2. Analysis, deduction and induction. Economic reasoning is highly deductive, and logical analysis is applied to assumption-based models. However, inductive reasoning is also important. The typical student will have been exposed to some or all of these and be able to use some of them. Such skills also enhance their problem-solving and decision-making ability.
C3. Quantification and design. Data, and their effective organization, presentation and analysis, are important in economics. The typical student will have some familiarity with the principal sources of economic information and data relevant to industry, commerce and government, and have had practice in organising it and presenting it informatively. This skill is important at all stages in the decision-making process.
C4. Framing. Through the study of economics, a student should learn how to decide what should be taken as given or fixed for the purposes of setting up and solving a problem, i.e. what the important 'parameters' are in constraining the solution to the problem. Learning to think about how and why these parameters might change encourages a student to place the economic problem in its broader social and political context. This `framing' skill is important in determining the decision-maker's ability to implement the solutions to problems.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
P1. Construct economic models using verbal, diagrammatic, mathematical, statistical and econometric techniques and reasoning.
P2. Access, search for and evaluate relevant data sources for validation of economic models
P3. Apply and use specialised software including spreadsheets for the analysis of economic models.
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate the key skills of,
T1. Analysis and decision making.
T2. Communication, both written and verbal.
T3. Numeracy and computation.
T4. IT, information handling and retrieval, including library skills.
T5. Independent study and group work.
T6. Time management.
T7. Problem solving.
4. Programme structure
Students must have a total modular weighting of 120 credits per year. This must include the compulsory modules. The remaining optional modules may be chosen to give a 60:60 split over the two semesters, or alternatively, 50:70 or 70:50.
The prefixes on module codes represent the credit levels as follows:
A level 4; B level 5; C level 6.
Candidates following the Placement Stream are required to spend the third academic year undertaking professional training leading to the Diploma in Professional Studies, in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
Candidates following the Study Abroad Stream are required to spend the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution leading to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
Candidates following the Split Stream are required to spend six months of the third academic year undertaking professional training, and the other half of the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution. This leads to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
4.1 Part A - Economics Introductory Modules
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTER 1 and 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
ECA001 Principles of Macroeconomics | 20 |
ECA002 Principles of Microeconomics | 20 |
ECA003 Data Analysis | 20 |
ECA004 Quantitative Economics | 20 |
SEMESTER 1 OPTIONAL MODULES (CHOOSE TWO) | |
BSA505 Organisational Behaviour | 10 |
BSA525 Introduction to Accounting | 10 |
EUA620 The Contemporary World Arena | 10 |
GYA004 Geographies of Global Economic Change | 10 |
SSA001 Introduction to Sociology A | 10 |
SSA201 Introduction to Criminology and Social Policy A | 10 |
University Wide Languages Programme (see additional form) | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 OPTIONAL MODULES (CHOOSE TWO) | |
BSA025 Introduction to Law | 10 |
BSA506 Management of Human Resources | 10 |
BSA526 Accounting for Managers | 10 |
EUA607 Introduction to Democratic Government | 10 |
GYA104 Geographies of Identity | 10 |
SSA002 Introduction to Sociology B | 10 |
SSA202 Introduction to Criminology and Social Policy B | 10 |
University Wide Languages Programme (see additional form) | 10 |
Compulsory and optional modules must be taken such that the total modular weight for the year is 120 credits divided equally over each Semester, or split 70:50 or 50:70 over the two Semesters. Please note: Optional modules are subject to availability and timetable permitting. |
2.2 Part B - Degree Modules
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTER 1 and 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
ECB001 Intermediate Macroeconomics | 20 |
ECB002 Intermediate Microeconomics | 20 |
ECB003 Introduction to Econometrics | 20 |
SEMESTER 1 and 2 OPTIONAL MODULES | |
ECB004 Introduction to Finance | 20 |
ECB005 International Economic Relations | 20 |
ECB015 Economics of the Financial System | 20 |
ECB016 History of Economic Thought | 20 |
ECB030 Energy and the Environment | 20 |
SEMESTER 1 OPTIONAL MODULES | |
BSB560 Principles of Marketing | 10 |
BSB580 Operations Management | 10 |
ECB136 Transport Economics | 20 |
University Wide Languages Programme | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 OPTIONAL MODULES | |
BSB522 The Marketing Mix for Sport and Leisure | 10 |
ECB035 Economics of the Welfare State | 20 |
University Wide Languages Programme | 10 |
Compulsory and optional modules must be taken such that the total modular weight for the year is 120 credits divided equally over each Semester, or split 70:50 or 50:70 over the two Semesters. Please note: Optional modules are subject to availability and timetable permitting. |
4.3 Part I : Optional (8 semester programme only)
Candidates pursue one of the following streams:
The duration of the programme is either six semesters or six semesters plus one academic year if candidates select one of the following three streams:
Candidates following the Placement Stream are required to spend the third academic year undertaking professional training leading to the Diploma in Professional Studies, in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
Candidates following the Study Abroad Stream are required to spend the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution leading to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
Candidates following the Split Stream are required to spend six months of the third academic year undertaking professional training, and the other half of the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution. This leads to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
The third academic year (Part I) occurs between Part B and Part C. Permission to transfer to the eight semester programme will be at the discretion of the Associate Dean (Teaching) for the School.
4.4 Part C - Degree Modules
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTER 1 COMPULSORY MODULE | |
ECC142 Communication and Presentation Skills for Economics | 20 |
SEMESTER 1 and 2 COMPULSORY MODULES - You must choose at least two from the three listed: | |
ECC101 Developments in Macroeconomics (Semester 1) | 20 |
ECC024 Time Series Econometrics (Semester 1) | 20 |
ECC001 Developments in Microeconomics (Semester 2) | 20 |
SEMESTER 1 OPTIONAL MODULES | |
ECC003 International Money and Finance | 20 |
ECC004 Financial Economics and Asset Pricing | 20 |
ECC031 International Trade | 20 |
ECC035 Central Banking and Financial Crises | 20 |
SEMESTER 2 OPTIONAL MODULES | |
ECC005 Industrial Economics | 20 |
ECC050 Comparative Banking | 20 |
ECC119 Development Economics | 20 |
ECC124 Applied Microeconometrics | 20 |
ECC139 Environmental Economics | 20 |
ECC141 Corporate Finance and Derivatives | 20 |
Compulsory and optional modules must be taken such that the total modular weight for the year is 120 credits divided equally over each Semester. Please note: Optional modules are subject to availability and timetable permitting. |
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
5.1 Criteria for Progression
In order to progress from Part A to Part B and from Part B to C and to be eligible for the award of an Honours degree, candidates must satisfy the minimum credit requirements set out in Regulation XX.
A Diploma in Professional Studies will be awarded to students who have satisfactorily completed the programme of study required for Part I.
5.2 Reassessment
Candidates must accumulate at least 60 credits in a Part of a Programme in order to be eligible for reassessment in the relevant Part during the University’s Special Assessment Period.
If a student registers to resit a module, they will be required to resit all failed components of that module (ie if their coursework mark was less than 40% they must resit the coursework and if their exam mark was less than 40% they must resit the exam). If a student resits the coursework element of a module and there was more than 1 coursework assignment for that module, then the student would be required to resit all coursework assignments in which they achieved a mark below 40%. Marks for elements of a module not being re-sat will be carried forward.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
Candidates' final degree classification will be determined on the basis of performance in degree level Module Assessments in Parts B and C in accordance with the scheme set out in Regulation XX of the University Regulations. The average percentage marks for each Part will be combined in the ratio Part B 30% : Part C 70% to determine the final Programme Mark.
Programme Specification
BS BSc (Hons) Economics with Accounting (2017 entry)
Academic Year: 2017/18
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at 天堂视频 (available soon)
- What makes 天堂视频 programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | 天堂视频 |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | School of Business and Economics |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | In order to retain exemptions from foundation-level professional courses (under the requirements of the professional bodies) following graduation, candidates must achieve a minimum mark of 40% overall and 35% in each assessed component in core modules as defined by the various professional bodies for accreditation purposes. The core modules are those in accounting, law and finance |
Final award | BSc / BSc+DPS / BSc+DIntS |
Programme title | Economics with Accounting |
Programme code | ECUB05 |
Length of programme | The duration of the programme is either six semesters or six semesters plus one academic year if candidates select one of the available part I streams. The third academic year (Part I) occurs between Part B and Part C. Permission to transfer to the eight semester programme will be at the discretion of the Programme Director (Economics). See Programme Structure for further details of eight semester streams. |
UCAS code | L1N4 Economics with Accounting (3 years) L1NL Economics with Accounting (4 years sandwich) |
Admissions criteria | http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/undergraduate/courses/departments/business-economics/economicswithaccounting/ |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- Know and understand the core of economic theory and applied economics, with a particular application to the world of business and finance.
- Know and understand the behaviour of agents in financial markets, and the behaviour of firms and consumers in the national and international economy.
- Discuss in an informed manner the major policy directions and regulations to implement economic policy.
- Know and understand the nature of incentives in economic decision making by agents in the economy.
- Evaluate the outcomes of market and policy changes in all spheres of the economy, with special emphasis on business and finance.
- To provide students with the knowledge, skills and understanding required for an effective and valued career in the accounting and financial management professions.
- To provide a relevant, practical and constantly updated programme through close links with industry, professional firms and accounting bodies, and through accreditation by the major professional accounting bodies.
- To provide training in the principles of economics with accounting and their application.
- To stimulate students intellectually through the study of economics and to lead them to appreciate its application to a range of problems and its relevance in a variety of contexts.
- To provide a firm foundation of knowledge about the workings of the economy and to develop the relevant skills for the constructive use of that knowledge in a range of settings.
- To develop in students the ability to apply the knowledge and skills they have acquired to the solution of theoretical and applied problems in economics.
- To equip students with appropriate tools of analysis to tackle issues and problems of economic policy.
- To develop in students, through the study of economics, a range of transferable skills that will be of value in employment and self-employment.
- To provide students with analytical skills and an ability to develop simplifying frameworks for studying the real world.
- To develop in students the ability to appreciate what would be an appropriate level of abstraction for a range of economic issues.
- To provide students with the knowledge and skill base, from which they can proceed to further studies in economics, related areas or in multi-disciplinary areas that involve economics.
- To generate in students an appreciation of the economic dimension of wider social and political issues.
- To provide specialised training in the aspects of economics relevant to industry, commerce and financial services.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
- QAA Subject Benchmark Statements: Economics.
- Framework for Higher Education Qualifications.
- International links with a network of eleven European Universities within the Erasmus exchange programme.
- University Learning and Teaching Strategy.
- Departmental learning and teaching policies.
- Links, both formal and informal, with external examiners.
- Staff research specialisms and professional involvement in the discipline.
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding of:
K1. A coherent core of economic principles. The understanding of these might be verbal, graphical or mathematical.
These principles cover the microeconomic issues of decision and choice, the production and exchange of goods, the interdependency of markets, and economic welfare. They also include macroeconomic issues, such as employment, national income, the balance of payments and the distribution of income, inflation, growth and business cycles, money and finance. The understanding should extend to economic policy at both microeconomic and macroeconomic levels. In all these, students should show understanding of analytical methods and model-based argument and appreciate the existence of different methodological approaches.
K2. Relevant quantitative methods and computing techniques. These cover mathematical and statistical methods, including econometrics. Students will have exposure to the use of such techniques on actual economic, financial or social data. A knowledge and appreciation of economic data, both quantitative and qualitative. Students should also have some knowledge of the appropriate methods that the economist might use to structure and analyse such data.
K3. The applications of economics. Students should have the ability to apply a core of economic principles and reasoning to a variety of applied topics. They should also be aware of the economic principles that can be used to design, guide and interpret commercial, economic and social policy. As part of this, they should have the ability to discuss and analyse government policy and to assess the performance of the UK and other economies.
- Specific applications to financial economics. Students should have the ability to analyse financial markets and the industrial organization of firms.
The above implies that the attainments of students should show:
- Ability to demonstrate specialised knowledge relating to Accounting.
- Ability to explain the concepts underlying contract law (including agency).
- Ability to explain liabilities arising under tort via negligence.
- Ability to apply contract law to business situations.
- Ability to apply technical terms relevant to management accounting.
- Ability to extract relevant data from a variety of scenarios.
- Ability to demonstrate the procedural and computational skills necessary to management accounting.
- Ability to discuss the implications of budgeting systems.
- Ability to apply core economic theory and economic reasoning to applied topics.
- Ability to relate differences in policy recommendations to differences in the theoretical and empirical features of economic analyses which underlie such recommendations.
- Ability to discuss and analyse government policy and to assess the performance of the UK and other economies.
- Understanding of verbal, graphical, mathematical and econometric representation of economic ideas and analysis, including the relationship between them.
- Understanding of relevant mathematical and statistical techniques.
- Understanding of analytical methods, both theory- and model-based.
- Appreciation of the history and development of economic ideas and the differing methods of analysis that have been and are used by economists.
- Understanding of the appropriate techniques to enable manipulation, treatment and interpretation of the relevant statistical data.
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
-
C1. Abstraction. From the study of economic principles and models, students see how one can abstract the essential features of complex systems and provide a useable framework for evaluation and assessment of the effects of policy or other exogenous events. Through this, the typical student will acquire proficiency in how to simplify while still retaining relevance. This is an approach that they can then apply in other contexts, thereby becoming more effective problem-solvers and decision-makers.
C2. Analysis, deduction and induction. Economic reasoning is highly deductive, and logical analysis is applied to assumption-based models. However, inductive reasoning is also important. The typical student will have been exposed to some or all of these and be able to use some of them. Such skills also enhance their problem-solving and decision-making ability.
C3. Quantification and design. Data, and their effective organization, presentation and analysis, are important in economics. The typical student will have some familiarity with the principal sources of economic information and data relevant to industry, commerce and government, and have had practice in organising it and presenting it informatively. This skill is important at all stages in the decision-making process.
C4. Framing. Through the study of economics, a student should learn how to decide what should be taken as given or fixed for the purposes of setting up and solving a problem, i.e. what the important 'parameters' are in constraining the solution to the problem. Learning to think about how and why these parameters might change encourages a student to place the economic problem in its broader social and political context. This `framing' skill is important in determining the decision-maker's ability to implement the solutions to problems.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
-
P1. Construct economic models using verbal, diagrammatic, mathematical, statistical and econometric techniques and reasoning.
P2. Access, search for and evaluate relevant data sources for validation of economic models
P3. Apply and use specialised software including spreadsheets for the analysis of economic models.
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate the key skills of,
-
T1. Analysis and decision making.
T2. Communication, both written and verbal.
T3. Numeracy and computation.
T4. IT, information handling and retrieval, including library skills.
T5. Independent study and group work.
T6. Time management.
T7. Problem solving.
4. Programme structure
Students must have a total modular weighting of 120 credits per year.
The prefixes on module codes represent the credit levels as follows:
A level 4; B level 5; C level 6.
Candidates following the Placement Stream are required to spend the third academic year undertaking professional training leading to the Diploma in Professional Studies, in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
Candidates following the Study Abroad Stream are required to spend the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution leading to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
Candidates following the Split Stream are required to spend six months of the third academic year undertaking professional training, and the other half of the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution. This leads to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
4.1 Part A – Economics with Accounting Introductory Modules
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTER 1 and 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
ECA001 Principles of Macroeconomics | 20 |
ECA002 Principles of Microeconomics | 20 |
ECA004 Quantitative Economics | 20 |
SEMESTER 1 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
ECA003 Data Analysis I | 10 |
BSA013 Principles of Financial Accounting | 10 |
BSA025 Introduction to Law | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSA008 Skills for Study and Employment | 10 |
BSA014 Financial Accounting and Analysis | 10 |
BSA019 Accounting in Context | 10 |
There are no optional modules in Part A of this course. Students will be registered for all of the above modules. |
4.2 Part B – Economics with Accounting
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTER 1 and 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
ECB001 Intermediate Macroeconomics | 20 |
ECB002 Intermediate Microeconomics | 20 |
ECB004 Introduction to Financial Economics | 20 |
BSB005 Management Accounting | 20 |
BSB015 Company Law (Semester 1) | 10 |
BSB007 Financial Reporting (Semester 2) | 10 |
ECB015 Economics of the Financial System | 20 |
Compulsory and optional modules must be taken such that the total modular weight for the year is 120 credits divided equally over each Semester, or split 70:50 or 50:70 over the two Semesters. Please note: Optional modules are subject to availability and timetable permitting. |
4.3 Part I : Optional (8 semester programme only)
Candidates pursue one of the following streams:
The duration of the programme is either six semesters or six semesters plus one academic year if candidates select one of the following three streams:
Candidates following the Placement Stream are required to spend the third academic year undertaking professional training leading to the Diploma in Professional Studies, in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
Candidates following the Study Abroad Stream are required to spend the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution leading to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
Candidates following the Split Stream are required to spend six months of the third academic year undertaking professional training, and the other half of the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution. This leads to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
The third academic year (Part I) occurs between Part B and Part C. Permission to transfer to the eight semester programme will be at the discretion of the Associate Dean (Teaching) for the School.
4.4 Part C – Economics with Accounting
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTER 1 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSC005 Financial Reporting: Theory and Practice | 10 |
BSC008 Strategic Management Accounting | 10 |
ECC004 Financial Economics and Asset Pricing | 20 |
SEMESTER 1 OPTIONAL MODULES (CHOOSE ONE) | |
ECC001 Development in Microeconomics | 20 |
ECC003 International Money and Finance | 20 |
ECC031 International Trade | 20 |
ECC101 Developments in Microeconomics | 20 |
SEMESTER 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSC009 Strategic Management Accounting and Practice | 10 |
BSC021 Issues in Financial Reporting | 10 |
ECC141 Corporate Finance and Derivatives | 20 |
ECC142 Research and Communication Skills for Economists | 20 |
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
5.1 Progression Criteria
In order to progress from Part A to Part B and from Part B to C and to be eligible for the award of an Honours degree, candidates must satisfy the minimum credit requirements set out in Regulation XX.
A Diploma in Professional Studies will be awarded to students who have satisfactorily completed the programme of study required for Part I.
5.2 Reassessment
Candidates must accumulate at least 60 credits in a Part of a Programme in order to be eligible for reassessment in the relevant Part during the University’s Special Assessment Period.
If a student registers to resit a module, they will be required to resit all failed components of that module (ie if their coursework mark was less than 40% they must resit the coursework and if their exam mark was less than 40% they must resit the exam). If a student resits the coursework element of a module and there was more than 1 coursework assignment for that module, then the student would be required to resit all coursework assignments in which they achieved a mark below 40%. Marks for elements of a module not being re-sat will be carried forward.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
- Candidates' final degree classification will be determined on the basis of performance in degree level Module Assessments in Parts B and C in accordance with the scheme set out in Regulation XX. The average percentage marks for each Part will be combined in the ratio Part B 30% : Part C 70% to determine the final Programme Mark.
Programme Specification
BS BSc (Hons) Economics with Accounting (2016 entry)
Academic Year: 2017/18
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at 天堂视频 (available soon)
- What makes 天堂视频 programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | 天堂视频 |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | School of Business and Economics |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | In order to retain exemptions from foundation-level professional courses (under the requirements of the professional bodies) following graduation, candidates must achieve a minimum mark of 40% overall and 35% in each assessed component in core modules as defined by the various professional bodies for accreditation purposes. The core modules are those in accounting, law and finance |
Final award | BSc / BSc+DPS / BSc+DIntS |
Programme title | Economics with Accounting |
Programme code | ECUB05 |
Length of programme | The duration of the programme is either six semesters or six semesters plus one academic year if candidates select one of the available part I streams. The third academic year (Part I) occurs between Part B and Part C. Permission to transfer to the eight semester programme will be at the discretion of the Programme Director (Economics). See Programme Structure for further details of eight semester streams. |
UCAS code | L1N4 Economics with Accounting (3 years) L1NL Economics with Accounting (4 years sandwich) |
Admissions criteria | http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/undergraduate/courses/departments/business-economics/economicswithaccounting/ |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- Know and understand the core of economic theory and applied economics, with a particular application to the world of business and finance.
- Know and understand the behaviour of agents in financial markets, and the behaviour of firms and consumers in the national and international economy.
- Discuss in an informed manner the major policy directions and regulations to implement economic policy.
- Know and understand the nature of incentives in economic decision making by agents in the economy.
- Evaluate the outcomes of market and policy changes in all spheres of the economy, with special emphasis on business and finance.
- To provide students with the knowledge, skills and understanding required for an effective and valued career in the accounting and financial management professions.
- To provide a relevant, practical and constantly updated programme through close links with industry, professional firms and accounting bodies, and through accreditation by the major professional accounting bodies.
- To provide training in the principles of economics with accounting and their application.
- To stimulate students intellectually through the study of economics and to lead them to appreciate its application to a range of problems and its relevance in a variety of contexts.
- To provide a firm foundation of knowledge about the workings of the economy and to develop the relevant skills for the constructive use of that knowledge in a range of settings.
- To develop in students the ability to apply the knowledge and skills they have acquired to the solution of theoretical and applied problems in economics.
- To equip students with appropriate tools of analysis to tackle issues and problems of economic policy.
- To develop in students, through the study of economics, a range of transferable skills that will be of value in employment and self-employment.
- To provide students with analytical skills and an ability to develop simplifying frameworks for studying the real world.
- To develop in students the ability to appreciate what would be an appropriate level of abstraction for a range of economic issues.
- To provide students with the knowledge and skill base, from which they can proceed to further studies in economics, related areas or in multi-disciplinary areas that involve economics.
- To generate in students an appreciation of the economic dimension of wider social and political issues.
- To provide specialised training in the aspects of economics relevant to industry, commerce and financial services.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
- QAA Subject Benchmark Statements: Economics.
- Framework for Higher Education Qualifications.
- International links with a network of eleven European Universities within the Erasmus exchange programme.
- University Learning and Teaching Strategy.
- Departmental learning and teaching policies.
- Links, both formal and informal, with external examiners.
- Staff research specialisms and professional involvement in the discipline.
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding of:
K1. A coherent core of economic principles. The understanding of these might be verbal, graphical or mathematical.
These principles cover the microeconomic issues of decision and choice, the production and exchange of goods, the interdependency of markets, and economic welfare. They also include macroeconomic issues, such as employment, national income, the balance of payments and the distribution of income, inflation, growth and business cycles, money and finance. The understanding should extend to economic policy at both microeconomic and macroeconomic levels. In all these, students should show understanding of analytical methods and model-based argument and appreciate the existence of different methodological approaches.
K2. Relevant quantitative methods and computing techniques. These cover mathematical and statistical methods, including econometrics. Students will have exposure to the use of such techniques on actual economic, financial or social data. A knowledge and appreciation of economic data, both quantitative and qualitative. Students should also have some knowledge of the appropriate methods that the economist might use to structure and analyse such data.
K3. The applications of economics. Students should have the ability to apply a core of economic principles and reasoning to a variety of applied topics. They should also be aware of the economic principles that can be used to design, guide and interpret commercial, economic and social policy. As part of this, they should have the ability to discuss and analyse government policy and to assess the performance of the UK and other economies.
- Specific applications to financial economics. Students should have the ability to analyse financial markets and the industrial organization of firms.
The above implies that the attainments of students should show:
- Ability to demonstrate specialised knowledge relating to Accounting.
- Ability to explain the concepts underlying contract law (including agency).
- Ability to explain liabilities arising under tort via negligence.
- Ability to apply contract law to business situations.
- Ability to apply technical terms relevant to management accounting.
- Ability to extract relevant data from a variety of scenarios.
- Ability to demonstrate the procedural and computational skills necessary to management accounting.
- Ability to discuss the implications of budgeting systems.
- Ability to apply core economic theory and economic reasoning to applied topics.
- Ability to relate differences in policy recommendations to differences in the theoretical and empirical features of economic analyses which underlie such recommendations.
- Ability to discuss and analyse government policy and to assess the performance of the UK and other economies.
- Understanding of verbal, graphical, mathematical and econometric representation of economic ideas and analysis, including the relationship between them.
- Understanding of relevant mathematical and statistical techniques.
- Understanding of analytical methods, both theory- and model-based.
- Appreciation of the history and development of economic ideas and the differing methods of analysis that have been and are used by economists.
- Understanding of the appropriate techniques to enable manipulation, treatment and interpretation of the relevant statistical data.
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
-
C1. Abstraction. From the study of economic principles and models, students see how one can abstract the essential features of complex systems and provide a useable framework for evaluation and assessment of the effects of policy or other exogenous events. Through this, the typical student will acquire proficiency in how to simplify while still retaining relevance. This is an approach that they can then apply in other contexts, thereby becoming more effective problem-solvers and decision-makers.
C2. Analysis, deduction and induction. Economic reasoning is highly deductive, and logical analysis is applied to assumption-based models. However, inductive reasoning is also important. The typical student will have been exposed to some or all of these and be able to use some of them. Such skills also enhance their problem-solving and decision-making ability.
C3. Quantification and design. Data, and their effective organization, presentation and analysis, are important in economics. The typical student will have some familiarity with the principal sources of economic information and data relevant to industry, commerce and government, and have had practice in organising it and presenting it informatively. This skill is important at all stages in the decision-making process.
C4. Framing. Through the study of economics, a student should learn how to decide what should be taken as given or fixed for the purposes of setting up and solving a problem, i.e. what the important 'parameters' are in constraining the solution to the problem. Learning to think about how and why these parameters might change encourages a student to place the economic problem in its broader social and political context. This `framing' skill is important in determining the decision-maker's ability to implement the solutions to problems.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
-
P1. Construct economic models using verbal, diagrammatic, mathematical, statistical and econometric techniques and reasoning.
P2. Access, search for and evaluate relevant data sources for validation of economic models
P3. Apply and use specialised software including spreadsheets for the analysis of economic models.
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate the key skills of,
-
T1. Analysis and decision making.
T2. Communication, both written and verbal.
T3. Numeracy and computation.
T4. IT, information handling and retrieval, including library skills.
T5. Independent study and group work.
T6. Time management.
T7. Problem solving.
4. Programme structure
Students must have a total modular weighting of 120 credits per year.
The prefixes on module codes represent the credit levels as follows:
A level 4; B level 5; C level 6.
Candidates following the Placement Stream are required to spend the third academic year undertaking professional training leading to the Diploma in Professional Studies, in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
Candidates following the Study Abroad Stream are required to spend the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution leading to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
Candidates following the Split Stream are required to spend six months of the third academic year undertaking professional training, and the other half of the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution. This leads to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
4.1 Part A – Economics with Accounting Introductory Modules
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTER 1 and 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
ECA001 Principles of Macroeconomics | 20 |
ECA002 Principles of Microeconomics | 20 |
ECA004 Quantitative Economics | 20 |
SEMESTER 1 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
ECA003 Data Analysis I | 10 |
BSA013 Principles of Financial Accounting | 10 |
BSA025 Introduction to Law | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSA008 Skills for Study and Employment | 10 |
BSA014 Financial Accounting and Analysis | 10 |
BSA019 Accounting in Context | 10 |
There are no optional modules in Part A of this course. Students will be registered for all of the above modules. |
4.2 Part B – Economics with Accounting
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTER 1 and 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
ECB001 Intermediate Macroeconomics | 20 |
ECB002 Intermediate Microeconomics | 20 |
ECB004 Introduction to Financial Economics | 20 |
BSB005 Management Accounting | 20 |
BSB015 Company Law (Semester 1) | 10 |
BSB007 Financial Reporting (Semester 2) | 10 |
ECB015 Economics of the Financial System | 20 |
Compulsory and optional modules must be taken such that the total modular weight for the year is 120 credits divided equally over each Semester, or split 70:50 or 50:70 over the two Semesters. Please note: Optional modules are subject to availability and timetable permitting. |
4.3 Part I : Optional (8 semester programme only)
Candidates pursue one of the following streams:
The duration of the programme is either six semesters or six semesters plus one academic year if candidates select one of the following three streams:
Candidates following the Placement Stream are required to spend the third academic year undertaking professional training leading to the Diploma in Professional Studies, in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
Candidates following the Study Abroad Stream are required to spend the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution leading to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
Candidates following the Split Stream are required to spend six months of the third academic year undertaking professional training, and the other half of the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution. This leads to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
The third academic year (Part I) occurs between Part B and Part C. Permission to transfer to the eight semester programme will be at the discretion of the Associate Dean (Teaching) for the School.
4.4 Part C – Economics with Accounting
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTER 1 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSC005 Financial Reporting: Theory and Practice | 10 |
BSC008 Strategic Management Accounting | 10 |
ECC004 Financial Economics and Asset Pricing | 20 |
SEMESTER 1 OPTIONAL MODULES (CHOOSE ONE) | |
ECC001 Development in Microeconomics | 20 |
ECC003 International Money and Finance | 20 |
ECC031 International Trade | 20 |
ECC101 Developments in Microeconomics | 20 |
SEMESTER 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSC009 Strategic Management Accounting and Practice | 10 |
BSC021 Issues in Financial Reporting | 10 |
ECC141 Corporate Finance and Derivatives | 20 |
ECC142 Research and Communication Skills for Economists | 20 |
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
5.1 Progression Criteria
In order to progress from Part A to Part B and from Part B to C and to be eligible for the award of an Honours degree, candidates must satisfy the minimum credit requirements set out in Regulation XX.
A Diploma in Professional Studies will be awarded to students who have satisfactorily completed the programme of study required for Part I.
5.2 Reassessment
Candidates must accumulate at least 60 credits in a Part of a Programme in order to be eligible for reassessment in the relevant Part during the University’s Special Assessment Period.
If a student registers to resit a module, they will be required to resit all failed components of that module (ie if their coursework mark was less than 40% they must resit the coursework and if their exam mark was less than 40% they must resit the exam). If a student resits the coursework element of a module and there was more than 1 coursework assignment for that module, then the student would be required to resit all coursework assignments in which they achieved a mark below 40%. Marks for elements of a module not being re-sat will be carried forward.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
- Candidates' final degree classification will be determined on the basis of performance in degree level Module Assessments in Parts B and C in accordance with the scheme set out in Regulation XX. The average percentage marks for each Part will be combined in the ratio Part B 30% : Part C 70% to determine the final Programme Mark.
Programme Specification
BS BSc (Hons) Economics with Accounting (2015 entry)
Academic Year: 2017/18
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at 天堂视频 (available soon)
- What makes 天堂视频 programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | 天堂视频 |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | School of Business and Economics |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | In order to retain exemptions from foundation-level professional courses (under the requirements of the professional bodies) following graduation, candidates must achieve a minimum mark of 40% overall and 35% in each assessed component in core modules as defined by the various professional bodies for accreditation purposes. The core modules are those in accounting, law and finance |
Final award | BSc / BSc+DPS / BSc+DIntS |
Programme title | Economics with Accounting |
Programme code | ECUB05 |
Length of programme | The duration of the programme is either six semesters or six semesters plus one academic year if candidates select one of the available part I streams. The third academic year (Part I) occurs between Part B and Part C. Permission to transfer to the eight semester programme will be at the discretion of the Programme Director (Economics). See Programme Structure for further details of eight semester streams. |
UCAS code | L1N4 Economics with Accounting (3 years) L1NL Economics with Accounting (4 years sandwich) |
Admissions criteria | http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/undergraduate/courses/departments/business-economics/economicswithaccounting/ |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- Know and understand the core of economic theory and applied economics, with a particular application to the world of business and finance.
- Know and understand the behaviour of agents in financial markets, and the behaviour of firms and consumers in the national and international economy.
- Discuss in an informed manner the major policy directions and regulations to implement economic policy.
- Know and understand the nature of incentives in economic decision making by agents in the economy.
- Evaluate the outcomes of market and policy changes in all spheres of the economy, with special emphasis on business and finance.
- To provide students with the knowledge, skills and understanding required for an effective and valued career in the accounting and financial management professions.
- To provide a relevant, practical and constantly updated programme through close links with industry, professional firms and accounting bodies, and through accreditation by the major professional accounting bodies.
- To provide training in the principles of economics with accounting and their application.
- To stimulate students intellectually through the study of economics and to lead them to appreciate its application to a range of problems and its relevance in a variety of contexts.
- To provide a firm foundation of knowledge about the workings of the economy and to develop the relevant skills for the constructive use of that knowledge in a range of settings.
- To develop in students the ability to apply the knowledge and skills they have acquired to the solution of theoretical and applied problems in economics.
- To equip students with appropriate tools of analysis to tackle issues and problems of economic policy.
- To develop in students, through the study of economics, a range of transferable skills that will be of value in employment and self-employment.
- To provide students with analytical skills and an ability to develop simplifying frameworks for studying the real world.
- To develop in students the ability to appreciate what would be an appropriate level of abstraction for a range of economic issues.
- To provide students with the knowledge and skill base, from which they can proceed to further studies in economics, related areas or in multi-disciplinary areas that involve economics.
- To generate in students an appreciation of the economic dimension of wider social and political issues.
- To provide specialised training in the aspects of economics relevant to industry, commerce and financial services.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
- QAA Subject Benchmark Statements: Economics.
- Framework for Higher Education Qualifications.
- International links with a network of eleven European Universities within the Erasmus exchange programme.
- University Learning and Teaching Strategy.
- Departmental learning and teaching policies.
- Links, both formal and informal, with external examiners.
- Staff research specialisms and professional involvement in the discipline.
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding of:
K1. A coherent core of economic principles. The understanding of these might be verbal, graphical or mathematical.
These principles cover the microeconomic issues of decision and choice, the production and exchange of goods, the interdependency of markets, and economic welfare. They also include macroeconomic issues, such as employment, national income, the balance of payments and the distribution of income, inflation, growth and business cycles, money and finance. The understanding should extend to economic policy at both microeconomic and macroeconomic levels. In all these, students should show understanding of analytical methods and model-based argument and appreciate the existence of different methodological approaches.
K2. Relevant quantitative methods and computing techniques. These cover mathematical and statistical methods, including econometrics. Students will have exposure to the use of such techniques on actual economic, financial or social data. A knowledge and appreciation of economic data, both quantitative and qualitative. Students should also have some knowledge of the appropriate methods that the economist might use to structure and analyse such data.
K3. The applications of economics. Students should have the ability to apply a core of economic principles and reasoning to a variety of applied topics. They should also be aware of the economic principles that can be used to design, guide and interpret commercial, economic and social policy. As part of this, they should have the ability to discuss and analyse government policy and to assess the performance of the UK and other economies.
- Specific applications to financial economics. Students should have the ability to analyse financial markets and the industrial organization of firms.
The above implies that the attainments of students should show:
- Ability to demonstrate specialised knowledge relating to Accounting.
- Ability to explain the concepts underlying contract law (including agency).
- Ability to explain liabilities arising under tort via negligence.
- Ability to apply contract law to business situations.
- Ability to apply technical terms relevant to management accounting.
- Ability to extract relevant data from a variety of scenarios.
- Ability to demonstrate the procedural and computational skills necessary to management accounting.
- Ability to discuss the implications of budgeting systems.
- Ability to apply core economic theory and economic reasoning to applied topics.
- Ability to relate differences in policy recommendations to differences in the theoretical and empirical features of economic analyses which underlie such recommendations.
- Ability to discuss and analyse government policy and to assess the performance of the UK and other economies.
- Understanding of verbal, graphical, mathematical and econometric representation of economic ideas and analysis, including the relationship between them.
- Understanding of relevant mathematical and statistical techniques.
- Understanding of analytical methods, both theory- and model-based.
- Appreciation of the history and development of economic ideas and the differing methods of analysis that have been and are used by economists.
- Understanding of the appropriate techniques to enable manipulation, treatment and interpretation of the relevant statistical data.
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
-
C1. Abstraction. From the study of economic principles and models, students see how one can abstract the essential features of complex systems and provide a useable framework for evaluation and assessment of the effects of policy or other exogenous events. Through this, the typical student will acquire proficiency in how to simplify while still retaining relevance. This is an approach that they can then apply in other contexts, thereby becoming more effective problem-solvers and decision-makers.
C2. Analysis, deduction and induction. Economic reasoning is highly deductive, and logical analysis is applied to assumption-based models. However, inductive reasoning is also important. The typical student will have been exposed to some or all of these and be able to use some of them. Such skills also enhance their problem-solving and decision-making ability.
C3. Quantification and design. Data, and their effective organization, presentation and analysis, are important in economics. The typical student will have some familiarity with the principal sources of economic information and data relevant to industry, commerce and government, and have had practice in organising it and presenting it informatively. This skill is important at all stages in the decision-making process.
C4. Framing. Through the study of economics, a student should learn how to decide what should be taken as given or fixed for the purposes of setting up and solving a problem, i.e. what the important 'parameters' are in constraining the solution to the problem. Learning to think about how and why these parameters might change encourages a student to place the economic problem in its broader social and political context. This `framing' skill is important in determining the decision-maker's ability to implement the solutions to problems.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
-
P1. Construct economic models using verbal, diagrammatic, mathematical, statistical and econometric techniques and reasoning.
P2. Access, search for and evaluate relevant data sources for validation of economic models
P3. Apply and use specialised software including spreadsheets for the analysis of economic models.
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate the key skills of,
-
T1. Analysis and decision making.
T2. Communication, both written and verbal.
T3. Numeracy and computation.
T4. IT, information handling and retrieval, including library skills.
T5. Independent study and group work.
T6. Time management.
T7. Problem solving.
4. Programme structure
Students must have a total modular weighting of 120 credits per year.
The prefixes on module codes represent the credit levels as follows:
A level 4; B level 5; C level 6.
Candidates following the Placement Stream are required to spend the third academic year undertaking professional training leading to the Diploma in Professional Studies, in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
Candidates following the Study Abroad Stream are required to spend the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution leading to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
Candidates following the Split Stream are required to spend six months of the third academic year undertaking professional training, and the other half of the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution. This leads to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
4.1 Part A – Economics with Accounting Introductory Modules
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTER 1 and 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
ECA001 Principles of Macroeconomics | 20 |
ECA002 Principles of Microeconomics | 20 |
ECA004 Quantitative Economics | 20 |
SEMESTER 1 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
ECA003 Data Analysis I | 10 |
BSA013 Principles of Financial Accounting | 10 |
BSA025 Introduction to Law | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSA008 Skills for Study and Employment | 10 |
BSA014 Financial Accounting and Analysis | 10 |
BSA019 Accounting in Context | 10 |
There are no optional modules in Part A of this course. Students will be registered for all of the above modules. |
4.2 Part B – Economics with Accounting
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTER 1 and 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
ECB001 Intermediate Macroeconomics | 20 |
ECB002 Intermediate Microeconomics | 20 |
ECB004 Introduction to Financial Economics | 20 |
BSB005 Management Accounting A | 20 |
BSB015 Company Law (Semester 1) | 10 |
BSB007 Financial Reporting (Semester 2) | 10 |
ECB015 Economics of the Financial System | 20 |
Compulsory and optional modules must be taken such that the total modular weight for the year is 120 credits divided equally over each Semester, or split 70:50 or 50:70 over the two Semesters. Please note: Optional modules are subject to availability and timetable permitting. |
4.3 Part I : Optional (8 semester programme only)
Candidates pursue one of the following streams:
The duration of the programme is either six semesters or six semesters plus one academic year if candidates select one of the following three streams:
Candidates following the Placement Stream are required to spend the third academic year undertaking professional training leading to the Diploma in Professional Studies, in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
Candidates following the Study Abroad Stream are required to spend the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution leading to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
Candidates following the Split Stream are required to spend six months of the third academic year undertaking professional training, and the other half of the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution. This leads to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
The third academic year (Part I) occurs between Part B and Part C. Permission to transfer to the eight semester programme will be at the discretion of the Associate Dean (Teaching) for the School.
4.4 Part C – Economics with Accounting
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTER 1 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSC005 Financial Reporting: Theory and Practice | 10 |
BSC008 Strategic Management Accounting | 10 |
ECC004 Financial Economics and Asset Pricing | 20 |
SEMESTER 1 OPTIONAL MODULES | |
ECC001 Developments in Microeconomics | 10 |
ECC003 International Money and Finance | 10 |
ECC011 Introduction to Econometrics (Semester 1 and 2) | 10 |
ECC031 International Trade | 10 |
ECC101 Developments in Macroeconomics | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSC009 Strategic Management Accounting and Practice | 10 |
BSC021 Issues in Financial Reporting | 10 |
ECC141 Corporate Finance and Derivatives | 20 |
ECC142 Research and Communication Skills for Economists | 20 |
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
5.1 Progression Criteria
In order to progress from Part A to Part B and from Part B to C and to be eligible for the award of an Honours degree, candidates must satisfy the minimum credit requirements set out in Regulation XX.
A Diploma in Professional Studies will be awarded to students who have satisfactorily completed the programme of study required for Part I.
5.2 Reassessment
Candidates must accumulate at least 60 credits in a Part of a Programme in order to be eligible for reassessment in the relevant Part during the University’s Special Assessment Period.
If a student registers to resit a module, they will be required to resit all failed components of that module (ie if their coursework mark was less than 40% they must resit the coursework and if their exam mark was less than 40% they must resit the exam). If a student resits the coursework element of a module and there was more than 1 coursework assignment for that module, then the student would be required to resit all coursework assignments in which they achieved a mark below 40%. Marks for elements of a module not being re-sat will be carried forward.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
- Candidates' final degree classification will be determined on the basis of performance in degree level Module Assessments in Parts B and C in accordance with the scheme set out in Regulation XX. The average percentage marks for each Part will be combined in the ratio Part B 30% : Part C 70% to determine the final Programme Mark.
Programme Specification
BS BSc (Hons) Economics with Accounting (2014 entry)
Academic Year: 2017/18
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at 天堂视频 (available soon)
- What makes 天堂视频 programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | 天堂视频 |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | School of Business and Economics |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | In order to retain exemptions from foundation-level professional courses (under the requirements of the professional bodies) following graduation, candidates must achieve a minimum mark of 40% overall and 35% in each assessed component in core modules as defined by the various professional bodies for accreditation purposes. The core modules are those in accounting, law and finance |
Final award | BSc / BSc+DPS / BSc+DIntS |
Programme title | Economics with Accounting |
Programme code | ECUB05 |
Length of programme | The duration of the programme is either six semesters or six semesters plus one academic year if candidates select one of the available part I streams. The third academic year (Part I) occurs between Part B and Part C. Permission to transfer to the eight semester programme will be at the discretion of the Programme Director (Economics). See Programme Structure for further details of eight semester streams. |
UCAS code | L1N4 Economics with Accounting (3 years) L1NL Economics with Accounting (4 years sandwich) |
Admissions criteria | http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/undergraduate/courses/departments/business-economics/economicswithaccounting/ |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- Know and understand the core of economic theory and applied economics, with a particular application to the world of business and finance.
- Know and understand the behaviour of agents in financial markets, and the behaviour of firms and consumers in the national and international economy.
- Discuss in an informed manner the major policy directions and regulations to implement economic policy.
- Know and understand the nature of incentives in economic decision making by agents in the economy.
- Evaluate the outcomes of market and policy changes in all spheres of the economy, with special emphasis on business and finance.
- To provide students with the knowledge, skills and understanding required for an effective and valued career in the accounting and financial management professions.
- To provide a relevant, practical and constantly updated programme through close links with industry, professional firms and accounting bodies, and through accreditation by the major professional accounting bodies.
- To provide training in the principles of economics with accounting and their application.
- To stimulate students intellectually through the study of economics and to lead them to appreciate its application to a range of problems and its relevance in a variety of contexts.
- To provide a firm foundation of knowledge about the workings of the economy and to develop the relevant skills for the constructive use of that knowledge in a range of settings.
- To develop in students the ability to apply the knowledge and skills they have acquired to the solution of theoretical and applied problems in economics.
- To equip students with appropriate tools of analysis to tackle issues and problems of economic policy.
- To develop in students, through the study of economics, a range of transferable skills that will be of value in employment and self-employment.
- To provide students with analytical skills and an ability to develop simplifying frameworks for studying the real world.
- To develop in students the ability to appreciate what would be an appropriate level of abstraction for a range of economic issues.
- To provide students with the knowledge and skill base, from which they can proceed to further studies in economics, related areas or in multi-disciplinary areas that involve economics.
- To generate in students an appreciation of the economic dimension of wider social and political issues.
- To provide specialised training in the aspects of economics relevant to industry, commerce and financial services.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
- QAA Subject Benchmark Statements: Economics.
- Framework for Higher Education Qualifications.
- International links with a network of eleven European Universities within the Erasmus exchange programme.
- University Learning and Teaching Strategy.
- Departmental learning and teaching policies.
- Links, both formal and informal, with external examiners.
- Staff research specialisms and professional involvement in the discipline.
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding of:
K1. A coherent core of economic principles. The understanding of these might be verbal, graphical or mathematical.
These principles cover the microeconomic issues of decision and choice, the production and exchange of goods, the interdependency of markets, and economic welfare. They also include macroeconomic issues, such as employment, national income, the balance of payments and the distribution of income, inflation, growth and business cycles, money and finance. The understanding should extend to economic policy at both microeconomic and macroeconomic levels. In all these, students should show understanding of analytical methods and model-based argument and appreciate the existence of different methodological approaches.
K2. Relevant quantitative methods and computing techniques. These cover mathematical and statistical methods, including econometrics. Students will have exposure to the use of such techniques on actual economic, financial or social data. A knowledge and appreciation of economic data, both quantitative and qualitative. Students should also have some knowledge of the appropriate methods that the economist might use to structure and analyse such data.
K3. The applications of economics. Students should have the ability to apply a core of economic principles and reasoning to a variety of applied topics. They should also be aware of the economic principles that can be used to design, guide and interpret commercial, economic and social policy. As part of this, they should have the ability to discuss and analyse government policy and to assess the performance of the UK and other economies.
- Specific applications to financial economics. Students should have the ability to analyse financial markets and the industrial organization of firms.
The above implies that the attainments of students should show:
- Ability to demonstrate specialised knowledge relating to Accounting.
- Ability to explain the concepts underlying contract law (including agency).
- Ability to explain liabilities arising under tort via negligence.
- Ability to apply contract law to business situations.
- Ability to apply technical terms relevant to management accounting.
- Ability to extract relevant data from a variety of scenarios.
- Ability to demonstrate the procedural and computational skills necessary to management accounting.
- Ability to discuss the implications of budgeting systems.
- Ability to apply core economic theory and economic reasoning to applied topics.
- Ability to relate differences in policy recommendations to differences in the theoretical and empirical features of economic analyses which underlie such recommendations.
- Ability to discuss and analyse government policy and to assess the performance of the UK and other economies.
- Understanding of verbal, graphical, mathematical and econometric representation of economic ideas and analysis, including the relationship between them.
- Understanding of relevant mathematical and statistical techniques.
- Understanding of analytical methods, both theory- and model-based.
- Appreciation of the history and development of economic ideas and the differing methods of analysis that have been and are used by economists.
- Understanding of the appropriate techniques to enable manipulation, treatment and interpretation of the relevant statistical data.
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
C1. Abstraction. From the study of economic principles and models, students see how one can abstract the essential features of complex systems and provide a useable framework for evaluation and assessment of the effects of policy or other exogenous events. Through this, the typical student will acquire proficiency in how to simplify while still retaining relevance. This is an approach that they can then apply in other contexts, thereby becoming more effective problem-solvers and decision-makers.
C2. Analysis, deduction and induction. Economic reasoning is highly deductive, and logical analysis is applied to assumption-based models. However, inductive reasoning is also important. The typical student will have been exposed to some or all of these and be able to use some of them. Such skills also enhance their problem-solving and decision-making ability.
C3. Quantification and design. Data, and their effective organization, presentation and analysis, are important in economics. The typical student will have some familiarity with the principal sources of economic information and data relevant to industry, commerce and government, and have had practice in organising it and presenting it informatively. This skill is important at all stages in the decision-making process.
C4. Framing. Through the study of economics, a student should learn how to decide what should be taken as given or fixed for the purposes of setting up and solving a problem, i.e. what the important 'parameters' are in constraining the solution to the problem. Learning to think about how and why these parameters might change encourages a student to place the economic problem in its broader social and political context. This `framing' skill is important in determining the decision-maker's ability to implement the solutions to problems.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
P1. Construct economic models using verbal, diagrammatic, mathematical, statistical and econometric techniques and reasoning.
P2. Access, search for and evaluate relevant data sources for validation of economic models
P3. Apply and use specialised software including spreadsheets for the analysis of economic models.
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate the key skills of,
T1. Analysis and decision making.
T2. Communication, both written and verbal.
T3. Numeracy and computation.
T4. IT, information handling and retrieval, including library skills.
T5. Independent study and group work.
T6. Time management.
T7. Problem solving.
4. Programme structure
Students must have a total modular weighting of 120 credits per year.
The prefixes on module codes represent the credit levels as follows:
A level 4; B level 5; C level 6.
Candidates following the Placement Stream are required to spend the third academic year undertaking professional training leading to the Diploma in Professional Studies, in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
Candidates following the Study Abroad Stream are required to spend the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution leading to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
Candidates following the Split Stream are required to spend six months of the third academic year undertaking professional training, and the other half of the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution. This leads to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
4.1 Part A – Economics with Accounting Introductory Modules
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTER 1 and 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
ECA001 Principles of Macroeconomics | 20 |
ECA002 Principles of Microeconomics | 20 |
ECA003 Data Analysis | 20 |
ECA004 Quantitative Economics | 20 |
SEMESTER 1 COMPULSORY MODULE | |
BSA017 Financial Accounting | 20 |
SEMESTER 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSA019 Accounting in Context | 10 |
BSA025 Introduction to Law | 10 |
There are no optional modules in Part A of this course. Students will be registered for all of the above modules. |
4.2 Part B – Economics with Accounting
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTER 1 and 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
ECB001 Intermediate Macroeconomics | 20 |
ECB002 Intermediate Microeconomics | 20 |
ECB004 Introduction to Finance | 20 |
BSB005 Management Accounting A | 20 |
ECB015 Economics of the Financial System | 20 |
SEMESTER 1 COMPULSORY MODULE | |
BSB015 Company Law | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 COMPULSORY MODULE | |
BSB007 Financial Reporting | 10 |
There are no optional modules in Part B of this course. Students will be registered for all of the above modules. |
4.3 Part I : Optional (8 semester programme only)
Candidates pursue one of the following streams:
The duration of the programme is either six semesters or six semesters plus one academic year if candidates select one of the following three streams:
Candidates following the Placement Stream are required to spend the third academic year undertaking professional training leading to the Diploma in Professional Studies, in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
Candidates following the Study Abroad Stream are required to spend the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution leading to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
Candidates following the Split Stream are required to spend six months of the third academic year undertaking professional training, and the other half of the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution. This leads to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
The third academic year (Part I) occurs between Part B and Part C. Permission to transfer to the eight semester programme will be at the discretion of the Associate Dean (Teaching) for the School.
4.4 Part C – Economics with Accounting
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTER 1 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSC005 Financial Reporting: Theory and Practics | 10 |
BSC008 Strategic Management Accounting | 10 |
ECC004 Financial Economics and Asset Pricing | 20 |
SEMESTER 1 OPTIONAL MODULES | |
ECC001 Developments in Microeconomics | 10 |
ECC003 International Money and Finance | 10 |
ECC011 Introduction to Econometrics (Semester 1 and 2) | 10 |
ECC031 International Trade | 10 |
ECC101 Developments in Macroeconomics | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSC009 Strategic Management Accounting and Practice | 10 |
BSC021 Issues in Financial Reporting | 10 |
ECC141 Corporate Finance and Derivatives | 20 |
ECC142 Research and Communication Skills for Economists | 20 |
There are no optional modules in Part C of this course. Students will be registered for all of the above modules. |
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
5.1 Progression Criteria
In order to progress from Part A to Part B and from Part B to C and to be eligible for the award of an Honours degree, candidates must satisfy the minimum credit requirements set out in Regulation XX.
A Diploma in Professional Studies will be awarded to students who have satisfactorily completed the programme of study required for Part I.
5.2 Reassessment
Candidates must accumulate at least 60 credits in a Part of a Programme in order to be eligible for reassessment in the relevant Part during the University’s Special Assessment Period.
If a student registers to resit a module, they will be required to resit all failed components of that module (ie if their coursework mark was less than 40% they must resit the coursework and if their exam mark was less than 40% they must resit the exam). If a student resits the coursework element of a module and there was more than 1 coursework assignment for that module, then the student would be required to resit all coursework assignments in which they achieved a mark below 40%. Marks for elements of a module not being re-sat will be carried forward.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
- Candidates' final degree classification will be determined on the basis of performance in degree level Module Assessments in Parts B and C in accordance with the scheme set out in Regulation XX. The average percentage marks for each Part will be combined in the ratio Part B 30% : Part C 70% to determine the final Programme Mark.
Programme Specification
BS BSc (Hons) Economics with Accounting (2013 entry)
Academic Year: 2017/18
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at 天堂视频 (available soon)
- What makes 天堂视频 programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | 天堂视频 |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | School of Business and Economics |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | In order to retain exemptions from foundation-level professional courses (under the requirements of the professional bodies) following graduation, candidates must achieve a minimum mark of 40% overall and 35% in each assessed component in core modules as defined by the various professional bodies for accreditation purposes. The core modules are those in accounting, law and finance |
Final award | BSc / BSc+DPS / BSc+DIntS |
Programme title | Economics with Accounting |
Programme code | ECUB05 |
Length of programme | The duration of the programme is either six semesters or six semesters plus one academic year if candidates select one of the available part I streams. The third academic year (Part I) occurs between Part B and Part C. Permission to transfer to the eight semester programme will be at the discretion of the Programme Director (Economics). See Programme Structure for further details of eight semester streams. |
UCAS code | L1N4 Economics with Accounting (3 years) L1NL Economics with Accounting (4 years sandwich) |
Admissions criteria | http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/undergraduate/courses/departments/business-economics/economicswithaccounting/ |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- Know and understand the core of economic theory and applied economics, with a particular application to the world of business and finance.
- Know and understand the behaviour of agents in financial markets, and the behaviour of firms and consumers in the national and international economy.
- Discuss in an informed manner the major policy directions and regulations to implement economic policy.
- Know and understand the nature of incentives in economic decision making by agents in the economy.
- Evaluate the outcomes of market and policy changes in all spheres of the economy, with special emphasis on business and finance.
- To provide students with the knowledge, skills and understanding required for an effective and valued career in the accounting and financial management professions.
- To provide a relevant, practical and constantly updated programme through close links with industry, professional firms and accounting bodies, and through accreditation by the major professional accounting bodies.
- To provide training in the principles of economics with accounting and their application.
- To stimulate students intellectually through the study of economics and to lead them to appreciate its application to a range of problems and its relevance in a variety of contexts.
- To provide a firm foundation of knowledge about the workings of the economy and to develop the relevant skills for the constructive use of that knowledge in a range of settings.
- To develop in students the ability to apply the knowledge and skills they have acquired to the solution of theoretical and applied problems in economics.
- To equip students with appropriate tools of analysis to tackle issues and problems of economic policy.
- To develop in students, through the study of economics, a range of transferable skills that will be of value in employment and self-employment.
- To provide students with analytical skills and an ability to develop simplifying frameworks for studying the real world.
- To develop in students the ability to appreciate what would be an appropriate level of abstraction for a range of economic issues.
- To provide students with the knowledge and skill base, from which they can proceed to further studies in economics, related areas or in multi-disciplinary areas that involve economics.
- To generate in students an appreciation of the economic dimension of wider social and political issues.
- To provide specialised training in the aspects of economics relevant to industry, commerce and financial services.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
- QAA Subject Benchmark Statements: Economics.
- Framework for Higher Education Qualifications.
- International links with a network of eleven European Universities within the Erasmus exchange programme.
- University Learning and Teaching Strategy.
- Departmental learning and teaching policies.
- Links, both formal and informal, with external examiners.
- Staff research specialisms and professional involvement in the discipline.
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding of:
K1. A coherent core of economic principles. The understanding of these might be verbal, graphical or mathematical.
These principles cover the microeconomic issues of decision and choice, the production and exchange of goods, the interdependency of markets, and economic welfare. They also include macroeconomic issues, such as employment, national income, the balance of payments and the distribution of income, inflation, growth and business cycles, money and finance. The understanding should extend to economic policy at both microeconomic and macroeconomic levels. In all these, students should show understanding of analytical methods and model-based argument and appreciate the existence of different methodological approaches.
K2. Relevant quantitative methods and computing techniques. These cover mathematical and statistical methods, including econometrics. Students will have exposure to the use of such techniques on actual economic, financial or social data. A knowledge and appreciation of economic data, both quantitative and qualitative. Students should also have some knowledge of the appropriate methods that the economist might use to structure and analyse such data.
K3. The applications of economics. Students should have the ability to apply a core of economic principles and reasoning to a variety of applied topics. They should also be aware of the economic principles that can be used to design, guide and interpret commercial, economic and social policy. As part of this, they should have the ability to discuss and analyse government policy and to assess the performance of the UK and other economies.
- Specific applications to financial economics. Students should have the ability to analyse financial markets and the industrial organization of firms.
The above implies that the attainments of students should show:
- Ability to demonstrate specialised knowledge relating to Accounting.
- Ability to explain the concepts underlying contract law (including agency).
- Ability to explain liabilities arising under tort via negligence.
- Ability to apply contract law to business situations.
- Ability to apply technical terms relevant to management accounting.
- Ability to extract relevant data from a variety of scenarios.
- Ability to demonstrate the procedural and computational skills necessary to management accounting.
- Ability to discuss the implications of budgeting systems.
- Ability to apply core economic theory and economic reasoning to applied topics.
- Ability to relate differences in policy recommendations to differences in the theoretical and empirical features of economic analyses which underlie such recommendations.
- Ability to discuss and analyse government policy and to assess the performance of the UK and other economies.
- Understanding of verbal, graphical, mathematical and econometric representation of economic ideas and analysis, including the relationship between them.
- Understanding of relevant mathematical and statistical techniques.
- Understanding of analytical methods, both theory- and model-based.
- Appreciation of the history and development of economic ideas and the differing methods of analysis that have been and are used by economists.
- Understanding of the appropriate techniques to enable manipulation, treatment and interpretation of the relevant statistical data.
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
C1. Abstraction. From the study of economic principles and models, students see how one can abstract the essential features of complex systems and provide a useable framework for evaluation and assessment of the effects of policy or other exogenous events. Through this, the typical student will acquire proficiency in how to simplify while still retaining relevance. This is an approach that they can then apply in other contexts, thereby becoming more effective problem-solvers and decision-makers.
C2. Analysis, deduction and induction. Economic reasoning is highly deductive, and logical analysis is applied to assumption-based models. However, inductive reasoning is also important. The typical student will have been exposed to some or all of these and be able to use some of them. Such skills also enhance their problem-solving and decision-making ability.
C3. Quantification and design. Data, and their effective organization, presentation and analysis, are important in economics. The typical student will have some familiarity with the principal sources of economic information and data relevant to industry, commerce and government, and have had practice in organising it and presenting it informatively. This skill is important at all stages in the decision-making process.
C4. Framing. Through the study of economics, a student should learn how to decide what should be taken as given or fixed for the purposes of setting up and solving a problem, i.e. what the important 'parameters' are in constraining the solution to the problem. Learning to think about how and why these parameters might change encourages a student to place the economic problem in its broader social and political context. This `framing' skill is important in determining the decision-maker's ability to implement the solutions to problems.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
P1. Construct economic models using verbal, diagrammatic, mathematical, statistical and econometric techniques and reasoning.
P2. Access, search for and evaluate relevant data sources for validation of economic models
P3. Apply and use specialised software including spreadsheets for the analysis of economic models.
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate the key skills of,
T1. Analysis and decision making.
T2. Communication, both written and verbal.
T3. Numeracy and computation.
T4. IT, information handling and retrieval, including library skills.
T5. Independent study and group work.
T6. Time management.
T7. Problem solving.
4. Programme structure
Students must have a total modular weighting of 120 credits per year.
The prefixes on module codes represent the credit levels as follows:
A level 4; B level 5; C level 6.
Candidates following the Placement Stream are required to spend the third academic year undertaking professional training leading to the Diploma in Professional Studies, in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
Candidates following the Study Abroad Stream are required to spend the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution leading to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
Candidates following the Split Stream are required to spend six months of the third academic year undertaking professional training, and the other half of the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution. This leads to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
4.1 Part A – Economics with Accounting Introductory Modules
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTER 1 and 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
ECA001 Principles of Macroeconomics | 20 |
ECA002 Principles of Microeconomics | 20 |
ECA003 Data Analysis | 20 |
ECA004 Quantitative Economics | 20 |
SEMESTER 1 COMPULSORY MODULE | |
BSA017 Financial Accounting | 20 |
SEMESTER 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSA019 Accounting in Context | 10 |
BSA025 Introduction to Law | 10 |
There are no optional modules in Part A of this course. Students will be registered for all of the above modules. |
4.2 Part B – Economics with Accounting
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTER 1 and 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
ECB001 Intermediate Macroeconomics | 20 |
ECB002 Intermediate Microeconomics | 20 |
ECB004 Introduction to Finance | 20 |
BSB005 Management Accounting A | 20 |
ECB015 Economics of the Financial System | 20 |
SEMESTER 1 COMPULSORY MODULE | |
BSB015 Company Law | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 COMPULSORY MODULE | |
BSB007 Financial Reporting | 10 |
There are no optional modules in Part B of this course. Students will be registered for all of the above modules. |
4.3 Part I : Optional (8 semester programme only)
Candidates pursue one of the following streams:
The duration of the programme is either six semesters or six semesters plus one academic year if candidates select one of the following three streams:
Candidates following the Placement Stream are required to spend the third academic year undertaking professional training leading to the Diploma in Professional Studies, in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
Candidates following the Study Abroad Stream are required to spend the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution leading to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
Candidates following the Split Stream are required to spend six months of the third academic year undertaking professional training, and the other half of the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution. This leads to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
The third academic year (Part I) occurs between Part B and Part C. Permission to transfer to the eight semester programme will be at the discretion of the Associate Dean (Teaching) for the School.
4.4 Part C – Economics with Accounting
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTER 1 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSC005 Financial Reporting: Theory and Practics | 10 |
BSC008 Strategic Management Accounting | 10 |
ECC004 Financial Economics and Asset Pricing | 20 |
SEMESTER 1 OPTIONAL MODULES | |
ECC001 Developments in Microeconomics | 10 |
ECC003 International Money and Finance | 10 |
ECC011 Introduction to Econometrics (Semester 1 and 2) | 10 |
ECC031 International Trade | 10 |
ECC101 Developments in Macroeconomics | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSC009 Strategic Management Accounting and Practice | 10 |
BSC025 Auditing | 10 |
ECC141 Corporate Finance and Derivatives | 20 |
ECC142 Research and Communication Skills for Economists | 20 |
There are no optional modules in Part C of this course. Students will be registered for all of the above modules. |
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
5.1 Progression Criteria
In order to progress from Part A to Part B and from Part B to C and to be eligible for the award of an Honours degree, candidates must satisfy the minimum credit requirements set out in Regulation XX.
A Diploma in Professional Studies will be awarded to students who have satisfactorily completed the programme of study required for Part I.
5.2 Reassessment
Candidates must accumulate at least 60 credits in a Part of a Programme in order to be eligible for reassessment in the relevant Part during the University’s Special Assessment Period.
If a student registers to resit a module, they will be required to resit all failed components of that module (ie if their coursework mark was less than 40% they must resit the coursework and if their exam mark was less than 40% they must resit the exam). If a student resits the coursework element of a module and there was more than 1 coursework assignment for that module, then the student would be required to resit all coursework assignments in which they achieved a mark below 40%. Marks for elements of a module not being re-sat will be carried forward.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
- Candidates' final degree classification will be determined on the basis of performance in degree level Module Assessments in Parts B and C in accordance with the scheme set out in Regulation XX. The average percentage marks for each Part will be combined in the ratio Part B 30% : Part C 70% to determine the final Programme Mark.
Programme Specification
BS BSc (Hons) Economics with Geography (2017 entry)
Academic Year: 2017/18
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at 天堂视频 (available soon)
- What makes 天堂视频 programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | 天堂视频 |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | School of Business and Economics |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | |
Final award | BSc / BSc+DPS / BSc+DIntS |
Programme title | Economics with Geography |
Programme code | ECUB09 |
Length of programme | The duration of the programme is either six semesters or six semesters plus one academic year if candidates select one of the available part I streams. The third academic year (Part I) occurs between Part B and Part C. Permission to transfer to the eight semester programme will be at the discretion of the Programme Director (Economics). See Programme Structure for further details of eight semester streams. |
UCAS code | L1F8 Economics with Geography (3 years) L1FV Economics with Geography (4 years sandwich) |
Admissions criteria | http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/undergraduate/courses/departments/business-economics/economicswithgeography/ |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- Know and understand the core of economic theory and applied economics.
- Know and understand the behaviour of firms and consumers in the national and international economy.
- Discuss in an informed manner the major policy directions and regulations to implement economic policy.
- Know and understand the nature of incentives in economic decision making by agents in the economy.
- Evaluate the outcomes of market and policy changes in all spheres of the economy.
- To provide students with the opportunity to study a broad curriculum in both Economics and Geography
- To provide training in the principles of economics and their application.
- To stimulate students intellectually through the study of economics and to lead them to appreciate its application to a range of problems and its relevance in a variety of contexts.
- To provide a firm foundation of knowledge about the workings of the economy and to develop the relevant skills for the constructive use of that knowledge in a range of settings.
- To develop in students the ability to apply the knowledge and skills they have acquired to the solution of theoretical and applied problems in economics.
- To equip students with appropriate tools of analysis to tackle issues and problems of economic policy.
- To develop in students, through the study of economics, a range of transferable skills that will be of value in employment and self-employment.
- To provide students with analytical skills and an ability to develop simplifying frameworks for studying the real world.
- To develop in students the ability to appreciate what would be an appropriate level of abstraction for a range of economic issues.
- To provide students with the knowledge and skill base, from which they can proceed to further studies in economics, related areas or in multi-disciplinary areas that involve economics.
- To generate in students an appreciation of the economic dimension of wider social and political issues.
- To provide specialised training in the aspects of economics relevant to industry, commerce and financial services.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
- QAA Subject Benchmark Statements: Economics.
- Framework for Higher Education Qualifications.
- International links with a network of eleven European Universities within the Erasmus exchange programme.
- University Learning and Teaching Strategy.
- Departmental learning and teaching policies.
- Links, both formal and informal, with external examiners.
- Staff research specialisms and professional involvement in the discipline.
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding of:
K1. A coherent core of economic principles. The understanding of these might be verbal, graphical or mathematical.
These principles cover the microeconomic issues of decision and choice, the production and exchange of goods, the interdependency of markets, and economic welfare. They also include macroeconomic issues, such as employment, national income, the balance of payments and the distribution of income, inflation, growth and business cycles, money and finance. The understanding should extend to economic policy at both microeconomic and macroeconomic levels. In all these, students should show understanding of analytical methods and model-based argument and appreciate the existence of different methodological approaches.
K2. Relevant quantitative methods and computing techniques. These cover mathematical and statistical methods, including econometrics. Students will have exposure to the use of such techniques on actual economic, financial or social data. A knowledge and appreciation of economic data, both quantitative and qualitative. Students should also have some knowledge of the appropriate methods that the economist might use to structure and analyse such data.
K3. The applications of economics. Students should have the ability to apply a core of economic principles and reasoning to a variety of applied topics. They should also be aware of the economic principles that can be used to design, guide and interpret commercial, economic and social policy. As part of this, they should have the ability to discuss and analyse government policy and to assess the performance of the UK and other economies.
- Students will study human geography modules selected from a wide range, with themes which will include such issues as the geographies of global change and globalization, geographies of social and political difference, global migration, world city networks and geopolitics. These modules will broaden the economics’ student’s viewpoint and introduce students to key concepts in political, social, economic and cultural geography, particularly ideas about the importance of space in the construction of political, social and cultural identities.
The above implies that the attainments of students should show.
- Ability to demonstrate specialised knowledge relating to Geography.
- A clear grasp of the disputed interpretation of contemporary patterns of global change.
- Ability to relate contemporary trends to historical patterns of change and relate global trends to spatial differences across the world.
- Ability to apply core economic theory and economic reasoning to applied topics.
- Ability to relate differences in policy recommendations to differences in the theoretical and empirical features of economic analyses which underlie such recommendations.
- Ability to discuss and analyse government policy and to assess the performance of the UK and other economies.
- Understanding of verbal, graphical, mathematical and econometric representation of economic ideas and analysis, including the relationship between them.
- Understanding of relevant mathematical and statistical techniques.
- Understanding of analytical methods, both theory- and model-based.
- Appreciation of the history and development of economic ideas and the differing methods of analysis that have been and are used by economists.
- Understanding of the appropriate techniques to enable manipulation, treatment and interpretation of the relevant statistical data.
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
-
C1. Abstraction. From the study of economic principles and models, students see how one can abstract the essential features of complex systems and provide a useable framework for evaluation and assessment of the effects of policy or other exogenous events. Through this, the typical student will acquire proficiency in how to simplify while still retaining relevance. This is an approach that they can then apply in other contexts, thereby becoming more effective problem-solvers and decision-makers.
C2. Analysis, deduction and induction. Economic reasoning is highly deductive, and logical analysis is applied to assumption-based models. However, inductive reasoning is also important. The typical student will have been exposed to some or all of these and be able to use some of them. Such skills also enhance their problem-solving and decision-making ability.
C3. Quantification and design. Data, and their effective organization, presentation and analysis, are important in economics. The typical student will have some familiarity with the principal sources of economic information and data relevant to industry, commerce and government, and have had practice in organising it and presenting it informatively. This skill is important at all stages in the decision-making process.
C4. Framing. Through the study of economics, a student should learn how to decide what should be taken as given or fixed for the purposes of setting up and solving a problem, i.e. what the important 'parameters' are in constraining the solution to the problem. Learning to think about how and why these parameters might change encourages a student to place the economic problem in its broader social and political context. This `framing' skill is important in determining the decision-maker's ability to implement the solutions to problems.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
P1. Construct economic models using verbal, diagrammatic, mathematical, statistical and econometric techniques and reasoning.
P2. Access, search for and evaluate relevant data sources for validation of economic models.
P3. Apply and use specialised software including spreadsheets for the analysis of economic models.
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate the key skills of:
T1. Analysis and decision making.
T2. Communication, both written and verbal.
T3. Numeracy and computation.
T4. IT, information handling and retrieval, including library skills.
T5. Independent study and group work.
T6. Time management.
T7. Problem solving.
4. Programme structure
Students must have a total modular weighting of 120 credits per year. This must include the compulsory modules. The remaining optional modules may be chosen to give a 60:60 split over the two semesters, or alternatively, 50:70 or 70:50.
The prefixes on module codes represent the credit levels as follows:
A level 4; B level 5; C level 6.
Candidates following the Placement Stream are required to spend the third academic year undertaking professional training leading to the Diploma in Professional Studies, in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
Candidates following the Study Abroad Stream are required to spend the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution leading to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
Candidates following the Split Stream are required to spend six months of the third academic year undertaking professional training, and the other half of the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution. This leads to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
4.1 Part A – Economics with Geography Introductory Modules
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTER 1 and 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
ECA001 Principles of Macroeconomics | 20 |
ECA002 Principles of Microeconomics | 20 |
ECA003 Data Analysis I (Semester 1) | 10 |
ECA004 Quantitative Economics | 20 |
GYA002 Geographies of Global Economic Change (Semester 1) | 20 |
BSA008 Skills for Study and Employment (Semester 2) | 10 |
GYA104 Geographies of Identity (Semester 2) | 10 |
SEMESTER 1 OPTIONAL MODULES | |
SSA001 Introduction to Sociology: Identities and Inequalities | 10 |
SSA201 Introduction to Criminology and Social Policy A | 10 |
University-Wide Language Programmes | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 OPTIONAL MODULES | |
ECA005 Data Analysis II | 10 |
SSA002 Introduction to Sociology: Global, Social and Cultural Change | 10 |
SSA202 Introduction to Criminology and Social Policy B | 10 |
University-Wide Language Programmes | 10 |
4.2 Part B – Economics with Geography
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTER 1 and 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
ECB001 Intermediate Macroeconomics | 20 |
ECB002 Intermediate Microeconomics | 20 |
GEOGRAPHY MODULES - A total weighting of 40 must be chosen from Semester 1 and 2 combined | |
SEMESTER 1 and 2 GEOGRAPHY MODULES | |
GYB210 Globalization* | 20 |
GYB220 Geographies of Social and Political Difference** | 20 |
SEMESTER 1 GEOGRAPHY MODULES | |
GYB211 Globalization* | 10 |
GYB222 Geographies of Social and Political Difference** | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 GEOGRAPHY MODULES | |
GYB110 Sustainable Urban Geographies | 10 |
GYB113 Geographies of Culture, Media and Representation | 10 |
GYB320 Global Migration | 10 |
NOTE *Either GYB210 or GYB211; ** Either GYB220 or GYB222 | |
ECONOMIC OPTIONAL MODULES - A total weighting of 40 must be chosen | |
SEMESTER 1 and 2 OPTIONAL MODULES | |
ECB004 Introduction to Financial Economics | 20 |
ECB005 International Economic Relations | 20 |
ECB015 Economics of the Financial System | 20 |
ECB016 History of Economic Thought | 20 |
ECB136 Transport Economics (Semester 1) | 20 |
ECB035 The Economics of Social Issues (Semester 2) | 20 |
Compulsory and optional modules must be taken such that the total modular weight for the year is 120 credits divided equally over each Semester, or split 70:50 or 50:70 over the two Semesters. Please note: Optional modules are subject to availability and timetable permitting. |
Students will choose options over Semesters One and Two totalling 80 credits: 40 credits in Geography modules and 40 credits in Economics modules.
4.3 Part I : Optional (8 semester programme only)
Candidates pursue one of the following streams:
The duration of the programme is either six semesters or six semesters plus one academic year if candidates select one of the following three streams:
Candidates following the Placement Stream are required to spend the third academic year undertaking professional training leading to the Diploma in Professional Studies, in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
Candidates following the Study Abroad Stream are required to spend the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution leading to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
Candidates following the Split Stream are required to spend six months of the third academic year undertaking professional training, and the other half of the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution. This leads to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
The third academic year (Part I) occurs between Part B and Part C. Permission to transfer to the eight semester programme will be at the discretion of the Associate Dean (Teaching) for the School.
4.4 Part C – Economics with Geography
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTER 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
ECC142 Research and Communication Skills for Economists | 20 |
GEOGRAPHY OPTIONAL MODULES (Choose 40 weight) | |
SEMESTER 1 OPTIONAL MODULES | |
GYC212 Globalised Urbanisation | 20 |
GYC226 Geographies of Work and Life | 10 |
GYC309 Feminist Geographies of Home | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 OPTIONAL MODULES | |
GYC107 Regional Georgraphy in the UK | 20 |
GYC205 Central America: Dependency and Development | 10 |
GYC214 Georgraphies of Children and Youth | 10 |
GYC325 Georgraphies of Transnational Mobility and Diaspora | 20 |
ECONOMICS OPTIONAL MODULES (Choose 60 weight) | |
SEMESTER 1 OPTIONAL MODULES | |
ECC001 Developments in Microeconomics | 20 |
ECC003 International Money and Finance | 20 |
ECC004 Financial Economics and Asset Pricing | 20 |
ECC031 International Trade | 20 |
ECC101 Developments in Macroeconomics | 20 |
SEMESTER 2 OPTIONAL MODULES | |
ECC005 Industrial Economics | 20 |
ECC035 Central Banking and Financial Crises | 20 |
ECC119 Development Economics | 20 |
ECC139 Environmental Economics | 20 |
ECC141 Corporate Finance and Derivatives | 20 |
SEMESTER 1 and 2 OPTIONAL MODULE | |
ECC011 Introduction to Econometrics | 20 |
Compulsory and optional modules must be taken such that the total modular weight for the year is 120 credits divided equally over each Semester, or split 70:50 or 50:70 over the two Semesters. Please note: Optional modules are subject to availability and timetable permitting. |
The School may offer new modules to be provided during the academic year.
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
5.1 Progression Criteria
In order to progress from Part A to Part B and from Part B to C and to be eligible for the award of an Honours degree, candidates must satisfy the minimum credit requirements set out in Regulation XX.
A Diploma in Professional Studies will be awarded to students who have satisfactorily completed the programme of study required for Part I.
5.2 Reassessment
Candidates must accumulate at least 60 credits in a Part of a Programme in order to be eligible for reassessment in the relevant Part during the University’s Special Assessment Period.
If a student registers to resit a module, they will be required to resit all failed components of that module (ie if their coursework mark was less than 40% they must resit the coursework and if their exam mark was less than 40% they must resit the exam). If a student resits the coursework element of a module and there was more than 1 coursework assignment for that module, then the student would be required to resit all coursework assignments in which they achieved a mark below 40%. Marks for elements of a module not being re-sat will be carried forward.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
Candidates' final degree classification will be determined on the basis of performance in degree level Module Assessments in Parts B and C in accordance with the scheme set out in Regulation XX. The average percentage marks for each Part will be combined in the ratio Part B 30% : Part C 70% to determine the final Programme Mark.
Programme Specification
BS BSc (Hons) Economics with Geography (2016 entry)
Academic Year: 2017/18
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at 天堂视频 (available soon)
- What makes 天堂视频 programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | 天堂视频 |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | School of Business and Economics |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | |
Final award | BSc / BSc+DPS / BSc+DIntS |
Programme title | Economics with Geography |
Programme code | ECUB09 |
Length of programme | The duration of the programme is either six semesters or six semesters plus one academic year if candidates select one of the available part I streams. The third academic year (Part I) occurs between Part B and Part C. Permission to transfer to the eight semester programme will be at the discretion of the Programme Director (Economics). See Programme Structure for further details of eight semester streams. |
UCAS code | L1F8 Economics with Geography (3 years) L1FV Economics with Geography (4 years sandwich) |
Admissions criteria | http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/undergraduate/courses/departments/business-economics/economicswithgeography/ |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- Know and understand the core of economic theory and applied economics.
- Know and understand the behaviour of firms and consumers in the national and international economy.
- Discuss in an informed manner the major policy directions and regulations to implement economic policy.
- Know and understand the nature of incentives in economic decision making by agents in the economy.
- Evaluate the outcomes of market and policy changes in all spheres of the economy.
- To provide students with the opportunity to study a broad curriculum in both Economics and Geography
- To provide training in the principles of economics and their application.
- To stimulate students intellectually through the study of economics and to lead them to appreciate its application to a range of problems and its relevance in a variety of contexts.
- To provide a firm foundation of knowledge about the workings of the economy and to develop the relevant skills for the constructive use of that knowledge in a range of settings.
- To develop in students the ability to apply the knowledge and skills they have acquired to the solution of theoretical and applied problems in economics.
- To equip students with appropriate tools of analysis to tackle issues and problems of economic policy.
- To develop in students, through the study of economics, a range of transferable skills that will be of value in employment and self-employment.
- To provide students with analytical skills and an ability to develop simplifying frameworks for studying the real world.
- To develop in students the ability to appreciate what would be an appropriate level of abstraction for a range of economic issues.
- To provide students with the knowledge and skill base, from which they can proceed to further studies in economics, related areas or in multi-disciplinary areas that involve economics.
- To generate in students an appreciation of the economic dimension of wider social and political issues.
- To provide specialised training in the aspects of economics relevant to industry, commerce and financial services.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
- QAA Subject Benchmark Statements: Economics.
- Framework for Higher Education Qualifications.
- International links with a network of eleven European Universities within the Erasmus exchange programme.
- University Learning and Teaching Strategy.
- Departmental learning and teaching policies.
- Links, both formal and informal, with external examiners.
- Staff research specialisms and professional involvement in the discipline.
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding of:
K1. A coherent core of economic principles. The understanding of these might be verbal, graphical or mathematical.
These principles cover the microeconomic issues of decision and choice, the production and exchange of goods, the interdependency of markets, and economic welfare. They also include macroeconomic issues, such as employment, national income, the balance of payments and the distribution of income, inflation, growth and business cycles, money and finance. The understanding should extend to economic policy at both microeconomic and macroeconomic levels. In all these, students should show understanding of analytical methods and model-based argument and appreciate the existence of different methodological approaches.
K2. Relevant quantitative methods and computing techniques. These cover mathematical and statistical methods, including econometrics. Students will have exposure to the use of such techniques on actual economic, financial or social data. A knowledge and appreciation of economic data, both quantitative and qualitative. Students should also have some knowledge of the appropriate methods that the economist might use to structure and analyse such data.
K3. The applications of economics. Students should have the ability to apply a core of economic principles and reasoning to a variety of applied topics. They should also be aware of the economic principles that can be used to design, guide and interpret commercial, economic and social policy. As part of this, they should have the ability to discuss and analyse government policy and to assess the performance of the UK and other economies.
- Students will study human geography modules selected from a wide range, with themes which will include such issues as the geographies of global change and globalization, geographies of social and political difference, global migration, world city networks and geopolitics. These modules will broaden the economics’ student’s viewpoint and introduce students to key concepts in political, social, economic and cultural geography, particularly ideas about the importance of space in the construction of political, social and cultural identities.
The above implies that the attainments of students should show.
- Ability to demonstrate specialised knowledge relating to Geography.
- A clear grasp of the disputed interpretation of contemporary patterns of global change.
- Ability to relate contemporary trends to historical patterns of change and relate global trends to spatial differences across the world.
- Ability to apply core economic theory and economic reasoning to applied topics.
- Ability to relate differences in policy recommendations to differences in the theoretical and empirical features of economic analyses which underlie such recommendations.
- Ability to discuss and analyse government policy and to assess the performance of the UK and other economies.
- Understanding of verbal, graphical, mathematical and econometric representation of economic ideas and analysis, including the relationship between them.
- Understanding of relevant mathematical and statistical techniques.
- Understanding of analytical methods, both theory- and model-based.
- Appreciation of the history and development of economic ideas and the differing methods of analysis that have been and are used by economists.
- Understanding of the appropriate techniques to enable manipulation, treatment and interpretation of the relevant statistical data.
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
-
C1. Abstraction. From the study of economic principles and models, students see how one can abstract the essential features of complex systems and provide a useable framework for evaluation and assessment of the effects of policy or other exogenous events. Through this, the typical student will acquire proficiency in how to simplify while still retaining relevance. This is an approach that they can then apply in other contexts, thereby becoming more effective problem-solvers and decision-makers.
C2. Analysis, deduction and induction. Economic reasoning is highly deductive, and logical analysis is applied to assumption-based models. However, inductive reasoning is also important. The typical student will have been exposed to some or all of these and be able to use some of them. Such skills also enhance their problem-solving and decision-making ability.
C3. Quantification and design. Data, and their effective organization, presentation and analysis, are important in economics. The typical student will have some familiarity with the principal sources of economic information and data relevant to industry, commerce and government, and have had practice in organising it and presenting it informatively. This skill is important at all stages in the decision-making process.
C4. Framing. Through the study of economics, a student should learn how to decide what should be taken as given or fixed for the purposes of setting up and solving a problem, i.e. what the important 'parameters' are in constraining the solution to the problem. Learning to think about how and why these parameters might change encourages a student to place the economic problem in its broader social and political context. This `framing' skill is important in determining the decision-maker's ability to implement the solutions to problems.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
P1. Construct economic models using verbal, diagrammatic, mathematical, statistical and econometric techniques and reasoning.
P2. Access, search for and evaluate relevant data sources for validation of economic models.
P3. Apply and use specialised software including spreadsheets for the analysis of economic models.
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate the key skills of:
T1. Analysis and decision making.
T2. Communication, both written and verbal.
T3. Numeracy and computation.
T4. IT, information handling and retrieval, including library skills.
T5. Independent study and group work.
T6. Time management.
T7. Problem solving.
4. Programme structure
Students must have a total modular weighting of 120 credits per year. This must include the compulsory modules. The remaining optional modules may be chosen to give a 60:60 split over the two semesters, or alternatively, 50:70 or 70:50.
The prefixes on module codes represent the credit levels as follows:
A level 4; B level 5; C level 6.
Candidates following the Placement Stream are required to spend the third academic year undertaking professional training leading to the Diploma in Professional Studies, in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
Candidates following the Study Abroad Stream are required to spend the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution leading to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
Candidates following the Split Stream are required to spend six months of the third academic year undertaking professional training, and the other half of the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution. This leads to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
4.1 Part A – Economics with Geography Introductory Modules
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTER 1 and 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
ECA001 Principles of Macroeconomics | 20 |
ECA002 Principles of Microeconomics | 20 |
ECA003 Data Analysis I (Semester 1) | 10 |
ECA004 Quantitative Economics | 20 |
GYA002 Geographies of Global Economic Change (Semester 1) | 20 |
BSA008 Skills for Study and Employment (Semester 2) | 10 |
GYA104 Geographies of Identity (Semester 2) | 10 |
SEMESTER 1 OPTIONAL MODULES | |
SSA001 Introduction to Sociology: Identities and Inequalities | 10 |
SSA201 Introduction to Criminology and Social Policy A | 10 |
University-Wide Language Programmes | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 OPTIONAL MODULES | |
ECA005 Data Analysis II | 10 |
SSA002 Introduction to Sociology: Global, Social and Cultural Change | 10 |
SSA202 Introduction to Criminology and Social Policy B | 10 |
University-Wide Language Programmes | 10 |
4.2 Part B – Economics with Geography
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTER 1 and 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
ECB001 Intermediate Macroeconomics | 20 |
ECB002 Intermediate Microeconomics | 20 |
GEOGRAPHY MODULES - A total weighting of 40 must be chosen from Semester 1 and 2 combined | |
SEMESTER 1 and 2 GEOGRAPHY MODULES | |
GYB210 Globalization* | 20 |
GYB220 Geographies of Social and Political Difference** | 20 |
SEMESTER 1 GEOGRAPHY MODULES | |
GYB211 Globalization* | 10 |
GYB222 Geographies of Social and Political Difference** | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 GEOGRAPHY MODULES | |
GYB110 Sustainable Urban Geographies | 10 |
GYB113 Geographies of Culture, Media and Representation | 10 |
GYB320 Global Migration | 10 |
NOTE *Either GYB210 or GYB211; ** Either GYB220 or GYB222 | |
ECONOMIC OPTIONAL MODULES - A total weighting of 40 must be chosen | |
SEMESTER 1 and 2 OPTIONAL MODULES | |
ECB004 Introduction to Financial Economics | 20 |
ECB005 International Economic Relations | 20 |
ECB015 Economics of the Financial System | 20 |
ECB016 History of Economic Thought | 20 |
ECB136 Transport Economics (Semester 1) | 20 |
ECB035 The Economics of Social Issues (Semester 2) | 20 |
Compulsory and optional modules must be taken such that the total modular weight for the year is 120 credits divided equally over each Semester, or split 70:50 or 50:70 over the two Semesters. Please note: Optional modules are subject to availability and timetable permitting. |
Students will choose options over Semesters One and Two totalling 80 credits: 40 credits in Geography modules and 40 credits in Economics modules.
4.3 Part I : Optional (8 semester programme only)
Candidates pursue one of the following streams:
The duration of the programme is either six semesters or six semesters plus one academic year if candidates select one of the following three streams:
Candidates following the Placement Stream are required to spend the third academic year undertaking professional training leading to the Diploma in Professional Studies, in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
Candidates following the Study Abroad Stream are required to spend the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution leading to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
Candidates following the Split Stream are required to spend six months of the third academic year undertaking professional training, and the other half of the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution. This leads to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
The third academic year (Part I) occurs between Part B and Part C. Permission to transfer to the eight semester programme will be at the discretion of the Associate Dean (Teaching) for the School.
4.4 Part C – Economics with Geography
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTER 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
ECC142 Research and Communication Skills for Economists | 20 |
GEOGRAPHY OPTIONAL MODULES (Choose 40 weight) | |
SEMESTER 1 OPTIONAL MODULES | |
GYC212 Globalised Urbanisation | 20 |
GYC226 Geographies of Work and Life | 10 |
GYC309 Feminist Geographies of Home | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 OPTIONAL MODULES | |
GYC107 Regional Georgraphy in the UK | 20 |
GYC205 Central America: Dependency and Development | 10 |
GYC214 Georgraphies of Children and Youth | 10 |
GYC325 Georgraphies of Transnational Mobility and Diaspora | 20 |
ECONOMICS OPTIONAL MODULES (Choose 60 weight) | |
SEMESTER 1 OPTIONAL MODULES | |
ECC001 Developments in Microeconomics | 20 |
ECC003 International Money and Finance | 20 |
ECC004 Financial Economics and Asset Pricing | 20 |
ECC031 International Trade | 20 |
ECC101 Developments in Macroeconomics | 20 |
SEMESTER 2 OPTIONAL MODULES | |
ECC005 Industrial Economics | 20 |
ECC035 Central Banking and Financial Crises | 20 |
ECC119 Development Economics | 20 |
ECC139 Environmental Economics | 20 |
ECC141 Corporate Finance and Derivatives | 20 |
SEMESTER 1 and 2 OPTIONAL MODULE | |
ECC011 Introduction to Econometrics | 20 |
Compulsory and optional modules must be taken such that the total modular weight for the year is 120 credits divided equally over each Semester, or split 70:50 or 50:70 over the two Semesters. Please note: Optional modules are subject to availability and timetable permitting. |
The School may offer new modules to be provided during the academic year.
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
5.1 Progression Criteria
In order to progress from Part A to Part B and from Part B to C and to be eligible for the award of an Honours degree, candidates must satisfy the minimum credit requirements set out in Regulation XX.
A Diploma in Professional Studies will be awarded to students who have satisfactorily completed the programme of study required for Part I.
5.2 Reassessment
Candidates must accumulate at least 60 credits in a Part of a Programme in order to be eligible for reassessment in the relevant Part during the University’s Special Assessment Period.
If a student registers to resit a module, they will be required to resit all failed components of that module (ie if their coursework mark was less than 40% they must resit the coursework and if their exam mark was less than 40% they must resit the exam). If a student resits the coursework element of a module and there was more than 1 coursework assignment for that module, then the student would be required to resit all coursework assignments in which they achieved a mark below 40%. Marks for elements of a module not being re-sat will be carried forward.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
Candidates' final degree classification will be determined on the basis of performance in degree level Module Assessments in Parts B and C in accordance with the scheme set out in Regulation XX. The average percentage marks for each Part will be combined in the ratio Part B 30% : Part C 70% to determine the final Programme Mark.
Programme Specification
BS BSc (Hons) Economics with Geography (2015 entry)
Academic Year: 2017/18
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at 天堂视频 (available soon)
- What makes 天堂视频 programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | 天堂视频 |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | School of Business and Economics |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | |
Final award | BSc / BSc+DPS / BSc+DIntS |
Programme title | Economics with Geography |
Programme code | ECUB09 |
Length of programme | The duration of the programme is either six semesters or six semesters plus one academic year if candidates select one of the available part I streams. The third academic year (Part I) occurs between Part B and Part C. Permission to transfer to the eight semester programme will be at the discretion of the Programme Director (Economics). See Programme Structure for further details of eight semester streams. |
UCAS code | L1F8 Economics with Geography (3 years) L1FV Economics with Geography (4 years sandwich) |
Admissions criteria | http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/undergraduate/courses/departments/business-economics/economicswithgeography/ |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- Know and understand the core of economic theory and applied economics.
- Know and understand the behaviour of firms and consumers in the national and international economy.
- Discuss in an informed manner the major policy directions and regulations to implement economic policy.
- Know and understand the nature of incentives in economic decision making by agents in the economy.
- Evaluate the outcomes of market and policy changes in all spheres of the economy.
- To provide students with the opportunity to study a broad curriculum in both Economics and Geography
- To provide training in the principles of economics and their application.
- To stimulate students intellectually through the study of economics and to lead them to appreciate its application to a range of problems and its relevance in a variety of contexts.
- To provide a firm foundation of knowledge about the workings of the economy and to develop the relevant skills for the constructive use of that knowledge in a range of settings.
- To develop in students the ability to apply the knowledge and skills they have acquired to the solution of theoretical and applied problems in economics.
- To equip students with appropriate tools of analysis to tackle issues and problems of economic policy.
- To develop in students, through the study of economics, a range of transferable skills that will be of value in employment and self-employment.
- To provide students with analytical skills and an ability to develop simplifying frameworks for studying the real world.
- To develop in students the ability to appreciate what would be an appropriate level of abstraction for a range of economic issues.
- To provide students with the knowledge and skill base, from which they can proceed to further studies in economics, related areas or in multi-disciplinary areas that involve economics.
- To generate in students an appreciation of the economic dimension of wider social and political issues.
- To provide specialised training in the aspects of economics relevant to industry, commerce and financial services.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
- QAA Subject Benchmark Statements: Economics.
- Framework for Higher Education Qualifications.
- International links with a network of eleven European Universities within the Erasmus exchange programme.
- University Learning and Teaching Strategy.
- Departmental learning and teaching policies.
- Links, both formal and informal, with external examiners.
- Staff research specialisms and professional involvement in the discipline.
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding of:
K1. A coherent core of economic principles. The understanding of these might be verbal, graphical or mathematical.
These principles cover the microeconomic issues of decision and choice, the production and exchange of goods, the interdependency of markets, and economic welfare. They also include macroeconomic issues, such as employment, national income, the balance of payments and the distribution of income, inflation, growth and business cycles, money and finance. The understanding should extend to economic policy at both microeconomic and macroeconomic levels. In all these, students should show understanding of analytical methods and model-based argument and appreciate the existence of different methodological approaches.
K2. Relevant quantitative methods and computing techniques. These cover mathematical and statistical methods, including econometrics. Students will have exposure to the use of such techniques on actual economic, financial or social data. A knowledge and appreciation of economic data, both quantitative and qualitative. Students should also have some knowledge of the appropriate methods that the economist might use to structure and analyse such data.
K3. The applications of economics. Students should have the ability to apply a core of economic principles and reasoning to a variety of applied topics. They should also be aware of the economic principles that can be used to design, guide and interpret commercial, economic and social policy. As part of this, they should have the ability to discuss and analyse government policy and to assess the performance of the UK and other economies.
- Students will study human geography modules selected from a wide range, with themes which will include such issues as the geographies of global change and globalization, geographies of social and political difference, global migration, world city networks and geopolitics. These modules will broaden the economics’ student’s viewpoint and introduce students to key concepts in political, social, economic and cultural geography, particularly ideas about the importance of space in the construction of political, social and cultural identities.
The above implies that the attainments of students should show.
- Ability to demonstrate specialised knowledge relating to Geography.
- A clear grasp of the disputed interpretation of contemporary patterns of global change.
- Ability to relate contemporary trends to historical patterns of change and relate global trends to spatial differences across the world.
- Ability to apply core economic theory and economic reasoning to applied topics.
- Ability to relate differences in policy recommendations to differences in the theoretical and empirical features of economic analyses which underlie such recommendations.
- Ability to discuss and analyse government policy and to assess the performance of the UK and other economies.
- Understanding of verbal, graphical, mathematical and econometric representation of economic ideas and analysis, including the relationship between them.
- Understanding of relevant mathematical and statistical techniques.
- Understanding of analytical methods, both theory- and model-based.
- Appreciation of the history and development of economic ideas and the differing methods of analysis that have been and are used by economists.
- Understanding of the appropriate techniques to enable manipulation, treatment and interpretation of the relevant statistical data.
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
-
C1. Abstraction. From the study of economic principles and models, students see how one can abstract the essential features of complex systems and provide a useable framework for evaluation and assessment of the effects of policy or other exogenous events. Through this, the typical student will acquire proficiency in how to simplify while still retaining relevance. This is an approach that they can then apply in other contexts, thereby becoming more effective problem-solvers and decision-makers.
C2. Analysis, deduction and induction. Economic reasoning is highly deductive, and logical analysis is applied to assumption-based models. However, inductive reasoning is also important. The typical student will have been exposed to some or all of these and be able to use some of them. Such skills also enhance their problem-solving and decision-making ability.
C3. Quantification and design. Data, and their effective organization, presentation and analysis, are important in economics. The typical student will have some familiarity with the principal sources of economic information and data relevant to industry, commerce and government, and have had practice in organising it and presenting it informatively. This skill is important at all stages in the decision-making process.
C4. Framing. Through the study of economics, a student should learn how to decide what should be taken as given or fixed for the purposes of setting up and solving a problem, i.e. what the important 'parameters' are in constraining the solution to the problem. Learning to think about how and why these parameters might change encourages a student to place the economic problem in its broader social and political context. This `framing' skill is important in determining the decision-maker's ability to implement the solutions to problems.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
P1. Construct economic models using verbal, diagrammatic, mathematical, statistical and econometric techniques and reasoning.
P2. Access, search for and evaluate relevant data sources for validation of economic models.
P3. Apply and use specialised software including spreadsheets for the analysis of economic models.
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate the key skills of:
T1. Analysis and decision making.
T2. Communication, both written and verbal.
T3. Numeracy and computation.
T4. IT, information handling and retrieval, including library skills.
T5. Independent study and group work.
T6. Time management.
T7. Problem solving.
4. Programme structure
Students must have a total modular weighting of 120 credits per year. This must include the compulsory modules. The remaining optional modules may be chosen to give a 60:60 split over the two semesters, or alternatively, 50:70 or 70:50.
The prefixes on module codes represent the credit levels as follows:
A level 4; B level 5; C level 6.
Candidates following the Placement Stream are required to spend the third academic year undertaking professional training leading to the Diploma in Professional Studies, in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
Candidates following the Study Abroad Stream are required to spend the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution leading to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
Candidates following the Split Stream are required to spend six months of the third academic year undertaking professional training, and the other half of the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution. This leads to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
4.1 Part A – Economics with Geography Introductory Modules
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTER 1 and 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
ECA001 Principles of Macroeconomics | 20 |
ECA002 Principles of Microeconomics | 20 |
ECA003 Data Analysis I (Semester 1) | 10 |
ECA004 Quantitative Economics | 20 |
GYA002 Geographies of Global Economic Change (Semester 1) | 20 |
BSA008 Skills for Study and Employment (Semester 2) | 10 |
GYA102 Geographies of Identity (Semester 2) | 20 |
There are no optional modules in Part A of this course. Students will be registered for all of the above modules. |
4.2 Part B – Economics with Geography
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTER 1 and 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
ECB001 Intermediate Macroeconomics | 20 |
ECB002 Intermediate Microeconomics | 20 |
GEOGRAPHY MODULES - A total weighting of 40 must be chosen from Semester 1 and 2 combined | |
SEMESTER 1 and 2 GEOGRAPHY MODULES | |
GYB210 Globalization* | 20 |
GYB220 Geographies of Social and Political Difference** | 20 |
SEMESTER 1 GEOGRAPHY MODULES | |
GYB211 Globalization* | 10 |
GYB222 Geographies of Social and Political Difference** | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 GEOGRAPHY MODULES | |
GYB110 Sustainable Urban Geographies | 10 |
GYB113 Geographies of Culture, Media and Representation | 10 |
GYB320 Global Migration | 10 |
NOTE *Either GYB210 or GYB211; ** Either GYB220 or GYB222 | |
ECONOMIC OPTIONAL MODULES - A total weighting of 40 must be chosen | |
SEMESTER 1 and 2 OPTIONAL MODULES | |
ECB004 Introduction to Financial Economics | 20 |
ECB005 International Economic Relations | 20 |
ECB015 Economics of the Financial System | 20 |
ECB016 History of Economic Thought | 20 |
ECB030 Energy and the Environment | 20 |
ECB136 Transport Economics (Semester 1) | 20 |
ECB035 The Economics of Social Issues (Semester 2) | 20 |
Compulsory and optional modules must be taken such that the total modular weight for the year is 120 credits divided equally over each Semester, or split 70:50 or 50:70 over the two Semesters. Please note: Optional modules are subject to availability and timetable permitting. |
Students will choose options over Semesters One and Two totalling 80 credits: 40 credits in Geography modules and 40 credits in Economics modules.
4.3 Part I : Optional (8 semester programme only)
Candidates pursue one of the following streams:
The duration of the programme is either six semesters or six semesters plus one academic year if candidates select one of the following three streams:
Candidates following the Placement Stream are required to spend the third academic year undertaking professional training leading to the Diploma in Professional Studies, in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
Candidates following the Study Abroad Stream are required to spend the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution leading to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
Candidates following the Split Stream are required to spend six months of the third academic year undertaking professional training, and the other half of the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution. This leads to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
The third academic year (Part I) occurs between Part B and Part C. Permission to transfer to the eight semester programme will be at the discretion of the Associate Dean (Teaching) for the School.
4.4 Part C – Economics with Geography
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
GEOGRAPHY OPTIONAL MODULES (Choose 40 weight) | |
SEMESTER 1 OPTIONAL MODULES | |
GYC212 Globalised Urbanisation | 20 |
GYC226 Geographies of Work and Life | 10 |
GYC309 Feminist Geographies of Home | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 OPTIONAL MODULES | |
GYC107 Regional Geography in the UK | 20 |
GYC214 Geographies of Children and Youth | 10 |
GYC325 Geographies of Transnational Mobility and Diaspora | 20 |
ECONOMICS OPTIONAL MODULES (Choose 60 weight) | |
SEMESTER 1 OPTIONAL MODULES | |
ECC001 Developments in Microeconomics | 20 |
ECC003 International Money and Finance | 20 |
ECC004 Financial Economics and Asset Pricing | 20 |
ECC031 International Trade | 20 |
ECC101 Developments in Macroeconomics | 20 |
SEMESTER 1 and 2 OPTIONAL MODULE | |
ECC011 Introduction to Econometrics | 20 |
SEMESTER 2 OPTIONAL MODULES | |
ECC005 Industrial Economics | 20 |
ECC035 Central Banking and Financial Crises | 20 |
ECC119 Development Economics | 20 |
ECC141 Corporate Finance and Derivatives | 20 |
SEMESTER 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
ECC142 Research and Communication Skills for Economists | 20 |
Compulsory and optional modules must be taken such that the total modular weight for the year is 120 credits divided equally over each Semester, or split 70:50 or 50:70 over the two Semesters. Please note: Optional modules are subject to availability and timetable permitting. |
The School may offer new modules to be provided during the academic year.
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
5.1 Progression Criteria
In order to progress from Part A to Part B and from Part B to C and to be eligible for the award of an Honours degree, candidates must satisfy the minimum credit requirements set out in Regulation XX.
A Diploma in Professional Studies will be awarded to students who have satisfactorily completed the programme of study required for Part I.
5.2 Reassessment
Candidates must accumulate at least 60 credits in a Part of a Programme in order to be eligible for reassessment in the relevant Part during the University’s Special Assessment Period.
If a student registers to resit a module, they will be required to resit all failed components of that module (ie if their coursework mark was less than 40% they must resit the coursework and if their exam mark was less than 40% they must resit the exam). If a student resits the coursework element of a module and there was more than 1 coursework assignment for that module, then the student would be required to resit all coursework assignments in which they achieved a mark below 40%. Marks for elements of a module not being re-sat will be carried forward.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
Candidates' final degree classification will be determined on the basis of performance in degree level Module Assessments in Parts B and C in accordance with the scheme set out in Regulation XX. The average percentage marks for each Part will be combined in the ratio Part B 30% : Part C 70% to determine the final Programme Mark.
Programme Specification
BS BSc (Hons) Economics with Geography (2014 entry)
Academic Year: 2017/18
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at 天堂视频 (available soon)
- What makes 天堂视频 programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | 天堂视频 |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | School of Business and Economics |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | |
Final award | BSc / BSc+DPS / BSc+DIntS |
Programme title | Economics with Geography |
Programme code | ECUB09 |
Length of programme | The duration of the programme is either six semesters or six semesters plus one academic year if candidates select one of the available part I streams. The third academic year (Part I) occurs between Part B and Part C. Permission to transfer to the eight semester programme will be at the discretion of the Programme Director (Economics). See Programme Structure for further details of eight semester streams. |
UCAS code | L1F8 Economics with Geography (3 years) L1FV Economics with Geography (4 years sandwich) |
Admissions criteria | http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/undergraduate/courses/departments/business-economics/economicswithgeography/ |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- Know and understand the core of economic theory and applied economics.
- Know and understand the behaviour of firms and consumers in the national and international economy.
- Discuss in an informed manner the major policy directions and regulations to implement economic policy.
- Know and understand the nature of incentives in economic decision making by agents in the economy.
- Evaluate the outcomes of market and policy changes in all spheres of the economy.
- To provide students with the opportunity to study a broad curriculum in both Economics and Geography
- To provide training in the principles of economics and their application.
- To stimulate students intellectually through the study of economics and to lead them to appreciate its application to a range of problems and its relevance in a variety of contexts.
- To provide a firm foundation of knowledge about the workings of the economy and to develop the relevant skills for the constructive use of that knowledge in a range of settings.
- To develop in students the ability to apply the knowledge and skills they have acquired to the solution of theoretical and applied problems in economics.
- To equip students with appropriate tools of analysis to tackle issues and problems of economic policy.
- To develop in students, through the study of economics, a range of transferable skills that will be of value in employment and self-employment.
- To provide students with analytical skills and an ability to develop simplifying frameworks for studying the real world.
- To develop in students the ability to appreciate what would be an appropriate level of abstraction for a range of economic issues.
- To provide students with the knowledge and skill base, from which they can proceed to further studies in economics, related areas or in multi-disciplinary areas that involve economics.
- To generate in students an appreciation of the economic dimension of wider social and political issues.
- To provide specialised training in the aspects of economics relevant to industry, commerce and financial services.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
- QAA Subject Benchmark Statements: Economics.
- Framework for Higher Education Qualifications.
- International links with a network of eleven European Universities within the Erasmus exchange programme.
- University Learning and Teaching Strategy.
- Departmental learning and teaching policies.
- Links, both formal and informal, with external examiners.
- Staff research specialisms and professional involvement in the discipline.
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding of:
K1. A coherent core of economic principles. The understanding of these might be verbal, graphical or mathematical.
These principles cover the microeconomic issues of decision and choice, the production and exchange of goods, the interdependency of markets, and economic welfare. They also include macroeconomic issues, such as employment, national income, the balance of payments and the distribution of income, inflation, growth and business cycles, money and finance. The understanding should extend to economic policy at both microeconomic and macroeconomic levels. In all these, students should show understanding of analytical methods and model-based argument and appreciate the existence of different methodological approaches.
K2. Relevant quantitative methods and computing techniques. These cover mathematical and statistical methods, including econometrics. Students will have exposure to the use of such techniques on actual economic, financial or social data. A knowledge and appreciation of economic data, both quantitative and qualitative. Students should also have some knowledge of the appropriate methods that the economist might use to structure and analyse such data.
K3. The applications of economics. Students should have the ability to apply a core of economic principles and reasoning to a variety of applied topics. They should also be aware of the economic principles that can be used to design, guide and interpret commercial, economic and social policy. As part of this, they should have the ability to discuss and analyse government policy and to assess the performance of the UK and other economies.
- Students will study human geography modules selected from a wide range, with themes which will include such issues as the geographies of global change and globalization, geographies of social and political difference, global migration, world city networks and geopolitics. These modules will broaden the economics’ student’s viewpoint and introduce students to key concepts in political, social, economic and cultural geography, particularly ideas about the importance of space in the construction of political, social and cultural identities.
The above implies that the attainments of students should show.
- Ability to demonstrate specialised knowledge relating to Geography.
- A clear grasp of the disputed interpretation of contemporary patterns of global change.
- Ability to relate contemporary trends to historical patterns of change and relate global trends to spatial differences across the world.
- Ability to apply core economic theory and economic reasoning to applied topics.
- Ability to relate differences in policy recommendations to differences in the theoretical and empirical features of economic analyses which underlie such recommendations.
- Ability to discuss and analyse government policy and to assess the performance of the UK and other economies.
- Understanding of verbal, graphical, mathematical and econometric representation of economic ideas and analysis, including the relationship between them.
- Understanding of relevant mathematical and statistical techniques.
- Understanding of analytical methods, both theory- and model-based.
- Appreciation of the history and development of economic ideas and the differing methods of analysis that have been and are used by economists.
- Understanding of the appropriate techniques to enable manipulation, treatment and interpretation of the relevant statistical data.
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
-
C1. Abstraction. From the study of economic principles and models, students see how one can abstract the essential features of complex systems and provide a useable framework for evaluation and assessment of the effects of policy or other exogenous events. Through this, the typical student will acquire proficiency in how to simplify while still retaining relevance. This is an approach that they can then apply in other contexts, thereby becoming more effective problem-solvers and decision-makers.
C2. Analysis, deduction and induction. Economic reasoning is highly deductive, and logical analysis is applied to assumption-based models. However, inductive reasoning is also important. The typical student will have been exposed to some or all of these and be able to use some of them. Such skills also enhance their problem-solving and decision-making ability.
C3. Quantification and design. Data, and their effective organization, presentation and analysis, are important in economics. The typical student will have some familiarity with the principal sources of economic information and data relevant to industry, commerce and government, and have had practice in organising it and presenting it informatively. This skill is important at all stages in the decision-making process.
C4. Framing. Through the study of economics, a student should learn how to decide what should be taken as given or fixed for the purposes of setting up and solving a problem, i.e. what the important 'parameters' are in constraining the solution to the problem. Learning to think about how and why these parameters might change encourages a student to place the economic problem in its broader social and political context. This `framing' skill is important in determining the decision-maker's ability to implement the solutions to problems.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
P1. Construct economic models using verbal, diagrammatic, mathematical, statistical and econometric techniques and reasoning.
P2. Access, search for and evaluate relevant data sources for validation of economic models.
P3. Apply and use specialised software including spreadsheets for the analysis of economic models.
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate the key skills of:
T1. Analysis and decision making.
T2. Communication, both written and verbal.
T3. Numeracy and computation.
T4. IT, information handling and retrieval, including library skills.
T5. Independent study and group work.
T6. Time management.
T7. Problem solving.
4. Programme structure
Students must have a total modular weighting of 120 credits per year. This must include the compulsory modules. The remaining optional modules may be chosen to give a 60:60 split over the two semesters, or alternatively, 50:70 or 70:50.
The prefixes on module codes represent the credit levels as follows:
A level 4; B level 5; C level 6.
Candidates following the Placement Stream are required to spend the third academic year undertaking professional training leading to the Diploma in Professional Studies, in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
Candidates following the Study Abroad Stream are required to spend the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution leading to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
Candidates following the Split Stream are required to spend six months of the third academic year undertaking professional training, and the other half of the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution. This leads to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
4.1 Part A – Economics with Geography Introductory Modules
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTER 1 and 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
ECA001 Principles of Macroeconomics | 20 |
ECA002 Principles of Microeconomics | 20 |
ECA003 Data Analysis | 20 |
ECA004 Quantitative Economics | 20 |
SEMESTER 1 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
GYA002 Geographies of Global Economic Change | 20 |
SEMESTER 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
GYA102 Geographies of Identity | 20 |
There are no optional modules in Part A of this course. Students will be registered for all of the above modules. |
4.2 Part B – Economics with Geography
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTER 1 and 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
ECB001 Intermediate Macroeconomics | 20 |
ECB002 Intermediate Microeconomics | 20 |
GEOGRAPHY MODULES - A total weighting of 40 must be chosen from Semester 1 and 2 combined | |
SEMESTER 1 and 2 GEOGRAPHY MODULES | |
GYB210 Globalization* | 20 |
GYB220 Geographies of Social and Political Difference** | 20 |
SEMESTER 1 GEOGRAPHY MODULES | |
GYB211 Globalization* | 10 |
GYB222 Geographies of Social and Political Difference** | 10 |
GYB113 Geographies of Culture, Media and Representation | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 GEOGRAPHY MODULES | |
GYB110 Sustainable Urban Geographies | 10 |
GYB320 Global Migration | 10 |
NOTE *Either GYB210 or GYB211; ** Either GYB220 or GYB222 | |
ECONOMIC OPTIONAL MODULES - A total weighting of 40 must be chosen | |
SEMESTER 1 and 2 OPTIONAL MODULES | |
ECB004 Introduction to Finance | 20 |
ECB005 International Economic Relations | 20 |
ECB015 Economics of the Financial System | 20 |
ECB016 History of Economic Thought | 20 |
ECB030 Energy and the Environment | 20 |
SEMESTER 1 OPTIONAL MODULES | |
ECB136 Transport Economics | 20 |
SEMESTER 2 OPTIONAL MODULES | |
ECB035 Economics of the Welfare State | 20 |
Compulsory and optional modules must be taken such that the total modular weight for the year is 120 credits divided equally over each Semester, or split 70:50 or 50:70 over the two Semesters. Please note: Optional modules are subject to availability and timetable permitting. |
Students will choose options over Semesters One and Two totalling 80 credits: 40 credits in Geography modules and 40 credits in Economics modules.
4.3 Part I : Optional (8 semester programme only)
Candidates pursue one of the following streams:
The duration of the programme is either six semesters or six semesters plus one academic year if candidates select one of the following three streams:
Candidates following the Placement Stream are required to spend the third academic year undertaking professional training leading to the Diploma in Professional Studies, in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
Candidates following the Study Abroad Stream are required to spend the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution leading to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
Candidates following the Split Stream are required to spend six months of the third academic year undertaking professional training, and the other half of the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution. This leads to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
The third academic year (Part I) occurs between Part B and Part C. Permission to transfer to the eight semester programme will be at the discretion of the Associate Dean (Teaching) for the School.
4.4 Part C – Economics with Geography
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
GEOGRAPHY OPTIONAL MODULES (Choose 40 weight) | |
SEMESTER 1 OPTIONAL MODULES | |
GYC212 Globalised Urbanisation | 20 |
GYC226 Geographies of Work and Life | 10 |
GYC309 Feminist Geographies of Home | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 OPTIONAL MODULES | |
GYC107 Regional Geography in the UK | 20 |
GYC214 Geographies of Children and Youth | 10 |
GYC325 Geographies of Transnational Mobility and Diaspora | 10 |
ECONOMICS OPTIONAL MODULES (Choose 60 weight) | |
SEMESTER 1 OPTIONAL MODULES | |
ECC001 Developments in Microeconomics | 20 |
ECC003 International Money and Finance | 20 |
ECC004 Financial Economics and Asset Pricing | 20 |
ECC031 International Trade | 20 |
ECC101 Developments in Macroeconomics | 20 |
SEMESTER 1 and 2 OPTIONAL MODULE | |
ECC011 Introduction to Econometrics | 20 |
SEMESTER 2 OPTIONAL MODULES | |
ECC005 Industrial Economics | 20 |
ECC035 Central Banking and Financial Crises | 20 |
ECC119 Development Economics | 20 |
ECC141 Corporate Finance and Derivatives | 20 |
SEMESTER 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
ECC142 Research and Communication Skills for Economists | 20 |
Compulsory and optional modules must be taken such that the total modular weight for the year is 120 credits divided equally over each Semester, or split 70:50 or 50:70 over the two Semesters. Please note: Optional modules are subject to availability and timetable permitting. |
The School may offer new modules to be provided during the academic year.
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
5.1 Progression Criteria
In order to progress from Part A to Part B and from Part B to C and to be eligible for the award of an Honours degree, candidates must satisfy the minimum credit requirements set out in Regulation XX.
A Diploma in Professional Studies will be awarded to students who have satisfactorily completed the programme of study required for Part I.
5.2 Reassessment
Candidates must accumulate at least 60 credits in a Part of a Programme in order to be eligible for reassessment in the relevant Part during the University’s Special Assessment Period.
If a student registers to resit a module, they will be required to resit all failed components of that module (ie if their coursework mark was less than 40% they must resit the coursework and if their exam mark was less than 40% they must resit the exam). If a student resits the coursework element of a module and there was more than 1 coursework assignment for that module, then the student would be required to resit all coursework assignments in which they achieved a mark below 40%. Marks for elements of a module not being re-sat will be carried forward.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
Candidates' final degree classification will be determined on the basis of performance in degree level Module Assessments in Parts B and C in accordance with the scheme set out in Regulation XX. The average percentage marks for each Part will be combined in the ratio Part B 30% : Part C 70% to determine the final Programme Mark.
Programme Specification
BS BSc (Hons) Economics with Geography (2013 entry)
Academic Year: 2017/18
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at 天堂视频 (available soon)
- What makes 天堂视频 programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | 天堂视频 |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | School of Business and Economics |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | |
Final award | BSc / BSc+DPS / BSc+DIntS |
Programme title | Economics with Geography |
Programme code | ECUB09 |
Length of programme | The duration of the programme is either six semesters or six semesters plus one academic year if candidates select one of the available part I streams. The third academic year (Part I) occurs between Part B and Part C. Permission to transfer to the eight semester programme will be at the discretion of the Programme Director (Economics). See Programme Structure for further details of eight semester streams. |
UCAS code | L1F8 Economics with Geography (3 years) L1FV Economics with Geography (4 years sandwich) |
Admissions criteria | http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/undergraduate/courses/departments/business-economics/economicswithgeography/ |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- Know and understand the core of economic theory and applied economics.
- Know and understand the behaviour of firms and consumers in the national and international economy.
- Discuss in an informed manner the major policy directions and regulations to implement economic policy.
- Know and understand the nature of incentives in economic decision making by agents in the economy.
- Evaluate the outcomes of market and policy changes in all spheres of the economy.
- To provide students with the opportunity to study a broad curriculum in both Economics and Geography
- To provide training in the principles of economics and their application.
- To stimulate students intellectually through the study of economics and to lead them to appreciate its application to a range of problems and its relevance in a variety of contexts.
- To provide a firm foundation of knowledge about the workings of the economy and to develop the relevant skills for the constructive use of that knowledge in a range of settings.
- To develop in students the ability to apply the knowledge and skills they have acquired to the solution of theoretical and applied problems in economics.
- To equip students with appropriate tools of analysis to tackle issues and problems of economic policy.
- To develop in students, through the study of economics, a range of transferable skills that will be of value in employment and self-employment.
- To provide students with analytical skills and an ability to develop simplifying frameworks for studying the real world.
- To develop in students the ability to appreciate what would be an appropriate level of abstraction for a range of economic issues.
- To provide students with the knowledge and skill base, from which they can proceed to further studies in economics, related areas or in multi-disciplinary areas that involve economics.
- To generate in students an appreciation of the economic dimension of wider social and political issues.
- To provide specialised training in the aspects of economics relevant to industry, commerce and financial services.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
- QAA Subject Benchmark Statements: Economics.
- Framework for Higher Education Qualifications.
- International links with a network of eleven European Universities within the Erasmus exchange programme.
- University Learning and Teaching Strategy.
- Departmental learning and teaching policies.
- Links, both formal and informal, with external examiners.
- Staff research specialisms and professional involvement in the discipline.
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding of:
K1. A coherent core of economic principles. The understanding of these might be verbal, graphical or mathematical.
These principles cover the microeconomic issues of decision and choice, the production and exchange of goods, the interdependency of markets, and economic welfare. They also include macroeconomic issues, such as employment, national income, the balance of payments and the distribution of income, inflation, growth and business cycles, money and finance. The understanding should extend to economic policy at both microeconomic and macroeconomic levels. In all these, students should show understanding of analytical methods and model-based argument and appreciate the existence of different methodological approaches.
K2. Relevant quantitative methods and computing techniques. These cover mathematical and statistical methods, including econometrics. Students will have exposure to the use of such techniques on actual economic, financial or social data. A knowledge and appreciation of economic data, both quantitative and qualitative. Students should also have some knowledge of the appropriate methods that the economist might use to structure and analyse such data.
K3. The applications of economics. Students should have the ability to apply a core of economic principles and reasoning to a variety of applied topics. They should also be aware of the economic principles that can be used to design, guide and interpret commercial, economic and social policy. As part of this, they should have the ability to discuss and analyse government policy and to assess the performance of the UK and other economies.
- Students will study human geography modules selected from a wide range, with themes which will include such issues as the geographies of global change and globalization, geographies of social and political difference, global migration, world city networks and geopolitics. These modules will broaden the economics’ student’s viewpoint and introduce students to key concepts in political, social, economic and cultural geography, particularly ideas about the importance of space in the construction of political, social and cultural identities.
The above implies that the attainments of students should show.
- Ability to demonstrate specialised knowledge relating to Geography.
- A clear grasp of the disputed interpretation of contemporary patterns of global change.
- Ability to relate contemporary trends to historical patterns of change and relate global trends to spatial differences across the world.
- Ability to apply core economic theory and economic reasoning to applied topics.
- Ability to relate differences in policy recommendations to differences in the theoretical and empirical features of economic analyses which underlie such recommendations.
- Ability to discuss and analyse government policy and to assess the performance of the UK and other economies.
- Understanding of verbal, graphical, mathematical and econometric representation of economic ideas and analysis, including the relationship between them.
- Understanding of relevant mathematical and statistical techniques.
- Understanding of analytical methods, both theory- and model-based.
- Appreciation of the history and development of economic ideas and the differing methods of analysis that have been and are used by economists.
- Understanding of the appropriate techniques to enable manipulation, treatment and interpretation of the relevant statistical data.
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
-
C1. Abstraction. From the study of economic principles and models, students see how one can abstract the essential features of complex systems and provide a useable framework for evaluation and assessment of the effects of policy or other exogenous events. Through this, the typical student will acquire proficiency in how to simplify while still retaining relevance. This is an approach that they can then apply in other contexts, thereby becoming more effective problem-solvers and decision-makers.
C2. Analysis, deduction and induction. Economic reasoning is highly deductive, and logical analysis is applied to assumption-based models. However, inductive reasoning is also important. The typical student will have been exposed to some or all of these and be able to use some of them. Such skills also enhance their problem-solving and decision-making ability.
C3. Quantification and design. Data, and their effective organization, presentation and analysis, are important in economics. The typical student will have some familiarity with the principal sources of economic information and data relevant to industry, commerce and government, and have had practice in organising it and presenting it informatively. This skill is important at all stages in the decision-making process.
C4. Framing. Through the study of economics, a student should learn how to decide what should be taken as given or fixed for the purposes of setting up and solving a problem, i.e. what the important 'parameters' are in constraining the solution to the problem. Learning to think about how and why these parameters might change encourages a student to place the economic problem in its broader social and political context. This `framing' skill is important in determining the decision-maker's ability to implement the solutions to problems.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
P1. Construct economic models using verbal, diagrammatic, mathematical, statistical and econometric techniques and reasoning.
P2. Access, search for and evaluate relevant data sources for validation of economic models.
P3. Apply and use specialised software including spreadsheets for the analysis of economic models.
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate the key skills of:
T1. Analysis and decision making.
T2. Communication, both written and verbal.
T3. Numeracy and computation.
T4. IT, information handling and retrieval, including library skills.
T5. Independent study and group work.
T6. Time management.
T7. Problem solving.
4. Programme structure
Students must have a total modular weighting of 120 credits per year. This must include the compulsory modules. The remaining optional modules may be chosen to give a 60:60 split over the two semesters, or alternatively, 50:70 or 70:50.
The prefixes on module codes represent the credit levels as follows:
A level 4; B level 5; C level 6.
Candidates following the Placement Stream are required to spend the third academic year undertaking professional training leading to the Diploma in Professional Studies, in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
Candidates following the Study Abroad Stream are required to spend the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution leading to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
Candidates following the Split Stream are required to spend six months of the third academic year undertaking professional training, and the other half of the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution. This leads to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
4.1 Part A – Economics with Geography Introductory Modules
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTER 1 and 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
ECA001 Principles of Macroeconomics | 20 |
ECA002 Principles of Microeconomics | 20 |
ECA003 Data Analysis | 20 |
ECA004 Quantitative Economics | 20 |
SEMESTER 1 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
GYA002 Geographies of Global Economic Change | 20 |
SEMESTER 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
GYA102 Geographies of Identity | 20 |
There are no optional modules in Part A of this course. Students will be registered for all of the above modules. |
4.2 Part B – Economics with Geography
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTER 1 and 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
ECB001 Intermediate Macroeconomics | 20 |
ECB002 Intermediate Microeconomics | 20 |
GEOGRAPHY MODULES - A total weighting of 40 must be chosen from Semester 1 and 2 combined | |
SEMESTER 1 and 2 GEOGRAPHY MODULES | |
GYB210 Globalization* | 20 |
GYB220 Geographies of Social and Political Difference** | 20 |
SEMESTER 1 GEOGRAPHY MODULES | |
GYB211 Globalization* | 10 |
GYB222 Geographies of Social and Political Difference** | 10 |
GYB113 Geographies of Culture, Media and Representation | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 GEOGRAPHY MODULES | |
GYB110 Sustainable Urban Geographies | 10 |
GYB320 Global Migration | 10 |
NOTE *Either GYB210 or GYB211; ** Either GYB220 or GYB222 | |
ECONOMIC OPTIONAL MODULES - A total weighting of 40 must be chosen | |
SEMESTER 1 and 2 OPTIONAL MODULES | |
ECB004 Introduction to Finance | 20 |
ECB005 International Economic Relations | 20 |
ECB015 Economics of the Financial System | 20 |
ECB016 History of Economic Thought | 20 |
ECB030 Energy and the Environment | 20 |
SEMESTER 1 OPTIONAL MODULES | |
ECB136 Transport Economics | 20 |
SEMESTER 2 OPTIONAL MODULES | |
ECB035 Economics of the Welfare State | 20 |
Compulsory and optional modules must be taken such that the total modular weight for the year is 120 credits divided equally over each Semester, or split 70:50 or 50:70 over the two Semesters. Please note: Optional modules are subject to availability and timetable permitting. |
Students will choose options over Semesters One and Two totalling 80 credits: 40 credits in Geography modules and 40 credits in Economics modules.
4.3 Part I : Optional (8 semester programme only)
Candidates pursue one of the following streams:
The duration of the programme is either six semesters or six semesters plus one academic year if candidates select one of the following three streams:
Candidates following the Placement Stream are required to spend the third academic year undertaking professional training leading to the Diploma in Professional Studies, in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
Candidates following the Study Abroad Stream are required to spend the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution leading to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
Candidates following the Split Stream are required to spend six months of the third academic year undertaking professional training, and the other half of the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution. This leads to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
The third academic year (Part I) occurs between Part B and Part C. Permission to transfer to the eight semester programme will be at the discretion of the Associate Dean (Teaching) for the School.
4.4 Part C – Economics with Geography
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
GEOGRAPHY OPTIONAL MODULES (Choose 40 weight) | |
SEMESTER 1 OPTIONAL MODULES | |
GYC107 Regional Geography in the UK | 20 |
GYC212 Globalised Urbanisation | 20 |
GYC309 Feminist Geographies of Home | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 OPTIONAL MODULES | |
GYC205 Central America: Dependency and Development | 10 |
GYC214 Geographies of Children and Youth | 10 |
GYC325 Geographies of Transnational Mobility and Diaspora | 20 |
ECONOMICS OPTIONAL MODULES (Choose 60 weight) | |
SEMESTER 1 OPTIONAL MODULES | |
ECC001 Developments in Microeconomics | 20 |
ECC003 International Money and Finance | 20 |
ECC004 Financial Economics and Asset Pricing | 20 |
ECC031 International Trade | 20 |
ECC101 Developments in Macroeconomics | 20 |
SEMESTER 1 and 2 OPTIONAL MODULE | |
ECC011 Introduction to Econometrics | 20 |
SEMESTER 2 OPTIONAL MODULES | |
ECC005 Industrial Economics | 20 |
ECC035 Central Banking and Financial Crises | 20 |
ECC119 Development Economics | 20 |
ECC141 Corporate Finance and Derivatives | 20 |
SEMESTER 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
ECC142 Research and Communication Skills for Economists | 20 |
Compulsory and optional modules must be taken such that the total modular weight for the year is 120 credits divided equally over each Semester, or split 70:50 or 50:70 over the two Semesters. Please note: Optional modules are subject to availability and timetable permitting. |
The School may offer new modules to be provided during the academic year.
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
5.1 Progression Criteria
In order to progress from Part A to Part B and from Part B to C and to be eligible for the award of an Honours degree, candidates must satisfy the minimum credit requirements set out in Regulation XX.
A Diploma in Professional Studies will be awarded to students who have satisfactorily completed the programme of study required for Part I.
5.2 Reassessment
Candidates must accumulate at least 60 credits in a Part of a Programme in order to be eligible for reassessment in the relevant Part during the University’s Special Assessment Period.
If a student registers to resit a module, they will be required to resit all failed components of that module (ie if their coursework mark was less than 40% they must resit the coursework and if their exam mark was less than 40% they must resit the exam). If a student resits the coursework element of a module and there was more than 1 coursework assignment for that module, then the student would be required to resit all coursework assignments in which they achieved a mark below 40%. Marks for elements of a module not being re-sat will be carried forward.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
Candidates' final degree classification will be determined on the basis of performance in degree level Module Assessments in Parts B and C in accordance with the scheme set out in Regulation XX. The average percentage marks for each Part will be combined in the ratio Part B 30% : Part C 70% to determine the final Programme Mark.
Programme Specification
BS BSc (Hons) Economics with Politics (2017 entry)
Academic Year: 2017/18
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at 天堂视频 (available soon)
- What makes 天堂视频 programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | 天堂视频 |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | School of Business and Economics |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | |
Final award | BSc / BSc+DPS / BSc+DIntS |
Programme title | Economics with Politics |
Programme code | ECUB10 |
Length of programme | The duration of the programme is either six semesters or six semesters plus one academic year if candidates select one of the available part I streams. The third academic year (Part I) occurs between Part B and Part C. Permission to transfer to the eight semester programme will be at the discretion of the Programme Director (Economics). See Programme Structure for further details of eight semester streams. |
UCAS code | L1L2 Economics with Politics (3 years) L1LF Economics with Politics (4 years sandwich) |
Admissions criteria | http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/undergraduate/courses/departments/business-economics/economicswithpolitics/ |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- Know and understand the core of economic theory and applied economics, with a particular application to the world of business and finance.
- Know and understand the behaviour of agents in financial markets, and the behaviour of firms and consumers in the national and international economy
- Discuss in an informed manner the major policy directions and regulations to implement economic policy
- Know and understand the nature of incentives in economic decision making by agents in the economy
- Evaluate the outcomes of market and policy changes in all spheres of the economy, with special emphasis on business and finance
To provide students with the opportunity to study a broad curriculum in both Economics and Politics.
- To provide training in the principles of economics and their application.
- To stimulate students intellectually through the study of economics and to lead them to appreciate its application to a range of problems and its relevance in a variety of contexts.
- To provide a firm foundation of knowledge about the workings of the economy and to develop the relevant skills for the constructive use of that knowledge in a range of settings.
- To develop in students the ability to apply the knowledge and skills they have acquired to the solution of theoretical and applied problems in economics.
- To equip students with appropriate tools of analysis to tackle issues and problems of economic policy.
- To develop in students, through the study of economics, a range of transferable skills that will be of value in employment and self-employment.
- To provide students with analytical skills and an ability to develop simplifying frameworks for studying the real world.
- To develop in students the ability to appreciate what would be an appropriate level of abstraction for a range of economic issues.
- To provide students with the knowledge and skill base, from which they can proceed to further studies in economics, related areas or in multi-disciplinary areas that involve economics.
- To generate in students an appreciation of the economic dimension of wider social and political issues.
- To provide specialised training in the aspects of economics relevant to industry, commerce and financial services.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
- QAA Subject Benchmark Statements: Economics.
- Framework for Higher Education Qualifications.
- International links with a network of eleven European Universities within the Erasmus exchange programme.
- University Learning and Teaching Strategy.
- Departmental learning and teaching policies.
- Links, both formal and informal, with external examiners.
- Staff research specialisms and professional involvement in the discipline.
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding of:
K1. A coherent core of economic principles. The understanding of these might be verbal, graphical or mathematical.
These principles cover the microeconomic issues of decision and choice, the production and exchange of goods, the interdependency of markets, and economic welfare. They also include macroeconomic issues, such as employment, national income, the balance of payments and the distribution of income, inflation, growth and business cycles, money and finance. The understanding should extend to economic policy at both microeconomic and macroeconomic levels. In all these, students should show understanding of analytical methods and model-based argument and appreciate the existence of different methodological approaches.
K2. Relevant quantitative methods and computing techniques. These cover mathematical and statistical methods, including econometrics. Students will have exposure to the use of such techniques on actual economic, financial or social data. A knowledge and appreciation of economic data, both quantitative and qualitative. Students should also have some knowledge of the appropriate methods that the economist might use to structure and analyse such data.
K3. The applications of economics. Students should have the ability to apply a core of economic principles and reasoning to a variety of applied topics. They should also be aware of the economic principles that can be used to design, guide and interpret commercial, economic and social policy. As part of this, they should have the ability to discuss and analyse government policy and to assess the performance of the UK and other economies.
The above implies that the attainments of students should have:
- Ability to demonstrate specialised knowledge relating to Politics.
- Ability to evaluate the interaction between the principal institutions of government in Britain
- Ability to analyse how political power is exercised through policy-making and administrative bodies
- Ability to develop a critical awareness of the many arguments for reform presented in this area
- Ability to apply core economic theory and economic reasoning to applied topics.
- Ability to identify and evaluate the ideologies and aims of major political parties and groups.
- Ability to evaluate the relationship between ideology and organisation.
- Ability to appraise the factors motivating individual and collective political behaviour in contemporary Britain.
- Ability to relate differences in policy recommendations to differences in the theoretical and empirical features of the economic analyses which underlie such recommendations.
- Ability to discuss and analyse government policy and to assess the performance of the UK and other economies.
- Understanding of verbal, graphical, mathematical and econometric representation of economic ideas and analysis, including the relationship between them.
- Understanding of relevant mathematical and statistical techniques.
- Understanding of analytical methods, both theory- and model-based.
- Appreciation of the history and development of economic ideas and the differing methods of analysis that have been and are used by economists.
- Understanding of the appropriate techniques to enable manipulation, treatment and interpretation of the relevant statistical data.
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
C1. Abstraction. From the study of economic principles and models, students see how one can abstract the essential features of complex systems and provide a useable framework for evaluation and assessment of the effects of policy or other exogenous events. Through this, the typical student will acquire proficiency in how to simplify while still retaining relevance. This is an approach that they can then apply in other contexts, thereby becoming more effective problem-solvers and decision-makers.
C2. Analysis, deduction and induction. Economic reasoning is highly deductive, and logical analysis is applied to assumption-based models. However, inductive reasoning is also important. The typical student will have been exposed to some or all of these and be able to use some of them. Such skills also enhance their problem-solving and decision-making ability.
C3. Quantification and design. Data, and their effective organization, presentation and analysis, are important in economics. The typical student will have some familiarity with the principal sources of economic information and data relevant to industry, commerce and government, and have had practice in organising it and presenting it informatively. This skill is important at all stages in the decision-making process.
C4. Framing. Through the study of economics, a student should learn how to decide what should be taken as given or fixed for the purposes of setting up and solving a problem, i.e. what the important 'parameters' are in constraining the solution to the problem. Learning to think about how and why these parameters might change encourages a student to place the economic problem in its broader social and political context. This `framing' skill is important in determining the decision-maker's ability to implement the solutions to problems.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
P1. Construct economic models using verbal, diagrammatic, mathematical, statistical and econometric techniques and reasoning.
P2. Access, search for and evaluate relevant data sources for validation of economic models
P3. Apply and use specialised software including spreadsheets for the analysis of economic models and financial calculations.
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate the key skills of:
T1. Analysis and decision making.
T2. Communication, both written and verbal.
T3. Numeracy and computation.
T4. IT, information handling and retrieval, including library skills.
T5. Independent study and group work.
T6. Time management.
T7. Problem solving.
4. Programme structure
Students must have a total modular weighting of 120 credits per year. This must include the compulsory modules. The remaining optional modules may be chosen to give a 60:60 split over the two semesters, or alternatively, 50:70 or 70:50. Except in exceptional cases, the University allows only a maximum of 80 credits to be chosen from 20 weighted long-thin modules. These are modules that are studied continuously over both Semesters 1 and 2.
The prefixes on module codes represent the credit levels as follows:
A level 4; B level 5; C level 6.
Candidates following the Placement Stream are required to spend the third academic year undertaking professional training leading to the Diploma in Professional Studies, in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
Candidates following the Study Abroad Stream are required to spend the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution leading to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
Candidates following the Split Stream are required to spend six months of the third academic year undertaking professional training, and the other half of the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution. This leads to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
4.1 Part A – Economics with Politics Introductory Modules
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSA008 Skills for Study and Employment (Semester 2) | 10 |
ECA001 Principles of Macroeconomics (Semester 1 and 2) | 20 |
ECA002 Principles of Microeconomics (Semester 1 and 2) | 20 |
ECA003 Data Analysis I (Semester 1) | 10 |
ECA004 Quantitative Economics (Semester 1 and 2) | 20 |
EUA607 Introduction to Democratic Government (Semester 1) | 10 |
EUA614 Political Ideologies (Semester 2) | 10 |
SEMESTER 1 OPTIONAL MODULES | |
SSA001 Introduction to Sociology: Identities and Inequalities | 10 |
SSA201 Introduction to Criminology and Social Policy A | 10 |
University-Wide Language Programmes | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 OPTIONAL MODULES | |
ECA005 Data Analysis II | 10 |
SSA002 Introduction to Sociology: Global, Social and Cultural Change | 10 |
SSA202 Introduction to Criminology and Social Policy B | 10 |
University-Wide Language Programmes | 10 |
Compulsory and optional modules must be taken such that the total modular weight for the year is 120 credits divided equally over each Semester, or split 70:50 or 50:70 over the two Semesters. Please note: Optional modules are subject to availability and timetable permitting. |
2.2 Part B – Economics with Politics
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTER 1 and 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
ECB001 Intermediate Macroeconomics | 20 |
ECB002 Intermediate Microeconomics | 20 |
SEMESTER 1 POLITICS MODULES | |
EUB630 British Politics | 20 |
SEMESTER 2 POLITICS MODULES | |
EUB604 The Comparative European Politics | 20 |
ECONOMICS OPTIONAL MODULES - A total weighting of 40 must be chosen | |
SEMESTER 1 and 2 OPTIONAL MODULES | |
ECB004 Introduction to Financial Economics | 20 |
ECB005 International Economic Relations | 20 |
ECB015 Economics of the Financial System | 20 |
ECB016 History of Economic Thought | 20 |
SEMESTER 1 OPTIONAL MODULE | |
ECB136 Transport Economics | 20 |
SEMESTER 2 OPTIONAL MODULE | |
ECB035 The Economics of Social Issues | 20 |
Compulsory and optional modules must be taken such that the total modular weight for the year is 120 credits divided equally over each Semester, or split 70:50 or 50:70 over the two Semesters. Please note: Optional modules are subject to availability and timetable permitting. |
4.3 Part I : Optional (8 semester programme only)
Candidates pursue one of the following streams:
The duration of the programme is either six semesters or six semesters plus one academic year if candidates select one of the following three streams:
Candidates following the Placement Stream are required to spend the third academic year undertaking professional training leading to the Diploma in Professional Studies, in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
Candidates following the Study Abroad Stream are required to spend the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution leading to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
Candidates following the Split Stream are required to spend six months of the third academic year undertaking professional training, and the other half of the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution. This leads to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
The third academic year (Part I) occurs between Part B and Part C. Permission to transfer to the eight semester programme will be at the discretion of the Associate Dean (Teaching) for the School.
4.4 Part C – Economics with Politics
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTER 2 COMPULSORY MODULE | |
ECC142 Research and Communication Skills for Economists | 20 |
SEMESTER 1 POLITICS MODULES - Choose ONE plus FIRST and SECOND Reserve | |
EUC602 Nationalism - Blood, Soil and War | 20 |
EUC604 State, Violence and Terrorism | 20 |
EUC628 The Asia Pacific in Global Politics | 20 |
EUC657 The Civil Rights Movement in the US | 20 |
EUC660 Contemporary Political Philosophy | 20 |
EUC666 Gender and Politics | 20 |
SEMESTER 2 POLITICS MODULES - Choose ONE plus FIRST and SECOND Reserve | |
EUC609 Spanish-Latin American Relations | 20 |
EUC621 Germany in Europe | 20 |
EUC658 Art, Politics and Society | 20 |
EUC665 Post-War British Politics | 20 |
EUC677 Britain and the European Union | 20 |
EUC678 No Gods! No Masters! Anarchism Past and Present | 20 |
EUC680 The Populist Challenge to Western Democracies | 20 |
ECONOMICS OPTIONAL MODULES - A TOTAL WEIGHTING OF 60 MUST BE CHOSEN | |
SEMESTER 1 AND 2 OPTIONAL MODULE | |
ECC011 Introduction to Econometrics | 20 |
SEMESTER 1 OPTIONAL MODULES | |
ECC001 Developments in Microeconomics | 20 |
ECC003 International Money and Finance | 20 |
ECC004 Financial Economics and Asset Pricing | 20 |
ECC031 International Trade | 20 |
ECC101 Developments in Macroeconomics | 20 |
SEMESTER 2 OPTIONAL MODULES | |
ECC005 Industrial Economics | 20 |
ECC035 Central Banking and Financial Crises | 20 |
ECC119 Development Economics | 20 |
ECC139 Environmental Economics | 20 |
ECC141 Corporate Finance and Derivatives | 20 |
Compulsory and optional modules must be taken such that the total modular weight for the year is 120 credits divided equally over each Semester, or split 70:50 or 50:70 over the two Semesters. Please note: Optional modules are subject to availability and timetable permitting. |
The School may offer new modules to be provided during the academic year.
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
5.1 Progression Criteria
In order to progress from Part A to Part B and from Part B to C and to be eligible for the award of an Honours degree, candidates must satisfy the minimum credit requirements set out in Regulation XX.
A Diploma in Professional Studies will be awarded to students who have satisfactorily completed the programme of study required for Part I.
5.2 Reassessment
Candidates must accumulate at least 60 credits in a Part of a Programme in order to be eligible for reassessment in the relevant Part during the University’s Special Assessment Period.
If a student registers to resit a module, they will be required to resit all failed components of that module (ie if their coursework mark was less than 40% they must resit the coursework and if their exam mark was less than 40% they must resit the exam). If a student resits the coursework element of a module and there was more than 1 coursework assignment for that module, then the student would be required to resit all coursework assignments in which they achieved a mark below 40%. Marks for elements of a module not being re-sat will be carried forward.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
Candidates' final degree classification will be determined on the basis of performance in degree level Module Assessments in Parts B and C in accordance with the scheme set out in Regulation XX. The average percentage marks for each Part will be combined in the ratio Part B 30% : Part C 70% to determine the final Programme Mark.
Programme Specification
BS BSc (Hons) Economics with Politics (2016 entry)
Academic Year: 2017/18
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at 天堂视频 (available soon)
- What makes 天堂视频 programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | 天堂视频 |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | School of Business and Economics |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | |
Final award | BSc / BSc+DPS / BSc+DIntS |
Programme title | Economics with Politics |
Programme code | ECUB10 |
Length of programme | The duration of the programme is either six semesters or six semesters plus one academic year if candidates select one of the available part I streams. The third academic year (Part I) occurs between Part B and Part C. Permission to transfer to the eight semester programme will be at the discretion of the Programme Director (Economics). See Programme Structure for further details of eight semester streams. |
UCAS code | L1L2 Economics with Politics (3 years) L1LF Economics with Politics (4 years sandwich) |
Admissions criteria | http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/undergraduate/courses/departments/business-economics/economicswithpolitics/ |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- Know and understand the core of economic theory and applied economics, with a particular application to the world of business and finance.
- Know and understand the behaviour of agents in financial markets, and the behaviour of firms and consumers in the national and international economy
- Discuss in an informed manner the major policy directions and regulations to implement economic policy
- Know and understand the nature of incentives in economic decision making by agents in the economy
- Evaluate the outcomes of market and policy changes in all spheres of the economy, with special emphasis on business and finance
To provide students with the opportunity to study a broad curriculum in both Economics and Politics.
- To provide training in the principles of economics and their application.
- To stimulate students intellectually through the study of economics and to lead them to appreciate its application to a range of problems and its relevance in a variety of contexts.
- To provide a firm foundation of knowledge about the workings of the economy and to develop the relevant skills for the constructive use of that knowledge in a range of settings.
- To develop in students the ability to apply the knowledge and skills they have acquired to the solution of theoretical and applied problems in economics.
- To equip students with appropriate tools of analysis to tackle issues and problems of economic policy.
- To develop in students, through the study of economics, a range of transferable skills that will be of value in employment and self-employment.
- To provide students with analytical skills and an ability to develop simplifying frameworks for studying the real world.
- To develop in students the ability to appreciate what would be an appropriate level of abstraction for a range of economic issues.
- To provide students with the knowledge and skill base, from which they can proceed to further studies in economics, related areas or in multi-disciplinary areas that involve economics.
- To generate in students an appreciation of the economic dimension of wider social and political issues.
- To provide specialised training in the aspects of economics relevant to industry, commerce and financial services.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
- QAA Subject Benchmark Statements: Economics.
- Framework for Higher Education Qualifications.
- International links with a network of eleven European Universities within the Erasmus exchange programme.
- University Learning and Teaching Strategy.
- Departmental learning and teaching policies.
- Links, both formal and informal, with external examiners.
- Staff research specialisms and professional involvement in the discipline.
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding of:
K1. A coherent core of economic principles. The understanding of these might be verbal, graphical or mathematical.
These principles cover the microeconomic issues of decision and choice, the production and exchange of goods, the interdependency of markets, and economic welfare. They also include macroeconomic issues, such as employment, national income, the balance of payments and the distribution of income, inflation, growth and business cycles, money and finance. The understanding should extend to economic policy at both microeconomic and macroeconomic levels. In all these, students should show understanding of analytical methods and model-based argument and appreciate the existence of different methodological approaches.
K2. Relevant quantitative methods and computing techniques. These cover mathematical and statistical methods, including econometrics. Students will have exposure to the use of such techniques on actual economic, financial or social data. A knowledge and appreciation of economic data, both quantitative and qualitative. Students should also have some knowledge of the appropriate methods that the economist might use to structure and analyse such data.
K3. The applications of economics. Students should have the ability to apply a core of economic principles and reasoning to a variety of applied topics. They should also be aware of the economic principles that can be used to design, guide and interpret commercial, economic and social policy. As part of this, they should have the ability to discuss and analyse government policy and to assess the performance of the UK and other economies.
The above implies that the attainments of students should have:
- Ability to demonstrate specialised knowledge relating to Politics.
- Ability to evaluate the interaction between the principal institutions of government in Britain
- Ability to analyse how political power is exercised through policy-making and administrative bodies
- Ability to develop a critical awareness of the many arguments for reform presented in this area
- Ability to apply core economic theory and economic reasoning to applied topics.
- Ability to identify and evaluate the ideologies and aims of major political parties and groups.
- Ability to evaluate the relationship between ideology and organisation.
- Ability to appraise the factors motivating individual and collective political behaviour in contemporary Britain.
- Ability to relate differences in policy recommendations to differences in the theoretical and empirical features of the economic analyses which underlie such recommendations.
- Ability to discuss and analyse government policy and to assess the performance of the UK and other economies.
- Understanding of verbal, graphical, mathematical and econometric representation of economic ideas and analysis, including the relationship between them.
- Understanding of relevant mathematical and statistical techniques.
- Understanding of analytical methods, both theory- and model-based.
- Appreciation of the history and development of economic ideas and the differing methods of analysis that have been and are used by economists.
- Understanding of the appropriate techniques to enable manipulation, treatment and interpretation of the relevant statistical data.
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
C1. Abstraction. From the study of economic principles and models, students see how one can abstract the essential features of complex systems and provide a useable framework for evaluation and assessment of the effects of policy or other exogenous events. Through this, the typical student will acquire proficiency in how to simplify while still retaining relevance. This is an approach that they can then apply in other contexts, thereby becoming more effective problem-solvers and decision-makers.
C2. Analysis, deduction and induction. Economic reasoning is highly deductive, and logical analysis is applied to assumption-based models. However, inductive reasoning is also important. The typical student will have been exposed to some or all of these and be able to use some of them. Such skills also enhance their problem-solving and decision-making ability.
C3. Quantification and design. Data, and their effective organization, presentation and analysis, are important in economics. The typical student will have some familiarity with the principal sources of economic information and data relevant to industry, commerce and government, and have had practice in organising it and presenting it informatively. This skill is important at all stages in the decision-making process.
C4. Framing. Through the study of economics, a student should learn how to decide what should be taken as given or fixed for the purposes of setting up and solving a problem, i.e. what the important 'parameters' are in constraining the solution to the problem. Learning to think about how and why these parameters might change encourages a student to place the economic problem in its broader social and political context. This `framing' skill is important in determining the decision-maker's ability to implement the solutions to problems.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
P1. Construct economic models using verbal, diagrammatic, mathematical, statistical and econometric techniques and reasoning.
P2. Access, search for and evaluate relevant data sources for validation of economic models
P3. Apply and use specialised software including spreadsheets for the analysis of economic models and financial calculations.
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate the key skills of:
T1. Analysis and decision making.
T2. Communication, both written and verbal.
T3. Numeracy and computation.
T4. IT, information handling and retrieval, including library skills.
T5. Independent study and group work.
T6. Time management.
T7. Problem solving.
4. Programme structure
Students must have a total modular weighting of 120 credits per year. This must include the compulsory modules. The remaining optional modules may be chosen to give a 60:60 split over the two semesters, or alternatively, 50:70 or 70:50. Except in exceptional cases, the University allows only a maximum of 80 credits to be chosen from 20 weighted long-thin modules. These are modules that are studied continuously over both Semesters 1 and 2.
The prefixes on module codes represent the credit levels as follows:
A level 4; B level 5; C level 6.
Candidates following the Placement Stream are required to spend the third academic year undertaking professional training leading to the Diploma in Professional Studies, in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
Candidates following the Study Abroad Stream are required to spend the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution leading to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
Candidates following the Split Stream are required to spend six months of the third academic year undertaking professional training, and the other half of the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution. This leads to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
4.1 Part A – Economics with Politics Introductory Modules
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
COMPULSORY MODULES | |
BSA008 Skills for Study and Employment (Semester 2) | 10 |
ECA001 Principles of Macroeconomics (Semester 1 and 2) | 20 |
ECA002 Principles of Microeconomics (Semester 1 and 2) | 20 |
ECA003 Data Analysis I (Semester 1) | 10 |
ECA004 Quantitative Economics (Semester 1 and 2) | 20 |
EUA607 Introduction to Democratic Government (Semester 1) | 10 |
EUA614 Political Ideologies (Semester 2) | 10 |
SEMESTER 1 OPTIONAL MODULES | |
SSA001 Introduction to Sociology: Identities and Inequalities | 10 |
SSA201 Introduction to Criminology and Social Policy A | 10 |
University-Wide Language Programmes | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 OPTIONAL MODULES | |
ECA005 Data Analysis II | 10 |
SSA002 Introduction to Sociology: Global, Social and Cultural Change | 10 |
SSA202 Introduction to Criminology and Social Policy B | 10 |
University-Wide Language Programmes | 10 |
Compulsory and optional modules must be taken such that the total modular weight for the year is 120 credits divided equally over each Semester, or split 70:50 or 50:70 over the two Semesters. Please note: Optional modules are subject to availability and timetable permitting. |
2.2 Part B – Economics with Politics
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTER 1 and 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
ECB001 Intermediate Macroeconomics | 20 |
ECB002 Intermediate Microeconomics | 20 |
SEMESTER 1 POLITICS MODULES | |
EUB630 British Politics | 20 |
SEMESTER 2 POLITICS MODULES | |
EUB604 The Comparative European Politics | 20 |
ECONOMICS OPTIONAL MODULES - A total weighting of 40 must be chosen | |
SEMESTER 1 and 2 OPTIONAL MODULES | |
ECB004 Introduction to Financial Economics | 20 |
ECB005 International Economic Relations | 20 |
ECB015 Economics of the Financial System | 20 |
ECB016 History of Economic Thought | 20 |
SEMESTER 1 OPTIONAL MODULE | |
ECB136 Transport Economics | 20 |
SEMESTER 2 OPTIONAL MODULE | |
ECB035 The Economics of Social Issues | 20 |
Compulsory and optional modules must be taken such that the total modular weight for the year is 120 credits divided equally over each Semester, or split 70:50 or 50:70 over the two Semesters. Please note: Optional modules are subject to availability and timetable permitting. |
4.3 Part I : Optional (8 semester programme only)
Candidates pursue one of the following streams:
The duration of the programme is either six semesters or six semesters plus one academic year if candidates select one of the following three streams:
Candidates following the Placement Stream are required to spend the third academic year undertaking professional training leading to the Diploma in Professional Studies, in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
Candidates following the Study Abroad Stream are required to spend the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution leading to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
Candidates following the Split Stream are required to spend six months of the third academic year undertaking professional training, and the other half of the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution. This leads to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
The third academic year (Part I) occurs between Part B and Part C. Permission to transfer to the eight semester programme will be at the discretion of the Associate Dean (Teaching) for the School.
4.4 Part C – Economics with Politics
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTER 2 COMPULSORY MODULE | |
ECC142 Research and Communication Skills for Economists | 20 |
SEMESTER 1 POLITICS MODULES - Choose ONE plus FIRST and SECOND Reserve | |
EUC602 Nationalism - Blood, Soil and War | 20 |
EUC604 State, Violence and Terrorism | 20 |
EUC628 The Asia Pacific in Global Politics | 20 |
EUC657 The Civil Rights Movement in the US | 20 |
EUC660 Contemporary Political Philosophy | 20 |
EUC666 Gender and Politics | 20 |
SEMESTER 2 POLITICS MODULES - Choose ONE plus FIRST and SECOND Reserve | |
EUC609 Spanish-Latin American Relations | 20 |
EUC621 Germany in Europe | 20 |
EUC658 Art, Politics and Society | 20 |
EUC665 Post-War British Politics | 20 |
EUC677 Britain and the European Union | 20 |
EUC678 No Gods! No Masters! Anarchism Past and Present | 20 |
EUC680 The Populist Challenge to Western Democracies | 20 |
ECONOMICS OPTIONAL MODULES - A TOTAL WEIGHTING OF 60 MUST BE CHOSEN | |
SEMESTER 1 AND 2 OPTIONAL MODULE | |
ECC011 Introduction to Econometrics | 20 |
SEMESTER 1 OPTIONAL MODULES | |
ECC001 Developments in Microeconomics | 20 |
ECC003 International Money and Finance | 20 |
ECC004 Financial Economics and Asset Pricing | 20 |
ECC031 International Trade | 20 |
ECC101 Developments in Macroeconomics | 20 |
SEMESTER 2 OPTIONAL MODULES | |
ECC005 Industrial Economics | 20 |
ECC035 Central Banking and Financial Crises | 20 |
ECC119 Development Economics | 20 |
ECC139 Environmental Economics | 20 |
ECC141 Corporate Finance and Derivatives | 20 |
Compulsory and optional modules must be taken such that the total modular weight for the year is 120 credits divided equally over each Semester, or split 70:50 or 50:70 over the two Semesters. Please note: Optional modules are subject to availability and timetable permitting. |
The School may offer new modules to be provided during the academic year.
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
5.1 Progression Criteria
In order to progress from Part A to Part B and from Part B to C and to be eligible for the award of an Honours degree, candidates must satisfy the minimum credit requirements set out in Regulation XX.
A Diploma in Professional Studies will be awarded to students who have satisfactorily completed the programme of study required for Part I.
5.2 Reassessment
Candidates must accumulate at least 60 credits in a Part of a Programme in order to be eligible for reassessment in the relevant Part during the University’s Special Assessment Period.
If a student registers to resit a module, they will be required to resit all failed components of that module (ie if their coursework mark was less than 40% they must resit the coursework and if their exam mark was less than 40% they must resit the exam). If a student resits the coursework element of a module and there was more than 1 coursework assignment for that module, then the student would be required to resit all coursework assignments in which they achieved a mark below 40%. Marks for elements of a module not being re-sat will be carried forward.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
Candidates' final degree classification will be determined on the basis of performance in degree level Module Assessments in Parts B and C in accordance with the scheme set out in Regulation XX. The average percentage marks for each Part will be combined in the ratio Part B 30% : Part C 70% to determine the final Programme Mark.
Programme Specification
BS BSc (Hons) Economics with Politics (2015 entry)
Academic Year: 2017/18
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at 天堂视频 (available soon)
- What makes 天堂视频 programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | 天堂视频 |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | School of Business and Economics |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | |
Final award | BSc / BSc+DPS / BSc+DIntS |
Programme title | Economics with Politics |
Programme code | ECUB10 |
Length of programme | The duration of the programme is either six semesters or six semesters plus one academic year if candidates select one of the available part I streams. The third academic year (Part I) occurs between Part B and Part C. Permission to transfer to the eight semester programme will be at the discretion of the Programme Director (Economics). See Programme Structure for further details of eight semester streams. |
UCAS code | L1L2 Economics with Politics (3 years) L1LF Economics with Politics (4 years sandwich) |
Admissions criteria | http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/undergraduate/courses/departments/business-economics/economicswithpolitics/ |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- Know and understand the core of economic theory and applied economics, with a particular application to the world of business and finance.
- Know and understand the behaviour of agents in financial markets, and the behaviour of firms and consumers in the national and international economy
- Discuss in an informed manner the major policy directions and regulations to implement economic policy
- Know and understand the nature of incentives in economic decision making by agents in the economy
- Evaluate the outcomes of market and policy changes in all spheres of the economy, with special emphasis on business and finance
To provide students with the opportunity to study a broad curriculum in both Economics and Politics.
- To provide training in the principles of economics and their application.
- To stimulate students intellectually through the study of economics and to lead them to appreciate its application to a range of problems and its relevance in a variety of contexts.
- To provide a firm foundation of knowledge about the workings of the economy and to develop the relevant skills for the constructive use of that knowledge in a range of settings.
- To develop in students the ability to apply the knowledge and skills they have acquired to the solution of theoretical and applied problems in economics.
- To equip students with appropriate tools of analysis to tackle issues and problems of economic policy.
- To develop in students, through the study of economics, a range of transferable skills that will be of value in employment and self-employment.
- To provide students with analytical skills and an ability to develop simplifying frameworks for studying the real world.
- To develop in students the ability to appreciate what would be an appropriate level of abstraction for a range of economic issues.
- To provide students with the knowledge and skill base, from which they can proceed to further studies in economics, related areas or in multi-disciplinary areas that involve economics.
- To generate in students an appreciation of the economic dimension of wider social and political issues.
- To provide specialised training in the aspects of economics relevant to industry, commerce and financial services.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
- QAA Subject Benchmark Statements: Economics.
- Framework for Higher Education Qualifications.
- International links with a network of eleven European Universities within the Erasmus exchange programme.
- University Learning and Teaching Strategy.
- Departmental learning and teaching policies.
- Links, both formal and informal, with external examiners.
- Staff research specialisms and professional involvement in the discipline.
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding of:
K1. A coherent core of economic principles. The understanding of these might be verbal, graphical or mathematical.
These principles cover the microeconomic issues of decision and choice, the production and exchange of goods, the interdependency of markets, and economic welfare. They also include macroeconomic issues, such as employment, national income, the balance of payments and the distribution of income, inflation, growth and business cycles, money and finance. The understanding should extend to economic policy at both microeconomic and macroeconomic levels. In all these, students should show understanding of analytical methods and model-based argument and appreciate the existence of different methodological approaches.
K2. Relevant quantitative methods and computing techniques. These cover mathematical and statistical methods, including econometrics. Students will have exposure to the use of such techniques on actual economic, financial or social data. A knowledge and appreciation of economic data, both quantitative and qualitative. Students should also have some knowledge of the appropriate methods that the economist might use to structure and analyse such data.
K3. The applications of economics. Students should have the ability to apply a core of economic principles and reasoning to a variety of applied topics. They should also be aware of the economic principles that can be used to design, guide and interpret commercial, economic and social policy. As part of this, they should have the ability to discuss and analyse government policy and to assess the performance of the UK and other economies.
The above implies that the attainments of students should have:
- Ability to demonstrate specialised knowledge relating to Politics.
- Ability to evaluate the interaction between the principal institutions of government in Britain
- Ability to analyse how political power is exercised through policy-making and administrative bodies
- Ability to develop a critical awareness of the many arguments for reform presented in this area
- Ability to apply core economic theory and economic reasoning to applied topics.
- Ability to identify and evaluate the ideologies and aims of major political parties and groups.
- Ability to evaluate the relationship between ideology and organisation.
- Ability to appraise the factors motivating individual and collective political behaviour in contemporary Britain.
- Ability to relate differences in policy recommendations to differences in the theoretical and empirical features of the economic analyses which underlie such recommendations.
- Ability to discuss and analyse government policy and to assess the performance of the UK and other economies.
- Understanding of verbal, graphical, mathematical and econometric representation of economic ideas and analysis, including the relationship between them.
- Understanding of relevant mathematical and statistical techniques.
- Understanding of analytical methods, both theory- and model-based.
- Appreciation of the history and development of economic ideas and the differing methods of analysis that have been and are used by economists.
- Understanding of the appropriate techniques to enable manipulation, treatment and interpretation of the relevant statistical data.
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
C1. Abstraction. From the study of economic principles and models, students see how one can abstract the essential features of complex systems and provide a useable framework for evaluation and assessment of the effects of policy or other exogenous events. Through this, the typical student will acquire proficiency in how to simplify while still retaining relevance. This is an approach that they can then apply in other contexts, thereby becoming more effective problem-solvers and decision-makers.
C2. Analysis, deduction and induction. Economic reasoning is highly deductive, and logical analysis is applied to assumption-based models. However, inductive reasoning is also important. The typical student will have been exposed to some or all of these and be able to use some of them. Such skills also enhance their problem-solving and decision-making ability.
C3. Quantification and design. Data, and their effective organization, presentation and analysis, are important in economics. The typical student will have some familiarity with the principal sources of economic information and data relevant to industry, commerce and government, and have had practice in organising it and presenting it informatively. This skill is important at all stages in the decision-making process.
C4. Framing. Through the study of economics, a student should learn how to decide what should be taken as given or fixed for the purposes of setting up and solving a problem, i.e. what the important 'parameters' are in constraining the solution to the problem. Learning to think about how and why these parameters might change encourages a student to place the economic problem in its broader social and political context. This `framing' skill is important in determining the decision-maker's ability to implement the solutions to problems.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
P1. Construct economic models using verbal, diagrammatic, mathematical, statistical and econometric techniques and reasoning.
P2. Access, search for and evaluate relevant data sources for validation of economic models
P3. Apply and use specialised software including spreadsheets for the analysis of economic models and financial calculations.
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate the key skills of:
T1. Analysis and decision making.
T2. Communication, both written and verbal.
T3. Numeracy and computation.
T4. IT, information handling and retrieval, including library skills.
T5. Independent study and group work.
T6. Time management.
T7. Problem solving.
4. Programme structure
Students must have a total modular weighting of 120 credits per year. This must include the compulsory modules. The remaining optional modules may be chosen to give a 60:60 split over the two semesters, or alternatively, 50:70 or 70:50. Except in exceptional cases, the University allows only a maximum of 80 credits to be chosen from 20 weighted long-thin modules. These are modules that are studied continuously over both Semesters 1 and 2.
The prefixes on module codes represent the credit levels as follows:
A level 4; B level 5; C level 6.
Candidates following the Placement Stream are required to spend the third academic year undertaking professional training leading to the Diploma in Professional Studies, in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
Candidates following the Study Abroad Stream are required to spend the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution leading to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
Candidates following the Split Stream are required to spend six months of the third academic year undertaking professional training, and the other half of the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution. This leads to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
4.1 Part A – Economics with Politics Introductory Modules
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTER 1 and 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
ECA001 Principles of Macroeconomics | 20 |
ECA002 Principles of Microeconomics | 20 |
ECA003 Data Analysis I (Semester 1) | 10 |
ECA004 Quantitative Economics | 20 |
EUA607 Introduction to Democratic Government (Semester 1) | 10 |
EUA614 Political Ideologies (Semester 2) | 10 |
SEMESTER 1 OPTIONAL MODULES (CHOOSE ONE) | |
SSA001 Introduction to Sociology A | 10 |
SSA201 Introduction to Criminology and Social Policy A | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 OPTIONAL MODULES (CHOOSE ONE) | |
SSA002 Introduction to Sociology B | 10 |
SSA202 Introduction to Criminology and Social Policy B | 10 |
Compulsory and optional modules must be taken such that the total modular weight for the year is 120 credits divided equally over each Semester, or split 70:50 or 50:70 over the two Semesters. Please note: Optional modules are subject to availability and timetable permitting. |
2.2 Part B – Economics with Politics
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTER 1 and 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
ECB001 Intermediate Macroeconomics | 20 |
ECB002 Intermediate Microeconomics | 20 |
SEMESTER 1 POLITICS MODULES | |
EUB630 British Politics | 20 |
SEMESTER 2 POLITICS MODULES | |
EUB604 The Comparative European Politics | 20 |
ECONOMICS OPTIONAL MODULES - A total weighting of 40 must be chosen | |
SEMESTER 1 and 2 OPTIONAL MODULES | |
ECB004 Introduction to Financial Economics | 20 |
ECB005 International Economic Relations | 20 |
ECB015 Economics of the Financial System | 20 |
ECB016 History of Economic Thought | 20 |
ECB030 Energy and the Environment | 20 |
SEMESTER 1 OPTIONAL MODULE | |
ECB136 Transport Economics | 20 |
SEMESTER 2 OPTIONAL MODULES | |
ECB035 The Economics of Social Issues | 20 |
Compulsory and optional modules must be taken such that the total modular weight for the year is 120 credits divided equally over each Semester, or split 70:50 or 50:70 over the two Semesters. Please note: Optional modules are subject to availability and timetable permitting. |
4.3 Part I : Optional (8 semester programme only)
Candidates pursue one of the following streams:
The duration of the programme is either six semesters or six semesters plus one academic year if candidates select one of the following three streams:
Candidates following the Placement Stream are required to spend the third academic year undertaking professional training leading to the Diploma in Professional Studies, in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
Candidates following the Study Abroad Stream are required to spend the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution leading to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
Candidates following the Split Stream are required to spend six months of the third academic year undertaking professional training, and the other half of the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution. This leads to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
The third academic year (Part I) occurs between Part B and Part C. Permission to transfer to the eight semester programme will be at the discretion of the Associate Dean (Teaching) for the School.
4.4 Part C – Economics with Politics
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTER 2 COMPULSORY MODULE | |
ECC142 Research and Communication Skills for Economists | 20 |
SEMESTER 1 POLITICS MODULES - Choose ONE plus FIRST and SECOND Reserve | |
EUC602 Nationalism - Blood, Soil and War | 20 |
EUC604 State, Violence and Terrorism | 20 |
EUC628 The Asia Pacific in Global Politics | 20 |
EUC657 The Civil Rights Movement in the US | 20 |
EUC660 Contemporary Political Philosophy | 20 |
EUC666 Gender and Politics | 20 |
EUC677 Britain and the European Union | 20 |
SEMESTER 2 POLITICS MODULES - Choose ONE plus FIRST and SECOND Reserve | |
EUC609 Spanish-Latin American Relations | 20 |
EUC621 Germany in Europe | 20 |
EUC658 Art, Politics and Society | 20 |
EUC665 Post-War British Politics | 20 |
EUC667 Britain and the European Union | 20 |
EUC678 No Gods! No Masters! Anarchism Past and Present | 20 |
EUC680 The Populist Challenge to Western Democracies | 20 |
ECONOMICS OPTIONAL MODULES - A TOTAL WEIGHTING OF 60 MUST BE CHOSEN | |
SEMESTER 1 AND 2 OPTIONAL MODULE | |
ECC011 Introduction to Econometrics | 20 |
SEMESTER 1 OPTIONAL MODULES | |
ECC001 Developments in Microeconomics | 20 |
ECC003 International Money and Finance | 20 |
ECC004 Financial Economics and Asset Pricing | 20 |
ECC031 International Trade | 20 |
ECC101 Developments in Macroeconomics | 20 |
SEMESTER 2 OPTIONAL MODULES | |
ECC005 Industrial Economics | 20 |
ECC035 Central Banking and Financial Crises | 20 |
ECC119 Development Economics | 20 |
ECC139 Environmental Economics | 20 |
ECC141 Corporate Finance and Derivatives | 20 |
Compulsory and optional modules must be taken such that the total modular weight for the year is 120 credits divided equally over each Semester, or split 70:50 or 50:70 over the two Semesters. Please note: Optional modules are subject to availability and timetable permitting. |
The School may offer new modules to be provided during the academic year.
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
5.1 Progression Criteria
In order to progress from Part A to Part B and from Part B to C and to be eligible for the award of an Honours degree, candidates must satisfy the minimum credit requirements set out in Regulation XX.
A Diploma in Professional Studies will be awarded to students who have satisfactorily completed the programme of study required for Part I.
5.2 Reassessment
Candidates must accumulate at least 60 credits in a Part of a Programme in order to be eligible for reassessment in the relevant Part during the University’s Special Assessment Period.
If a student registers to resit a module, they will be required to resit all failed components of that module (ie if their coursework mark was less than 40% they must resit the coursework and if their exam mark was less than 40% they must resit the exam). If a student resits the coursework element of a module and there was more than 1 coursework assignment for that module, then the student would be required to resit all coursework assignments in which they achieved a mark below 40%. Marks for elements of a module not being re-sat will be carried forward.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
Candidates' final degree classification will be determined on the basis of performance in degree level Module Assessments in Parts B and C in accordance with the scheme set out in Regulation XX. The average percentage marks for each Part will be combined in the ratio Part B 30% : Part C 70% to determine the final Programme Mark.
Programme Specification
BS BSc (Hons) Economics with Politics (2014 entry)
Academic Year: 2017/18
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at 天堂视频 (available soon)
- What makes 天堂视频 programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | 天堂视频 |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | School of Business and Economics |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | |
Final award | BSc / BSc+DPS / BSc+DIntS |
Programme title | Economics with Politics |
Programme code | ECUB10 |
Length of programme | The duration of the programme is either six semesters or six semesters plus one academic year if candidates select one of the available part I streams. The third academic year (Part I) occurs between Part B and Part C. Permission to transfer to the eight semester programme will be at the discretion of the Programme Director (Economics). See Programme Structure for further details of eight semester streams. |
UCAS code | L1L2 Economics with Politics (3 years) L1LF Economics with Politics (4 years sandwich) |
Admissions criteria | http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/undergraduate/courses/departments/business-economics/economicswithpolitics/ |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- Know and understand the core of economic theory and applied economics, with a particular application to the world of business and finance.
- Know and understand the behaviour of agents in financial markets, and the behaviour of firms and consumers in the national and international economy
- Discuss in an informed manner the major policy directions and regulations to implement economic policy
- Know and understand the nature of incentives in economic decision making by agents in the economy
- Evaluate the outcomes of market and policy changes in all spheres of the economy, with special emphasis on business and finance
To provide students with the opportunity to study a broad curriculum in both Economics and Politics.
- To provide training in the principles of economics and their application.
- To stimulate students intellectually through the study of economics and to lead them to appreciate its application to a range of problems and its relevance in a variety of contexts.
- To provide a firm foundation of knowledge about the workings of the economy and to develop the relevant skills for the constructive use of that knowledge in a range of settings.
- To develop in students the ability to apply the knowledge and skills they have acquired to the solution of theoretical and applied problems in economics.
- To equip students with appropriate tools of analysis to tackle issues and problems of economic policy.
- To develop in students, through the study of economics, a range of transferable skills that will be of value in employment and self-employment.
- To provide students with analytical skills and an ability to develop simplifying frameworks for studying the real world.
- To develop in students the ability to appreciate what would be an appropriate level of abstraction for a range of economic issues.
- To provide students with the knowledge and skill base, from which they can proceed to further studies in economics, related areas or in multi-disciplinary areas that involve economics.
- To generate in students an appreciation of the economic dimension of wider social and political issues.
- To provide specialised training in the aspects of economics relevant to industry, commerce and financial services.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
- QAA Subject Benchmark Statements: Economics.
- Framework for Higher Education Qualifications.
- International links with a network of eleven European Universities within the Erasmus exchange programme.
- University Learning and Teaching Strategy.
- Departmental learning and teaching policies.
- Links, both formal and informal, with external examiners.
- Staff research specialisms and professional involvement in the discipline.
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding of:
K1. A coherent core of economic principles. The understanding of these might be verbal, graphical or mathematical.
These principles cover the microeconomic issues of decision and choice, the production and exchange of goods, the interdependency of markets, and economic welfare. They also include macroeconomic issues, such as employment, national income, the balance of payments and the distribution of income, inflation, growth and business cycles, money and finance. The understanding should extend to economic policy at both microeconomic and macroeconomic levels. In all these, students should show understanding of analytical methods and model-based argument and appreciate the existence of different methodological approaches.
K2. Relevant quantitative methods and computing techniques. These cover mathematical and statistical methods, including econometrics. Students will have exposure to the use of such techniques on actual economic, financial or social data. A knowledge and appreciation of economic data, both quantitative and qualitative. Students should also have some knowledge of the appropriate methods that the economist might use to structure and analyse such data.
K3. The applications of economics. Students should have the ability to apply a core of economic principles and reasoning to a variety of applied topics. They should also be aware of the economic principles that can be used to design, guide and interpret commercial, economic and social policy. As part of this, they should have the ability to discuss and analyse government policy and to assess the performance of the UK and other economies.
The above implies that the attainments of students should have:
- Ability to demonstrate specialised knowledge relating to Politics.
- Ability to evaluate the interaction between the principal institutions of government in Britain
- Ability to analyse how political power is exercised through policy-making and administrative bodies
- Ability to develop a critical awareness of the many arguments for reform presented in this area
- Ability to apply core economic theory and economic reasoning to applied topics.
- Ability to identify and evaluate the ideologies and aims of major political parties and groups.
- Ability to evaluate the relationship between ideology and organisation.
- Ability to appraise the factors motivating individual and collective political behaviour in contemporary Britain.
- Ability to relate differences in policy recommendations to differences in the theoretical and empirical features of the economic analyses which underlie such recommendations.
- Ability to discuss and analyse government policy and to assess the performance of the UK and other economies.
- Understanding of verbal, graphical, mathematical and econometric representation of economic ideas and analysis, including the relationship between them.
- Understanding of relevant mathematical and statistical techniques.
- Understanding of analytical methods, both theory- and model-based.
- Appreciation of the history and development of economic ideas and the differing methods of analysis that have been and are used by economists.
- Understanding of the appropriate techniques to enable manipulation, treatment and interpretation of the relevant statistical data.
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
C1. Abstraction. From the study of economic principles and models, students see how one can abstract the essential features of complex systems and provide a useable framework for evaluation and assessment of the effects of policy or other exogenous events. Through this, the typical student will acquire proficiency in how to simplify while still retaining relevance. This is an approach that they can then apply in other contexts, thereby becoming more effective problem-solvers and decision-makers.
C2. Analysis, deduction and induction. Economic reasoning is highly deductive, and logical analysis is applied to assumption-based models. However, inductive reasoning is also important. The typical student will have been exposed to some or all of these and be able to use some of them. Such skills also enhance their problem-solving and decision-making ability.
C3. Quantification and design. Data, and their effective organization, presentation and analysis, are important in economics. The typical student will have some familiarity with the principal sources of economic information and data relevant to industry, commerce and government, and have had practice in organising it and presenting it informatively. This skill is important at all stages in the decision-making process.
C4. Framing. Through the study of economics, a student should learn how to decide what should be taken as given or fixed for the purposes of setting up and solving a problem, i.e. what the important 'parameters' are in constraining the solution to the problem. Learning to think about how and why these parameters might change encourages a student to place the economic problem in its broader social and political context. This `framing' skill is important in determining the decision-maker's ability to implement the solutions to problems.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
P1. Construct economic models using verbal, diagrammatic, mathematical, statistical and econometric techniques and reasoning.
P2. Access, search for and evaluate relevant data sources for validation of economic models
P3. Apply and use specialised software including spreadsheets for the analysis of economic models and financial calculations.
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate the key skills of:
T1. Analysis and decision making.
T2. Communication, both written and verbal.
T3. Numeracy and computation.
T4. IT, information handling and retrieval, including library skills.
T5. Independent study and group work.
T6. Time management.
T7. Problem solving.
4. Programme structure
Students must have a total modular weighting of 120 credits per year. This must include the compulsory modules. The remaining optional modules may be chosen to give a 60:60 split over the two semesters, or alternatively, 50:70 or 70:50. Except in exceptional cases, the University allows only a maximum of 80 credits to be chosen from 20 weighted long-thin modules. These are modules that are studied continuously over both Semesters 1 and 2.
The prefixes on module codes represent the credit levels as follows:
A level 4; B level 5; C level 6.
Candidates following the Placement Stream are required to spend the third academic year undertaking professional training leading to the Diploma in Professional Studies, in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
Candidates following the Study Abroad Stream are required to spend the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution leading to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
Candidates following the Split Stream are required to spend six months of the third academic year undertaking professional training, and the other half of the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution. This leads to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
4.1 Part A – Economics with Politics Introductory Modules
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTER 1 and 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
ECA001 Principles of Macroeconomics | 20 |
ECA002 Principles of Microeconomics | 20 |
ECA003 Data Analysis | 20 |
ECA004 Quantitative Economics | 20 |
SEMESTER 1 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
EUA607 Introduction to Democratic Government | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
EUA614 Political Ideologies | 10 |
SEMESTER 1 OPTIONAL MODULES (CHOOSE ONE) | |
SSA001 Introduction to Sociology A | 10 |
SSA201 Introduction to Criminology and Social Policy A | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 OPTIONAL MODULES (CHOOSE ONE) | |
SSA002 Introduction to Sociology B | 10 |
SSA202 Introduction to Criminology and Social Policy B | 10 |
Compulsory and optional modules must be taken such that the total modular weight for the year is 120 credits divided equally over each Semester, or split 70:50 or 50:70 over the two Semesters. Please note: Optional modules are subject to availability and timetable permitting. |
2.2 Part B – Economics with Politics
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTER 1 and 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
ECB001 Intermediate Macroeconomics | 20 |
ECB002 Intermediate Microeconomics | 20 |
SEMESTER 1 POLITICS MODULES | |
EUB630 British Politics | 20 |
SEMESTER 2 POLITICS MODULES | |
EUB604 The Comparative European Politics | 20 |
ECONOMICS OPTIONAL MODULES - A total weighting of 40 must be chosen | |
SEMESTER 1 and 2 OPTIONAL MODULES | |
ECB004 Introduction to Finance | 20 |
ECB005 International Economic Relations | 20 |
ECB015 Economics of the Financial System | 20 |
ECB016 History of Economic Thought | 20 |
ECB030 Energy and the Environment | 20 |
SEMESTER 1 OPTIONAL MODULE | |
ECB136 Transport Economics | 20 |
SEMESTER 2 OPTIONAL MODULE | |
ECB035 Economics of the Welfare State | 20 |
Compulsory and optional modules must be taken such that the total modular weight for the year is 120 credits divided equally over each Semester, or split 70:50 or 50:70 over the two Semesters. Please note: Optional modules are subject to availability and timetable permitting. |
4.3 Part I : Optional (8 semester programme only)
Candidates pursue one of the following streams:
The duration of the programme is either six semesters or six semesters plus one academic year if candidates select one of the following three streams:
Candidates following the Placement Stream are required to spend the third academic year undertaking professional training leading to the Diploma in Professional Studies, in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
Candidates following the Study Abroad Stream are required to spend the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution leading to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
Candidates following the Split Stream are required to spend six months of the third academic year undertaking professional training, and the other half of the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution. This leads to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
The third academic year (Part I) occurs between Part B and Part C. Permission to transfer to the eight semester programme will be at the discretion of the Associate Dean (Teaching) for the School.
4.4 Part C – Economics with Politics
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTER 2 COMPULSORY MODULE |
|
ECC142 Research and Communication Skills for Economists | 20 |
SEMESTER 1 POLITICS MODULES - Choose ONE plus FIRST and SECOND Reserve | |
EUC602 Nationalism - Blood, Soil and War | 20 |
EUC604 State, Violence and Terrorism | 20 |
EUC628 The Asia Pacific in Global Politics | 20 |
EUC657 The Civil Rights Movement in the US | 20 |
EUC660 Contemporary Political Philosophy | 20 |
EUC666 Gender and Politics | 20 |
EUC677 Britain and the European Union | 20 |
SEMESTER 2 POLITICS MODULES - Choose ONE plus FIRST and SECOND Reserve | |
EUC609 Spanish-Latin American Relations | 20 |
EUC621 Germany in Europe | 20 |
EUC665 Post-War British Politics | 20 |
EUC677 Britain and the European Union | 20 |
EUC678 No Gods! No Masters! Anarchism Past and Present | 20 |
EUC680 The Populist Challenge to Western Democracies | 20 |
ECONOMICS OPTIONAL MODULES - A TOTAL WEIGHTING OF 60 MUST BE CHOSEN | |
SEMESTER 1 OPTIONAL MODULES | |
ECC001 Developments in Microeconomics | 20 |
ECC003 International Money and Finance | 20 |
ECC004 Financial Economics and Asset Pricing | 20 |
ECC031 International Trade | 20 |
ECC101 Developments in Macroeconomics | 20 |
SEMESTER 1 AND 2 OPTIONAL MODULE | |
ECC011 Introduction to Econometrics | 20 |
SEMESTER 2 OPTIONAL MODULES | |
ECC005 Industrial Economics | 20 |
ECC035 Central Banking and Financial Crises | 20 |
ECC119 Development Economics | 20 |
ECC141 Corporate Finance and Derivatives | 20 |
Compulsory and optional modules must be taken such that the total modular weight for the year is 120 credits divided equally over each Semester, or split 70:50 or 50:70 over the two Semesters. Please note: Optional modules are subject to availability and timetable permitting. |
The School may offer new modules to be provided during the academic year.
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
5.1 Progression Criteria
In order to progress from Part A to Part B and from Part B to C and to be eligible for the award of an Honours degree, candidates must satisfy the minimum credit requirements set out in Regulation XX.
A Diploma in Professional Studies will be awarded to students who have satisfactorily completed the programme of study required for Part I.
5.2 Reassessment
Candidates must accumulate at least 60 credits in a Part of a Programme in order to be eligible for reassessment in the relevant Part during the University’s Special Assessment Period.
If a student registers to resit a module, they will be required to resit all failed components of that module (ie if their coursework mark was less than 40% they must resit the coursework and if their exam mark was less than 40% they must resit the exam). If a student resits the coursework element of a module and there was more than 1 coursework assignment for that module, then the student would be required to resit all coursework assignments in which they achieved a mark below 40%. Marks for elements of a module not being re-sat will be carried forward.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
Candidates' final degree classification will be determined on the basis of performance in degree level Module Assessments in Parts B and C in accordance with the scheme set out in Regulation XX. The average percentage marks for each Part will be combined in the ratio Part B 30% : Part C 70% to determine the final Programme Mark.
Programme Specification
BS BSc (Hons) Economics with Politics (2013 entry)
Academic Year: 2017/18
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at 天堂视频 (available soon)
- What makes 天堂视频 programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | 天堂视频 |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | School of Business and Economics |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | |
Final award | BSc / BSc+DPS / BSc+DIntS |
Programme title | Economics with Politics |
Programme code | ECUB10 |
Length of programme | The duration of the programme is either six semesters or six semesters plus one academic year if candidates select one of the available part I streams. The third academic year (Part I) occurs between Part B and Part C. Permission to transfer to the eight semester programme will be at the discretion of the Programme Director (Economics). See Programme Structure for further details of eight semester streams. |
UCAS code | L1M1 |
Admissions criteria | http://www.lboro.ac.uk/study/undergraduate/courses/departments/business-economics/economicswithpolitics/ |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
- Know and understand the core of economic theory and applied economics, with a particular application to the world of business and finance.
- Know and understand the behaviour of agents in financial markets, and the behaviour of firms and consumers in the national and international economy
- Discuss in an informed manner the major policy directions and regulations to implement economic policy
- Know and understand the nature of incentives in economic decision making by agents in the economy
- Evaluate the outcomes of market and policy changes in all spheres of the economy, with special emphasis on business and finance
To provide students with the opportunity to study a broad curriculum in both Economics and Politics.
- To provide training in the principles of economics and their application.
- To stimulate students intellectually through the study of economics and to lead them to appreciate its application to a range of problems and its relevance in a variety of contexts.
- To provide a firm foundation of knowledge about the workings of the economy and to develop the relevant skills for the constructive use of that knowledge in a range of settings.
- To develop in students the ability to apply the knowledge and skills they have acquired to the solution of theoretical and applied problems in economics.
- To equip students with appropriate tools of analysis to tackle issues and problems of economic policy.
- To develop in students, through the study of economics, a range of transferable skills that will be of value in employment and self-employment.
- To provide students with analytical skills and an ability to develop simplifying frameworks for studying the real world.
- To develop in students the ability to appreciate what would be an appropriate level of abstraction for a range of economic issues.
- To provide students with the knowledge and skill base, from which they can proceed to further studies in economics, related areas or in multi-disciplinary areas that involve economics.
- To generate in students an appreciation of the economic dimension of wider social and political issues.
- To provide specialised training in the aspects of economics relevant to industry, commerce and financial services.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
- QAA Subject Benchmark Statements: Economics.
- Framework for Higher Education Qualifications.
- International links with a network of eleven European Universities within the Erasmus exchange programme.
- University Learning and Teaching Strategy.
- Departmental learning and teaching policies.
- Links, both formal and informal, with external examiners.
- Staff research specialisms and professional involvement in the discipline.
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding of:
K1. A coherent core of economic principles. The understanding of these might be verbal, graphical or mathematical.
These principles cover the microeconomic issues of decision and choice, the production and exchange of goods, the interdependency of markets, and economic welfare. They also include macroeconomic issues, such as employment, national income, the balance of payments and the distribution of income, inflation, growth and business cycles, money and finance. The understanding should extend to economic policy at both microeconomic and macroeconomic levels. In all these, students should show understanding of analytical methods and model-based argument and appreciate the existence of different methodological approaches.
K2. Relevant quantitative methods and computing techniques. These cover mathematical and statistical methods, including econometrics. Students will have exposure to the use of such techniques on actual economic, financial or social data. A knowledge and appreciation of economic data, both quantitative and qualitative. Students should also have some knowledge of the appropriate methods that the economist might use to structure and analyse such data.
K3. The applications of economics. Students should have the ability to apply a core of economic principles and reasoning to a variety of applied topics. They should also be aware of the economic principles that can be used to design, guide and interpret commercial, economic and social policy. As part of this, they should have the ability to discuss and analyse government policy and to assess the performance of the UK and other economies.
The above implies that the attainments of students should have:
- Ability to demonstrate specialised knowledge relating to Politics.
- Ability to evaluate the interaction between the principal institutions of government in Britain
- Ability to analyse how political power is exercised through policy-making and administrative bodies
- Ability to develop a critical awareness of the many arguments for reform presented in this area
- Ability to apply core economic theory and economic reasoning to applied topics.
- Ability to identify and evaluate the ideologies and aims of major political parties and groups.
- Ability to evaluate the relationship between ideology and organisation.
- Ability to appraise the factors motivating individual and collective political behaviour in contemporary Britain.
- Ability to relate differences in policy recommendations to differences in the theoretical and empirical features of the economic analyses which underlie such recommendations.
- Ability to discuss and analyse government policy and to assess the performance of the UK and other economies.
- Understanding of verbal, graphical, mathematical and econometric representation of economic ideas and analysis, including the relationship between them.
- Understanding of relevant mathematical and statistical techniques.
- Understanding of analytical methods, both theory- and model-based.
- Appreciation of the history and development of economic ideas and the differing methods of analysis that have been and are used by economists.
- Understanding of the appropriate techniques to enable manipulation, treatment and interpretation of the relevant statistical data.
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
C1. Abstraction. From the study of economic principles and models, students see how one can abstract the essential features of complex systems and provide a useable framework for evaluation and assessment of the effects of policy or other exogenous events. Through this, the typical student will acquire proficiency in how to simplify while still retaining relevance. This is an approach that they can then apply in other contexts, thereby becoming more effective problem-solvers and decision-makers.
C2. Analysis, deduction and induction. Economic reasoning is highly deductive, and logical analysis is applied to assumption-based models. However, inductive reasoning is also important. The typical student will have been exposed to some or all of these and be able to use some of them. Such skills also enhance their problem-solving and decision-making ability.
C3. Quantification and design. Data, and their effective organization, presentation and analysis, are important in economics. The typical student will have some familiarity with the principal sources of economic information and data relevant to industry, commerce and government, and have had practice in organising it and presenting it informatively. This skill is important at all stages in the decision-making process.
C4. Framing. Through the study of economics, a student should learn how to decide what should be taken as given or fixed for the purposes of setting up and solving a problem, i.e. what the important 'parameters' are in constraining the solution to the problem. Learning to think about how and why these parameters might change encourages a student to place the economic problem in its broader social and political context. This `framing' skill is important in determining the decision-maker's ability to implement the solutions to problems.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to:
P1. Construct economic models using verbal, diagrammatic, mathematical, statistical and econometric techniques and reasoning.
P2. Access, search for and evaluate relevant data sources for validation of economic models
P3. Apply and use specialised software including spreadsheets for the analysis of economic models and financial calculations.
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of this programme, students should be able to demonstrate the key skills of:
T1. Analysis and decision making.
T2. Communication, both written and verbal.
T3. Numeracy and computation.
T4. IT, information handling and retrieval, including library skills.
T5. Independent study and group work.
T6. Time management.
T7. Problem solving.
4. Programme structure
Students must have a total modular weighting of 120 credits per year. This must include the compulsory modules. The remaining optional modules may be chosen to give a 60:60 split over the two semesters, or alternatively, 50:70 or 70:50. Except in exceptional cases, the University allows only a maximum of 80 credits to be chosen from 20 weighted long-thin modules. These are modules that are studied continuously over both Semesters 1 and 2.
The prefixes on module codes represent the credit levels as follows:
A level 4; B level 5; C level 6.
Candidates following the Placement Stream are required to spend the third academic year undertaking professional training leading to the Diploma in Professional Studies, in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
Candidates following the Study Abroad Stream are required to spend the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution leading to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
Candidates following the Split Stream are required to spend six months of the third academic year undertaking professional training, and the other half of the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution. This leads to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
4.1 Part A – Economics with Politics Introductory Modules
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTER 1 and 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
ECA001 Principles of Macroeconomics | 20 |
ECA002 Principles of Microeconomics | 20 |
ECA003 Data Analysis | 20 |
ECA004 Quantitative Economics | 20 |
SEMESTER 1 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
EUA607 Introduction to Democratic Government | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
EUA614 Political Ideologies | 10 |
SEMESTER 1 OPTIONAL MODULES (CHOOSE ONE) | |
SSA001 Introduction to Sociology A | 10 |
SSA201 Introduction to Criminology and Social Policy A | 10 |
SEMESTER 2 OPTIONAL MODULES (CHOOSE ONE) | |
SSA002 Introduction to Sociology B | 10 |
SSA202 Introduction to Criminology and Social Policy B | 10 |
Compulsory and optional modules must be taken such that the total modular weight for the year is 120 credits divided equally over each Semester, or split 70:50 or 50:70 over the two Semesters. Please note: Optional modules are subject to availability and timetable permitting. |
2.2 Part B – Economics with Politics
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTER 1 and 2 COMPULSORY MODULES | |
ECB001 Intermediate Macroeconomics | 20 |
ECB002 Intermediate Microeconomics | 20 |
SEMESTER 1 POLITICS MODULES | |
EUB630 British Politics | 20 |
SEMESTER 2 POLITICS MODULES | |
EUB604 The Comparative European Politics | 20 |
ECONOMICS OPTIONAL MODULES - A total weighting of 40 must be chosen | |
SEMESTER 1 and 2 OPTIONAL MODULES | |
ECB004 Introduction to Finance | 20 |
ECB005 International Economic Relations | 20 |
ECB015 Economics of the Financial System | 20 |
ECB016 History of Economic Thought | 20 |
ECB030 Energy and the Environment | 20 |
SEMESTER 1 OPTIONAL MODULE | |
ECB136 Transport Economics | 20 |
SEMESTER 2 OPTIONAL MODULE | |
ECB035 Economics of the Welfare State | 20 |
Compulsory and optional modules must be taken such that the total modular weight for the year is 120 credits divided equally over each Semester, or split 70:50 or 50:70 over the two Semesters. Please note: Optional modules are subject to availability and timetable permitting. |
4.3 Part I : Optional (8 semester programme only)
Candidates pursue one of the following streams:
The duration of the programme is either six semesters or six semesters plus one academic year if candidates select one of the following three streams:
Candidates following the Placement Stream are required to spend the third academic year undertaking professional training leading to the Diploma in Professional Studies, in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
Candidates following the Study Abroad Stream are required to spend the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution leading to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
Candidates following the Split Stream are required to spend six months of the third academic year undertaking professional training, and the other half of the third academic year studying at an approved academic institution. This leads to the Diploma in International Studies (DIntS) in accordance with Senate Regulation XI.
The third academic year (Part I) occurs between Part B and Part C. Permission to transfer to the eight semester programme will be at the discretion of the Associate Dean (Teaching) for the School.
4.4 Part C – Economics with Politics
MODULE TITLE | Modular Weight |
SEMESTER 2 COMPULSORY MODULE |
|
ECC142 Research and Communication Skills for Economists | 20 |
SEMESTER 1 POLITICS MODULES - Choose ONE plus FIRST and SECOND Reserve | |
EUC602 Nationalism - Blood, Soil and War | 20 |
EUC604 State, Violence and Terrorism | 20 |
EUC628 The Asia Pacific in Global Politics | 20 |
EUC657 The Civil Rights Movement in the US | 20 |
EUC660 Contemporary Political Philosophy | 20 |
EUC677 Britain and the European Union | 20 |
SEMESTER 2 POLITICS MODULES - Choose ONE plus FIRST and SECOND Reserve | |
EUC664 Politics and Religion | 20 |
EUC665 Post-War British Politics | 20 |
EUC666 Gender and Politics | 20 |
EUC674 Power, Violence and Human Suffering | 20 |
EUC679 1968 - World Revolution? | 20 |
ECONOMICS OPTIONAL MODULES - A TOTAL WEIGHTING OF 60 MUST BE CHOSEN | |
SEMESTER 1 OPTIONAL MODULES | |
ECC001 Developments in Microeconomics | 20 |
ECC003 International Money and Finance | 20 |
ECC004 Financial Economics and Asset Pricing | 20 |
ECC031 International Trade | 20 |
ECC101 Developments in Macroeconomics | 20 |
SEMESTER 1 AND 2 OPTIONAL MODULE | |
ECC011 Introduction to Econometrics | 20 |
SEMESTER 2 OPTIONAL MODULES | |
ECC005 Industrial Economics | 20 |
ECC035 Central Banking and Financial Crises | 20 |
ECC119 Development Economics | 20 |
ECC141 Corporate Finance and Derivatives | 20 |
Compulsory and optional modules must be taken such that the total modular weight for the year is 120 credits divided equally over each Semester, or split 70:50 or 50:70 over the two Semesters. Please note: Optional modules are subject to availability and timetable permitting. |
The School may offer new modules to be provided during the academic year.
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
5.1 Progression Criteria
In order to progress from Part A to Part B and from Part B to C and to be eligible for the award of an Honours degree, candidates must satisfy the minimum credit requirements set out in Regulation XX.
A Diploma in Professional Studies will be awarded to students who have satisfactorily completed the programme of study required for Part I.
5.2 Reassessment
Candidates must accumulate at least 60 credits in a Part of a Programme in order to be eligible for reassessment in the relevant Part during the University’s Special Assessment Period.
If a student registers to resit a module, they will be required to resit all failed components of that module (ie if their coursework mark was less than 40% they must resit the coursework and if their exam mark was less than 40% they must resit the exam). If a student resits the coursework element of a module and there was more than 1 coursework assignment for that module, then the student would be required to resit all coursework assignments in which they achieved a mark below 40%. Marks for elements of a module not being re-sat will be carried forward.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
Candidates' final degree classification will be determined on the basis of performance in degree level Module Assessments in Parts B and C in accordance with the scheme set out in Regulation XX. The average percentage marks for each Part will be combined in the ratio Part B 30% : Part C 70% to determine the final Programme Mark.
Programme Specification
BS BSc (Hons) Business Studies (Singapore) (Aug 2013, 2014, 2015, 2016 and 2017 entry)
Academic Year: 2017/18
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at 天堂视频 (available soon)
- What makes 天堂视频 programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | 天堂视频 |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | School of Business and Economics |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | |
Final award | BSc (Hons) |
Programme title | Business Studies |
Programme code | BSUB70 |
Length of programme | 3-year, part-time programme, with each year comprising 3 semesters. |
UCAS code | |
Admissions criteria | Most students on the programme have followed the Singaporean education system. Therefore, the minimum admission requirements for the programme are based on this and, more specifically, the pre-university diploma qualifications awarded by PSB Academy. Students will be considered for the programme if they have or exceed one of the following: a) PSB Academy Diploma (pre Oct 2013 Full Time or pre Jan 2014 Part Time) with average B grade AND work experience b) PSB Academy Advanced Diploma (pre Oct 2013 FT or pre Jan 2014 PT) with average B/C grade c) PSB Academy Diploma (post Oct 2013 FT or post Jan 2014 PT) with average B/C grade d) A diploma from a recognised local/overseas polytechnic or professional institution with average B/C grade. e) 3 GCE 'A' Levels (excluding General Studies) / 3 H2 passes with minimum aggregate of 10 points PLUS evidence of GCE Maths and English Grade B. Students with a PSB Academy Advanced Diploma (pre Oct 2013 FT or pre Jan 2014 PT) in Business Administration; Business Studies, Business Studies (Logistics) or Commerce or a PSB Academy Diploma (post Oct 2013 FT or post Jan 2014 PT) in Business Administration; Business Studies, Business Studies (Logistics) or Commerce who have achieved at least a B/C average, may be exempted from Part A studies and be awarded direct entry onto Part B. Students are recruited by PSB Academy. However, the Admissions Tutor at 天堂视频 School of Business & Economics and the Singapore Programme Director are responsible for the admissions policy and for making the final decision about entry to the programme. Applicants from outside the Singaporean education system and/or applicants with other education qualifications will be considered on a case-by-case basis. |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
- Produce high quality employable graduates with the knowledge, skills and understanding for an effective and valued career in a wide range of management situations;
- Develop knowledge, concepts and skills in the major academic disciplines of business and management and to develop the ability to integrate and apply them in a business context to provide a sound basis for practice, study and training in the graduates’ chosen profession or management specialism;
- Provide a relevant, practical and constantly updated programme through close links with many large organisations and through enabling students to apply their learning to their workplace on a continuous basis;
- Enable students to see ways in which theory can be applied in practice, both through taught content and through the students’ own work experience;
The BSc Business Studies programme is a part-time programme and does not incorporate a professional placement period as all students on the programme are in employment and studying part-time. This implies that one of the main priorities of the programme is to integrate the daily work experiences of the students into their learning environment while at the same time ensuring that students receive the theoretical and academic knowledge to underpin and understand their working environment and that they are in a position to implement their learning in an effective manner.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
- QAA: The Framework for Higher Education Qualifications
- 天堂视频 Learning and Teaching Strategy
- 天堂视频 Mission Statement
- School of Business and Economics Mission Statement and Statement of General Aims for Undergraduate Programmes
- 天堂视频 Academic Quality Procedures
- 天堂视频 Strategic Plan
- QAA Audit of Overseas Collaborative Arrangements
- Singapore Ministry of Education: Desired Outcomes of Education
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
On successful completion of this programme students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding in the following areas:
- Foundation disciplines of business and management, including economics, finance, marketing, human resources and statistics sufficient to enable a clear understanding of the central aspects of the main business and management functions;
- The economic, technological, financial, legal, cultural and political context within which business operates;
- Integration of concepts from the various business disciplines to comprehend business situations and develop appropriate analysis, responses and solutions in both a national and international context;
- The development of appropriate policies and strategies at corporate level within a dynamic (international) environment;
- The key communication and information technologies used in business and management;
- A variety of working environments and the process of adapting and implementing taught elements of the programme into live work-place situations.
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme students should be able to:
- Reason numerically and have the ability to interpret numerical information;
- Obtain, analyse and apply information from a variety of sources, including publicly available material;
- Use critical thinking, analysis and synthesis to evaluate and apply concepts and insights from business disciplines, including comprehension of complex scenarios;
- Effectively formulate and solve problems, both structured and unstructured, and take decisions using appropriate qualitative and quantitative skills, including the ability to identify and evaluate a range of analyses and solutions;
- Relate theory to practice.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme students will be expected to have acquired the following subject-specific practical skills:
- Conduct research effectively and efficiently using a range of sources of business-related materials including books, journals, trade and financial press, official statistics and the Internet;
- The ability to work together effectively, efficiently and co-operatively as a team member and, when appropriate, organise, guide and motivate other team members;
- Create, evaluate and/or assess a range of options in a business situation, applying ideas and knowledge from a variety of sources;
- Create, exploit and apply quantitative models to business problems and phenomena.
c. Key transferable skills:
On completion of the programme, students will be expected to have acquired the following general and transferable skills:
- Use of effective oral and written communication using a range of media, including business reports;
- Use of effective personal organisation including time management, self-direction, self-motivation, tenacity and pro-activeness;
- Use of interpersonal skills effectively, including communication, listening, influencing and conflict resolution;
- A positive attitude to change, with a desire for excellence and a visionary and positive approach to future developments;
- Use of numerical reasoning, interpret numerical information and apply appropriate mathematical and statistical techniques;
- Use of effective team-working skills;
- A sensitive awareness and clear understanding of how people work individually, in groups and within organisations;
4. Programme structure
4.1 Part A - Introductory Modules
COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 120)
Code
|
Title |
Modular Weight |
BSA650 |
Organisational Behaviour and Management |
20 |
BSA655 |
Economic Environment |
20 |
BSA661 |
Personal Effectiveness |
20 |
BSA665 |
Introduction to Marketing |
20 |
BSA670 |
An Introduction to Accounting for Management |
20 |
BSA675 |
Business Mathematics and Statistics |
20 |
4.2 Part B - Degree Modules
COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 120)
Code |
Title |
Modular Weight |
|
BSB650 |
Introduction to Human Resource Management |
20 |
|
BSB655 |
Business Information Systems |
20 |
|
BSB697 |
Corporate Finance |
20 |
|
BSB685 |
International Business |
20 |
|
BSB670 |
Market Development and Buyer Behaviour |
20 |
|
BSB675 |
Operations and Project Management |
20 |
|
4.3 Part C - Degree Modules
COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 80)
Code |
Title |
Modular Weight |
|
BSC653 |
Work Based Learning |
20 |
|
BSC665 |
Marketing Strategy and Planning |
20 |
|
BSC675 |
Small Business Issues and Planning |
20 |
|
BSC680 |
Strategic Management |
20 |
|
OPTION MODULES (Students to choose 2 from 3. Total modular weight 40)
Code |
Title |
Modular Weight |
|
BSC660 |
Information Management and Strategy |
20 |
|
BSC670 |
Current Issues in Managing People at Work |
20 |
|
BSC685 |
Resourcing, Recruitment and Selection |
20 |
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
In order to progress from Part A to Part B and from Part B to C and to be eligible for the award of an Honours degree, candidates must satisfy the minimum credit requirements set out in Regulation XX.
For the purposes of interpreting regulation XX sections on “Arrangements for Re-assessment”, candidates will be considered to be registered on a full-time programme rather than a part-time programme.
Provision will be made in accordance with Regulation XX for candidates who have the right of re-assessment in any Part of the programme to undergo re-assessment in the Special Assessment period or when the assessment next takes place. Notwithstanding Regulation XX paragraph 47, unless otherwise stated by the Programme Board, part-time students may choose whether to take re-assessments either in the SAP, over the academic year, or where more than one re-assessment is to be taken, a combination of both.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
Candidates’ final degree classification will be determined on the basis of their performance in degree level Module Assessments in Parts B and C, in accordance with the scheme set out in regulation XX. The average percentage marks for each Part will be combined in the ratio Part B 25: Part C 75, to determine the final overall percentage mark for the Programme (the Programme Mark).
Programme Specification
BS BSc (Hons) Business Studies with Banking and Finance (Singapore) (August 2013, 2014, 2015, 2016 and 2017 entry)
Academic Year: 2017/18
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at 天堂视频 (available soon)
- What makes 天堂视频 programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | 天堂视频 |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | School of Business and Economics |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | |
Final award | BSc (Hons) |
Programme title | Business Studies with Banking and Finance |
Programme code | BSUB75 |
Length of programme | The duration of the programme is three years. |
UCAS code | |
Admissions criteria | Most students on the programme have followed the Singaporean education system. Therefore, the minimum admission requirements for the programme are based on this and, more specifically, the pre-university diploma qualifications awarded by PSB Academy. Students will be considered for the programme if they have or exceed one of the following: a) PSB Academy Diploma (pre Oct 2013 Full Time or pre Jan 2014 Part Time) with average B grade AND work experience b) PSB Academy Advanced Diploma (pre Oct 2013 FT or pre Jan 2014 PT) with average B/C grade c) PSB Academy Diploma (post Oct 2013 FT or post Jan 2014 PT) with average B/C grade d) A diploma from a recognised local/overseas polytechnic or professional institution with average B/C grade. e) 3 GCE 'A' Levels (excluding General Studies) / 3 H2 passes with minimum aggregate of 10 points PLUS evidence of GCE Maths and English Grade B. Students with a PSB Academy Advanced Diploma (pre Oct 2013 FT or pre Jan 2014 PT) in Business Administration; Business Studies, Business Studies (Logistics) or Commerce or a PSB Academy Diploma (post Oct 2013 FT or post Jan 2014 PT) in Business Administration; Business Studies, Business Studies (Logistics) or Commerce who have achieved at least a B/C average, may be exempted from Part A studies and be awarded direct entry onto Part B. Students are recruited by PSB Academy. However, the Admissions Tutor at 天堂视频 School of Business & Economics and the Singapore Programme Director are responsible for the admissions policy and for making the final decision about entry to the programme. Applicants from outside the Singaporean education system and/or applicants with other education qualifications will be considered on a case-by-case basis. |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
- Provide a relevant, practical and constantly updated programme which allows students to focus on particular functions within the business environment, namely banking and finance, and to place these functions and their operations in context within the wider business and management field;
- Provide a relevant and practical programme through close links with many large organisations and through enabling students to apply their learning to their workplace on a continuous basis;
- Enable students to see ways in which theory can be applied in practice, both through taught content and through the students’ own work experience, particularly in the areas of banking and finance;
- Develop teaching and learning in response to the needs of the business community;
- Enhance the employability of our graduates through building on their prior studies and their experience in commerce and industry.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
- The benchmark statement for General Business and Management (B&M)
- The benchmark statement for Finance (F)
- QAA: The Framework for Higher Education Qualifications
- 天堂视频 Learning and Teaching Strategy
- 天堂视频 Mission Statement
- School of Business and Economics Mission Statement and Statement of General Aims for
- Undergraduate Programmes
- 天堂视频 Academic Quality Procedures
- 天堂视频 Strategic Plan
- QAA Audit of Overseas Collaborative Arrangements
- Singapore Ministry of Education: Desired Outcomes of Education
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
On successful completion of this programme students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding in the following areas:
- Foundation disciplines of business and management, including economics, finance, marketing and statistics sufficient to enable a clear understanding of the central aspects of the main business and management functions (B&M);
- The economic, technological, financial, legal, cultural and political context within which banks and other businesses operate, including the institutional framework necessary for understanding the role, operation and markets of financial institutions (B&M, F);
- Integration of concepts from the various business disciplines to comprehend business situations and develop appropriate analysis, responses and solutions in both a national and international context (B&M);
- The major theoretical tools and theories of finance and their relevance and application to practical problems (F);
- The development of appropriate policies and strategies at corporate level for banks and their clients within a dynamic (international) environment (B&M amended);
- The key communication and information technologies used in business and management (B&M).
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme students should be able to:
- Reason numerically and have the ability to interpret numerical information;
- Analyse and apply information from a variety of sources, including publicly available material;
- Use critical thinking, analysis and synthesis to evaluate and apply concepts and insights from business disciplines, including comprehension of complex scenarios;
- Effectively formulate and solve problems, both structured and unstructured, and take decisions using appropriate qualitative and quantitative skills, including the ability to identify and evaluate a range of analyses and solutions;
- Relate theory to practice in banking, finance and wider business environments.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme students should have achieved the following subject-specific practical skills:
- Create, exploit and apply quantitative and economic modelling techniques to business and finance problems and phenomena;
- Analyse and draw reasoned conclusions concerning structured and unstructured problems in the context of business, banking and finance (F amended)
- Apply understanding to a variety of working environments and adapt and implement taught elements of the programme into live work-place situations (B&M).
c. Key transferable skills:
On completion of the programme, students will be expected to have acquired the following general and transferable skills:
- Use of effective personal organisation including time management, self-direction, self-motivation, tenacity and pro-activeness;
- Use of effective oral and written communication using a range of media, including business reports;
- Use of information and communication technologies in a business context including word processing, storage and manipulation of data, generation of presentations, use of Internet and e-mail using appropriate software;
- Conduct research effectively and efficiently using a range of sources of business-related materials including books, journals, trade and financial press, official statistics and the Internet;
- Work effectively, efficiently and co-operatively as a team member and, when appropriate, organise, guide, motivate and resolve conflict with other team members;
- Use numerical reasoning, interpret numerical information and apply appropriate mathematical and statistical techniques;
- Demonstrate a clear understanding of how people work individually, in groups and within organisations.
4. Programme structure
4.1 Part A - Introductory Modules
COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 120)
Code
|
Title |
Modular Weight |
BSA650 |
Organisational Behaviour and Management |
20 |
BSA655 |
Economic Environment |
20 |
BSA661 |
Personal Effectiveness |
20 |
BSA665 |
Introduction to Marketing |
20 |
BSA670 |
An Introduction to Accounting for Management |
20 |
BSA675 |
Business Mathematics and Statistics |
20 |
4.2 Part B - Degree Modules
COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 100)
Code |
Title |
Modular Weight |
|
BSB655 |
Business Information Systems |
20 |
|
BSB697 |
Corporate Finance |
20 |
|
BSB685 |
International Business |
20 |
|
BSB690 |
The Business of Banking |
20 |
|
BSB695 |
Financial Systems, Markets and Institutions |
20 |
|
OPTION MODULES (Students to choose one from two). Total modular weight 20
Code |
Title |
Modular Weight |
|
BSB650 |
Introduction to Human Resource Management |
20 |
|
BSB670 |
Market Development and Buyer Behaviour |
20 |
|
4.3 Part C - Degree Modules
COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 120)
Code |
Title |
Modular Weight |
|
BSC653 |
Work Based Learning |
20 |
|
BSC660 |
Information Management and Strategy |
20 |
|
BSC675 |
Small Business Issues and Planning |
20 |
|
BSC680 |
Strategic Management |
20 |
|
BSC697 |
International Financial Management |
20 |
|
BSC695 |
International Banking |
20 |
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
In order to progress from Part A to Part B and from Part B to C and to be eligible for the award of an Honours degree, candidates must satisfy the minimum credit requirements set out in Regulation XX.
For the purposes of interpreting regulation XX sections on “Arrangements for Re-assessment”, candidates will be considered to be registered on a full-time programme rather than a part-time programme.
Provision will be made in accordance with Regulation XX for candidates who have the right of re-assessment in any Part of the programme to undergo re-assessment in the Special Assessment period or when the assessment next takes place. Notwithstanding Regulation XX paragraph 47, unless otherwise stated by the Programme Board, part-time students may choose whether to take re-assessments either in the SAP, over the academic year, or where more than one re-assessment is to be taken, a combination of both.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
Candidates’ final degree classification will be determined on the basis of their performance in degree level Module Assessments in Parts B and C, in accordance with the scheme set out in regulation XX. The average percentage marks for each Part will be combined in the ratio Part B 25: Part C 75, to determine the final overall percentage mark for the Programme (the Programme Mark).
Programme Specification
BS BSc (Hons) Business Studies with HRM (Singapore) (August 2013, 2014, 2015, 2016 and 2017 entry)
Academic Year: 2017/18
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at 天堂视频 (available soon)
- What makes 天堂视频 programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | 天堂视频 |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | School of Business and Economics |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | |
Final award | BSc (Hons) |
Programme title | Business Studies with Human Resource Management |
Programme code | BSUB80 |
Length of programme | 3-year, part-time programme, with each year comprising 3 semesters. |
UCAS code | |
Admissions criteria | Most students on the programme have followed the Singaporean education system. Therefore, the minimum admission requirements for the programme are based on this and, more specifically, the pre-university diploma qualifications awarded by PSB Academy. Students will be considered for the programme if they have or exceed one of the following: a) PSB Academy Diploma (pre Oct 2013 Full Time or pre Jan 2014 Part Time) with average B grade AND work experience b) PSB Academy Advanced Diploma (pre Oct 2013 FT or pre Jan 2014 PT) with average B/C grade c) PSB Academy Diploma (post Oct 2013 FT or post Jan 2014 PT) with average B/C grade d) A diploma from a recognised local/overseas polytechnic or professional institution with average B/C grade. e) 3 GCE 'A' Levels (excluding General Studies) / 3 H2 passes with minimum aggregate of 10 points PLUS evidence of GCE Maths and English Grade B. Students with a PSB Academy Advanced Diploma (pre Oct 2013 FT or pre Jan 2014 PT) in Business Administration; Business Studies, Business Studies (Logistics) or Commerce or a PSB Academy Diploma (post Oct 2013 FT or post Jan 2014 PT) in Business Administration; Business Studies, Business Studies (Logistics) or Commerce who have achieved at least a B/C average, may be exempted from Part A studies and be awarded direct entry onto Part B. Students are recruited by PSB Academy. However, the Admissions Tutor at 天堂视频 School of Business & Economics and the Singapore Programme Director are responsible for the admissions policy and for making the final decision about entry to the programme. Applicants from outside the Singaporean education system and/or applicants with other education qualifications will be considered on a case-by-case basis. |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
- Produce high quality employable graduates with the knowledge, skills and understanding for an effective and valued career in management;
- In addition to the above, produce high quality students with the knowledge, skills and understanding required for effective Human Resource Management within an organisation;
- Develop knowledge, concepts and skills in the major academic disciplines of business and management and to develop the ability to integrate and apply them in a business context to provide a sound basis for practice, study and training in the graduates’ chosen profession or management specialism;
- Recognise the importance of integration of HRM activities with the wider business strategy;
- Provide a relevant, practical and constantly updated programme through close links with many large organisations and through enabling students to apply their learning to their workplace on a continuous basis;
- Enable students to see ways in which theory can be applied in practice, both through taught content and through the students’ own work experience;
The BSc Business Studies with HRM is a part-time programme and does not incorporate a professional placement period as all students on the programme are in employment and studying part-time. This implies that one of the main priorities of the programme is to integrate the daily work experiences of the students into their learning environment while at the same time ensuring that students receive the theoretical and academic knowledge to underpin and understand their working environment and that they are in a position to implement their learning in an effective manner.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
- QAA: The Framework for Higher Education Qualifications
- 天堂视频 Learning and Teaching Strategy
- 天堂视频 Mission Statement
- School of Business and Economics Mission Statement and Statement of General Aims for Undergraduate Programmes
- 天堂视频 Academic Quality Procedures
- 天堂视频 Strategic Plan
- QAA Audit of Overseas Collaborative Arrangements
- Singapore Ministry of Education: Desired Outcomes of Education
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
On successful completion of this programme students should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding in the following areas:
- Foundation disciplines of business and management, including economics, finance, marketing, HRM and statistics sufficient to enable a clear understanding of the central aspects of the main business and management functions;
- The economic, technological, financial, legal, cultural and political context within which business operates;
- Integration of concepts from the various business disciplines to comprehend business situations and develop appropriate analysis, responses and solutions in both a national and international context;
- The behaviour, management, development, selection and remuneration of human resources within organisations
- The development of appropriate policies and strategies at corporate level within a dynamic (international) environment;
- The key communication and information technologies used in business and management;
- A variety of working environments and the process of adapting and implementing taught elements of the programme into live work-place situations.
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme students should be able to:
- Understand and apply the concepts within the specialised field of human resource management;
- Reason numerically and have the ability to interpret numerical information;
- Obtain, analyse and apply information from a variety of sources, including publicly available material;
- Use critical thinking, analysis and synthesis to evaluate and apply concepts and insights from business disciplines, including comprehension of complex scenarios;
- Effectively formulate and solve problems, both structured and unstructured, and take decisions using appropriate qualitative and quantitative skills, including the ability to identify and evaluate a range of analyses and solutions;
- Relate theory to practice.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme students will be expected to have acquired the following subject-specific practical skills:
- Conduct research effectively and efficiently using a range of sources of business-related materials including books, journals, trade and financial press, official statistics and the Internet;
- The ability to work together effectively, efficiently and co-operatively as a team member and, when appropriate, organise, guide and motivate other team members;
- Create, exploit and apply quantitative models to business problems and phenomena;
- Create, evaluate and/or assess a range of options in an HRM context, applying ideas and knowledge from a variety of sources.
c. Key transferable skills:
On completion of the programme, students will be expected to have acquired the following general and transferable skills:
- Use of effective personal organisation including time management, self-direction, self-motivation, tenacity and pro-activeness;
- Use effective oral and written communication, using a range of media including business reports;
- Use of interpersonal skills effectively, including communication, listening, influencing and conflict resolution;
- A positive attitude to change, with a desire for excellence and a visionary and positive approach to future developments;
- Use of numerical reasoning, interpret numerical information and apply appropriate mathematical and statistical techniques;
- Use of effective team-working skills;
- A sensitive awareness and clear understanding of how people work individually, in groups and within organisations;
4. Programme structure
4.1 Part A - Introductory Modules
COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 120)
Code
|
Title |
Modular Weight |
BSA650 |
Organisational Behaviour and Management |
20 |
BSA655 |
Economic Environment |
20 |
BSA661 |
Personal Effectiveness |
20 |
BSA665 |
Introduction to Marketing |
20 |
BSA670 |
An Introduction to Accounting for Management |
20 |
BSA675 |
Business Mathematics and Statistics |
20 |
4.2 Part B - Degree Modules
COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 100)
Code |
Title |
Modular Weight |
|
BSB650 |
Introduction to Human Resource Management |
20 |
|
BSB697 |
Corporate Finance |
20 |
|
BSB685 |
International Business |
20 |
|
BSB670 |
Market Development and Buyer Behaviour |
20 |
|
BSB680 |
The Dynamics of Employment Relations |
20 |
|
OPTION MODULES (Students to choose 1 from 2. Total modular weight 20)
Code |
Title |
Modular Weight |
|
BSB655 |
Business Information Systems |
20 |
|
BSB675 |
Operations and Project Management |
20 |
|
4.3 Part C - Degree Modules
COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 120)
Code |
Title |
Modular Weight |
|
BSC653 |
Work Based Learning |
20 |
|
BSC670 |
Current Issues in Managing People at Work |
20 |
|
BSC675 |
Small Business Issues and Planning |
20 |
|
BSC680 |
Strategic Management |
20 |
|
BSC685 |
Resourcing, Recruitment and Selection |
20 |
|
BSC690 |
Human Resource Development |
20 |
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
In order to progress from Part A to Part B and from Part B to C and to be eligible for the award of an Honours degree, candidates must satisfy the minimum credit requirements set out in Regulation XX.
For the purposes of interpreting regulation XX sections on “Arrangements for Re-assessment”, candidates will be considered to be registered on a full-time programme rather than a part-time programme.
Provision will be made in accordance with Regulation XX for candidates who have the right of re-assessment in any Part of the programme to undergo re-assessment in the Special Assessment period or when the assessment next takes place. Notwithstanding Regulation XX paragraph 47, unless otherwise stated by the Programme Board, part-time students may choose whether to take re-assessments either in the SAP, over the academic year, or where more than one re-assessment is to be taken, a combination of both.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
Candidates’ final degree classification will be determined on the basis of their performance in degree level Module Assessments in Parts B and C, in accordance with the scheme set out in regulation XX. The average percentage marks for each Part will be combined in the ratio Part B 25: Part C 75, to determine the final overall percentage mark for the Programme (the Programme Mark).
Programme Specification
BS BSc (Hons) Automotive Dealership Management (2004 to 2017 entry)
Academic Year: 2017/18
This specification provides a concise summary of the main features of the programme and the learning outcomes that a typical student might reasonably be expected to achieve and demonstrate if full advantage is taken of the learning opportunities that are provided.
This specification applies to delivery of the programme in the Academic Year indicated above. Prospective students reviewing this information for a later year of study should be aware that these details are subject to change as outlined in our .
This specification should be read in conjunction with:
- Reg. XX (Undergraduate Awards) (see
- The teaching, learning and assessment strategies used at 天堂视频 (available soon)
- What makes 天堂视频 programmes and its graduates distinctive (available soon)
- Summary
- Programme aims
- Learning outcomes
- Programme structure
- Progression and weighting
Programme summary
Awarding body/institution | 天堂视频 |
Teaching institution (if different) | |
Owning school/department | School of Business and Economics |
Details of accreditation by a professional/statutory body | Institute of the Motor Industry Chartered Management Institute |
Final award | BSc |
Programme title | Automotive Dealership Management |
Programme code | BSUB91 |
Length of programme | The duration of the programme is a minimum of six semesters with a maximum of ten. |
UCAS code | |
Admissions criteria | Admissions criteria to the programme will normally be based on aspiring managers with at least 3 years automotive industry experience. Candidates entering based on this practical experience will be at least 21 years of age at the commencement of the programme and will need to satisfy the Academic Registrar that, with or without the use of written or oral examinations, they have prepared themselves to undertake a programme of study at undergraduate level and appear capable of sustaining such a programme successfully. Entrants without this practical experience will need to have obtained a minimum of two A’ levels. |
Date at which the programme specification was published |
1. Programme Aims
- develop individual skills and prepare participants for management career progression in the automotive retail sector, mainly through development of both their technical knowledge and skills, and their conceptual and analytical abilities;
- prepare participants for automotive retail management roles in which they will be expected to contribute towards the functional and strategic management of their organisations;
- provide participants with the opportunity to develop deep understanding in areas of particular interest by undertaking research and work-based projects;
- enable participants to see ways in which theory can be applied in practice to complex issues with the aim of improving business and management practice;
- enhance students’ career development in the automotive sector
- encourage participants to pursue personal development and lifelong learning skills and be self-motivating
- provide a relevant, practical and constantly updated programme through close links with the automotive industry.
2. Relevant subject benchmark statements and other external and internal reference points used to inform programme outcomes:
- The benchmark statement for Masters Awards Business and Management (MB&M)
- The Framework for Higher Education Qualifications
- Professional Accreditation by the Institute of the Motor Industry
3. Programme Learning Outcomes
3.1 Knowledge and Understanding
On successful completion of this programme participants should be able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding in the following areas:
- The impact of environmental forces on automotive sector organisations including ethical, economic, political, social and technological change issues;
- The development and operation of the sector specific markets for resources, goods and services including customer expectations, market orientation and the marketing mix;
- The concepts and processes in the production and marketing of automotive goods and services, and the management of resources and operations;
- The financing of the automotive dealer network involving the sources, uses and management of finance; use of accounting for managerial and financial reporting applications;
- The characteristics of the management role; the management and development of people within organisations; organisational behaviour, human resource management, change management;
- The development, management and exploitation of information systems and their impact on dealership operations;
- The use of relevant interpersonal communication technologies for application in business and management;
- The development of appropriate business policies and strategies within a changing context of the automotive sector to meet stakeholder interests;
- The uses and limitations of a range of research methods/techniques, both qualitative and quantitative and an understanding of their strengths and weaknesses for providing information and evaluating options in an uncertain organisational environment;
- The roles, responsibilities and requirements of different activities across the multifunctional areas of automotive dealerships
3.2 Skills and other attributes
a. Subject-specific cognitive skills:
On successful completion of this programme students should be able to:
- manage self and others; organise thoughts, analyse, synthesise and conduct critical appraisal;
- establish criteria for problem solving and decision making, use appropriate decision techniques including identifying, formulating and solving business problems;
- use of models of business situations and research skills;
- identify appropriate leadership styles for situations;
- recognise complex situations where choices involve consideration of ethical and organisational values;
- conduct research into business and management issues;
- learn through reflection on practice and experience.
b. Subject-specific practical skills:
On successful completion of this programme students should be able to:
- apply leadership and performance management selecting the appropriate style for situations;
- perform effectively within a team environment and recognise and utilise individuals' contributions in team processes including team selection, delegation, development and management;
- use effective oral and written communication, using a range of media including business reports;
- engage effectively in two-way communication including listening, negotiating and persuading or influencing others;
- create, identify and evaluate options; implement and review decisions;
- make effective use of information and communication technologies (ICT) in a business context;
- employ numerical and quantitative skills including performance management and financial analysis and qualitative research skills;
- conduct research effectively and efficiently using a range of sources of business-related materials including books, journals, trade and financial press, official statistics, the Internet and primary research;
c. Key transferable skills:
On successful completion of the programme students should be able to:
- create, identify and evaluate options; implement and review decisions;
- organise data and extract meaning from information and share knowledge;
- use communication and information technology appropriately in acquiring, analysing and communicating information;
- listen, negotiate and persuade or influence others;
- use effective oral and written communication; using a range of media including business reports;
- demonstrate effective performance within a team environment and recognise and utilise individuals' contributions in group processes; team selection, delegation, development and management;
- set targets, motivate and employ performance management techniques;
- interpret numerical information and use numerical reasoning;
- manage themselves and their time effectively, be self-aware, display sensitivity to diversity in people and different situations, and manage continued learning;
4. Programme structure
4.1 Part A - Introductory Modules
COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 120)
Code |
Title |
Modular Weight |
BSA600 |
Foundations of Management |
20 |
BSA605 |
Automotive Retail Environment |
10 |
BSA610 |
Operations Management 1 |
10 |
BSA621† |
Work-Based Assignment 1 : Automotive Retail Environment |
20 |
BSA622 |
Marketing 1 |
20 |
BSA630 |
Human Resource Management 1 |
20 |
BSA635† |
Work-Based Assignment 2 : Operations Management |
20 |
4.2 Part B - Degree Modules
COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 120)
Code |
Title |
Modular Weight |
BSB601 |
Accounting and Financial Management 1 |
20 |
BSB602 |
Accounting and Financial Management 2 |
10 |
BSB610 |
Operations Management 2 |
10 |
BSB621† |
Work-Based Assignment 3 : Marketing |
20 |
BSB622† |
Work-Based Assignment 4 : Human Resource Management |
20 |
BSB630 |
Marketing 2 |
20 |
BSB635 |
Human Resource Management 2 |
20 |
4.3 Part C - Degree Modules
COMPULSORY MODULES (total modular weight 120)
Code |
Title |
Modular Weight |
BSC621† |
Work-Based Assignments 5 : Accounting and Financial Management |
20 |
BSC622† |
Work-Based Assignments 6 : Strategic Dealership Management |
20 |
BSC640 |
Research Project Management |
20 |
BSC645 |
Strategic Dealership Management |
20 |
BSC650* |
Project |
40 |
* by Distance Learning
† by Partial Distance Learning (>50%)
5. Criteria for Progression and Degree Award
In order to progress from Part A to Part B and from Part B to C and to be eligible for the award of an Honours degree, candidates must not only satisfy the minimum credit requirements set out in Regulation XX but also:
- Candidates must accumulate at least 100 credits in Part A modules as well as achieving at least 30% in all modules taken in Part A;
- Candidates must accumulate at least 100 credits in Part B modules as well as achieving at least 30% in all modules taken in Part B;
- To qualify for the award of a degree, candidates must accumulate at lease 100 credits in Part C as well as achieving at least 30% in all modules taken in part C.
Provision will be made in accordance with Regulation XX for candidates who have the right of re-assessment in any Part of the programme to undergo re-assessment in the University’s special assessment period as appropriate.
6. Relative Weighting of Parts of the Programme for the purposes of Final Degree Classification
Candidates’ final degree classification will be determined on the basis of their performance in degree level Module Assessments in Parts B and C, in accordance with the scheme set out in Regulation XX. The average percentage marks for each Part will be combined in the ratio Part B 50: Part C 50, to determine the final overall percentage mark for the programme (the Programme Mark).